JP6782890B2 - Game table - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game table typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a rotating body game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

Conventionally, a game table provided with an image display means is known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-20302

However, there is room for improvement in the display by the image display means in the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table characterized by display by an image display means.

The above purpose is
The first image display means that can display an image display ,
A second image display means that can display an image display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means .
After the first wipe effect display is ended, there Ri if Show Hidden a a said hold display unit is started,
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, there Ri when the volume adjustment screen is initiated displayed in the first image display unit,
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means.
During at least a part of the period from the start of the display of the first wipe effect display to the end of the display, the display of the combination of decorative symbols indicating the deviation is displayed on the first image display means.
During the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display to the end of the display, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the second image display means.
Achieved by a game table characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game table characterized by display by an image display means.

It is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side). It is an external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 according to the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the display symbol on the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, and (b) is the stop display symbol of special figure 2. An example is shown, (c) shows an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main process of the main control part of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt process of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead processing in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. (B) to (e) are diagrams showing an example of a look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 and special figure 2 provided in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. is there. It is a figure which shows the hit / fail determination table for a normal drawing in the pachinko machine 100 according to the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the example of a symbol sorting and a hit operation. It is a figure which shows the example of the right / wrong judgment table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol sorting table for special figure 1 and the operation at the time of a big hit in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the operation at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub-control unit main processing, (b). Indicates the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows the flow of the image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric chulong opening effect executed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric Chulong opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric Chulong opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing in the 2nd sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub-control unit main processing, (b). Indicates the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows the example of the lottery table of the look-ahead notice used in the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the lottery table of the notice at the time of variable disclosure (after a big hit determination). It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which looked at the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 by 2nd Embodiment of this invention from the front. It is a figure explaining the movable body 1002 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure (the 1) explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2 is a diagram (No. 2) for explaining a game effect on the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the effect pattern of the game effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the connection unit of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 1-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-5 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-6 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-7 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5-4 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-2 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6-3 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 9 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 3 to 5 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 6 and 7 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 8 and 9 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the hold icon in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 in the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 10 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 11 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 12 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 13 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 14 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 15 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 21 and 22 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 23 and 24 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 25 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 26 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 27 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 28 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 29 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 30 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 31 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 32 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 33 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 34 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 35-37 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 38, 39 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 40, 41 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 42 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 43, 44 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 45, 46 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 47 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 48-50 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 51 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 52, 53 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 54, 55 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 56, 57 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 58, 59 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 60 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 61, 62 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 63, 64 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 65, 66 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 67, 68 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 69 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 70 of the 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 71, 72 of 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the kind of hold effect in the pachinko machine 100 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 1 and 2 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 3-7 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 8 and 9 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 10 and 11 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 12 and 13 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 14 and 15 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 16 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of Example 16 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 17 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game effect with the pachinko machine 100 by the modification of Example 17 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 18 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 19 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 20 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 21 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 22 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 23 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 24 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 25 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 26 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 27 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 28 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 29 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 30 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 31 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 32, 33 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 34, 35 of the 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 6 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 7 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the game production with the pachinko machine 100 by Example 8 of the 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game table by a modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile phone 4000 which has the storage part which stores the electronic data which realizes this invention. (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and (d) is a home television provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, the game console (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine and a rotating game machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface thereof.

The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertically rectangular shape for fixing to an installation place (island facility or the like) provided in a game machine installation shop. The main body 104 is called an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112 to serve as a base body of a vertically rectangular gaming machine. Further, the main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space portion 114 inside. Further, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, via a hinge portion 112 so as to have a lock function and can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. The game area 124 is divided between the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, when the front frame door 106 is opened, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) for detecting the opening of the front frame door 106 is provided.

Further, the front frame door 106 is a passage in which a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) can be stored in a portion below the opening 116 and the game balls are guided to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 provided with the above plate 126, the lower plate 128 for storing the game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 are discharged to the lower plate 128 by the operation of the player. The ball removal button 130, the ball discharge lever 132 that discharges the game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to the game ball collection container (commonly known as the dollar box) by the operation of the player, and the launcher 110 by the operation of the player. A ball launching handle 134 that launches the game ball guided to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and a chance button 136 that changes the production mode of various production devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the operation of the player. The chance button lamp 138 that emits the chance button 136, the setting operation unit 137 that can perform various settings by the operation of the setter (for example, the player, the game clerk), and the ball for the card unit (CR unit). A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display unit (shown) that displays the player's balance and the state of the card unit. ), And. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

The launching device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching mallet 148 that hits the game ball with the tip of the launching rod 146. , Equipped with.

The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and includes an confirm (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirm button, and a lower button located below the confirm button. It includes a right button located to the right of the button, a left button located to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button located further to the right of the right button. Further, the setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the production mode of the various production devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied. You may be.

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 by using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is attached to the main body 104.

FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, and is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150, which is located below the ball tank 150 and the ball tank 150 for temporarily storing the game balls. A tank rail 154 for guiding the ball falling through the communication hole to the payout device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is arranged.

The payout device 152 is composed of a tubular member, and includes a payout motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a payout sensor inside the payout device 152. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor, and the game ball that has passed through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. As a result, the temporarily stagnant game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152.

The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and when the game ball is passing, either a high or low signal is passed, and when the game ball is not passing. The signal of either high or low is output to the payout control unit 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor is configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. The ball is paid out to the player.

On the left side of the drawing of the payout device 152, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing of the entire game, and the effect are related based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. A first sub board 160 for accommodating a first sub board 160 including a rotary type volume adjustment switch 161 that constitutes a first sub control unit 400 that performs control processing and adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of a game clerk. A substrate case 162, a second sub-board case 166 for accommodating a second sub-board 164 constituting a second sub-control unit 500 that performs control processing related to production based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400, and A payout board case 172 for accommodating a payout board 170 including an error release switch 168 that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and cancels an error by an operation of a game clerk, and control for launching a game ball. A power supply that constitutes a launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 that performs processing, and a power supply control unit 660 that supplies power to various electrical game devices, and turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk. A power supply board case 184 for accommodating a power supply board 182 including a switch 178 and an RWM clear switch 180 for outputting an RWM clear signal to a main control unit 300 when the power is turned on, a payout control unit 600, and a card unit. The CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals, and the relay board 188 that relays between the main board 156, the first sub-board 160, etc., and the hall computer, etc. in order to output the information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer, etc. And are arranged.

Since the main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, etc. need to be changed for each model, they are provided on the back surface of the game board 200, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power supply board 182, etc. are provided. It is provided in the outer frame 102 because it is commonly used by a plurality of models.

FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are arranged on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 in which the game ball can roll. An effect device 206 is arranged at substantially the center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative pattern display device 208 substantially in the center. The effect device 206 operates the effect movable body 224 to perform the effect, and the details will be described later.

The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launch handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side of the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side of the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to the normal symbol start port 228, the normal symbol start port 229, the first special symbol start port 230, the second special symbol start port 232 (open state), the variable winning opening 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between the game ball that falls on the right path and the game ball that falls on the left path.

For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning opening 235, these normal symbol start ports 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning opening 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy for the game ball to fall on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible for the game ball to fall on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol start port 228, the first special symbol start port 230, and the variable winning opening 234, a game in which the left path is dropped due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238 and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like. It is relatively easy to enter the ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball falling on the right path. In the present embodiment, the right-handed machine is taken as an example, but it may be other than the right-handed machine.

The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for displaying various images (moving images or still images) used for the decorative design and the effect, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas of a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the effect display area 208d. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative pattern display device 208, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted.

In the lower part of the game area 124, there are a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220. , Ordinary symbol holding lamp 216 and high accuracy medium lamp 222 are arranged. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as "general symbol", the special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol", the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1", and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2".

The normal figure display device 210 is a display device for displaying a normal figure, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment.

The normal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of holding normal figure variable games (details will be described later), and in the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of normal figure variable games. It is possible to put it on hold. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are held, and in the present embodiment, the special figure variable game is predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is in a high-probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur, or is in a high-probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low-probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur to a high probability state. Turns on when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state, and turns off when changing from a high probability state to a low probability state.

Further, around the effect device 206, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal drawing start opening 228, 229, a special drawing 1 starting opening 230, and a special drawing 2 starting opening 232 are variable. The winning openings 234 and 235 are arranged.

A plurality of general winning openings 226 are arranged on the game board 200 in the present embodiment, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (general winning opening 226). (When a prize is won), the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with these configurations, the prize balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls include a ball paid out to the player as a consideration for winning a prize (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "prize ball") and a ball lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "rental ball"). In some cases) and is included.

The normal figure start port 228 and the normal figure start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one normal drawing start port 228 is arranged on the left side path of the game board 200, and one normal drawing start port 229 is arranged on the right side path. The ball that has passed through the Fuzu start port 228 and the Fuzu start port 229 is not discharged to the game island side unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed through the normal map start port 228 or the normal map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts the normal map variation game by the normal map display device 210.

In the present embodiment, only one start port 230 is arranged in the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric chew), and in the present embodiment, only one is arranged on the right side path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 includes a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right, and it is impossible for a ball to enter while the blade member 232a is closed. When the 210 hits and the symbol is stopped and displayed, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 4) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. , The special figure variable game (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure 2 variable game") by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called large winning openings or attackers. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the central portion of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is arranged in. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 each include a door member that can be opened and closed, and a ball cannot enter the ball while the door member is closed. When the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol by winning the special figure variable game, for example, one of the door members of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing). It opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning openings 234 and 235, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side.

Further, a plurality of disk-shaped ball striking direction changing members 236 called windmills and game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize to any of the winning ports or the starting opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and launches the launch rod. It is launched into the game area 124 through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launching mallet 148. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and the winning openings (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234, 235) and the like. Win a prize at the starting port (Special Figure 1 Starting Port 230, Special Figure 2 Starting Port 232), without winning any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal drawing starting port 228, 229. Reach mouth 240.

Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and the effect movable body 224 is placed in a non-rollable area of the game ball. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is arranged on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The fourth symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged vertically side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to the special figure 1, and the lower lamp corresponds to the special figure 2. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, as in this example, the fourth symbol display device may be provided in the effect device 206 (center accessory). Further, on the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are arranged. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball entering the warp inlet 242a provided on the upper left side of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. In the front stage 244, a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball ridden by a nail of the game board 200, or the like can be rolled, and a passing ball is placed in the central portion of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the 230.

The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat plate-shaped panel on which the model name and the like of the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. The effect movable body 224 can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown).

The shielding device 246 is composed of a grid-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper parts of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor via the pulley operates. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the inner ends thereof, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see it. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are open, their inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is. Further, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, and for example, only a part of the decorative symbol can be identified by the player as to which decorative symbol the displayed decorative symbol is. Can be shielded. The left door 246a and the right door 246b may be able to visually recognize a part of the decorative pattern display device 208 behind the lattice hole, or the shoji portion of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body to be rearward. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be vaguely made visible to the player, or the shoji portion of the hole in the lattice may be completely closed (shielded) so that the decorative symbol display device 208 at the rear is completely invisible. May be good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control units of the pachinko machine 100 are roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls a central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the commands transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the commands transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a payout control unit 600 that controls the payout of the game ball, a launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and a power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supply to the pachinko machine 100. ..

First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a time. It is equipped with a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and the like, and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in program processing. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

Further, the basic circuit 302 includes a random number value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (counter circuit) used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit shall have two counters built-in), a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and an opening of the front frame door. A sensor circuit for receiving signals output by various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame open sensor, and a lower plate full tank sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to a random number value generation circuit 318 and a basic circuit 302. 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a special figure 1 display device 212 or a special figure 2 display device 214, and display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a normal symbol display device 210. To control the display of the drive circuit 326 and various status display units 328 (for example, the normal drawing hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high accuracy middle lamp 222, etc.). Drive circuit 330, and a drive circuit 334 for controlling various solenoids 332 that open and close a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of a special start port 232, a door member of a variable winning opening 234, 235, and the like. Is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random number value generation circuit 318 are separately provided, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random number value generation circuit 318.

When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random number value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 318 latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special drawing 1 starting port 230. Stored in the register. Further, when the random number value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number value generation circuit 318 also latches the value at that timing of the counter corresponding to the special drawing 2 starting port 232. , The latched value is stored in the built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 pachinkos the information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 338 provides the voltage value of the power supply. Is less than a predetermined value (9V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on, and the CPU 304 is provided from the start signal output circuit 340. When the start signal is input, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600, respectively. 1 Communication with the sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is possible. Information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 issues commands to the first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. Although it is configured so that signals can be transmitted, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be configured to be performed by two-way communication.

Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that mainly controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

Further, the basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the sensor 120 (and the amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, chance button lamp 138). , A drive circuit 432 for driving control of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. The volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be adjusted, the operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting the pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and the detection signals from these sensors. The sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402, the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the signal from the CPU 404, and the like are read out, and the work area of the VRAM 436 is used to generate a display image, which is then displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is connected to a VDP (video display processor) 434 that displays.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

Further, the basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. 518, a sensor circuit 518 for controlling the game board lamp 532, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game board frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542. A serial communication control circuit 520 that controls lighting by serial communication is connected between the circuit 540, the game board lamp drive circuit 530, and the game underframe lamp drive circuit 540.

Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a ball rental ball based on the control signal output by the payout sensor 604. Detects whether or not the payout of is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

The launch control unit 630 is an operation of the ball launch handle 134 by the player, which is output by a control signal output by the payout control unit 600 to instruct launch permission or stop, and a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launch rod 146 and the launch mallet 148, and control of the ball feed device 634 that supplies balls from the upper plate 126 to the launch device 110 based on the control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

The power supply control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, 10 days) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. , Capacitor). In this embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a predetermined voltage to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 supplies the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500, and the launch control. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power supply path.

Next, using FIGS. 5A to 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 stop and display. The types of figures and general figures will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Special Figure 1 The variable game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor detects that the ball has entered the starting port 230, and the ball has entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232. 2 The variable game of FIG. 2 is started on condition that the start port sensor detects it. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs "variable display of special figure 1" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. Further, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs "variable display of special figure 2" in which all seven segments are lit and one central segment is lit repeatedly. .. These "variable display of special figure 1" and "variable display of special figure 2" correspond to an example of the variable display of the symbol referred to in this embodiment. Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 occurs. After that, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of "variation display of special figure 1" to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, or after the start of "variation display of special figure 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 2 is displayed. The period up to the stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, and hereinafter, after the start of this "variation display of special figure 1 or 2", the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. A series of displays up to this point is called a symbol fluctuation stop display. The symbol fluctuation stop display may be performed multiple times in succession.

FIG. 5A shows seven types of special figures, “special figure A” to “special figure G”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 1. In FIG. 5A, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit. "Special figure A" is a 15-round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "special figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "special figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not it is a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by a lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not it is a special big hit and the number of rounds are determined by a lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the big hit and the special big hit is whether the probability of winning the big hit is high (special big hit) or low (big hit) in the special figure fluctuation game after the big hit game is completed. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning this jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special figure probability change" or simply "probability change"), and the state in which the probability is low is referred to as a special figure. It is called a low probability state. In addition, after the end of the 15R special big hit game, after the end of the 7R special big hit game, and after the end of the 7R big hit game, the time is shortened (electric support state). The time saving will be described in detail later, but the time saving state is referred to as a normal figure high probability state (hereinafter, may be referred to as “normal figure probability change”), and the state not in the normal time saving state is referred to as a normal figure low probability state. The 15R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure A" and the 7R special jackpot symbol "Special Figure B" are symbols that are in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the jackpot game, and are 7R jackpot symbols. "Special figure C" is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These "special figure A", "special figure B", and "special figure C" are symbols in which the advantage to the player is relatively large.

"Special figure D" is a 2R big hit symbol called a sudden change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. That is, "Special Figure D" is 2R as compared with "Special Figure A" which is 15R and "Special Figure B" which is 7R.

"Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability change or hidden probability change. As will be described later, when "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called) after the big hit game (opening time 100 ms x 2R) ends. If "Special Figure E" is stopped and displayed in a state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state after shifting to the latent probability change state), the special figure high probability normal after the big hit game (opening time 29000ms x 2R) ends. The state shifts to the high probability state (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). That is, in "special figure E", the operation during the big hit game and the game state that shifts thereafter are determined by the game state when the stop display is displayed (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different pattern.

"Special figure F" is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the "special figure G" is an out-of-line symbol, which is a symbol in which the advantage to the player is relatively small.

FIG. 5B shows four types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure d”, as stop symbol modes in the symbol change stop display of special figure 2. "Special figure a" is a 15R special jackpot symbol, "special figure b" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, "special figure c" is a 7R jackpot symbol, and "special figure d" is an outlier symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special figures (of which five are big hits) of "special figure A" to "special figure G" are used as the stop symbol mode of special figure 1, whereas special figure 2 is used. As the stop symbol mode, four types of special figures (three of them are big hits) of "special figure a" to "special figure d" are used. With this configuration, it may be possible to provide a difference in the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of becoming a probable change among the big hits. In this example, the jackpot in Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes in which almost no balls are ejected, whereas the jackpot in Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. , The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than the advantage of special figure 1.

FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are 10 types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10". "Decoration 1" to "Decoration 9" and "Decoration 10" represent the numbers "1" to "9" and "0", respectively. The first starting port sensor has detected that the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230, or the special drawing 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, provided that the second start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the start port 232. In the pattern display area, switch the display in the order of "decoration 1"-> "decoration 2"-> "decoration 3"-> ...-> "decoration 9"-> "decoration 10"-> "decoration 1"-> ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed.

Then, the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure B", the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure C", the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", and the 7R special jackpot of "Special Figure b". , When notifying the 7R jackpot of "special figure c", a symbol combination in which three same decorative symbols are lined up in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" and "decoration 2-" Decorative 2-Decoration 2 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. When explicitly notifying the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure A" and the 15R special jackpot of "Special Figure a", a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-") "Decoration 3", "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7", etc.) are stopped and displayed.

In addition, when notifying the 2R big hit called the latent probability change (hidden probability change) of "special figure E" or the small hit of "special figure F", "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed. To do. When notifying a 2R jackpot called a sudden change in "Special Figure D", "Decoration 1-Decoration 3-Decoration 5" is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying the deviation of the "special figure G" and the "special figure d", the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 5D shows an example of a stop display symbol of a normal diagram. There are three types of stop display modes of the normal figure of the present embodiment: the hit symbol "Public figure A" and "Public figure B", and the out-of-line symbol "Fu figure C". Based on the above-mentioned gate sensor detecting that the sphere has passed through the normal figure start port 228 and the normal figure start port 229, the normal figure display device 210 has all seven segments lit and one in the center. Performs "variable display of normal map" that repeats lighting of the segment. Then, "Public figure A" or "Special figure B" is stopped and displayed when notifying the winning of the normal figure variable game, and "Public figure C" is stopped and displayed when notifying the loss of the normal figure variable game. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment that is extinguished, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment that is lit.

Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interrupt and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

First, in step S101, the initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT314 is set. Allow operation and set initial values. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT314 as an initial value.

In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT314 is restarted. In step S105 following step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 by the voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a predetermined value. It monitors whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output when the voltage is less than (9 V in this example). Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power interruption), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect the power interruption), the step returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Even if the predetermined value (9V) is not reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

In step S107, the initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process of setting a numerical value for setting a cycle for executing the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, the first 1 Output port to the sub control unit 400) to output a clear signal, set to allow writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power is cut off (before the power is cut off), and when the state before the power is cut off is not returned (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is used. In the case of setting the initial state), the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113). Specifically, first, whether or not the RAM clear signal transmitted when the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a clerk of a game store or the like is ON (indicating that the operation has been performed). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary, and if the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to put the basic circuit 302 in the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and this power status information is information indicating suspend. Judge whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 in order to bring the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. When the power status information is information indicating suspend, all the 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to the 1-byte structure register whose initial value is 0. By doing so, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). Then, when the checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the checksum result is specific. If the value is other than (for example, 0) (when the checksum result is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 in order to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

In step S111, the power recovery process is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset (this setting) to the stack pointer. Further, when the power is cut off, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and after resetting to each register, the interrupt permission is set. After that, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the resetting, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power failure. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In this step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the state has returned to the state when the power was turned off, and in the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400 Will be sent to.

In step S113, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition is set, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (this setting), and all the storage areas of the RAM 308 are initialized. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and is the command setting transmission process (command setting transmission process) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, like the power recovery command. In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115 following step S113, the basic random number initial value update process is performed after the interrupt prohibition is set. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of the four random number counters for generating the normal figure winning random number value, the normal figure random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are generated. The four random number counters for generating initial values, the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal figure, and the two random number counters for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the special figure are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal map provided in the RAM 308. After adding 1 to the value, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are updated in the same manner. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in the basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the timer interrupt process that starts at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the main control unit timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. Is started in a predetermined cycle.

First, in step S201, the timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, WDT is periodically scheduled so that the count value of WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and WDT interrupt does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). (In this example, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S205 following step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door opening sensor, inner frame opening sensor, lower plate full tank sensor, and various ball detection sensors are transmitted via the input port of the I / O 310. It is input to monitor the presence or absence of a detection signal, and is stored in a signal state storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the various sensors 320. Taking the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the timer interrupt processing (about 4 ms before) two times before is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. Read from the previous detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308, store this information in the detection signal storage area before the previous two times divided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and perform the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before). ), The information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor is read out from the current detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and this information is read out from the above-mentioned previous detection signal storage area. Remember in. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-mentioned detection signal storage area this time.

Further, in step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared, and each of them is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor of the above matches the winning determination pattern information. While one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor, this main control unit timer interrupt process, which repeats activation at a very short interval of about 2 ms, is activated several times. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal writing area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the ball detection sensor, if the detection signal is stored twice in succession after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won.

The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no detection signal two times before, there is a detection signal last time, and there is a detection signal this time). In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor is the predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, there is no detection signal two times before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a detection signal this time. If it matches with (information indicating that), the ball enters the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special drawing 2 starting port 232, or the normal drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was a passage at 229. That is, it is determined that the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229 have been awarded. For example, in the general winning opening sensor that detects the entry into the general winning opening 226, if the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the general winning opening 226 is awarded. If the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal for the past three times does not match the above-mentioned winning judgment pattern information, the processing associated with the subsequent winning of the general winning opening 226 is performed. It branches to the subsequent processing without performing the processing associated with the winning of the mouth 226.

Further, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores the winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal two times before, no previous detection signal, and no detection signal this time). After it is determined that there has been a prize once, it is not determined that there was a prize until the information on the presence or absence of the detection signals for the past three times in each ball detection sensor matches the prize judgment clear pattern information, and the prize judgment is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information.

In step S207 following step S205, the basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal figure winning random number value and the normal figure used in the main control unit 300 are used. The four random number counters for generating the random number value, the special figure 1 random number value, and the special figure 2 random number value are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the normal figure winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the general figure winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has gone around as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the storage area of the random number counter is obtained. Set to.

For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a random number winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as the initial value from the random number counter for generating the initial value corresponding to the random number counter for generating the winning random number, and the value is obtained as the initial value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next. I will do it. In addition to the above-mentioned initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the winning random number of the normal figure has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value of the normal figure and the special figure 1 random number value generation The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for the purpose and the random number counter for the special figure 2 random number value generation have each made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

In step S211 following step S209, the effect random number update process is performed. In this effect random number update process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the timer for changing / stopping the symbol is clocked on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for displaying the symbol is changed / stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer for counting, special figure 2 display symbol update timer for timing the time for displaying the symbol on the special figure 2 display device 214, predetermined winning effect time, predetermined opening time, predetermined Update various timers including a timer for timing the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like.

In step S215 following step S213, the winning opening counter update process is performed. In this winning opening counter update process, when there is a prize in the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228, and 229, the prize balls provided in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or each starting opening. The value of the number storage area is read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

In step S217 following step S215, the winning prize acceptance process is performed. In this winning reception process, it is determined whether or not the special drawing 1 starting port 230, the special drawing 2 starting opening 232, the normal drawing starting opening 228, 229, and the variable winning opening 234, 235 have been won. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not the information matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

If there is a prize in the special figure 1 start port 230 and the corresponding special figure 1 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 start port 230 of the random number value generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 The special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 1 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308 is used as a special figure. 1 Random number values are acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, every time the special figure 1 hold number decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value set having the highest hold order (first) is deleted. At the same time, the remaining data of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set are processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 1 hold increases by one, a new special figure 1 is added to the next hold order of the data of the set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value set having the lowest (last) hold order. The data of the winning random number value and the set of the special figure 1 random number value are written.

If there is a prize in the special figure 2 start port 232 and the corresponding special figure 2 hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 start port 232 of the random number value generation circuit 318. The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random number value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, it is stored in the special figure 2 random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, every time the number of special figure 2 holds decreases by one, the data of the set of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value having the highest hold order is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. The data of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value set are processed so as to be moved up by one. In addition, every time the number of special figure 2 holdings increases by one, a new special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding order of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 data of a set of random numbers is written.

In addition, special figure 1 start information (set of special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (set of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) is newly acquired. In that case, the special figure look-ahead process is executed using the start information. The details of the special figure look-ahead processing will be described later.

If there is a prize in the normal figure start port 228 or the normal figure start port 229 and the corresponding normal figure hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is calculated from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. It is acquired as a winning random number value, and the normal figure random number value is acquired from the random number counter for generating the normal figure random number value provided in the RAM 308 and stored in the normal figure random number value storage area in the order of acquisition. The set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value in the normal figure random value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of the normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold number storage area. In the normal figure random value storage area, every time the number of normal figure hold decreases by one, the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value with the highest hold order (first) is deleted, and the remainder is deleted. It is processed so that the holding order of the data of the set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of holdings of the normal figure increases by one, a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new winning random number value of the normal figure and a new holding order of the data of the set of the winning random number value of the normal figure and the random number value of the normal figure having the lowest holding order The data of a set of random numbers is written. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a prize is given to the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that the ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

In step S219 following step S217, the payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information to be output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, and the strobe information (when on, indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 are set in bit 7. Power-on information (when turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 this time processing type for encryption (0 to 3), and bits 0 to 3 encrypted. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

In step S221 following step S219, the normal map state update process is performed. This normal map state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal map state. For example, in the normal figure state update process in the middle of the normal figure fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned normal figure display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off Drive control is performed. By performing this control, the normal map display device 210 performs a variable display of the normal map (normal map variable game).

In addition, in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the normal figure fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the normal figure display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), when the normal figure hit flag is on, the hit symbol The 7-segment LED constituting the normal figure display device 210 is controlled to turn on / off so as to display the normal figure display mode, and when the normal figure hit flag is off, the normal figure display is performed so as to display the out-of-line symbol. The lighting / extinguishing drive control of the 7-segment LED constituting the device 210 is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings not only in the normal figure state update process but also in various processes. Here, the lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal drawing stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the normal figure display device 210 has one of a hit symbol (a normal figure A or a normal figure B shown in FIG. 5 (d)) and an outlier symbol (a normal figure C shown in FIG. 5 (d)). The symbol of is confirmed and displayed. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the normal figure stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the confirmed and displayed symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the normal map variation game is notified to the player.

If the result of the normal map fluctuation game is a hit, the normal map hit flag is turned on. When this normal map hit flag is on, in the normal map state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal map stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In addition to setting the normal operation in the setting area, the vane member is set to the solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for opening / closing the blade member 232a of the special figure 2 starting port 232 during a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). A signal for holding the 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal drawing state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening / closing drive, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

Further, in the normal figure state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (the timing when the value of the blade closing time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the normal map fluctuation game is wrong, the normal map hit flag is turned off. When this normal figure hit flag is off, even in the normal figure state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the normal figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). The setting area of the RAM 308 is set to be inactive. In the normal map state update process when the normal map is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

In step S223, the drawing-related lottery process is performed. In this normal figure-related lottery process, the number of normal figure variable games and the number of normal figure variable games that are not controlled to open / close the special figure 2 start port 232 (the state of the normal figure is not operating) and are on hold. Is executed using the set of the earliest Fuzu winning random value and the Fuzu random value in the Fuzu random value storage area, with the condition that is 1 or more.

The main control unit 300 acquires the normal figure start information (a set of the normal figure winning random value and the normal figure random value) from the earliest (most previously stored) hold position in the normal figure random value storage area. A winning / failing determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the acquired random number value of the winning random number in the starting information of the normal map and the value of the probability fluctuation flag of the normal map in the RAM 308 (FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b) described later). (See) is used to determine whether to win or miss (hit / fail judgment). Next, the main control unit 300 sets the normal map determination table (the hit shown in FIG. 9C) stored in the ROM 306 based on the normal map random value in the acquired normal map start information and the determined hit / fail determination result. (Refer to the time operation table) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the normal diagram. Next, the main control unit 300 selects various tables (for example, a timer number (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number value for determining the fluctuation time of the normal diagram, and the like. The fluctuation display time (timer number) of the normal map is determined using the table), and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal map fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal map fluctuation display time.

After extracting the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest normal figure start information from the normal figure random value storage area and stores the number of reserved numbers in the normal figure. The number of reserved maps in the area is subtracted by 1. At this time, the normal map start information extracted from the normal map random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the normal map start information stored in this temporary area. May be good.

The main control unit 300 sets the normal figure hit flag provided in the RAM 308 to on when the winning / failing determination result is a hit (winning), and sets the normal figure hit flag to off when the result is unwinning.

Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In this special figure 2 state update process, one of the following plurality of processes is performed according to the state of special figure 2.

For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed repeatedly. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and then the process is terminated.

Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R jackpot flag, a 7R jackpot flag, a 2R jackpot flag, a small hit flag, a missed flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. .. These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time elapses (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on. Is the special figure a, 7R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 5B is on, the special figure b, 7R jackpot flag is on when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special figure c and the out-of-order flag are on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to turn on / off so as to be in each mode of the special figure d, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is specially controlled. Fig. 2 Make settings to indicate that the stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures a to d.

After that, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the confirmed display of the special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. Further, if the number of time reductions stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time reductions, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time saving flag. Furthermore, the time saving flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state). Further, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability fluctuation flag Turn off.

Further, in FIG. 2, a symbol for additionally storing predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and the variable display is stopped. The special figure 2 identification information indicating that the information exists is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the process is terminated.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the jackpot flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In order to set the area to be in operation of the special figure 2 and to wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started. In the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308, information indicating the winning effect period is set. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) , Or a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332) until the winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning openings 234 and 235. In addition to outputting a signal for holding the door member in the open state, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening opening setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in the closed state is output to a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening / closing of the door member of the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and a timer for managing the door closing time provided in the RAM 308. Set information indicating the closure period in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the large winning opening closing setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, the opening / closing control of the door member was repeated a predetermined number of times (in the present embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of the special figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of the special figure 1), and the process was completed. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing, the player waits for a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period of displaying an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is finished. In order to set to, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, if the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of this big hit game, the time reduction number of times (for example, 100 times) is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction number is provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the time saving flag. If the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is set to off, the time reduction number of times is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

The term "time reduction" as used herein means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time saving flag is set to on, it is in the high probability state of the normal map (probability change of the normal map). In the high-probability state of the normal figure, the probability of winning in the variable game of the normal figure is higher than in the low-probability state of the normal figure. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal-figure variable game is shorter in the normal-figure high-probability state than in the normal-figure low-probability state (normal-figure variation). Further, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 tends to be longer than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing (electric chew spread). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal drawing, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open than in the low-probability state of the normal drawing. The state in which any of these normal figure probability change, normal figure change short, and electric chew spread is set is called the electric support (starting mouth winning support by electric tulip) state.

Further, as described above, the time saving flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the jackpot game, the low probability state of the normal figure is maintained. This is because if the probability is high during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable winning openings 234 and 235 are entered during the jackpot game, and many of the special figure 2 starting openings 232 are reached before the game balls enter. This is to solve the problem that a game ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases and the gambling property increases.

If the special figure probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 at the same time as the end of this jackpot game.

Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area.

Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (the timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 does not operate in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set inside.

Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-order flag is turned on. When this off flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the above-mentioned predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 non-operating is set. In the special figure 2 state update process in the case where the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

Subsequently, the special figure state update process (special figure 1 state update process) for the special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In this special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of special figure 1. Since each process performed in this special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which "special figure 2" of the content explained in the above-mentioned special figure 2 state update process is read as "special figure 1", the explanation thereof is described. Omit. However, in this example, since the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2, the timing when the variation display time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0). The special figure 1 state update process that starts at the timing) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R jackpot flag is on and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figures A and 7R jackpot flags shown in FIG. 5A are on. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B and 7R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C and 2R jackpot flags are on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D and 2R jackpot flags are on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, when the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure E, when the small hit flag is on. The 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to turn on / off so that the special figure F and the special figure G are in the respective modes when the off flag is on, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a definite display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, the special figure-related lottery process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed this time. Here, too, the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery process) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure-related lottery process for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery process). ) (Step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. The execution is performed using the earliest special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value in the special figure 2 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the variable game of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is not performed, and the states of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are both inactive and are on hold. It is executed using the earliest special figure 1 winning random value and the special figure 1 random value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

Regarding these special figure-related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery process before the special figure 1 related lottery process, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 2 variable game does not start the change because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of holdings of the special figure 2 variable game is 1 or more, the lottery process or the variable game related to the holding of the special figure 1 variable game is not performed. In addition, the decoration symbol display device 208 notifies the result of the winning / failing determination of the special figure variation game by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is performed. , Special figure 1 The lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 230 is notified with priority. In the present embodiment, the special figure variable game having a high advantage (special figure 2 variable game in this example) is given priority over the special figure variable game having a low advantage (special figure 1 variable game in this example). .. Therefore, it may be easy to make a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special figure 2 start information) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. (Fig. 2 Winning random number value and special figure 2 set of random value) is acquired, and based on the acquired special figure 2 winning random value in the start information and the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag in the RAM 308, the ROM 306 The hit / fail determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later) is used to make a big hit, or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in special figure 1). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (whether it is correct or not). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table (FIG. 11A) stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined hit / fail determination result. (Refer to the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A) is used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special figure 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail determination result, the stop symbol, the number of special figures 2 held at the time of the hit / fail determination, the acquired random number value for determining the special figure fluctuation time, and the like. The variation display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table (not shown)).

After extracting the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 erases the earliest special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, and at the same time, FIG. 2 Special figure 2 of the reserved number storage area The reserved number is subtracted by 1. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage, and the hold of special figure 2 is digested with priority over the hold of special figure 1. As an example, the special figure 2 variable game with low advantage is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and the hold of special figure 1 is held in special figure 2. It may be a special figure 1 priority change that is digested in preference to a hold. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game or the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure variable game related to the holding of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is started in the order in which the special figure variable game is won in the start opening prize. It may be forward fluctuation. In the change in the starting order winning order, the maximum number of holds is eight regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, so it is compared with the priority change in which the maximum number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, it may be possible to raise the practical upper limit of the number of pending items.

Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game regarding the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of one special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned special figure state update By performing the processing and the special drawing-related lottery processing independently for the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2, a plurality of special figures may be configured to be changed at the same time. Further, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time in this way, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special figures may be displayed in one area. Further, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed at the same time, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

In step S233 following step S231, the command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, the bits 15 are strobe information (when it is on, it indicates that data is set), and the bits 11 to 14 are. Command type (In this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number specification command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, look-ahead result information command Information that can specify the type of command, such as), and bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol change start command and the symbol change stop command related to the normal figure are also included as command types.

Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-mentioned command transmission process. In addition, if the command type is a special figure symbol change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various large hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and other values, and special figure related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command, it includes information indicating the timer number selected in step 3, including various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, etc. In the case of the start command and the end effect start command, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag is included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. are displayed. I try to include it. When the command type indicates a basic command, the command data includes device information, whether or not the special figure 1 starting port 230 has been won, whether or not the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been won, and whether or not the variable winning opening 234 or 235 has been won. Includes information indicating the presence or absence. In the case of the look-ahead result information command, the command data is information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of look-aheads stored in the look-ahead number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the like. Included in.

In addition, if the command type is the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure, the command data includes the values such as the normal figure hit flag, the normal figure miss flag, the normal figure probability fluctuation flag, and the normal figure related lottery process. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and fluctuation time, and in the case of the symbol fluctuation stop (rotation stop) command of the normal map, indicates the values of the normal map hit flag, normal map miss flag, normal map probability fluctuation flag, etc. Is included.

Further, in the above-mentioned rotation start setting transmission process, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, and special figure probability fluctuation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery process, and special figure 1. FIG. 2 Set information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games, special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned rotation stop setting transmission process, information indicating the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

In the above-mentioned winning effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned end effect setting transmission process, the command data includes the effect control information stored in the RAM 308 and output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag. Set information indicating a value, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like. In the above-mentioned large winning opening opening setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned large winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, and the number of special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games held are stored in the command data. Set the information indicating such as.

Further, in this step S233, the general command special figure hold increase process is also performed. In this general command special figure hold increase process, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) and notice information (advance notice information, false notice information) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in the command data. Either advance notice information or no advance notice information) is set.

In the first sub-control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. The effect control content can be determined based on the information of the command data.

In step S235 following step S233, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350, which is separate from the pachinko machine 100, via the information output circuit 336.

In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read out, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a lower plate full tank error is monitored. .. When a front frame door opening error or a lower plate full tank error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full tank error. Set. In addition, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning openings 234 and 235, and the normal drawing display device 210 and special drawing 1 are displayed via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power interruption is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power interruption is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, the timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 is performed. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure look-ahead process executed in the prize acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and pre-reads the stop symbol before the hit / fail determination process. The determination is made, and the pre-determination result (special figure pre-reading result) is stored in the pre-reading result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

Here, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 1 look-ahead result stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit and the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 look-ahead result is stored. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 look-ahead decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 look-ahead result having the highest rank (first) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 look-ahead result is deleted. It is processed so that the rank of the data of is moved up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 1 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 1 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 1 look-ahead result data having the lowest (last) rank.

Further, in the RAM 308, the number of the special figure 2 look-ahead results stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 look-ahead result and the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing as a number is provided. In this example, the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four look-ahead results. In the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 look-ahead result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining rank of the special figure 2 look-ahead result data is deleted. Is processed so as to be carried up by one. Further, each time the number of special figure 2 look-aheads increases by one, new special figure 2 look-ahead result data is written in the next rank after the special figure 2 look-ahead result data having the lowest rank.

In the special figure look-ahead process, the main control unit 300 first determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination of whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is determined, for example, by the special figure 2 reserved number stored in the special figure 2 reserved number storage area and the special figure 2 reserved number stored area. Fig. 2 Compared with the number of look-aheads. When the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 look-ahead number, the main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, and when the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 look-ahead number. It is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the start information of the special figure 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is subjected to the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) before the winning / failing determination process. Fig. 2 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 2 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S229). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S305 following step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased. Whether or not the start information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 reserved number stored in the special figure 1 reserved number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number storage area as in the special figure 2. This is performed by comparing with the number of pre-reading special figures 1 stored in. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 has not increased, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated and the main control unit timer interrupt is used. The process returns to the winning process (step S217) of the interrupt process.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress based on various flags in the RAM 308. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is in progress (in the electric support), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not the non-electric support is in progress, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 look-ahead advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is displayed before the winning / failing determination processing in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Fig. 1 Read ahead from the random number value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information, for example, the hit / fail judgment table and the special figure determination table used at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information is selected by the special figure 1 related lottery. A pre-determination is made prior to the pass / fail determination process in the process (step S231). It should be noted that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of winning / failing determination.

In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 look-ahead result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In step S315, the increased special figure 1 start information is not pre-read, and the “undetermined” information indicating that the start information is not pre-read is stored in the RAM 308 as the pre-read result result for special figure 1 in place of the stop symbol information. Store in the first free space of the department. After that, the special figure look-ahead process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-mentioned command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-reading result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-reading result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be performed. All the look-ahead results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

Further, in the present embodiment, the increased start information of the special figure 2 is always pre-read, and the increased start information of the special figure 1 is always pre-read except during the electric support. , Whether or not to pre-read the increased start information of special figures 1 and 2 may be decided by lottery. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the pre-reading result from the main control unit 300 may decide, for example, whether or not to execute the pre-reading notification for each hold by lottery. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, the look-ahead is always executed and the look-ahead result is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit, and the look-ahead is stored. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and the effect using the read-ahead result.

8 (b) to 8 (e) exemplify a state in which the look-ahead result information or the like is stored in the look-ahead result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8 (b), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 1 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (b), the storage area "hold 1" stores "special figure G" (off) as stop symbol information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "special figure G" as stop symbol information. (Out of line) is stored, "special figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 3", and "special figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is memorized.

FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 look-ahead result information is stored in the special figure 2 look-ahead result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8 (c), the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 2 has, for example, the same number of storage areas (four in the present embodiment) as the number of holdable numbers of the special figure 2 variable game. .. Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. The stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored in each of the storage areas. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (c), "special figure d" (off) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "hold 1", and the stop symbol is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4". No information is stored. In FIG. 8C, the state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

FIG. 8D shows an example of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, "undetermined" information is stored in the storage area "hold 1" instead of the stop symbol information. Neither the stop symbol information nor the "undetermined" information is stored in the storage areas "hold 2" to "hold 4".

As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, not the stop symbol information but the “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is the look-ahead result. It may be remembered as. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area "hold 1" stores "timer 3" as timer number information, and the storage area "hold 2" stores "timer 5" as timer number information. Timer number information is not stored in the storage areas "hold 3" and "hold 4". In FIG. 8E, the state in which the timer number information is not stored is described as “none”. Further, when the timer number information is stored in each storage area of the look-ahead result storage unit for special figure 1, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the pass / fail result.

In the above description, an example has been given in which the stop symbol and timer number are pre-determined and the stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the pre-reading result storage unit. However, the hit / fail judgment result and the like are pre-determined and the information is pre-read. It may be stored in the result storage unit and transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as pre-reading result information.

Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. The various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in, for example, the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300.

9 (a) and 9 (b) show an example of a winning / failing determination table used when making a winning / failing determination in the general drawing-related lottery process (step S223). The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b) is composed of each item of "normal figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail result". The item of "Public map probability" indicates the normal map probability (low probability of normal map or high probability of normal map) at the time of judgment of success or failure. The item of "random number range" indicates the numerical range to be compared with the acquired random number value for winning the general map. Here, the range of the winning random numbers in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a pass / fail determination table for normal maps used when the probability of normal figures at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

The pass / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a pass / fail determination table for a normal map used when the probability of the normal map at the time of the pass / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this pass / fail determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of losing is 0%. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the probability of winning is 100 times. In this way, in the high-probability state (during short-time operation), only the hit may be selected. Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% during the time reduction operation, but the probability that the hit is selected is higher during the time reduction operation than when the time reduction is not operated (normally low probability state).

FIG. 9 (c) shows a table of symbol distribution and hit operation for ordinary drawings. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the normal symbol random number value when determining the stop symbol in the general symbol-related lottery process (step S223), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, the distribution rate of each symbol). (Equal to the selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), the distribution rate of each winning symbol when the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal figure variable game is a hit is 50% for the normal figure A and 50% for the normal figure B. The normal figures A and B are symbols in which the electric chew opening operation is executed after the normal figure variable game. In addition, since there is only one out-of-sight symbol selected when the hit / fail determination result is out of order, the out-of-order symbol C is selected with a probability of 100% in the case of out of order. When the normal figure C is selected, the electric chew opening operation is not executed after the normal figure fluctuation game.

As shown in FIG. 9C, the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing A is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is not activated for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 100 ms, then closed only for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened only for 5400 ms. To do. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing A is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 1800 ms, then closed only for about 2000 ms, opened again for 1800 ms, and then opened. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for about 1800 ms.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the opening operation of the special drawing 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is executed after the normal drawing B is stopped and displayed. When the gaming state at the time of the stop display in the normal drawing B is not activated in a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the gaming state at the time of stop display in normal drawing B is a time-saving operation, the blade member 232a of the electric chew 232 is first opened only for 2400 ms, then closed only for about 2000 ms, then opened only for 1450 ms, and then again. It closes only for about 2000 ms and opens again for only 1450 ms.

10 (a) to 10 (d) show an example of a winning / failing determination table used when performing a winning / failing determination in the special drawing 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special drawing 1 related lottery process (step S231). There is. The hit / fail determination table shown in FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) is composed of each item of "special figure probability", "random number range", and "win / fail determination result". The item of "special figure probability" indicates the special figure probability (low probability of special figure or high probability of special figure) at the time of hit / fail judgment. The item of "random number range" indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random number value or special figure 1 winning random number value. Here, the range in which the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example can be taken is 0 to 65535 (the width of the numerical range is 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10A is a hit / miss determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399 (= 165 /). 65536).

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10B is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of a small hit is about 1/399. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10A, the probability of a big hit is about 10 times, and the probability of a small hit is the same.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/299, and the probability of a small hit is 0.

The hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a hit / fail determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of hit / fail determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this hit / fail determination table is used, the probability of a big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of a small hit is 0. Comparing this hit / fail determination table with the hit / fail determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of a big hit is about 10 times.

FIG. 11A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 1. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 1 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11A, the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is 30% for the special figure A (15R special big hit) and the special figure B. (7R special jackpot) is 25%, special figure C (7R jackpot) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability change jackpot) is 10%, and special figure E (latent probability variation jackpot) is 10%. is there. Special figures A, B, D, and E excluding special figure C are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The ratio of the probabilistic jackpots (special figures A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probabilistic variation probability is 75%.

The special figures A, B, and D are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (during time saving operation), low probability of normal figure (time saving not activated) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when the symbol is stopped). Regardless of time)), it is a symbol in which the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of winning / failing determination. The special figure E is a symbol in which the time reduction is activated after the jackpot game is completed only when the game state at the time of winning / failing is the special figure high probability state or the normal figure high probability state. That is, when the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, if the special figure E is stopped and displayed multiple times as a big hit symbol from the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure). (It will be in a low probability state), but after the second and subsequent stop displays, the time reduction will be activated (it will be in a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state). The probability that the time reduction is given in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, and 100% in the other game states.

In this example, there is only one type of small hit symbol and one type of miss symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is obtained. If it is out of alignment, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 1. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and missed symbols may be provided as in the case of the big hit symbol, and may be determined by lottery using a special figure 1 random value.

FIG. 11B shows an example of a jackpot operation in each symbol of the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the big hit game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000ms per 1R. Similarly, in the big hit game after the special figure B or the special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the big hit game after the special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R.

With respect to the special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state when the symbol stop display is displayed. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released for 2R at 100ms per 1R. In this jackpot game, it is difficult to enter the game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is performed at 29000 ms per 1R. In this jackpot game, since the opening time is relatively long, it is easy to enter the game ball.

In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released twice for 100 ms at one opening opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 12A shows a symbol distribution table for special figure 2. The numerical value in the "Distribution" column in the table is compared with the special figure 2 random number value when determining the stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), and the distribution rate of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each). Equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12A, the distribution rate of each jackpot symbol when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b. (7R special jackpot) is 5%, and special figure c (7R jackpot) is 25%. The special figures a and b are symbols in which the probability change is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The ratio of the probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variation game.

The special figures a and b are the game states (high probability of special figure, low probability of special figure, high probability of normal figure (when short-time operation), low probability of normal figure (when short-time operation is not performed) at the time of hit / fail judgment (when the symbol is stopped). ), It is a symbol in which the time reduction (no time reduction number setting) is activated after the jackpot game is completed. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time reduction (the number of time reductions is 100 times) is activated after the jackpot game is completed, regardless of the game state at the time of the winning / failing determination. Special Figure 2 The probability that a time reduction will be given in a jackpot of a variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Therefore, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the random value of the special figure 2. However, a plurality of types of missed symbols may be provided as in the case of the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using the special figure 2 random value.

FIG. 12B shows an example of the operation at the time of a big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the big hit game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is opened for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or c is stopped and displayed. In the jackpot game, the attacker is opened for 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1, and the attacker opening time is long (or the number of Rs is large). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the special figure 1.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. First, in step S401 of FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. .. In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

In step S409 following step S407, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated. Of the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric chulong opening effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

In step S411 following step S409, the chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the chance button 136.

In step S413 following step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, if there is an instruction to VDP434 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to VDP434 (details will be described later).

In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

In step S417 following step S415, the lamp control process is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is an instruction to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this instruction is output to the drive circuit 420.

In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the cloaking device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S601 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S603 following step S601, control commands are transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other effects random value value update processes are performed. And so on.

FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an image data transfer instruction is given. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 436 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436), etc. in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from VDP434 has been input, and if the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is not input. Wait for the incoming signal to be input.

In step S705, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 information of the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 436, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), etc.) are instructed to VDP434. The VDP434 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 404.

In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from VDP434 is input based on the end of drawing the image. If the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711, and if not, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S711, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric chulong opening effect processing executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect in the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric chew long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during the normal figure variable game, and the special figure 2 starting port (electric chew) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter,) after winning the normal figure variable game. , Sometimes called long opening) It is a production that encourages whether or not to do it. It should be noted that even after the normal map fluctuation is stopped, the electric chew long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as "electric chew is being opened!") May be continued based on the normal figure stop symbol.

In the electric chulong opening effect processing shown in FIG. 14A, in the command processing (step S407) of the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13A, the symbol variation of the normal figure starts from the main control unit 300. (Start rotation) Executed when the command is received.

The first sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag that regulates the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted by referring to the value of the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag stored in the predetermined area in the RAM 408. For example, even if the electric chulong opening effect is executed during the display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chulong opening effect cannot be obtained. .. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure fluctuation game during the display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not darkened and the fluctuation time of the normal map fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric chulong opening effect, the game is played. It is possible to perform an electric tulong opening effect that can entertain people. Therefore, in such a case, the electric chulong open effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure variable game is correct or the demo effect.

When the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the execution of the electric chulong opening effect is restricted, and regulates the electric chulong opening effect. Other control processes are executed to end this process, and the process returns to the effect control process (step S409) of the main process.

When the electric chulong release effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric chulong release effect can be executed, proceeds to step S803, and starts the symbol variation (start of rotation) of the normal figure. From the command data of the command, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail judgment result of the normal figure fluctuation game is hit by referring to the information about the normal figure hit flag and the normal figure miss flag.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / miss determination of the normal figure variation game is a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S805 and proceeds to the normal figure from the command data of the symbol change start (rotation start) command of the normal figure. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is the normal symbol A.

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure fluctuation game is normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects an effect whose production type is "success pattern", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "success pattern", ends this process, and controls the effect of the main process. The process returns to the process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the normal figure variation game is not normal figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern A", and opens the electric tulong. Set as a production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern A", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal figure variation game is not a hit, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric chulong open false (gase) effect execution lottery process. In the electric Chulong open fake effect execution lottery process, a random number value is taken out from the random number counter for the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric Chulong open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value corresponds to a hit.

The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric chulong open false effect based on the result of the hit / fail determination in step S815 (step S817).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong opening false effect is to be executed, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is "failure pattern B", and sets it as the electric chulong opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric chulong opening effect based on the "failure pattern B", ends this process, and produces the main process. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

When the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric chulong release fake effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes other control process for not executing the electric chulong release effect, ends this process, and ends the main process. Return to the effect control process (step S409) of.

In the processing of the electric chulong opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric chulong opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric chulong opening effect is always performed if it is a hit. The execution lottery may be performed in the same manner as in the case of the loss, and the effect may be executed only when the lottery is won. Further, in this example, the effect of "failure pattern A" is set when the electric chew is opened for a short time (short open) (normal figure B), and the "failure pattern" is set when the electric chew is not opened (normal figure C). Although the effect of "B" is set, the same effect may be performed for hits (normal figure B) and off (normal figure C).

FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric chulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named "land stage" is executed. On the front of the background effect, in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c, "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" move sequentially from top to bottom, and a variable display of the decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is being executed. A variable icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side of the effect display area 208d, and a variable icon having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the right side of the variable icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying the hold of the special figure is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. An electric chulong open effect area d is arranged on the lower right side of the effect display area 208d. The non-figure variable game is started by the non-figure display device 210 (not shown), the execution of the electric chewlong opening effect is not restricted, and the electric chewlong opening effect is executed in the electric chewlong opening effect area d. As an electric chew long opening effect, along with the display of "Help chance lottery", the image of the samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is won by winning the normal figure variable game. A fanning effect is being performed that makes the player expect the player to open for a long time. As shown in FIG. 14B, a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric chulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure reservation display area c is also hidden. In this way, when the electric Chulong opening effect makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or when the variable display of the decorative symbol makes it difficult to confirm at least a part of the electric Chulong opening effect. There may be.

Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 of FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S901. In this initialization process, the input / output port is initialized, the storage area in the RAM 508 is initialized, and the like.

In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. .. In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S909 following step S907, the effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the production data corresponding to this command from ROM 506 is performed, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S911 following step S909, the lamp control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game underframe lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

In step S913 following step S911, the movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. After that, the process returns to step S903.

FIG. 15B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub-control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

FIG. 15C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this example), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in a cycle. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, the effect random value value update process and the like are performed.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 28.

FIG. 16A shows an example of a look-ahead notice lottery table used when a look-ahead notice lottery is performed in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. The look-ahead lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the look-ahead result information command including the look-ahead result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon indicating the hold corresponding to the look-ahead result by the look-ahead notice lottery. Is determined. The look-ahead notice lottery table shown in FIG. 16A is composed of each item of "look-ahead notice mode", "big hit", and "missing".

The “look-ahead notice mode” in the left column of the figure indicates a display mode of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. "White" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a white circle, "black" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is a black circle, and "heat" indicates that the display mode of the hold icon is in a circle. "Heat" indicates that the character is drawn, and "white → black" indicates that a change animation (details will be described later) in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. , "Black → heat" indicates that a change animation is executed in which the display mode of the hold icon changes from a black circle to a mode in which the characters "heat" are drawn in a circle. In the present embodiment, the default display mode of the hold icon is a white circle. If the look-ahead result includes undetermined information, the hold icon corresponding to the look-ahead result may be displayed in the default display mode without executing the look-ahead notice lottery.

The "big hit" in the middle column of the figure is a look-ahead lottery random number acquired from a look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the look-ahead notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the look-ahead result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the look-ahead notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each look-ahead notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16A, when the look-ahead notice result is a big hit, the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode is 80% for "white", 2% for "black", and "heat". It is 7%, "white → black" is 3%, and "black → heat" is 8%.

The "missing" in the right column of the figure is the look-ahead lottery random number acquired from the look-ahead lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the look-ahead notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the look-ahead result is wrong. The distribution rate of the random number range of the look-ahead notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each look-ahead notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16A, the distribution rate of each look-ahead notice mode when the look-ahead notice result is out of order is 94% for "white", 2% for "black", and "heat". It is 1%, "white → black" is 2%, and "black → heat" is 1%.

FIG. 16B is an example of a notice lottery table at the start of fluctuation (after a big hit determination) used when performing a notice lottery in the effect control process (step S409) of the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. Is shown. The advance notice lottery is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change start command from the main control unit 300, and the advance notice lottery determines the mode of the advance notice effect for the special figure change game being executed. The lottery table for the advance notice at the start of the fluctuation shown in FIG. 16B is composed of each item of "notice mode", "big hit", and "missing". The "notice mode" in the left column of the figure indicates a mode of notice executed by using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the effect movable body 990. "Logo drop" indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the movable body 990 for production moves downward, and "rotation" indicates that the notice is executed in a mode in which the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated. "Logo drop + rotation" indicates that the movable body 990 for production moves downward, and the notice is executed in such a manner that the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 rotates, and "None" indicates that. It indicates that the advance notice effect is not executed.

The "big hit" in the middle row of the figure is the notice lottery random number acquired from the notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when the notice mode is determined in the effect control process (step S409) when the hit / fail determination result is a big hit. The distribution rate of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16B, when the notice result is a big hit, the distribution rate of each notice mode is 4% for "logo drop", 7% for "rotation", and "logo drop + rotation". Is 14%, and "none" is 75%.

The "missing" in the right column of the figure is the advance notice lottery random number acquired from the advance notice lottery random number counter provided in the RAM 408 when determining the advance notice mode in the effect control process (step S409) when the hit / fail determination result is out of order. The distribution rate of the random number range of the notice mode to be compared (that is, equal to the selection probability of each notice mode) is shown. As shown in FIG. 16B, the distribution rate of each notice mode when the notice result is out of order is 3% for "logo drop", 2% for "rotation", and "logo drop + rotation". Is 1%, and "none" is 94%.

In addition, the notice mode of "logo drop" may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. For example, the distance at which the effect movable body 990 moves downward may be different depending on the case of a big hit and the case of a miss, or the speed at which the effect movable body 990 moves may be different. In addition, the notice mode of "rotation" may be different depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not. For example, in the case of a big hit, the image is rotated once, and in the case of a miss, the rotation display is ended and the normal display is returned without rotating the image once. The image may be rotated once even if it is out of alignment. Further, for example, the rotation angle of the image may be different, the angular velocity of the image rotation may be different, or the rotation direction of the image may be different depending on whether the hit is a big hit or not. The images to be rotated may be different. In addition, the notice mode of "logo drop + rotation" may be different as described above depending on whether the jackpot is a big hit or not.

(Example 1)
An example of the production of the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 17 and each figure described later, production examples of the special figure 1 variable game in each embodiment are shown in chronological order. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is indicated by a thick white arrow.

First, with reference to FIG. 17A, the common points of FIG. 17 and each of the figures described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 17A, a decorative frame f1 having the shape of an inverted “L” is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A square special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame f1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 is provided to the right of the square special figure 1 reserved number display area. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 is provided below the 931 and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 is provided below the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 hold number display area 932, the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number. For example, when there is no hold of the special figure 2, "0" is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when the special figure 1 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, "/" is used to notify that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed as the variable display of the fourth symbol. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game.

A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame f2 is displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center of the decorative frame f2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 930 described later (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 1. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 1 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 2. That is, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 2 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed respectively. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square navigation character display area 970 is provided on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display area 950. The merchant character image h1 is displayed in the navigation character display area 970. The merchant character image h1 is used for explanatory effects such as tutorial effects and notices (notices of changes and pre-reading notices) and the like.

A square-shaped effect custom state display area 980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 960. In the effect custom state display area 980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 100. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, a predetermined effect is executed, or a big hit is won.

FIG. 17A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" notifying the loss is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game was out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed as a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 17B shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. The right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon 941 in FIG. 17B indicates the moving direction of the variable icon 941.

In FIG. 17C, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Indicates the state in which is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 in FIG. 17B indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 952. Further, in FIG. 17C, a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. .. The balloon image is an image used for a notice by the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 17D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 in FIG. 17 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 953. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. Further, the hold change image h2 having a substantially quadrangular shape including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. .. The hold change image h2 is an image displayed to notify that a look-ahead notice or an effect of the change notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed is executed. In this example, the hold change image h2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed. The hold change image h2 may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 is changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 2 is changed. It may be a display that is displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or it may be a display that is displayed only when the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the change icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or appear only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the change icon are changed. It may be a display.

In FIG. 17 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. In addition, an erase animation is displayed in which the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 moves downward, and the variable icon 941 is gradually erased. Further, FIG. 17E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of a lightning strike from the hold change image h2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 952 is displayed, and an effect image is displayed overlapping the special figure 1 hold icon 951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 952 and 953, and the effect image hides the entire special figure 1 hold icon 952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 953.

FIG. 17 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. Further, in FIG. 17 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image h2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 17 (e) are erased, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. It's changing.

FIG. 17 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, the special figure 1 hold icon 952 becomes a variable icon, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 17 (g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 17H shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 17 (h), an image of the character string "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, suggesting that the character image h3 of the palace described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 17 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 17 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

In FIG. 17 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target images” in this embodiment) are the image display areas of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 17 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated that is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise is taken with the horizontal axis in the direction rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. Aspect ratio of the case. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated after rotation is the aspect ratio when the horizontal axis is taken in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and the vertical axis is taken in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. .. For example, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image when the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player is the rotation target image in a state where the rotation target image is rotated 90 ° clockwise when viewed from the player. It shows the ratio of the vertical length to the horizontal length of. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

The image to be rotated before rotation shown in FIG. 17 (j) is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). The rotation target image shown in 17 (k) is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 17 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 17 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 17 (l), the rotation target image is displayed as a whole without being cut off.

FIG. 17 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 17 (l). Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation.

FIG. 17 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 17 (m). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 17 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 17 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To.

FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 17 (n). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 17 (o), the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 17 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image h2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 17 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of the 950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation.

FIG. 17 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 17 (o). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 17 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon 941 are erased, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. A variable icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 17 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 17 (p). , Indicates a state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 17 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed. The downward arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 17 (r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. A character image may be used as the rotation target image, and the presence of the character image may be enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image, which may give a strong impression to the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 ° rotation), but the rotation target image may be rotated by one rotation or more. For example, the jackpot reliability may be set to increase as the number of rotations of the image to be rotated increases.

The aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. In some cases, the work area of the VRAM 436 may be used to generate a display image. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using random numbers, and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio using the work area of the VRAM 436. May be done. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced so as to keep the display area of the rotation target image constant. The aspect ratio may change.

In the present embodiment, the image to be rotated has the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation, but the image to be rotated may have the center of rotation at an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. May be good. Further, the image to be rotated may be rotated around a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated. It may be rotated as an axis. Further, in this embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of each image in the image to be rotated is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be different depending on the distance from the center of rotation. For example, the farther the distance from the center of rotation is, the slower the angular velocity of rotation of each image may be. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the impression that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks. Further, in the present embodiment, an effect of changing the change icon is performed during the rotation display notice effect as a notice of the symbol change display being executed. Therefore, by performing these effects at the same time, it may be possible to synergistically raise expectations for the special figure variation game being executed.

(Example 2)
An example of the production of the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (a) to 18 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. FIG. 18A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as shown in FIG. 17A. Next, FIG. 18 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 17 (b). Next, in FIG. 18C, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 ends, and the variable icon display area 940 is displayed. The variable icon 941 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon 952 appears by the increasing animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 18 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 18D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

In FIG. 18E, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Next, FIG. 18 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 17 (f). Next, FIG. 18 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 17 (g). Next, FIG. 18 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 17 (h). Next, FIG. 18 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed, which is the same as FIG. 17 (i). It shows the state.

FIG. 18J shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 18 (k) shows a decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a pending change image h2, a character image h3 of the palace, a blowout image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the palace, a decorative frame f2, and a decorative frame f2. An image (holding icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.) displayed inside, and a blowout image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "rotation target image" in this embodiment. (A) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the center of rotation. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the decorative frame f1 and the image displayed in the decorative frame f1 (holding number display, first 4 Symbol images) (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as “non-rotation target images” in this embodiment) are not rotated, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotation target images does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 18 (k) The target image is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect.

FIG. 18 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 18 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 18 (l), the rotation target image is displayed as a whole without being cut off.

FIG. 18 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 18 (l). Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decorative frame f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative frame f2. The decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative frame f2.

FIG. 18 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 18 (m). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, in FIG. 18 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 18 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. In addition, a part of the character image h3 of the palace, a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are displayed so as to be cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. To.

FIG. 18 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 18 (n). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in FIG. 18 (o), the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 18 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image h2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 18 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of the 950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation.

FIG. 18 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 18 (o). Shown. The image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Further, the pending change image h2 shown in FIG. 18 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon are erased, and the change in the mode in which the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The icon is displayed. Next, in FIG. 18 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 18 (p). , Indicates a state in which the image to be rotated has rotated once and returned to the original display state. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 18 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. For the non-rotating target image, the fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area and the hold number display displayed in the hold number display area are used. For this reason, the image that conveys important information for the player is not rotated.

(Example 3)
An example of the production of the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 19 (a) to 19 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. 19 (a) to 19 (h) show the same state as in FIGS. 18 (a) to 18 (h). Next, in FIG. 19 (i), the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the lower right portion of the effect display area 208d. The character image h3 of the palace and the decorative frame f2 are displayed overlapping, and a part (chin part) of the character image h3 of the palace is hidden by the decorative frame f2. Further, FIG. 19 (i) shows the same state except that the display positions of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the hall and the character image h3 of the hall are different from those of FIG. 18 (i). Next, FIG. 19 (j) shows the same state except that the display positions of the balloon image representing the lines of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h3 of the palace are different from those of FIG. 18 (j).

FIG. 19 (k) shows a balloon image representing the lines of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace (hereinafter, in this embodiment, these images are referred to as “). (Sometimes referred to as a “rotation target image”) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment, the image displayed in the decorative frame f1, the decorative frame f1, the decorative frame f2, and the decorative frame f2 are displayed. The rotation display of the image and the blowout image representing the dialogue of the grandfather character (hereinafter, these images may be referred to as "non-rotation target image" in this example) is not executed, and the non-rotation target image is not executed. Aspect ratio does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image.

In FIG. 19 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 19 (k) The aspect ratio of the target image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in the character image h3 of the palace, the hidden chin portion is displayed. Further, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is cut off in the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, FIG. 19 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (k) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 19 (m) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (l) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 19 (n) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 19 (m). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in FIG. 19 (n), the pending change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image in the middle symbol display area 208b, the right symbol display area 208c, and the character of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. It is displayed overlapping with the image h3. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 19 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 19 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 19 (n). The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, FIG. 19 (o) shows a state in which an effect (animation of changing the variable icon) for changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In the effect of the present embodiment, the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is displayed so as to fall at a position different from the change icon of the change target. In addition, the variable icon of the non-rotating target image changes from a black circle to a form in which the characters "heat" are drawn in a circle at the timing when lightning is generated from the pending change image h2 and the effect image is displayed. ing. In this embodiment, since the changing variable icon is not hidden by the effect image, the changed variable icon can be visually recognized earlier than when the changing variable icon is hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 19 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 19 (o) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. The pending change image h2, the lightning image, and the effect image have been erased. Next, FIG. 19 (q) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the state of FIG. 19 (p) and returned to the original state. Shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio. Next, in FIG. 19 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the non-rotation target image is not rotated when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed. As the non-rotating target image, an image such as a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area, a hold number display, a hold icon, and a variable icon displayed in the hold number display area is used. For this reason, the image that conveys important information for the player is not rotated.

(Example 4)
An example of the production of the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a) to 20 (r) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. 20 (a) to 20 (i) show the same state as FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (i).

FIG. 20J shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. Further, FIG. 20J shows a decorative frame f2, an image displayed in the decorative frame f2 (holding icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1. It has been erased.

FIG. 20 (k) shows a balloon image showing the lines of the decorative symbol, the pending change image h2, the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, in this embodiment, The “rotation target image”) indicates a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the image display area as the rotation center. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, unlike the rotation display notice effect shown in the first embodiment of the present embodiment, the image displayed in the decorative frame f1 and the decorative frame f1 (hereinafter, in this example, These images may be referred to as "non-rotating target images"), and the rotation display is not executed, and the aspect ratio of the non-rotating target image does not change. Further, the non-rotation target image is displayed with priority over the rotation target image. The rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Further, in FIG. 20 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 20 (k) The aspect ratio of the target image changes according to the aspect ratio of the screen having an aspect ratio of 3: 4.

FIG. 20 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 20 (k). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, in FIG. 20 (m), the image to be rotated was rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 20 (l). Indicates the state. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Further, the decorative frame f1 is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol, and the decorative frame f1 is displayed with priority over the decorative symbol. Next, in FIG. 20 (n), the image to be rotated was rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 20 (m). Indicates the state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. Further, in FIG. 20 (n), the hold change image h2 is displayed as a rotation target image during the execution of the rotation display notice effect, and the hold change image h2g is a decoration displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed overlapping with the design and the character image h3 of the palace. The pending change image h2 displayed in FIG. 20 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon.

FIG. 20 (o) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 20 (n). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, FIG. 20 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. The effect is different from the effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon during the rotation display notice effect of the first embodiment and the second embodiment of the present embodiment, and the lightning generated from the pending change image h2 is changed. It is displayed so that it does not fall on the target variable icon. Further, the variable icon of the non-rotating target image is displayed in a circle at the position of the variable icon display area 940 before the rotation display notice effect is executed at the timing when the effect image is displayed due to the lightning generated from the pending change image h2. The variable icon 942 in the form in which the characters "heat" are drawn temporarily overlaps with the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3", and takes precedence over the pending change image h2 and "decoration 3" to the front side. It is displayed. Therefore, the player can temporarily confirm that the variable icon has changed.

FIG. 20 (p) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 20 (o). Shown. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 3: 4. In addition, the pending change image h2, the lightning image, the effect image, and the change icon 941 have been deleted. Next, in FIG. 20 (q), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 19 (p). It shows the restored state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio. In addition, the erased decorative frame f2, the image displayed in the decorative frame f2 (hold icon, variable icon, merchant character image h1, etc.), and the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 are displayed. There is. Next, in FIG. 20 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, when the rotation target image is rotated and displayed, the images such as the hold icon and the variable icon, which are important information for the player, are intentionally not displayed. , It may be possible to make the player pay attention to the rotation display of the rotation target image. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the effect of changing the variable icon is performed even though the variable icon is not displayed. For this reason, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, it may be possible to satisfy the player's expectation by displaying only the variable icon that has changed temporarily during the effect of changing the variable icon. Further, the variable icon may be temporarily or may not be displayed until the rotation display of the rotation target image is completed. In this case, since it takes a predetermined time from the end of the change animation of the change icon to the display of the change icon, it may be possible to amplify the expectation of the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the effect of changing the hold icon may be performed even though the hold icon is not displayed.

(Example 5)
An example of the production of the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (a) to 21 (l) show the effect of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. Further, the pachinko machine 100 used in this embodiment and Examples 6 to 9 described later has a sub-display device 209 mounted on the movable body 225 for production. The movable body 225 for effect can be two-dimensionally moved up and down and rotated in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. The effect movable body 225 may be capable of operating three-dimensionally. Further, the sub-display device 209 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative patterns and effects, and is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display) in the present embodiment. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the sub display device 209, it may be configured to be able to display various effects and various game information even if it is not a liquid crystal display device. For example, a dot matrix display device. Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLumisense) display device, a reel (drum) type display device, a leaf type display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. Further, the sub display device 209 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400 in the same manner as the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub-display device 209 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 21A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed as a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 21A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 21A, the sub display device 209 (effect movable body 225) is located at the initial position.

FIG. 21B shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. As described above, in FIG. 21B, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is executed.

FIG. 21C shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons is completed and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 21C shows a state in which the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. In this example, the character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 21D shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation display of the character image h3 of the palace is executed in the sub display device 209. FIG. 21D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 209 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “rotation target image” in this example) has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise. Further, in FIG. 21D, the rotation target image is displayed with the aspect ratio of the image changed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio matching the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the sub display device 209), whereas the image to be rotated is shown in FIG. 21 (d). The aspect ratio of the image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 21 (e) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 21 (d). Is shown. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 21 (f) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is in the state shown in FIG. Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5.

FIG. 21 (g) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 21 (f). ing. Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image changes to the aspect ratio of the rotation target image before rotation. Next, FIG. 21 (h) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 21 (g). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, FIG. 21 (i) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 21 (h). Is shown. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Next, FIG. 21 (j) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 21 (e). Is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has changed to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 7: 5. Next, in FIG. 21 (k), the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 21 (j). It shows the state of returning to. Further, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio before rotation. Next, in FIG. 21 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the sub-display device 209, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change when the rotation display of the rotation target image displayed on the sub display device 209 is performed. A character image is used as the rotation target image. By changing the aspect ratio of the character image, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, which may have an impact on the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated once (360 °), but it may be configured to rotate one or more rotations. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the image to be rotated, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be.

Further, the aspect ratio of the rotation target image may change in relation to the rotation angle of the rotation target image. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the rotation target image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the rotation target image as a variable, and the image stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. A display image may be generated from the data using the work area of the VRAM 436. In addition, the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated may change randomly. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 determines the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated using random numbers, and based on the aspect ratio, the display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data stored in the ROM 406. It may be generated. Further, the display area of the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the rotation target image, or the rotation target image may be enlarged or reduced so as to keep the display area of the rotation target image constant. The aspect ratio may change.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation target image has the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center, but the rotation target image may have an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the rotation center. May be good. Further, the rotation target image may be rotated around a straight line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as a rotation axis, or a straight line passing through an arbitrary position of the image display area of the sub display device 209. It may rotate as a rotation axis.

Further, in this embodiment, the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated is constant, but the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be different depending on the distance from the center of rotation. For example, the farther the distance from the center of rotation is, the slower the angular velocity of rotation of the image to be rotated may be. In this case, it may be possible to give the player the illusion that the image to be rotated is rotating faster than it looks.

(Example 6)
An example of the production of the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 22 (a) to 22 (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 22A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed as a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 22A shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is located at a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 has a hold display area 209b for displaying a hold number display image at the lower left. In FIG. 22A, in the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209, “1” indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 1 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 22B shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the hold / variable icon is displayed in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208. The moving animation between them is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In this way, the movement animation between the hold / change icons is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed as the hold number display image.

FIG. 22C shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons is completed and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. Further, FIG. 22C shows a state in which the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 22D shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the character image h3 of the palace is rotated by 360 ° counterclockwise. FIG. 22D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the sub display device 209 moves from the front position of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower position, and rotates 45 ° counterclockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the upper left part of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated by °.

FIG. 22 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 22 (d). Is shown. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed with ° rotation (90 ° rotation in total). Next, in FIG. 22 (f), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 22 (e). Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper left portion of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as rotated (rotated by 135 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 22 (g), the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 22 (f). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 180 ° in total).

FIG. 22 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 22 (g). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b in the upper right part of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 209. Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. (Rotated by 225 ° in total) is displayed. Next, in FIG. 22 (i), the sub display device 209 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 22 (h). Shows the state of Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed (rotated by 270 ° in total).

FIG. 22 (j) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 22 (i). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 209b at the lower right of the sub display device 209 has been moved to the original position at the lower left of the sub display device 209. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 315 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 22 (k), the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 22 (j) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation (total 360 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 209b is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 209. It is displayed by rotating (rotating 360 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 22 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the palace, and the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the variable icon 941 by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 209. Further, when the sub display device 209 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 209 is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, the hold display area 209b of the sub display device 209 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 209 as viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 209. Therefore, during the rotation of the sub-display device 209, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 209, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to rotate the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be rotated. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub display device 209 at the same time or continuously, an effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be performed. The decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 209 may be immovably fixed to the game board 200.

(Example 7)
An example of the production of the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a) to 23 (l) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 23 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 21 (a). Next, FIG. 23 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 21 (b). Next, in FIG. 23 (c), the decorative symbol variable display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon display area The variable icon 941 is displayed on the 940. Further, FIG. 23C shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 209a of the sub-display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 23D shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 23D shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 209. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Next, FIGS. 23 (e) to 23 (k) show a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 23 (e) to 23 (k), the character image h3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. Therefore, during the rotation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace is always visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotating. Next, in FIG. 23 (l), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, the sub-display device 209 erases the character image h3 of the palace, and the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the variable icon 941 by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward. The animation is running.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 209, the character image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 209 at the same speed. , The character image is displayed in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 209 is rotating, the image displayed on the sub-display device does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, but the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. In some cases, the character image may be rotated at a speed different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 209, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 209, or at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 209. The character image may be rotated at different speeds.

(Example 8)
An example of the production of the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 24. 24 (a) to 24 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 24A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 21A. Next, FIG. 24 (b) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed on the sub-display device 209, showing the same state as in FIG. 23 (c). .. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 24 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the palace character image h3, and the princess character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 24 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 24 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. FIG. 24 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (b-2).

FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 24 (c) to 24 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 24C shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 209, is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 24 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 24 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 24 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 24 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (c-1). FIG. 24 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 24 (c).

FIG. 24D shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 24 (c). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player in the lower left. Further, FIG. 24 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 24 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 24 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 24 (d-2) uses the work area of VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (d-1). FIG. 24 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (d-2), and the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (e). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 24 (d).

FIG. 24 (e) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 209. Further, FIG. 24 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 24 (e-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 24 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 24 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 24 (c-2). In FIG. 24 (e-3), an image is displayed on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (c-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 24D is shown. FIG. 24 (e-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 24 (c-3).

In FIG. 24 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, in FIG. 24 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 24 (e) to return to the original state. It shows the state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4. FIG. 24 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 24 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 24 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 24 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 24 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 24 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 24 (b-2). FIG. 24 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 24 (f-2), and the sub-display device 209 is clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 24 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 24 (f) is shown. FIG. 24 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 24 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is rotated at the same speed in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 209 while rotating the sub display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess that was cut off in the sub display device 209 before the rotation display notice effect is executed is the rotation display of the image displayed on the sub display device 209. Is displayed on the sub-display device 209. Further, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 is rotated by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this implementation, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed by rotating the sub display device 209, but the character corresponding to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed is displayed. You may try to do it. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the palace. Characters may be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect.

(Example 9)
An example of the production of the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a) to 25 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 25 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 21 (a). Next, in FIG. 25B, the decorative symbol variation display is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon ends, and the variation icon display area The 940 shows the state in which the variable icon 941 is displayed. Further, in FIG. 25B, the sub-display device 209 moves downward, and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209, and the character image h1'of the merchant is displayed in the lower left of the sub-display device 209. It shows the state that was done. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, the merchant character image h1'is the same character image as the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970. Further, FIG. 25 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) has a princess character image h3 and a princess character image h4 at the lower left of the palace character image h3, and the princess character image h3 and the princess character image h4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 25 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (b-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data in which the character image h1'of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 25 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (b-2). Further, the character image h1'of the merchant is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) is displayed with priority over the character image h1'of the merchant. It may be displayed with priority.

25 (c) to 25 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 25 (c) to 25 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 25 (c) to 25 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 25 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b) to the image display area of the sub-display device 209 by rotating the sub-display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 209, is displayed in the lower right of the character image h1'in a manner in which the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 25 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 25 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (c-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 25 (c-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (c-2), and the sub-display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (c).

FIG. 25 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c). .. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209 can be seen in the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c) by rotating the sub display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the right side of the character image h1'of the merchant in a mode in which the character image h4 of the princess is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 25 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 25 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the center from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (d-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 25 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (d-2), and the sub display device 209 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (c). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (d).

FIG. 25E shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 25 (d) to the image display area of the sub display device 209 by rotating the sub display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which the center is rotated by 15 ° clockwise. Further, in the sub-display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player at the lower right of the character image h1', and the other part is displayed from the sub-display device 209. It is out of stock. Further, FIG. 25 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 25 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 25 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (e-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 25 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image h1'read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 25 (e-3) displays an image on the sub display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (e-2), and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (d) is shown.

In FIG. 25 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, in FIG. 25 (f), the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub display device 209 from the state shown in FIG. 25 (e) to return to the original state. It shows the state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image h1'displayed at the lower left of the sub-display device 209 can be changed from the state shown in FIG. 25 (e) to the image display area of the sub-display device 209 by rotating the sub-display device 209. It is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated 30 ° clockwise with the center as the center of rotation and returned to its original position. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4. FIG. 25 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 25 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 25 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 25 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 209 in the state of FIG. 25 (f). The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 25 (f-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 25 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data on which the character image h1'of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 25 (b-2). FIG. 25 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 209 based on the display data shown in FIG. 25 (f-2), and the sub-display device 209 is clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 25 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (f) is shown. FIG. 25 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 25 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (character image h3 of the palace) displayed on the sub display device 209 in a mode in which the sub display device 209 is rotated but does not rotate when viewed from the player. And the princess character image h4) and the character image (merchant character image h1') displayed in a rotating manner as viewed from the player are displayed. The rotating sub-display device 209 simultaneously displays a character image displayed in a non-rotating mode as seen by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating mode as seen by the player. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.

(Example 10)
An example of the production of the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (a) to 26 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 26A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 24A. Next, FIG. 26 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 24 (b). Further, FIG. 26B shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is moved downward and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed on the sub-display device 209. The character image h3 of the palace is an image used for the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect.

26 (c) to 26 (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves in the left-right direction in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 26 (c) to 26 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 209 before moving in the left-right direction.

FIG. 26C shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 26B. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 209a of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 209. There is. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the character image h4 of the princess that has been cut off in the sub display device 209 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in this example, the princess character image h4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 26D shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 has moved from the state shown in FIG. 26C in the left lateral direction. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 209 in the left direction. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed so as to be visually recognized as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed in the upper left portion.

FIG. 26 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 26 (d). Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 209, a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image h4 is cut off. Further, FIG. 26E shows a state immediately before the end of the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect.

In FIG. 26 (f), "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Indicates the notified state. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of “◯” indicating that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is displayed. Further, FIG. 26 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 26 (e) and returns to the original state. Further, the character image h3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 209 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 209. Therefore, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a non-moving manner when viewed from the player. Further, the sub-display device 209 does not display the princess character image h4.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 209 is moved in the opposite direction to the sub display device 209 at the same speed while the sub display device 209 is horizontally moved. , The character image h3 of the palace is displayed in a mode in which the player does not move as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image h4, which has been cut off in the sub display device 209, is displayed on the sub display device 209 before the horizontal movement display notice effect is executed. By performing the horizontal movement display, it is displayed on the sub display device 209. Further, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves by a predetermined distance or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 209, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present implementation, the character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image h4, the sub-display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance to display the enemy character of the palace. May be displayed. Further, the aspect ratio of the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the horizontal movement display notice effect.

(Example 11)
An example of the production of the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 27. 27 (a) to 27 (n) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. Further, the pachinko machine 100 used in this embodiment and the eleventh embodiment described later has a movable body 990 for directing. The movable body 990 for effect can be moved and rotated two-dimensionally in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). .. The effect movable body 990 may be able to move and rotate three-dimensionally. Further, the movable body 990 for production has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a character string image of "CR metropolitan machine" is displayed on the surface thereof.

FIG. 27A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. Has been done. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 and the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed as a white circle is displayed. Further, FIG. 27A shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 is located at the upper center position of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 27A, the effect movable body 990 is located at the initial position.

FIG. 27B shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 951 is executed. Further, in the hold display area 209b at the lower left of the sub display device 209, "0" indicating that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 0 is displayed.

In FIG. 27 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons ends, and the variable icon 941 is displayed in the variable icon display area 940. Indicates the state in which is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. Further, FIG. 27 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 27D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 27 (e) shows a state in which the effect of moving the movable body 990 downward (hereinafter, may be referred to as “logo drop effect”) is executed. The logo drop effect is an effect used for notifying the "logo drop" shown in the figure of FIG. 16B. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed straddling the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect. Further, in FIG. 27 (e), after the effect image h5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 1 shows a state in which it is notified that the result of the variable game is out of order. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed. Further, FIG. 27E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. The logo drop effect shown in FIG. 27 (e) may be used as an effect in conjunction with a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle, or is displayed in a black circle. It may be used as an effect in conjunction with the display of the special figure 1 hold icon 953, or may be used alone as an effect of a look-ahead notice. Next, FIG. 27 (f) shows a state in which the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 27 (e) and returns to the original position shown in FIG. 27 (a). Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased as the movable body for effect 990 moves upward.

FIG. 27 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931 to indicate the state immediately after the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 952 are started. Further, FIG. 27 (g) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1 displayed in the navigation character display area 970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 208d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 27 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 27 (h), an image of the character string "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image h1, suggesting that the character image h3 of the palace, which will be described later, appears. The production is being executed. The character image h3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 27 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed at the lower right of the effect display area 208d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h1 of the merchant.

FIG. 27 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the lines of the merchant character image h1, and then "chance!" The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 27 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. Further, in FIG. 27 (k), all the images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “rotation target image” in this example) are the image display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state of being rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the region as the center of rotation. Further, in FIG. 27 (k), the aspect ratio of the image to be rotated is changed and displayed. The image to be rotated before rotation is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208), whereas the rotation shown in FIG. 27 (k) The aspect ratio of the target image changes to an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 4: 5. Further, a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c and a part of the navigation character display area 970 are cut off from the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 27 (k), in order to make the rotation display notice effect stand out, the effect movable body 990 moves to a position above the decorative symbol display device 208 that cannot be seen by the player.

FIG. 27 (l) shows a state in which the image to be rotated is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 27 (k). Shown. Further, the image to be rotated is displayed at an aspect ratio that matches the screen having an aspect ratio of 1: 1. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 209, the image to be rotated is not completely cut off. Further, FIG. 27 (l) shows a state in which the logo drop effect in which the movable body 990 for effect moves downward from the position (not shown) in FIG. 27 (k) is executed during the rotation display notice effect. .. Further, the effect image h5 is displayed as a rotation target image on the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in FIG. 27 (l), unlike the state shown in FIG. 27 (e), the effect image h5 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d in a mode rotated by 90 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player. ing. Further, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 27 (l) is smaller than the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device in the state of FIG. 27 (e). The size. The same applies to the hold icon, the variable icon, the merchant character image h1, and the effect image h5.

FIG. 27 (m) shows that the image to be rotated is rotated 270 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 27 (j). It shows the returned state. The aspect ratio of the image to be rotated has returned to the original aspect ratio and the original size. Further, in FIG. 27 (m), the effect movable body 990 moves upward from the position of FIG. 27 (l) and is located at the position in the original state (the position in the state shown in FIG. 27 (a)). .. Further, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the effect image h5 is erased. Next, in FIG. 27 (n), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of alignment. It indicates the state in which it was notified that there is. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is placed at a position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect is displayed and the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a production that is displayed. The effect image displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 2990 may make the player emphasize the movement of the effect movable body 990, and is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990. Since the effect image is displayed at an unexpected position, the effect image may give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, the jackpot reliability may differ depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

(Example 12)
A production example of Example 12 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) to 28 (f) show the effects of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 28 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 27 (a). Next, FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 27 (b). Next, in FIG. 28 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, showing the same state as in FIG. 27 (c).

FIG. 28D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, FIG. 28 (d) shows a state in which the effect (hereinafter, may be referred to as “logo drop effect”) in which the effect movable body 990 moves downward from the position shown in FIG. Shown. The logo drop effect is an effect used for notifying the "logo drop" shown in the figure of FIG. 16B. Further, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image h5 is displayed straddling the position behind the effect movable body 990 and the peripheral position behind the effect movable body 990. The effect image h5 is an image used for the logo drop effect.

FIG. 28E shows a state in which the island simultaneous effect is started during the execution of the logo drop effect. The island simultaneous production is a production in which pachinko machines of the same model installed on the same island facility perform the same production at the same timing. In the island simultaneous production of the present embodiment, the mode in which the princess character image h6 is singing is displayed on the left side of the production display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed at the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string image of "Island simultaneous production start!" Is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in FIG. 28 (e), the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the effect image h5 displayed in FIG. 28 (d) is at a position different from the position displayed in FIG. 28 (d). The reduced display is shown in the lower right corner. Further, FIG. 28E shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is executed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and black is displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle is displayed. The logo drop effect of this embodiment may be used as an effect suggesting that a change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon 952 changes from a white circle to a black circle is performed, or a pre-reading notice may be used. It may be used alone as a production.

In FIG. 28 (f), the movable body for production 990 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 28 (d) and returns to the original position (position shown in FIG. 28 (a)) during the simultaneous island production. Is shown. In addition, a character string image of "island simultaneous performance" is displayed on the right side of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the island simultaneous production is in progress. Further, the effect image h5 reduced to the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c reduced to the lower right of the decorative symbol display device 208 have "decoration 2". -Decoration 4-Decoration 2 "is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Further, by moving the variable icon 941 displayed in the variable icon display area 940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 941 is executed.

As described above, in the logo drop effect of the present embodiment, when the effect movable body 990 is operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at the position behind the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the display state and the effect movable body 990 are operated in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect image is displayed at a position different from the back of the effect movable body 990 in the decorative symbol display device 208. There is a state. The state in which the effect image is displayed at a position different from the position behind the effect movable body 990 on the decorative pattern display device 208 may give the player unexpectedness, and may give the player unexpectedness. It may be possible to provide a topic. In addition, the jackpot reliability may differ depending on the size of the effect image, the display color, and the display position.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the first embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 28.

(A1)
A game table provided with an image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 209).
The image display means may rotate and display the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace).
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIGS. 17 (j) to (q) or 21 (c) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the rotation display of the first image is performed, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it can make a strong impression on the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as the first image, or other than these images. The image of may be the first image.

(A2)
The game console described in (A1) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the hold icon or the hold number display) may not rotate (for example, FIGS. 19 (j) to (q), or FIGS. 22 (c) to 22 (c) to ( k) See),
A game table characterized by that.
(A3)
The game console described in (A2) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image (for example, the fourth symbol) does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 18 (j) to (q)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, when the rotation display of the first image is performed, the rotation display of the second image may not be performed, so that the rotation display of the first image is emphasized. At the same time, the second image can be clearly seen by the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images may be used as a second image. May use a different image as the second image.

(A4)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A3) above.
When the rotation display is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation display is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation display. (See, for example, FIGS. 24 (b)-(d)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, the image that was cut off in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation display of the first image. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.

(A5)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A4) above.
When the rotation display is performed, the image (for example, a decorative pattern) displayed on the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display. Yes (see, for example, FIGS. 17 (i)-(k)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, when the image displayed in the image display means before the rotation display of the first image is performed is cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display of the first image. Because of this, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.

(A6)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above.
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(A7)
The game console according to any one of (A1) to (A5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(B1)
Movable body for production (for example, movable body for production 990) and
Image display means (for example, decorative pattern display device 208) and
It is a game table equipped with
In the first state (for example, FIG. 27 (e)) in which the first image (for example, the effect image h5) is displayed at the first position when the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means. The display state of the effect image h5 shown, or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 28 (d)) may be obtained.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (e) or FIG. 28 (d)).
The first image is an effect image and
Display of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 27 (l) in a second state in which the first image is displayed at a second position when the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means. It may be in a state or the display state of the effect image h5 shown in FIG. 28 (e).
The second position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (l) or FIG. 28 (e)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, when the movable body for production is operated in front of the image display means, the first image is placed at a second position different from the position behind the movable body for production. Since the effect image of the first image may be displayed in the second state, the effect image of the first image will be displayed at a position unexpected to the player, giving the player unexpectedness. May be possible.

(B2)
The game console described in (B1) above.
In the first state, the first image may be displayed straddling the first position and the third position.
The third position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means (see, for example, FIG. 27 (e) or FIG. 28 (d)).
A game table characterized by that.
(B3)
The game console according to (B1) or (B2) above.
The size of the first image in the first state is the first size.
The size of the first image in the second state is the third size.
The third size is smaller than the first size (see, for example, FIGS. 27 (e), (f), or 28 (d), (e)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the size of the first image in the first state and the size of the first image in the second state are different, so that the player can enjoy the variation of the first image. It may be possible to do so.

(B4)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B3) above.
In the first state, the second image (for example, a decorative pattern) may be displayed in the first orientation (see, for example, FIG. 27 (e)).
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second direction (direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the first direction) (see, for example, FIG. 27 (l)).
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second orientation is a orientation different from the first orientation.
A game table characterized by that.
(B5)
The game console described in (B4) above.
The size of the second image in the first state is the second size.
The size of the second image in the second state is the fourth size.
The fourth size is smaller than the second size (see, for example, FIGS. 27 (e) and 27 (l)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the size of the second image in the first state and the size of the second image in the second state are different, so that the player can enjoy the variation of the second image. It may be possible to do so. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images may be used as a second image. May use a different image as the second image.

(B6)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(B7)
The game console according to any one of (B1) to (B5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(C1)
An image display unit (for example, a sub-display device 209) capable of displaying a production image for producing a game, and
A driving means for driving the image display unit (for example, a movable body for directing 225) and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
The image display is performed during a period (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (rotational direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display the first video (for example, the video of the character image h3 of the palace or the video of the character image h4 of the princess).
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess) moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement as a notification means. Can make movements that are not seen on an extraordinary basis, and may allow the player to forget about the daily routine and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, the entire period from the start of movement of the image display unit in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period, or an effect different from a certain effect may be used as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.

(C2)
The game console described in (C1) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, the facial expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed, but the facial expression of the first image is shown. , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 24, the face of the palace, which was not displayed in FIG. 24 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 24 (b), and becomes a little smile in FIG. 24 (c). An animation may be performed such that a full smile is obtained in 24 (d), a slight smile is returned in FIG. 24 (e), and a true face is returned in FIG. 24 (f). Further, the mode in which the first image (for example, the character image h3 of the palace) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image h3 of the palace moves. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating the dialogue to the entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.

(C3)
The game console according to (C1) or (C2) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.

In a game table equipped with this configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is one when a certain effect is triggered (for example, the timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, to the left), and triggered by another effect (for example, the timing to start the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether the probability change at the end of the big hit starts), the image The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Further, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction. In this case, the player is asked to move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to forget more everyday feelings and concentrate on the game by rotating and moving with.

(C4)
The game console described in (C3) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image display unit appears to the player to move, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not appear to move, so it is unusual as a notification means. When it is possible to perform a similar operation, and the notification itself by the image display unit display can fulfill the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both an impactful operation and notification. There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In that case, the second speed is higher than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves and rotates slowly. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is the image display unit. By moving or rotating so as to slowly follow the movement or rotation of the image, it may be possible to forget the everyday feeling and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, by slowly moving and rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to the case where it is not moving. It may be possible to serve as a notification.

(C5)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C4) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image h1') is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(C6)
The game console described in (C5) above.
During the first period, the second image is configured to not move in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.

The game console provided with this configuration may be configured so that a second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the movement of the image display unit and the image is unified and has more impact. The production operation may be feasible.

(C7)
The game console according to (C5) or (C6) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the facial expression, the outer shape, etc. of the second image (merchant character image h1') are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console having the configuration, The facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 25, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 25 (b) and slightly in FIG. 25 (c). An animation may be performed in which the face becomes rugged, the face becomes rugged in FIG. 25 (d), the face returns to a slightly rugged face in FIG. 25 (e), and the face returns to a straight face in FIG. 25 (f). Further, the mode in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating the dialogue to the entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.

(C8)
The game console according to (C3) or (C4) above.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in (C1) above means "rotation by the drive of the drive means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (C1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction (for example, a circumferential direction) about the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(C9)
The game console described in (C8) above.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.

(C10)
The game console according to any one of (C1) to (C7) above.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in (C1) above means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in (C1) above means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.

The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the left-right direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the leftward orientation and the rightward orientation. The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the upper left, lower right, upper right, and lower left directions.

A modified example of the configuration described in the examples according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, when the driving means (movable body for effect 225) shown in FIGS. 21 to 26 is a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, and front-rear direction when viewed from the player). There may be. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a movable body for directing. Further, before the image display unit rotates or moves, the movable body for production moves from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the movable body for production is in the movable state performs the rotation or movement operation. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more when the effect operation shown in FIG. 23 is performed than when the effect operation shown in FIG. 22 is performed. The mode may be configured so that the mode is likely to be a big hit mode, and the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed when the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed during the symbol variation display. The symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a jackpot mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 22 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 23 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. Further, although FIGS. 22 and 23 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 22 is rotated, the image displayed on the sub display device is also rotated. The effect of being visually recognized by the player is different from the effect of being visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub-display device is not rotated together when the sub-display device shown in FIG. 23 is rotated. It may be configured to be the production of. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights against the musician, and "the other production of another production" is a production in which the princess dances. May be good. One type of "one of the other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, or one type of "the other effect of another effect" may be installed. , Multiple types may be installed. Further, when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 22, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in FIG. 23, when the sub-display device is rotated, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger. On the contrary, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 23, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. At least a part (or all of) of the images displayed on the sub-display device are rotated together when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 22 rather than the number of types of effects. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 22 and the effect example shown in FIG. 23 may be combined. For example, during the period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from rotating the image displayed on the sub-display so that the player can see it to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed B (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of B'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player sees it as spinning slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of C (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of C'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. Further, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Rotate at least part or all of the image at speed D (eg 60 rpm) in other directions (eg clockwise) so that the player sees only the sub-display as rotating. Let me. In the next period (period E), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of E (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of E'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of F (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of F'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. During the period (period G) before the end of rotation of the sub display device in the next period, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that the player can visually recognize it so that it rotates together with the sub display device. In this way, as in the examples from period A to period D, as the period during which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. , The sub-display device rotates, and by shifting to a state where the player can see part or all of the display of the sub-display device as if it is stopped, a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image It may be possible to perform a certain production. Further, as in the examples from period D to period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By making the player visually recognize the changes in this way, it may be possible to create a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is displayed. It was configured to gradually increase the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device, but conversely, during periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and during the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. It may be configured so that the difference in speed is gradually reduced. Further, here, the image displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device is illustrated, but the same applies to the image displayed on the linearly moving sub-display device and the linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 to 57. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the following description except for FIGS. 39 and 40, the side closer to the player when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on the island equipment of the game store is referred to as "front" (front, front side, front side, front end, etc.). , And vice versa as "rear" (rear, rear, rear, rear end, etc.), vertically above the player as "up" (upper, upper, upper end, etc.), and vice versa. (Lower, lower, lower end, etc.), the horizontal left side as seen from the player is "left" (left side, left side, left end, etc.), and vice versa "right" (right side, right side, right end, etc.) ).

FIG. 29 is a schematic front view of the game board 1000 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged in a center case substantially in the center of the game area 124 formed by the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 drives a decorative pattern display device 208 and a lamp to produce an effect, and the details will be described later.

The game board 1000 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. As for the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232, since the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right side path, the ball entering the game ball falling on the right side path. Is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left side path. With respect to the variable winning opening 234, it is relatively easy for the game ball falling on the right path to enter, and it is relatively difficult for the game ball falling on the left path to enter due to the arrangement pattern of the game nails. In FIG. 29, the illustration of the game nail is omitted. On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 1 starting port 230, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails and the presence of the warp device 242 and the like, it is relatively easy for the game ball falling on the left side path to enter, and the right side path is used. It is relatively difficult for a falling game ball to enter. In the present embodiment, the right-handed machine is taken as an example, but it may be other than the right-handed machine. In addition, general winning openings (not shown) are provided on the right side route and the left side route.

On the front side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in a rollable area of the game ball, and a plurality of movable bodies are arranged in a non-rollable area of the game ball. Has been done. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has six movable bodies, that is, a movable body 1002, a movable body 1004, a movable body 1006, a movable body 1008, a movable body 1010, and a movable body 1012. These movable bodies are arranged in the order of the movable body 1010, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1002, the movable body 1006, 1008, and the movable body 1012 from the front side. The movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are arranged so that their positions in the front-rear direction are the same. Further, the movable body 1004 is arranged on the front surface side of the movable body 1002. The second sub-control unit 500 executes the drive control of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1004, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1010, and the movable body 1012. The drive control may be executed by the first sub-control unit 400.

The movable body 1002 has a horizontally long rectangular external shape when viewed from the front side. The movable body 1002 can move vertically behind the front stage 244. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position. Further, the movable body 1002 has a sub display device 1030 on the front side.

A liquid crystal display device is used for the sub display device 1030. The sub-display device 1030 has a horizontally long rectangular display area smaller than the decorative pattern display device 208, and displays one or a plurality of images to produce an effect. In this example, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of the seascape where the yacht floats. Although the sub-display device 1030 employs a liquid crystal display device, it does not have to be a liquid crystal display device as long as it can display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device may be used. , 7-segment display device, organic EL (ElectroLuminessence) display device, reel (drum) type display device, leaf type display device, plasma display, and other display devices including a projector may be adopted. Further, the display control of the sub display device 1030 is executed by the first sub control unit 400. The display control of the sub display device 1030 may be executed by the second sub control unit 500, or a display control unit that executes the display control may be newly provided. The display control unit may execute display control of the decorative symbol display device 208.

Further, the movable body 1002 includes an elongated illumination unit 1014a, an illumination unit 1014b, an illumination unit 1014c, and an illumination unit 1014d arranged so as to surround the sub display device 1030. The illumination unit 1014a is arranged on the left side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014b is arranged below the sub-display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014c is arranged on the right side of the sub display device 1030 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1014d is arranged above the sub-display device 1030 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination units 1014a to 1014d, and the illumination units 1014a to 1014d can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Further, the movable body 1004 is arranged in the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. The movable body 1004 has an external shape that imitates lightning. The movable body 1004 is outside the display area of the sub-display device 1030, and one point is fixed at the upper left portion of the movable body 1002. By being driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the movable body 1004 can rotate in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the sub display device 1030 with the one point as the center of rotation. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1004 is located at the operation completion position. The movable body 1004 overlaps with the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the state of being located at the operation completion position. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1004. The initial position of the movable body 1004 is a position in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 29. The movable body 1004 does not overlap the display area of the sub-display device 1030 when it is located at the initial position.

A movable body 1006 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1006 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001, and can move in the left-right direction. The movable body 1002 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission portion 1006a is provided at the upper portion and a transmission portion 1006b is provided at the lower portion. The transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1006 can be visually recognized via the transmitting portions 1006a and 1006b. The transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b may be provided so that the rear side can be visually recognized. A transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be arranged on the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b, and the transmissive portions 1006a and 1006b are openings. You may. Further, an elongated illumination unit 1016 is arranged at the right end on the front surface side of the movable body 1006. The illumination unit 1016 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1016, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1006. The movable body 1006 moves left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operating range of the movable body 1006 is from the position where the right end of the movable body 1006 is located to the left of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1006 is invisible to the player when it is located at the left end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position, it overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006. In addition, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized via the transparent portions 1006a and 1006b of the movable body 1006.

A movable body 1008 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1008 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and can move in the left-right direction. The movable body 1008 has a plate-like shape, and a transmission portion 1008a is provided at the upper portion and a transmission portion 1008b is provided at the lower portion. The transmission portions 1008a and 1008b have a horizontally long rectangular shape, and the rear side of the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized via the transmission portions 1008a and 1008b. The transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b may be visible on the rear side, a transparent plate such as an acrylic plate may be arranged on the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b, and the transmissive portions 1008a and 1008b are openings. You may. Further, an elongated illumination unit 1018 is arranged at the left end portion on the front surface side of the movable body 1008. The illumination unit 1018 is arranged so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination unit 1018, and the illumination unit 1016 can emit light in a plurality of colors.

Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper part of the movable body 1008. The movable body 1008 moves left and right with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. The operating range of the movable body 1008 is from the position where the left end of the movable body 1008 is located to the right of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. The movable body 1008 is invisible to the player when it is located at the right end of the operating range. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position. When the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position, it overlaps with a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1008. Further, a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be visually recognized through the transparent portions 1008a and 1008b of the movable body 1008.

The movable body 1006 functions as a left shutter, and the movable body 1008 functions as a right shutter. When the movable body 1006 moves to the right end of the moving range and the movable body 1008 moves to the left end of the moving range, the right end portion of the movable body 1006 and the left end portion of the movable body 1008 are in contact with each other. The effect of opening and closing the shutter is executed by the movable bodies 1006 and 1008.

A movable body 1010 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1010 has a horizontally long flat plate shape, and has a character string of "chance" on the front side. Further, the movable body 1010 can be moved in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). Further, when the movable bodies 1006 and 1008 are closed, the movable body 1010 can move in the vertical direction in front of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the movable body 1010 is located at the initial position.

The movable body 1012 is arranged in the upper left portion of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The movable body 1012 has an external shape imitating a lightning bolt similar to the movable body 1004. Further, the movable body 1012 is outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and one point is fixed at the upper left side of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. By being driven by a stepping motor (not shown), the movable body 1012 can rotate in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the one point as the center of rotation. The movable body 1012 can rotate 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1012 may be rotatable at 360 ° or more.

Further, on the game board 1000, one sensor for detecting whether the movable bodies 1002 to 1012 are located at the initial position is arranged for each movable body. The sensor is included in the effect movable body sensor 424 shown in FIG. Further, for example, a photo sensor is used as the sensor.

The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is arranged on the rear side of the movable bodies 1006 and 1008. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. In the state shown in FIG. 29, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, in the lower effect display area 208d, a white circular fluctuation icon a1, a white circular hold icon b1, a white circular hold icon b2, and a character "heat" in the white circle. The hold icon b3 on which is drawn and the black circular hold icon b4 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The hold icon b1 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the first hold order, the hold icon b2 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the second hold order, and the hold icon b3 indicates the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the third hold order. The holding of the special figure 1 variable game is shown, and the hold icon b4 shows the holding of the special figure 1 variable game having the fourth hold order. Further, in the effect display area 208d, a background image including an image of the sun, clouds, and a balloon is displayed. A part of the image of the sun is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun is visible to the player through the transmitting portion 1006a of the movable body 1006. Further, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible to the player through the transparent portion 1006b of the movable body 1006. Also, a part of the cloud image is hidden by the movable body 1002.

Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 includes an elongated illumination unit 1020, an illumination unit 1022, an illumination unit 1024, and an illumination unit 1026 arranged so as to surround the decorative symbol display device 208. The illumination unit 1020 is arranged on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1022 is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1024 is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. The illumination unit 1026 is arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction. LEDs of a plurality of colors are used as the light source of the illumination units 1020 to 1026, and the illumination units 1020 to 1026 can emit light in a plurality of colors. In the state shown in FIG. 29, the entire illumination unit 1024 and 1026 are visible to the player, and only a part of the upper portion of the illumination unit 1020 is visible to the player via the transmission unit 1006a. Is visible to the player through the transmissive portion 1008a only in part above.

Next, the movable body 1002 will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the front. Below the movable body 1002, a motor 1040, which is a driving source of the movable body 1002, is arranged. The motor 1040 is fixed to the center case of the game board 1000 so that the rotation axis is in the vertical direction. One end of the screw shaft 1042 is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor 1040 so that the drawing direction is the vertical direction.

A lower base 1044 is arranged between the movable body 1002 and the motor 1040. The lower base 1044 is fixed to the game board 1000. The motor 1040 and the lower base 1044 are arranged below the rear side of the front stage 244 and are invisible to the player. Further, the lower base 1044 has a receiving portion 1044a having a flat surface for receiving the movable body 1002 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1044b to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed on the left side. The receiving portion 1044a and the shaft fixing portion 1044b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1044a is located at a position higher than the shaft fixing portion 1044b. Therefore, when the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost part of the moving range, the movable body 1002 comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a but not with the shaft fixing portion 1044b.

Further, the receiving portion 1044a is provided with a through hole that penetrates the lower base 1044 in the vertical direction, and a slide bearing is arranged in the through hole. The screw shaft 1042 passes through the slide bearing and is supported by the slide bearing.

Further, in the state shown in FIG. 30A, the movable body 1004 is located at the initial position. The movable body 1004 can rotate about 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. The movable body 1004 may be rotatable by 60 ° or more (for example, 360 °).

30 (b) and 30 (c) show a state in which the movable body 1002 is viewed from the rear right side. In the state shown in FIG. 30B, the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 30C, the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost part of the moving range. As shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, the movable body 1002 includes a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a moving unit 1036. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002, and includes the movable body 1004, the lighting units 1014a to 1014d, and the sub display device 1030 as shown in FIG. 29.

The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a driver for the sub display device 1030, LEDs for the lighting units 1014a to 1014d, a driver for the LEDs, a motor for driving the movable body 1004, and gears. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 includes a rectangular window portion 1034a, a window portion 1034b, a window portion 1034c, a window portion 1034d (not shown in FIG. 30B), and a window portion 1034e on the rear side. The window portion 1034a is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014a, the window unit 1034b is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014b, the window unit 1034c is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014c, and the window unit 1034d is arranged behind the illumination unit 1014d. Has been done. A transparent plate is arranged on the window portions 1034a to 1034e, and the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034e can be visually recognized. An LED, an LED driver mounting board, a decorative lens, and the like are arranged on the front side of the window portions 1034a to 1034d. The windows 1034a to 1034d are used for inspection of the lighting unit. Further, the window portion 1034e is arranged behind the movable body 1004. A motor for driving the movable body 1004 and a gear fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor and transmitting power to the movable body 1004 are arranged on the front side of the window portion 1034e. The window portion 1034e is used for inspecting the drive mechanism of the movable body 1004.

The moving unit 1036 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape smaller than that of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and is arranged on the rear surface side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The moving unit 1036 has a motor for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and a gear internally which is fixed to the rotating shaft of the motor and transmits the power of the motor to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the moving unit 1036 are connected via a harness. Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is installed in the moving unit 1036 so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate around the display area of the sub display device 1030 in the same plane including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the initial posture. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 30B, and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In this way, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 also functions as a movable body.

When the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable unit 1036 are connected by using the connection unit (slip ring or the like) shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 to be described later, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction. In the direction of, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 180 degrees, it may be rotatable up to a predetermined angle exceeding 360 degrees, and there may be no limitation on the rotation angle.

Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with two through holes penetrating in the vertical direction. A nut is fixed to the through hole on the right side, and the screw shaft 1042 is fitted in the nut. The nut can be moved up and down by the rotation of the screw shaft 1042, and the movable body 1002 can be moved up and down. A guide shaft 1046 passes through the through hole on the left side. The movable body 1004 is guided by the guide shaft 1046 and can move up and down stably.

An upper base 1048 is arranged above the moving unit 1036. The upper base 1048 is fixed to a transparent plate (not shown) arranged at a position between the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1006 and 1008 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged at a position that is difficult for the player to see. The upper base 1048 has a receiving portion 1048a having a flat surface for receiving the moving unit 1036 on the right side, and a shaft fixing portion 1048b on the left side to which the guide shaft 1046 is fixed. A slide bearing is arranged on the receiving portion 1048b, and the other end of the screw shaft 1042 is supported by the slide bearing. Further, the receiving portion 1048a and the shaft fixing portion 1048b are different from each other, and the receiving portion 1048a is located at a position lower than the shaft fixing portion 1048b. Further, the moving unit 1036 has an upper surface portion 1036a having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1048a when moved to the uppermost position. As shown in FIG. 30B, when the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position, the upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 has a lower surface portion 1036b having a flat surface that comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044 when moved to the lowermost position. As shown in FIG. 30C, when the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position, the lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 contacts the receiving portion 1048a, but does not contact the shaft fixing portion 1048b.

Further, the moving unit 1036 is provided with a control means for controlling the moving operation of the movable body 1002 and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. Examples of the mobile control means arranged in the mobile unit 1036 include a microprocessor, a programmable IC, an ASIC, a DSP, a ROM, a RAM, an LSI, and a communication control circuit. The movement unit 1036 may include only one of these movement control means, or may include a plurality of them. Further, a harness (not shown) having one end connected to the sub display device 1030 extends from the rear side of the moving unit 1036, and the other end of the harness is arranged on the back surface side of the game board 1000 (for example,). It is connected to the first sub-board 160). The other end of the harness may be connected to the relay board, and the sub display device 1030 and the control board may be connected via the harness and the relay board.

Next, the operation of the movable body 1002 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 (b) and 30 (c). FIG. 30B shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position in the moving range. The upper surface portion 1036a of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1048a of the upper base 1048. The receiving portion 1048a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002.

From the state shown in FIG. 30B, when the motor 1040 is driven to rotate the screw shaft 1042 clockwise when viewed from below to above, the nut is fixed to the moving unit 1036 and the nut fitted to the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves below the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves downward.

FIG. 30C shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position in the moving range. The lower surface portion 1036b of the moving unit 1036 is in contact with the receiving portion 1044a of the lower base 1044. The receiving portion 1044a functions as a mechanical end of the movable body 1002. Further, when the screw shaft 1042 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from below to above by the motor 1040 from the state shown in FIG. 30 (c), it is fixed to the moving unit 1036 and the nut fitted in the screw shaft 1042 is screwed. It moves above the shaft 1042. As a result, the movable body 1002 moves upward.

Further, when the movable body 1002 is stopped at a position higher than the lowermost position, a load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 due to the weight of the movable body 1002. Therefore, a torque of a magnitude commensurate with the load is applied to the screw shaft 1042 by the motor 1040. .. As a result, the screw shaft 1042 can be prevented from rotating due to the load of its own weight of the movable body 1002, and the movable body 1002 can be stopped.

Further, if the power supply of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off for some reason while the movable body 1002 is stationary at a position higher than the lowermost position, the electric power for driving the motor 1040 cannot be obtained. Therefore, the load of the movable body 1002 causes the screw shaft 1042 to rotate clockwise when viewed from below, and the movable body 1002 moves until it comes into contact with the receiving portion 1044b of the lower base 1044. Even when the movable body 1002 moves downward by its own weight, the movable body 1002 can be received by the receiving portion 1044b, so that the movable body 1002 can be prevented from being damaged.

(Example 1)
31 and 32 show an example of the effect of the first embodiment of the present embodiment. 31 and 32 show the effect state in chronological order. 31 (a) to (q), (t), (u), (x) to (z), (a) to (d), and FIGS. 32 are the games of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29. The schematic front of the board 1000 is shown, FIGS. 31 (r) and 31 (s) show only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and FIGS. 31 (v) and 31 (w) show only the movable body 1002 extracted. In addition, in FIGS. 31 and 31 and later, the drawings of the normal drawing display device 210, the special drawing 1 display device 212, the special drawing 2 display device 214, the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218, the special drawing 2 holding lamp 220, and the high accuracy middle lamp 222 are omitted. However, the illustration of the game ball is also omitted.

FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 31A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is a position higher than the lowermost position shown in FIG. 30 (c) and a position closer to the lowermost position than the uppermost position shown in FIG. 30 (b). When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 31 (b) following FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 16A.

FIG. 31 (c) following FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 31 (d) following FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 31 and 31 onward, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 31 (e) following FIG. 31 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 31 (e).

FIG. 31 (f) following FIG. 31 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and the part of the image becomes invisible to the player. In the pachinko machine 100, when at least a part of a decorative pattern or a preview image (for example, an image of the sun, clouds, balloons, hold icons, variable icons, etc.) is overwrapped with a movable body and becomes invisible to the player. Is more likely to be a big hit in a running special figure variable game or a pending special figure variable game than in the case where at least a part of the decorative symbol or the preview image is not overwrapped with the movable body. It may be configured as follows.

FIG. 31 (g) following FIG. 31 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010. When the movable body 1010 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1010 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 31 (h) following FIG. 31 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved to the right from the initial position. A part of the image of the sun and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a, and a part of the image of clouds is visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006b. The image of the sun and the case where the movable body 1006 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 31 (g) and the case where the movable body 1006 is moved to the right from the initial position as shown in FIG. 31 (h). The visible part of the cloud image is different. When the image of the sun or the image of clouds is displayed as a preview image, the visible part of the preview image differs before and after the movement of the movable body. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured.

FIG. 31 (i) following FIG. 31 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1006 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 31 (j) following FIG. 31 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the initial position. A part of the cloud image and a part of "decoration 2" are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a, and a part of the cloud image is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b. As a result, there are cases where the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position as shown in FIG. 31 (i) and cases where the movable body 1008 is moved to the left from the initial position as shown in FIG. 31 (j). The visible part of the image and the image of the cloud are different. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 31 (k) following FIG. 31 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1008 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 31 (l) following FIG. 31 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is located at the uppermost position from the initial position. In this example, the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and starts the effect operation.

FIG. 31 (m) following FIG. 31 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can rotate 180 ° clockwise and counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 31 (l) in which the upper and lower end sides are parallel to the horizontal direction and the left and right end sides are parallel to the vertical direction. Is. In FIG. 31 (m), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 31 (n) following FIG. 31 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (m). As shown in FIGS. 31 (l) to 31 (n), the visible portion of the balloon image and the cloud image is different before and after the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. When an image of a balloon or an image of a cloud is displayed as a notice image, the visible part of the notice image differs before and after the operation of the movable body. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 31 (o) following FIG. 31 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 31 (n) and returned to the initial posture.

FIG. 31 (p) following FIG. 31 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved downward and returned to the initial position. As a result, the effect operation of the movable body 1002 in the reach effect is completed.

FIG. 31 (q) following FIG. 31 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 31 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 having the same timing as that of FIG. 31 (q), and shows a state in which the movable body 1012 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotational operation of the movable body 1012, the movable body 1012 and the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap. Therefore, the movable body 1012 makes the image of the sun and a part of the "decoration 2" invisible to the player. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

FIG. 31 (s) following FIGS. 31 (q) and 31 (r) shows only the main liquid crystal unit 1001 extracted, and the movable body 1012 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (q) and 31 (r). It shows the state of rotating 90 ° and returning to the initial position. FIG. 31 (t) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 31 (s). When the movable body 1012 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1012 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 31 (u) following FIGS. 31 (s) and 31 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 31 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 having the same timing as that of FIG. 31 (u), and shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. Due to the rotational operation of the movable body 1004, the movable body 1004 and the image of the seascape displayed on the sub-display device 1030 overlap. Therefore, the movable body 1004 makes a part of the image of the seascape invisible to the player. The image of the sea view may be displayed as a preview image. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body. The symbol variation display is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the visible part of the notice image is not different. It may be configured. The visible part of the notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible part of the notice image may not be different before and after the movement of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than in the case of the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31 (u), the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the effect display area 208d A white circular hold icon is displayed.

FIG. 31 (w) following FIGS. 31 (u) and 31 (v) shows only the movable body 1002 extracted, and the movable body 1004 is 60 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (u) and 31 (v). It shows the state of rotating by ° and returning to the initial position. FIG. 31 (x) shows the game board 1000 at the same timing as FIG. 31 (w). When the movable body 1004 returns to the initial position, the effect operation of the movable body 1004 in the reach effect ends.

FIG. 31 (y) following FIGS. 31 (w) and (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 31 (z) following FIG. 31 (y) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variable icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d, the black circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.

FIG. 31 (a) following FIG. 31 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

In FIG. 31 (b) following FIG. 31 (a), the variation display of the decorative symbol is started based on the reception of the symbol variation start command transmitted from the main control unit 300 by the first sub control unit 400. Indicates the state. The symbol change start command contains information on the change time. The fluctuation time of this example is determined to be, for example, 30 seconds in the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) of the main control unit timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7.

FIG. 31 (c) following FIG. 31 (b) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure 15 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off. Further, in this example, all the movable bodies other than the movable body 1002 are stationary at the position at the timing when the power failure occurs.

FIG. 31 (d) following FIG. 31 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the movable body 1002 moves to the lowest position in the moving range due to its own weight. The movable body 1002 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state in which the power is off. The lowermost position of the movable body 1002 is a non-operating position of the movable body 1002. When the movable body 1002 is located in the non-operating position, only the upper end of the display area of the sub display device 1030 is visible to the player.

FIG. 32 (a) following FIG. 31 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 32 (b) following FIG. 32 (a) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. When the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned from off to on, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the second sub control unit 500 are started in this order. In FIG. 32 (b), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400.

FIG. 32 (c) following FIG. 32 (b) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 32 (d) following FIG. 32 (c) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is first executed. As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the movable body 1002 has moved to the uppermost position. Further, the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of "initial operation" as in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 32 (e) following FIG. 32 (d) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 32 (f) following FIG. 32 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32 (e). In FIG. 32 (g) following from FIG. 32 (f), the movable body 1002 is returned to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 32 (f) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. In the initial operation of the movable body 1002 of this example, the movable body 1002 first moves from the lowermost position to the uppermost position, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and then. , The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 90 ° clockwise, then the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and finally the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002.

FIG. 32 (h) following FIG. 32 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the moving range. FIG. 32 (i) following FIG. 32 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, the movable body 1010 first moves from the initial position (the uppermost position) to the lowermost position, and then the movable body 1010 returns from the lowest position to the initial position. .. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 32 (j) following FIG. 32 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the moving range. FIG. 32 (k) following FIG. 32 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, the movable body 1006 first moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 returns from the rightmost position to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 32 (l) following FIG. 32 (k) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 32 (m) following FIG. 32 (l) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1008 of this example, the movable body 1008 first moves from the initial position to the leftmost position, and then the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position from the leftmost position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1008 is completed.

FIG. 32 (n) following FIG. 32 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 32 (o) following FIG. 32 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1012 of this example, the movable body 1012 first rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1012 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1012 is completed.

FIG. 32 (p) following FIG. 32 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 32 (q) following FIG. 32 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, first, the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

In this example, the initial operation of the movable body is executed in the order of the movable body 1002, the movable body 1010, the movable body 1006, the movable body 1008, the movable body 1012, and the movable body 1004. The execution order of the initial operation of the movable body can be set arbitrarily.

FIG. 32 (r) following FIG. 32 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game on the special figure 1 display device 212 is being executed. If a power failure occurs during the execution of the special figure variation game, the first sub-control unit 400 is decorated from the completion of the initial operation of the movable body until the symbol variation stop command is received from the main control unit 300. The symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are controlled so as to be the preparation screen. As a result, the character string image of "preparing" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (r), one game ball is inserted in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, but the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a hold icon indicating an increased hold because of the preparation screen. Not done. The leftmost LED of the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 is turned on, and the special drawing 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is 1.

In addition, the main control unit 300 uses the power interruption process (step S243) executed at the time of power interruption to determine the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game being executed, which is stored in the RAM 308, the stop symbol, the fluctuation time, and the special figure 1. The display symbol update timer or the like is saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308. The main control unit 300 returns to the gaming state before the power failure by the power recovery process (step S111) after the power is turned on, based on the recovery data. As a result, the main control unit 300 executes control to end the special figure 1 variable game when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable game that was executed at the time of power interruption elapses for 30 seconds.

FIG. 32 (s) following FIG. 32 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the special figure 1 variable game of this example is out of order. The first sub-control unit 400 receives an effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 based on the reception of the symbol fluctuation stop command including the information that the hit / fail determination result is incorrect from the main control unit 300. To resume. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3", which is an outlier combination of symbols, is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun image and clouds are displayed in the effect display area 208d. A background image including the image of the above and the image of the balloon is displayed. Further, since the hold of the special figure 1 is 1, one white circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Further, the variable icon corresponding to the special figure variable game that was executed before the power interruption is not displayed in the effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the power is restored. In addition, an image of the seascape is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 32 (t), which continues from FIG. 32 (s), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. Further, the movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost position. When the movable body 1008 moves to the rightmost position, the right end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible. Therefore, by moving the movable body 1008 to the rightmost position, the preview image that overlaps with the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 is located at the initial position may be visible. The symbol variation display in which the notice image may be visible may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the notice image remains invisible.

FIG. 32 (u) following FIG. 32 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts the drive control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

FIG. 32 (v) following FIG. 32 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1002 waits at the initial position until the second sub-control unit 500 receives the effect operation start command. In addition, the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the starting port 230 in Special Figure 1, and a black circular holding icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d. ..

FIG. 32 (w) following FIG. 32 (v) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order. Further, the movable body 1008 has returned to the initial position. In addition, the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the white circular variable icon is deleted.

FIG. 32 (x), which continues from FIG. 32 (w), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, the movable body 1002 is waiting at the initial position to receive the start command of the effect operation.

FIG. 32 (y) following FIG. 32 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started the effect operation. The second sub-control unit 500 starts the drive control of the movable body 1002 based on the reception of the command including the start command of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 from the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, after the movable body 1002 moves from the initial position to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 32 (z) following FIG. 32 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial position. After the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture, the movable body 1002 moves downward and returns to the initial position. The movable body 1002 may move downward during the rotation operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture.

FIG. 32 (a) following FIG. 32 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 32 (b) following FIG. 32 (a) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the variable icon is executed while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As a result, the black circular variable icon is erased.

In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 starts the effect operation from the initial position and ends the effect operation at the initial position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation from the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The movable body 1002 may start the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position, and may end the effect operation at a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position. The start position of the effect operation of the movable body 1002 and the end position of the effect operation may be the same or different.
A game table characterized by that.

Further, even when the power is turned off while the movable body 1002 is in a position other than the initial position and the lowermost position (for example, the fourth position), the movable body 1002 is in the lowermost position from the fourth position. It may be configured to move to.

Also, when the power is turned off while the movable body 1002 is in a third position other than the fourth position, the initial position, and the lowermost position, the movable body 1002 is moved from the third position. It is configured to move to the lowest position.

Further, it includes a fourth control means (for example, a second sub-control unit 500) for controlling the movable body 1002, and a driving means for driving the movable body 1002.

Further, when the sensor is provided to detect whether or not the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, and when the power is turned off, the sensor detects that the movable body 1002 is not located at the initial position. , The movable body 1002 is configured to move to the lowermost position. A sensor for detecting whether or not the movable body is in the initial posture is provided, and when the power is turned off, when the sensor detects that the movable body is not in the initial posture, the movable body is placed in the initial posture. It may be configured to return to. The drive control of the movable body 1002 in this embodiment may be applied to another movable body.

(Example 2)
FIG. 33 shows an example of production in the second embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 33 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 33A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 33A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 33 (b) following from FIG. 33 (a), the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the start port 230 in Special FIG. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 33 (c) following FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. The timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 may be the same, or one of them may be earlier. The symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is large at almost the same timing is larger than the symbol variation display in which the number of movable bodies moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is small at the same timing. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.

FIG. 33 (d) following FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 33 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. The initial posture of the movable body 1010 is a posture in which the upper and lower ends of the movable body 1010 are parallel to the horizontal direction. Further, as the drive mechanism for rotating the movable body 1010, the same drive mechanism as for the drive mechanism for rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can be adopted. In the state shown in FIG. 33 (d), the movable body 1010 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 is moved to the right from the initial position. The operation start timings of the movable body 1010, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and the movable body 1006 may be the same, the operation start timings of the two movable bodies may be the same, or the operation start of the three movable bodies may be started. The timing may be different. In the symbol variation display, the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at almost the same timing is large, and the number of movable bodies that rotate in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same timing is small. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the display.

FIG. 33 (e), which continues from FIG. 33 (d), shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 33 (f) following FIG. 33 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture with the pachinko machine 100 turned off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When a power failure occurs, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and the control for returning the movable body 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable body 1006 remains stationary at the position when the power failure occurred. If the movable body 1006 is rotatable and a power failure occurs after the movable body 1006 executes the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in a state of being rotated from the initial posture.

FIG. 33 (g) following FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 is moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. Even if the second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

FIG. 33 (h) following FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 33 (i) following FIG. 33 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 33 (j) following FIG. 33 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 33 (k) following FIG. 33 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 33 (k), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is starting, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400. Further, the character image of "ki" in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 33 (l) following FIG. 33 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 33 (m) following FIG. 33 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is first executed. As shown in FIG. 33 (m), the movable body 1002 is moving from the lowermost position to the uppermost position. Further, the sub display device 1030 provided on the movable body 1002 displays a character string image of "initial operation" as in the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 33 (n) following FIG. 33 (m) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 33 (o) following FIG. 33 (n) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 33 (n). In FIG. 33 (p) following from FIG. 33 (o), the movable body 1002 is returned to the initial position after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 33 (o) and returned to the initial posture. It shows the moved state. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is completed.

FIG. 33 (q) following FIG. 33 (p) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has started the initial operation. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, first, the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowermost position. FIG. 33 (r) following FIG. 33 (q) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 33 (s) following FIG. 33 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 33 (r) and returned to the initial position. FIG. 33 (t) following FIG. 33 (s) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1010 of this example, the movable body 1010 first moves from the initial position to the lowest position, then the movable body 1010 rotates 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture, and then the movable body 1010. Rotates counterclockwise by 45 ° to return to the initial posture, and finally, the movable body 1010 moves to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1010 is completed.

FIG. 33 (u) following FIG. 33 (t) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has started the initial operation. If the movable body 1006 is stopped at a position other than the initial position at the start of the initial operation, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position. FIG. 33 (v) following FIG. 33 (u) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has moved from the initial position to the rightmost end of the movement range. FIG. 33 (w) following FIG. 33 (v) shows a state in which the movable body 1006 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1006 has moved to the left and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1006 of this example, the movable body 1006 first returns to the initial position, then the movable body 1006 moves from the initial position to the rightmost position, and then the movable body 1006 moves to the rightmost position. Returns to the initial position from. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1006 is completed.

FIG. 33 (x) following FIG. 33 (w) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved from the initial position to the leftmost end of the movement range. FIG. 33 (y) following FIG. 33 (x) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1008 has moved to the right and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 33 (z) following FIG. 33 (y) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 33 (a) following FIG. 33 (z) shows a state in which the movable body 1012 has completed the initial operation. The movable body 1012 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

Further, in FIG. 33A, the movable body 1004 has started the initial operation. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position. FIG. 33 (b) following FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position. FIG. 33 (c) following FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise. FIG. 33 (2) following FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise and returned to the initial position. In the initial operation of the movable body 1004 of this example, the movable body 1004 first rotates 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, then the movable body 1004 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position, and then returns to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise from the initial position, and then the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial position. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed. In this way, the same operation may be executed a plurality of times in the initial operation of the movable body. Further, in this example, when the initial operation of the movable body 1004 is completed, the initial operation of all the movable bodies is completed.

(Example 3)
FIG. 34 shows an example of the effect of the third embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 34 shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 34A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 34A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 34 (b) following from FIG. 34 (a), the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the start port 230 in Special FIG. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 34 (c) following FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 and the movable body 1010 have started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position, and the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position.

FIG. 34 (d) following FIG. 34 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the movable body 1004, and the movable body 1010 of the movable body 1002 execute the rotation operation, and the movable body 1006 executes the effect operation. There is. In this embodiment, the movable body 1010 can rotate 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 34 (c), and can rotate 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In the state shown in FIG. 34 (d), the movable body 1010 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, the movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° clockwise, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° clockwise, and the movable body 1006 Is moving to the right from the initial position. The timing of starting the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1004 may be the same or different.

FIG. 34 (e), which continues from FIG. 34 (d), shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 34 (f) following FIG. 34 (e) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture with the pachinko machine 100 turned off. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the power supply control unit 660 has a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power for returning the movable body to the initial position or the initial posture even after the power supply from the outside is cut off. Be prepared for. When a power failure occurs, the second sub-control unit 500 drives the movable body by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit to return to the initial position or the initial posture. In this embodiment, when a power failure occurs, the control for returning the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the movable body 1010 to the initial posture is executed, and the control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial position is not executed. The movable bodies 1004 and 1006 remain stationary at the position when the power failure occurs. If the movable body 1006 is rotatable and a power failure occurs after the movable body 1006 executes the rotational operation, the movable body 1006 stands still in a state of being rotated from the initial posture. Further, control for returning the movable bodies 1004 and 1006 to the initial positions may be executed.

FIG. 34 (g) following FIG. 34 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the lowermost position. The second sub control unit 500 ends the drive control of the movable body 1002 after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off, the movable body 1002 moves by its own weight to the lowermost position below the initial position. Even if the second sub control unit 500 continues the drive control of the movable body 1002 even after the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returns to the initial posture and executes the drive control to move the movable body 1002 to the lowermost position. Good.

FIG. 34 (h) following FIG. 34 (g) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 34 (i) following FIG. 34 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has returned to the initial position.

FIG. 34 (j) following FIG. 34 (i) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 34 (k) following FIG. 34 (j) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 34 (k), the start of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is starting, and the first sub A character string image of "starting ..." is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400. Further, the character image of "ki" in the character string image is hidden by the movable body 1006.

FIG. 34 (l) following FIG. 34 (k) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 34 (m) following FIG. 34 (l) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, if there is a movable body that is stopped at a position different from the initial position at the start of the initial operation of the movable body, control for returning the movable body to the initial position is executed. In FIG. 34 (m), first, the movable body 1006 is returned to the initial position.

FIG. 34 (n) following FIG. 34 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1004 has returned to the initial position. The movable body 1004 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise and returned to the initial position.

FIG. 34 (o) following FIG. 34 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has returned to the initial value from the lowest position. FIG. 34 (p) following FIG. 34 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 starts the initial operation and moves to the uppermost position. The movable body 1002 starts the initial operation after returning to the initial position.

(Example 4)
FIG. 35 shows an example of production in Example 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 35 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each of FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (n) shows a schematic front view of the gaming board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 35A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 35A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

In FIG. 35 (b) following from FIG. 35 (a), the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball entered the start port 230 in Special FIG. It shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed, and in the effect display area 208d, a black circular variation icon is displayed.

FIG. 35 (c) following FIG. 35 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has started executing the effect operation. The movable body 1002 has moved from the initial position to the uppermost position.

FIG. 35 (d) following FIG. 35 (c) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has executed the rotation operation. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise.

FIG. 35 (e) following FIG. 35 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 35 (f) following FIG. 35 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 moves to the lowermost position by its own weight without the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 returning to the initial posture. In this example, the control for returning the movable body to the initial posture or the initial position at the time of power failure is not executed.

FIG. 35 (g) following FIG. 35 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 remains off. The pachinko machine 100 is in a state of waiting for the power to be turned on.

FIG. 35 (h) following FIG. 35 (g) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 35 (h), the activation of the main control unit 300 is completed, the special figure 1 variable game in the special figure 1 display device 212 is restarted, the first sub control unit 400 is being activated, and the first sub The decorative symbol display device 208 controlled by the control unit 400 displays a character string image of "starting ...", and the sub display device 1030 displays a character string image of "starting up".

FIG. 35 (i) following FIG. 35 (h) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed.

FIG. 35 (j) following FIG. 35 (i) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body 1002 is started. After the movable body 1002 is moved to the uppermost position, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is performing an operation of rotating clockwise. In the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 executes an operation of rotating 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture. In this example, since the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is stationary while being rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture at the start of the initial operation, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 360 ° clockwise after the initial operation is started.

FIG. 35 (k) following FIG. 35 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the initial posture and is stationary. FIG. 35 (l) following FIG. 35 (k) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotating counterclockwise. The sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates 360 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 35 (k), and then rotates 180 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. FIG. 35 (m) following FIG. 35 (l) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 has returned to the initial posture. FIG. 35 (n) following FIG. 35 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved to the initial position. When the movable body 1002 moves to the initial position, the movable body 1002 ends the initial operation.

FIG. 35 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIGS. 35 (f) to 35 (i) is viewed from the rear right side. In this example, the movable body 1002 is moved to the lowermost position in a state where the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 180 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. As shown in FIG. 35 (o), a lower escape portion 1050 having a space for allowing the movable body 1002 to escape is provided below the front side of the lower base 1044. The lower escape portion 1050 is located below the rear side of the front stage 244 of the game board 1000 and is provided in the center case of the game board 1000. At the lowermost end of the lower relief portion 1050, a receiving portion 1052 having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is arranged. A buffer portion 1054 is provided on the upper surface of the receiving portion 1052. A sheet-shaped cushioning member is used for the cushioning portion 1054.

If the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off while the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by, for example, 45 ° or more from the initial posture, the moving unit 1036 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 cannot be received by the lower base 1044, but the lower relief portion 1050 It can be received by the receiving unit 1052. As a result, even if the movable body 1002 in a posture different from the initial posture moves to the lower limit position, it is possible to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member.

Although not shown, if the movable body 1002 can be moved above the initial position of the movable body 1010, an upper relief portion may be provided. The upper relief portion, like the lower relief portion 1050, is provided to prevent the movable body 1002 from colliding with the peripheral device or the peripheral member. The upper relief portion may be provided with a receiving portion having a flat surface for receiving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and a cushioning portion on the lower surface of the receiving portion.

(Example 5)
FIG. 36 shows an example of the effect of the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 36 shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 36A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 36A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 36A, the movable bodies 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions.

FIG. 36 (b), which continues from FIG. 36 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

FIG. 36 (c) following FIG. 36 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 36 (d) following FIG. 36 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 36 (e) following FIG. 36 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 36 (e).

In the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate. As the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the same mechanism as the drive mechanism for executing the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the above embodiment is used. In this way, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 also functions as a movable body. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates 45 ° clockwise and counterclockwise with the center of the display area as the center of rotation from the initial posture in which the upper and lower ends of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 are parallel to the horizontal direction. It is possible. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotatable, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may not be rotatable, or both units may be rotatable. In this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot rotate. Further, when the main liquid crystal unit 1001 cannot rotate as in the above embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may or may not be rotatable.

FIG. 36 (f), which continues from FIG. 36 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the previous stage of the rotational operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. In this example, before the main liquid crystal unit 1001 starts the rotation operation, the variable icon, the hold icon, and the decorative symbol are displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then these displays are erased from the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In this example, first, the black circular variation icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, and then the variation icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. When the hold icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon is deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208 after the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The display mode of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is the same as the display mode of the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 36 (g) following FIG. 36 (f) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed on the sub-display device 1030. After the sub-display device 1030 temporarily stops and displays "decoration 2" as the left and right symbols and changes the middle symbol, the display of the decorative symbol is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208.

When the display of the variable icon, the hold icon, the decorative symbol, or the like is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, another display overlapping these displays may be visible to the player. The other display may be displayed as a preview image. The symbol variation display, in which the other display may be visible to the player, is such that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the other display remains invisible to the player. It may be configured.

FIG. 36 (h) following FIG. 36 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has started the effect operation. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 36 (i) following FIG. 36 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (h). Further, the number of holdings of the special drawing 1 is increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the starting opening 230 of the special drawing 1, and a white circular holding icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030. ..

FIG. 36 (j) following FIG. 36 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 36 (i) and returned to the initial posture. Further, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 1030 as a middle symbol, and the sub display is based on the fact that the first sub control unit 400 receives the symbol fluctuation stop command transmitted from the main control unit 300. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the device 1030 as a definite symbol.

FIG. 36 (k) following FIG. 36 (j) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variable icon is executed. On the sub-display device 1030, an animation for erasing the variable icon is executed, and the black circular variable icon is erased.

FIG. 36 (l) following FIG. 36 (k) shows the non-execution state of the special figure variation game. The special drawing 1 of the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed on the special drawing 1 display device 212 (not shown), and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the sub-display device 1030.

FIG. 36 (m) following FIG. 36 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes the variable icon and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1006 has moved to the leftmost end. Therefore, the movable body 1006 becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 36 (n), which continues from FIG. 36 (m), shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 36 (o) following FIG. 36 (n) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is restarted in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted during the execution of the next special figure variable game of the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is erased on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 36 (n) following FIG. 36 (o) shows a state in which the display of the variable icon is resumed in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the display of the variable icon and the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed during the execution of the next special figure variable game of the special figure variable game in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has executed the rotation effect operation. After the display of the variable icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable icon is erased on the sub display device 1030. When the hold icon is displayed on the sub display device 1030, the hold icon is deleted on the sub display device 1030 after the display of the hold icon is started on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 36 (q) following FIG. 36 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order. The movable body 1006 may return to the initial position after the end of the special figure 1 variable game.

FIG. 36 (r) following FIG. 36 (q) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variable icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.

(Example 6)
FIG. 37 shows an example of production in Example 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 37 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 37 shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 37A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is fixed to the game board 1000 and cannot move or rotate, and the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves in the vertical direction by the same drive mechanism as the movable body 1002 shown in FIG. It is possible. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can rotate as in the fifth embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 37A, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture. Both the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be movable up and down.

FIG. 37 (b) following FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which the pachinko machine 100 is turned off due to a power failure during non-execution of the special figure variation game. The displays of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 are erased, and all the lamps are turned off.

FIG. 37 (c) following FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost position. Similar to the movable body 1002, when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned off, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves to the lowest position of the moving range by its own weight. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the lowermost position when the pachinko machine 100 is in a non-operating state in which the power is off. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 may execute drive control for moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 to the lowermost position by the power supply supplied from the power storage circuit provided in the power supply control unit 660.

FIG. 37 (d) following FIG. 37 (c) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is off.

FIG. 37 (e) following FIG. 37 (d) shows a state in which the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIG. 37 (e), the first sub-control unit 400 is running, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 display a character string image of “starting”. Has been done.

FIG. 37 (f) following FIG. 37 (e) shows a state in which the second sub-control unit 500 is activated. After the activation of the second sub-control unit 500, the initial operation of the movable body controlled by the second sub-control unit 500 is executed. The decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a character string image of "initial operation in progress" to notify that the initial operation of the movable body is executed. The sub-display device 1030 continues to display the character string image of "starting up".

FIG. 37 (g) following FIG. 37 (f) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is started. In this example, only the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is executed. As shown in FIG. 37 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves upward and is located at the initial position.

FIG. 37 (h) following FIG. 37 (g) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. FIG. 37 (i) following FIG. 37 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 37 (h). FIG. 37 (j) following FIG. 37 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 37 (i) and returned to the initial posture. In the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 first moves from the lowest position (non-operating operation position) to the initial position, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 counterclockwise from the initial posture. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 °, then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 90 ° clockwise, and then the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture. When these operations are completed, the initial operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is completed.

FIG. 37 (k) following FIG. 37 (j) shows a state in which the initial operation of the movable body is completed and the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is resumed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. The stop symbol of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is the default stop symbol. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (k), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0.

The movement of the movable body 1002 from the initial position to the lowest position in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), and the movement of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 in FIGS. 37 (b) and (c) from the initial position to the lowest position. The operation of moving the first movable body to the first position when the power is turned off, such as movement, may be performed not only when the power is turned off but also as a big hit notice. The symbol variation display with the jackpot notice may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily than the symbol variation display without the jackpot notice, or the jackpot notice may be displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the above is performed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally stopped and displayed. On the contrary, even in the symbol variation display in which the big hit notice is given, the off-design mode may be finally stopped and displayed. Of course, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed even in the symbol variation display in which the jackpot notice is not given.

(Example 7)
FIG. 38 shows an example of production in Example 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 38 shows the effect state in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 38 shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 38 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 38A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in this embodiment, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 can perform the vertical movement and rotation operation, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can perform the vertical movement and rotation operation. In the state shown in FIG. 38 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is located at the initial position in the initial posture, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is initially located. It is stationary in a posture.

FIG. 38 (b), which continues from FIG. 38 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1.

FIG. 38 (c) following FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 38 (d) following FIG. 38 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 38 (e) following FIG. 38 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 38 (e).

FIG. 38 (f) following FIG. 38 (e) shows a state in which the effect operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is started. The sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 38 (g) following FIG. 38 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (g).

FIG. 38 (h) following FIG. 38 (g) shows a state in which the effect operation of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is started. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

FIG. 38 (i) following FIG. 38 (h) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (h). The rotation start timings of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may be at the same time, or either one may come first. In the rotation operation, the rotation speeds of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are the same.

FIG. 38 (j) following FIG. 38 (i) shows a state in which the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 are rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (h). In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, and at the time shown in FIG. 38 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 rotates clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (i). It is rotated by 60 °, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (i).

In FIG. 38 (k) following from FIG. 38 (j), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 60 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (j), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is in the state shown in FIG. 38 (j). It shows a state of being rotated 30 ° clockwise from. In the rotation operation, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 has a higher rotation speed than the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

In FIG. 38 (l) following from FIG. 38 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is rotated 30 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 38 (k), and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated from the state shown in FIG. 38 (k). It shows a state of being rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise. As a result, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 return to the initial posture.

FIG. 38 (m) following FIG. 38 (l) shows a state in which the effect operation of moving the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the vertical direction is executed. The main liquid crystal unit 1001 moves downward, and the movable body 1002 including the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves upward. As described above, in the effect operation of this example, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 move in opposite directions.

FIG. 38 (n) following FIG. 38 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 are returned to the initial positions prior to the end of the special figure 1 variable game. In addition, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 38 (o) following FIG. 38 (n) shows a state in which the erasure animation of the variable icon is executed during the non-execution of the special figure variable game. In the effect display area 208d, the white circular variation icon corresponding to the completed special figure 1 variation game is erased.

(Example 8)
Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the connection unit 1060 of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the mobile unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. A slip ring is used for the connection unit 1060 of this embodiment.

39 (a) to 39 (d) are external perspective views of the connection unit 1060 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. First, the appearance configuration of the connection unit 1060 will be described with reference to FIG. 39 (a). The connection unit 1060 includes an upper case 1062 and a lower case 1064. The upper case 1062 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1062 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (d) and (f), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

A lower case 1064 is arranged below the upper case 1062. The lower case 1064 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1064 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1062 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1064 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1062 are the same size, and the lower case 1064 is arranged so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1062. Further, the lower case 1064 has a shorter vertical length than the upper case 1062 when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 39 (a) to 39 (e), the lower case 1064 is provided with hatching that rises to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1062 and the lower case 1064 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1066 is provided in the lower center of the front side surface of the upper case 1062. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the fixed side connector 1066 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected to each other via a relay board.

Further, a circular opening 1068 is provided at the center of the upper surface of the upper case 1062. A circular rotating side case 1070 is arranged in the opening 1068. The rotating side case 1070 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. A fixing hole 1072 for a rotating shaft is provided in the center of the rotating side case 1070. In the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072, one end is fixed to the rotation shaft of the motor arranged in the moving unit 1036, and the other end is fixed to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in the direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the rotation side case 1070. Arranged to stretch to. Further, the rotating side case 1070 is provided with a rotating side connector 1074. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the rotating side connector 1074 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

The rotation side case 1070 is adapted to rotate with the shaft. 39 (b) to (d) show a state in which the rotating side case 1070 is rotated. FIG. 39B shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39A when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 39 (c) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 180 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above. FIG. 39 (d) shows a state in which the rotation side case 1070 is rotated 270 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 39 (a) when the connection unit 1060 is viewed from above.

FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1064 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the upper case 1062 side. A circular shaft hole 1076 is provided in the center of the lower case 1064. A shaft for rotationally driving the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 passes through the rotary shaft hole 1076.

Further, the fixed-side connector 1066 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1064 is provided with conductive portions 1078, 1080, 1082, 1084, 1086, 1088 connected to each pin of the fixed-side connector 1066, respectively. There is. Taking the conductive portion 1078 as an example, the conductive portion 1078 has an elongated conductive plate 1078a and a fixture 1078b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064. The fixture 1078b fixes the conductive plate 1078a to the lower case 1064 so that the conductive plate 1078b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1078b. The conductive portions 1080 to 1088 have the same configuration as the conductive portions 1078.

FIG. 39 (f) shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1070 of the connection unit 1060 is viewed from the lower case 1064 side. A rotating side substrate 1090 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1070. The rotating side substrate 1090 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1090 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1092. Further, circumferential wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1092 of the rotating side substrate 1090. The wirings 1094, 1096, 1098, 1100, 1102, and 1104 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1092 and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are arranged concentrically, and the rotation shaft fixing hole 1072 is provided at the center of the concentric circles. In FIG. 39 (f), the insulating portion 1092 and the wiring portions 1094 to 1104 are hatched upward to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations.

The rotating side connector 1074 of the rotating side case 1070 is provided with 6 pins, and each pin and the wirings 1094 to 1104 are connected to each other. Further, the wiring 1094 is connected to the conductive portion 1078 shown in FIG. 39 (e), the wiring 1096 is connected to the conductive portion 1080 shown in FIG. 39 (e), and the wiring 1098 is connected to the conductive portion 1082 shown in FIG. 39 (e). Connected, the wiring 1100 is connected to the conductive portion 1084 shown in FIG. 39 (e), the wiring 1102 is connected to the conductive portion 1086 shown in FIG. 39 (e), and the wiring 1104 is connected to the conductive portion 1088 shown in FIG. 39 (e). Is connected with.

Next, the connection state of each conductive portion and each wiring will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 (g) and 39 (h) by taking the connection state of the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 as an example. 39 (g) and 39 (h) show the conductive portion 1078 cut along the line AA of FIG. 39 (e). The conductive plate 1078a has a shape extending diagonally upward from the lower case 1064. When the lower case 1064 is placed on the upper case 1062 by combining the upper surface of the lower case 1064 and the lower surface of the upper case 1062, the wiring 1094 has the other end of the conductive plate 1078a downward as shown in FIG. 39 (h). It comes into contact with the conductive plate 1078a so as to be pushed in. In this way, the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are connected. The same applies to the connection state between the conductive portions 1080 to 1088 and the wirings 1096 to 1104.

The conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1080 and the wiring 1096 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1082 and the wiring 1098 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1084 and the wiring 1100 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1086 and the wiring 1102 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1088 and the wiring 1104 are used to transmit various signals from the first sub-board 160 to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

As an example of various signals, when the microcomputer unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling an image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), the first sub-control unit 400 transfers the microcomputer to the microcomputer. Examples include production commands (commands that specify production, progress of production, still images, moving images, progress of image display scenarios, etc.).
Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer may be provided. Examples include image commands for the means (commands that specify the progress of still images, moving images, image display scenarios, etc.).
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit is mounted. The 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.). In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) can be mentioned with respect to the liquid crystal driving means or the like.

(Example 9)
Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a connection unit between the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the mobile unit 1036 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the connection unit 1110 is used as the connection unit.

FIG. 40A is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 is arranged in the mobile unit 1036 shown in FIG. 30 and is electrically connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

First, the appearance configuration of the connection unit 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (a). The connection unit 1110 includes an upper case 1112 and a lower case 1114. The upper case 1112 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. Further, the upper case 1112 has a shape that is longer in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the upper case 1062 is cross-hatched so that the configurations can be easily distinguished.

A lower case 1114 is arranged below the upper case 1112. The lower case 1114 has a rectangular parallelepiped shape whose upper and lower surfaces are square when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. The entire upper surface of the lower case 1114 is open. Further, the entire lower surface of the upper case 1112 is opened. The upper and lower surfaces of the lower case 1114 and the upper and lower surfaces of the upper case 1112 are the same size, and the lower case 1114 is arranged so that the upper surface matches the lower surface of the upper case 1112. Further, the lower case 1114 is shorter in the vertical direction than the upper case 1112 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the front. In FIGS. 40 (a) to 40 (b), the lower case 1114 is provided with hatching that rises to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations. Further, the upper case 1112 and the lower case 1114 are arranged on the moving unit 1036 side.

A fixed-side connector 1116 is provided in the lower center of the side surface on the front side of the upper case 1112. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness to which one end is connected to the fixed-side connector 1116 is connected to the first sub-board 160 constituting the first sub-control unit 400. The harness and the first sub-board 160 may be connected to each other via a relay board.

Further, a circular opening 1118 is provided in the central portion of the upper bottom surface of the upper case 1112. A circular rotating side case 1120 is arranged in the opening 1118. The rotating side case 1120 is arranged on the side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The rotating side case 1120 is provided with a rotating side connector 1022. In this embodiment, the other end of the harness whose one end is connected to the rotating side connector 1122 is connected to the sub liquid crystal unit 1032.

On the upper surface of the rotating side case 1112, a columnar rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126, and 1128 that are orthogonal to the upper surface and extend upward are fixed. The rotating body connecting shafts 1124, 1126 and 1128 have the same length. Further, the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are arranged at equal intervals in the rotating side case 1112. A bearing is attached to the tip of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is attached to the bearing. Further, when the tips of the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 to 1128 are connected, an equilateral triangle is formed, and the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 described later are arranged at the center of gravity of the equilateral triangle.

FIG. 40B shows a state in which the inside of the lower case 1114 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the upper case 1112 side. The fixed-side connector 1116 is provided with 6 pins, and the lower case 1164 is provided with conductive portions 1130, 1132, 1134, and 1136 connected to 4 of the 6 pins of the fixed-side connector 1164, respectively. .. Taking the conductive portion 1130 as an example, the conductive portion 1130 has an elongated conductive plate 1130a and a fixture 1130b for fixing one end of the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114. The fixture 1130b fixes the conductive plate 1130a to the lower case 1114 so that the conductive plate 1130b does not rotate. An insulator is used for the fixing portion 1130b. The conductive portions 1132 to 1136 have the same configuration as the conductive portion 1130.

Further, in this embodiment, the conductive portions 1130 to 1136 are used for power supply and GND connection, and signal communication is performed by optical communication (wireless communication). A data transmission / reception unit 1138 for optical communication is arranged in the center of the lower case 1114. The data transmission / reception unit 1138 is connected to pin 2 of the 6 pins of the fixed side connector 1114. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1138 is used for signal transmission, but signal reception is also possible.

FIG. 40C shows a state in which the lower surface side of the rotation side case 1120 of the connection unit 1110 is viewed from the lower case 1114 side. A rotating side substrate 1140 is arranged on the lower surface side of the rotating side case 1120. The rotating side substrate 1140 is a slip ring. The rotating side substrate 1140 has a circular shape and has a circumferential insulating portion 1142. A data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged at the center of the rotation-side substrate 1140. The data transmission / reception unit 1144 is arranged to face the data transmission / reception unit 1138 so as to overlap the data transmission / reception unit 1138 when the connection unit 1110 is viewed from above. Signals are transmitted and received between the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 by optical communication. Further, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is connected to pin 2 of the 6 pins of the rotation side connector 1122. In this embodiment, the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is used for signal reception, but signal transmission is also possible.

Circumferential wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1152 are provided on the inner peripheral side of the insulating portion 1142 of the rotating side substrate 1140. The wirings 1146, 1148, 1150, and 1152 are arranged concentrically from the outer peripheral side in this order. Further, the insulating portion 1142 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 are arranged concentrically, and the data transmitting / receiving portion 1144 is provided at the center of the concentric circles. In FIG. 40 (c), the insulating portion 1142 and the wiring portions 1146 to 1152 are hatched upward to the right in order to make it easier to distinguish the configurations.

Four of the six pins and wirings 1146 to 1152 are connected to the rotation side connector 1122 of the rotation side case 1120, respectively. Further, the wiring 1146 is connected to the conductive portion 1130 shown in FIG. 40 (b), the wiring 1148 is connected to the conductive portion 1132 shown in FIG. 40 (b), and the wiring 1150 is connected to the conductive portion 1134 shown in FIG. 40 (b). It is connected and the wiring 1152 is connected to the conductive portion 1136 shown in FIG. 40 (b).

40 (d) and 40 (e) show the connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146. 40 (d) and 40 (e) show the conductive portion 1130 cut along the line AA of FIG. 40 (b). The connection state between the conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 is the same as the connection state between the conductive portion 1078 and the wiring 1094 shown in FIGS. 39 (e) and 39 (f). The connection state between the conductive portions 1132 to 1136 and the wirings 1148 to 1152 is also the same.

The conductive portion 1130 and the wiring 1146 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1132 and the wiring 1148 are used to supply power to the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. The conductive portion 1134 and the wiring 1150 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160. The conductive portion 1136 and the wiring 1152 are used to connect the GND of the circuit provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 and the GND of the first sub-board 160.

Further, as an example of various signals transmitted / received between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144, when the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is equipped with a microcomputer for controlling an image control means (for example, VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.). Is an effect command (command for specifying effect, progress of effect, still image, moving image, progress of image display scenario, etc.) from the first sub-control unit 400 to the microcomputer.
Further, the image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.) may be mounted on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. In this case, the image control provided on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 from the microcomputer may be provided. Examples include image commands for the means (commands that specify the progress of still images, moving images, image display scenarios, etc.).
Further, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is not equipped with a microcomputer or image control means for controlling image control means (VDP, GPU, VRAM, etc.), but is mounted on the first sub-board 160 or the moving unit 1036, and the sub liquid crystal unit is mounted. The 1032 may be equipped with an image drive control means (liquid crystal drive means, etc.). In this case, the image drive control means (from the image control means provided in the first sub-control unit 400 or the moving unit 1036) Image data (for example, image data transmitted a predetermined number of times such as 30 times or 60 times per second, RGB information of each dot, etc.) can be mentioned with respect to the liquid crystal driving means or the like.

In this embodiment, the data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 is optical wireless communication. Laser light is used for optical wireless communication. The data communication between the data transmission / reception units 1138 and 1144 may be radio communication instead of optical wireless communication. Further, LED light may be used instead of laser light for optical wireless communication.
When both the data transmission / reception unit 1138 and the data transmission / reception unit 1144 are used for signal transmission / reception, the data transmitted from the data transmission / reception unit 1138 to the data transmission / reception unit 1144 is as described above, but the data transmission / reception from the data transmission / reception unit 1144. For unit 138, an ACK signal or a state signal from a control means or the like provided in the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 (for example, an image control means, a microcomputer for controlling the image control means, an image drive means (liquid crystal drive means), or the like). , Information indicating the rotation angle of the rotating body (for example, a detection signal output when a sensor provided on the rotating side detects a detection piece provided on the fixed side, an output signal of an encoder provided on the rotating side, etc. ) May be sent.

FIG. 40 (f) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has only the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 as the rotating body connecting shaft. The rotating body connecting shaft 1124 is arranged at the center (rotation center) of the rotating side case 1120.

FIG. 40 (g) is an external perspective view of the connection unit 1110 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of the present embodiment as viewed from the front. The connection unit 1110 of this modification has the rotating body connecting shafts 1124 and 1126 as the rotating body connecting shafts. The straight line connecting the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the tip of the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 passes through the center (rotation center) of the rotating body case 1120. Further, the rotating body connecting shaft 1124 and the rotating body connecting shaft 1126 are arranged equidistant from the center.

(Example 10)
FIG. 41 shows an effect example 1 in the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 41 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 41 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29. Further, the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 of the pachinko machine 100 of Examples 10 and 11 to 16 described later in the present embodiment are different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. It is arranged on the front side of the movable body 1002 and can move in the left-right direction.

FIG. 41 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 41A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 41A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 41 (b), which continues from FIG. 41 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 16A.

FIG. 41 (c) following FIG. 41 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 41 (d), which continues from FIG. 41 (c), shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 41 and later, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 41 (e) following FIG. 41 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 41 (d).

In FIG. 41 (f) following from FIG. 41 (e), the movable body 1008 started the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moved to a position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 41 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the area of the right half of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as to be difficult to see. An image of clouds displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. The image of the yacht or the image of the clouds displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which the yacht image or the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008 has a fixed jackpot symbol mode as compared with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

FIG. 41 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 41 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 41 (h) to 41 (k) following from FIG. 41 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 is the movable body 1008, and the movable body 1008 is the other. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. In FIG. 41 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. An image of a cloud is displayed at a position behind the movable body 1008 below the transparent portion 1008b, but the image of the cloud is not visible because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in this embodiment, the image of the cloud is an image displayed as a preview image.

FIG. 41 (h) following FIGS. 41 (f) and 41 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 41 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °.

FIG. 41 (i) following FIG. 41 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (h). Further, in FIG. 41 (i), in the states of FIGS. 41 (g) and 41 (h), the cloud image which was invisible due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is changed by the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It shows a state in which it becomes visible through 1008b. The pattern variation display in which the cloud image may be visually recognized via 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is the case where the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display. Further, in this embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by about 20 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (h), so that the entire cloud image can be visually recognized via 1008b. , Only a part of the cloud image may be visible via 1008b.

FIG. 41 (j) following FIG. 41 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 41 (i). In FIG. 41 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (j) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (h) are the same, but in the state shown in FIG. 41 (h), they are visually recognized via 1008b. Since the display of moving the image of the missing cloud upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 was performed, a part of the image of the cloud is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 41 (j). Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the cloud is visually recognized so that the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The moving display of the image of is may be performed.

FIG. 41 (k) following FIG. 41 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 41 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 41 (k), an image of a cloud that was not visually recognized through 1008b in the state shown in FIG. 41 (g) is visually recognized via 1008b. The rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (k) and the rotation angle of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 in FIG. 41 (g) are the same, but after the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), the image of the cloud. Is displayed to be moved upward with the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, so that it is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 41 (k). Further, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the cloud image region that can be visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 41 (k) is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 41 (j). It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The moving display of the cloud image may be performed.

In FIG. 41 (l) continuing from FIG. 41 (k), after the movable body 1008 has moved to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

FIG. 42 shows an effect example 2 in the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 42 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 42 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

42 (a) to 42 (f) show the same state as in FIGS. 41 (a) to 41 (f). FIG. 42 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 42 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 42 (h) to 42 (k) following from FIG. 42 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 is the movable body 1008, and the movable body 1008 is the other. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. Further, FIG. 42 (g) shows the same state as in FIG. 41 (g). FIG. 42 (h) following FIGS. 42 (f) and 42 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as in FIG. 41 (h).

FIG. 42 (i) following FIG. 42 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (i). In FIG. 42 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (i), the cloud image displayed behind the movable body 1008 is moved to the left as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates. It shows a state in which it is not visually recognized through 1008b. Further, the cloud image may be erased as the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates, or may not be displayed from the beginning.

FIG. 42 (j) following FIG. 42 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 42 (i). FIG. 42 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized, unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (j).

FIG. 42 (k) following FIG. 42 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 42 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. FIG. 42 (k) shows a state in which the cloud image is not visually recognized, unlike the state shown in FIG. 41 (k).

In FIG. 42 (l) following from FIG. 42 (k), after the movable body 1008 has moved to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute the rotational operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, the player may be able to visually recognize the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 through the transparent portion of the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. is there. Further, in this embodiment, the image of the cloud displayed on the sub-display device 1030, which becomes invisible due to the movable body 1008 when the movable body 1008 moves to the left, is displayed as a preview image. In the present embodiment, the movement operation of the movable body 1008 causes the player to visually recognize at least a part of the preview image via the transparent portion 1008b, and at least the preview image via the transparent portion 1008b. There is an effect when some images are not visible to the player. Further, when a part of the notice image is visually recognized by the player through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008 due to the moving operation of the movable body 1008, the notice image is displayed through the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. Compared with the case where at least a part of the images is not visually recognized by the player, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol.

The images of clouds, balloons, and the sun displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be movable and displayed as the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. For example, the image of the cloud displayed at the upper center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 206 is moved so as to be invisible through the transparent portion 1008a when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left. The image of the balloon or the sun may be displayed, and the image of the balloon or the sun is moved so that it can be visually recognized via the transmission portion 1008a or the transmission portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves from the initial position to the left. It may be displayed. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the symbol variation display in which the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b is displayed via the transparent portion 1008a and the transparent portion 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun are invisible. When the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving display of the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun makes it impossible to see the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun through the transmitting portion 1008a or the transmitting portion 1008b. In the symbol variation display, which may occur, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the moving display of the image of the cloud, the balloon, or the sun is not performed, so that the cloud or the like is displayed through the transparent portion 1008a or the transparent portion 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which the images of the balloon and the sun remain visible. Further, when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, the images of clouds, balloons, and the sun when they are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a and the transmission unit 1008b are displayed in a different color from the normal time. There may be cases. For example, if the cloud image is normally displayed in white and is visible through the transmissive portion 1008a or transmissive portion 1008b when the movable body 1008 moves to the left from the initial position, it is blue, green, or It may be displayed in red. The symbol variation display in which the cloud image may be displayed in a color different from the normal time is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the cloud image is displayed in the normal color. It may be configured in. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may execute a rotational operation behind the movable body 1006 or the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 41 (g) to (k) or 42 (g) to (k) of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the sub display device 1030. There may be.

(Example 11)
FIG. 43 shows an effect example 1 in the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 43 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 43 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 43A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 43A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 43A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 43 (b), which continues from FIG. 43 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 16A.

FIG. 43 (c) following FIG. 43 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 43 (d), which continues from FIG. 43 (c), shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 41 and later, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started after the start of the movement animation of the hold / variable icon.

FIG. 43 (e) following FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 43 (d).

In FIG. 43 (f) following from FIG. 43 (e), the movable body 1008 started the effect operation from the initial position, and the left end of the movable body 1008 moved to a position located at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state. FIG. 43 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the area of the right half of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 so as to be difficult to see. An image of clouds displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208c are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. In addition, a part of the area on the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. The yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be shielded by the movable body 1008. In the symbol variation display in which the yacht image or the cloud image may be shielded by the movable body 1008, the jackpot symbol mode is determined as compared with the symbol variation display in which these images are not shielded by the movable body 1008. It may be configured to be easily displayed.

FIG. 43 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 43 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 43 (h) to (k) following from FIG. 43 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmissive portion 1008b are extracted and shown. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. In FIG. 43 (g), the movable body 1008 shields a part of the illuminating unit 1014b except the right portion, the lower end portion of the illuminating unit 1014c, and the right end portion of the illuminating unit 1014d, and illuminates the illuminating unit 1014b through the transmitting unit 1008b. The portion of the portion 1014c excluding the shielded portion and the right end portion of the illumination portion 1014d are visually recognized. Further, FIG. 43 (g) shows a state in which the portion of the lighting unit 1014a to 1014d visible to the player emits light in blue. Further, in FIG. 43 (g), an image of the seascape displayed on the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 43 (h) following FIGS. 43 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation. In FIG. 43 (h), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated counterclockwise by about 10 °. Further, in FIG. 43 (h), the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is reduced via the transmission unit 1008b as compared with the state shown in FIG. 43 (g). Further, in the unshielded region of the movable body 1008, the area of the visible portion of the illumination unit 1014d is increased.

FIG. 43 (i) following FIG. 43 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 35 ° counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (h). In FIG. 43 (i), the black-painted portion of the illumination unit 1014d indicates a blue-emitting portion, and the white-painted portion indicates a red-emitting portion. In FIG. 43 (i), in the region not shielded by the movable body 1008, the portion of the lighting unit 1014d that is not visible to the player due to overlapping with the movable body 1008 is visible to the player. It shows the state that became. The symbol variation display in which the red light emitting portion may become visible due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is a symbol variation display in which the red light emitting portion does not become visible because the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 does not rotate. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed in comparison with the above.

FIG. 43 (j) following FIG. 43 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 35 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 43 (i). Further, FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits light in red is large and the area of the portion that emits light in blue is small. In FIG. 43 (j), a part of the cloud image as a preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 41 (j), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the cloud is visually recognized so that the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. Image may be displayed. The symbol variation display in which at least a part of the cloud image as a preview image may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b due to the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is an image of the cloud as a preview image through the transmission unit 1008b. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in which at least a part of the above is not visually recognized.

FIG. 43 (k) following FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 43 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 43 (k) shows a state in which the area of the portion of the illumination unit 1014d that emits light in red is further increased, and the illumination unit 1014d emits light in red. In FIG. 43 (k), a part of the cloud image as a preview image is visually recognized via 1008b. Further, since the display for moving the cloud image upward is performed, the cloud image region that can be visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 43 (k) is visually recognized via 1008b in FIG. 43 (j). It is wider than the possible cloud image area. Further, in the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 43 (k), a part of the cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b, but the entire cloud image is visually recognized via 1008b. The moving display of the cloud image may be performed.

In FIG. 43 (l) continuing from FIG. 43 (k), after the movable body 1008 has moved to the initial position, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variable display is a big hit.

FIG. 44 shows an effect example 2 in the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 44 shows a schematic front view or a movable body 1002 of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

44 (a) to (f) show the same state as in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (f). FIG. 44 (g) shows the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b at the same timing as in FIG. 44 (f), and the movable body 1008 is easily distinguished from other configurations. Hatching is attached for this purpose. Further, in FIGS. 44 (h) to 44 (k) following from FIG. 44 (g), the movable body 1002, a part of the movable body 1008, and the transmission portion 1008b are extracted and shown, and the movable body 1008 is shown by the movable body 1008, and the movable body 1008 is shown by the other. Hatching is added to make it easier to distinguish from the composition of. Further, FIG. 44 (g) shows the same state as in FIG. 43 (g). FIG. 44 (h) following FIGS. 44 (f) and (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 has started the rotation operation, and shows the same state as in FIG. 43 (h).

FIG. 44 (i) following FIG. 44 (h) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (i). Further, in FIG. 44 (i), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (i), the rotation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is small, so that the illumination unit 1014d is not visible to the player because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. It shows a state in which the light emitting part is not visually recognized.

FIG. 44 (j) following FIG. 44 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by about 20 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 44 (i). Further, in FIG. 44 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), the area of the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not large, so that the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is visually recognized. Indicates a non-existent state. Further, in FIG. 44 (j), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), the state in which the cloud image as the preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b is shown.

FIG. 44 (k) following FIG. 44 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated clockwise by about 10 ° from the state shown in FIG. 44 (j) and returned to the initial posture. There is. In FIG. 44 (k), unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j), the area of the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not large, so that the red light emitting portion of the illumination unit 1014d is not visually recognized. Indicates the state. Further, FIG. 44 (k) shows a state in which the cloud image as a preview image is not visually recognized via 1008b, unlike the state shown in FIG. 43 (j).

In FIG. 44 (l) following from FIG. 44 (k), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c after the movable body 1008 returns to the initial position. , Special Figure 1 shows the state of notifying that the result of the variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 may execute a rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, and the rotating operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 causes the lighting unit. The light emitting mode of 1014d may change. In this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 45 ° behind the movable body 1008, the light emitting mode of the lighting unit 1014d is changed, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is behind the movable body 1008. When the unit 1032 is rotated clockwise by a maximum of 30 °, the light emitting mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. The symbol variation display in which the light emitting mode of the illumination unit 1014d may change due to the rotational operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the light emission mode of the illumination unit 1014d does not change. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

(Example 12)
FIG. 45 shows an example of production in Example 12 of this embodiment. FIG. 45 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 45 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 45A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 45A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b.

FIG. 45 (b), which continues from FIG. 45 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 16A.

FIG. 45 (c) following FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 45 (d), which continues from FIG. 45 (c), shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 45 (e) following FIG. 45 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 45 (d).

In FIG. 45 (f) following from FIG. 45 (e), the effect operation is started from the state shown in FIG. 45 (e) by the movable body 1008, and the left end of the transparent portion 1008 b of the movable body 1008 is the screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of moving to the position located at the left end. FIG. 45F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the display area of the sub display device 1030 and the illumination unit 1014d are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the yacht image and the cloud image displayed in the left half area of the screen of the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 45 (g) following FIG. 45 (f) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position and is hidden by the movable body 1008 behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 45 (g), an image of clouds as a preview image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 behind the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. By comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

In FIG. 45 (h) following from FIG. 45 (g), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state of FIG. 45 (g) behind the movable body 1008 and passes through the transmission portion 1008 b. , Indicates a state in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized. FIG. 45 (h) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 45 (i) following FIG. 45 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 45 (h). FIG. 45 (i) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the screen of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 45 (j) following FIG. 45 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is moved upward from the state of FIG. 45 (i) behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the cloud image as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030, which was visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b, cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 45 (k) following FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the initial posture behind the movable body 1008. FIG. 45 (k) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 45 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, thereby passing through the transmission unit 1008b. The amount of images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changing. Further, the image of the cloud is displayed by moving upward from the state shown in FIG. 45 (i).

In FIG. 45 (l) following from FIG. 45 (k), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 45 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 45 (k) behind the movable body 1008 (total 90 °). (Rotated) is shown. FIG. 45 (l) shows a state in which an image of a cloud as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 45 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates in a state where the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden behind the movable body 1008, thereby passing through the transmissive portion 1008b. The amount of images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 that is visually recognized is changing.

In FIG. 45 (m) following from FIG. 45 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated 110 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 45 (l) behind the movable body 1008 (total 200 °). It shows the rotated state. FIG. 45 (m) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

In FIG. 45 (n) following from FIG. 45 (m), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 160 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 45 (l) (total 360 °). (Rotation) shows the state of returning to the initial posture. FIG. 45 (m) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b.

In FIG. 45 (o) following from FIG. 45 (n), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves downward from the state shown in FIG. 45 (o) and returns to the initial position behind the movable body 1008. It shows the state of. FIG. 45 (o) shows a state in which an image of clouds as a preview image displayed on the right side of the sub-display device 1030 is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b.

FIG. 45 (p) following FIG. 45 (o) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 45 (o) and returns to the initial position. FIG. 45 (p) shows a state in which the effect operation of each movable body (movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, 1012) is completed.

FIG. 45 (q) following FIG. 45 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 rotates behind the movable body 1008, so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is visually recognized by the player through the transmissive portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. The area of the image (for example, the image of the cloud as a preview image) may be configured to change. The symbol variation display in which the area may change may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitely displayed than the symbol variation display in which the area does not change. In addition, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a moving and rotating operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 13)
FIG. 46 shows an example of the effect of the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 46 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 46A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 46A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 46 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 46 (b), which continues from FIG. 46 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. A black circular hold icon is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 1. Further, the black circular hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode as shown in FIG. 16A. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 46 (c), which continues from FIG. 46 (b), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Special Figure 1 After the start of the variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is displayed.

FIG. 46 (d) following FIG. 46 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 46 (e), which continues from FIG. 46 (d), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 46 (d).

FIG. 46 (f) following FIG. 46 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the left part of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Is shown. FIG. 46 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 46 (f) shows a state in which the image of the balloon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden by the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

In FIG. 46 (g) following from FIG. 46 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008, and the sub display device 1030 The image of the balloon and the image of the yacht displayed in are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. By comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 46 (h) following FIG. 46 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 46 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. In FIG. 46 (h), the image of the balloon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b, and the image of the yacht cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

FIG. 46 (i) following FIG. 46 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the right from the state of FIG. 46 (h). Further, FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 240 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated by 300 °) from the state of FIG. 46 (h) behind the movable body 1008. ing. Further, in FIG. 46 (i), a part of the image of the balloon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008, and the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visible. Indicates a state in which it cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008.

FIG. 46 (j) following FIG. 46 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 46 (i). Further, FIG. 46 (j) shows an operation in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 60 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 46 (g) behind the movable body 1008. Both movements to move to the lower initial position are performed in parallel, indicating the initial posture and the state of returning to the initial position. Further, FIG. 46 (j) shows a state in which both the image of the balloon and the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030 have been erased.

FIG. 46 (k) following FIG. 46 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 46 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 46 (l) following FIG. 46 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of character images may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. Of the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030, when the image is configured to be invisible to the player and when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one character image is visible to the player. Further, in the case where the one character image that became visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a preview image), the symbol variation display specifies that there is one character image that became visible at that time. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the character image is not. Further, the character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is such that both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. In some cases, it may be visible. A character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 can be visually recognized by the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 performing a moving operation. The symbol variation display in the case is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display in the case where both the movable bodies of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if they move. It may have been. Further, the character image of one of the characters displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is obtained by the movable bodies of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 moving. The symbol variation display when it is visible is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured in. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 14)
FIG. 47 shows an example of production in Example 14 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 47 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 of the 14th embodiment of the present embodiment and the 15th and 16th embodiments described later is different from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, and the variable icon and the hold icon are displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device 1030. ..

FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 47 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 47 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 47 (b), which continues from FIG. 47 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special Figure 1. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 47 (c) following FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 47 (d) following FIG. 47 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons that the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing.

FIG. 47 (e) following FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 47 (d).

In FIG. 47 (f) following from FIG. 47 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 is at a position where the variable icon on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 is hidden. It shows the moved state. FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbol 208b are visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the variable icon cannot be visually recognized because the variable icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via 1008b.

FIG. 47 (g) following FIG. 47 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 47 (f). Further, in FIG. 47 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The variable icon and the image of the yacht are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. By comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 47 (h) following FIG. 47 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, FIG. 47 (h) shows a state in which an image of the balloon is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 and the image of the balloon is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b. Further, the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030 cannot be visually recognized because it overlaps with the movable body 1008. Further, in FIG. 47 (h), by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the notice mode (white diamond). , The state in which the variable icon of the notice mode is visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008b is shown. In the production of this embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the variable icon in the normal mode changes to the notice mode via the transmissive unit 1008b. , The variable icon in the normal mode may be made visible to the player after changing to the notice mode.

FIG. 47 (i) following FIG. 47 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has rotated 200 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 47 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 47 (i) shows a state in which the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, and the variable icon of the advance notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 47 (j) following FIG. 47 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 47 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, in FIG. 47 (j), the variable icon of the notice mode displayed on the sub-display device 1030 is shown in a state of being visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 47 (j), the image of the yacht and the image of the balloon on the sub-display device 1030 show a state in which they cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 47 (k) following FIG. 47 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 47 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 47 (l) following FIG. 47 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variable icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub-display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 by being configured to be invisible to the player and by locating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only one of the plurality of character images and the variable icon may be configured to be visible to the player. In addition, there are cases where one character image that becomes visible at that time is a specific character image (for example, a notice image), or the change icon is a notice mode. At that time, one character image that becomes visible is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the symbol variation display when the variable icon is not a specific character image and the variable icon is not the notice mode. You may be. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variable icon may be visible. It may be configured so that only the player can see it, or it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be seen by the player.

In addition, one of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In some cases, it may become visible. One of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is that both the movable body of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform a moving operation. Compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized even if both the movable bodies 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion, the symbol variation display when visually recognizable by It may be configured as follows. In addition, one of the character images and variable icons displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 causes both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 to move. The symbol variation display that may be visible by performing the jackpot symbol mode is determined as compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 15)
FIG. 48 shows an example of production in Example 15 of this embodiment. FIG. 48 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 48 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 48A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 48A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 48A, the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 48 (b), which continues from FIG. 48 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol in which the same character image may not be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed as compared with the variable display.

FIG. 48 (c) following FIG. 48 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 48 (d) following FIG. 48 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 48 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons, in which the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game, is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing. Further, FIG. 48 (d) shows a state in which the number of reserved balls in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the starting port 230 in Special Figure 1. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG.

FIG. 48 (e) following FIG. 48 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 48 (d).

In FIG. 48 (f) following from FIG. 48 (e), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the left part of the movable body 1008 moves to a position where the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 is hidden. Shows the state of FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b. FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the hold icon cannot be visually recognized because the hold icon displayed on the left side of the screen of the sub display device 1030 and the movable body 1008 overlap each other. Further, the variable icon displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized in the area not shielded by the movable body 1008.

FIG. 48 (g) following FIG. 48 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 has moved to the left from the state of FIG. 48 (f). Further, in FIG. 48 (g), behind the movable body 1008, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position, is hidden by the movable body 1008, and is displayed on the sub display device 1030. The variable icon, hold icon, and yacht image are not visible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is compared with the symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. Then, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 48 (h) following FIG. 48 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 48 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the look-ahead notice mode (white diamond shape) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized is shown through the transparent unit 1008b. In the production of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the look-ahead notice mode via the transmission unit 1008b. However, the hold icon in the normal mode may be visually recognized by the player after changing to the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 48 (i) following FIG. 48 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 48 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, in FIG. 48 (i), the image of the balloon, the image of the yacht, the variable icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized by overlapping with the movable body 1008. Indicates a state in which it cannot be done.

FIG. 48 (j) following FIG. 48 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 48 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the variable icon in the notice mode displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008b. Further, in FIG. 48 (j), the image of the yacht on the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which it cannot be visually recognized.

FIG. 48 (k) following FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state shown in FIG. 48 (j) and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 48 (l) following FIG. 48 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 48 (m) following FIG. 48 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started.

In FIG. 48 (n), which continues from FIG. 48 (m), in the sub-display device 1030, the hold icon becomes a change icon after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, and the movement animation between the hold / change icons moves to the left. Indicates the finished state. Further, FIG. 48 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. A predetermined reach effect is started after FIG. 48 (n).

FIG. 48 (o), which continues from FIG. 48 (n), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the predetermined reach effect is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit. In this way, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode is finally more finally than the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a plurality of character images, variable icons, and hold icons may be displayed on the sub-display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, all the characters in the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. The image, the variable icon, and the hold icon are displayed on the sub display device 1030 by being configured to be invisible to the player and by locating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 at a position behind the movable body 1008. Only the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player. Further, when the hold icon that becomes visible at that time is in the look-ahead notice mode, the hold corresponding to the hold icon is held as compared with the case where the hold icon that becomes visible at that time is not in the look-ahead notice mode. In the special figure variation game that is started after being digested, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. And the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, the variable icon and the hold icon may be configured to be visible to the player, or the variable icon may be visible. It may be configured so that only the player can see it, or it may be configured so that only the hold icon can be seen by the player.

Further, the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. As a result, it may be visible. The variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 are visually recognized when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move. The symbol variation display that may be possible is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display that is not visible even if both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion. It may be configured as follows. The visible parts of the variable icon and hold icon may differ before and after the move of the movable body. When the look-ahead notice is executed, the visible parts of the variable icon and hold icon may differ before and after the move of the movable body. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display to be read ahead than when the pre-reading notice without is executed. Further, the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 move the movable body of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. As a result, the symbol variation display that may be visible is determined as compared with the symbol variation display when both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized because they do not move. It may be configured to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 16)
FIG. 49 shows an example of production in Example 16 of this embodiment. FIG. 49 shows the effect state in chronological order. FIG. 49 shows a substantially front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 49A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49A, the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 49 (a), the movable bodies 1002, 1004, 1006, 1008, 1010, and 1012 are located at the initial positions. When the movable body 1002 is located at the initial position, the entire movable body 1002 is visible to the player. Further, a part of the image of the sun displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the image of the sun can be visually recognized through the transmission portion 1006a. It has become. Further, a part of the cloud image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1006, and the other part of the cloud image is visible through the transmission portion 1006b. In addition, a part of the balloon image displayed in the effect display area 208d is hidden by the movable body 1002, and the other part of the balloon image is visible. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a yacht, an image of clouds, and an image of a seascape.

FIG. 49 (b), which continues from FIG. 49 (a), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special Figure 1. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays the same image as the balloon image displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208. The symbol variation display in which the same character image may be displayed simultaneously on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 is a symbol variation display when the same character image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed in comparison with the above.

FIG. 49 (c) following FIG. 49 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started on the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). Further, in the sub-display device 1030, after the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon becomes a variable icon and a movement animation between the hold / variable icons that moves to the left is started. In addition, the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the image of the balloon has been erased.

FIG. 49 (d) following FIG. 49 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Further, FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons that the hold icon becomes the change icon and moves to the left after the start of the special figure 1 change game is completed in the sub display device 1030. ing.

FIG. 49 (e) following FIG. 49 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The reach effect is started after FIG. 49 (d).

FIG. 49 (f), which continues from FIG. 49 (e), shows a state in which the number of reservations in Special FIG. 1 has increased from 0 to 1 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the start port 230 of Special FIG. ing. On the sub-display device 1030, a white circular hold icon in a normal mode is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. Further, in FIG. 49 (f), the movable body 1008 starts the effect operation from the initial position, and the variable icon and the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008b of the movable body 1008. It shows the state of moving to the position where. Further, FIG. 49F shows a state in which the movable body 1008 shields the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to see. Further, the image of the cloud displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a part of the decorative symbols 208b and 208c are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a. Further, the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transparent unit 1008b.

In FIG. 49 (g) following from FIG. 49 (f), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the initial position behind the movable body 1008 and is hidden by the movable body 1008, and the sub display device 1030 The variable icon, hold icon, and yacht image displayed in are invisible. The symbol variation display in which a part of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is hidden behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is a symbol variation display in which the effect of hiding behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is not performed. By comparison, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed.

FIG. 49 (h) following FIG. 49 (g) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 47 (g) behind the movable body 1008. There is. Further, in FIG. 48 (h), the hold icon displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes from the normal mode (white circle) to the look-ahead notice mode (white diamond shape) by rotating the sub liquid crystal unit 1032. However, the state in which the variable icon in the normal mode and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode are visually recognized is shown through the transparent unit 1008b. In the production of the present embodiment, the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 may cause the player to visually recognize that the hold icon in the normal mode changes to the look-ahead notice mode via the transmission unit 1008b. However, the hold icon in the normal mode may be visually recognized by the player after changing to the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 49 (i) following FIG. 49 (h) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 is rotated 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 49 (h) and returned to the initial posture. There is. Further, FIG. 49 (i) shows a state in which the image of the yacht displayed on the sub-display device 1030, the variable icon in the normal mode, and the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode overlap with the movable body 1008 and cannot be visually recognized. ing.

FIG. 49 (j) following FIG. 49 (i) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves downward from the state of FIG. 49 (i) and returns to the initial position. Further, on the sub-display device 1030, an image imitating a button, a character string image of "push" above it, and a meter image displaying the validity period of pressing the button are displayed overlapping with the hold icon. There is. Further, the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode may change to an image imitating a button or the like. Further, FIG. 49 (j) shows a state in which an image imitating a variable icon and a button and a character string image of “push” above the variable icon are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008b, and the meter image is a movable body 1008. It is hidden by and indicates an invisible state. Further, in FIG. 49 (j), the image of the yacht on the sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which it cannot be visually recognized.

In FIG. 49 (k) following from FIG. 49 (j), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 moves upward from the state of FIG. 49 (j), and the screen of the sub display device 1030 is visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a. It shows the possible states. Further, FIG. 49 (k) shows a state in which the character string image of “push” displayed on the sub-display device 1030 can be visually recognized via the transmission unit 1008a. Further, the variable icon, the image imitating the button, and the meter image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 are hidden by the movable body 1008 to show a state in which they cannot be visually recognized. The symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 may be visually recognized through the transmission unit 1008a has a jackpot symbol mode as compared with the symbol variation display in which the screen of the sub display device 1030 is not visually recognized. It may be configured so that it can be easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 49 (l) following FIG. 49 (k) shows a state in which the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the character string image of "push" is erased based on the player pressing the chance button 136, and the image imitating the button and the effect image are displayed in the vicinity thereof. Further, FIG. 49 (l) shows a state in which the effect image is visually recognized through the transparent portion 1008b.

In FIG. 49 (m) following from FIG. 49 (l), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is shown in FIG. 49 (l) based on the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state of moving from the state of to the uppermost position. Further, FIG. 49 (m) shows a state in which a part of the button image and the effect image displayed on the sub display device 1030 are visually recognized via the transparent portion 1008a.

FIG. 49 (n) following FIG. 49 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1008 moves to the right from the state of FIG. 49 (m) and returns to the initial position. Further, a variable icon, a button image, and an effect image are displayed on the sub display device 1030.

In FIG. 49 (o) following from FIG. 49 (n), the rotation operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 is executed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. FIG. 49 (o) shows a state in which the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated by 60 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 49 (n).

In FIG. 49 (p) following from FIG. 49 (o), the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 rotates 300 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 49 (o) to return to the initial posture. After that, it shows the state of returning to the lower initial position. Further, in the operation of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002 executed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136, both the operation of rotating counterclockwise and the operation of moving to the lower initial position are performed in parallel. It may return to the initial posture and the initial position.

FIG. 49 (q) following FIG. 49 (p) shows a state in which the button image and the effect image are erased in the sub display device 1030, and the variable icon in the normal state is changed to the variable icon in the notice mode. Further, FIG. 49 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is a big hit. The symbol variation display in which the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated based on the pressing of the chance button 136 is a jackpot symbol mode rather than the symbol variation display in which the sub-liquid crystal unit 1032 is not rotated based on the pressing of the chance button 136. May be configured so that is easily displayed.

As described above, in the production of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, a plurality of character images, a variable icon, a hold icon, and an image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment is configured so that the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 can move and rotate in the vertical direction at a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1008, so that all the character images among the plurality of character images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are displayed. , The variable icon, the hold icon, and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 are configured so as not to be visible to the player, and the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is located at a position behind the movable body 1008. In some cases, only the variable icon displayed on the display device 1030 and the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136 are visible to the player. Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 moves to a position behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008, all the character images and the variable icons among the plurality of character images are displayed. The hold icon and the image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be configured to be visible to the player, or only the holding icon and the image prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 can be visually recognized by the player. In some cases, only the variable icon may be visible to the player, or only the hold icon may be visible to the player. It may be configured so that the player can visually recognize only the image prompting the player to press the chance button 136.

Further, the image prompting the pressing of the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. It may be possible that both movable bodies can be visually recognized by performing a moving operation. The image prompting the pressing of the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is the image of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. The symbol variation display that may be visible when the movable body performs the moving motion is compared with the symbol variation display that may not be visible even if both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 perform the moving motion. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. The visible part of the image that prompts you to press the variable icon, hold icon, or chance button 136 may differ before and after the movement of the movable body. When the look-ahead notice is executed, the variable icon or hold before and after the movement of the movable body. The visible part of the image prompting the pressing of the icon or chance button 136 may not be different. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the pre-reading target symbol variation display than when the pre-reading notice is executed. You may be. The image prompting the pressing of the variable icon, the hold icon, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 located behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 is the image of both the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. When the movable body can be visually recognized by performing the moving motion, the symbol variation display to be read ahead is compared with the case where both the movable body of the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008 cannot be visually recognized by performing the moving motion. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. Further, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 may perform a vertical movement and a rotation operation behind the movable body 1006 and the movable body 1008. In this case, the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of this embodiment may be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208.

(Example 17)
An example of the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of the 17th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Further, in FIG. 50 and each figure described later, production examples of the special figure 1 variable game in each embodiment are shown in chronological order. Further, the variation of the decorative symbol in the symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030 is indicated by a thick white arrow. During the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 described later is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. The other effect may be, for example, an effect of displaying a predetermined background or character without displaying the decorative pattern, or an effect of displaying the decorative pattern and displaying the predetermined background or character. Good. Further, during the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 is being executed, the decorative symbol display device 208 may execute the same effect as the effect of the sub display device 1030.

First, the common points of FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, which will be described later, will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). As shown in FIG. 50A, a decorative frame F1 having a shape in which the letter "L" is inverted upside down is displayed in the upper left portion of the display area of the sub-display device 1030. A square special figure 1 reserved number display area 1931 is provided in the upper left portion of the decorative frame F1, and a square special figure 2 reserved number display area 1932 is provided on the right side thereof. A special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 is provided below the 1931, and a special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934 is provided below the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933. In the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the hold number of the special figure 1 is displayed as a number, and for example, "0" is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 1. In the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932, the hold number of the special figure 2 is displayed as a number, and for example, “0” is displayed when there is no hold of the special figure 2. Further, in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, when the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 1 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 1 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the fourth symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 1 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game. Further, in the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, when the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, "/" is notified as the variable display of the fourth symbol that the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. , "\" Images are displayed alternately, and when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed (when special figure 2 is stopped display), "-" or "○" is displayed as the fourth symbol display. The image is displayed. "-" Is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, and "○" is the 4th symbol displayed when the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. is there. In addition, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 variable game, "-" may be displayed as the fourth symbol during the non-execution of the special figure 2 variable game.

A horizontally long rectangular decorative frame F2 is displayed below the display area of the sub-display device 1030. In the center of the decorative frame F2, a square-shaped variable icon display area 1940 in which a part of the left and right frames is open is provided. The variable icon may be displayed in a display size different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 1930 described later (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon). This may make it easier to distinguish between the variable icon and the hold icon.

A special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area 1940, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 1940. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 1. That is, the special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 1 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 1 hold icon corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 can be displayed respectively. Similarly, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960 is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. Each of the first to fourth regions corresponds to the first to fourth holding order of the special figure 2. That is, the special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most memorized in the past) special figure 2 hold can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, 2 in the second to fourth areas. The special figure 2 hold icon corresponding to the fourth special figure 2 hold can be displayed respectively. Further, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 1960, various animations representing the movement of the hold icon are executed.

A square navigation character display area 1970 is provided on the left side of the special figure 1 hold display area 1950. A merchant character image H1 is displayed in the navigation character display area 1970. The merchant character image H1 is used for explanatory effects such as tutorial effects and notices (notices of changes and look-aheads).

A square-shaped effect custom state display area 1980 is provided on the right side of the special figure 2 hold display area 1960. In the effect custom state display area 1980, "levels 1 to 99" are displayed according to the effect custom state of the pachinko machine 1000. The level of the effect custom state is set to increase, for example, by performing an effect with a low appearance rate. The level of the effect custom state may be set to increase even when a predetermined number of game balls are hit, a predetermined effect is executed, or a big hit is won.

FIG. 50A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. ing. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying the loss is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 1934, the fourth symbol of the display mode of "-" for notifying that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game was out of order is stopped and displayed. Further, "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the number of hold of special figure 2 is 0 in the special figure 2 hold number display area 1932. "0" indicating that is displayed. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950, the default special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in a white circle is displayed.

FIG. 50 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "0" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0.

Further, when the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the special figure 1 variable game is started, between the hold and the variable icons in the variable icon display area 1940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 of the sub display device 1030 The movement animation of is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 becomes the change icon 1941 and moves to the change icon display area 1940. .. The right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon 1941 in FIG. 50 (b) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon 1941.

In FIG. 50 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030, the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, and the change icon 1941 appears in the change icon display area 1940. Indicates the displayed state. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and white in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. The default special figure 1 hold icon 1952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 in FIG. 50 (b) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952. Further, in FIG. 50 (c), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 1030d. The balloon image is an image used for a notice by the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 50D shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 1953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. The upward arrow shown to the left of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 in FIG. 50 (d) indicates the moving direction of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, and an effect that is expected to develop into a reach effect is executed. Further, the hold change image H2 having a substantially quadrangular shape including the image of the character string of "hold change" is displayed overlapping with the decorative symbols displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b and the right symbol display area 1030c. .. The hold change image H2 is an image displayed to notify that a look-ahead notice or an effect of the change notice that changes the display mode of the hold icon or the change icon being displayed is executed. In this example, the hold change image H2 notifies that the change animation in which the display mode of the hold icon being displayed is changed is executed. The hold change image H2 may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 1 is changed, or may be displayed only when the hold icon of special figure 2 is changed. It may be a display displayed only when the variable icon is changed, or it may be displayed only when the hold icon of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is changed. The display may appear only when the hold icon and the change icon of the special figure 2 are changed, or appear only when the hold icon of the special figure 1, the hold icon of the special figure 2, and the change icon are changed. It may be a display.

In FIG. 50 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified status. In addition, an erase animation is displayed in which the variable icon 1941 displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 moves downward, and the variable icon 1941 is gradually erased. Further, FIG. 50 (e) shows a state in which a change animation in which the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from “white to black” is executed. In the change animation, an image of a lightning strike from the hold change image H2 to the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 is displayed, and an effect image is displayed overlapping with the special figure 1 hold icon 1951. The effect image is displayed on the front side of the special figure 1 hold icons 1952 and 1953, and the entire special figure 1 hold icon 1952 and a part of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are hidden by the effect image.

FIG. 50 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, the symbol combination "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was incorrect is stopped and displayed. ing. Further, in FIG. 50 (f), the change animation ends, the hold change image H2 and the effect image shown in FIG. 50 (e) are erased, and the display mode of the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 changes from a white circle to a black circle. It's changing.

FIG. 50 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub display device 1030, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed. Further, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, the special figure 1 hold icon 1952 becomes a variable icon, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and the move animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are started. ing. Further, in FIG. 50 (g), a balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the sub display device 1030 is started to be displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 1030d.

FIG. 50 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1953 are completed. Further, in FIG. 50 (h), an image of the character string of "Don-" is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant, suggesting that the character image H3 of the character image H3 described later appears. The production is being executed. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 50 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display area 1030d, and the image of the character string "Called?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace. In addition, an image of the character string "Don!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

FIG. 50 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image H3 of the palace.

FIG. 50 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 50 (k) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed in the longitudinal direction due to the problem of space on the paper.

In FIG. 50 (l), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) from the state of FIG. 50 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center when viewed from the player. The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the images displayed on the sub-display device 1030 before rotation of the sub-display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 50 (j) and (k) have an aspect ratio of 9:16 (aspect ratio of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208). ) Is displayed with an aspect ratio that matches the screen, whereas the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 shown in FIG. 50 (l) has an aspect ratio that matches the screen with an aspect ratio of 1: 1. It is displayed. Here, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 rotated 90 ° counterclockwise takes the horizontal axis in the direction rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and is orthogonal to the horizontal axis. This is the aspect ratio when the vertical axis is taken in the direction. Similarly, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 after rotation has a horizontal axis in the direction rotated counterclockwise from the horizontal direction and a vertical axis in the direction orthogonal to the horizontal axis. This is the aspect ratio when

In FIG. 50 (m), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (totally rotated 180 °) from the state of FIG. 50 (k) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the rotation center when viewed from the player. The screen of the display device 1030 is shown. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is changed to the aspect ratio before rotation.

FIG. 50 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 50 (m). Shown. Further, in FIG. 50 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps with the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 1030b, the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 50 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Note that FIG. 50 (n) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 50 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 50 (n). Further, FIG. 50 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, a lightning strike is displayed from the pending change image H2, and an animation of lightning strikes on the variable icon displayed in a black circle is executed. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 50 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of 1950 shows a state in which the hold icon increases animation. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 954 is enlarged and displayed as compared with other hold icons. Therefore, it may be possible to draw the player's attention to the enlarged and displayed hold icon during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 50 (n) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed.

FIG. 50 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 50 (o). Further, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 50 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon 1941 are erased, and the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The variable icon is enlarged and displayed. Therefore, it may be possible for the player to pay attention to the enlarged and displayed variable icon during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Note that FIG. 50 (n) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper, but the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has not changed. Next, in FIG. 50 (q), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 50 (p), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated. It shows a state in which 1030 makes one rotation and returns to its original state. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon that were enlarged and displayed have returned to their normal sizes. Next, in FIG. 50 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon is executed. The downward arrow shown in the upper left of the variable icon in FIG. 50 (r) indicates the moving direction of the variable icon.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change. A character image or a decorative symbol may be used for the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030, and the presence of the character image or the decorative symbol is enhanced by changing the aspect ratio of the character image or the decorative symbol. It may be possible to make a strong impression on the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 makes one rotation (360 ° rotation), but the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate one or more rotations by using the slip ring described above. It may have been. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the sub-display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

The aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may change in relation to the rotation angle of the sub-display device 1030. For example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of the image using a predetermined function with the rotation angle of the sub-display device 1030 as a variable, and from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio. The work area of the VRAM 436 may be used to generate the display image. Further, the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may change randomly. For example, when the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit determines the aspect ratio of an image using random numbers and generates a display image from the image data stored in the ROM 406 based on the aspect ratio using the work area of the VRAM 436. There may be. Further, the display area of the image may be enlarged or reduced depending on the change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030, or the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may be enlarged or reduced. The aspect ratio of the image may change so as to keep the display area constant.

Further, the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. .. Further, the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 may change is compared with the symbol variation display in which the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 does not change. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the more frequently the aspect ratio of the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be, or the image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 may be configured. The greater the degree of change in the aspect ratio of, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon and the variable icon are enlarged and displayed during the rotation display notice effect. When the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or variable icon is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and stopped and displayed as compared with the case where the effect of enlarging and displaying the hold icon or variable icon is not performed. It may be configured for ease of use. In the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated. However, instead of the rotation of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 is rotated to rotate the decorative symbol display device. An effect of rotating the image displayed on the 208 may be performed, or by rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 at the same time or separately, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display are displayed. An effect of rotating the image displayed on the device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable and may be fixed to the game board 200 so that the sub display device 1030 cannot be rotated and moved.

(Example 18)
An example of the sub-display device 1030 effect of the 18th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. 51 (a) to 51 (r) show the effect of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. FIG. 51 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as shown in FIG. 50 (a). Next, FIG. 51 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 50 (b). Next, in FIG. 51 (c), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 1951 ends, and the variable icon display area 1940 is displayed. The variable icon 1941 is displayed. Further, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the special figure 1 start port 230, "1" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and black is displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950. The special figure 1 hold icon 952 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon 952 appears by the increasing animation of the hold icon. Further, FIG. 51 (c) shows immediately after the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1 displayed in the navigation character display area 1970 of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the lower left of the effect display area 1030d. Indicates the state.

FIG. 51 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030. Further, based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230, "2" is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931, and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 1950 is black. The special figure 1 hold icon 953 displayed in a circle shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by the increasing animation. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image H1 of the merchant.

In FIG. 51 (e), "decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified status. Next, FIG. 51 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 50 (f). Next, FIG. 51 (g) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and shows the same state as in FIG. 50 (g). Next, FIG. 51 (h) shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the movement animation of the special figure 1 hold icon 953 are completed, and shows the same state as in FIG. 50 (h). Next, FIG. 51 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character image h3 of the hall is displayed, which is the same as FIG. 50 (i). It shows the state.

FIG. 51 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 1030a and the right symbol display area 1030c of the sub display device 1030, and the reach effect is started. In addition, an image of the character string "chance?" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1, and then "chance!" Is displayed in the balloon image representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the lord. The image of the character string is displayed. It is suggested that the rotation display notice effect is executed by displaying the image of the character string of "chance!" Representing the dialogue of the character image h3 of the palace.

FIG. 51 (k) shows the screen of the sub display device 1030 in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise when viewed from the player with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. The decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 and the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (display of the number of holds, the image of the fourth symbol) (hereinafter, these images are referred to as "non-rotating target images" ) Is a sub-display device 1030 in preference to an image other than the non-rotating target image (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “rotating target image”) in a mode in which the player does not rotate. It is displayed in the upper left. Further, the variable display of the fourth symbol displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 1933 and the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 1030b is also executed during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. In addition, the rotation target image may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image, or only a part of the rotation target images may be displayed with priority over the non-rotation target image. It may be present, or only a part of the non-rotational target images may be displayed with priority over the rotation target image. Note that FIG. 51 (k) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 51 (l) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (k). Further, the non-rotating target image has priority over a part of Yoshimune's character image H3 and a part of "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area, and is placed in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 by the player. It is displayed as moving in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the viewpoint. Note that FIG. 51 (l) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 51 (m) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise (total rotation 180 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (l). .. Further, the non-rotating target image is moved and displayed in the lower right portion of the sub-display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, in preference to the decorative frame F2.

FIG. 51 (n) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 51 (m). .. Further, in FIG. 51 (n), the pending change image H2 overlaps the middle symbol display area 1030b, the decorative symbol displayed in the right symbol display area 1030c, and the character image H3 of the palace during the execution of the rotation display notice effect. Is displayed. The pending change image H2 displayed in FIG. 51 (n) is an image used for producing a notice of the change that changes the display mode of the change icon. Further, the non-rotating target image is rotated to the lower left of the sub display device 1030 as seen from the player, in preference to a part of the decorative frame F2 and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1. It is displayed in a moving manner. Note that FIG. 51 (n) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 51 (o) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 51 (n). .. Further, FIG. 51 (o) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the variable icon is executed. In this effect, an animation is executed in which lightning strikes from the pending change image H2 and strikes a variable icon displayed in a black circle. The lightning strike variable icon overlaps with the effect image, so that the entire variable icon is hidden by the effect image. Further, in FIG. 51 (o), “2” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 1931 based on the game ball entering the special figure 1 start port 230, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is displayed. The special figure 1 hold icon 1954 displayed in a black circle in the second region of 1950 shows a state in which the hold icon is increased by animation. Further, the non-rotating target image has priority over a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area and a part of the balloon image representing the dialogue of the merchant character image H1, and the left middle part of the sub display device 1030. In addition, the movement is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Note that FIG. 51 (o) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper.

FIG. 51 (p) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 315 °) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 51 (o). Further, the pending change image H2 shown in FIG. 51 (o) and the effect image displayed overlapping with the entire change icon are erased, and the change in the mode in which the character "heat" is drawn in the circle. The icon is displayed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in a smaller size than the other hold icons. Further, the non-rotating target image is moved and displayed on the upper left portion of the sub-display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, in preference to a part of the "decoration 3" displayed in the left symbol display area. Has been done. Note that FIG. 51 (p) shows the screen of the sub-display device 1030 compressed due to the problem of space on the paper. Next, in FIG. 51 (q), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 51 (p), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated. It shows a state in which 1030 makes one rotation and returns to its original state. Further, the non-rotating target image is displayed on the upper left portion of the sub-display device 1030 in a non-rotating manner as viewed from the player, and returns to the state before the rotation display notice effect is executed. Further, the special figure 1 hold icon 1954 is displayed in the same size as the other hold icons. Next, in FIG. 51 (r), "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 1030a to 1030c of the sub-display device 1030, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Indicates the notified state. Further, by moving the variable icon displayed in the variable icon display area 1940 downward, an erasing animation for erasing the variable icon 1941 is executed.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the rotation target image is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when rotating the sub-display device 1030, the decorative frame F1 displayed on the sub-display device 1030 and the non-rotating target of the image displayed in the decorative frame F1 (holding number display, image of the fourth symbol). The image is displayed in a mode that does not rotate when viewed from the player. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, the non-rotating target image of the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed so as to be displayed at a prominent position of the sub display device 1030 when viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. In addition, any one of the decorative design, Yoshimune's character image H3, the grandfather's character image H1, the hold icon, the variable icon, the decorative frame F2, etc., or all the images displayed on the sub display device 1030 are non-rotating targets. As an image, it may be displayed in a mode that is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in this case, the larger the number of non-rotating target images, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotated to rotate the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol may be rotated. By rotating the display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 at the same time or separately, the effect of rotating the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030 may be performed. Further, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be rotatable, and the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

(Example 19)
An example of the effect of the sub-display device 1030 of the 19th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a) to 52 (l) show the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. During the period in which the effect of the sub display device 1030 shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 to 57, which will be described later, is displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect different from the effect of the sub display device 1030. ing. As the other effect, for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern and displaying a predetermined background or character may be used.

FIG. 52A shows a state in which “1” indicating that the number of holds in Special FIG. 1 is 1 is displayed as the hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. There is. Next, FIG. 52B shows that the hold of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the hold number of the special figure 1 is 0 as the hold number display image in the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. The indicated "0" is displayed.

FIG. 52C shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 52 (d) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of rotation. Further, the hold display area 1030e at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper left of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated by °.

FIG. 52 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 52 (d). Is shown. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed with ° rotation (90 ° rotation in total). Next, in FIG. 52 (f), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 52 (e). Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper left portion of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the upper right portion of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed as rotated (rotated by 135 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 52 (g), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (f) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total 180 ° rotation). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 180 ° in total).

FIG. 52 (H) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 225 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 52 (g). Is shown. Further, the hold display area 1030e in the upper right part of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the lower right part of the sub display device 1030. Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated by 225 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 52 (i), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total rotation of 270 °) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state of FIG. 52 (H). Shows the state of Further, the "0" image of the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is rotated 45 ° clockwise around the center of the "0" image in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed (rotated by 270 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 52 (j), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the state of FIG. 52 (i) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation (total rotation of 315 °). Shows the state of Further, the hold display area 1030e at the lower right of the sub display device 1030 has moved to the original position at the lower left of the sub display device 1030. Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed rotated (rotated by 315 ° in total). Next, in FIG. 52 (k), the sub display device 1030 rotates 45 ° counterclockwise (total 360 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 52 (j). Shows the state of Further, the image of "0" as the hold number display image displayed in the hold display area 1030e is 45 ° clockwise around the center of the image of "0" in accordance with the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030. It is displayed by rotating (rotating 360 ° in total). Next, FIG. 52 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image of the palace is rotated and displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030. Further, when the sub display device 1030 is rotated, the hold number display image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is displayed in such a manner that it does not rotate when viewed from the player. Further, the hold display area 1030e of the sub display device 1030 is moved so as to be displayed in the left corner of the sub display device 1030 as viewed from the player in accordance with the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the hold number display image, which is important information for the player, is displayed at a position where the player can easily see it. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in the rotation display notice effect in the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is configured to rotate once (360 ° rotation), but by using the slip ring described above for the sub display device 1030, it rotates one rotation or more. It may be configured to do so. For example, the higher the number of rotations of the sub-display device 1030, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set. Further, instead of the sub display device 1030, the decorative symbol display device 208 may perform the effect of the present embodiment, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated at the same time or separately. As a result, the effect of this embodiment may be performed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

(Example 20)
An example of the production of the 20th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (k) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 53A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 53B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 53C shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 53 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Next, FIGS. 53 (d) to 53 (j) show a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 53 (d) to 53 (j), the character image H3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the player always visually recognizes that the character image H3 of the palace is not rotating. Next, FIG. 53 (k) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 1030, the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 at the same speed. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated when viewed from the player. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 and the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, instead of rotating the sub display device 1030, an effect of rotating the decorative symbol display device 208 may be performed, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be rotated simultaneously or separately. The production may be performed.

(Example 21)
An production example of the 21st embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (l) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 54A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 54B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect").

FIG. 54 (c) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. FIG. 54 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise with respect to the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (b). Next, in FIG. 54 (d), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 90 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 54 (c). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (c). Next, in FIG. 54 (e), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 135 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 54 (d). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly enlarged in the horizontal direction and compressed in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (d). Next, in FIG. 54 (f), the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise (total 180 ° rotation) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 54 (e). Shows the state of Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 in accordance with the counterclockwise rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed by rotating 45 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is visually recognized by the player as if it is not rotated. Further, the character image H3 of the palace is slightly compressed in the horizontal direction and enlarged in the vertical direction from the state displayed in FIG. 54 (e), and the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace is shown in FIG. 54. It has returned to the state of (b). Next, FIGS. 54 (g) to 54 (j) show a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated by 45 °. Further, in FIGS. 54 (g) to 54 (j), the character image H3 of the palace is rotated clockwise at the same rotation speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, while the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the player always visually recognizes that the character image H3 of the palace is not rotating. Further, in FIGS. 54 (g) to 54 (j), the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace has not changed. Next, FIG. 53 (l) shows a state in which the rotation display notice effect is completed, and the character image H3 of the palace is erased in the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, while rotating the sub display device 1030, the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated in the opposite direction to the sub display device 1030 at the same speed. By displaying, the character image is displayed in a mode in which the character image is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes. Therefore, even though the sub-display device 1030 is rotating, the character image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 does not rotate, which may give the player unexpectedness and the character image. By changing the aspect ratio, the presence of the character image may be enhanced, and the player may be given a strong impression. The symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the rotation display notice effect is not performed. Further, in this embodiment, the character image is rotated and displayed in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, but the opposite direction of the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed in a direction different from the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030, or in the same direction as the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030 and the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub display device 1030. The character image may be rotated and displayed at a different speed. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may differ depending on the frequency and degree of change in the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030. For example, the more frequently the aspect ratio of the character image displayed on the sub display device 1030 changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be configured, or the character image may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The greater the degree to which the aspect ratio of the character image changes, the higher the reliability of the jackpot may be. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

(Example 22)
An example of the production of the 22nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 55A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 55B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is an image used for the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect.

FIGS. 55 (c) to 55 (e) show a state in which the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 moves in the left-right direction in the plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 55 (c) to 55 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before moving in the left-right direction.

FIG. 55 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 55 (b). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the effect display area 1030a of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a manner of moving to the right by the same distance as the left movement distance of the sub display device 1030. There is. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess that has been cut off in the sub display device 1030 is displayed in the upper left portion. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability.

FIG. 55 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the left from the state shown in FIG. 55 (c). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the right by the same distance as the movement distance of the sub display device 1030 in the left direction. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed so as to be visually recognized as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed in the upper left portion.

FIG. 55 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 55 (d). Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in the upper left portion, and a part of the princess character image H4 is cut off.

FIG. 55 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the state shown in FIG. 55 (e), and the lateral movement display notice effect as the reach effect has been completed. The character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a mode of moving to the left by the same distance as the moving distance to the right of the sub display device 1030. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a non-moving manner when viewed from the player. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is not displayed on the sub display device 1030.

As described above, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is moved and displayed at the same speed in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 is horizontally moved. Therefore, the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a mode in which the player does not move as seen from the player. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4, which was cut off in the sub display device 1030 before the horizontal movement display notice effect is executed, is displayed next to the image displayed in the sub display device 1030. By performing the movement display, it is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the sub display device 1030 moves a predetermined distance. Therefore, the player pays attention to the moving distance of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game. In addition, when the lateral movement display notice effect of the present embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display is finally a big hit symbol mode as compared with the case where the lateral movement display notice effect is not performed. May be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop. Further, in the lateral movement display notice effect of the present implementation, the character may be displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 1030 moves to the left by a predetermined distance to display the princess character image H4, the sub-display device 1030 moves to the right by a predetermined distance to display the enemy character of the palace. May be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess used for the horizontal movement display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the horizontal movement display notice effect. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

(Example 23)
An example of the production of the 23rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 56A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, FIG. 56B shows a state in which the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the effect display area 1030d of the sub display device 1030. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). Further, FIG. 56 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (b). .. The image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the palace character image H3, and the princess character image H3 and the princess character image H4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 56 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. FIG. 56 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (b-2).

FIGS. 56 (c) to 56 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 56 (c) to 56 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 56 (c) to 56 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 56 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 56 (b). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the character image H4 of the princess, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 1030, is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 56 (c-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 56 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1). FIG. 56 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2) and turns the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (c).

FIG. 56 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 56 (c). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player in the lower left. Further, FIG. 56 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. FIG. 56 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1). FIG. 56 (d-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (d-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (d).

FIG. 56 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 1030. Further, FIG. 56 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. FIG. 56 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. It is the same as the image data shown in (c-1). FIG. 56 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2). FIG. 56 (e-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (c-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (d) is shown. FIG. 56 (e-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 56 (c-3).

FIG. 56 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e) and returned to the original state. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is not displayed on the sub display device 1030. FIG. 56 (f-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 56 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 56 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). FIG. 56 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 56 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 56 (f). The generated display data is shown. The display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 56 (b-2). FIG. 56 (f-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 56 (f-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 56 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 56 (f) is shown. FIG. 56 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 56 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the image displayed on the sub display device 1030 is rotated and displayed at the same speed in the direction opposite to that of the sub display device 1030 while rotating the sub display device 1030. , The character image H3 of the palace is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the princess character image H4, which has been cut off in the sub display device 1030 before the rotation display notice effect is executed, is a rotation display of the image displayed on the sub display device 1030. Is displayed on the sub-display device 1030. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 by a predetermined angle or more. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the character image H4 of the princess may be displayed in the upper left part of the character image of the palace. In this case, the character image H4 of the princess, which was displayed before the rotation, is cut off by the sub display device 1030 by rotating the sub display device 1030 counterclockwise. Further, by adjusting the display position of the character image H4 of the princess, the sub-display device 1030 can be rotated by a predetermined angle or more so that the sub-display device 1030 can be cut off from the sub-display device 1030. Therefore, the player pays attention to the rotation angle of the sub display device 1030, and may be able to improve the interest of the game.

In the rotation display notice effect of this implementation, the character image H4 of the princess is displayed by rotating the sub display device 1030, but the character is displayed according to the jackpot reliability of the symbol variation display being executed. It may be. For example, if the jackpot reliability is relatively low, the enemy character of the palace may be displayed. Further, while the sub-display device 1030 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle to display the princess character image H4, the sub-display device 1030 rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle to display the enemy of the palace. Characters may be displayed. In addition, the aspect ratio of the character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess used for the rotation display notice effect in this embodiment may change during the rotation display notice effect. In addition, when the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display finally determines the jackpot symbol mode as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed. It may be configured so that the stop display is likely to occur. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

(Example 24)
An example of the production of the 24th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) to 57 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order.

FIG. 57A shows the state of the sub liquid crystal display device in which the special figure 1 variable game has started. The sub-display device 1030 shows a state in which nothing is displayed. Next, in FIG. 57B, the sub-display device 1030 moves downward, and the character image H3 of the palace is displayed in the central portion of the sub-display device 1030 and the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed in the lower left of the sub-display device 1030. It shows the state. The character image H3 of the palace is a character image used for the effect of the notice of "rotation" shown in FIG. 16B (hereinafter, may be referred to as "rotation display notice effect"). FIG. 57 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) has a princess character image H3 and a princess character image H4 at the lower left of the palace character image H3, and the princess character image H3 and the princess character image H4 are This is image data in a non-rotating manner. Further, in this example, the princess character image H4 is an image used for a notice with high jackpot reliability. FIG. 57 (b-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (b). The generated display data is shown. From the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1), a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 centered on the center of the image data is cut out and used as display data. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from ROM 406 is superimposed. FIG. 57 (b-3) shows a state in which an image is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2). Further, the character image H1 of the merchant is displayed with priority over the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1), but the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) is prioritized over the character image H1 of the merchant. May be displayed.

FIGS. 57 (c) to 57 (e) show a state in which the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect is executed. In the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise in a plane parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then clockwise. Is rotated 45 °. Further, the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line in the drawings of FIGS. 57 (c) to 57 (e) indicates the position of the sub display device 1030 before rotation. Further, the arrows shown in the drawings of FIGS. 57 (c) to 57 (e) indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 57 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b) due to the rotation of the sub display device 1030. Is displayed as being rotated 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4, which has been cut off from the sub-display device 1030, is displayed in the lower right of the character image H1 in a mode in which the player does not rotate. Further, FIG. 57 (c-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) is rotated by 30 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 57 (c-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (c). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (c-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1). This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 57 (c-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (c-2), and the sub display device 1030 is counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (b). Shows the state rotated by 30 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 57 (c).

FIG. 57 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation from the state shown in FIG. 57 (c). .. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (c) by rotating the sub display device 1030. Is displayed as being rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, the entire character image H4 of the princess is displayed on the right side of the character image H1 of the merchant in a mode in which the character image H4 of the princess is not rotated when viewed from the player. Further, FIG. 57 (d-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (c-1) is rotated by 15 ° clockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 57 (d-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (d). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data as the center from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (d-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1). This is display data in which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 57 (d-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (d-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is rotated counterclockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (c). Shows the state rotated by 15 °, and shows the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 57 (d).

FIG. 57 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated by 15 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (d) with the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 as the center of rotation. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (d) by rotating the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a mode in which is rotated 15 ° clockwise around the center of rotation. Further, in the sub-display device 1030, a part of the princess character image H4 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player at the lower right of the character image H1, and the other part is cut off from the sub-display device 1030. ing. Further, FIG. 57 (e) shows a state immediately before the end of the rotation display notice effect as the reach effect. Further, FIG. 57 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) is an image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (d-1) is rotated by 15 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation. 57 (e-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (e). The generated display data is shown. The display data is obtained by cutting out a predetermined rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 around the center of the image data from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1). Further, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (e-2) is first placed at a predetermined position (position shown in FIG. 57 (b-2)) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1). This is display data in which the merchant character image H1 read from the ROM 406 of the sub-control unit 400 is superimposed. FIG. 57 (e-3) displays an image on the sub-display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (e-2), and the sub-display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (d). The state rotated by 15 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 57 (d) is shown.

FIG. 57 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e) and returned to the original state. Is shown. Further, the character image H3 of the palace displayed in the central portion of the sub display device 1030 is displayed in a non-rotating manner when viewed from the player. Further, the merchant character image H1 displayed at the lower left of the sub display device 1030 is the center of the image display area of the sub display device 1030 from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e) by rotating the sub display device 1030. Is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated 30 ° clockwise around the center of rotation and returned to its original position. Further, the character image H4 of the princess is not displayed on the sub display device 1030. FIG. 57 (f-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 57 (f-1) is image data in which the image data shown in FIG. 57 (e-1) is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise with the center of the image data as the center of rotation, and is shown in FIG. 57. It is the same as the image data shown in (b-1). 57 (f-2) uses the work area of the VRAM 436 from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (f-1) to display an image on the sub-display device 1030 in the state of FIG. 57 (f). The generated display data is shown. Further, the display data shown in FIG. 57 (f-2) is located at a predetermined position (lower left of the display data) of the display data generated from the image data shown in FIG. 57 (b-1) of the first sub-control unit 400. It is the display data on which the character image H1 of the merchant read from the ROM 406 is superimposed, and the display data is the same as the display data shown in FIG. 57 (b-2). FIG. 57 (f-3) displays an image on the sub display device 1030 based on the display data shown in FIG. 57 (f-2), and the sub display device 1030 is rotated clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 57 (e). The state rotated by 30 ° is shown, and the state of the sub-display device 1030 in FIG. 57 (f) is shown. FIG. 57 (f-3) shows the same state as in FIG. 57 (b-3).

As described above, in the rotation display notice effect of the present embodiment, the character image (character image H3 of the palace) displayed on the sub display device 1030 in a mode in which the sub display device 1030 is rotated but does not rotate when viewed from the player. And the character image H4) of the princess and the character image (character image H1 of the merchant) displayed in a rotating manner as seen from the player. The rotating sub-display device 1030 simultaneously displays a character image displayed in a non-rotating mode as seen by the player and a character image displayed in a rotating mode as seen by the player. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise. In addition, when the rotation display notice effect of this embodiment is performed in the effect during the symbol change, the symbol variation display finally determines the jackpot symbol mode as compared with the case where the rotation display notice effect is not performed. It may be configured so that the stop display is likely to occur. Further, instead of the sub-display device 1030, the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by the decorative symbol display device 208, or the effect of the present embodiment may be performed by both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 1030. May be done. When the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to produce the effect of the present embodiment, the sub display device 1030 may be fixed to the game board 200 so that it cannot be rotated or moved.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the first embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 1 to 57.

(D1)
A game table provided with a first movable body (for example, a movable body 1002) capable of performing a production operation for directing a game.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100) or a slot machine (for example, a slot machine 2000).
The first movable body is configured to move from a second position (eg, initial position) to a first position (eg, lowest position) when the power is turned off.
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position (for example, the lowest position) to the second position (for example, the initial position) when the power is turned on. ,
The second position and the first position are different positions.
The effect operation is configured to start from the second position (for example, the initial position) and end at the second position.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table having the above configuration, it may be possible to improve the durability of the driving means for driving the first movable body.

(D2)
The game console described in (D1) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is located at a position different from the second position (for example, the initial position), the first movable body remains. It is configured to move to the first position.
A game table characterized by that.

(D3)
The game console according to (D1) or (D2) above.
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position (for example, the uppermost position).
The third position and the first position are different positions.
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game table characterized by that.

(D4)
The game console described in (D3) above.
An image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) is provided.
The first movable body (for example, movable body 1002) is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(D5)
The game console described in (D4) above.
It is possible to execute a jackpot operation (for example, directing a jackpot game),
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) is a movable body provided in front of the image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208).
When the first movable body is located at the third position (for example, the uppermost position), at least of the preview image (for example, a cloud image or a balloon image) displayed on the image display means. The first movable body may overlap in part,
The preview image is the preview image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.

(D6)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above.
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
The phrase "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" described in (D1) means that "the first movable body moves from the first position to the initial operation". And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation ”(see, for example, FIGS. 32 (c) to (g)).
A game table characterized by that.

(D7)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D5) above.
The first movable body (for example, the movable body 1002) can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
The phrase "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position" described in (D1) means that "the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position". After moving to the position of, the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the position is moved to the second position again "(see, for example, FIGS. 34 (n) to (p)).
A game table characterized by that.

(D8)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D7) above.
The "when the power is turned off" described in (D1) above means "when the main power of the game console is turned off".
The "when the power is turned on" described in (D1) above means "when the main power of the game console is turned on".
A game table characterized by that.

(D9)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D8) above.
The first movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game table characterized by that.

(D10)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D9) above.
It is equipped with a second movable body (for example, movable body 1006) capable of performing an effect operation for producing a game.
The second movable body is a movable body that starts its operation from the position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.

(D11)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(D12)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D10) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

All the effect operations of the first effect movable body are configured to start from the second position and end at the second position.

(D13)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (12) above.
The effect operation may start from the second position and end at the fourth position.
The effect operation may start from the fourth position and end at the second position.
The fourth position is a position different from the first position.
The fourth position is a position different from the second position.
The fourth position is a position different from the third position.
A game table characterized by that.

(D14)
The game console described in (D13) above.
The effect operation may start from the fourth position and end at the fourth position.
A game table characterized by that.

(D15)
The game console according to (D13) or (14) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the fourth position, the first movable body is configured to move from the fourth position to the first position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(D16)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D15) above.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is in the third position, the first movable body is configured to move from the third position to the first position. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

(D17)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D16) above.
A fourth control means for controlling the movable body and
A game table including a driving means for driving the movable body.

The first control means is the main control unit 300 that performs a lottery (for example, a big hit lottery) that is advantageous to the player. The first control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards.

The second control means is an effect means (for example, an lighting unit (LED or the like), a sound output means (speaker or the like), and an image display means (liquid crystal display) for producing a game in response to a command signal from the first control means. It is a sub-control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) that controls the effect of the device, the dot matrix, etc. The second control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits. Alternatively, the second control means may be composed of a plurality of control boards. For example, the second control means draws a lottery to make the effect means perform an effect in response to a drive control of the effect means or a command signal from the first control means. Make a selection, etc.

The third control means is an effect control means that communicates with the second control means and performs effect control (for example, drive control) of the effect means. The effect control means may be composed of one or a plurality of control circuits, or may be composed of one or a plurality of control boards. The third control means may control the effect means in response to the effect command from the second control means, or determine the effect to be executed in response to the effect command from the second control means. Information based on the determined result may be returned to the second control means, or the effect means may be driven.

The fourth control means is an effect control means that communicates with the third control means and controls one or more or all of the effect means (sub liquid crystal unit 1030, movable bodies 1002 to 1012). The fourth control means may be composed of one or more control circuits, or may be composed of one or more control boards. The fourth control means is from the third control means. The effect means may be controlled according to the effect command, or the effect to be executed is determined according to the effect command from the third control means, and the information based on the determined result is returned to the third control means. Or, the effect means may be driven. Further, the fourth control means may be mounted on the moving unit 1036.

(D18)
The game console described in (D17) above.
The fourth control means is mounted on a drive unit (for example, a moving unit 1036).
At least one of the plurality of movements by the movable body (for example, vertical movement), the drive unit also performs the same movement.
A game table characterized by that.

In the above embodiment, since the moving unit 1036 is provided on the movable body 1002, when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, the moving unit 1036 also operates together with the movable body 1002, but the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated. In this case, the moving unit 1036 is configured not to rotate. The moving unit 1036 may be arranged separately from the movable body 1002 so that the moving unit 1036 does not move together when the movable body 1002 is moved up and down, and also when the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is rotated. The moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together, or the moving unit 1036 may be configured to operate together during all movements of the movable body 1002.

Although the movable body 1002 has shown an example in which vertical movement (position change, movement) and rotation movement (postural change) can be performed, movements other than vertical movement (for example, position change / movement in the left-right direction) may be possible. Then, tilt operation (for example, the left side or the right side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 tilts forward or backward about the rotation axis in the vertical direction, or the upper side or the lower side of the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 is forward or lower about the rotation axis in the horizontal direction. The operation of tilting backward) may be feasible.

(D19)
The game console according to any one of (D1) to (D18) above.
A fourth control means for controlling the movable body and
The driving means for driving the movable body and
A detection means for detecting the position of the first movable body is provided.
It is configured to confirm the position of the first movable body when the confirmation condition is satisfied.
When the position of the first movable body is not the first position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position.
The confirmation condition is a condition that is satisfied when the power is turned off.
Amusement table featuring

(E1)
An image display unit (for example, main liquid crystal unit 1001 or sub liquid crystal unit 1032) capable of displaying a production image for producing a game, and
A driving means (for example, a motor) for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
The image display is performed during a period (hereinafter, referred to as "first period") in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (rotational direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit or a linear direction). The unit may display the first video (for example, the video of the character image H3 of the palace or the character image H4 of the princess).
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction (see, for example, FIGS. 57 (b) to 57 (d)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, an impact is given by the movement of the image display unit, and the display angle and display position of the image displayed on the image display unit are changed during the period of the movement as a notification means. It is possible to make movements that are not seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, the entire period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction may be set as the first period, or a part of the period during which the image display unit is moving in the first direction. May be the first period. Further, with a certain effect as an opportunity, the entire period from the start of movement of the image display unit in the first direction to the stop may be set as the first period, or an effect different from a certain effect may be used as an opportunity. A part of the period from when the image display unit starts moving in the first direction to when it stops may be set as the first period.

(E2)
The game console described in (E1) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image (see, for example, FIGS. 57 (b) to 57 (d)).
A game table characterized by that.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, the facial expression, the outer shape, and the like of the first image (character image H3 of the palace and the character image H4 of the princess) are fixedly displayed, but the facial expression of the first image is shown. , The outer shape, etc. may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 57, the face of the palace, which was not displayed in FIG. 57 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 57 (b), and becomes a little smile in FIG. 57 (c). An animation may be performed in which the smile is full in 57 (d), the smile is slightly returned in FIG. 57 (e), and the face is returned to the true face in FIG. 57 (f). Further, the mode in which the first image (for example, the character image H3 of the palace) moves in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation including the character image H3 of the palace moves. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating the dialogue to the entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.

(E3)
The game console according to (E1) or (E2) above.
During the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in a first orientation (eg, counterclockwise orientation) (see, eg, FIGS. 57B-d).
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in a second orientation (eg, clockwise orientation) (eg, FIGS. 57 (b-1), (c-1), (See (d-1)),
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.

In a game table equipped with this configuration, the first direction when the image display unit operates is one when a certain effect is triggered (for example, the timing to start the image display unit operation effect during super reach). (For example, to the left), and triggered by another effect (for example, the timing to start the effect by the operation of the image display unit to inform the player whether the probability change at the end of the big hit starts), the image The first orientation when the display unit operates may be another orientation (for example, rightward). Further, the first direction and the second direction may be the same direction instead of the opposite direction. In this case, the player is asked to move or rotate the first image faster than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. Is visible. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an extraordinary sensation that cannot be obtained by rotating the image in the fixed image display unit, and the first image in the image display unit is further speeded up. It may be possible to forget more everyday feelings and concentrate on the game by rotating and moving with.

(E4)
The game console described in (E3) above.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed (for example, FIGS. 57 (b) to (d) and 57 (b-1), (c-1), (d-1). )reference),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image display unit appears to the player to move, but the display position, display angle, etc. of the first image do not appear to move, so it is unusual as a notification means. When it is possible to perform a similar operation, and the notification itself by the image display unit display can fulfill the same role as when it is not moving, and it is possible to achieve both an impactful operation and notification. There is. Further, the first direction and the second direction may be opposite to each other, and the first speed and the second speed may be different. In that case, the second speed is higher than the movement or rotation of the image display unit. The player visually recognizes that one image moves and rotates slowly. For this reason, the mode in which the image rotates in the fixed image display unit is routinely seen on TVs, nets, etc., but since the image display unit rotates, it is extraordinary that cannot be obtained by the fixed image display unit. The first image in the image display unit moves and rotates so as to slowly follow the movement and rotation of the image display unit, so that a more everyday feeling can be given to the player. It may be possible to forget about and concentrate on the game. In addition, when the image display unit moves and rotates quickly with emphasis on impact, by slowly moving and rotating the first image, the notification itself by the image display unit display becomes close to the case where it is not moving. It may be possible to serve as a notification.

(E5)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E4) above.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image (for example, a merchant character image H1) is displayed (for example, see FIG. 57).
A game table characterized by that.
(E6)
The game console described in (E5) above.
During the first period, the second image is configured to be immobile in the first direction (see, eg, FIGS. 57 (b-2), (c-2), (d-2)). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The game console provided with this configuration may be configured so that a second image that does not move in the first direction is not displayed in the first period. That is, in the first period, all the images displayed on the image display unit are configured to move in the first direction, so that the movement of the image display unit and the image is unified and has more impact. The production operation may be feasible.

(E7)
The game console according to (E5) or (E6) above.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.

In the embodiment according to the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the facial expression, the outer shape, etc. of the second image (merchant character image h1') are fixedly displayed, but according to the game console having the configuration, The facial expression, outer shape, etc. of the second image may be displayed in a deformed manner. For example, exemplifying FIG. 25, the face of the merchant, which was not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 25 (a), is displayed as a straight face in FIG. 25 (b) and slightly in FIG. 25 (c). An animation may be performed in which the face becomes rugged, the face becomes rugged in FIG. 25 (d), the face returns to a slightly rugged face in FIG. 25 (e), and the face returns to a straight face in FIG. 25 (f). Further, the mode in which the second image does not move in the first direction may indicate that the display position of the animation does not move. Animation is not limited to the variable display of the character display, but changes in the outer shape of the character, etc., variable display of dialogue (change display from a partial character string indicating the dialogue to the entire character string, etc.), characters and icons. It may be either a color change of the character or a moving display of a character or an icon, or a combination of these may be included.

(E8)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above.
The phrase "moved by the drive of the drive means" described in (E1) above means "rotation by the drive of the drive means".
The "first image moves in the first direction" described in (E1) above means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit (see, for example, FIG. 57).
A game table characterized by that.
(E9)
The game console according to (E3) or (E4) above.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise (see, for example, FIG. 57).
A game table characterized by that.
(E10)
The game console according to any one of (E1) to (E7) above.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in (E1) above means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
“The first image moves in the first direction” described in (E1) above means “the first image moves linearly in the first direction” (see, for example, FIG. 55). ),
A game table characterized by that.

The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the vertical direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of upward and downward. Further, the above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in the left-right direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the leftward orientation and the rightward orientation. The above-mentioned "the first image linearly moves in the first direction" may mean "the first image linearly moves in an oblique direction". In this case, the above-mentioned first orientation is one of the upper left, lower right, upper right, and lower left directions.

A modified example of the configuration described in the examples according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. For example, the movement driven by the driving means may be a combination of rotational movement and linear movement (vertical direction, horizontal direction, diagonal direction, and front-back direction when viewed from the player). Further, the pachinko machine 100 may be configured to be equipped with a plurality of image display units. Further, a plurality of image display devices may be mounted on one image display unit. The image display unit may be equipped with an LED or a movable body for directing. Further, before the image display unit rotates or moves, the movable body for production moves from the initial state to the movable state, and after the image display unit in which the movable body for production is in the movable state performs the rotation or movement operation. After stopping, the movable body for effect may be configured to move to the initial state. Further, during the symbol variation display, the symbol that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display is more when the effect operation shown in FIG. 53 is performed than when the effect operation shown in FIG. 52 is performed. The mode may be configured so that the mode is likely to be a big hit mode, and the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed when the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed during the symbol variation display. The symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be a jackpot mode. Further, when the effect operation of FIG. 52 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. When the effect operation of FIG. 53 is performed during the symbol variation display, the symbol mode that is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display may be configured to be the jackpot mode. Further, although FIGS. 52 and 53 both show an example in which the same effect display is performed, when the sub display device shown in FIG. 52 rotates, the image displayed on the sub display device also rotates. The effect of being visually recognized by the player and the effect of being visually recognized by the player so that the image displayed on the sub-display device when the sub-display device shown in FIG. 53 is rotated are not rotated together. It may be configured to be the production of. For example, "one of the other productions" is a production in which the lord fights against the musician, and "the other production of another production" is a production in which the princess dances. May be good. One type of "one of the other effects" may be installed, a plurality of types may be installed, or one type of "the other effect of another effect" may be installed. , Multiple types may be installed. Further, when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 22, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub-display device is rotated together with the number of types of effects. As shown in 53, when the sub display device rotates, at least a part (or all of the images) displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger. On the contrary, when the sub display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 53, at least a part (or all of them) of the image displayed on the sub display device is visually recognized by the player as if they are not rotated together. At least a part (or all of) of the images displayed on the sub-display device are rotated together when the sub-display device is rotated as shown in FIG. 52, rather than the number of types of effects. It may be configured so that the number of types is larger.

Further, the effect example shown in FIG. 52 and the effect example shown in FIG. 53 may be combined. For example, during the period (period A) when the sub display device starts to rotate, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed A (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image is prevented from rotating the image displayed on the sub-display so that the player can see it to rotate with the sub-display. In the next period (period B), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at speed B (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of B'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player sees it as spinning slowly. In the next period (period C), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of C (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of C'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. Further, in the next period (period D), the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed D (for example, 60 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub display device is rotated. Rotate at least part or all of the image at speed D (eg 60 rpm) in other directions (eg clockwise) so that the player sees only the sub-display as rotating. Let me. In the next period (period E), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of E (eg, 50 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of E'(eg, 40 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. In the next period (period F), the sub-display is rotated in one direction (eg, counterclockwise) at a speed of F (eg, 40 rpm), and the image displayed on the sub-display is larger than that of the sub-display. At least part or all of the image is rotated in other directions (eg, clockwise) at a speed of F'(eg, 20 rpm) so that the player can see it as if it is spinning slowly. During the period (period G) before the end of rotation of the sub display device in the next period, the sub display device is rotated in one direction (for example, counterclockwise) at a speed G (for example, 20 rpm) and displayed on the sub display device. The image to be displayed may not be rotated so that the player can visually recognize it so that it rotates together with the sub display device. In this way, as in the examples from period A to period D, as the period during which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually deviates from the rotation of the sub display device. , The sub-display device rotates, and by shifting to a state where the player can see part or all of the display of the sub-display device as if it is stopped, a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image It may be possible to perform a certain production. Further, as in the examples from period D to period G, as the period in which the sub display device rotates progresses, the rotation of the image displayed on the sub display device gradually rotates together with the sub display device. By making the player visually recognize the changes in this way, it may be possible to create a new sense of unity between the sub-display device and the image. In these examples, in the periods A to D, the difference between the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually reduced, and in the periods D to G, the sub display is displayed. It was configured to gradually increase the difference between the rotation speed of the device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device, but conversely, during periods A to D, the rotation speed of the sub display device The difference between the speed and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device is gradually increased, and during the periods D to G, the rotation speed of the sub display device and the rotation speed of the image displayed on the sub display device are increased. It may be configured so that the difference in speed is gradually reduced. Further, here, the image displayed on the rotating sub-display device and the rotating sub-display device is illustrated, but the same applies to the image displayed on the linearly moving sub-display device and the linearly moving sub-display device. Is also possible.

(F1)
An effect movable body (for example, a movable body 1001 or a movable body 1002) capable of executing a movable action for producing a game, and
A decorative body (movable body 1008) provided with a window portion (for example, transparent portions 1008a and 1008b) and
It is a game table equipped with
Behind the decorative body, the effect movable body may perform an action (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (f)-(k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with the above configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body can make the player visually recognize the movement of the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, and as a production means. It is possible to perform movements that are not seen on a daily basis, and it may be possible for the player to forget the daily routine and concentrate more on the game.

(F2)
The game console described in (F1) above.
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image, and is
It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (f) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with this configuration, the effect movable body hidden by the decorative body is configured to be able to display an image, so that the player can see the movement and image of the effect movable body through the window of the decorative body. It is possible to visually recognize the image, and it is possible to perform an operation that is not seen on a daily basis as a notification means, so that the player can forget the daily life and concentrate more on the game. Further, a plurality of effect movable bodies capable of displaying an image may be provided, or only one may be provided. In addition, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of operating behind the decorative body may have a main liquid crystal unit, or may have a sub liquid crystal unit. Further, the effect movable body capable of displaying an image capable of operating behind the decorative body may have both a main liquid crystal unit and a sub liquid crystal unit, or may have two or more sub liquid crystal units. There may be.

(F3)
The game console described in (F2) above.
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion may change (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (f) to 41 (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, by operating behind the decorative body, the image displayed on the effect movable body that is visually recognized through the window of the decorative body changes, so that the player thinks. It may be possible to give a surprising surprise. In addition, the above-mentioned "the image of the effect movable body changes" means that the image displayed on the effect movable body is changed (for example, the shape and display color of the cloud image are changed). Including the case where the appearance of the image displayed on the movable body changes.

(F4)
The game console according to any one of (F1) to (F3) above.
The ornament is operational (see, for example, FIGS. 41 (e) and 41 (f)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game table provided with this configuration, since the decorative body can be operated, it may be possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the decorative body and the operation of the effect movable body are linked.

(F5)
The game console according to any one of (F1) to (F4) above.
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing variable display of symbols is provided.
A game table characterized by that.
(F6)
The game console described in (F5) above.
In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, the player visually recognizes a part of the image (for example, the image of a cloud) in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body. When it becomes possible, the final result of the variable display of the symbol is a big hit, as compared with the case where a part of the image in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured so that the symbol mode can be easily displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 41 and 42).
A part of the image in the effect movable body is at least a part of the preview image.
A game table characterized by that.
(F7)
The game console according to (F5) or (F6) above.
By the operation of the decorative body, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, the white diamond-shaped mode) in the effect movable body is played through the window portion (for example, the transparent portion 1008b) of the decorative body. When a person becomes visible, a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested (see, for example, FIG. 48).
A game table characterized by that.
(F8)
The game console according to any one of F1 to F7.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(G1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or a sub display device 1030) can perform a rotation operation (see, for example, FIG. 50).
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a first image (for example, a character image H1 of a palace, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, etc.).
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change (see, for example, FIG. 50 (l)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the aspect ratio of the first image may change when the image display means is rotated, so that the presence of the first image is amplified. In some cases, it can give a strong impression to the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as the first image, and these images may be used as the first image. May use a different image as the first image. Further, the image display means capable of executing the rotation operation may be a main liquid crystal unit or a sub liquid crystal unit. Further, in both cases, the aspect ratio of the first image may be displayed so as to change. For example, when the first image is displayed on the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit, the main liquid crystal unit and the sub liquid crystal unit are rotated simultaneously or separately, and the aspect ratio of the first image is changed simultaneously or separately. There may be. Further, by arranging two sub liquid crystal units side by side, the first image may be displayed by the two sub liquid crystal units. In this case, the aspect ratio of the first image may be changed by rotating the two sub-liquid crystal units side by side.

(G2)
The game console described in (G1) above.
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image (for example, a decorative frame F1, a hold number display, an image of a fourth symbol).
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image may not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 51 (k) to 51 (p)).
A game table characterized by that.
(G3)
The game console described in (G2) above.
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image does not rotate (see, for example, FIGS. 51 (k) to 51 (p)).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console equipped with this configuration, when the first image rotates, the second image may not rotate, so while emphasizing the rotation of the first image, the second image is firmly It can be visually recognized by the player. Further, any one of images such as a character image, a decorative pattern, a hold icon, a variable icon, and a background pattern, or all of them may be used as a second image, and these images may be used as a second image. May use a different image as the second image.

(G4)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G3) above.
When the rotation operation is performed, an image (for example, a princess character image H4) that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation operation. (See, for example, FIGS. 56 (b) and 56 (c)),
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console having this configuration, the image that was cut off in the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is performed is displayed on the image display means by the rotation operation of the image display means. In some cases, it can give the player an unexpected surprise.

(G5)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G4) above.
When the rotation operation is performed, the image (for example, the character image H4 of the princess) displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation is performed is performed in the image display means by the rotation operation. May be cut off,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the image displayed in the image display means before the rotation operation of the image display means is cut off by the image display means due to the rotation operation of the image display means. Because of this, it may be possible to give the player an unexpected surprise.

(G6)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(G7)
The game console according to any one of (G1) to (G5) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(H1)
An effect movable body (for example, a sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) capable of executing an effect operation for producing a game, and
A base body (for example, a moving unit 1036) capable of supporting the effect movable body and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect movable body (for example, the sub liquid crystal unit 1032 of the movable body 1002) is capable of executing a rotational operation.
A slip ring (for example, rotating side substrates 1090, 1140) is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body.
Conductive portions (for example, conductive portions 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) are provided on the other side of the effect movable body and the base body.
When the slip ring and the conductive portion come into contact with each other, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H2)
The game console described in (H1) above.
The base body is provided with a first communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1138).
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means (for example, a data transmission / reception unit 1144).
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.
(H3)
The game console according to (H1) or (H2) above.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(H4)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(H5)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H4) above.
The slip ring (for example, the rotating side substrate 1090, 1140) is provided on the effect movable body.
The conductive portion (for example, the conductive portion 1078 to 1088, 1130 to 1136) is provided on the base body.
A game table characterized by that.
(H6)
The game console according to any one of (H1) to (H5) above.
The effect movable body is provided with an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 86. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, in addition to the chance button 136, the opportunity button 139 is arranged side by side with the chance button 136. The opportunity button 139 has the same function as the chance button 136.

FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an outline of an effect pattern shown in each embodiment of the present embodiment. FIG. 58 shows an effect pattern in which the effect related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 is executed in each embodiment of the present embodiment. The effects related to these buttons can be roughly classified into five effect patterns (effect patterns 1 to 5). The effect related to the button is an effect related to the operation of the chance button 136 and / or the opportunity button 139. In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (d), time has passed from left to right.

<Production pattern 1>
The effect pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (a). The effect pattern 1 is an effect related to the chance button 136, and is an effect that does not use the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 1 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation wait display 1 of the display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and is a chance while the button operation wait display 1 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 1 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 1 is a display that does not include a display that is performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 1 to operate the button does not include the opportunity button pressing waiting display.

<Production pattern 2>
The effect pattern 2 will be described with reference to the upper part of FIG. 58 (b). The effect pattern 2 is an effect related to the chance button 136. The effect pattern 2 starts from the button operation waiting display 3 of the display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 3 of the display performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. The button response display 3 is a display that does not include a part of the display that is performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

<Production pattern 3>
The effect pattern 3 will be described with reference to the lower part of FIG. 58 (b). The effect pattern 3 is an effect relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 3 is an effect pattern starting from the button operation wait display 3 of the display performed when the chance button 136 is waiting to be pressed, and is a chance while the button operation wait display 3 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button 136, the display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and is performed while waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. The button response display 4 including the display is displayed, and then when the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 being displayed in the button response display 4, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the opportunity button 139. The button response display 5 performed in response to the pressing is displayed.

When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed and the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the chance button 136, the effect pattern 2 (effect related to the chance button) or the effect pattern 3 (chance button and opportunity) One of the effect patterns related to the button) is determined. The effect pattern may be determined in advance before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, or the effect pattern is determined depending on the timing at which the player presses the chance button 136, the number of times the button is pressed, and the like. There may be cases. In this way, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 3 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display (or a part of the opportunity button pressing waiting display). It may or may not be included.

<Production pattern 4>
The effect pattern 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (c). The effect pattern 4 is an effect relating to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 4 starts from the button operation waiting display 4 of the display performed when the chance button 136 is waiting to be pressed, and the operation of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the chance button 136 during the valid period, the display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in response to the operation of the chance button 136, and is a button including a display displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. The response display 4 is displayed, and then, when the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 is being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol display device At 208, the button response display 5 performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139 is displayed. As described above, the button response display displayed when the player is prompted by the button operation waiting display 4 to operate the button includes the opportunity button pressing waiting display.

<Production pattern 5>
The effect pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 58 (d). The effect pattern 5 is an effect related to the opportunity button 139. The effect pattern 5 starts from the button operation waiting display 5 of the display performed when the opportunity button 139 is waiting to be pressed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 while the button operation waiting display 5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the player operates the opportunity button 139 during the valid period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button response display 2 of the display performed in response to the operation of the opportunity button 139. As described above, in the effect pattern 5, the button operation waiting display 5 for prompting the operation of the opportunity button 139 is displayed when the effect related to the button is started.

In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the ease with which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed differs depending on the effect pattern. In the present embodiment, among the effect patterns 1 to 5, the symbol variation display on which the effect pattern 4 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is most easily confirmed, whereas only the effect pattern 2 is performed. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is most difficult to be fixedly displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. The symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 3 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without the effect pattern 3 being performed. When the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed than in the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without the effect pattern 5, the effect pattern 5 is In the case of the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed without being performed and the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 5 is performed without performing the effect pattern 1, the jackpot symbol mode is fixedly displayed with the same probability. There is also. In the effect pattern 4, which is the easiest to stop and display the jackpot mode, the chance button 136 must be pressed in order to press the opportunity button 139. Therefore, the player is motivated to operate the opportunity button 139, and at the same time, the chance is increased. The motivation to operate the button 136 can also be increased, and the interest of the player may be improved. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, other than the above-mentioned examples can be adopted. In the present embodiment, in the effect patterns 1 to 5 performed during the symbol variation display, the effect pattern may be configured to make the easiness of the final display of the jackpot symbol mode the same.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the chance button 136 is pressed, it is determined that the chance button 136 is operated, but in the effect patterns 1 to 5, it is also operated by an operation method other than pressing. It may be determined that it has been done. For example, when the chance button 136 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the chance button 136 from the normal state to a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the chance button 136 has been operated. It may be configured.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the effect patterns 1 to 5, when the opportunity button 139 is pressed, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 is operated, but in the effect patterns 1 to 5, it is also operated by other operation methods. It may be determined that the button has been used. For example, when the opportunity button 139 is configured to be rotatable, when the player rotates the opportunity button 139 from the normal state to a predetermined angle or more, it is determined that the opportunity button 139 has been operated. It may be configured. The predetermined angle at the chance button 136 and the predetermined angle at the opportunity button 139 may be the same or different.

As shown in FIG. 58, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are used in the effect patterns 1 to 5, but operation means other than these may be used. For example, instead of the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139, an operation means using the setting operation unit 137 or the transparent member 118 as a button may be used, or a handle operation means may be used. The start time and end time of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the effect patterns 1 to 5 are determined before the button operation waiting display 1 or the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, and the operation of the opportunity button 139 is valid. The start time and end time of the period are determined before the button operation waiting display 2 or the button response display 4 is displayed. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 may be executed by the sub display device 1030 instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, or the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 may be executed. It may be executed in both.

(Example 1-1)
An example of the production of the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order. 59 (a) shows a schematic front view of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and FIGS. 59 (b) to 59 (f) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1000. 1001 and the movable body 1002 are extracted and shown. In FIGS. 59 to 86, the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are shown in an exemplary manner. The character string "push" is written on the pressing surface of the chance button 136, and the character string "press" is written on the pressing surface of the opportunity button 139. In addition, in FIG. 59 and later, the illustration of the movable body 1006, 1008, and 1012 is omitted.

FIG. 59 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), the number of reserved figures 1 and 2 is 0.

FIG. 59 (b), which continues from FIG. 59 (a), shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIGS. 59 and 59 onward, the variable display of the decorative pattern is represented by a thick white arrow pointing downward. FIG. 59 (b) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state. The chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 uses an LED as a light source. The opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 uses an LED as a light source. When the chance button 136 is in the normal state, the chance button lamp 138 may not be emitting light, or the chance button lamp 138 may be in a state of emitting light in a predetermined mode. When the opportunity button 139 is in the normal state, the opportunity button lamp 141 may not be emitting light, or the opportunity button lamp 141 may be in a state of emitting light in a predetermined mode. As the light source of the chance button lamp 138 and the opportunity button lamp 141, a light emitting means other than the LED may be used.

FIG. 59 (c) following FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 59 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 59 (d) following FIG. 59 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example may be referred to as an image (hereinafter, referred to as “chance button image”) that imitates the chance button 136 displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ) And an image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "button pressing instruction image") correspond. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 59 (d), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 59 (e) following FIG. 59 (d) is performed in response to the button response display 1 (pressing the chance button 136) by the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. As a display), a state in which a character string image of "chance" is displayed in a substantially central portion of a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 59 (f), which continues from FIG. 59 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 1-2)
An example of the production of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 60A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 60A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 60 (b), which continues from FIG. 60 (a), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 60 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 60 (c) following FIG. 60 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example corresponds to the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped, which is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the first embodiment. In FIG. 60 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Represents. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The color of the chance button image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same, or may be configured to be different. You may. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 60 (d) continuing from FIG. 60 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 60 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( The display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 1 of this example corresponds to a character string image of "chance !!" having a display different from that of the button response display 1 shown in the 1-1. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the operation of the chance button 136 may be valid. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed.

FIG. 60 (e), which continues from FIG. 60 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

An example of the production of Example 1-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 60 is a big hit, and the effect states are shown in chronological order. 61 (a) to 61 (d) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 60 (a) to 60 (d).

FIG. 61 (e), which continues from FIG. 61 (d), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

As described above, in FIGS. 59 to 61, an example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a) is shown. In the effect shown in Example 1-1, the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the button response display 1, and in the effect shown in Example 1-2, the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed as the button response display 1. Is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button response display is more than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed without displaying the character string image of "chance !!" as the button response display 1. As 1, the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed may be configured so that the final display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed. Even if the effect pattern 1 is of the same type, the player may be able to improve the interest of the player by making the display of the button response display 1 different in the ease of confirming the jackpot symbol mode. .. In the symbol variation display in which the effect pattern 1 is performed, the button is more than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance !!" is displayed without displaying the character string image of "chance" as the button response display 1. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "chance" is displayed as the response display 1 may be configured so that the confirmation display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed, or the button response display 1 is the "chance". The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "Chance !!" is displayed without displaying the character string image and the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "Chance !!" is displayed as the button response display 1 are big hits. It may be configured so that the ease of definite display of the symbol aspect is the same.

(Example 1-3)
An production example of Examples 1-3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 62A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 62A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 62 (b) following FIG. 62 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 62 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 62 (c) following FIG. 62 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example corresponds to a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the 1-1 and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped. In FIG. 62C, the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or is different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 1. It represents a state in which light is emitted in a mode. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 62 (d) following FIG. 62 (c), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 62 (c) is displayed. After the period ends, the effect by the notice animation ends without displaying the button response display, and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is shown. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed may be a definite display of the jackpot symbol mode.

(Example 1-4)
An example of the production of Examples 1-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 shows an example of the effect in the above-mentioned effect pattern 1, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 63A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 63A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 63 (b) following FIG. 63 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 63 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 63 (c) following FIG. 63 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a button pressing instruction image and "press!" Displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the chance button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped. Corresponds to the character string image of. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 63 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 63 (d) following from FIG. 63 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 63 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( The display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) indicates a state in which the character string image of "great chance" is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character "great chance" is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character string image of "chance" or "chance !!" without displaying the character string image of "great chance" as the button response display 1. In some cases, the symbol variation display that displays the column image may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 63 (e), which continues from FIG. 63 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

(Example 1-5)
An example of the production of Example 1-5 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows an example of the effect in the above-mentioned effect pattern 1, and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 64A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 64A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 64 (b) following FIG. 64 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 64 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 64 (c) following FIG. 64 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is the same as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in the first to fourth embodiments. The character string image corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. FIG. 64 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

In FIG. 64 (d) following from FIG. 64 (c), when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 64 (c) is displayed, the player presses the chance button 136 to display the button response display 1 ( As the display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136), the character string image of "Great chance!", Which is different from the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-4, is substantially the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed in. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 of this example may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be operated. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period, the button response display 1 of this example may be displayed. The character string image of "Great Chance!" Is displayed as the button response display 1 rather than the symbol variation display that displays the character string image of "Great Chance" without displaying the character string image of "Great Chance!" As the button response display 1. The symbol variation display to be displayed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed, and vice versa.

FIG. 64 (e), which continues from FIG. 64 (d), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 1-6)
An example of the production of Example 1-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 65A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 65A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 65 (b) following FIG. 65 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 65 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 65 (c) following FIG. 65 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in Examples 1-3, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped, and "press!". Corresponds to the character string image of. FIG. 65 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 65 (d), which continues from FIG. 65 (c), shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed. It shows the state just before the end of the period.

In FIG. 65 (e), which continues from FIG. 65 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, the same "great chance" character string image as the button response display 1 shown in Example 1-3 is decorated as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136). The state displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the symbol display device 208 is shown. Even in the production of displaying the character string image of "great chance" which is the same as the button response display 1, the character string image of "great chance" is displayed by pressing the chance button 136 in the third embodiment. In some cases, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display in which the indicated effect is executed. The opposite may be true. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-3 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 65 (f), which continues from FIG. 65 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 1-7)
An example of the production of Example 1-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 66A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 66A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

FIG. 66 (b) following FIG. 66 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 65 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 66 (c) following FIG. 66 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 1 of this example is a chance button image having the same display as the button operation waiting display 1 shown in Examples 1-3, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped, and "press!". Corresponds to the character string image of. FIG. 66 (c) shows a state in which the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

FIG. 66 (d) following FIG. 66 (c) shows that the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed. It shows the state just before the end of the period.

In FIG. 66 (e) continuing from FIG. 66 (d), the operation of the chance button 136 is valid without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed. Even when the period ends, the character string image of "Great chance?" Is displayed in the substantially central part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136). It shows the state that was done. The button response display 1 of the character string image of "great chance?" Shown in this example is a button response display that is not displayed when the player operates the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed. When the player does not operate the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed, the character string image of "great chance" is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the effect shown in the first to sixth embodiments is executed. Rather, the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the case where the symbol variation display in which the effect shown in Example 1-6 is executed and the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is executed are configured so that the definite display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same. There may be. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 66 (f), which continues from FIG. 66 (e), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

As described above, in the effect example shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, when the chance button 136 is operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 1 is shown. There is a button response display 1 displayed on the screen and a button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated. The button response display 1 displayed when the chance button 136 is operated and the button response display 1 displayed even when the chance button 136 is not operated may display the same or different displays. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 during the button operation waiting display 1, the button response display 1 may not be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 1-1 to 1-7, the button response display 1 depends on the timing at which the player's chance button 136 is pressed and whether or not the button operation wait display 1 is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even if the effect is the same effect pattern 1, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 1. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 1 is displayed, if the effect has the same effect pattern 1, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Example 2-1)
An example of the production of Example 2-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 67A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 67A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 67 (b) following FIG. 67 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 67 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 67 (c) following FIG. 67 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 of this example is an image (hereinafter referred to as “chance button light emitting image”) that is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and that mimics the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. It may be referred to as) and a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped. The chance button light emitting image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 67 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 67 (d) continuing from FIG. 67 (c), the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 67 (c) is displayed. By pressing the button, the early stage of the button response display 3 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The display of the button response display 3 of this example corresponds to a character string image of "further chance" and an image imitating the opportunity button 139 to be moved and displayed (hereinafter, may be referred to as "opportunity button image"). When the display of the button response display 3 is started, the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 67 (e) following FIG. 67 (d) shows a state in which the middle stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. In FIG. 67 (e), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 passes through the central portion of the display area, moves to the left end, and is framed out. It is erased by displaying it in. The arrow shown in FIG. 67 (e) indicates the direction in which the opportunity button image has moved and its trajectory, but it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 3. ..

FIG. 67 (f) following FIG. 67 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 3 is displayed. As the button response display 3, a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in a substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 67 (g), which continues from FIG. 67 (f), shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the definite display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

As described above, the button response display 3 of this example is configured so as not to be displayed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

An production example of Example 2-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 67 is a big hit, and the effect states are shown in chronological order. 68 (a) to 68 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (f).

In FIG. 68 (g), which continues from FIG. 68 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 68 (h) following FIG. 68 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, after the resurrection effect is performed in FIG. 68 (g) or later, the decorative pattern may be varied and displayed.

(Example 2-2)
An example of the production of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58 (a), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 2-1.

FIG. 69A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball is inserted into the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 69A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button are in the normal state.

FIG. 69 (b) following FIG. 69 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 69 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 69 (c) following FIG. 69 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The button operation waiting display 3 of this example corresponds to a button press instruction image in which three inverted triangles overlap with a chance button light emission image displayed in a substantially central portion of a display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image imitating the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 69 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 69 (d) following FIG. 69 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 is continuously displayed.

FIG. 69 (e), which continues from FIG. 69 (d), shows immediately before the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 without the player pressing the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. Indicates the state of.

In FIG. 69 (f) continuing from FIG. 69 (e), when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, the button operation waiting display 3 is deleted and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state of. In this example, as compared with Example 2-1 it took time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 3, so that the beginning of the button response display 3 shown in Example 2-2. It is configured not to display the character string image of "further chance" and the opportunity button image displayed in the middle stage. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 3 of the character string image of "sorry" may not be displayed.

FIG. 69 (g), which continues from FIG. 69 (f), shows a state in which the display of the button response display 3 is finished and the definite display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

An example of the production of Example 2-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 69 is a big hit, and shows the effect state in chronological order. 70 (a) to 70 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 69 (a) to 69 (f).

In FIG. 70 (g) following from FIG. 70 (f), the display of the button response display 3 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 70 (h), which continues from FIG. 70 (g), shows a state in which the decorative symbol is repeatedly displayed in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that the decorative symbol may be varied and displayed after the resurrection effect is performed in FIG. 70 (g) or later.

In the effects shown in Examples 2-1 and 2-2, the button response display 3 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the chance button 136 of the player when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. It may be configured differently. Even if the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 3. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 3 is displayed, if the effect is the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Example 3-1)
An example of the production of Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 71A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 71A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 71 (b) following FIG. 71 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 71 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 71 (c) following FIG. 71 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The chance button light emitting image is an image that is not displayed in the effect pattern 1. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 71 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It represents the state. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The chance button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 is displayed. A stop display may be displayed outside the operation valid period.

The display color of the chance button emission image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the emission color of the chance button 136 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. You may. The display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the chance button 136 The symbol variation display having different emission colors may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, the display color of the chance button light emitting image as the button operation waiting display 3 and the light emitting color of the chance button 136 are the same. There may be cases where the ease of definitive display of the jackpot symbol mode is the same as that of the symbol variation display having different emission colors. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 71 (d) continuing from FIG. 71 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 71 (c), the button response display 4 (chance button 136) is shown. The early stage of (display performed in response to pressing of) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the character string image of "more chance !!". The character string image of "further chance !!" is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

FIG. 71 (e) following FIG. 71 (d) shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of "further chance !!", the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed as.

FIG. 71 (f) following FIG. 71 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 71 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 71 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in motion during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display), and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It may be displayed as a stop outside.

The display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 may be configured to be the same color, or may be configured to be different colors. Good. The display color of the opportunity button image as the button and response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are different from the symbol variation display in which the display color of the opportunity button image as the button response display 4 and the emission color of the opportunity button 139 are the same. The different symbol variation display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol can be confirmed and displayed more easily, and vice versa.

In FIG. 71 (g) following from FIG. 71 (f), the player presses the opportunity button 139 while the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed, so that the button response display 5 (opportunity opportunity) 5 (opportunity opportunity) is displayed. The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 71 (h), which continues from FIG. 71 (g), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the detached symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 3-2)
An example of the production of Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 shows an example in which the special figure variation game for executing the effect example shown in FIG. 71 is a big hit, and the effect states are shown in chronological order. 72 (a) to 72 (f) show the same effect state as in FIGS. 71 (a) to 71 (f).

In FIG. 72 (g) following from FIG. 72 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 72 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 72 (h), which continues from FIG. 72 (g), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.

In the symbol variation display in which the effect of this embodiment is performed, the button response display 5 is a button rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is not displayed and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed. The symbol variation display in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed as the response display 5 is configured so that the final display of the jackpot symbol mode is easier to be performed. As the button response display 5, the ease of confirming the big hit symbol mode is the same depending on whether the character string image of "sorry" is displayed or the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed. It may be configured to be.

(Example 3-3)
An production example of Example 3-3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 73A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 73A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 73 (b) following FIG. 73 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 73 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 73 (c) following FIG. 73 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 73C, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 73 (d) following FIG. 73 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 73 (c) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 73 (e), which continues from FIG. 73 (d), shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 73 (c) and 73 (d) is displayed. The state in which the button response display 4 shown in 71 (e) is displayed is shown. In this example, since it took more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 was started than in the case shown in the third embodiment, FIG. 71 (d) shows. The middle part of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (e) is displayed without displaying the early part of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the time from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed.

FIG. 73 (f) following FIG. 73 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed. In FIG. 73 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. The state in which the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 73 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 73 (g) following from FIG. 73 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 73 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 73 (h), which continues from FIG. 73 (g), shows a state in which the effect of the preview animation is completed and the definite display of the detached symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 3-4)
An production example of Example 3-4 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 shows an example of the effect in the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 74A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 74 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 74 (b) following FIG. 74 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 74 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 74 (c) following FIG. 74 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 74 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 74 (d) following FIG. 74 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 74 (c) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 74 (e), which continues from FIG. 74 (d), shows that the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d) is displayed. A state in which the early stage of the button response display 4 shown in 71 (d) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends.

FIG. 74 (f) following FIG. 74 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed and the opportunity button 139 is notified that the operation valid period is in effect. There is. In this example, since it took more time for the player to press the chance button 136 after the button operation waiting display 3 was started than in the case shown in the third embodiment, FIG. 71 (e) shows. The final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) is displayed without displaying the middle stage of the button response display 4 shown. It should be noted that all the time from the beginning to the end of the button response display 4 shown in Example 3-1 according to the time required from the start of the button operation waiting display 3 to the display of the button response display 4. The display may be displayed so as to be played back at double speed. In FIG. 74 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 74 (g) following from FIG. 74 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 74 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 74 (h), which follows from FIG. 74 (g), shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.

(Example 3-5)
An production example of Example 3-5 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 3-1.

FIG. 75A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 75A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 75 (b) following FIG. 75 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 71 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 75 (c) following FIG. 75 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 75 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

FIG. 75 (d) following FIG. 75 (c) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is continuously displayed.

In FIG. 75 (e), which continues from FIG. 75 (d), the player does not press the chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 75 (f) is displayed, and the chance button 136 is operated. It shows the state just before the expiration date.

In FIG. 75 (f) following from FIG. 75 (e), the button operation waiting display 3 is deleted when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends, and the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f). Is displayed. In this example, since the chance button 136 was not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the beginning of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (d) and FIG. 71 (e) shown in the embodiment 3-1 are shown. It is configured to display the final stage of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f) without displaying the middle stage of the button response display 4 shown. By displaying the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (f), it is notified that the opportunity button 139 is in the operation valid period. In FIG. 75 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, all the button response displays 5 shown in FIGS. 71 (d) to 71 (f) may not be displayed.

In FIG. 75 (g) following from FIG. 75 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 75 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 75 (h) following FIG. 75 (g) shows a state in which the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the definite display of the missed symbol mode may be displayed.

(Example 3-6)
An example of the production of Example 3-6 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 76A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 76A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 76 (b) following FIG. 76 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 71 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 76 (c) following FIG. 76 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 76C, the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 76 (d) following FIG. 76 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 76 (e) following FIG. 76 (d) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed, and shows a state in which the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is notified. In FIG. 76 (e), the image of “further chance !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the button pressing instruction image in the form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. An image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and imitating a state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “opportunity button protruding image”) is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. it's shown. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image from the center to the top of the opportunity button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the center of the opportunity button protrusion image to display the entire opportunity button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 76 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, and the normal state. It represents a more prominent state. The player operates the opportunity button 139 by causing the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 to emit light in a predetermined mode (or emit light in a mode different from the normal state) and to protrude from the normal state. You may be able to know that. It should be noted that the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes during the display of the button response display 4 is easier to stop and display the jackpot symbol mode than the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude during the display of the button response display 4. It may be configured as, and vice versa. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, in the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 does not protrude while the button response display 4 is displayed and the symbol variation display in which the opportunity button 139 protrudes while the button response display 4 is displayed, it is easy to stop the jackpot symbol mode. May be configured to be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

In FIG. 76 (f) continuing from FIG. 76 (e), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 76 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "super hot !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It should be noted that the button response display 5 is "super" rather than the symbol variation display in which the character string image of "super hot !!!" is not displayed and the character string image of "sorry" or "big hit !?" is displayed. The symbol variation display on which the character string image of "Gekiatsu !!!" is displayed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be stopped and displayed more easily. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

FIG. 76 (g) following FIG. 76 (f) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even if the character string image of "super hot !!!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 5, the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode may be displayed. Good.

(Example 3-7)
An example of the production of Example 3-7 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 77A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 77 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 77 (b) following FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 71 (b) onward, the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 77 (c) following FIG. 77 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 77 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 77 (d) continuing from FIG. 77 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 77 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 77 (e) following FIG. 77 (d) shows a state in which the middle stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 77 (e), the image of “further chance !!” displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is erased, and the button pressing instruction image in the form in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button protruding image that imitates the state in which the opportunity button 139 is projected is displayed on both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. The decorative pattern display device 208 displays an image from the center to the top of the opportunity button protrusion image, and the sub display device 1030 displays an image below the center of the opportunity button protrusion image to display the entire opportunity button protrusion image. it's shown. In FIG. 77 (e), the opportunity button 139 is in a protruding state from the normal state, but the opportunity button lamp 141 is in the normal state, so that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is not reached.

FIG. 77 (f) following FIG. 77 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 77 (f), an opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 that has returned to the normal state is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the opportunity button 139 has returned from the protruding state to the normal state. ..

In FIG. 77 (g), which continues from FIG. 77 (f), the button response display 4 is erased and the character string image of "sorry" is displayed as the button response display 5 without starting the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state of.

FIG. 77 (h), which continues from FIG. 77 (g), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-design mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 5, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 3-1 to 3-7, the button response display 4 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 3 is displayed. , The button response display 5 may be configured differently depending on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's opportunity button 139 when the button response display 4 is displayed. May occur. Even in the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, if the effect has the same effect pattern 3, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Example 4-1)
An example of the production of Example 4-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 58 (c), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 78A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 78 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 78 (b) following FIG. 78 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 78 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 78 (c) following FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. The button operation waiting display 4 of this example is an image of the chance button 136 that emits light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, “chance button special”). It may be referred to as a "light emitting image") and an image in which three inverted triangles displayed in a special color are overlapped (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "button press special instruction image"). .. The chance button special light emitting image and the button pressing special instruction image are images that are not displayed in the button operation waiting display 1 to 3, and by displaying these images, the button response display is always displayed after the button operation waiting display 4. 4 will be displayed. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 78 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 4. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The emission color of the chance button 136 may be the same as or different from the chance button special emission image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4.

In FIG. 78 (d) continuing from FIG. 78 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 78 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 is displayed. As an early stage (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 78 (e) continuing from FIG. 78 (d), as the middle part of the button response display 4, the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state of being done.

FIG. 78 (f) following FIG. 78 (e) shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 78 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. The state in which the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. In FIG. 78 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button pressing shown in FIG. 78 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 78 (g) following from FIG. 78 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 78 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
In FIG. 78 (h), which continues from FIG. 78 (g), the display of the button response display 4 is finished, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" of the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 78 (u) following FIG. 78 (h) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed again in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. It should be noted that the decorative symbol may be varied and displayed after the resurrection effect is performed after FIG. 78 (h).

(Example 4-2)
An production example of Example 4-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 4 shown in FIG. 58 (c), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 4-1.

FIG. 79A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 79 (a), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are shown to be in the normal state.

FIG. 79 (b) following FIG. 79 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 79 (b), the effect (reach effect) by the preview animation is started.

FIG. 79 (c) following FIG. 79 (b) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 4 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, it is notified that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached. In the button operation waiting display 4 of this example, a chance button special light emitting image and a special chance button special light emitting image that imitates the chance button 136 that emits light in a special mode displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a special The button press special instruction image in which three inverted triangles displayed in color are overlapped corresponds. When the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c are arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Before the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c may be arranged so as to be reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. There may be. In FIG. 78 (c), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The light emitting mode of the chance button 136 may be the same as the light emitting mode of the chance button special light emitting image displayed on the button operation waiting display 4, or may be different.

In FIG. 79 (d) continuing from FIG. 79 (c), when the player presses the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 79 (c) is displayed, the button response display 4 ( As a display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136), a character string image of "further chance !!" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with the 4-1 embodiment, the time from when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed until the player presses the chance button 136 is longer.

In FIG. 79 (e) succeeding from FIG. 79 (d), after displaying the character string image of “further chance !!” of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 79 (d), the button response display 4 is newly used. An opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 to be moved and displayed is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 79 (f) following FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the button response display 4 is continuously displayed. In FIG. 79 (f), the opportunity button image displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped at the center of the display area, and the image of "further chance !!" is erased. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed is shown. The button pressing instruction image is an image that is not displayed in the button response display 3 displayed in the effect pattern 2. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button press instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is reached. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 79 (f), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button response display 4, an image of the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as an “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button pressing shown in FIG. 78 (c). A special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 79 (g) following from FIG. 79 (f), when the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 79 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 5 (opportunity). The display performed in response to the pressing of the button 139) indicates a state in which the character string image of "big hit !?" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as compared with Example 4-1 it takes a long time for the player to press the opportunity button 139 after the button response display 4 is displayed, so that the button response is started after the symbol variation display is started. The time until the display 5 is displayed is long.

FIG. 79 (h) following FIG. 79 (g) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed again in a variable manner and the jackpot symbol mode is stopped. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this example, since the time from the display of the button response display 5 to the end of the symbol variation display is shorter than that of the 4-1 embodiment, the effect of temporarily stopping the out-of-order symbol shown in FIG. 78 (h) is performed. It is configured not to. When the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed and immediately before the end of the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the display of the early stage or the middle stage of the display of the button response display 4 is displayed. May be thinned out to temporarily stop the out-of-order symbol shown in FIG. 78 (h).

In the effect example shown in Examples 4-1 and 4-2, the button response display 4 depends on the timing and presence / absence of pressing the player's chance button 136 when the button operation waiting display 4 is displayed. , The button response display 5 is configured differently depending on the timing of pressing the opportunity button 139 of the player when the button response display 4 is displayed and the presence or absence of pressing. In some cases. Even in the production of the same effect pattern 4, the jackpot reliability may be configured to be different depending on the display of the button response display 4 and the button response display 5. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, if the effect pattern 4 is the same no matter what button response display 4 or button response display 5 is displayed, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Example 5-1)
An production example of Example 5-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. FIG. 80 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 80A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 80A, it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 80 (b) following FIG. 80 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 80 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 80 (c), which continues from FIG. 80 (b), shows the chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 80 (d), which continues from FIG. 80 (c), the button press instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button waiting display 2.

In FIG. 80 (e), which continues from FIG. 80 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a mode in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 80 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As the button operation waiting display 2, an image of the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “opportunity button special emission image”) and the button shown in FIG. 78 (c). The pressing special instruction image may be displayed.

In FIG. 80 (f), which continues from FIG. 80 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 80 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved to a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

In FIG. 80 (g) following from FIG. 80 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 80 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 2 ( As a display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 80 (g), which continues from FIG. 80 (f), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-design mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. As the button response display 2, even when the character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed.

(Example 5-2)
An example of the production of Example 5-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 81. FIG. 81 shows an effect example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order.

FIG. 81A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 81 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 81 (b) following FIG. 81 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 80 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 81 (c), which continues from FIG. 81 (b), shows a chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 81 (d) continuing from FIG. 81 (c), as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the chance button emission image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 81 (e) following from FIG. 81 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a manner in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 81 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 81 (f) following from FIG. 81 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 81 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved to a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

In FIG. 81 (g) following from FIG. 81 (f), when the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 81 (f) is displayed, the player presses the opportunity button 139 to display the button response display 2 ( As an early stage of (display performed in response to pressing the opportunity button 139), a character string image of "big hit?" Is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 81 (h), which continues from FIG. 81 (g), is a middle stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), and is a “big hit ?!” in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image of "is displayed.

FIG. 81 (i), which continues from FIG. 81 (h), is the final stage of the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139), and is a “big hit ?! The character string image of "!" Is displayed. The character string images of "big hit ?!" and "big hit ?!" displayed in the middle and the end of the button response display 2 are displayed when the opportunity button 139 is pressed and held for a predetermined time or longer, or for a predetermined time. It may be configured to be displayed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times.

FIG. 81 (j) following FIG. 81 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even if the character string images of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-design mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the button response display 2 of this example, "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in this order, so that the player's expectation of big hit can be gradually increased. You may be able to do it. In addition, the jackpot reliability may be displayed by the number of "!". For example, when "Big hit?" And "Big hit ?!" are displayed in this order as the button response display 2 ("Big hit? !!" is not displayed), "Big hit?", "Big hit ?!", "Big hit ?!" "Big hit? !!!" and "Big hit? !!!" may be displayed in this order.

(Example 5-3)
An example of the production of Example 5-3 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

FIG. 82A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 82 (a) shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 82 (b) following FIG. 82 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 80 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 82 (c), which continues from FIG. 82 (b), shows the chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 82 (d), which continues from FIG. 82 (c), the button pressing instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 82 (e), which continues from FIG. 82 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a manner in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 82 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 82 (f), which continues from FIG. 82 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 82 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved to a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

FIG. 82 (g) following FIG. 82 (f) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 82 (f) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 82 (h) following FIG. 82 (g) shows the state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 82 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

FIG. 82 (i), which continues from FIG. 82 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit? !!" at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the 5-1 example, it is the beginning of the button response display 2 shown in the 5-2 embodiment. It is configured not to display the middle stage.

FIG. 81 (j) following FIG. 82 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Even when the character string image of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", or "big hit? !!" is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button response display 2, the missed symbol mode is displayed. A stop display may be displayed.

(Example 5-4)
An example of the production of Example 5-4 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (d), and shows the effect states in chronological order. The effect of this example is a modified example of the effect shown in Example 5-2.

FIG. 83A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started. In FIG. 83 (a), it is shown that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 83 (b) following FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. From FIG. 80 (b) onward, the effect of the preview animation (reach effect) is started.

FIG. 83 (c), which continues from FIG. 83 (b), shows the chance button light emission displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 3 shown in the embodiment 3-1 or the like as an early stage of the button operation waiting display 2. A state in which a button pressing instruction image in a mode in which three inverted triangles overlap with the image is displayed is shown. In this example, since it is not the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button pressing instruction image in the form in which the chance button light emitting image and the three inverted triangles overlap is a false display that does not indicate that the chance button 136 is the operation valid period. Yes, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

In FIG. 83 (d), which continues from FIG. 83 (c), the button press instruction image is erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the chance button light emitting image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the middle stage of the button operation waiting display 2. In parallel with moving the image to the left end of the area and erasing it so as to frame out, a state in which the opportunity button image is displayed so as to frame in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. The arrow on the left side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image, and the arrow on the right side shown shows the direction and the trajectory of the movement display of the chance button emission image. However, it may actually be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as the button operation waiting display 2.

In FIG. 83 (e), which continues from FIG. 83 (d), as the final stage of the button operation waiting display 2, the button is pressed in a manner in which the opportunity button image and three inverted triangles are overlapped in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state where the instruction image is displayed. The opportunity button image is displayed at a position where a part of the opportunity button image and the movable body 1002 overlap. In FIG. 83 (e), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. Represents. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In addition, as the button operation waiting display 2, even if the opportunity button special emission image that imitates the opportunity button 139 that emits light in a special mode and the button press special instruction image shown in FIG. 78 (c) may be displayed. Good.

In FIG. 83 (f) following from FIG. 83 (e), the button press instruction image in the form in which the opportunity button image and the three inverted triangles are overlapped is displayed as being moved upward from the position displayed in FIG. 83 (e). Shows the state of The opportunity button image is moved to a more conspicuous position to encourage the operation of the opportunity button.

FIG. 83 (g) following FIG. 83 (f) shows the state immediately before the button operation waiting display 2 shown in FIG. 83 (f) is continuously displayed and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 ends. There is.

FIG. 83 (h), which continues from FIG. 83 (g), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit ?!" at the beginning of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

FIG. 83 (i), which continues from FIG. 83 (h), shows the button response display 2 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) at the end of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 in Example 5-1. The state in which the character string image of "big hit? !!" at the end of the button response display 2 shown is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. In this example, since it took more time from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2 than in the 5-1 example, the middle part of the button response display 2 shown in the 5-2 example is displayed. It is thinned out so that it is not displayed. It should be noted that all the displays from the beginning to the end of the button response display 2 shown in Example 5-1 are doubled according to the time required from the start of the symbol variation display to the display of the button response display 2. It may be displayed to be played.

FIG. 83 (j), which continues from FIG. 83 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed at the same time as the end of the effect by the preview animation. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. As the button response display 2, even if the character string images of "big hit?", "Big hit ?!", and "big hit ?!" are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the off-design mode is stopped. It may be displayed.

In the effect example shown in Examples 5-1 to 5-4, the button response display 2 depends on the timing at which the player's opportunity button 139 is pressed when the button operation waiting display 2 is displayed and whether or not the button is pressed. , May be configured differently. Even if the same effect pattern 2 is produced, the jackpot reliability may be different depending on the display of the button response display 2. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player. On the other hand, no matter what button response display 2 is displayed, if the effect has the same effect pattern 2, the jackpot reliability may be the same. By doing so, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

(Example 6-1)
An production example of Example 6-1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 84. FIG. 84 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 2 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 58B correspond to the hold icon. In addition, in FIG. 84 and later, the movable body 1002 is located at a position that does not overlap with the main liquid crystal unit 1001 when viewed from the player.

FIG. 84A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 84A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 84 (b), which continues from FIG. 84 (a), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 84 (c), which continues from FIG. 84 (b), shows the default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 84 (d) following FIG. 84 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 84 (c) is being executed.

In FIG. 84 (e), which continues from FIG. 84 (d), one game ball has entered the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 84 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to a hold icon of an image imitating the chance button 136 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button hold icon”). In FIG. 84 (e), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

FIG. 84 (f), which continues from FIG. 84 (e), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 84 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not reached.

In FIG. 84 (g), which continues from FIG. 84 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 84 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases.

In FIG. 84 (h), which continues from FIG. 84 (g), the player is in the process of continuously displaying the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 84 (g), and the player is in the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 3. The button response display 3 of this example corresponds to a hold icon (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “chance button light emission hold icon”) of an image imitating a chance button 136 that emits light in a mode different from the normal state. ing.

FIG. 84 (i), which continues from FIG. 84 (h), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 84 (i) shows a state in which the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 84 (h).

FIG. 84 (j), which continues from FIG. 84 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 84 (j), the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3.

In FIG. 84 (k), which continues from FIG. 84 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button light emission hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 3. It shows the state of doing. The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the chance button are displayed. The operation validity period of 136 is started. FIG. 84 (k) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 3 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the chance button 136 to be pressed.

In FIG. 84 (l), which continues from FIG. 84 (k), while the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 84 (k) is continuously displayed, the player can perform the operation valid period of the chance button 136. By pressing the chance button 136, the chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 is changed to the black circular hold icon b4 in the look-ahead notice mode. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. It is configured so that the symbol mode is easily stopped and displayed. The chance button light emission hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 3 may be changed to a white circular hold icon, a white diamond hold icon, or a hold icon other than these.

FIG. 84 (m), which continues from FIG. 84 (l), shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

FIG. 84 (n), which continues from FIG. 84 (m), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 84 (o), which is continued from FIG. 84 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decoration symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It becomes a black circular variable icon a4 and shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons moving to the left has ended.

FIG. 84 (p) following FIG. 84 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 84 (p), the effect (reach effect) by the predetermined advance notice animation is started.

FIG. 84 (q), which continues from FIG. 84 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the out-of-design mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 84 (r), which continues from FIG. 84 (q), shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 3 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player clicks the change button. By operating 136, the icon is changed to a black circular hold icon, which is a look-ahead notice mode. As described above, the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response display 3 of this example are configured so that the hold icon corresponds to the display including the display performed when the chance button 136 is waiting for the operation.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, from the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, the chance button 136 is displayed. The start timing of the operation valid period and the operation valid period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but one or more of the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 3, but when one or more of the hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed at the same time as the button response display 3. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon and the button response corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 are configured. The hold icon corresponding to display 3 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 may be changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 3 is displayed, or a look-ahead notice other than the white circle. It may be changed to a hold icon in a mode.

(Example 6-2)
An example of the production of Example 6-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 85. FIG. 85 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 58B correspond to the hold icon.

FIG. 85A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 85A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 85 (b), which continues from FIG. 85 (a), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

In FIG. 85 (c), which continues from FIG. 85 (b), the default white circular hold icon b3 is displayed based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 85 (d) following FIG. 85 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 85 (c) is being executed.

In FIG. 85 (e), which continues from FIG. 85 (d), one game ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 85 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the button operation waiting display 3 corresponds to the chance button hold icon of the image imitating the chance button 136. In FIG. 85 (e), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

FIG. 85 (f), which continues from FIG. 85 (e), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 85 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not reached.

In FIG. 85 (g), which continues from FIG. 85 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 85 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

In FIG. 85 (h), which continues from FIG. 85 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (g) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the chance button 136 during the valid period. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to a hold icon of an image imitating the opportunity button 139 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “opportunity button hold icon”).

FIG. 85 (i), which continues from FIG. 85 (h), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 85 (i) shows a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 85 (h).

FIG. 85 (j) following FIG. 85 (i) shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 85 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

In FIG. 85 (k), which continues from FIG. 85 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4. Indicates the state of The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation validity period of 139 is started. FIG. 85 (k) shows a state in which the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

In FIG. 85 (l), which continues from FIG. 85 (k), the player is in the process of continuously displaying the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 85 (k), and the player is in the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. By pressing the opportunity button 139, the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is changed to the white diamond-shaped hold icon b4 as the button response display 5. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. It is configured so that the symbol mode is easily stopped and displayed. The jackpot symbol mode stops in the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the white diamond hold icon is digested, rather than the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested. It is configured to be easy to display. As the button response display 5, a white circular hold icon, a black circular hold icon, or a hold icon other than these may be displayed.

In FIG. 85 (m) following FIG. 85 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown.

FIG. 85 (n), which continues from FIG. 85 (m), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 85 (o), which continues from FIG. 85 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is digested, the next symbol variation display is started, the decorative symbol variation display is started, and the black circular hold icon b4 is displayed. It becomes a black circular variable icon a4 and shows a state in which the movement animation between the hold / variable icons moving to the left has ended.

FIG. 85 (p) following FIG. 85 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. After FIG. 85 (p), the effect (reach effect) by the predetermined advance notice animation is started.

FIG. 85 (q), which continues from FIG. 85 (p), shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the off-symbol pattern mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 85 (r), which continues from FIG. 85 (q), shows a state in which the stop display of the off-symbol symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has the opportunity button. By operating 139, the icon is changed to a black circular hold icon, which is a look-ahead notice mode displayed as the button response display 5. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display displayed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 includes a display performed while waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the validity period and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 moves to the left. After displaying the movement animation of the hold icon, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be cases other than. For example, the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, and the chance button for the player. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 4 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 5 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to display 4 may be composed of different hold icons. In this case, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 may be changed to the white circular hold icon in the default mode at the timing when the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 is displayed, or a look-ahead notice other than the white circle. It may be changed to a hold icon in a mode.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

(Example 6-3)
An production example of Example 6-3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 shows a modified example of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b), and shows the effect states in chronological order. This example is an effect example in which the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 58B correspond to the hold icon.

FIG. 86A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. A white circular hold icon b1 and a white circular hold icon b2 are displayed in the effect display area 208d below the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 86A shows that the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are in the normal state.

FIG. 86 (b), which continues from FIG. 86 (a), shows a state in which one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol variation display is started. When the hold icon b1 becomes the change icon a1 and moves to the left, the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b2 moves to the left, the change display of the decorative symbol is displayed. To be started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

FIG. 86 (c), which continues from FIG. 86 (b), shows the default white circular hold icon b3 based on the fact that one game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It shows the increased display state. A state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c is shown.

FIG. 86 (d) following FIG. 86 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 86 (c) is executed.

In FIG. 86 (e), which continues from FIG. 86 (d), one game ball enters the special drawing 1 starting port 230 while the variable display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 86 (d) is being executed. Based on this, the hold icon b4 is increased and displayed. In this example, the chance button hold icon of the image of the chance button 136 corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3. In FIG. 86 (e), since the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not valid, the chance button 136 remains in the normal state.

FIG. 86 (f), which continues from FIG. 86 (e), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 86 (f), the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but the chance button 136 remains in the normal state because the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is not reached.

In FIG. 86 (g) following from FIG. 86 (f), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the chance button hold icon is continuously displayed as the button operation waiting display 3. Indicates the state of. The hold icon b2 becomes the change icon a2 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold and change icons and the hold icon b3 and b4 move to the left, and the move animation of the hold icon is displayed. And the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is started. FIG. 86 (g) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is in a state different from the normal state, and the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the chance button 136 is operated by the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left.

In FIG. 86 (h), which continues from FIG. 86 (g), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (g) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the chance button 136 during the valid period. By pressing the chance button 136, the hold icon b4 displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the button response display 4. The button response display 4 of this example corresponds to the opportunity button hold icon of the image imitating the opportunity button 139.

FIG. 86 (i), which continues from FIG. 86 (h), shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208 and "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Is shown. FIG. 86 (i) shows a state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 86 (h).

FIG. 86 (j), which continues from FIG. 86 (i), shows a state in which the stop display of the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In FIG. 86 (j), the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4.

In FIG. 86 (k) following FIG. 86 (j), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and the opportunity button hold icon b4 is continuously displayed as the button response display 4. Indicates the state of. The hold icon b3 becomes the change icon a3 and moves to the left. The move animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon b4 move to the left. The change display of the decorative symbol and the opportunity button are displayed. The operation validity period of 139 is started. FIG. 86 (k) shows a state in which the opportunity button 139 is in a state different from the normal state, and the opportunity button lamp 141 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). .. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. As described above, in this example, the button response display 4 is a display including a display performed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed.

In FIG. 86 (l), which continues from FIG. 86 (k), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (k) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the opportunity button 139 during the valid period. By pressing the opportunity button 139, an animation showing the state in which the opportunity button hold icon b4 is changing in the area where the opportunity button hold icon b4 is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "hold icon changing animation"). It may be referred to as).

In FIG. 86 (m) following from FIG. 86 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Hold icon When the display of the changing animation ends, the hold icon of the image that imitates the opportunity button 139 in the state where the opportunity button hold icon b4 displayed as the button response display 4 is projected (hereinafter, "opportunity button protrusion hold") It may be referred to as an "icon".) The state changed to b5 is shown. In FIG. 86 (m), the opportunity button 139 protrudes in relation to displaying the button response display 5, but since the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is not valid, the opportunity button 139 is not emitting light. Or it remains in the normal light emitting state. In this example, the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the white circular hold icon. The symbol mode is configured to be easily stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the black circular hold icon is digested and started. Rather than the symbol variation display, the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is digested and started. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed, and the hold corresponding to the opportunity button protruding hold icon is more likely than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the white diamond-shaped hold icon is digested. The symbol variation display that is started after the is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 86 (n), which continues from FIG. 86 (m), shows a state in which the out-of-order symbol mode is confirmed and the variable icon a1 is erased. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order.

In FIG. 86 (o) following from FIG. 86 (n), one hold of special figure 1 is exhausted and the next symbol variation display is started, and then the opportunity button protrusion hold icon b4 is projected. The variation icon of the image imitating 139 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "opportunity button protrusion variation icon") a4, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon that moves to the left is displayed, and the decoration pattern changes. The display and operation validity period of the opportunity button 139 is started. FIG. 86 (o) shows a state in which the protruding opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state).

In FIG. 86 (p), which continues from FIG. 86 (o), while the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 86 (o) is continuously displayed, the player can operate the opportunity button 139 during the valid period. By pressing the opportunity button 139 in the protruding state, the "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" of the jackpot symbol mode is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. If the player does not press the opportunity button 139 in a protruding state during the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139, a big hit is made to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the end of the operation validity period of the opportunity button 139. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" of the design aspect is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 86 (r) following FIG. 86 (q) shows a state in which the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed. "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon displayed as the button response display 4 by the player operating the chance button 136, and then the player has the opportunity button. By operating 139, the icon is changed to the opportunity button protrusion hold icon, which is a look-ahead notice mode displayed as the button response display 5, and then the player operates the opportunity button 139 in a state of protruding from the normal state. Temporary stop display of decorative design is performed. As described above, in this example, the hold icon corresponds to the button operation waiting display 3, the button response display 4, and the button response display 5. The button operation waiting display 3 includes a display displayed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136, and the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 include a display performed when waiting for the operation of the opportunity button 139. To.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started after displaying the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left. Although it is configured, there may be other cases. For example, the operation of the chance button 136 is performed from the hold order when the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 is increased and the time required to start the symbol variation display which is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested. The start timing of the validity period and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 may be determined.

In this example, the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 moves to the left. After displaying the movement animation of the hold icon, the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. There may be cases other than. For example, the hold order when the hold icon displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 is increased, the time required to start the symbol variation display that is started after the hold of the hold icon is digested, and the chance button for the player. From the timing of operating 136, the start timing of the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 may be determined.

In this example, when the hold icon is increased and displayed, the hold icon is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but when the hold icon is reduced and displayed, the specific hold icon is waiting for the button operation. It may be configured to change to the hold icon as the display 3, or the hold icon as the button operation waiting display 3 is changed to the hold icon at a timing other than the hold increase display and the hold decrease display. It may be configured to change to.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation waiting display 3, but two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button operation waiting display 3 at the same time. There may be cases.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 4, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 4 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons is displayed as the button operation response display 5, but when two or more hold icons of the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the button response display 5 at the same time. There may be.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button operation waiting display 3 and the button response The hold icon corresponding to display 4 may be composed of different hold icons.

In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 5 are composed of the same hold icon, but the hold icon corresponding to the button response display 4 and the button response display 5 The hold icon corresponding to may be composed of different hold icons.

As described above, in Examples 6-1 to 6-3, an effect example in which the hold icon is associated with the operation wait display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 2 and the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 58 is shown. However, there may be a case where the hold icon is associated with the operation waiting display and the operation response display displayed in the effect pattern 1, the effect pattern 4, or the effect pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the third embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 58 to 86.

(I1)
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display, and
An image display means capable of displaying an image (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 209) and
A first operating means (for example, chance button 136) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
A second operating means (for example, opportunity button 139) provided at a position where the player can operate, and
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation wait display (for example, button operation wait display 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b)).
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (for example, FIGS. 67 (c) to (d) and 71 (c) to (d)). Etc.),
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 3 shown in FIG. 58 (b)).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 58 (b)).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display (for example, the button response display 5 shown in FIG. 58 (c)).
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (b) and 67 (c) to (f)). ),
The third type of operation response display does not include a part of the display (for example, a button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles are overlapped) displayed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means. It is a configured display (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (b), 67 (c)-(f)).
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (c) and 71 (c) to (f)). ),
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 58 (c), FIG. 71). (F)),
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (d) and 71 (g)).
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the third type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the symbol variation in which the fifth type of operation response display displayed by causing the player to operate the first operation means and the second operation means step by step is performed. The display is more than the symbol variation display in which the third type of operation response display is performed, which is displayed by causing the player to operate only the first operation means without performing the fifth type of operation response display. Since the jackpot symbol is easily displayed as a definite display, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be gradually increased, and the interest of the game may be improved.

(I2)
The game console described in (I1) above.
The third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display (for example, a chance button emission image). Which type of display among the response displays is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means.
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the third types of operation waiting displays (see, for example, FIGS. 67 (c) and 71 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I3)
The game console according to (I1) or (I2) above.
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 4 shown in FIG. 58 (c)).
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (c) and 78 (c) to (d)).
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth type of operation waiting display, the fourth type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIGS. 58 (c), 78 (d)-(f)),
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type of operation waiting display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I4)
The game console described in (I3) above.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation wait display (for example, the operation wait display 1 shown in FIG. 58 (a)).
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation response display (for example, the operation response display 1 shown in FIG. 58A).
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (d)).
The first type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means (for example, FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (e)). reference),
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first type of operation waiting display, the first type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIGS. 58 (a) and 59 (d)-(e)),
The first operation response display (for example, a character string image of "chance !!") is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display. (See, for example, FIGS. 60 (c) to 60 (d)).
The fourth operation response display (for example, an opportunity button image and a button press instruction image) is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display. Cage (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (c)-(f)),
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display (for example, FIGS. 74 (c) to 74 (c) to FIG. (F)),
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the first type of operation waiting displays.
The first operation response display is an operation response display of one of the first types of operation response displays.
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the fourth types of operation waiting displays.
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of one of the fourth types of operation response displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(I5)
The game console described in (I4) above.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the first type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I6)
The game console according to (I4) or (I5) above.
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the operation response display of the third type is performed without the operation response display of the first type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I7)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above.
The fourth type of operation response display is the first when the time from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the operation of the first operation means is the first time. The display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 71 (d) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (c) to (f)).
When the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the second time, the operation response display of the fourth type is the second. The display (for example, the button response display 4 shown in FIGS. 74 (e) to (f)) (see, for example, FIGS. 74 (c) to (f)).
The second time is longer than the first time,
The display at the beginning of the first display and the display at the beginning of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (d) and 74 (e)).
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (f) and 74 (f)).
At least a part of the display in the middle of the first display (for example, the display in the middle of the button response display 4 shown in FIG. 71 (e)) is not displayed in the second display (for example, FIGS. 74 (e) to 74 (e). (F)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I8)
The game console described in (I7) above.
When the first operating means is operated from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the end of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type of operation waiting display. It is configured so that the display is performed according to the operation of the first operating means (see, for example, FIGS. 71 (d) to (f)).
The first time is the time from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means at the shortest timing (for example, FIG. 71 (c)). )-(D)),
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the operation waiting display of the third type is started (). For example, see FIGS. 74 (c) to 74 (d)),
A game table characterized by that.
(I9)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above.
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display (for example, button operation waiting display 2).
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operating means (see, for example, FIG. 58 (d)).
When the second type of operation means is operated during the display of the second type of operation waiting display, the second type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 58 (d)),
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(I10)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I9) above.
The display of the character displayed on the operation response display of the fourth type (for example, the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 78 (f) are overlapped) is waiting for the operation of the fourth type. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 78 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I11)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I10) above.
The display of the character displayed on the operation response display of the fourth type (for example, the button pressing instruction image in which three inverted triangles shown in FIG. 71 (f) are overlapped) is waiting for the operation of the third type. It is configured to be displayed on the display (see, for example, FIG. 71 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.
(I12)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I11) above.
The second operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
(I13)
The game console according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above.
The first operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when rotated by the player.
A game table characterized by that.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 94. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Example 1)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. FIG. 87 (a) shows a schematic front view of the gaming board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and from FIG. 87 (b), the game board 1000 to the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body. 1002 is extracted and shown.

FIG. 87 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 87 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In FIG. 87, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 87 (b) following FIG. 87 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 87 (d) following FIG. 87 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The normal reach effect is started after FIG. 87 (d).

FIG. 87 (e) following FIG. 87 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved from the initial position to the lowermost part of the operating range. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and the part of the image becomes invisible to the player. During execution of the symbol variation display, the decorative symbol or the preview image (for example, an image of the sun, clouds, balloon, hold icon, variation icon, etc.) does not overlap with the movable body 1010, rather than the decorative symbol or the preview image. When at least a part overlaps with the movable body 1010, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the visible part of the look-ahead notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body 1010 than the visible part of the look-ahead notice image may be different before and after the movement of the movable body 1010. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that is the target of.

FIG. 87 (f) following FIG. 87 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways from side to side. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display described later is not executed during the normal reach effect.

FIG. 87 (h) following FIG. 87 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variation display is out of order.

FIG. 87 (i) following FIG. 87 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the reservation of the earliest special figure 1 being digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, variable display of the decorative symbol is executed.

FIG. 87 (j) following FIG. 87 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 87 (k) following FIG. 87 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 87 (k). In this example, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 87 (l) following FIG. 87 (k) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect.

FIG. 87 (m) following FIG. 87 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image has changed from a background image of the sea including an image of a yacht and an image of clouds to an image of a part of the background of a mountain road displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a portion of the sub-display device 1030 that overlaps and is hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 87 (n) following FIG. 87 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub-display device 1030 has moved upward to the right from the initial position shown in FIG. 87 (m). The sub-display device 1030 displays an image of a portion of the sub-display device 1030 that overlaps and is hidden by the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the movable body 1002 may be referred to as a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, referred to as a display screen front plane) by a drive system (not shown). ) Can be moved two-dimensionally. The drive system of the movable body 1002 can have various configurations. For example, one end of two rotatably connected connecting rods is rotatably fixed to a predetermined position of the main liquid crystal unit 1001 outside the decorative symbol display device 208, and two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. Configure a movable link mechanism. The movable body 1002 is rotatably fixed to the other ends of the two connected connecting rods in the plane. A motor for driving the connecting rod is arranged at one end of the two connected connecting rods and at the connecting node. As a result, the movable body 1002 can be moved two-dimensionally in the front plane of the display screen. A motor for rotating the effect movable body may be arranged at the other end of the two connecting rods so that the movable body 1002 can be rotated in the front plane of the display screen.

In the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 87 (o), which continues from FIG. 87 (n), shows a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (center of the effect display area 208d) as a display suggesting deviation. Is shown. The sub-display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character image of "mind" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub-display device 1030 has the lower half of the character "mind". It is displayed.

FIG. 87 (p) following FIG. 87 (o) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 87 (q), which continues from FIG. 87 (p), shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" suggesting a deviation during the super reach effect is displayed. .. The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing an image from the edge of the display screen of the display device as if wiping it off. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes two display devices, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a sub display device 1030. In the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is first started by the decorative symbol display device 208, and then the sub. It is started in the display device 1030. Hereinafter, the wipe effect display executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe effect display, the wipe display displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as a first wipe display, and is referred to as a sub display device 1030. The wipe effect display to be executed is referred to as a second wipe effect display, and the wipe display displayed on the sub display device 1030 is referred to as a second wipe display.

As shown in FIG. 87 (q), the wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. To do. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 87, the patterns are shown by hatching that rises to the right.

The movable body 1002 is moving toward the initial position, and the sub-display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character string image of "sorry" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and is sub-displayed. The lower half of the word "mind" is displayed on the device 1030.

FIG. 87 (r) following FIG. 87 (q) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 87 (s) following FIG. 87 (r) shows a state in which the second wipe effect display is started in the sub display device 1030 while the sub display device 1030 (movable body 1002) is moving. The wipe display w2a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display 1030, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The appearance of the wipe display w2a and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display. The wipe displays w2a and w2b are displayed in the foreground on the sub-display device 1030, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the background image or the like that has been displayed before the start of the second wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w2a and w2b are the same, and in FIG. 87, the patterns are shown by white dots on a black background.

The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different. The first wipe display appears from the upper left and lower right corners of the screen, and the second wipe display appears from the upper right and lower left corners of the screen.

In this embodiment, the second wipe effect display is started during the effect operation in which the sub display device 1030 moves to the initial position, but the second wipe effect is performed after the sub display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The display may be started, the sub display device 1030 may start moving to the initial position after the second wipe effect display is finished, the timing at which the sub display device 1030 starts moving to the initial position, and the second The start timing of the second wipe effect display may be the same.

FIG. 87 (t) following FIG. 87 (s) shows a state in which the sub-display device 1030 is stopped at the initial position. The first wipe display and the second wipe display are emerging. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 87 (u) following FIG. 87 (t) shows a state in which the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w2a and the end of the wipe display w2b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b. When the entire display screen of the sub-display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w2a and w2b, the wipe displays w2a and w2b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The first wipe display is appearing, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed from the lower right corner of the display screen. It is displayed so that it gradually spreads in the center.

FIG. 87 (v) following FIG. 87 (u) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are in a standby display state in which they are not moved and displayed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 87 (w) following FIG. 87 (v) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The second wipe display is in standby display.

FIG. 87 (x) following FIG. 87 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is started. The wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen.

FIG. 87 (y) following FIG. 87 (x) shows the state during the withdrawal display of the first wipe display and the second wipe display. A part of the decorative symbol during temporary stop is displayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

FIG. 87 (z) following FIG. 87 (y) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe display is completed. The wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. When the wipe display w2b is deleted from the screen, the withdrawal of the second wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal of the second wipe display ends the second wipe effect display. The first wipe effect display is in the withdrawal display.

As shown in FIG. 87 (r), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the sub display device 1030 before the start of the second wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 87 (z), the second wipe effect display is displayed. After the end, the background image of the sea is displayed on the sub display device 1030. In this way, the background image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 changes before and after the second wipe effect display.

In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen and withdraws from the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears in the lower left corner of the display screen. Withdrawal is complete. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the second wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w2a starts appearing from the upper right corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b starts appearing from the lower left corner of the display screen and appears in the upper left corner of the display screen. The withdrawal may be completed.

FIG. 87 (a) following FIG. 87 (z) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 87 (p), the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the reduced display mode before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first After the wipe effect display is completed, the decorative symbol is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a display mode of a normal size. In this way, the display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the size of the decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

As shown in FIG. 87 (p), the background image of the mountain road is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the first wipe effect display, but as shown in FIG. 87 (a), the first wipe effect is displayed. After the display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes before and after the first wipe effect display.

In this embodiment, the appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display are the same. That is, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears in the lower right corner of the display screen. Withdrawal is complete. The appearance start position and the withdrawal completion position of the first wipe display may be different. For example, the wipe display w1a starts appearing from the upper left corner of the display screen and completes withdrawal from the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b starts appearing from the lower right corner of the display screen and appears in the upper right corner of the display screen. The withdrawal may be completed.

FIG. 87 (b), which continues from FIG. 87 (a), shows a fluctuation display in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" sways from side to side in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state in which is displayed.

FIG. 87 (c) following FIG. 87 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an effect display means capable of executing the effect display. The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means, and one of the plurality of image display means is the decorative pattern display device 208, which is one of the plurality of image display means. One image display means is a sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can perform the first wipe effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the super reach effect, and the shift in the super reach effect. It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display on the sub-display device 1030 after the display suggesting the above is performed. The scene change of the effect that the background image etc. changes by the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to refresh the mood of the player by making the scene change of the production gorgeous.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 87 (s) to 87 (t), a part of the second wipe effect display is performed in the sub display device 1030 that is performing the moving operation. The entire second wipe effect display may be performed while the sub display device 1030 is moving. The decorative symbol display device 208 can perform a moving operation, and at least a part of the first wipe effect display may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is performing the moving operation.

(Example 2)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 88, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 88A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 88 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 3, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 are displayed. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 88 (b) following FIG. 88 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 1 hold. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon movement animation in which the two hold icons move to the left is executed. Will be done.

FIG. 88 (c) following FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 88 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 88 (d) following FIG. 88 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. All hold icons are deleted as the background image changes. The timing at which the hold icon is erased may be at the same time as the change in the background image, before the change, or after the change.

FIG. 88 (e), which continues from FIG. 88 (d), shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

In this example, it is assumed that one game ball wins in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, the newly acquired start information is pre-read, and the special figure pre-reading process of pre-determining the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process is executed by the main control unit 300. After executing the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading result information command including the pre-determination result to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is not executed.

FIG. 88 (f), which continues from FIG. 88 (e), shows a state in which a display suggesting a detachment is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting deviation, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a In ~ 208c, a swaying fluctuation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed during the super reach effect. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 88, the patterns are shown by hatching that rises to the right.

FIG. 88 (h) following FIG. 88 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b.

The withdrawal display of the first wipe display now displays the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons corresponding to the hold with the lower hold order. The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the look-ahead notice mode. You may be able to wait.

FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is in progress. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At the time shown in FIG. 88 (j), a part of the left symbol, the middle symbol, the right symbol, and the whole of all the hold icons are displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c), the number of hold icons before erasure was two, but since the number of hold icons in special figure 1 increased by one while the hold icon was erased, FIG. As shown in 88 (j), the number of hold icons after redisplay is three. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 88 (k) following FIG. 88 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed.

FIG. 88 (l) following FIG. 88 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can draw a lottery as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice using the wipe effect display when the holding of the special figure increases before the wipe effect display is executed. In this example, since it is determined not to execute the look-ahead notice using the wipe effect display, the look-ahead notice is not executed.

(Example 3)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 89, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 89A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 1 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 89A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 3, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. On the decorative symbol display device 208, three hold icons indicating the number of holds of the special figure 1 are displayed. The display mode of the three hold icons is a black circle.

FIG. 89 (b) following FIG. 89 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started based on the reservation of the earliest special figure 1 being digested. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed, the leftmost hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, and the hold icon movement animation in which the two hold icons move to the left is executed. Will be done.

FIG. 89 (c) following FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 89 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 89 (d) following FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect. The background image changes from a sky background image including a sun image, a cloud image, and a balloon image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect or the normal reach effect, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect. All hold icons are deleted as the background image changes.

FIG. 89 (e) following FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

In this example, it is assumed that one game ball wins in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and displayed in the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the special figure 1 start information is acquired, the newly acquired start information is pre-read, and the special figure pre-reading process of pre-determining the stop symbol before the hit / miss determination process is executed by the main control unit 300. After executing the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 transmits a pre-reading result information command including the pre-determination result to the first sub-control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice based on the preliminary determination result. In this example, it is determined that the look-ahead notice is executed, and the look-ahead notice is executed by the first wipe effect display and the display of the hold icon.

FIG. 89 (f) following FIG. 89 (e) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started after the display suggesting the disconnection is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display. The wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the foreground on the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, or the like that has been displayed before the start of the first wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w1b are the same, and in FIG. 89, the patterns are plain black.

In this embodiment, the plain black wipe displays w1a and w1b are displayed in the first wipe effect display as a look-ahead notice. When the first wipe effect display is displayed as the look-ahead notice, the start timing of the first wipe effect display is the first wipe effect display when the first wipe effect display that is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is earlier than the start timing of. When the look-ahead notice is executed, the first wipe effect display is started immediately after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 89 (f), and the look-ahead notice is given. If not executed, a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 88 (f), and after a lapse of a predetermined period, the first wipe effect display is displayed as shown in FIG. 88 (g). It has been started.

The appearance positions of the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed are the wipe displays w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is different from the appearance position. In the case of the first wipe effect display, which is a pre-reading notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is in the upper right corner of the display screen, and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is in the lower left corner of the display screen, as shown in FIG. 89 (f). is there. On the other hand, in the case of the first wipe effect display which is not a look-ahead notice, the appearance position of the wipe display w1a is the upper left corner of the display screen and the appearance position of the wipe display w1b is the right side of the display screen as shown in FIG. 88 (g). The lower corner.

The speed of the appearance display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. It is faster than the appearance display speed of w1b.

In this way, when the first wipe effect display is executed as the look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display whose pattern, appearance position, and appearance display speed of the first wipe display are not the look-ahead notice is executed. It is different from the case where it is done. When the first wipe effect display is executed as a look-ahead notice, the first wipe effect display in which at least one of the pattern, the appearance position, or the speed of the appearance display of the first wipe display is not the look-ahead notice is executed. It suffices if it is different from the case where.

In this example, the look-ahead process is executed during the execution of the reach effect, and the look-ahead notice based on the result of the look-ahead process is executed during the execution of the reach effect. In this case, the mode of the wipe effect display as the look-ahead notice is different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice. In addition, when the pre-reading process before the start of the reach effect or the pre-reading notice based on the result of the pre-reading process prior to the special figure variable game in which the reach effect is executed is executed, or the hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode is displayed. In some cases, the mode of the wipe effect display may be different from the mode of the normal wipe effect display.

FIG. 89 (g) following FIG. 89 (f) shows a state in which the wipe displays w1a and w1b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 89 (h) following FIG. 89 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. The end of the wipe display w1a and the end of the wipe display w1b are in contact with each other, and the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w1a and w1b. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

FIG. 89 (i) following FIG. 89 (h) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. The wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The decorative symbol and the hold icon are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The speed of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w1a and w1b when the first wipe effect display which is the look-ahead notice is displayed is the wipe display w1a when the first wipe effect display which is not the look-ahead notice is displayed. The speed of the withdrawal display of w1b may be faster, the same, or slower.

The withdrawal display of the first wipe display now displays the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon with the last increased hold order after displaying at least some of the hold icons corresponding to the hold with the lower hold order. The player completes the withdrawal display of the wipe display while expecting whether the display mode of the hold icon newly displayed in response to the hold increased during the reach production is the look-ahead notice mode. You may be able to wait.

FIG. 89 (j) following FIG. 89 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. The wipe display w1a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the wipe display w1b is deleted from the display screen, the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed. The hold icon is also redisplayed, and the third hold icon from the left is displayed in a white square display mode. The hold icon is displayed in a look-ahead notice display mode.

FIG. 89 (k) following FIG. 89 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

As described above, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by the first wipe effect display. When the first wipe effect display is executed as a look-ahead notice, the jackpot may be won by all means until all the pending special figure variable games are digested.

The pachinko machine 100 may be able to execute the look-ahead notice by the second wipe effect display. Similar to the first wipe effect display, the second wipe effect display as a look-ahead notice is a second wipe in which at least one of the second wipe display pattern, appearance position, or appearance speed is not a look-ahead notice. It suffices if it is different from the case where the effect display is executed.

(Example 4)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. Each figure of FIG. 90 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 90A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 90A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 90, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. At the time shown in FIG. 90 (a), the number of remaining special figure variation games in the electric support state is nine. On the sub-display device 1030, a character string image of "9 times" indicating the number of remaining special figure fluctuation games in the electric support state is displayed.

FIG. 90 (b) following FIG. 90 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold. On the sub-display device 1030, a character string image of "8 times" indicating the number of remaining special figure fluctuation games in the electric support state is displayed.

FIG. 90 (c) following FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 90 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

In FIG. 90 (d), which continues from FIG. 90 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character change. It shows the state in which the effect of displaying the moving image of the confronting scene has been started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. An image of the main character (hereinafter referred to as "hero") is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an image of the enemy character (hereinafter referred to as "enemy") is displayed on the right side of the display screen. ) Is displayed, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed in the upper left of the display screen. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 90 (e) following FIG. 90 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

At the time shown in FIG. 90 (e), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 90 (d), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 90 (f) following FIG. 90 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 90 (g) following FIG. 90 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, the character color has changed to a black display mode.

FIG. 90 (h) following FIG. 90 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display are started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display starts from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. w2a starts to appear, and the wipe display w2b starts to appear from the lower left corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display, and the wipe display w2a The appearance and the appearance of the wipe display w2b are combined to start the appearance display of the second wipe display, and the appearance of the second wipe display is the start of the second wipe effect display.

The first wipe display appears so as to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. As shown in FIG. 90 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 90 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, a black character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 90 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be at the same time as, or it may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed overlapping with the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is given as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error and an abnormal winning. The error notification image for notifying the illegal winning and the error notification image for notifying the magnetic detection are also displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

FIG. 90 (i) following FIG. 90 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display and the appearance display of the second wipe display are completed. The completion of the appearance display of the first wipe display may be the same as the completion of the appearance display of the second wipe display, or the completion of any of the appearance displays may come first. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started, and when the appearance display of the second wipe display is completed, the standby display of the second wipe display is started. The design of the second wipe display is plain black. The first wipe display erases the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect, and displays all the displays displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the super reach effect. It will be erased.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 90 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero's face included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero's face that lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 90 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 90 (j) following FIG. 90 (i) shows a state in which the first wipe display and the withdrawal display of the second wipe display are started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. A decorative pattern or the like is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the sub-display device 1030, the wipe display w2a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w2b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be the same as the start of the withdrawal display of the second wipe display, or the start of either withdrawal display may come first.

FIG. 90 (k) following FIG. 90 (j) shows a state in which the first wipe display and the withdrawal display of the second wipe display are completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, sways in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. The variable display is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. In the sub-display device 1030, the wipe display w2a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w2b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen.

FIG. 90 (l) following FIG. 90 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a wipe effect when the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct or not is incorrect. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect suggesting the disconnection.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the display of a plurality of characters on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the super reach effect. Display of a plurality of characters One of the characters is a display of the main character, and one of the displays of the plurality of characters is a display of an enemy character. The display of the main character and the enemy character is erased when the first wipe effect display is displayed. In the super reach effect, the display of the main character or the enemy character may be displayed on the sub display device 1030, and the display of the main character or the enemy character is erased by displaying the second wipe effect display. You may.

(Example 5)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. Each figure of FIG. 91 shows the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the movable body 1002 extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 91A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 91 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 91, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. The remaining number of times of the special figure variation game executed in the electric support state may not be displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030, or may be displayed.

FIG. 91 (b) following FIG. 91 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the reservation of the earliest special figure 2 being digested.

FIG. 91 (c) following FIG. 91 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 91 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

In FIG. 91 (d), which continues from FIG. 91 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character change. It shows the state in which the effect of displaying the moving image of the confronting scene has been started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 91 (e) following FIG. 91 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 91 (f) following FIG. 91 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

FIG. 91 (g) following FIG. 91 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" sways up and down.

FIG. 91 (h) following FIG. 91 (g) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 91 (i) following FIG. 91 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not display the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit. Even when the result of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the first wipe effect display may be displayed and the second wipe effect display may not be displayed, or the first wipe effect display may not be displayed. The second wipe effect display may be displayed, or the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be displayed. In addition, after the first wipe effect display is performed, a display suggesting a big hit (for example, a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol of the big hit symbol mode) is performed, and then the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, or a big hit. The first wipe effect display is performed after the display suggesting is performed, and then the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, or the display suggesting the loss (for example, the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol of the missed symbol mode). ) Is performed, the first wipe effect display is performed, and then a display suggesting a big hit is performed, and then the big hit symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed.

(Example 6)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 92, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 92A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 92 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4.

FIG. 92 (b) following FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 92 (c) following FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 92 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 92 (d), which continues from FIG. 92 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. At the bottom of the display screen, a character string image of "Confrontation started!" Is displayed. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image of "Duel", and a part of the character string image is invisible. The character string image of "Confrontation start!" Is one of the message displays, and is a tutorial display for explaining the production and the like. In this embodiment, a tutorial display explaining the production contents of the super reach effect is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect.

FIG. 92 (e) following FIG. 92 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the lord wins, a big hit" is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, it is explained that the hero character who is the lord wins.

At the time shown in FIG. 92 (e), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 92 (e), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of “duel”. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 92 (f) following FIG. 92 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 92 (g) following FIG. 92 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image "If the palace stands up ..." is displayed, and it is explained that the revival effect is executed when the main character, which is the palace, stands up. In the lower plate full tank error notification image, the character color has changed to a black display mode.

FIG. 92 (h) following FIG. 92 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

The first wipe display appears so as to wipe off the display other than the error notification image. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed as the error notification image, and the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w1a. As shown in FIG. 92 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image before the start of the wipe effect. Is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 92 (h), after the start of the wipe effect, a black character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed. In this embodiment, the display mode of the error notification image is changed between the execution of the wipe effect display and the non-execution of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is immediately before the start of the wipe effect display as shown in FIG. 92 (g), but the change timing of the display mode of the error notification image is the start of the wipe effect display. It may be at the same time as, or it may be after the start of the wipe effect display.

The first wipe display also overlaps the tutorial display. In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the first wipe display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is displayed overlapping with the first wipe display. In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error notification image is given as an example of the error display, but the same applies to other error displays, for example, a door release error notification image for notifying a door release error and an abnormal winning. The error notification image for notifying the illegal winning and the error notification image for notifying the magnetic detection are also displayed overlapping with the first wipe display.

FIG. 92 (i) following FIG. 92 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started. By the first wipe display, the display other than the error notification image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect is erased.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 92 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 92 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 92 (j) following FIG. 92 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design and the tutorial display are gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In FIG. 92 (j), a character string image of "empty station" which is a part of the tutorial display is displayed.

FIG. 92 (k) following FIG. 92 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode that sways from side to side. Is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in a display mode in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of a character string image of "the empty stage may be latent" is displayed. The super reach effect is finished at the time shown in FIG. 92 (i), and after the end of the super reach effect, for example, a tutorial display explaining the stage effect is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

FIG. 92 (l) following FIG. 92 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing. A lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and a tutorial display of a character string image of "possibility. The sea stage is ..." is displayed in the lower part of the display screen. Is displayed. The tutorial display is displayed in a scroll display mode in which the character image moves to the left.

In this embodiment, the tutorial display, which is one of the message displays, is deleted by the wipe effect display, and the error display, which is one of the message displays, is not deleted by the wipe effect display and continues even during the display of the wipe effect display. Is displayed. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display is not displayed after the end of the wipe effect display, and the tutorial display that was not displayed before the start of the wipe effect display (for example, explaining the stage) Tutorial display) is displayed in the scroll display mode after the wipe effect display ends. The tutorial display of the super reach effect that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may also be displayed in the scroll display mode. The tutorial display that was displayed before the start of the wipe effect display may be displayed after the end of the wipe effect display. At least one of the error display and the tutorial display may be displayed on the sub display device 1030.

(Example 7)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 93, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 93, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 93 (b) following FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 93 (c) following FIG. 93 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 93 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 93 (d), which continues from FIG. 93 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 93 (e) following FIG. 93 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 93 (f) following FIG. 93 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 93 (g) following FIG. 93 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 93 (h) following FIG. 93 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 93 (i) following FIG. 93 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 93 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 93 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 93 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 93 (j) following FIG. 93 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 93 (k) following FIG. 93 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is displayed. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 93 (l) following FIG. 93 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, and after the end of the wipe effect display, the pattern mode suggests a big hit. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is displayed. Even when the jackpot is won, the wipe effect display is executed after the symbol mode suggesting the loss is displayed, and the wipe effect is provided by providing the effect pattern in which the symbol mode suggesting the jackpot is displayed after the wipe effect display. In some cases, it can contribute to helping the player forget the effect that suggests the disengagement before the display is executed.

(Example 8)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 94, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 94 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 94, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 94 (b) following FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 94 (c) following FIG. 94 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 94 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 94 (d), which continues from FIG. 94 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 94 (e) following FIG. 94 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 94 (f) following FIG. 94 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

At the time shown in FIG. 94 (f), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 94 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of "duel". The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 94 (g) following FIG. 94 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 94 (h) following FIG. 94 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 94 (i) following FIG. 94 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 94 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 94 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 94 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 94 (j) following FIG. 94 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 94 (k) following FIG. 94 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and fluctuated in a display mode in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c sway. Is displayed.

FIG. 94 (l) following FIG. 94 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is restarted. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 94 (m) following FIG. 94 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 94 (m), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

FIG. 94 (n) following FIG. 94 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 94 (o), which continues from FIG. 94 (n), shows a state in which the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy has started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 94 (p) following FIG. 94 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 94 (q) following FIG. 94 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 94 (r) following FIG. 94 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game. In this embodiment, the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the second first wipe effect display are the same as the patterns of the wipe displays w1a and w2a in the first first wipe effect display, but they are different. Good. The second wipe effect display may be executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game.

The first wipe effect display may be displayed before and after the background image changes as shown in FIGS. 94 (c) to 94 (d). At this time, the wipe display for changing the scene may be displayed. The wipe display for the scene change may cover the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may cover only a part of the display screen. In FIGS. 94 (l) to 94 (n), a wipe display for changing a scene may be displayed. The same applies to the second wipe effect display.

(Example 9)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 95, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 95 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in Special FIG. In each figure of FIG. 95, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 95 (b) following FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 95 (c) following FIG. 95 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 95 (c). The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 95 (d), which continues from FIG. 95 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 95 (f) following FIG. 95 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 95 (g) following FIG. 95 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 95 (h) following FIG. 95 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 95 (i) following FIG. 95 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 95 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern is a pattern that includes an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 95 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 95 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 95 (i') following FIG. 95 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 95 (i'), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. At the time shown in FIG. 95 (i'), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be at the same time, or either one may be earlier.

In FIG. 95 (i'), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. There is. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode or in a mode different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

In FIG. 95 (j) following FIG. 95 (i'), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. A chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 95 (j). The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

FIG. 95 (k) following FIG. 95 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Has been done. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

As shown in FIGS. 95 (h) and 95 (i), when the effect image was wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display was given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 was operated. In response to this, the wipe effect display is terminated, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the shaking fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode (“decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”) is a display that makes the player expect a jackpot. The display expected by the player may be a jackpot notice display or the like. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is preferentially displayed over the wipe effect display is finaler than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not preferentially performed over the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be configured to confirm the jackpot, or may be more than the wipe effect display. May be configured so that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is performed may be preferentially removed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 95 (l) following FIG. 95 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a pattern mode suggesting deviation, is displayed before the start of the wipe effect display, a button operation waiting display is displayed during the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136. The wipe effect display is terminated according to the operation of. After the end of the wipe effect display, "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", which is a design mode suggesting a big hit, is displayed. Even when a big hit is won, a wipe effect display or a button operation waiting display is executed after a symbol mode suggesting a big hit is displayed, and an effect pattern is provided in which a symbol mode suggesting a big hit is displayed after the wipe effect display. As a result, it may be possible to contribute to helping the player forget the effect suggesting the deviation before the wipe effect display is executed.

(Example 10)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 96, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 96A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 96, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the digestion of the earliest special figure 2 hold.

FIG. 96 (c) following FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 96 (c). The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 96 (d), which continues from FIG. 96 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 96 (e) following FIG. 96 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 96 (f) following FIG. 96 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

At the time shown in FIG. 96 (f), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in white in a black horizontally long rectangular image. There is. The lower plate full tank error notification image is one of the message displays, and is displayed overlapping with the effect display. In FIG. 96 (f), the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping the character string image of "duel". The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including the lower plate full tank error information from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 96 (g) following FIG. 96 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 96 (h) following FIG. 96 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 96 (i) following FIG. 96 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 96 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 96 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 96 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to helping the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 96 (j) following FIG. 96 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

FIG. 96 (k) following FIG. 96 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode that sways from side to side. Is displayed.

FIG. 96 (l) following FIG. 96 (k) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is restarted. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 96 (m) following FIG. 96 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 96 (m), the lower plate 128 is full with the prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 96 (m') following FIG. 96 (m) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the standby display of the first wipe display. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 96 (m'), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (m'), the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. The start timing of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 and the display start timing of the button operation waiting display 1 may be at the same time, or either one may be earlier.

In FIG. 96 (m'), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. There is. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 96 (m'), a chance button 136 and an opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. The plurality of lines shown above the chance button 136 are states in which the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state). Represents. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode or in a mode different from the normal state, the player knows that the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has started. May be possible. The chance button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed in a mode of movement (for example, a movement that repeats the movement display in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction) during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the operation of the chance button 136 is performed. It may be stopped and displayed outside the valid period.

In FIG. 96 (n) following from FIG. 96 (m'), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136. It shows the state. Below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 96 (n), the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown. The button operation waiting display 1 is deleted based on the fact that the chance button 136 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

In this example, when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the button response display 1 (display performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal display is displayed. If the chance button 136 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the chance button 136 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the chance button 136 is not operated during the operation valid period of the chance button 136, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

As shown in FIGS. 96 (l) to 96 (m'), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display is given priority over the wipe effect display, and the chance button 136 is operated. In response to this, the wipe effect display is terminated, and a display that makes the player expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is preferentially displayed over the wipe effect display is finaler than the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not preferentially performed over the wipe effect display. The jackpot symbol may be configured so as to be easily confirmed, or the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is prioritized over the wipe effect display may be configured to confirm the jackpot, or may be more than the wipe effect display. May be configured so that the symbol variation display on which the button operation waiting display is performed may be preferentially removed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display is not performed preferentially over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 96 (o) following FIG. 96 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 96 (o), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 96 (p) following FIG. 96 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 96 (q) following FIG. 96 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 96 (r) following FIG. 96 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the first wipe effect display is executed twice during the execution of one special figure variation game, and the button operation waiting display is displayed in the second wipe effect display. The button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first wipe effect display, or the button operation waiting display may be displayed in the first and second wipe effect displays. The effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display.

(Example 11)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 shows an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 97, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 97A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 97A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is, for example, 4. In each of the drawings of FIG. 97, the holding icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 97 (b) following FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 97 (c) following FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 97 (c). In this embodiment, the symbol variation display with the super reach effect is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed than the symbol variation display with the normal reach effect.

FIG. 97 (d), which continues from FIG. 97 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 97 (e) following FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 97 (f) following FIG. 97 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 97 (g) following FIG. 97 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 97 (h) following FIG. 97 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 97 (i) following FIG. 97 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 97 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 97 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

At the time shown in FIG. 97 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes the opportunity button 139, and can execute the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58. For example, the pachinko machine 100 can perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the decorative symbol display device 208 during the first wipe effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be able to perform the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 by using the sub display device 1030 during the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 97 (i') following FIG. 97 (i) shows a state in which the button operation waiting display 3 (display performed when waiting for the operation of the chance button 136) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 are schematically shown below the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIGS. 97 (i') to 97 (j). In the button operation waiting display 3 of this example, three inverted triangles overlap with the chance button light emitting image, which is displayed in the substantially central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and which imitates the mode in which the chance button 136 emits light. The button press instruction image of the above aspect corresponds. The button operation waiting display 3 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In FIG. 97 (i'), the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) in relation to the display of the button operation waiting display 3. It represents the state of being. When the chance button lamp 138 built in the chance button 136 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state), the player indicates that the operation validity period of the chance button 136 has been started. You may be able to know.

FIG. 97 (i "), which continues from FIG. 97 (i'), shows a button response in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 while the button operation waiting display 3 shown in FIG. 97 (i') is being displayed. The early stage of display 4 (display performed in response to pressing the chance button 136) is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button response display 4 of this example is "more chance! The character string image of "" corresponds. The button response display 4 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. In this example, the player presses the chance button 136 immediately after the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started.

FIG. 97 (i'”) following FIG. 97 (i") shows a state in which the middle part of the button response display 4 is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the button response display 4 of this example, after displaying the character string image of "more chance !!", the opportunity button image imitating the opportunity button 139 is framed in from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Indicates the state displayed in.

FIG. 97 (i "") following FIG. 97 (i "") shows a state in which the final stage of the button response display 4 is displayed. In FIG. 97 (i ""), the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Opportunity button image displayed to frame in from the right end of the area is stopped at the center of the display area, the image of "Further chance !!" is erased, and the button press instruction in the form of three inverted triangles overlapping The state in which the image is displayed is shown. The opportunity button image is stopped and displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the button pressing instruction image is displayed to notify that the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 is started. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w1a and w1b. The stop display of the opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed when waiting for the opportunity button 139 to be pressed. In FIG. 97 (i ""), the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emits light in a predetermined mode (or emits light in a mode different from the normal state) during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It represents the state of being. The player can know that the opportunity button 139 is operated by the opportunity button lamp 141 built in the opportunity button 139 emitting light in a predetermined mode (or emitting light in a mode different from the normal state). In some cases. The opportunity button image and the button press instruction image are displayed in motion during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139 (for example, a movement that repeats the vertical and horizontal movement display), and the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It may be displayed as a stop outside.

In FIG. 97 (j) following FIG. 97 (i ""), the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started in response to the opportunity button 139 being pressed by the player during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139. It shows the state that was done. The opportunity button image and the button pressing instruction image are deleted based on the fact that the opportunity button 139 is pressed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. In the middle symbol display area 208d, the variable display in which the decorative symbol is switched is restarted. At this point, the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game balls stored in the lower plate 128, so that the lower plate full tank error is resolved and the lower plate full tank error notification image is erased.

In this example, when the player presses the opportunity button 139 during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the button response display 5 (display performed in response to the pressing of the opportunity button 139) is displayed as the first wipe display. The withdrawal display is displayed. If the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the valid period of the operation of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may not be displayed, or the opportunity button 139 may be configured. The withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed even if the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of. For example, if the opportunity button 139 is not operated during the operation valid period of the opportunity button 139, the withdrawal display of the first wipe display may be displayed after the operation valid period ends.

As shown in FIGS. 97 (h) to 97 (i "")), when the effect image is wiped off by the wipe effect display, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are given priority over the wipe effect display, and a chance is obtained. The wipe effect display is terminated in response to the operation of the button 136, and a display that causes the player to expect a big hit is displayed. In this example, the reach effect display, which is a big hit notice display, is a display that makes the player expect a big hit. As in this example, the symbol variation display in which the button operation wait display and the button response display are prioritized over the wipe effect display is the symbol variation display in which the button operation wait display is not prioritized over the wipe effect display. Rather, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed, and the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is prioritized over the wipe effect display is regarded as the jackpot confirmation. Alternatively, the symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is performed may be preferentially deviated from the wipe effect display. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display is not performed with priority over the wipe effect display may be determined to be lost. The wipe effect display performed together with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be the first wipe effect display or the second wipe effect display.

FIG. 97 (k) following FIG. 97 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is shrunk toward the upper left corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w1b is shrunk toward the lower right corner of the display screen and erased from the display screen. When the withdrawal of the first wipe display is completed, the first wipe effect display ends.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (k), after the end of the first wipe effect display, the display of the moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy is started. A character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 97 (l) following FIG. 97 (k) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character defeats an enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a display mode in which it swings up and down. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed.

FIG. 97 (m) following FIG. 97 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect is completed. With the end of the super reach effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208d become the normal size in the center of the display screen, and the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display is displayed with.

FIG. 97 (n) following FIG. 97 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit. ing.

In this embodiment, the effect of the effect pattern 3 shown in FIG. 71 may be executed while the wipe effect display is being executed. Of course, the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 may be executed during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the wipe effect display, the effects related to the chance button 136 and the opportunity button 139 shown in FIGS. 58 to 86 may be executed. At this time, the button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The button operation waiting display and the button response display are displayed by overlapping with the first wipe display and the second wipe display. The symbol variation display on which the effect display is executed overlaps with the button operation waiting display and the button response display. The first wipe display and the second wipe display may be displayed so that the jackpot symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the effect display is executed. The symbol variation display in which the button operation waiting display or the button response display overlaps with the wipe display or the second wipe display may be confirmed as a big hit. Even if it is configured so that the symbol variation display in which the effect display is performed so that the first wipe display and the second wipe display can be displayed by overlapping with the button operation waiting display and the button response display may be disengaged. It may be good, or it may be confirmed that it is out of alignment. It should be noted that the wipe effect display and the effects of the effect patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIG. 58 can be executed even in the electric support state and the non-electric support state.

(Example 12)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 shows a time-series example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment. In each figure of FIG. 98, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 is extracted from the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment shown in FIG. 29, and the movable body 1002 is not shown.

FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order. ing. In the state shown in FIG. 98 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is, for example, 4. In each figure of FIG. 98, the illustration of the hold icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted.

FIG. 98 (b) following FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is started based on the fact that the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested.

FIG. 98 (c) following FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. The super reach effect is started after FIG. 98 (c). It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect is performed.

FIG. 98 (d), which continues from FIG. 98 (c), shows a moving image of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect, and the main character and the enemy character confront each other. It shows the state where the effect of displaying the image has started. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit, a moving image of the scene in which the main character wins the enemy character in the effect is displayed. The main character is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, the enemy is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and the character string image of "duel" is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen. There is. "Decoration 2" as a left pattern is displayed on the front side of the character string image, and a part of the character string image is invisible.

FIG. 98 (e) following FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. As a result, the entire character string image of "duel" displayed in the upper left of the display screen becomes visible. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect is being executed, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a reduced display mode.

FIG. 98 (f) following FIG. 98 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect. In this example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character loses to the enemy is displayed as a display suggesting a loss. At the bottom of the display screen, a tutorial display of the character string image "Sorry! Swordsman wins!" Is displayed, explaining that the enemy character who is the swordsman has won. The tutorial display is also a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 98 (g), which continues from FIG. 98 (f), shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the swaying variation display is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down.

FIG. 98 (h) following FIG. 98 (g) shows a state in which the first wipe effect display is started. The wipe display w1a starts to appear from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w1b starts to appear from the lower right corner of the display screen. The appearance of the wipe display w1a and the appearance of the wipe display w1b are combined to start the appearance display of the first wipe display, and the appearance of the first wipe display is the start of the first wipe effect display.

FIG. 98 (i) following FIG. 98 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed. When the appearance display of the first wipe display is completed, the standby display of the first wipe display is started.

At the time shown in FIG. 98 (i), the lower plate 128 is full with a prize ball, and a lower plate full tank error occurs. In the upper left of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, a lower plate full tank error notification image in which a character string image "Pull out the ball" is displayed in black character color is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the wipe image w1a.

The first wipe display pattern displayed in the special figure variable game in which the confrontation effect between the hero and the enemy is executed is a pattern including an image of the hero's face. As shown in FIG. 98 (i), the design of the wipe display w1a is a design including two images of the face of the main character, and the design of the wipe display w1b is a design including four images of the face of the main character. The display mode of the hero included in the wipe displays w1a and w1b is different from the display mode of the hero who lost the duel with the enemy shown in FIG. 98 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to contribute to making the player forget the effect of losing the duel.

FIG. 98 (j) following FIG. 98 (i) shows a state in which the simultaneous island production has started. In the island simultaneous production, the pachinko machine 100 of the same model executes the same production at the same timing. At the start of the simultaneous island production, the character string image of "Start simultaneous island production!" Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the island simultaneous production of this example, the production in which the character image of the princess is displayed is executed. When the island simultaneous production is started, the wipe displays w1a and w1b are reduced and displayed in the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed overlapping with the character image of the princess displayed in the island simultaneous production, and is displayed with priority over the image displayed in the island simultaneous production. ..

FIG. 98 (k) following FIG. 98 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is started during the execution of the island simultaneous production. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w1a is displayed so as to shrink toward the upper left, and the wipe display w1b is displayed so as to shrink toward the lower right. The decorative design is gradually redisplayed between the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b. During the execution of the island simultaneous production, the character string image of "island simultaneous production in progress" is displayed. The lower plate full tank error notification image is continuously displayed.

FIG. 98 (l) following FIG. 98 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the first wipe display is completed. "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is incorrect. ing.

In this embodiment, the island simultaneous production is started during the execution of the wipe effect display. During the execution of the island simultaneous effect, the effect display displayed before the start of the island simultaneous effect such as the wipe effect display, the reach effect display, and the decorative symbol display is reduced to the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. The error display such as the lower plate full tank error notification image is displayed while maintaining the display position, display size, and display mode from before the start of the simultaneous island production even during the execution of the simultaneous island production.

The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment can perform simultaneous island production. The pachinko machine 100 includes light emitting means (for example, various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4, game board lamp 532, game underframe lamp 542), a transmission region (for example, a transparent plate member 118), and display means (for example, for example. It is equipped with a decorative symbol display device 208) and is configured to be able to accept a brightness setting operation (hereinafter referred to as "first brightness setting operation") by a player, when the first effect is being performed. In addition, the brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation (for example, the "medium (duty ratio 70%)" brightness set by the player's brightness setting operation. The brightness is set by the player's brightness setting operation. If this is not the case, the light emitting means can emit light at the "brightness (duty ratio 100%)" brightness initially set in the game console, and when the second effect is performed, the first The light emitting means emits light at a brightness not corresponding to one brightness setting operation (for example, the brightness of "bright (duty ratio 100%)" initially set in the game console), and the first effect is the island simultaneous. It is not an effect but a reach effect, the second effect is the island simultaneous effect, and the light emitting means is a means provided above the transmission region, and the above-mentioned means. The game console can independently perform the island simultaneous effect, and even if the second effect is performed, the display means displays the brightness of the light emitting means (hereinafter, referred to as "brightness setting display"). ) Can be displayed, and the brightness setting display is a display indicating the brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation, and even if the second effect is performed, the first brightness setting operation is performed. The brightness setting display corresponding to the above is displayed. When the second effect is not performed, the light emitting means can emit light with a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The above-mentioned "brightness not corresponding to the first brightness setting operation" is the maximum value of the brightness that can be set by the first brightness setting operation, and the above-mentioned "first brightness" described above. The "luminance not responding to the setting operation" is the initially set brightness. When the second effect is completed, the light emitting means may be capable of emitting light with a brightness corresponding to the first brightness setting operation. The reach effect is an effect that may be executed when the island simultaneous effect is not being executed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the effect can be sharpened between the execution of the simultaneous island production and the non-execution of the simultaneous island production.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the fourth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 87 to 98.

(J1)
Effect display means capable of executing effect display (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, sub display device 1030)
It is a game table equipped with
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a symbol variation display (for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol).
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects (for example, normal reach effects and super reach effects).
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means.
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208).
One of the plurality of image display means is an image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030).
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is the first reach effect (for example, a normal reach effect).
One of the plurality of types of reach effects is a second reach effect (for example, a super reach effect).
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the first reach effect is performed.
In the second reach effect, after the display suggesting a deviation is performed, the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) can be performed in the first image display means. Yes,
In the second reach effect, after the display suggesting the deviation is performed, the second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) can be performed in the second image display means. is there,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display may be able to renew the mood of the player who is not in the symbol variation display.

(J2)
The game console described in (J1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(J3)
The game console according to (J1) or (J2) above.
At least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is configured to give a look-ahead notice (see, for example, FIG. 89).
A game table characterized by that.

(J4)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J3) above.
The image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) constituting the first image display means and the image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) constituting the second image display means are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(J5)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J4) above.
In the second reach effect, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is erased. It is configured to be redisplayed when the display ends.
The one symbol is configured to change from a first display mode (for example, a reduced display mode) to a second display mode (for example, a normal display mode).
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed.
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(J6)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J5) above.
In the second reach effect, the display of a plurality of characters can be executed.
Display of a plurality of characters One character is a display of the first character (for example, a display of a character of Yoshimune).
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. ..

(J7)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J6) above.
The background display (see, for example, FIG. 87) changes before and after the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(J8)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J7) above.
A ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls is provided.
The first image display means can display a display notifying that the game ball is pulled out from the ball storage means (for example, a lower plate full tank error notification image) (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display").
The ball removal display is a display that overlaps with the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(J9)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J8) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (q) to (v)).
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (w) to 87 (a)).
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (s) to (u)).
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (x) to (z)).
A game table characterized by that.

(J10)
The game console described in (J9) above.
The first wipe display pattern (for example, the wipe display w1a, w1b picture shown in FIG. 90) and the second wipe display picture (for example, the wipe display w2a, w2b picture shown in FIG. 90) are different.
A game table characterized by that.

(J11)
The game console according to (J9) or (J10) above.
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (q) and 87 (s)).
A game table characterized by that.

(J12)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J11) above.
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the second image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (s) and 87 (t)).
A game table characterized by that.

(J13)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J12) above.
The first image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.

(J14)
The game console according to any one of (J1) to (J13) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.
(J15)
A ball storage means capable of storing game balls (for example, lower plate 128) and
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a display (for example, a lower plate full tank error notification image) (hereinafter, referred to as "ball discharge display") for prompting the discharge of game balls from the ball storage means. Yes,
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, display of normal reach effect, display of super reach effect, effect display of the notice, effect display of look-ahead notice).
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a display of a super reach effect).
The display of the second reach effect (for example, the display of the super reach effect in the case of deviation shown in FIGS. 87 (l) to (z), 90 (d) to (j), and 92 (d) to (j). ) Indicates a deviation (for example, a character string image of "sorry" shown in FIGS. 87 (o) to (q), and a moving image of a scene in which the main character shown in FIGS. 90 (f) and 92 (f) loses to the enemy. After the image) is displayed, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means (for example, FIGS. 87 (q) to (z), FIG. 90 (h). )-(J), FIGS. 92 (h)-(j)),
The first wipe effect display displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display (for example, FIGS. 90 (h) to 90 (j)). , See FIGS. 92 (h)-(j)),
A game table characterized by that.
(J16)
The game console described in (J15) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display (for example, the display of the normal reach effect).
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display (for example, a variation display of a decorative symbol).
The symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display (for example, display of the super reach effect) is performed rather than the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display (for example, display of the normal reach effect) is performed. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(J17)
The game console according to (J15) or (J16) above.
After the first wipe effect display is displayed, the out-of-design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" shown in FIGS. 87 (c), 90 (l) and 92 (l)) Is configured to be confirmed and displayed,
The display suggesting a big hit in the second reach effect display (for example, the display of the super reach effect in the case of a big hit shown in FIGS. 91 (d) to (g)) (for example, the main character shown in FIG. 91 (f) is an enemy. After the moving image of the scene that wins the game is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" shown in FIG. 91 (i)) is confirmed and displayed. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(J18)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J17) above.
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the ball discharge display are displayed, the ball discharge display is visible to the player (FIGS. 90 (h) to (j), FIG. 92 (h)). ~ (J)),
A game table characterized by that.
(J19)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J18) above.
The first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b) is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(J20)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J19) above.
The first wipe effect display is a display configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b).
The first wipe effect display is a display configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display (for example, wipe display w1a, wipe display w1b).
A game table characterized by that.
(J21)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J20) above.
The background display is configured to change before and after the first wipe effect display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (p), (a), 90 (g), (k)).
A game table characterized by that.
(J22)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J21) above.
The first image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
The first image display means in which the movement operation is performed is configured to display at least a part of the first wipe effect display (see, for example, paragraph "1201").
A game table characterized by that.
(J23)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J22) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
In the second reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation (for example, the lower half of the sentence image of "mind" shown in FIG. 87 (o)) is displayed, the second in the second image display means. A game table characterized in that the wipe effect display of is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (s) to (y)).
(J24)
The game console described in (J23) above.
The display mode of the second wipe effect display (for example, the design of the wipe display w2a and the wipe display w2b) is different from the display mode of the first wipe effect display (for example, the design of the wipe display w1a and the wipe display w1b). Different display modes,
A game table characterized by that.
(J25)
The game console according to (J23) or (J24) above.
The second wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b) is configured to wipe out the image in the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(J26)
The game console according to any one of (J23) to (J25) above.
The second wipe effect display is a display including an appearance display of the second wipe display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b).
The second wipe effect display is a display configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display (for example, wipe display w2a, wipe display w2b).
A game table characterized by that.
(J27)
The game console according to any one of (J23) to (J26) above.
The second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the second image display means in which the movement operation is performed, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 87 (s)).
A game table characterized by that.
(J28)
The game console according to any one of (J23) to (J27) above.
The image display means constituting the first image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) and the image display means constituting the second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030) are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(J29)
The game console according to any one of (J23) to (J28) above.
Equipped with an effect display means that can display the effect display
The second reach effect display is configured to be displayed by the effect display means.
The effect display means is a means capable of displaying a symbol variation display.
The effect display means is a means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208).
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the second image display means (for example, the sub display device 1030).
A game table characterized by that.
(J30)
The game console according to any one of (J15) to (J29) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 to 148. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

(Example 1)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. 99 (a) to (z) and (a) to (c) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 99 (a) shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, and from FIG. 1010, the movable body 1002, and the sub display device 1030 are extracted and shown.

FIG. 99A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 99A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the drawings of FIG. 99, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background image of the sky including an image of the sun, clouds, and an image of a balloon, and the sub display device 1030 displays a background of the sea including an image of a yacht and an image of clouds. The image is displayed.

FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol displayed in the left symbol display area 208a is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and when the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches reach, the normal reach effect display and the super reach effect display are started. In this example, in FIG. 99 (d), the normal reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 99 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 is moved from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range during the normal reach effect display. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the central portion of the display screen (display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and a part of the image becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 99 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 99 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode in which it sways left and right. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed. The normal reach effect display ends when the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

FIG. 99 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the result of the judgment result of whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 99 (i) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 99 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 99 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. When the variable display of the decorative pattern reaches reach, the normal reach effect display and the super reach effect display are started. In this example, in FIG. 99 (k), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 99 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image has changed from a sky background image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, the background image of the sky is displayed during the execution of the normal effect display other than the super reach effect display, the normal reach effect display is being executed, and the background image of the mountain road is displayed during the execution of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 99 (m) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image displayed on the sub-display device 1030 has changed from the background image of the sea to a part of the background image of the mountain road displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Of the background images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, an image corresponding to a portion hidden by the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030 as a background image.

FIG. 99 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved upward to the right from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1002 is the position where the movable body 1002 is located in the state shown in FIGS. 99 (a) to 99 (m). The movable body 1002 is two-dimensionally arranged in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a display screen front plane) in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by a drive system (not shown). Can be moved. Further, the hidden portion of the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030. Further, as shown in FIG. 99 (n), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. During a part of the period during which the super reach effect display is being executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced.

FIG. 99 (o) shows a state in which a character string image of "sorry" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as a display suggesting deviation. The sub-display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping a part of the character image of "mind" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 (in this example, the lower part of "now" and the whole "heart"). , The sub-display device 1030 displays the part of the character image of "just in case".

FIG. 99 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in a swaying fluctuation display (temporary stop display) in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 99 (q) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" suggesting a deviation in the super reach effect display is displayed. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c is started, the background image is empty when the wipe-out display is withdrawn (wipeout). The super reach effect display ends by switching to the normal effect display which is an image. The wipe effect display is an effect display in which an image such as an effect display is wiped off by a wipe display from the edge of the display screen of the display device. As shown in FIG. 99 (q), the appearance display of the wipe display w3a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w3b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. The start of the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w3a and w3b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w3a and w3b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like. The wipe display w3a is a display of a pattern including a plurality of images (three in this example) of the face of the character tactor. The wipe display w3b has a plurality of images of the character's princess face (three in this example) and a plurality of star-shaped effect images arranged in the vicinity of the image of the princess' face (three in this example). ) And is displayed. The image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a is rotated 45 ° counterclockwise from the correct orientation (hereinafter, may be referred to as "forward orientation"), and then 45 ° clockwise. It is displayed as an animation that repeats the operation of rotating and returning to the positive orientation. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (q), the image of the face of the palace is displayed in a mode rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the forward orientation. Further, the star-shaped effect image included in the wipe display w3b is displayed in a blinking display mode in which erasing and display are alternately repeated.

FIG. 99 (r) shows a state in which the wipe displays w3a and w3b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w3a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w3b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. .. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (r), the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a forward orientation. Further, when the wipe effect display is started, the movable body 1002 including the sub display device 1030 starts moving toward the initial position. The sub-display device 1030 is located at a position overlapping the lower right portion of the "remaining" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the lower left portion of the "remaining", and the sub-display device 1030 has the right side of the "remaining". The lower part and the lower left part of the "mind" are displayed. The timing at which the movable body 1002 starts moving to the initial position may be before the start of the wipe effect display, at the same time as the start of the wipe effect display, or after the start of the wipe effect display. It may be.

FIG. 99 (s) shows a state in which the wipe displays w3a and w3b gradually expand toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a mode in which it is rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the forward orientation. The movable body 1002 is stopped at the initial position. The sub-display device 1030 is located at a position where it overlaps the right lower end of the "remaining" and the left lower end of the "remaining", and the sub-display device 1030 has the right lower end of the "remaining" and the "remaining". The lower left corner is displayed.

FIG. 99 (t) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the sub display device 1030. In this embodiment, when the wipe display w3b reaches behind the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, the wipe display w4b is started to be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w4b is displayed so as to gradually expand from the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the upper left corner of the display screen. The wipe display w4b has the same pattern as the wipe display w3b, and is a display corresponding to a portion of the wipe display w3b displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is hidden by the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w3b and the wipe display w4b form a wipe display that gradually expands from the lower right to the upper left when viewed from the player. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (t), the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a is displayed in a positive orientation.

In FIG. 99 (u), the wipe displays w3a and w3b gradually expand toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w4b gradually expands toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of spreading to. Like the wipe display w3b, the wipe display w4b includes an image of a princess's face and a star-shaped effect image. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (u), the wipe display w4b including substantially the entire image of the face of one princess and one star-shaped effect image is displayed on the sub-display device 1030.

FIG. 99 (v) shows a state in which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w3a and w3b, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w4a and w4b. The maximum wipe state is a state in which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 are covered with the wipe display. The wipe display w4a is displayed on the sub-display device 1030 prior to the start of the maximum wipe state. The wipe display w4a is started to be displayed on the sub display device 1030 when the wipe display w3a reaches behind the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w4a is displayed so as to gradually expand from the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the center of the display screen. The wipe display w4a has the same pattern as the wipe display w3a, and is a display corresponding to a portion of the wipe display w3a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 that is hidden by the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w3a and the wipe display w4a constitute a wipe display that gradually spreads from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the player. In the maximum wipe state, the lower right end of the wipe display w3a and the upper left end of the wipe display w3b are in contact with each other, and the lower right end of the wipe display w4a and the upper left end of the wipe display w4b are in contact with each other. In this example, the timing when the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w3a and w3b and the timing when the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered by the wipe displays w4a and w4b are configured to be simultaneous. Has been done. The timing at which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w3a and w3b and the timing at which the entire display screen of the sub-display device 1030 is covered with the wipe displays w4a and w4b are configured to be substantially simultaneous. It may be done, or either one may come first. Further, in this example, in a state where the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w3a and w3b, the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a is counterclockwise from the forward direction. It is displayed as an animation that repeats the operation of rotating 45 ° and then rotating 45 ° clockwise to return to the positive orientation. The image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w3a in the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (v) is displayed in a forward orientation. In the maximum wipe state, the image of the princess's face and the star-shaped effect image included in the wipe displays w3b and w4b may be displayed by animation. An animation may be displayed on the wipe display while one or both of the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered with the wipe display.

FIG. 99 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal (wipeout) display of the wipe display is started. The wipe display w3a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner of gradually reducing toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w3b is displayed withdrawal in a manner of gradually reducing toward the lower right corner of the display screen. To. The wipe display w4a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner of gradually reducing toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the wipe display w4b is displayed withdrawal in a manner of gradually reducing toward the lower right corner of the display screen. .. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed when the wipe display is completely erased. Further, by starting the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w3a and w3b, the display of the decorative symbol and the background image on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible, and the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w4a and w4b is started. The display of the background image or the like on the sub display device 1030 becomes gradually visible. Further, when the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w3a, w3b, w4a, and w4b is started, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the left middle right of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an outlier symbol mode, is started. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 99 (w), the wipe display w4a is completely erased from the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w4a is completed.

FIGS. 99 (x) and 99 (y) show a state in which the withdrawal indications of the wipe indications w3a, w3b, and w4b are displayed. At the time point shown in FIG. 99 (y), the wipe display w4b is completely erased from the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w4b is completed. As a result, the wipe withdrawal display on the sub display device 1030 is completed.

As shown in FIGS. 99 (w) to 99 (y), an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 1030 during the withdrawal display of the wipe display. The hidden portion of the empty background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 99 (z) shows a state in which almost the entire decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes visible as the withdrawal indication of the wipe displays w3a and w3b has progressed. As shown in FIGS. 99 (n) to 99 (t), the decorative symbols reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the wipe effect display and during the appearance display of the wipe display are As shown in FIGS. 99 (w) to 99 (z), during the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the same size as before the start of the reach effect display is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have the out-of-order symbol mode “decoration 2-decoration 3”. -Decoration 2 "is displayed as swaying fluctuation (temporary stop display) in a display mode in which it sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 99 (a), which shows the state continuing from FIG. 99 (z), shows the state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. The background image in the sub display device 1030 is changed to a background image of the sea for normal effect after the wipe effect display is completed.

FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swaying and fluctuating in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" sways in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is.

FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, a pair of wipe displays are configured by the wipe displays w3a and w4a and the wipe displays w3b and w4b, and the decorative symbol display device is formed by the pair of wipe displays of the wipe displays w3a and w4a and the wipe displays w3b and w4b. The display screens of 208 and the sub-display device 1030 are covered and the wipe effect display is executed. The patterns of the wipe displays w3a and w4a are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w3b and w4b.

In the wipe effect display, as shown in FIGS. 99 (q) to 99 (v), the wipe-in is from the appearance of the wipe display to the maximum wipe state in which the wipe display covers the display screen of the display device most. Further, as shown in FIGS. 99 (v) to 99 (a), the wipeout is from the maximum wipe state in which the wipe display covers the display screen of the display device most to completely erased.

In this embodiment, the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w3a and w4a is displayed as an animation that repeats the operation of rotating 45 ° counterclockwise from the forward mode and then rotating 45 ° clockwise. However, the wipe displays w3a and w4a are effects for emphasizing, conspicuous, and making the wipe pattern such as the face of the palace, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, and the wipe-out state easier to see. An effect image as an effect may be included. In the wipe display w3b and w4b, around the image of the princess's face as an effect to emphasize, make it stand out, or make it easier to see the princess's face, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, the wipe-out state, etc. The star-shaped effect image is displayed on the screen, but the image of the princess's face rotates, the image of the princess's face moves around, and other character images are displayed to display the image of the princess's face and the character image. By displaying an animation that operates in conjunction with, the wipe display itself, the wipe-in state, the wipe-out state, and the like may be emphasized or conspicuous to be easily seen. Note that the wipe displays w3a and w4a and the wipe displays w3b and w4b may display different animations, different effect images, different animations and effect images, related animations, and related to each other. You may display effect images, animations and effect images that are related to each other, animations that are linked to each other, effect images that are linked to each other, animations and effect images that are linked to each other, and the same animation. , The same effect image or the same animation and effect image may be displayed.

(Example 2)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100. 100 (a) to (z) and (a) to (d) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 100A shows a schematic front of the game board 1000 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 29, and after FIG. 100B, the game board 1000 starts with the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body. 1010, the movable body 1002, and the sub display device 1030 are extracted and shown.

As shown in FIG. 100A, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, there are three pachinko machines in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Decorative patterns are displayed side by side in a row. In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are referred to as "decorative symbols A", and the decorative symbols displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is referred to as "decorative pattern B". The design of the decorative design B is different from the design of the decorative design A shown in FIG. 5 (c). The design of the decorative design B may be the same as the design of the decorative design A shown in FIG. 5 (c). Further, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B when the result of the hit / miss determination of the special symbol variable game is wrong is different from the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A. For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A is the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration". In contrast to "4", the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B is "decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 6" which is an out-of-order symbol mode. In addition, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol variation game is wrong, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B may be the same as the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A. When the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol variation game is a big hit, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B may be the same. The symbol combination of the decorative symbol A and the symbol combination of the decorative symbol B may be different. For example, the symbol combination of the decorative symbol A is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7", and the symbol of the decorative symbol B is used. The combination may be "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3".

FIG. 100A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The decorative symbol B of the combination of "decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 5" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the judgment of whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct is incorrect. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 100A, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 100, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and a sea background image is displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 100B shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The variable display of the decorative symbol A is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the variable display of the decorative symbol B is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. There is. In the figure, the variable display of the decorative symbol A is represented by a downward white arrow, and the variable display of the decorative symbol B is represented by a downward arrow.

FIG. 100C shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 100 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 100 (d), the normal reach effect display is started after the reach is reached by the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 100 (e) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 moves from the initial position to the lowest position in the operating range and stops during the normal reach effect display. The movable body 1010 is stopped at a position on the front side of the central portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As a result, the movable body 1010 and a part of the image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, and the part of the image becomes invisible to the player.

FIG. 100 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 1010 has moved upward and returned to the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 1010 is the uppermost position of the moving range of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 100 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode in which it sways left and right. The normal reach effect display ends when the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed.

FIG. 100 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of the hit / miss determination related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol A of the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an outlier symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower right corner of the screen, "decoration 5-decoration 4-decoration 1", which is an out-of-order design mode, is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variation display is out of order. Has been notified.

FIG. 100 (i) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol A is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol B is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Fluctuation display of is started.

FIG. 100 (j) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 100 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 100 (k), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. Even during the execution of the super reach effect display, the decorative symbol is not temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol B, and the variable display of the decorative symbol B is continued.

FIG. 100 (l) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 has changed with the start of the super reach effect display. The background image has changed from a sky background image to a mountain road background image. In this embodiment, in the decorative pattern display device 208, the sky background image is displayed during normal effect display other than the super reach effect display, normal reach effect display is being executed, etc., and the background image of the mountain road is being executed during super reach effect display. Is displayed in. In this example, the background image of the sea is continuously displayed on the sub display device 2030 even during the execution of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 100 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 has moved to the right from the initial position. The movable body 1002 may be movable in the directions of right, left, upper, lower, diagonally upper right, diagonally lower right, diagonally upper left, and diagonally lower left from the initial position.

FIG. 100 (n) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 has moved diagonally upward to the right from the position shown in FIG. 100 (m). Further, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol A is reduced and displayed.

FIG. 100 (o) shows a state in which a character string image of “sorry” is displayed as a display suggesting deviation in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 1002 provided with the sub-display device 1030 is moving diagonally upward to the left from the position shown in FIG. 100 (n). Although a part of the character string image of "sorry" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 (the upper left end of "remaining" in the state shown in FIG. 100 (o)) is hidden by the sub display device 1030, this implementation is carried out. In the example, the display corresponding to the part hidden by the sub display device 1030 is not displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 100 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a swaying fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier. Further, the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 moves to the right from the position shown in FIG. 100 (o) and stops in front of the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the character string image of "sorry" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 by the sub display device 1030 (in the state shown in FIG. 100 (p), the upper right end of "remaining" and the upper left end of "mind" ) Is hidden, but in this embodiment, the display corresponding to the part hidden by the sub display device 1030 is not displayed on the sub display device 1030.

FIG. 100 (q) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started after "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" suggesting a deviation in the super reach effect display is displayed. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of. The wipe effect display is an effect of erasing an image such as an effect display by wiping from the edge of the display screen of the display device. As shown in FIG. 100 (q), the appearance display of the wipe display w5a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w5b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is started. The start of the appearance (wipe-in) display of the wipe display w5a and w5b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w5a and w5b are displayed so as to wipe off the display other than the decorative symbol B. Since the decorative symbol B is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w5b, it continues to be displayed without being wiped off by the wipe display w5b. The wipe display w5a is a display of a pattern including a plurality of images (three in this example) of the face of the character tactor. The wipe display w5b has a plurality of images of the character's princess face (three in this example) and a plurality of star-shaped effect images arranged in the vicinity of the image of the princess' face (three in this example). ) And is displayed. The image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w5a is displayed as an animation that repeats the operation of rotating 45 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction and then rotating 45 ° clockwise to return to the positive direction. .. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 100 (q), the image of the face of the palace is displayed in a mode rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from the forward orientation. Further, the star-shaped effect image included in the wipe display w5b is displayed in a blinking display mode in which erasing and display are alternately repeated.

FIG. 100 (r) shows a state in which the movable body 1002 provided with the sub-display device 1030 moves upward from the position shown in FIG. 100 (q) and stops. The position of the movable body 1002 in the state shown in FIG. 100 (r) is the standby position of the movable body 1003 (sub-display device 1030) when the wipe effect display is executed in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is started before the movable body 1002 provided with the sub display device 1030 completes the movement to the standby position. As shown in FIG. 100 (r), the wipe display w5a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w5b gradually expands from the lower right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. It is displayed so that it spreads to. After the sub display device 1030 stops at the standby position, the wipe display w5a reaches behind the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030, and the wipe display w6a is started to be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w6a is displayed so as to gradually expand from the upper right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030 toward the lower left corner of the display screen. The wipe display w6a has the same pattern as the wipe display w5a, and is a display corresponding to a hidden portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by the sub display device 1030. The wipe display w5a and the wipe display w6a form a wipe display that gradually expands from the upper left to the lower right when viewed from the player. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 100 (r), the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w5a is displayed in a positive orientation.

In FIG. 100 (s), the wipe displays w5a and w5b gradually expand toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w6a gradually expands toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of spreading to. A part of the image of the face of one palace is displayed on the wipe display 6a. The images of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a are displayed in a mode in which they are rotated by 45 ° counterclockwise from a forward orientation mode.

In FIG. 100 (t), the wipe displays w5a and w5b gradually expand toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w6a gradually expands toward the lower right corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. It shows the state of spreading to. The sub-display device 1030 displays almost the entire image of the face of the palace included in the portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 that is hidden by the sub-display device 1030.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99 (u), in the wipe-in state, the sub-display device 1030 located at the initial position has a sub-display of the wipe display w3a displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. While almost the entire image of the princess's face included in the portion hidden by the device 1030 is displayed, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 100 (t), the sub-display device located at the standby position is displayed. In the 1030, almost the entire image of the face of the palace included in the portion of the wipe display w5a displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 that is hidden by the sub display device 1030 is displayed. As described above, the wipe display pattern displayed on the sub display device 1030 may differ depending on the position of the sub display device 1030 in the wipe-in.

FIG. 100 (u) shows the state of the maximum wipe in which the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 are covered with a wipe display. Except for the decorative symbol B displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w5a and w5b, and the entire display screen of the sub display device 1030 is covered. Is covered by the wipe display w6a. In the maximum wipe state, the lower right end of the wipe display w5a and the upper left end of the wipe display w5b are in contact with each other. In addition, the images of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a are displayed in a forward orientation.

FIG. 100 (v) shows an image between the wipe displays w5a and w6a displayed in the upper left when viewed from the player and the wipe display w5b displayed in the lower right when viewed from the player in the maximum wipe state. Indicates that the moving animation is displayed. In this example, the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a during the wipe-in (during the wipe appearance display) shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to (t) and during the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u). The image has moved to the wipe display w5b. The image of the face of the palace is moved to the wipe display w5b by, for example, an animation of moving while rotating clockwise. Further, the image of the princess's face included in the wipe display w5b during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to 100 (t) and the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u) is rotated counterclockwise, for example. The wipe display w5a and w6b are moved by the moving animation. In this example, the image included in the wipe displays w5a and w6a during the wipe-in (in this example, the image of the face of the palace) is displayed on the wipe display w5b instead of the wipe display w5a and w6a during a part of the maximum wipe state. Will be done. Further, the image of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w6a and displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (s) and 100 (t) is the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 100 (u). When the image of the face of the palace is continuously displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the movement display of the image of the face of the palace to the wipe display w5b is started, the image of the face of the palace is displayed on the sub display device 1030 and the decorative symbol display device 208. After being displayed on both display devices, it is displayed in the upper right part of the wipe display w5a of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the face of the palace is displayed over the wipe display w5a and the wipe display w5b. Moves to the upper right part of the wipe display w5b through the state of being displayed. Further, the image of the princess's face included in the upper right part of the wipe display w5b and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 during the wipe-in shown in FIGS. 100 (s) and 100 (t) is shown in FIG. 100 (u). When the display is continuously displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 in the maximum wipe state shown and the movement display of the image of the princess's face to the wipe display w6a is started, the image of the princess's face is displayed in the wipe display w5b and the wipe display w5a. The image of the face of the princess is displayed in the upper right part of the wipe display w5a after being displayed over the above, and the image of the princess's face is displayed over both the display devices of the decorative pattern display device 208 and the sub display device 1030. After the state, the image is moved to the sub display device 1030 so as to be displayed in the wipe display w6a.

FIG. 100 (w) shows a state in which the image of the face of the palace is moving toward the wipe display w5b, and the image of the face of the princess is moving toward the wipe displays w5a and w6a. In this example, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is started after the movement of the image of the face of the palace and the image of the face of the princess is completed. The withdrawal display of the wipe display may be started while the image of the face of the palace and the image of the face of the princess are being moved.

FIG. 100 (x) shows a state in which the withdrawal (wipeout) display of the wipe display is started. The wipe display w5a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner of gradually reducing toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w5b is displayed withdrawal in a manner of gradually reducing toward the lower right corner of the display screen. To. The wipe display w6a is withdrawn and displayed in a manner of gradually reducing toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the sub display device 1030. At the time of wipe-out, the wipe display w5a and w6a include an image of a princess's face and a star-shaped effect image, and the wipe display w5b includes an image of a palace's face. The withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed when the wipe display is completely erased. Further, when the withdrawal display of the wipe display w5a and w5b is started, the display of the decorative symbol A and the background image on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible, and the withdrawal display of the wipe display w6a is started. The display of the background image or the like on the sub display device 1030 becomes gradually visible. Further, when the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w5a, w5b, and w46b is started, the background image is changed to an empty background image in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started.

100 (y) and 100 (z) show a state in which the withdrawal indications of the wipe indications w5a, w5b, and w6a are displayed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (y) and 100 (z), an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and a sea background image is displayed on the sub display device 1030 during the withdrawal display of the wipe display. ing.

FIG. 100 (a), which shows the state continuing from FIG. 100 (z), shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w5a is in progress and the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w5b and w6a is completed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (n) to 100 (t), the decorative symbol A reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 before the start of the wipe effect display and during the appearance display of the wipe display is As shown in FIGS. 100 (w) to 100 (a), during the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the same size as before the start of the reach effect display is displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 have the out-of-order symbol mode “decoration 2-decoration 3”. The swaying fluctuation display (temporary stop display) is displayed in a display mode in which "decoration 2" sways from side to side, but since the movable body 1002 is located on the front side of the middle symbol display area 208b, the middle symbol display area 208b Except for the lower end of "Decoration 3", which is temporarily stopped and displayed, the player cannot see it. In addition, the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 100 (b) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w6a is completed and the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. The completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed, and the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the lower corner, the decorative symbol B of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4" is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

In FIG. 100 (c), in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol A of the combination of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed, and the decorative symbol is displayed. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the device 208, the decorative symbol B of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4" is shown in a swaying and fluctuating display. , The combination of the symbols of the decorative symbol A and the combination of the symbols of the decorative symbol B when the result of the special symbol variation game is out of order are different.

FIG. 100 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is wrong, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are covered with the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". The decorative symbol A of the combination is stopped and displayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also displayed in the lower right corner, and the decorative symbol B of the combination of "decoration 6-decoration 1-decoration 4" is displayed. It is notified that the result of determining whether or not the 1-variable game is correct is out of order. Further, before the end of the special figure 1 variable game, the movable body 1002 moves downward from the standby position located in the state shown in FIGS. 100 (r) to 100 (c) and returns to the initial position. As a result, the movable body 1002 and the middle symbol display area 208b do not overlap with each other, and the entire "decoration 3" displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b becomes visible.

In this embodiment, a pair of wipe displays are configured by the wipe displays w5a and w6a and the wipe display w5b, and the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display are formed by the pair of wipe displays of the wipe displays w5a and w6a and the wipe display w5b. The display screen of the device 1030 is covered and the wipe effect display is executed. As shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to 100 (u), the wipe displays w5a and w6a include an image of the face of the palace during the entire period of the wipe-in state and a part of the maximum wipe state, and FIG. As shown in (a), the image of the princess's face and the star-shaped effect image are included in a part of the maximum wipe state and the entire period of the wipeout. As described above, in this embodiment, a part of the wipe display w5a and w6a and a part of the wipe display w5b are replaced in the middle of the wipe effect display.

In this embodiment, the sub-display device 1030 is located at a standby position different from the initial position during a part of the wipe-in state, the entire period of the maximum wipe state, and the entire period of the wipeout state. Further, the sub-display device 1030 displays an image (for example, a background image of the sea) that is not closely related to the image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

It should be noted that the player can select which of the wipe effect display of the wipe display w3a and w3b shown in FIG. 99 and the wipe effect display of the wipe display w5a and w5b shown in FIG. 100 is performed. It may have been. It may be possible to set which wipe effect display is to be performed by setting the effect customization or the like by the player.

(Example 3)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (f). FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (f) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 101 (a) to 101 (f), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 101A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 101B shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 101 (c), the normal reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 101 (d) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the normal reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode in which it sways from side to side. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier. The normal reach effect display ends when the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started. In this embodiment, in the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed.

FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. It has been notified that there is.

FIG. 101 (f) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the normal reach effect display (short reach effect display), which has a shorter execution time than the super reach effect display (long reach effect display), displays a display suggesting a deviation, and then the pattern mode is removed. Is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 until the confirmation is displayed. Although the illustration of the sub display device 1030 is omitted, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub display device 100 is displayed between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The display device 1030 is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed. In the normal reach effect display, the wipe effect display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 1030 between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. You may.

(Example 4)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (L). FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 101 (A) to 101 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 101 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 101B shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 101 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 101 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect display is performed.

FIG. 101 (D) shows a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the palace (hero character) and the enemy (enemy character) of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation (moving image) of is started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the lord in the production is displayed, and the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Displays an animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord in the production.

FIG. 101 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 101 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 101 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of. The end of the super reach effect display may be when the maximum wipe state is reached in the wipe effect display.

FIG. 101 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe display w7a includes a plurality of images of the face of the palace (two in this example), and the wipe display w7b includes a plurality of images of the face of the palace (two in this example). The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 101 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the palace and the enemy of the palace is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the palace. The display mode of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display mode of the palace that lost the confrontation with the enemy of the palace shown in FIGS. 101 (F) and 101 (G). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it easier for the player to forget the effect of losing the confrontation.

FIG. 101 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 101 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 101 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the super reach effect display including the confrontation scene between the palace and the enemy of the palace. The display device 208 is configured to display the wipe effect display. In the super reach effect display including the confrontation scene between the palace and the enemy of the palace, the wipe effect display is displayed on the sub display device 1030 between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengagement symbol mode is confirmed. It may be configured to be displayed.

(Example 5)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 (a) to (1). FIGS. 101 (a) to (1) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of the figures of FIGS. 101 (a) to (1), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 101 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 101, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 101 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 101 (d) is an animation (video) of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the palace and the grandfather confront each other by drinking alcohol. The image) is displayed to indicate that the effect has started. The image of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the grandfather is displayed on the left side of the display screen. A background image including an image of a princess and an image of an aunt is displayed on the back of the image of the palace and the image of the grandfather on the display screen. If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, an animation of a scene in which the lord wins compared to drinking and the old man gets drunk is displayed in the production, and the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In some cases, an animation of a scene in which the old man wins compared to drinking and the lord gets drunk is displayed in the production.

FIG. 101 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution. In addition, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation of a scene in which the palace and the grandfather drink alcohol in a cup. It should be noted that the timing at which the variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and the timing at which the animation of the scene of drinking alcohol with the palace and the grandfather are started to be displayed may be at the same time. One may come first.

FIG. 101 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, as a display suggesting an outlier, an animation of a scene in which the old man wins compared to drinking and the palace gets drunk is displayed.

FIG. 101 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display is displayed between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display including the animation of the drinking comparison scene and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The wipe effect display is not displayed on the device 208. FIG. 101 (H) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed without displaying the wipe effect display after the super reach effect display. When the super reach effect display of this example is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen. After the "decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated, the special figure 1 fluctuating game ends, and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Special Figure 1 It is notified that the result of the variable game is out of order.

FIG. 101 (i) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol is displayed between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the super reach effect display including the animation of the scene of comparing drinking alcohol. The display device 208 is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has a sub-display device 1030 between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display including the animation of the scene of comparing drinking alcohol and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed in. In this way, the wipe effect display may not be displayed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display. The pachinko machine 100 may be configured so that the wipe effect display is performed between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengagement symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in all the super reach effect displays. .. In the pachinko machine 100, the wipe effect is performed between the display suggesting the deviation in all the reach effect displays such as the normal reach effect display and the super reach effect display and the confirmation display of the disengaged symbol mode. It may be configured as follows.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p) and 100 (k) to (p) as the first reach effect display and FIGS. 101 (C) to (p). The super reach effect display shown in G) can be executed, the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 101 (c) to 101 (g) can be executed as the second reach effect display, and the third reach effect display is shown in FIG. The normal reach effect display shown in 101 (c) and (d) can be executed. The jackpot reliability of the reach effect display is set to increase in the order of the third reach effect display, the second reach effect display, and the first reach effect display. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Therefore, the symbol variation display on which the second reach effect display is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the third reach effect display is performed.

(Example 6)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (m). FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (m) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (m), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 102, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 102 (b) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 102 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 102 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 102 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 102 (f) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the palace is defeated by the enemy of the palace is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 102 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order.

FIG. 102 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. As shown in FIG. 102 (h), the wipe display w7b is displayed overlapping with the image of the palace that was defeated by the enemy and collapsed, and the image of the palace is invisible.

FIG. 102 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started before the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. There is. The wipe display w7a is retracted toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w7b is retracted toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By displaying the wipe display w7b withdrawal, the image of the palace gradually becomes visible. The image of the palace after the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7b is not a collapsed display mode, but a display mode in which the user stands up after slashing.

FIG. 102 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. Further, after the wipe effect display is completed, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is restarted. The timing for resuming the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b may be during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, or at the same time as the withdrawal of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (j), an image of the palace standing after slashing is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and after slashing, the image of the palace standing up is displayed on the left side of the display screen. The image of the enemy of the standing palace is displayed, and the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2" in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is continuously displayed.

FIG. 102 (k) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy of the palace collapses and the lord wins the confrontation is displayed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, so that the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, swings up and down in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed in the shaking fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where the lord won the confrontation and the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" are displays suggesting a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the wipe effect display is not displayed between the time when the display suggesting the big hit is displayed on the reach effect display and the time when the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 102 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 102 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 (f) and 102 (g), after the display suggesting the disconnection is displayed in the super reach effect display, FIGS. 102 (h) and 102 (i) show. As shown, the wipe effect display is displayed. The wipe effect display is terminated before the maximum wipe state is reached, and as shown in FIG. 102 (j), the animation of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect display is resumed after the wipe effect display is completed, and is shown in FIG. 102 (k). As shown, a display suggesting a big hit is displayed. In this way, in the super reach effect display, the animation of the confrontation scene or the like is restarted after the display suggesting the loss is displayed, and then the display suggesting the big hit is displayed. Reverse effect display). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is executed as shown in FIGS. 102 (h) and 102 (i) before the revival effect display shown in FIGS. 102 (j) and 102 (k) is started. .. In addition, in the wipe effect display in this embodiment, the maximum wipe state may be set.

(Example 7)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (P). FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (P) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 102 (A) to 102 (P), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 102 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 102 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 102, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 102 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 102 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 102 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 102 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 102 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 102 (F) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 102 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order.

FIG. 102 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. As shown in FIG. 102 (h), the wipe display w7b is displayed overlapping with the image of the palace that was defeated by the enemy and collapsed, and the image of the palace is invisible.

FIG. 102 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started before the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. There is. The wipe display w7a is retracted toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w7b is retracted toward the lower right corner of the display screen. By displaying the wipe display w7b withdrawal, the image of the palace gradually becomes visible. The image of the palace after the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7b is not a collapsed display mode, but a display mode in which the user stands up after slashing.

FIG. 102 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. Further, after the wipe effect display is completed, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is restarted. The timing for resuming the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b may be during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, or at the same time as the withdrawal of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. .. Further, as shown in FIG. 102 (J), an image of the palace standing after slashing is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and after slashing, the image of the palace standing up is displayed on the left side of the display screen. The image of the enemy of the standing palace is displayed, and the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2" in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c is continuously displayed.

FIG. 102 (K) shows an animation of a scene in which the palace collapses, the palace loses the confrontation, and the enemy of the palace wins the confrontation. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, so that the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is an off-design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings up and down. It is displayed in the shaking fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where the palace lost the confrontation and the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" are indications of deviation. After the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c shown in FIG. 102 (K) is started, the background image is displayed when the wipeout of the wipe effect display is performed. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the normal effect display, which is a background image of the sky.

FIG. 102 (L) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 102 (M) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the palace and the enemy of the palace is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the palace. The display mode of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display mode of the palace who lost the confrontation with the enemy of the palace shown in FIG. 102 (K). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it easier for the player to forget the effect of losing the confrontation.

FIG. 102 (N) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 102 (O) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 102 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 102 (F) and 102 (G), after the display suggesting the disconnection is displayed in the super reach effect display, FIGS. 102 (H) and 102 (I) show. As shown, the wipe effect display is displayed. The wipe effect display is terminated without reaching the maximum wipe state, and after the wipe effect display is completed, the animation of the confrontation scene in the super reach effect display is resumed as shown in FIG. 102 (J), and FIG. 102 (K) ), The display suggesting the disconnection is displayed again. In this way, in the super reach effect display of this example, a display suggesting a disconnection is displayed by pretending that the revival effect display is executed, and then the second wipe effect display in the super reach effect display is displayed. Will be executed. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to increase the variation of the effect display. In addition, the maximum wipe state may be set in the first wipe effect display in this embodiment.

(Example 8)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (n). FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 103, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 103 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 103 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 103 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 103 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the lord in the production is displayed, and the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Displays an animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord in the production.

FIG. 103 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 103 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 103 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 103 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 103 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the palace and the enemy of the palace is executed are the patterns including the image of the face of the palace. The display mode of the face of the palace included in the wipe displays w7a and w7b is different from the display mode of the palace who lost the confrontation with the enemy of the palace shown in FIGS. 103 (f) and 103 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it easier for the player to forget the effect of losing the confrontation.

FIG. 103 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Further, in the present embodiment, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, and the preview image j1 of the treasure box pattern is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The preview image j1 is a preview image (preliminary image of the variation) of the special figure 1 variable game. A part of the preview image j1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of "decoration 3" in the middle symbol display area 208b located at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big hit notice effect display by the notice image j1 is started at the end of the wipe effect display.

FIG. 103 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the notice image j1 is displayed in a smaller size than at the beginning of the display, and the "decoration 3" in the middle symbol display area 208b is temporarily erased. The timing at which the preview image j1 is reduced and displayed and the timing at which the "decoration 3" in the middle symbol display area 208b is erased may be simultaneous, or either one may be earlier.

FIG. 103 (l) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the treasure box is opened and "decoration 3" as a middle pattern pops out upward from the preview image j1. When the animation is displayed, the notice image j1 is displayed between the left symbol "decoration 2" in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol "decoration 2" in the right symbol display area 208a. To. When the animation is displayed, the swaying variation display of the display mode in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-line symbol mode, sways from side to side in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

FIG. 103 (m) shows a state in which the preview image j1 is erased. The preview image j1 is erased after the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

FIG. 103 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

As in this embodiment, the wipe-in in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear and the wipe-out in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b withdraw are used to display an empty background image from the super reach effect display state. However, the preview image j1 that was not displayed in the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 103 (c) to 103 (g) may be displayed at the time of wipeout. The preview image j1 is a jackpot preview image. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the jackpot notice image is displayed at the time of wipeout than when the jackpot notice image is not displayed at the time of wipeout. Has been done. The display mode of the jackpot notice image does not have to be the pattern of the treasure box, but may be the pattern of the character, the pattern of the family crest, or the pattern of an item such as a sword or a shuriken. At the time of wiping out, a look-ahead notice image may be displayed.

In addition, the wipe-in display in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear and the wipe effect display by the wipe-out in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b withdraw change from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state in which the sky background image is displayed. However, a certain image such as a big hit notice image that was not displayed in the super reach effect display is displayed in the normal effect state after the wipeout than when it is not displayed in the normal effect state after the wipeout. If this is done, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be fixedly stopped in the special figure variation game. In this embodiment, since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is out of order, after the animation in which "decoration 3", which constitutes the out-of-order symbol mode from the preview image j1 of the treasure box, pops out as the middle symbol is displayed, Although the out-of-order symbol mode is confirmed and displayed, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure variation game is a big hit, the "decoration 2" that constitutes the jackpot symbol mode pops out as a medium symbol from the preview image of the treasure box. After the animation is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally confirmed and displayed. Further, when the certain image is not displayed in the normal effect display state, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured not to be definitely displayed. In addition, in the symbol variation display in which the effect of changing from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state is executed by wipe-in and wipe-out, a certain image that was not displayed in the super reach effect display state is displayed in the normal effect display state. When the image is displayed in the normal effect display state, after one of the start of the plurality of symbol variation displays held at the time of wipeout, than when the image is not displayed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed. The certain image is not limited to the jackpot advance notice image and the look-ahead advance notice image, and may be a navigation character (navigation character used for tutorial production) image, a help character image, or the like.

(Example 9)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (N). FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (N) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 103 (A) to 103 (N), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 103 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 103, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 103 (B) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 103 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 103 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 103 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the lord in the production is displayed, and the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Displays an animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord in the production.

FIG. 103 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 103 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 103 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 103 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w9a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w9b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w9a and w9b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w9a and w9b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. The wipe display w9a includes an image that is a pattern of a part of the family crest (upper left part), and the wipe display w9b includes an image that is a pattern of another part (lower right part) of the family crest. In the maximum wipe state, the image of the family crest included in the wipe display w9a and the image of the family crest included in the wipe display w9b form an image of the family crest of one pattern.

FIG. 103 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w9a and the upper left end of the wipe display w9b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w9a and w9b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w9a and w9b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. Further, when the wipe display w9a and the wipe display w9b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the image of the family crest included in the wipe display w9a and the image of the family crest included in the wipe display w9b are continuous. Is displayed, and the family crest image of one pattern is formed by the images of these family crests. The family crest image is displayed for notifying or suggesting that the jackpot symbol mode is displayed after the wipeout and that the jackpot notice is executed after the wipeout. In this example, the family crest image is a preview image of the change, and is displayed to announce that the jackpot notice will be executed after the wipeout.

FIG. 103 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w9a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w9b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Further, in the present embodiment, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is started, and the notice image j2 of the family crest pattern is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The notice image j2 is a notice image (a notice image of the change, a big hit notice image) about the special figure 1 variable game. A part of the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the "decoration 3" in the middle symbol display area 208b. As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the big hit notice effect display by the notice image j2 is started at the end of the wipe effect display. Further, the family crest image included in the wipes w9a and w9b is an image foretelling that the notice image j2 is displayed at the time of wipe-out. The family crest image included in the wipes w9a and w9b has the same pattern as the preview image j2. In this way, the image foretelling that the jackpot notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the jackpot notice effect display. The image foretelling that the jackpot notice effect display is displayed may be displayed with a pattern related to the jackpot notice effect display.

FIG. 103 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b is completed. The wipe display w9a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w9b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w9a and w9b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. A part of the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the "decoration 3" in the middle symbol display area 208b.

FIG. 103 (L) shows a state in which the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap the entire "decoration 3" displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the "decoration 3" becomes invisible. There is. The "decoration 3" may be erased when the whole is overlapped. The preview image j2 is displayed between the "decoration 2" in the right symbol display area 208a and the "decoration 2" in the left symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 103 (M) shows a state in which the preview image j2 is erased. Since the preview image j2 is deleted, the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b can be visually recognized again. The middle pattern has changed from "decoration 3" to "decoration 2". If the middle symbol is once erased when the preview image j2 is displayed so as to overlap the entire middle symbol, the preview image j2 is deleted or the preview image j2 is deleted. At the same time, "Decoration 2" is displayed as a medium pattern.

FIG. 103 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display, and the notice image j2 which is the jackpot notice image is displayed at the time of wipe out. After the preview image j2 is displayed between the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol, the jackpot symbol mode is swayed and fluctuated, and then the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The state in which the preview image j2 is displayed between the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol is a production state of fanning that is fueling a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the jackpot notice image is displayed at the time of wipeout than when the jackpot notice image is not displayed at the time of wipeout. Has been done. Further, the wipe displays w9a and w9b include images of family crests, and the end of the wipe display w9a and the end of the wipe display w9b are in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, so that the notice image j2 displayed later is displayed. A family crest image having the same display mode as the above is displayed (see FIG. 103 (I)). The preview image j2 is gradually displayed from between the family crest images included in the wipe displays w9a and w9b at the time of wipe-out.

In the present embodiment, the wipe display pattern is as shown in FIGS. 99 (v), 100 (w), 101 (I), 102 (M), 103 (i), and 103 (I). There are more than one in. The family crest shown in FIG. 103 (I) is more than the case where the wipe display of the pattern including the image of the face of the palace shown in FIG. 103 (i) or the like (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first pattern") is displayed. When the wipe display of the pattern including the image (hereinafter, may be referred to as "second pattern") is displayed, after the super reach effect display state is changed to the normal effect display state by wipe-in and wipe-out. Therefore, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. In addition, when the wipe display of the second pattern is displayed, the wipe-in and wipe-out changes from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state than when the wipe display of the first pattern is displayed. At that time, the jackpot notice image that was not displayed in the super reach effect display or the look-ahead notice image may be configured so as to be easily displayed by wipe-out. At least a character image may be included in the jackpot advance notice image and the look-ahead advance notice image. Here, the first pattern and the second pattern may be any pattern, and are not limited to the patterns shown in FIGS. 103 (i) and 103 (I). In addition, when the wipe display pattern is the second pattern among a plurality of patterns, when the wipe-in or wipe-out changes from the super reach effect display state to the normal effect display state, the super reach effect display state is displayed. The jackpot advance notice image or the look-ahead advance notice image that was not displayed may be configured to be always displayed by wipeout.

In this embodiment, after the notice image j2, which is a big hit notice image, is displayed, the big hit symbol mode is confirmed and displayed on the running symbol variation display, but a plurality of types of big hit notice images are provided. When one of the multiple types of jackpot notice images (for example, the second jackpot notice image) is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is always displayed in a definite manner. May be good. In addition, at the time of wiping out, the first jackpot preview image among a plurality of types of jackpot preview images (preliminary image j1, an image in which blue characters such as blue letters are often used, and blue color are characteristically used. A second jackpot notice image (for example, a notice image j2, an image in which more red characters such as red letters are used, an image in which red is characteristically used, etc.) is displayed than when an image (image, etc.) is displayed. If this is done, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the running symbol variation display. In addition, a third jackpot preview image (for example, an image of a golden treasure chest, an image of a golden family crest, an image in which a lot of gold such as gold letters is used, an image in which gold is characteristically used, etc.) is displayed. In some cases, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally fixedly displayed in the running symbol variation display.

(Example 10)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. First, the hold icon of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 104.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a decorative symbol display device 208 as a hold display means. The hold display means is a display means for displaying a number of hold icons according to the number of holds and a changing icon, and the changing icon is sometimes referred to as the hold icon, and therefore is simply referred to as a hold icon. In some cases. That is, the hold display means is a display means for displaying the hold icon. If there is only one hold during the symbol variation display, the hold icon is displayed only in the hold 1 display area, and if there are only two holds during the symbol variation display, the two hold icons are the hold 1 display area. Hold 2 Displayed one by one only in the display area. Similarly, when there are only M hold icons during the symbol variation display, one hold icon is displayed only in each of the hold 1 display area to the hold M display area. When the hold is full (for example, N, (N is 4 or 8)) during the symbol variation display, the hold icon is displayed in all of the hold 1 display area to the hold N display area. Hold 1 display area The hold icon displayed in is changing to the changing icon display area (sometimes referred to as the hold display area or the hold 0 display area) when the hold decreases. The hold icon (the hold icon, simply referred to as the hold icon). If the hold is 0 during the symbol change display, the changing icon is displayed only in the hold 0 display area. Also, the symbol change display or the symbol temporary stop display is in progress. Or, the changing icon may be deleted from the hold 0 display area during the symbol stop display (sometimes referred to as the symbol confirmed display or the symbol main stop display), or the symbol stop display. It may be configured so that the changing icon is deleted from the hold 0 display area during. One or more hold icons are displayed in the hold 0 display area to the hold M display area during the symbol change display. It may be erased once or the hold icon may be redisplayed. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the hold 2 display area is displayed in the hold 1 display area when the hold is reduced, that is, normally. , The hold icon displayed in each of the hold 1 display area to the hold M display area is displayed in each of the hold 0 display area to the hold M-1 display area when the hold decreases. The hold icon displayed in the hold M display area may be displayed in the hold M-1 display area, suddenly displayed, or the mode of the hold icon while the hold reduction animation is performed when the hold is reduced. The color and pattern) may be changed and displayed, or the size may be changed and displayed.

If a game ball wins in the special figure 1 start port 210 or the special figure 2 start port 212 in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased by the winning is temporarily held 1 display area. The hold icon is then displayed as a changing icon (“holding icon”, sometimes referred to simply as “holding icon”) and changing icon display area (holding display area, holding 0 display area). Is displayed in. If a game ball wins a prize in the special figure 1 start port 210 or the special figure 2 start port 212 in a state where the symbol variation display is not performed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased by the winning is hold 1 It may be configured so that it is not displayed in the display area but is displayed in the changing icon display area as a changing icon.

As shown in FIG. 104, the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is provided with six types of hold icons. FIG. 104 is a table showing a list of hold icons. The table shown in FIG. 104 is composed of each item of "name", "mode", and "meaning". The "Name" column in the left column of the figure shows the name of each hold icon. The names of the six types of hold icons are "white circle hold icon", "black circle hold icon", "button hold icon", "triangular hold icon", "face hold icon", and "haniwa hold icon".

The "Aspect" column in the middle column of the figure shows the display mode of each hold icon. The “display mode” of the white circle hold icon is a white circular display mode. The “display mode” of the black circle hold icon is a black circle display mode. The "display mode" of the button hold icon is a display mode imitating the chance button 136. The "display mode" of the triangle hold icon is a display mode of a white equilateral triangle. The "display mode" of the face hold icon is a display mode of the face of the character's palace. The "display mode" of the haniwa hold icon is a display mode of the character's haniwa pattern.

The "Meaning" column in the right column of the figure shows the meaning of each hold icon. The "meaning" of the white circle hold icon is the "default hold icon" (normal hold icon). In this embodiment, six types of hold icons are provided, and the white circle hold icon is the hold icon with the lowest jackpot reliability among the six types of hold icons.

The "meaning" of the black circle hold icon is the "high rate of change hold icon". The pachinko machine 100 can execute a hold change effect display (hold effect of the sixth embodiment described later) that changes the hold icon to another type of hold icon, and the black circle hold icon is a white circle hold icon or a triangle. A hold icon that is more likely to change to a white circle hold icon, a button hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a ring hold icon than the hold icon, face hold icon, and ring hold icon. The same applies to the hold effect in the sixth embodiment described later. The black circle hold icon may not change to the white circle hold icon in the hold change effect display. Further, the jackpot reliability when the black circle hold icon is displayed in the hold 0 display area may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon, and the display mode when the hold icon is finally erased is the black circle hold icon. The jackpot reliability when it remains may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon.

The "meaning" of the button hold icon is the "button press change hold icon". The button hold icon is a white circle hold icon, a black circle hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, and a white circle hold icon, a black circle hold icon, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a face hold icon rather than a ring hold icon, depending on the hold change effect display. It is a hold icon that has a high probability of changing to a ring hold icon. The button hold icon may change to another type of hold icon when the player operates the chance button 136. The button hold icon may not change to a white circle hold icon, and the button hold icon may not change to a black circle hold icon. Further, the jackpot reliability when the button hold icon is displayed in the hold 0 display area may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon, and the display mode when the hold icon is finally erased may be the same. The jackpot reliability when the button hold icon remains may be the same as the jackpot reliability of the white circle hold icon. Further, even if the player does not operate the chance button 136, a certain hold display area (for example, hold 0 display area, hold 1 display area, hold 2 display area, or hold 0) is obtained according to one or more hold reductions. The button hold icon changes to another type of hold icon when a certain condition is met (for example, hold decrease, hold increase), such as when it is displayed in the display area to hold N display area). It may be configured in.

The "meaning" of the triangular hold icon is the "medium reliability hold icon". The triangular hold icon is a hold icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, and the button hold icon, and a hold icon having a lower jackpot reliability than the face hold icon and the haniwa hold icon. The triangular hold icon is a hold icon that may change from one of the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, and the button hold icon, a plurality of types of hold icons, or all types of hold icons. ..

The "meaning" of the face hold icon is a "high reliability hold icon". The face hold icon is a hold icon having a higher jackpot reliability than the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, and the triangle hold icon, and a hold icon having a lower jackpot reliability than the haniwa hold icon. The face hold icon may change from one of the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, and the triangle hold icon, the hold icon of multiple types, or the hold icon of all types. Is.

The "meaning" of the Haniwa hold icon is the "big hit confirmed hold icon". The haniwa hold icon has the highest jackpot reliability among the six types of hold icons, and the haniwa hold icon has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In the hold symbol variation display corresponding to the haniwa hold icon, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed. When the ring hold icon changes from one of the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, the triangle hold icon, and the face hold icon, multiple types of hold icons, or all types of hold icons. There is a hold icon. Even if the white circle hold icon changes, it does not have to become the haniwa hold icon.

The types of hold icons are not limited to the six types shown in FIG. 104, and seven or more types of hold icons may be provided, and less than six types of hold icons may be provided. Although each of the six types of hold icons shown in FIG. 104 is composed of one part, one hold icon may be composed of a plurality of parts.

The name of the hold icon can be changed as appropriate. For example, the white circle hold icon is called the first hold icon, one white circle hold icon is called the first hold icon, and another white circle hold icon is called the second hold icon. It may be called a hold icon, 6 types of hold icons may be called multiple types of hold icons, or one white circle hold icon and another white circle hold icon may be captured and called multiple types of hold icons. Alternatively, the hold icon of one of the six types of hold icons may be referred to as a third hold icon or a third type of hold icon. Similarly, when there are four hold full tanks, the hold 0 display area is referred to as the first hold display area, the hold 4 display area is referred to as the fifth hold display area, and the hold 0 display area to the hold 4 display area are referred to. May be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas, and the hold 1 display area to the hold 4 display area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas. When there are eight hold full tanks, the hold 8 display area is referred to as the ninth hold display area, the hold 0 display area to the hold 8 display area is referred to as a plurality of hold display areas, or the hold 1 display area to the hold 8 display. The area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas, or the hold 1 display area to the hold 7 display area may be referred to as a plurality of hold display areas.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (l). FIGS. 105 (a) to 105 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of the drawings 105 (a) to 105 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 105A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 105 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 4, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In this embodiment, a special figure 1 hold icon display area is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The special figure 1 hold icon display area is divided into four areas from the left: hold 1 display area, hold 2 display area, hold 3 display area, and hold 4 display area. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the first hold order is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 variable game having the second hold order is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 1 variable game with the third hold order is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the special figure 1 change with the fourth hold order is displayed in the hold 4 display area. A hold icon corresponding to the hold of the game is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 105A, since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, the hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold 3 is held. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. The black circle hold icon may be the default hold icon (normal hold icon). In this case, the jackpot reliability of the black circle hold icon is the lowest among the plurality of types of hold icons. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 105B shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In this example, at approximately the same time as the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game) by the special figure 1 display device 212, and prior to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol display device 208 The logo image j3 of the characters "Yoshimune" (title logo, the title of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is "CR Yoshimune"), which is the model name of the pachinko machine 100, is displayed on the display screen. The logo image j3 of this example is displayed as a look-ahead preview image. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". The logo image j3 may be started to be displayed prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

FIG. 105 (c) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 2 display area. Hold 3 Moved to the display area and displayed. In this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the digested hold is not displayed as the changing icon during the symbol change display. The hold icon corresponding to the digested hold may be displayed as a changing icon during the symbol change display.

FIG. 105 (d) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. The hold change effect display is an effect display displayed as a look-ahead notice, and is displayed to change the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the look-ahead notice. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation is displayed in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b2 indicating the hold of the notice target, and the effect of the smoke screen overlaps with the hold icon b2 that the beam hits directly. An animation is displayed in which an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "smoke screen image") is displayed. Since the hold icon b2 is entirely overlapped with the smoke screen image, it becomes invisible. The hold change effect display is a change animation that changes the hold icon. The hold change effect display may not be displayed as an animation, and the hold change effect display may be displayed as a still image.

FIG. 105 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 is changed by the hold change effect display. The hold icon b2 has changed from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the haniwa hold icon. The haniwa hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode, and is displayed only when the look-ahead result related to the corresponding hold is a big hit. When the change of the hold icon (hold icon b2 in this example) to be changed is completed, the hold change effect display ends.

FIG. 105 (f) shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

FIG. 105 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 105 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 105 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. It has been notified that there is.

FIG. 105 (j) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 105 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Shown. In this example, for example, the super reach effect display is started. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

FIG. 105 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is a jackpot. It has been notified that there is.

In this example, the hold icon changes in the hold change effect display, and in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (in this example, the haniwa hold icon), which is a look-ahead notice mode, is digested from the black circle hold icon. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. In addition, there may be a case where the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (for example, the triangular hold icon) in the look-ahead mode is digested is finally removed and the symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The hold icon in the look-ahead mode (for example, the triangle hold icon, the face hold icon, or the haniwa hold icon) is more than the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode (for example, the black circle hold icon) is digested. The symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to)) may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. The symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (for example, the haniwa hold icon) having a certain look-ahead mode among the plurality of types of look-ahead modes is such that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed. It may be configured in.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 105 (e ′) to (l ″) and (l ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 105 (e ′) to (l ′) and (l ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 105 (e') shows a state continuing from FIG. 105 (d). In this example, the hold icon b2 does not change even when the hold change effect display shown in FIG. 105 (d) is displayed. In this way, the hold icon may not change when the hold change effect display is displayed. The pending change effect display of this example ends after the animation display of the beam and the animation display of the smoke screen are erased. The hold change effect display in which the hold icon does not change is the hold change failure effect display. On the other hand, the hold change effect display in which the hold icon shown in FIGS. 105 (d) and 105 (e) changes is the hold change success effect display.

FIG. 105 (f') shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

FIG. 105 (g') shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 105 (h') shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 105 (i') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. ing.

FIG. 105 (j') shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 105 (k') shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Is shown. In this example, in FIG. 105 (k'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

FIG. 105 (l') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is a jackpot. It has been notified that there is.

In this example, the hold icon does not change even after the hold change effect display is displayed. In this way, the hold change effect display is provided with two effect patterns: a hold change success effect display of a successful pattern in which the hold icon changes, and a hold change failure effect display of a failure pattern in which the hold icon does not change. .. The hold change effect display in this example is a hold change failure effect display of a failure pattern, and is a symbol change display started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is a normal mode that did not change in the hold change effect display, is digested. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the hold change effect display is a failure pattern, and the hold change effect display is a success pattern rather than the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has not changed in the hold change effect display is digested. The symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed in the hold change effect display is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

FIG. 105 (l ″) shows an example of an effect in the case where the state continues from FIG. 105 (k ′) and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order. The special figure 1 variable game has been completed, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, and the special figure 1 variable display is displayed. It has been notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect.

In this example, the hold change effect display is the hold change failure effect display of the failure pattern, and the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon, which is the normal mode, is finally determined. It is displayed. It should be noted that even if the hold icon has the same normal mode, the hold change display is different from the symbol change display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode is digested and started without going through the hold change failure effect display. The symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the normal mode after the failure effect display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, even if the hold icon corresponding to the hold icon that has become the normal mode after the hold change failure effect display is changed to the hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode by the hold change success effect display before the hold is exhausted, the hold change failure Corresponds to the hold icon that has changed to the normal mode through the hold change failure effect display at least once than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold has been digested and started corresponding to the hold icon that is in the normal mode without going through the effect display. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold is digested may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily.

Further, even if the hold icon has the same look-ahead mode, the hold corresponding to the hold icon having the look-ahead mode without passing through the hold change failure effect display is held rather than the symbol change display started after the hold is digested. The hold corresponding to the hold icon that has a look-ahead mode even after the change failure effect display (for example, the hold icon that had the look-ahead mode before the hold change failure effect display is executed) is digested and started. The symbol variation display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily.

In addition, the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the look-ahead mode after the hold change failure effect display (for example, the hold icon in the look-ahead mode before the hold change failure effect display is executed) is digested. It is the same even if the hold change success effect display previously changes to a hold icon with another look-ahead notice mode with higher jackpot reliability, and the hold icon has a look-ahead notice mode without going through the hold change failure effect display. A hold icon (for example, before the hold change failure effect display is executed) that has a look-ahead notice mode that has passed the hold change failure effect display at least once from the symbol variation display that was started after the hold corresponding to The symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon) corresponding to the certain look-ahead mode may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

In addition, in the animation of the pending change display, the character image of the palace, the princess, or the grandfather may be displayed as a look-ahead notice effect display. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the character image may be set higher in the order of grandfather, princess, and palace.

In addition, a plurality of types of animations for the pending change display may be provided, and the character images of the palace, the princess, and the grandfather may be displayed as the pre-reading notice effect display in the plurality of types of animations. When the first animation display and the second display animation are provided as the animation of the pending change display, the second animation may have a higher jackpot reliability, and the jackpot reliability may be higher. It may be easy to change to a high hold icon.

(Example 11)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (u). FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (u) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of the figures of FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (u), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 106 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 4, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In the special drawing 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. There is. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is the default hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 106 (b) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 2 display area. Hold 3 Moved to the display area and displayed.

FIG. 106 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 106 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 106 (d) shows an animation of a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the hold icon is erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other with the start of the super reach effect display. Indicates that the effect has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The hold icon is hidden for a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 106 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 106 (f) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 106 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 106 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image, and the wipe display w11b includes another part (lower right part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image. In the maximum wipe state, the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b form a logo image of one pattern.

FIG. 106 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w11a and the upper left end of the wipe display w11b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w11a and w11b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. Further, when the wipe display w11a and the wipe display w11b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b are continuous. It is displayed, and a logo image of one pattern is formed by these logo images. The logo image is displayed to foretell or suggest that the look-ahead notice effect display will be displayed after the wipeout. In this example, the logo image is displayed to give notice that the pre-reading notice effect display of the hold change effect display will be displayed after the wipeout. The logo image is a look-ahead preview image.

In this example, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 106 (i), one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 becomes 4.

FIG. 106 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w11a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w11b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the pattern is out of alignment. The shaking fluctuation display of a certain "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started, and the hold icon is redisplayed. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the hold icon, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. Further, in the present embodiment, the logo image j3 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect display. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b is an image foretelling that the logo image j3 will be displayed at the time of wipe-out. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b has the same pattern as the logo image j3. In this way, the image foretelling that the look-ahead notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the look-ahead notice effect display. The image foretelling that the look-ahead notice effect display is displayed may be displayed with a pattern related to the look-ahead notice effect display. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by 1 in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 106 (i), the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. ing.

FIG. 106 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. After "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is shaken and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variable game ends, and "decoration" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ”is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Further, the logo image j3 is displayed overlapping with "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". The logo image j3 is displayed at the same display position as the display position of the logo image included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 106 (i).

FIG. 106 (l) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is displayed. Hold 3 Moved to the display area and displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 106 (m) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. The hold change effect display is displayed as a look-ahead notice, and is displayed to change the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the look-ahead notice target. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold to be announced is displayed, and the smoke screen image overlaps with the hold icon b3 hit directly by the beam. Animation is displayed. The entire hold icon b3 overlaps with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 106 (n) shows a state in which the hold icon b3 is changed by the hold change effect display. The hold icon b3 has changed from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the haniwa hold icon. The hold change effect display of this example is a hold change success effect display of a success pattern. The hold change effect display ends when the change of the hold icon b3 is completed. The Haniwa hold icon is displayed only when the look-ahead result for the corresponding hold is a jackpot.

FIG. 106 (o) shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

FIG. 106 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 106 (q) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 106 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Prior to the stop display of the symbol mode in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, and then. , "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct is out of order.

FIG. 106 (s) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 106 (t) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Shown. In this example, in FIG. 106 (t), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

FIG. 106 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is displayed. The result of this determination relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is a jackpot. It has been notified that there is. The pachinko machine 100 starts the big hit game (big hit operation) after the stop display of the big hit symbol mode.

In this embodiment, the logo image j3, which is a look-ahead notice effect display that was not displayed by the wipe-in, is displayed together with the wipeout, and the hold icon is changed from the default black circle hold icon to the haniwa hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode by the hold change effect display. An animation that changes to is displayed. The logo image included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b and the logo image j3 displayed in the hold change effect display have the same display mode.

Next, an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 106 (h') to 106 (n') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 106 (h') to 106 (n'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 106 (h') shows a state continuing from FIG. 106 (g). In FIG. 106 (h'), the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 106 (i') shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, at the time shown in FIG. 106 (i'), one game ball has won a prize in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 has increased by one. As a result, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 becomes 4.

FIG. 106 (j') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the pattern is out of alignment. The shaking fluctuation display of a certain "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started, and the hold icon is redisplayed. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the hold icon, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. Further, in this modification, the logo image j3 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect display. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 106 (i'), the number of holds in the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is changed to the hold 4 display area in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. It is displayed.

FIG. 106 (k') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. After "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variable game ends, and "decoration" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ”is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Further, the logo image j3 is displayed overlapping with "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2".

FIG. 106 (l') shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold icon reduction animation is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. .. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold is deleted, the hold icon b2 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 2 display area. Hold 3 Moved to the display area and displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 106 (m') shows a state in which the hold change effect display is started. In the hold change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold to be announced is displayed, and the smoke screen image overlaps with the hold icon b3 hit directly by the beam. Animation is displayed. The entire hold icon b3 overlaps with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 106 (n') shows a state in which the animation display in the hold change effect display is finished and the hold icon b3 becomes visible again. Since the hold change effect display of this example is the hold change failure effect display which is a failure pattern, the hold icon b3 does not change and remains as a black circle hold icon.

In this example, in the wipe effect display displayed immediately before the start of the hold change effect display, the wipe displays w7a and w7b of the patterns not related to the logo image j3 are displayed. In this way, in the wipe effect display displayed before the start of the hold change effect display, the wipe display of the pattern not related to the look-ahead notice image (logo image j3 in this example) in the hold change effect display (wipe display in this example). The wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image of the same pattern as the logo image j3 is displayed in the hold change effect display, rather than the case where w7a, w7b) is displayed. In the case, it is easier to display the pending change success effect display. In the wipe effect display displayed before the start of the hold change effect display, the wipe display of a pattern not related to the look-ahead notice image (logo image j3 in this example) in the hold change effect display (in this example, the wipe display w7a, When the wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image of the same pattern as the logo image j3 is displayed in the hold change effect display, rather than when w7b) is displayed. It is easier for the jackpot symbol mode to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display for which the pre-reading notice is to be applied.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 106 (l ″) to (m ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 106 (l ″) to (m ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 106 (l'') is a state that continues from FIG. 106 (k) or a state that continues from FIG. 106 (k'), and the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game Indicates the started state. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 106 (m') shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The hold change effect display in this example is a hold change failure effect display which is a failure pattern. In the hold change failure effect display of this example, the logo image j3 is deleted without displaying the animation of the beam being shot toward the hold icon and the animation of the smoke screen image, and the hold change effect display ends.

In the hold change failure effect display of this example, the animation in which the beam is shot and the animation in which the smoke screen image hold icon overlaps are omitted. As described above, at least a part of the animation may be omitted in the hold change failure effect display. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to make the player notice early that the production is a failure pattern so as not to give the player excessive expectations.

(Example 12)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (u). FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (u) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of the figures of FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (u), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 107 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. In the special drawing 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. There is. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is the default hold icon. A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special drawing 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the changing icon a1 in the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icons b1 to b4. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 107 (b) shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. In this example, the changing icon a1 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 107 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 107 (d) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The changing icon a2 may be enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 107 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 107 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 107 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 107 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 107 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 107 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. Further, in this example, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 107 (i), one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 becomes 4.

FIG. 107 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image, and the wipe display w11b includes another part (lower right part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image. The logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b form a logo image of one pattern. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w11a and w11b including the logo image are the patterns for the look-ahead notice, and the wipe displays w11a and w11b of the patterns for the look-ahead notice are displayed as the look-ahead notice effect display. The wipe display for pre-reading notice is not limited to the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and may include an image of the character's princess face. Further, for example, when the wipe display w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 106 (h') and 106 (i') are normal patterns, the wipe display pattern for pre-reading notice is different from the normal pattern. You just have to.

FIG. 107 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w11a and the upper left end of the wipe display w11b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w11a and w11b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. Further, when the wipe display w11a and the wipe display w11b are displayed in contact with each other in the maximum wipe state, the logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b are continuous. It is displayed, and a logo image of one pattern is formed by these logo images.

FIG. 107 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w11a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w11b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the pattern is out of alignment. The shaking fluctuation display of a certain "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started, and the hold icon and the changing icon are redisplayed. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the hold icon, the changing icon, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. Further, in this embodiment, the logo image j3 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect display in FIGS. 107 (l) to 107 (n). The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b also foretells that the logo image j3 will be displayed at the time of wipe-out. The logo image included in the wipes w11a and w11b has the same pattern as the logo image j3. In this way, the image foretelling that the look-ahead notice effect display is displayed is displayed with the same pattern as the look-ahead notice effect display. The image foretelling that the look-ahead notice effect display is displayed may be displayed with a pattern related to the look-ahead notice effect display. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 has increased by 1 in the state at the time shown in FIG. 107 (i), the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. ing.

FIG. 107 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a display mode swaying from side to side. The logo image j3 is displayed overlapping with "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2". The logo image j3 is displayed at the same display position as the display position of the logo image included in the wipe displays w11a and w11b in the maximum wipe state shown in FIG. 107 (i).

FIG. 107 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. After "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the special figure 1 variable game ends, and "decoration" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ”is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. Further, the logo image j3 is displayed overlapping with "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2".

FIG. 107 (o) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern. In FIGS. 107 (o) to 107 (q), the logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

FIG. 107 (p) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started. The changing icon change effect display is displayed as a notice of the change, and is displayed to change the changing icon. In the changing icon change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the animation of the smoke screen image overlaps with the changing icon a3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire changing icon a3 overlaps with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible. The display mode of the changing icon change effect is the same as the display mode of the hold change effect display shown in FIGS. 105 (d), 106 (m), and 106 (m'). It should be noted that the display mode of the changing icon change effect and the display mode of the hold change effect display may be different.

FIG. 107 (q) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is changed by the changing icon change effect display. The changing icon a3 has changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon. The changing icon of the display mode of the hold icon of the haniwa is the changing icon of the notice mode. The changing icon change effect display of this example is the changing icon change success effect display of the success pattern. Further, the changing icon change effect display ends when the change of the changing icon a3 is completed. The changing icon of the display mode of the haniwa hold icon is displayed only when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure changing game being executed is a big hit. The changing icon change effect display may be provided with the changing icon change failure effect display of the failure pattern, as in the hold change effect display. During the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display when the changing icon change success effect display is displayed than when the changing icon change failure effect display is displayed. ing.

FIG. 107 (r) shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The variable display of the decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

FIG. 107 (s) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 107 (t) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 107 (t), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

FIG. 107 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Prior to the stop display of the jackpot symbol mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and then. , "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", which is a big hit design mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 starts the big hit game (big hit operation) after the stop display of the big hit symbol mode.

Next, an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 107 (j') to 107 (p') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 107 (j') to 107 (p'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 107 (j') shows a state continuing from FIG. 107 (i). In FIG. 107 (j'), the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 107 (k') shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 107 (l') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the pattern is out of alignment. The shaking fluctuation display of a certain "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started, and the hold icon is redisplayed. The changing icon a2 is not displayed after the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe effect display of this example is started. During the symbol variation display, it is more relevant when the changing icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is displayed after the wipeout than when the changing icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is not displayed after the wipeout. It may be easy to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display. In addition, during the symbol variation display, the case where the changing icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is displayed after the wipeout is more than the case where the changing icon corresponding to the symbol variation display is not displayed after the wipeout. However, the revival effect display (reverse effect display) after the wipe effect may be displayed more easily.

When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the hold icon, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. Further, in this modification, the logo image j3 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. The logo image j3 is displayed as a look-ahead notice effect display in FIGS. 107 (l') to (m'). The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 107 (i), the number of holds in the special figure 1 has increased by 1, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Has been done.

FIG. 107 (m') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. ing. Further, the logo image j3 is displayed overlapping with "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2".

FIG. 107 (n') shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change in FIGS. 107 (n') to (p').

FIG. 107 (o') shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started. The changing icon change effect display is displayed as a notice of the change, and is displayed to change the changing icon. In the changing icon change effect display of this example, an animation in which a beam is emitted from the logo image j3 toward the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the animation of the smoke screen image overlaps with the changing icon a3 hit directly by the beam. Is displayed. The entire changing icon a3 overlaps with the animation display of the smoke screen image, and the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 107 (p') shows a state in which the animation display in the changing icon change effect display is finished and the changing icon a3 becomes visible again. Since the changing icon change effect display in this example is a failure pattern, the changing icon change failure effect display, the changing icon a3 does not change and remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon.

In this example, in the wipe effect display displayed immediately before the start of the changing icon change effect display, the wipe displays w7a and w7b of the patterns not related to the logo image j3 are displayed. In this way, in the wipe effect display displayed before the start of the changing icon change effect display, the wipe display of the pattern not related to the notice image (logo image j3 in this example) in the changing icon change effect display (in this example). , Wipe display w7a, w7b), a pattern related to the preview image in the changing icon change effect display (in this example, the wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image of the same pattern as the logo image j3) Is displayed, it is easier to display the changing icon change success effect display. In the wipe effect display displayed before the start of the changing icon change effect display, the wipe display of a pattern not related to the preview image (logo image j3 in this example) in the changing icon change effect display (wipe in this example). The wipe display w11a, w11b including the logo image of the same pattern as the logo image j3 is displayed in the changing icon change effect display than when the display w7a, w7b) is displayed. If this is done, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the running symbol variation display.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 107 (o ″) to (p ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 107 (o ″) to 107 (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 107 (o ″) shows a state following from FIG. 107 (n) or a state continuing from FIG. 107 (m ″). FIG. 107 (o ″) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The logo image j3 is displayed as a notice effect display of the change in FIGS. 107 (o ″) to (p ″).

FIG. 107 (p ″) shows a state in which the logo image j3 is erased. The changing icon change effect display in this example is a failure pattern of the changing icon change failure effect display. In the changing icon change failure effect display of this example, the logo image j3 is deleted without displaying the animation of the beam being shot toward the changing icon and the animation of the smoke screen image, and the changing icon change effect display ends. ..

In the changing icon change failure effect display of this example, the animation in which the beam is shot and the animation in which the smoke screen image overlaps with the changing icon are omitted. As described above, at least a part of the animation may be omitted in the changing icon change failure effect display. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 may be able to make the player notice early that the production is a failure pattern so as not to give the player excessive expectations.

Even if the changing icon has a normal mode, the changing icon change fails rather than the symbol changing display in which the changing icon in the normal mode is displayed without going through the changing icon change failure effect even once. The symbol variation display in which the changing icon, which is in the normal mode after the effect, is displayed, may be configured so that the jackpot symbol aspect is finally confirmed and displayed.
Changing icon It is the same even if the changing icon that is in the normal mode after the change failure effect becomes the changing icon that has the notice mode by the success effect of the symbol change display, and the changing icon changes. The symbol variation display in which the changing icon is displayed after the failure effect is more final than the symbol variation display in which the changing icon is displayed in the normal mode without the failure effect. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed in a definite manner.
Even if the changing icon has the same notice mode, it changes more than the symbol change display in which the changing icon that has a certain notice mode is displayed without the changing icon change failure effect or the changing icon change success effect. Medium icon A symbol displaying a changing icon that has a certain notice mode even after the change failure effect (for example, a changing icon that has been in the certain notice mode before the changing icon change failure effect is executed). The variable display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed more easily.
The changing icon has a certain notice mode even after the change failure effect (for example, the changing icon that has been in the certain notice mode before the changing icon change failure effect is executed) changes the symbol. Even if the changing icon becomes a changing icon with a different notice mode with higher reliability due to the changing icon success effect before the display ends, the same applies to the changing icon change failure effect and the changing icon change success effect. The changing icon that has a certain notice mode is displayed. The changing icon is changing at least once than the changing display. The changing icon that has a certain notice mode even after the change failure effect (for example, the changing icon) The symbol variation display in which the changing icon) that has been in the certain notice mode before the change failure effect is executed may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.
The hold corresponding to the changing icon in the default mode is started after the symbol change display, and the hold corresponding to the changing notice mode or the notice mode is more than the probability that the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It may be configured so that the probability that the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display started by digestion is higher.

(Example 13)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (n). FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 108, the display of the hold icon and the changing icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 108 (b) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 108 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 108 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 108 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 108 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 108 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, as the display suggesting the deviation, the animation of the scene where the palace is defeated by the enemy of the palace and the "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" which is the design mode of the deviation in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The swaying fluctuation is displayed in a display mode that sways up and down. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 108 (g) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 108 (h) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 108 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. As described above, in this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed twice. The wipe effect display by the first wipe display w7a and w7b is the first wipe, and the wipe effect display by the second wipe display 13a and 13b is the second wipe. In this embodiment, after the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b reaches the maximum wipe state of the first wipe, a wipe display different from the wipe displays w7a and w7b (in this example, the wipe displays w13a and w13b) appears. The display starts. The start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the start of the first wipe, and the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this way, the wipe display of the first wipe is wiped off by the wipe display of the second wipe.

The wipe display w13a includes a plurality of images of the princess's face (two in this example), and the wipe display w13b includes a plurality of images of the princess's face (two in this example). In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the first wipe are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w13a and w13b.

FIG. 108 (j) shows a state in which the wipe displays w13a and w13b gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 108 (k) shows the maximum wipe state of the second wipe in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the left lower end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the wipe displays w7a and w7b of the first wipe become invisible.

FIG. 108 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w13a is retracted toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is retracted toward the upper right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the second wipe display w13a and w13b starts, the wipe display w7a and w7b of the first wipe are erased, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol ends, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the screen, the shaking variation display of the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is started. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 108 (f) and 108 (g), before the start of the wipe effect, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is a symbol mode that is out of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. However, after the start of the wipe effect, as shown in FIG. 108 (l), the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Is swaying and fluctuating. The sway variation display of the jackpot symbol mode is a display suggesting a jackpot. The effect display in which the sway variation display of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed after the sway variation display of the missed symbol mode is displayed is the reverse effect display. Is.

FIG. 108 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 108 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, after the out-of-order super reach effect display, the first wipe wipe effect display by the wipe displays w7a and w7b is executed, and then the second wipe effect display by the wipe displays 13a and 13b is executed, for a total of 2 The wipe effect display of the times is executed. It should be noted that the wipe effect display of N times (N> M) is larger than the case where the wipe effect display (wipe-in and wipe-out) is performed M times by one trigger (for example, execution of the super reach effect display of the outlier). If it is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display being executed, or it may be configured with one trigger (for example, execution of the out-of-order super reach effect display). It may be configured so that the reverse effect display is more likely to occur when the wipe effect is performed N times than when the wipe effect display is performed M times. After the reverse effect display, the jackpot symbol mode may be finally finalized, or the jackpot symbol mode may be finalized or the missed symbol mode may be finalized. It may be configured to be the case. It should be noted that the look-ahead notice effect display and the notice of the change are more noticeable when the N wipe effect is performed than when the M wipe effect is performed at one opportunity (for example, the out-of-order super reach effect display). It may be configured so that the effect display can be easily performed.

In this embodiment, the wipe-in of the second wipe is started in the maximum wipe state of the first wipe, but the wipe-in of the second wipe may be started during the wipe-in of the first wipe, or the wipe-in of the first wipe and the wipe-in of the second wipe. Both may start at the same time, both the first wipe and the second wipe may end at the same time, and the first and second wipes may be in the maximum wipe state at the same time, or the first wipe may be wiped. Both the out and second wipe wipeouts may start at the same time, or both the first wipe wipeout and the second wipe wipeout may end at the same time.

Next, an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108 (l') to 108 (p') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 108 (l') to 108 (p'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 108 (l') shows the state continuing from FIG. 108 (k). FIG. 108 (l') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w13a is retracted toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is retracted toward the upper right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b, the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b gradually become visible.

FIG. 108 (m') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. The first wipe wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first wipe is the maximum wipe state in which the wipes w7a and w7b cover the entire display screen.

FIG. 108 (n') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 At 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot design mode, is started. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

FIG. 108 (o') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 108 (p') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 108 (l ″) to (p ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 108 (l ″) to (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 108 (l ″) shows a state continuing from FIG. 108 (k). FIG. 108 (l ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w13a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. By starting the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b, the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b gradually become visible.

FIG. 108 (m ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is started during the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b, the background image becomes an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 At 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot design mode, is started. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

FIG. 108 (n ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b of the second wipe is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. On the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is displayed.

FIG. 108 (o ″) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. In this example, the completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 108 (p ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In the present embodiment and the present modification, the wipe effect displays w7a and w7b appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the display screen in the first wipe, and the wipe displays w13a and w13b appear in the lower left corner and the right of the display screen in the second wipe. It is a display mode that appears from the lower corner. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. , The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the first wipe and the wipe display of the second wipe may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be the pattern of the wipe display w7a and w7b, or may be the pattern of the wipe display w13a and w13b.

(Example 14)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 14th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (q). FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 109 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the drawings of FIG. 109, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 109 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 109 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 109 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 109 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 109 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 109 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display of the first wipe is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the first wipe. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 109 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 109 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 109 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the wipeout of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the first wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 109 (l) shows a state in which the wipe effect display of the second wipe is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe display w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like.

In this embodiment, the second wipe is started after the end of the first wipe. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. , The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the first wipe and the wipe display of the second wipe may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be the pattern of the wipe display w7a and w7b, or may be the pattern of the wipe display w13a and w13b.

FIG. 109 (m) shows a state in which the wipe displays w13a and w13b of the second wipe gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 109 (n) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the left lower end of the wipe display w13b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 109 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w13a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. At the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is started, the shaking variation display of the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 109 (g) and 109 (h), once the shaking fluctuation display of the out-of-design mode is displayed, then as shown in FIG. 109 (o), the shaking fluctuation of the jackpot symbol mode is displayed. The display is displayed. The second wipe of this example is a reverse effect display.

FIG. 109 (p) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the wipeout of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ing.

FIG. 109 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 109 (j') to 109 (q') show an example of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 109 (j') to 109 (q'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 109 (j') shows the state continuing from FIG. 109 (i). FIG. 109 (j') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot design mode, is started.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 109 (h), before the start of the first wipe, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is an out-of-order design mode, was swayed and fluctuated. At the time of wiping out, "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", which is a jackpot design mode, is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In this example, the wipe effect display of the first wipe is the resurrection effect display.

FIG. 109 (k') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the first wipe wipe display w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the wipeout of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is the end of the first wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed as shaking and fluctuating.

FIG. 109 (l') shows a state in which the wipe effect display of the second wipe is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w13a is started from the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w13b is started from the upper right corner of the display screen. The wipe-in start of the wipe display w13a and w13b is the start of the second wipe. The wipe displays w13a and w13b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like.

In this modification, the second wipe is started after the end of the first wipe. The wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, the wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner, and the wipe display of the first wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. , The wipe display of the second wipe may appear from the lower left corner and the upper right corner. The wipe display of the first wipe and the wipe display of the second wipe may have the same pattern. For example, the wipe display pattern of the first wipe and the second wipe may be the pattern of the wipe display w7a and w7b, or may be the pattern of the wipe display w13a and w13b.

FIG. 109 (m') shows a state in which the wipe displays w13a and w13b of the second wipe gradually spread so as to gradually cover the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The wipe display w13a is displayed so as to gradually spread from the lower left corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is displayed so as to gradually spread from the upper right corner of the display screen to the center of the display screen. ..

FIG. 109 (n') shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b is completed. The upper right end of the wipe display w13a and the left lower end of the wipe display w13b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w13a and w13b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 109 (o') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the second wipe wipe display w13a and w13b has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w13a is retracted toward the lower left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w13b is retracted toward the upper right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. At the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is started, the shaking variation display of the jackpot symbol mode "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol mode of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is a combination of symbols in the case of a probability variation jackpot.

FIG. 109 (p') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w13a and w13b of the second wipe is completed. The wipe display w13a shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w13b shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. The completion of the wipeout of the wipe displays w13a and w13b is the end of the second wipe. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. ing. In this example, as shown in FIG. 109 (k'), after the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2", which is a design mode of the jackpot of the non-probability change jackpot, is displayed after the wipe effect of the first wipe. , As shown in FIG. 109 (o'), after the wipe effect display of the second wipe, the shaking variation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3", which is a jackpot design mode of the probability variation jackpot, is displayed. The second wipe effect display of this example is a promotion effect display in which the effect display suggesting a non-probability change jackpot can be switched to the effect display suggesting a probability change jackpot.

FIG. 109 (q') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this modified example, the wipe effect display is performed a plurality of times (twice in this example) during one symbol variation display (for example, after the start of the swing variation of the out-of-design mode). The design of the wipe display of the first wipe and the design of the wipe display of the second wipe may be different or the same. In addition, the wipe display w7a and w7b of the pattern including the image of the face of the princess is more than the case where the wipe effect display of the first wipe is performed by the wipe display w13a and w13b of the pattern including the image of the face of the princess. It may be configured so that the wipe effect can be easily performed a plurality of times when the effect display is performed. In addition, in one symbol variation display, the reverse effect display and the revival effect display are more likely to be performed when the wipe effect display is performed a plurality of times than when the wipe effect display is performed once. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed. The patterns (pictures) of the multiple wipe effect display in one pattern variation display may be all different, partly the same, partly the same number of times, or before. The number of times may be the same.

(Example 15)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 15th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (q). FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of the figures of FIGS. 110 (a) to 110 (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 110A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 110A, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In the special drawing 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, four hold icons b1, b2, b3, and b4 are displayed. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area 2, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. There is. The hold icons b1 to b4 are black circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. In this embodiment, the black circle hold icon is the default hold icon. A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special drawing 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 110A, the changing icon a1 in the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icons b1 to b4. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 110B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. In this example, the changing icon a1 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 110 (d) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The changing icon a2 may be enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 110 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 110 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 110 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 110 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 110 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the palace is defeated by the enemy of the palace is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. Further, in this example, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 110 (i), one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230, and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased by one. As a result, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 becomes 4.

FIG. 110 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w11a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w11b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w11a and w11b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image. The wipe display w11a includes a part (upper left part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image, and the wipe display w11b includes another part (lower right part) of the "Yoshimune" logo image. The logo image included in the wipe display w11a and the logo image included in the wipe display w11b form a logo image of one pattern. In this example, the super effect display is interrupted by the start of the wipe effect display.

In this example, the patterns of the wipe displays w11a and w11b including the logo image are the patterns for notifying the change, and the wipe displays w11a and w11b are displayed as the notice effect display of the change. The wipe display for pre-reading notice is not limited to the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and may include an image of the character's princess face. Further, for example, when the wipe display w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 106 (h') and 106 (i') are normal patterns, the wipe display pattern for pre-reading notice is different from the normal pattern. You just have to.

FIG. 110 (k) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is interrupted during the appearance display of the wipe displays w11a and w11b, and the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black is started. There is. The decorative design is displayed even during the blackout effect display. The darkening effect display may be started in the maximum wipe state of the wipe effect display, or may be started when the wipe out of the wipe effect display. When the wipe effect display is interrupted, the darkening effect display may not be displayed, and even if the darkening effect display is not displayed and the effect display shown in FIG. 110 (l) is displayed after the wipe effect display is interrupted. Good.

FIG. 110 (l) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is resumed after the end of the darkening effect display, and the animation display of the scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed again. The variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the size before the reduced display, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Has been restarted.

FIG. 110 (m) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

FIG. 110 (n) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which a palace and an enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed.

FIG. 110 (o) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the enemy of the palace collapses and the lord wins the confrontation is displayed. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, so that the "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, swings up and down in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed in the shaking fluctuation display of the mode. The animation of the scene where the lord won the confrontation and the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" are displays suggesting a big hit.

FIG. 110 (p) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 110 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

For example, the wipe display w7a and w7b including the image of the face of the palace is the normal wipe pattern, and is different from the normal wipe pattern for the notice (in this example, the pattern including the "Yoshimune" logo image). ) Wipe display w11a, w11b may be displayed as a notice that the reverse effect display will be performed. The design of the wipe display w11a and w11b may be a design for interruption in the middle, which is used when the wipe effect display is interrupted in the middle. The wipe effect display is more likely to be interrupted in the middle when the wipe effect display is performed in the wipe display of the pattern for interruption than when the wipe effect display is performed in the normal pattern wipe display. It may be configured.

Even when the wipe effect display is performed by the wipe display of the pattern for advance notice, the reverse effect display may not be displayed after the wipe effect display. For example, in the wipe effect display by the wipe display of the pattern for advance notice, the maximum wipe state is reached, then the wipeout is performed, the fluctuation of the misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the normal effect display, and finally the misaligned symbol mode is displayed. An effect display that is fixedly displayed may be performed. In addition, when the wipe effect is displayed by the normal wipe display of the pattern and the wipe effect is displayed by the wipe display of the preview pattern, the reverse effect is displayed after the wipe effect is displayed. It may be configured for ease of use. Here, the reverse effect may be an effect in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

(Example 16)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 16th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 111A to 111N. FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 111 (a) to 111 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 111A shows a state in which the special figure variation game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 111 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 111, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 111B shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 111C shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 111 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 111 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the lord in the production is displayed, and the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Displays an animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord in the production.

FIG. 111 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 111 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 111 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the empty background image before and after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 111 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the wipe effect display of this embodiment, the wipe display w15 is started to be displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the wipe display w15 spreads over the entire display screen in a counterclockwise spiral shape. Appears and is displayed in the mode. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w15 is displayed so as to wipe off all but the decorative design.

FIG. 111 (i) shows the state of the wipe-in in which the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is displayed. The image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image are wiped out by the wipe display w15. The decorative design is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w15. In this example, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized even during the wipe effect display. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 111 (i), the wipe display w15 includes two images of the face of the palace. The image of the face of the palace was not displayed at the beginning of the appearance of the wipe display w15, but is displayed as the appearance display of the wipe display w15 progresses. The images of the faces of these palace may be displayed as still images or may be displayed as animations. The animation may be an animation in which the image of the face of the palace is rotated, or an animation in which the image of the face of the palace sways left and right or up and down.

FIG. 111 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w15. When the appearance display of the wipe display w15 is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. In addition, the pattern of the wipe display w15 displayed in the super reach effect display in which the confrontation effect between the palace and the enemy of the palace is executed is a pattern including the image of the face of the palace. The display mode of the face of the palace included in the wipe display w15 is different from the display mode of the palace that lost the confrontation with the enemy of the palace shown in FIGS. 111 (f) and 111 (g). As a result, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may make it easier for the player to forget the effect of losing the confrontation.

FIG. 111 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe-out is performed in a display mode opposite to the wipe-in, in which the wipe display w15 contracts in a clockwise spiral shape. By performing the wipeout, the display of the background image or the like on the decorative pattern display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w715, the background image changes to an empty background image.

FIG. 111 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 is displayed. The withdrawal display of the wipe display w15 is almost completed, and most of the background image of the sky is visible. Further, in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is displayed in a fluctuating manner overlapping with the wipe display w15. Further, a mini-decorative symbol of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" in a reduced display mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen so as to overlap with the right symbol of the decorative symbol. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol may be displayed at two places. The timing at which the decorative pattern is displayed in two places may be at the time of wipeout, at the completion of wipeout, or after wipeout. The swaying fluctuation display corresponding to the out-of-order symbol of the mini decorative symbol may be erased by wiping out.

FIG. 111 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display 15 is completed. The wipe display w15 is erased in a clockwise spiral manner. The completion of withdrawal of the wipe display 15 is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the design mode is out of the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen. "Is shaken and fluctuated in a display mode that shakes left and right.

FIG. 111 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In the wipe-in of the wipe effect display in this embodiment, the wipe display w15 appears in the center of the display screen, and the wipe display w15 spreads around like a whirlpool. Further, in the wipeout of the wipe effect display in the present embodiment, the wipe display w15 shrinks in the direction opposite to the wipe-in, and the background image becomes gradually visible from the periphery of the wipe display w15. As described above, in the wipe effect display, the wipe display may not appear from the corner of the display screen. It should be noted that the wipe display (for example, the wipe display w3a, w3b, w5a, w5b, w7a, w7b, w9a, w9b, w11a, w11b, w13a, w13b) that appears from the corner of the display screen is displayed rather than the symbol variation display. A symbol variation display in which a wipe display (for example, wipe display w15) that appears from the center of the display screen may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode, or a wipe that appears from the center of the display screen. It may be easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display in which the wipe display appearing from the corner of the display screen is displayed than in the symbol variation display in which the display is displayed. Even if the pre-reading notice display is more likely to be displayed at the time of wipe-out when the wipe display appearing from the center of the display screen is displayed than when the wipe display appearing from the corner of the display screen is displayed. Well, it is easier to display the look-ahead notice display at the time of wipe out when the wipe display that appears from the corner of the display screen is displayed than when the wipe display that appears from the center of the display screen is displayed. May be good. The wipe display of one of the wipe display appearing from the corner of the display screen and the wipe display appearing from the center of the display screen may be a look-ahead notice display.

In the wipe effect display, the wipe display (for example, wipe display w3a, w3b, w5a, w5b, w7a, w7b, w9a, w9b, w11a, w11b, w13a, w13b) and the display screen appearing from the corner of the display screen. It may be configured so that the player can set which of the wipe display (for example, the wipe display w15) that appears from the center is displayed on the setting screen. It should be noted that one of the wipe display (wipe effect A) appearing from the edge of the display screen and the wipe display (wipe effect B) appearing from the center of the display screen is the other than the symbol variation display in which the wipe display is displayed. In the symbol variation display in which the wipe display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

(Example 17)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 17th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 (a) to (z) and (a) to (b). 112 (a) to (z) and (a) to (b) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 112, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port are arranged one by one in the lower center of the game board, and are divided into two branches of a game ball passage having a substantially inverted Y shape. A special drawing 1 starting port is provided on one of the lower ends, and a special drawing 2 starting port is provided on one of the other lower ends. Each time a game ball entered from the upper end opening of the game ball passage passes through the game ball passage, a special drawing 1 starting port and a special drawing are provided by a distribution mechanism (not shown) provided in the game ball passage. 2 It is distributed alternately to the starting port. As a result, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, so that the hold of the special figure 1 and the hold of the special figure 2 increase alternately. .. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called starting port winning order changing pachinko machine that executes a special figure changing game in the order in which the game ball wins the special drawing 1 starting port or the special drawing 2 starting port.

FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 112 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 1. A special figure hold icon display area is provided in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. From the left, the special figure hold icon display area is hold 1 display area, hold 2 display area, hold 3 display area, hold 4 display area, hold 5 display area, hold 6 display area, hold 7 display area, hold 8 display area. It is divided into eight areas, and up to eight hold icons can be displayed. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game having the first hold order is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game having the second hold order is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed, a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game with the third hold order is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon for the special figure change game with the fourth hold order is displayed in the hold 4 display area. The corresponding hold icon is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure change game with the fifth hold order is displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the special figure change with the hold order 6th in the hold 6 display area. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the game is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game having the 7th hold order is displayed in the hold 7 display area, and the hold order is the 8th in the hold 8 display area. The hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure variable game of is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 112 (a), since the special figure 2 variable game is held first and the special figure 1 variable game is held second, the first special figure is held in the hold 1 display area. The hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of 2 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icons c1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon).

A changing icon display area for displaying a changing icon is provided above the special figure holding icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the game state is a non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 112B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The changing icon may be enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 112 (e) shows a state in which six game balls are won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and the number of hold of the special figure variable game is increased by six. In this embodiment, since the game balls are alternately won in the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, three game balls are won in the special figure 1 start port and the game balls are in the special figure 2 start port. I have won 3 prizes. In addition, since the most recent winning of the first game ball out of the six is the winning of the special figure 1 starting port, the winning of the six game balls is the special drawing 2. The game ball wins in the order of the starting port, the special drawing 1 starting opening, the special drawing 2 starting opening, the special drawing 1 starting opening, the special drawing 2 starting opening, and the special drawing 1 starting opening. The hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 3 display area. b3 is displayed, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 4 display area, and the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold 5 display area corresponds to the hold of the fifth special figure 1. The hold icon b4 is displayed, the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 6 display area, and the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed, and the hold 7 display area holds the seventh special figure 1. The corresponding hold icon b5 is displayed. In the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is continuously displayed. As a result, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure variable games is 7. When the hold is increased, the hold icon increase animation is displayed. The hold icon increase animation may be an animation in which the hold icon is gradually raised from the bottom of the display screen, an animation in which the display size of the hold icon is gradually increased, or the like. ..

FIG. 112 (f) shows a state in which the pending full tank display has started. In this embodiment, the reservation of the special figure is 8 and the tank is full, and when the number of reservations reaches 7, the display of the reservation full tank is started. At the start of the pending full tank display, there is an animation in which the image j4 of the princess's face (hereinafter, may be referred to as "princess j4") moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4. Princess j4 is displayed moving to the left while swinging from side to side. At the start of the hold full tank imminent display, the annotation of the appearance scene of the princess in the hold full tank imminent display is displayed.

FIG. 112 (g) shows a state in which the animation in which the princess j4 moves is completed. As a result, the annotation of the appearance scene of the princess who is on hold and full tank is completed.

FIG. 112 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 112 (i) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c2 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is held. The hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 6.

FIG. 112 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 112 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is exhausted and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c4 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 5.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is once 7 or more and then the number of holdings is less than 6, the animation of leaving the image just before the full tank is started. The hold full tank imminent image exit animation is an animation in which the princess j4 of the hold full tank imminent display is erased in a manner of moving out of the display screen. Princess j4 is moved to the right. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 112 (l) shows a state in which the image exit animation before the hold is full is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed on hold, has moved to the right and is gradually erased.

FIG. 112 (m) shows a state in which the image exit animation just before the hold is full has ended. When the princess j4 of the pending full tank display is moved to the right and erased, the pending full tank imminent image exit animation ends.

FIG. 112 (n) shows a state in which two game balls are won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and the hold of the special figure variable game is increased by two. In this embodiment, since the game balls are alternately won in the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 start port and the game ball is in the special figure 2 start port. I have won one. In addition, since the most recent winning of the first game ball of these two is the winning of the special figure 1 starting port, the winning of these two game balls is the special drawing 2. The game ball wins in the order of the starting port and the special drawing 1 starting port. The hold icon c5 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. b6 is displayed. The hold icons b3, c3, b4, c4, and b5 corresponding to the first to fifth hold are continuously displayed in the hold 1 display area to the hold 5 display area. As a result, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure variable games is 7.

Further, in FIG. 112 (n), since the number of holds is 7, the display of the full tank on hold has started. With the start of the pending full tank display, an animation is displayed in which the princess j4 moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 112 (o) shows a state in which the animation in which the princess j4 moves is completed. As a result, the annotation of the appearance scene of the princess who is on hold and full tank is completed.

FIG. 112 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 112 (q) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a5 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a5 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b5 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 6.

FIG. 112 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 112 (s) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is exhausted and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a6 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a6 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c5 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 5.

In FIG. 112 (s), since the number of holds is less than 6 after the number of holds is once 7 or more, the image exit animation just before the hold is full is started. The image on hold is full. Due to the exit animation, Princess j4 is moved to the right. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 112 (t) shows a state in which two game balls are won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and the hold of the special figure variable game is increased by two. In this embodiment, since the game balls are alternately won in the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 start port and the game ball is in the special figure 2 start port. I have won one. In addition, since the most recent winning of the first game ball of these two is the winning of the special figure 1 starting port, the winning of these two game balls is the special drawing 2. The game ball wins in the order of the starting port and the special drawing 1 starting port. The hold icon c6 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. b7 is displayed. The hold icons b4, c4, b5, c5, and b6 corresponding to the first to fifth hold are continuously displayed in the hold 1 display area to the hold 5 display area. As a result, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure variable games is 7.

In FIG. 112 (t), since the number of holds has reached 7 again, the display of the hold full tank is started. When the hold full tank imminent display is started, the hold full tank imminent image exit animation is canceled in the middle, and an animation in which the princess j4 moves to the left from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 112 (u) shows a state in which the animation in which the princess j4 moves is completed. As a result, the annotation of the appearance scene of the princess who is on hold and full tank is completed.

FIG. 112 (v) shows a state in which one game ball is won at the starting port during the execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and the hold of the special figure variable game is increased by one. As a result, the number of pending items becomes 8, and the tank is full. The hold icon c7 corresponding to the hold of the eighth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the hold icon display area. The hold icons b4, c4, b5, c5, b6, c6, and b7 corresponding to the first to fifth hold are continuously displayed in the hold 1 display area to the hold 7 display area. As a result, it is notified that the number of reserved special figure variable games is eight.

When the hold is full, the hold full blessing animation starts. As shown in FIG. 112 (v), in the hold full tank blessing animation of this embodiment, an animation in which the display size of the princess j4 gradually increases is displayed. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 112 (w) shows a state in which the hold full tank blessing animation has ended. The hold full tank blessing animation ends when the display size of Princess j4 reaches a predetermined display size. During the period when the number of holds is full after the end of the hold full blessing animation, the hold full blessing display in which the princess j4 is displayed in a predetermined display size is displayed.

FIG. 112 (x) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the stop display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 112 (y) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a7 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a7 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b6 is held. 4 Moved to the display area, the hold icon c6 is moved to the hold 5 display area, the hold icon b7 is moved to the hold 6 display area, and the hold icon c7 is moved to the hold 7 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 7.

When the number of holds is 7 and the tank is not full, the hold full blessing display ends and the animation for switching to the hold full tank display is displayed. As shown in FIG. 112 (y), in the switching animation, an animation is displayed in which the princess j4, which has reached a predetermined size in the hold full tank blessing display, is gradually reduced to the display size in the hold full tank imminent display. .. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 112 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the stop display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 112 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 112 (z), and shows a state in which the hold of special figure 2 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a8 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a8 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b5 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b6 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c6 is held. 4 The display is moved to the display area, the hold icon b7 is moved to the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon c7 is moved to the hold 6 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 6. In FIG. 112 (z), the animation for switching to the hold full tank display is completed, and the princess j4 is displayed in the display size in the hold full tank display.

FIG. 112 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a9 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c5 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b6 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c6 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b7 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, and the hold icon c7 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 5.

In FIG. 112 (c), since the number of holds is less than 6 after the number of holds is once 7 or more, the animation of leaving the image just before the hold is full is started. The image on hold is full. Due to the exit animation, Princess j4 is moved to the right. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the image exit animation before the hold is full is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed on hold, has moved to the right and is gradually erased.

FIG. 112 (e) shows a state in which the image exit animation before the hold is full is completed. When the princess j4 of the pending full tank display is moved to the right and erased, the pending full tank imminent image exit animation ends.

FIG. 112 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a so-called starting port winning order fluctuating pachinko machine that executes a special figure changing game in the order in which the special drawing 1 starting port 230 or the special drawing 2 starting port is won, and the number of reservations is eight. It becomes a tongue. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the appearance animation of the hold full tank imminent display and the hold full tank imminent display when the number of holds becomes 7, which is 1 less than the full tank, and when the hold number becomes full. The hold full tank blessing display is displayed in, and when the number of holds is 5 or less, which is 3 less than the full tank, the hold full tank imminent image exit animation is displayed. When the pachinko machine 100 is a special figure 2 priority variable machine, the appearance animation of the hold full tank imminent display and the hold full tank imminent when the number of hold of special figure 1 becomes 3 which is 1 less than the full tank. The display is displayed, and when the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is full, the hold full tank blessing display is displayed, and when the number of holds in Special Figure 1 is 2 or less, which is 2 less than the full tank, the hold is full. Immediate image exit animation may be displayed, or when the number of holds in special figure 2 becomes 3, which is 1 less than the full tank, the appearance animation of the hold full tank display and the hold full tank display are displayed, and the special figure is displayed. When the number of holds in 2 is full, the hold full blessing display is displayed, and when the number of holds in Special Figure 2 is 2 or less, which is 2 less than the full tank, the hold full tank imminent image exit animation is displayed. You may. In addition, the appearance animation of the hold full tank imminent display, the hold full tank imminent display, the hold full tank blessing display, and the hold full tank imminent image exit animation may be displayed only when the game state is the non-electric support state. ..

(Example 18)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 18th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 (a) to (z) and (a) to (f). FIGS. 113 (a) to 113 (z) and (a) to (f) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 113, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. Similar to the pachinko machine 100 according to the 17th embodiment, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the special figure variable game in the order in which the game balls win the special figure 1 start port or the special figure 2 start port. It is a forward-changing pachinko machine.

FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 113 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 1. The first special figure 2 variable game is reserved, and the second special figure 1 variable game is reserved. The hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the hold 2 display area of the second special figure 1 The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold is displayed. The hold icons c1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In addition, the game state is a non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 113B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is exhausted and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 113 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 113 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 113 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 113 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 113 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order.

FIG. 113 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 113 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, 6 game balls are won at the start port and 6 special figure variable games are held between the time when the hold icon is erased and the maximum wipe state is reached due to the start of the super reach effect display. The number will increase, bringing the total number of holds to 7. In this embodiment, since the game balls are alternately won in the special figure 1 start port and the special figure 2 start port, three game balls are won in the special figure 1 start port and the game balls are in the special figure 2 start port. I have won 3 prizes. In addition, since the most recent winning of the first game ball out of the six is the winning of the special figure 1 starting port, the winning of the six game balls is the special drawing 2. The game ball wins in the order of the starting port, the special drawing 1 starting opening, the special drawing 2 starting opening, the special drawing 1 starting opening, the special drawing 2 starting opening, and the special drawing 1 starting opening. In this embodiment, the reservation of the special figure is 8 and the tank is full, and when the number of reservations is 7, the display of the full tank of the reservation is started, but the princess is displayed from the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the animation of j4 moving to the left overlaps with the wipe display w7 and starts to be displayed, the princess j4 is invisible to the player.

FIG. 113 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the changing icon, the hold icon, and the princess j4 on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. As shown in FIG. 113 (i), the changing icon a2, the holding icon b2, c2, b3, b4, and the princess j4 are gradually displayed from the gap between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In the figure, the left-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 113 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. The changing icon a2 is displayed in the changing icon display area. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the fifth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 6 display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. By displaying seven hold icons, it is notified that the number of holds is seven. Further, in FIG. 113 (m), the animation of the appearance scene of the princess on hold full tank display in which the princess j4 moves is completed.

FIG. 113 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order. The changing icon a2 is erased while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the stop display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 113 (o) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c2 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 is held. The hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. In addition, one game ball is won at the start port of Special Figure 2, and the number of holds is increased by 1, and the hold icon c5 is displayed in the hold 7 display area. By displaying 7 hold icons, it is notified that the number of holds is 7.

FIG. 113 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 113 (p), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. With the start of the super reach effect display, the princess j4 is deleted. The princess j4 may be displayed during the super reach effect display.

In FIG. 113 (q), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 113 (r) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 113 (s) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a display that suggests an outlier.

FIG. 113 (t) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order.

FIG. 113 (u) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image.

FIG. 113 (v) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port and one special figure variable game is held between the start of the wipe-in in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b appear and the time when the maximum wipe state is reached. The number will increase to 8 in total. Since the number of holds is full, the hold full blessing animation starts during the maximum wipe state. In the hold full tank blessing animation of this embodiment, an animation in which the display size of the princess j4 gradually increases is displayed, but since the princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b, the animation of the princess j4 is visible. It is impossible.

FIG. 113 (w) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative symbol, the background image, the changing icon, the hold icon, and the princess j4 on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. As shown in FIG. 113 (w), the changing icon a3, the holding icon c2, b3, c3, b4, and the princess j4 are gradually displayed from the gap between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The display size of Princess j4 is gradually increasing.

FIG. 113 (x) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. The changing icon a3 is erased while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In the hold icon display area, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the third special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b4 corresponding to the hold of the fourth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 4 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c4 corresponding to the hold of the fifth special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b5 corresponding to the hold of the sixth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 6 display area. Is displayed, the hold icon c5 corresponding to the hold of the seventh special figure 2 is displayed in the hold 7 display area, and the hold icon b6 corresponding to the hold of the eighth special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 8 display area. Is displayed. By displaying eight hold icons, it is notified that the number of holds is eight. Further, in FIG. 113 (x), the hold full tank blessing animation in which the display size of the princess j4 expands has ended, and the hold full tank blessing display in which the princess j4 is displayed in a predetermined display size is displayed. .. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the stop display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 113 (y) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c3 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c4 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 7 display area. By displaying 7 hold icons, it is notified that the number of holds is 7.

When the number of holds is 7 and the tank is not full, the hold full blessing display ends and the animation for switching to the hold full tank display is displayed. As shown in FIG. 113 (y), in the switching animation, an animation is displayed in which the princess j4, which has reached a predetermined size in the hold full tank blessing display, is gradually reduced to the display size in the hold full tank imminent display. .. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The princess j4 may be displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 113 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order. Princess j4 is displayed overlapping with the stop display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 113 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 113 (z), and shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a5 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a5 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon c3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon b5 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, the hold icon c5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area, and the hold icon b6 is moved and displayed in the hold 6 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 6. Further, in FIG. 113 (a), the animation for switching to the pending full tank display is completed. Princess j4 is displayed in the display size in the pending full tank display.

FIG. 113 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 2 having the first hold order is digested and the special figure 2 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 2 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and Hold icon Decrease animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon c3 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 2 becomes the changing icon a6 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a6 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b4 is moved to the hold 1 display area, the hold icon c4 is moved to the hold 2 display area, the hold icon b5 is moved to the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon c5 is held. 4 The display area is moved and displayed, and the hold icon b5 is moved and displayed in the hold 5 display area. The number of hold icons informs that the number of holds is 5.

In FIG. 113 (c), since the number of holds is less than 6 after the number of holds is once 7 or more, the animation of leaving the image just before the hold is full is started. The image on hold is full. Due to the exit animation, Princess j4 is moved to the right. In the figure, the right-pointing arrow shown above the princess j4 indicates the moving direction of the princess j4.

FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which the image exit animation before the hold is full is displayed. The princess j4, which is displayed on hold, has moved to the right and is gradually erased.

FIG. 113 (e) shows a state in which the image exit animation just before the hold is full has ended. When the princess j4 of the pending full tank display is moved to the right and erased, the pending full tank imminent image exit animation ends.

FIG. 113 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, an animation of the appearance of the princess j4 in the pending full tank display and an animation in which the display size of the princess j4 switching to the reserved full tank blessing display is enlarged are displayed overlapping with the wipe display. In this way, the hold full tank imminent display, the hold full tank blessing display, and the effect display (in this example, princess j4) in the hold full tank imminent image exit animation may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display. ..

(Example 19)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 19th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (x). FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (x) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 114, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 114 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 114B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 114 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon reduction animation. Will be done. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 114 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 114 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 114 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon and the hold icon are hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 114 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution. In this example, in the super reach effect display, as a display suggesting a loss, a wipe effect is displayed after the animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord and the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" are displayed. The display is done. In the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display may not be performed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed.

FIG. 114 (h) shows the state after the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The shaking is displayed in a variable manner, the changing icon a2 is redisplayed in the changing icon display area, and the hold icon b2 is redisplayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 between the time when the hold icon is hidden with the start of the super reach effect display and the end of the wipe effect display, and the special figure is drawn. The hold of 1 is increased by 1. Special figure 1 Hold icon b3 in the hold icon display area is displayed in the hold 2 display area corresponding to the increased hold. The hold icon b3 is the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The hold icon b3 is a look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 114 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 114 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon reduction animation. Will be done. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 114 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 114 (l), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 114 (m), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 114 (n) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 114 (p) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 114 (q) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 114 (r) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 114 (s) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol ends, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started. As shown in FIG. 114 (s), the changing icon a3 and the holding icon b3 are gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the wipe effect display, and the hold icon b4 corresponding to the increased hold gradually moves from the bottom toward the hold 2 display area. A hold increase animation of the mode is displayed. The hold icon b4 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b. The hold icon b4 is the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. In the figure, the upward arrow shown above the hold icon b4 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4.

FIG. 114 (t) shows the state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. A hold increase animation is displayed in which the hold icon b4 moves, overlapping the wipe display w7b. In the figure, the upward arrow shown in the upper right of the hold icon b4 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4.

In FIG. 114 (u), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode. The movement of the hold icon b4 to the hold 2 display area has been completed, and the hold increase animation has ended.

FIG. 114 (v) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 114 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 114 (x) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold icon reduction animation. Will be done. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. In the hold icon reduction animation, the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In this embodiment, the hold increase animation in which the hold icon displayed when the hold increases moves to a predetermined hold display area is displayed overlapping with the wipe display.

(Example 20)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 20th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (u). FIGS. 115 (a) to 115 (u) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 115, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 115 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. A hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 115B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 115 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / variable icons. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon.

FIG. 115 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, the super reach effect display is started in the state at the time shown in FIG. 115 (e). With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon is erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. It has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The changing icon is hidden during a part of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 115 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 115 (g) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 115 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 115 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 115 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 115 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol ends, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started. As shown in FIG. 115 (k), the changing icon a2 is gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the wipe effect display, and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold gradually moves from the bottom toward the hold 1 display area. A hold increase animation of the mode is displayed. The hold icon b2 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b. The hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The display mode of the button hold icon is a display mode of the look-ahead notice, which is a display for urging the player to press the chance button 136. In the figure, the upward arrow shown above the hold icon b2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b2. The hold icon b2, which is a button hold icon, is displayed in a mode rotated by 90 ° counterclockwise from a positive orientation mode at the start of display.

FIG. 115 (l) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. A hold increase animation is displayed in which the hold icon b2 moves, overlapping the wipe display w7b. In the figure, the upward arrow shown in the upper right of the hold icon b2 indicates the moving direction of the hold icon b4. The hold icon b2 moves upward and rotates clockwise, gradually becoming a positive orientation.

In FIG. 115 (m), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode. The movement of the hold icon b2 to the hold 1 display area has been completed, and the hold increase animation has ended. When the hold increase animation of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is completed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) of the chance button 136 is started. The operation period may be started during the execution of the animation.

FIG. 115 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 115 (o) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / variable icons. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. In the figure, the upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is gradually expanded while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

FIG. 115 (p) shows a state in which the movement between the hold / change icons is completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

FIG. 115 (q) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display is started because the chance button 136 is pressed by the player. In the changing icon change display, an animation is displayed in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3, and the changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 115 (r) shows a state in which the changing icon change effect display has ended. When the effect image j5 is erased, the changing icon a3 becomes visible again, and the changing icon ends. The changing icon a3, which has become visible again, has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The display mode of the face hold icon is a notice mode.

FIG. 115 (s) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 115 (s), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted.

FIG. 115 (t) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to an empty background image, and the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 115 (u) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the hold increase animation in which the hold icon displayed when the hold increases moves to a predetermined hold display area is displayed overlapping with the wipe display. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed when the hold icon or the changing icon of the display mode of the button holding icon is displayed, the holding change display or the changing icon change display is displayed. In this example, when the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed, the chance button 136 is pressed, so that the changing icon change display is displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is displayed, the hold change effect display is displayed. Note that the pending change effect display and the changing icon change effect display differ only in whether the icon to be changed is a hold icon or a changing icon, and the display mode (display content) of the effect display is the same. is there. The changing icon may be called the hold icon. The changing icon change effect display may be referred to as a hold change effect display. It should be noted that the display mode of the effect display may be different between the hold change effect display and the changing icon change effect display.

(Example 21)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (n). FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 116, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 115 (a), the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 116B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 116 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 116 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 116 (e), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the scene where the lord and the old man confront each other over drinking alcohol. The effect of displaying the animation is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the grandfather is displayed on the left side of the display screen. A background image including an image of a princess and an image of an aunt is displayed on the back of the image of the palace and the image of the grandfather on the display screen.

FIG. 116 (f) shows a state in which the button press suggestion display including the character string image “Start by button operation” is displayed in the white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion display is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion display is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the confrontation between the lord and the grandfather is started, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation valid period. In that case, the scene of the confrontation between the lord and the old man is not displayed, and only the result of the confrontation is displayed. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the button press suggestion display is deleted and the operation valid period ends.

FIG. 116 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene is displayed in which the palace and the grandfather drink alcohol in a cup in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced.

FIG. 116 (h) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, as a display suggesting an outlier, an animation of a scene in which the old man wins compared to drinking and the palace gets drunk is displayed.

FIG. 116 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is a display suggesting an outlier. In the super reach effect display including the animation of the drinking comparison scene, the wipe effect display is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. ..

FIG. 116 (j) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen. "Decoration 2" is swayed and changed, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display, but when the super reach effect display ends and the normal effect display is restored, the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is displayed differently. The aspect has not changed.

FIG. 116 (k) shows a state in which the changing icon a2 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed.

FIG. 116 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 116 (m) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / variable icons. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. In the figure, the upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is gradually expanded while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

FIG. 116 (n) shows a state in which the movement between the hold / change icons is completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), a display prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed during the super reach effect display. Since the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is hidden during the super reach effect display, the display mode of the hold icon b2 does not change even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display. Further, since the chance button 136 is not pressed after the hold icon b2 is redisplayed and the changing icon a3 is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon b2 and the changing icon a3 has not changed.

(Example 22)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 22nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (A) to 116 (P). FIGS. 116 (A) to 116 (P) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 116 (A) to 116 (P), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 116 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 116 (A), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 116 (B) shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 116 (C) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 116 (D) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 116 (E), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 116 (F) shows a state in which the button press suggestion display including the character string image “Start by button operation” is displayed in the white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion display is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion display is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy is started, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation valid period. In that case, the scene of the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is not displayed, and only the result of the confrontation is displayed. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the button press suggestion display is deleted and the operation valid period ends. The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced.

FIG. 116 (G) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 116 (H) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 116 (I) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 116 (J) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 116 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

In FIG. 116 (L), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows a state in which the shaking is displayed in a display mode.

FIG. 116 (M) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swaying and fluctuatingly displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 116 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 116 (O) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / variable icons. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. In the figure, the upward arrow shown to the right of the changing icon a3 indicates the moving direction of the changing icon. The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is gradually expanded while moving to the changing icon display area (hold 0 display area). The changing icon a3, which is a display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed as a notice effect display of the change.

FIG. 116 (P) shows a state in which the movement between the hold / change icons is completed. The changing icon a3 is displayed in the changing icon display area with a predetermined display size. The period during which the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the button hold icon, is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (F), a display prompting the pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed during the super reach effect display. Since the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is hidden during the super reach effect display, the display mode of the hold icon b2 does not change even if the chance button 136 is pressed during the super reach effect display. Further, since the chance button 136 is not pressed after the hold icon b2 is redisplayed and the changing icon a3 is displayed, the display mode of the holding icon b2 and the changing icon a3 has not changed.

(Example 23)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 23rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (n). FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 117 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 117B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 117 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 117 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 117 (e), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 117 (f) shows a state in which the button press suggestion display including the character string image “Start by button operation” is displayed in the white rectangular frame on the decorative symbol display device 208. The period during which the button press suggestion display is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136, and the button press suggestion display is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. In this example, if the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the confrontation between the lord and the enemy is started, and the chance button 136 is not pressed by the player during the operation valid period. In that case, the scene of the confrontation between the lord and the enemy of the lord is not displayed, and only the result of the confrontation is displayed. Further, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the operation valid period, the button press suggestion display is deleted and the operation valid period ends. The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced.

FIG. 117 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 117 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 117 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 117 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 117 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player with a part of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is restarted, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (k), in the hold change effect display, an animation is displayed in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is overlapped with the wipe display w7b and displayed. In this way, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display. The effect image j5 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon that is different from the change target. The hold change effect display of this example is a response display displayed in response to the operation of the chance button 136.

In FIG. 117 (l), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows a state in which shaking and fluctuation are displayed in the display mode. Further, in FIG. 117 (l), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is erased, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2, which has become visible again, has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The display mode of the face hold icon is the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 117 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swaying and fluctuatingly displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 117 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the hold change effect is not displayed in response to the press of the chance button 136 during the super reach effect display, but the chance button 136 is pressed when the button hold icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout. The pending change effect display is performed accordingly. It should be noted that the changing icon of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed at the start of the super reach effect display, and when the chance button 136 is pressed when the changing icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout, the corresponding The changing icon effect display may be performed according to the pressing.

(Example 24)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 24th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 (A) to 117 (O). FIGS. 117 (A) to 117 (O) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 117 (A) to 117 (O), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 117 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 117 (A), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 117 (B) shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 117 (C) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 117 (D) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 117 (E), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 117 (F) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

In the super reach effect display of this example, the button press suggestion display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach effect display of this example, the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is started regardless of whether or not the player's chance button 136 is pressed.

FIG. 117 (G) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 117 (H) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 117 (I) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 117 (J) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 117 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

FIG. 117 (L) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. There is. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is restarted, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (L), in the hold change effect display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is overlapped with the wipe display w7b and displayed. In this way, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display. The effect image j5 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon that is different from the change target.

In FIG. 117 (M), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode. Further, in FIG. 117 (l), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is erased, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2, which has become visible again, has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The display mode of the face hold icon is the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 117 (N) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2".

FIG. 117 (O) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the button press suggestion display suggesting the press of the chance button 136 is not displayed during the super reach effect display, and the operation valid period is not started. In addition, when the button hold icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout, the hold change effect display is performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136. It should be noted that the changing icon of the display mode of the button hold icon is displayed at the start of the super reach effect display, and when the chance button 136 is pressed when the changing icon becomes visible after the start of wipeout, the corresponding The changing icon effect display may be performed according to the pressing.

In the 23rd and 24th embodiments, the hold change effect display may be performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 after the maximum wipe state. In addition, the hold change effect display may be performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 after the wipe-in. The entire pending change display may overlap the wipe display. In addition, the hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes according to the press of the chance button 136 in the maximum wipe state is not performed, and the hold change effect in which the button hold icon changes according to the press of the chance button 136 after the start of wipeout is performed. It may be configured so that the display is performed. It should be noted that at least the hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes according to the pressing of the chance button 136 during wipeout may be performed, and a certain super reach effect display (for example, the enemy of the palace and the lord) In response to the press of the chance button 136 at an earlier timing than another super reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display in which the lord and the old man compare drinks) The button hold icon may be configured to change the hold change effect display. Also, some time before the start of the wipe-in, some time after the start of the wipe-in, some time before the maximum wipe state, some time after the maximum wipe state, and some time before the start of the wipe-out. , The hold change effect display in which the button hold icon changes according to the player pressing the chance button 136 at a timing such as after a certain time from the start of the wipeout may be performed. If the chance button 136 is pressed during the period when the button hold icon is displayed as the hold icon, the hold change effect display is performed, and the chance button 136 is displayed during the period when the button hold icon is displayed as the changing icon. When is pressed, the changing icon change effect display is performed, so the difference between the hold change effect display and the changing icon change display is whether the change target is displayed as a hold icon or a changing icon. Only the difference. Therefore, whether or not the changing icon change effect display is executed depending on the timing of pressing the chance button 136 is the same as the hold change effect display.

(Example 25)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 25th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (p). FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (p), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 118 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 118B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 118 (e), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 118 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

In the super reach effect display of this example, the button press suggestion display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach effect display of this example, the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is started regardless of whether or not the player's chance button 136 is pressed.

FIG. 118 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 118 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 118 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 118 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 118 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

FIG. 118 (l) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. There is. In this example, it is determined that the reverse effect display is displayed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the hold change effect display is not displayed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 after the part of the hold icon b2 becomes visible.

In FIG. 118 (m), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows a state in which shaking and fluctuation are displayed in the display mode.

FIG. 118 (n) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

FIG. 118 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 118 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. The changing icon a2 is erased during the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon a2 may be deleted during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is performed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the wipeout in the wipe effect display. When the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is not performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 during the wipeout. As described above, when the revival effect display or the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is not performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 after the start of the wipe effect display. The same applies to the changing icon change display.

(Example 26)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 26th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (p). FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 119, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 119 (a), the number of reserved special figures 1 is 2, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 119 (b) shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 119 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 119 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 119 (e), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Production is started. Once the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is deleted, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is temporarily suspended. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 119 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

In the super reach effect display of this example, the button press suggestion display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach effect display of this example, the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is started regardless of whether or not the player's chance button 136 is pressed.

FIG. 119 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 119 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 119 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 119 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 119 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

FIG. 119 (l) shows a state in which the chance button 136 is pressed by the player after a part of the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, becomes visible after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. There is. When a part of the button hold icon becomes visible, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 related to the button hold icon is restarted, so that the player starts the hold change effect display in response to the pressing. As shown in FIG. 117 (L), in the hold change effect display, an animation in which the smoke effect image j5 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3 is displayed, and the hold icon b2 becomes invisible. A part of the effect image j5 is overlapped with the wipe display w7b and displayed. In this way, a part of the hold change effect display may be displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display. The effect image j5 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the hold icon or the changing icon that is different from the change target.

In FIG. 119 (m), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode. Further, in FIG. 119 (m), the hold change effect display is finished. When the effect image j5 is erased, the hold icon b2 becomes visible again, and the hold change effect display ends. The hold icon b2, which has become visible again, has changed to the display mode of the face hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The display mode of the face hold icon is the look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 119 (n) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black is started after the wipe effect display. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

FIG. 119 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 119 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is performed after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the wipeout in the wipe effect display. Even when the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display is performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 during the wipeout. In this way, even when the revival effect display or the reverse effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the hold change effect display may be performed in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 after the start of the wipe effect display. The same applies to the changing icon change display.

(Example 27)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 27th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (o). FIGS. 120 (a) to 120 (o) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 120, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 120 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 120 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the first special figure 1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second feature is displayed in the hold 2 display area. The hold icon b2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed. The hold icon b1 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104, and the hold icon b2 is the button hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon (normal hold icon). The button hold icon is a look-ahead advance notice mode, and is a display prompting the player to press the chance button 136. The period during which the hold icon of the button hold icon is displayed is the operation valid period of the chance button 136. Further, in the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. In this embodiment, the changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon (changing icon of the normal mode). The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 120 (b) shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. The changing icon may be erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 120 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and displays the movement animation between the hold / change icons and the hold decrease animation. To. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 120 (e), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then the super reach effect display is started. It shows the state. With the start of the super reach effect display, the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes, the changing icon is erased, and the animation of the scene where the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. To be started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. In the super reach effect display of this example, the hold icon is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 120 (e), the hold icon b2 is displayed so as to overlap the image of the palace. Since the hold icon b2, which is the button hold icon, is displayed, the operation validity period of the chance button 136 regarding the button hold icon is also continued. The changing icon may also be displayed during the super reach effect display.

FIG. 120 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

In the super reach effect display of this example, the button press suggestion display prompting the operation of the chance button 136 is not displayed, and the operation validity period of the chance button 136 is not started. In the super reach effect display of this example, the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is started regardless of whether or not the player's chance button 136 is pressed.

FIG. 120 (g) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 120 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 120 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the hold icon b2, the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. .. Further, in this example, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player before the hold icon b2 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and becomes invisible.

FIG. 120 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

Further, the chance button 136 is pressed by the player before the hold icon b2 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and becomes invisible, and the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon in response to the pressing. The hold change effect display is started. In this example, the hold change effect display is started during the maximum wipe state, but the hold change effect display is invisible at the beginning because the hold change effect display is overlapped by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. ..

FIG. 120 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is terminated, the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are redisplayed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is started.

As shown in FIG. 120 (k), the effect image j5 of the hold change effect display is displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b. A part of the effect image j5 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As described above, in this example, the hold change effect display is started during the maximum wipe state, and the hold change effect display becomes gradually visible according to the start of the wipeout.

FIG. 120 (l) shows a state in which the hold change effect display is completed during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The effect image j5 of the hold change effect display has been erased, and the hold icon b2 has changed to a face hold icon. A part of the hold icon b2 overlaps with the wipe display w7b. The face hold icon is a hold icon in the look-ahead notice mode.

In FIG. 120 (m), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode.

FIG. 120 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2".

FIG. 120 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed even during the confrontation between the palace and the enemy in the super reach effect display, and the hold change effect display is displayed according to the pressing of the chance button 136 during the super reach effect display or the wipe-in. To be started. The hold change effect display is displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display. The changing icon may also be displayed during the confrontation effect in the super reach effect display, and if the changing icon of the button hold icon display mode is displayed during the super reach effect display, the super reach icon is displayed. The changing icon change effect display may be started in response to the pressing of the chance button 136 during the effect display or wipe-in.

An operation means other than the chance button 136 may be provided, and a hold icon imitating the operation means may be displayed. The operating means may be any lever, switch, handle, touch sensor, or the like, and the button holding icon can be appropriately replaced with a holding icon that imitates these operating means, such as a lever holding icon that imitates a lever.

(Example 28)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 28th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (s). FIGS. 121 (a) to 121 (s) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 121, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 121 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 121, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 121 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 121 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed in response to the player pressing the upper button of the setting operation unit 137. In this example, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit is pressed during the variable display of the decorative symbol during the normal effect display. From the left, the volume adjustment display j6 displays a character string image of "volume", a square frame image including "small" characters, a square frame image including "medium" characters, and "large" characters. Includes square frame image Includes images arranged in this order. In this example, the player presses the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 to set the volume of the sound and BGM output from the speaker 120 to three stages of "low", "medium", and "large". Can be done. The frame image corresponding to the currently set volume is displayed in a thick frame. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 121 (e), "medium" is set. For example, when the volume is set to "medium", the volume is set to "low" when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, and the volume is increased when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed. Set to "Large". Similarly, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the volume is set to "low", the volume is set to "medium" and the setting operation is performed when the volume is set to "loud". When the left button of unit 137 is pressed, the volume is set to "medium". When the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the volume is set to "low", the volume may be set to "loud" or the volume is set to "loud". When the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the volume may be set to "low".

FIG. 121 (f) shows a state in which the volume is set to “loud” in response to the player pressing the right button of the setting operation unit 137. Since the volume is set to "loud", the volume of the sound and BGM output from the speaker 120 becomes relatively loud.

FIG. 121 (g) shows a state in which the volume adjustment display j6 is erased. In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is deleted unless the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 is being displayed. The volume adjustment display j6 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display, regardless of whether or not the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

FIG. 121 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 121 (h), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 121 (i), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. If the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed immediately before the start of the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 may be deleted at the same time as the start of the confrontation effect. ..

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed even if the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace shown in FIG. 121 (i) is displayed. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player at the time shown in FIG. 121 (i), but the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

FIG. 121 (j) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 121 (k) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 121 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 121 (n) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 121 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the pressing, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is started to be displayed at the same time as the wipeout is started in response to the pressing of the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 121 (o), a part of the volume adjustment display j6 is visibly displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the volume adjustment display j6 is gradually displayed so as to be visible as a whole by withdrawing the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 121 (o), the volume is set to "loud".

FIG. 121 (p) shows a state in which the volume is set to “medium” by pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the BGM becomes relatively smaller than that before the pressing.

FIG. 121 (q) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The volume adjustment display j6 is still displayed, and the volume is set to "medium".

In FIG. 121 (r), after the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is shaken and fluctuated. It shows the state that is being done. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 were not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 was being displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 was deleted.

FIG. 121 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed as the effect adjustment screen by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the symbol variation display). In the super reach production display, a background image different from the normal production display such as a confrontation production in which the lord and the enemy of the palace slash each other and a confrontation production in which the palace and the old man drink and compare is displayed and an animation is displayed. The effect adjustment screen is not displayed even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the execution of, and the effect adjustment screen is displayed when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe state.

In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 or the BGM or the like is displayed as the effect adjustment screen, but the effect adjustment screen is not limited to this. For example, as player custom settings such as effect settings, a display for setting the brightness of LEDs provided on the game board or the main body, a display for character settings for selecting a player's favorite character from a plurality of characters, and a plurality of reach. Display of reach effect setting to select the player's favorite effect effect from the effect, display of effect scene setting to select the player's favorite effect scene from multiple effect scenes, display of the player's favorite BGM from multiple BGMs A plurality of types of effect adjustment screens such as a display for setting, a display for setting the jackpot reliability of a certain effect, and a display for selecting a sound effect may be provided. The type of the effect adjustment screen may be switched by pressing the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137. For example, when the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed, when the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the display for setting the BGM is displayed, and when the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the brightness of the LED is displayed. It may be configured to display a display for setting.

In this embodiment, the call operation and volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 after the maximum wipe state are shown, but the call operation and volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 after the wipe-in are valid. Alternatively, the call operation and volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 may not be effective in the maximum wipe state, and the call operation and volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment display j6 may be effective after the wipeout. It should be noted that the volume adjustment display j6 may be called and the volume adjustment operation may be enabled at least during the wipe-out, and the volume of one super reach effect display may be set earlier than that of another super reach effect display. It may be configured so that the calling operation of the adjustment display j6 and the volume adjustment operation are effective. Also, some time before the start of the wipe-in, some time after the start of the wipe-in, some time before the maximum wipe state, some time after the maximum wipe state, and some time before the start of the wipe-out. , The call operation of the volume adjustment display j6 and the volume adjustment operation may be enabled at a timing such as after a certain time from the start of the wipeout. In the present embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 is started to be displayed by the operation of the player's setting operation unit 137 in the wipe effect display, but the BGM setting display j7, which will be described later, is started to be displayed in the wipe effect display. There is no.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 121 (o') to 121 (s') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 121 (o') to 121 (s'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 121 (o') shows a state continuing from FIG. 121 (n), and shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started in response to the pressing. In this example, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The volume adjustment display j6 of this example may be displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the maximum wipe state. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 121 (o'), the volume is set to "loud". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 121 (p') shows a state in which the volume is set to "medium" when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the BGM becomes relatively smaller than that before the pressing. Further, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 121 (q') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The volume adjustment display j6 is still displayed, and the volume is set to "medium".

In FIG. 121 (r'), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fluctuates. Indicates the displayed state. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 were not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 was being displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 was deleted.

FIG. 121 (s') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this modification, the volume adjustment display j6 as the effect adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the wipe display. In this way, the effect adjustment screen may be displayed with priority over the wipe display.

(Example 29)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 29th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (q). FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 122, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 122 (a), for example, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 122, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 122 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 122 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 122 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 122 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 122 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 122 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the confrontation production in which the enemies of the palace and the palace are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation production, and the volume adjustment display is displayed. j6 is not displayed.

FIG. 122 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 122 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 122 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. Further, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. In this case, the pressing is not accepted and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed. In this way, even if the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed after the maximum wipe, if it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the press is accepted. The effect adjustment screen (for example, volume adjustment display j6) is not displayed.

FIG. 122 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the wipeout, but since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed, the pressing is performed. Is not accepted and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed.

FIG. 122 (m) shows the state of the wipe display w7a and w7b being withdrawn (during wipeout). In this example, since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the pressing of the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the wipeout is not accepted, and the volume adjustment display j6 is not displayed.

In FIG. 122 (n), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode.

FIG. 122 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is started in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

FIG. 122 (p) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 122 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the effect adjustment screen is called (for example, the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137) after the maximum wipe state. Press) is configured not to be accepted. Even if it is set so that the effect adjustment screen call operation is accepted after the wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen call operation after the wipe-in is performed. It does not have to be accepted.

(Example 30)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirtieth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (q). FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 123, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 123 (a), for example, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 123, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 123 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 123 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 123 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 123 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 123 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 123 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the confrontation production in which the enemies of the palace and the palace are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation production, and the volume adjustment display is displayed. j6 is not displayed.

FIG. 123 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 123 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 123 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. Further, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. Even in this case, the pressing may be accepted, and the volume adjustment display j6 may be displayed with the start of the wipeout.

FIG. 123 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed with the start of wipeout in response to the pressing. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the volume adjustment display j6 is gradually displayed so as to be visible as a whole by withdrawing the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 123 (l), the volume is set to "loud".

FIG. 123 (m) shows a state in which the volume is set to "medium" when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the BGM becomes relatively smaller than that before the pressing.

FIG. 123 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The volume adjustment display j6 is still displayed, and the volume is set to "medium".

FIG. 123 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display is started. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display. The volume adjustment display j6 is erased when the darkening effect display is started.

FIG. 123 (p) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 123 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, and even in this case, the effect adjustment screen is called (for example, up and down of the setting operation unit 137) after the maximum wipe state. It is configured to accept button presses). Even if it is set so that the effect adjustment screen call operation is accepted after the wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen call operation after the wipe-in is performed. May be accepted.

(Example 31)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 31st embodiment of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (s). FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (s) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 124, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 124 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 121, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 124 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 124 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 124 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 124 (e) shows a state in which the BGM setting display j7 is displayed in response to the player pressing the upper button of the setting operation unit 137. In this example, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed when the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit is pressed during the variable display of the decorative symbol during the normal effect display. From the left, the BGM setting display j7 displays a character string image of "BGM", a square frame image including the number "1", a square frame image including the number "2", and a number "3". Includes square frame image Includes images arranged in this order. In this example, when the player presses the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137, the type of BGM output from the speaker 120 is set to three songs, "1", "2", and "3". It can be set from. The frame image corresponding to the currently set BGM is displayed in a thick frame. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 124 (e), the BGM is set to "2". For example, when the BGM is set to "2", when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the BGM is set to "1", and when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the BGM is set. It is set to "3". Similarly, when the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the BGM is set to "1", the BGM is set to "2" and the setting operation is performed when the BGM is set to "3". When the left button of unit 137 is pressed, the BGM is set to "2". When the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the BGM is set to "1", the BGM may be set to "3" or the BGM is set to "3". When the right button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed, the BGM may be set to "1".

FIG. 124 (f) shows a state in which the BGM is set to "3" in response to the player pressing the right button of the setting operation unit 137. Since the BGM is set to "3", the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song "3".

FIG. 124 (g) shows a state in which the BGM setting display j7 is erased. In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is deleted if the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are not pressed for a predetermined time while the BGM setting display j7 is being displayed. The BGM setting display j7 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display, regardless of whether or not the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 124 (h), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 124 (i), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. If the BGM selection display j7 is displayed immediately before the start of the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace is displayed, the BGM selection display j7 may be deleted at the same time as the start of the confrontation effect. ..

In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed even if the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace shown in FIG. 124 (i) is displayed. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player at the time shown in FIG. 124 (i), but the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

FIG. 124 (j) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 124 (k) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 124 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 124 (m) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 124 (n) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 124 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the pressing, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is started to be displayed at the same time as the wipeout is started in response to the pressing of the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 124 (o), a part of the BGM setting display j7 is visibly displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is gradually displayed as a whole visually recognizable by the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, the BGM is set to "3" in the state at the time shown in FIG. 124 (o).

FIG. 124 (p) shows a state in which the BGM is set to “2” when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song "2".

FIG. 124 (q) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The BGM setting display j7 is still displayed, and the BGM is set to "2".

In FIG. 124 (r), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned design mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is shaken and fluctuated. It shows the state that is being done. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 were not pressed for a predetermined time while the BGM setting display j7 was being displayed, the BGM setting display j7 was deleted.

FIG. 124 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed as the effect adjustment screen by pressing the upper button or the lower button of the setting operation unit 137 during the variation display of the decorative symbol (during the symbol variation display). In the super reach production display, a background image different from the normal production display such as a confrontation production in which the lord and the enemy of the palace slash each other and a confrontation production in which the palace and the old man drink and compare is displayed and an animation is displayed. The effect adjustment screen is not displayed even if the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the execution of, and the effect adjustment screen is displayed when the up / down button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed after the maximum wipe state.

In this embodiment, an example in which the BGM setting display j7 call operation and the BGM setting operation are performed after the maximum wipe state is shown, but even if the BGM setting display j7 call operation and the BGM setting operation after the wipe-in are enabled. Alternatively, the call operation of the BGM setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation may not be valid in the maximum wipe state, and the call operation of the BGM setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation may be valid after the wipeout. It should be noted that the call operation of the BGM setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation may be enabled at least during the wipe-out, and the BGM may be activated in one super reach effect display from an earlier timing than in another super reach effect display. It may be configured so that the call operation of the setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation are valid. Also, a certain time before the start of the wipe-in, a certain time after the start of the wipe-in, a certain time before the maximum wipe state, a certain time after the maximum wipe state, and a certain time before the start of the wipe-out. , The call operation of the BGM setting display j7 and the BGM setting operation may be enabled at a timing such as after a certain time from the start of the wipeout.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 124 (o') to 124 (s') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by the present modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 124 (o') to 124 (s'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 124 (o') shows the state continuing from FIG. 124 (n), and shows the state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed at the same time as the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started in response to the pressing. In this example, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The BGM setting display j7 of this example may be displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b in the maximum wipe state. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 124 (o'), the BGM is set to the song "3". Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 124 (p') shows a state in which the BGM is set to the song "2" by the player pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. .. As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song "2". Further, the BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 124 (q') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The BGM setting display j7 is still displayed, and the BGM is set to "2".

In FIG. 124 (r'), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fluctuates. Indicates the displayed state. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 were not pressed for a predetermined time while the BGM setting display j7 was being displayed, the BGM setting display j7 was deleted.

FIG. 124 (s') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this modification, the BGM setting display j7 as the effect adjustment screen is displayed with priority over the wipe display. In this way, the effect adjustment screen may be displayed with priority over the wipe display.

(Example 32)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 32nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (q). FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 125, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 125 (a), for example, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 122, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 125 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 125 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 125 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 125 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 125 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 125 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 125 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 125 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the confrontation production in which the enemies of the palace and the palace are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation production, and the BGM setting display is displayed. j7 is not displayed.

FIG. 125 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 125 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 125 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. Further, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. In this case, the pressing is not accepted and the BGM selection display j7 is not displayed. In this way, even if the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed after the maximum wipe, if it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the press is accepted. The effect adjustment screen (for example, BGM selection display j7) is not displayed.

FIG. 125 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the wipeout, but since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example ends, the relevant The press is not accepted and the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed.

FIG. 125 (m) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn (during wipeout). In this example, since it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the pressing of the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 during the wipeout is not accepted, and the BGM setting display j7 is not displayed.

In FIG. 125 (n), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, swings left and right. It shows the state in which the shaking is displayed in the display mode.

FIG. 125 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black is started after the wipe effect display. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display.

FIG. 125 (p) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 125 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display. In this case, the effect adjustment screen is called (for example, the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137) after the maximum wipe state. Press) is configured not to be accepted. Even if it is set so that the effect adjustment screen call operation is accepted after the wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen call operation after the wipe-in is performed. It does not have to be accepted.

(Example 33)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 33rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (q). FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 126, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 126 (a), for example, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 126, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 126 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 126 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 126 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 126 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 126 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 126 (f) shows a confrontation effect in which the background image displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 126 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 126 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the confrontation production in which the enemies of the palace and the palace are slashing, but the pressing is not accepted during the confrontation production, and the BGM setting display is displayed. j7 is not displayed.

FIG. 126 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 126 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 126 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player in the maximum wipe state. Further, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display of this example is completed. Even in this case, the pressing may be accepted, and the BGM setting display j7 may be displayed with the start of the wipeout.

FIG. 126 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe display w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed at the same time as the wipeout starts in response to the pressing. The BGM setting display j7 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is gradually displayed as a whole visually recognizable by the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. Further, the BGM is set to "3" in the state at the time shown in FIG. 126 (l).

FIG. 126 (m) shows a state in which the BGM is set to “2” when the left button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the BGM output from the speaker 120 is changed to the song "2".

FIG. 126 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The BGM setting display j7 is still displayed, and the BGM is set to "2".

FIG. 126 (o) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is started in which the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in black after the wipe effect display. The darkening effect display in this example is a reverse effect display. The BGM setting display j7 is erased when the darkening effect display is started.

FIG. 126 (p) shows a state in which the darkening effect display is finished. The blackout effect display in this example is a reverse effect display, and after the blackout effect display of the reverse effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode is set in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. "Is shaken and fluctuated.

FIG. 126 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, it is determined that the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, and even in this case, the effect adjustment screen is called (for example, up and down of the setting operation unit 137) after the maximum wipe state. It is configured to accept button presses). Even if it is set so that the effect adjustment screen call operation is accepted after the wipe-in, if the revival effect display is performed after the wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen call operation after the wipe-in is performed. May be accepted.

(Example 34)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 34th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (p). FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 127, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed and the swaying variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 127 (a), for example, the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 127, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 127 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 127 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 127 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 127 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 127 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

In this embodiment, the effect adjustment screen is not displayed even if the up and down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed during the confrontation effect in which the animation of the confrontation between the palace and the enemy of the palace shown in FIG. 127 (f) is displayed. In this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed by the player at the time shown in FIG. 127 (f), but the effect adjustment screen is not displayed because the confrontation effect has already started.

FIG. 127 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 127 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 127 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 127 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 127 (k) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 127 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

Further, in this example, the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed during the maximum wipe state. In response to the pressing, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, and the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed as the effect adjustment screen. In this embodiment, the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are started to be displayed at the same time as the wipeout is started, in response to the up / down buttons of the setting operation unit 137 being pressed after the maximum wipe state. As shown in FIG. 127 (o), the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed between the wipe displays w7a and w7b during the withdrawal display. The volume adjustment display j6 is displayed below the BGM adjustment display j7. Further, the volume adjustment display j6 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (l), the BGM setting display j7 is displayed overlapping with the shaking fluctuation display of “Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2”. In this way, the effect adjustment screen is displayed so as to overlap with the fluctuation display of the decorative pattern. The effect adjustment screen may be displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be displayed overlapping the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol. The effect adjustment screen may be displayed overlapping with the final display of the decorative symbol, or may be displayed overlapping with the final display of the decorative symbol.

When the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are displayed at the same time, the volume adjustment display j6 is initially selected. In this case, the frame image corresponding to the currently set volume is thick. It is displayed blinking in the frame. By pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 while the volume adjustment display j6 is selected, the player can set the volume to any of "low", "medium", and "high". Further, when the upper button of the setting operation unit 137 is pressed while the volume adjustment display j6 is selected, the BGM setting display j7 is selected. In this case, the frame image corresponding to the currently set BGM is displayed by blinking with a thick frame. By pressing the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 while the BGM setting display j7 is selected, the player can set the BGM to any of "1", "2", and "3". In the state shown in FIG. 127 (m), the volume adjustment display j6 is selected, the volume is set to "loud", and the BGM is set to "2".

FIG. 127 (m) shows a state in which the volume is set to “medium” by pressing the left button of the setting operation unit 137 by the player during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. As a result, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 120 and the BGM becomes relatively smaller than that before the pressing.

FIG. 127 (n) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side. The volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 are still displayed, the volume is set to "medium", and the BGM is set to "2".

In FIG. 127 (o), after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is shaken and fluctuated. It shows the state that is being done. Further, since the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 were not pressed for a predetermined time while the volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 were being displayed, the volume adjustment display j6 was deleted. The volume adjustment display j6 and the BGM setting display j7 may be deleted after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display, regardless of whether or not the left and right buttons of the setting operation unit 137 are pressed.

FIG. 127 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, two types of effect adjustment screens, the effect adjustment screen of the volume adjustment display j6 and the effect adjustment screen of the BGM setting display j7, are displayed at the time of wiping out. In this way, when two types of effect adjustment screens are displayed at the time of wipe-out, one effect adjustment screen (volume adjustment display j6 in this example) is displayed overlapping with the wipe display, and the other. The effect adjustment screen (BGM adjustment display j7 in this example) may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display. It should be noted that all of the plurality of effect adjustment screens may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display, or all of the plurality of effect adjustment screens may be displayed overlapping with the wipe display.

(Example 35)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 35th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (q). First, the game board 1500 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128 (a). FIG. 128 (a) is a schematic front view of the game board 1500 as viewed from the front. Similar to the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29, the game board 1500 has a game area 124 formed by dividing the outer rail and the inner rail, and a main liquid crystal unit 1001 arranged substantially in the center. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine.

The game board 1500 is a game board for so-called left-handed machines. Special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232 (electric chew), normal figure start port 228, and variable winning opening 244 fall on the left side route due to the influence of the game nail arrangement pattern and the presence of the warp device. It is relatively easy to enter the game ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter the game ball falling on the right side path. In the special drawing 2 starting port 232, a ball cannot enter while the pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right are closed, and a ball can enter while the blade member 232a is open. In this embodiment, a left-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, the normal drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning opening 244 fall down the right route. It may be relatively easy to enter the game ball. The game board 1500 may include a sub liquid crystal display device 1030, a movable body, and a lighting unit, similarly to the game board 1000.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (q). FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (j) show the game board 1500 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 128 (k) to 128 (q) show the main liquid crystal unit from the game board 1500. The 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted and shown. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which the normal map variable game is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the normal map start port 228. In this embodiment, when the normal map variation game is started, a normal effect area (normal map effect area) j8 for displaying a square-shaped normal map effect display is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal effect area j8, variable display of the general pattern decorative symbols such as "○" and "x" is performed in which the display of the general pattern decorative symbols is sequentially switched. In FIGS. 128 (b) and thereafter, the variable display of the ordinary decorative pattern is represented by a downward arrow.

FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is out of order (the stop symbol is "Public figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, "x", which is an out-of-shape symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and it is notified that the result of the normal figure variation game is out of order.

FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In this embodiment, the normal map effect display is terminated when the next normal map variable game is not started within a predetermined time after the end of the out-of-line normal map variable game.

FIG. 128 (e) shows a state in which the game ball is passing through the opening 228 of the normal drawing. As a result, the normal map fluctuation game is started.

FIG. 128 (f) shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure A" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, "○", which is a hit symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit.

FIG. 128 (g) shows a state in which a display suggesting that the game ball is launched by left-handed is displayed in the normal effect area j8. A character image of "left" is displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left side path, after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the player is informed of the game area 124 with a weak firing intensity of the game ball. A display suggesting aiming at the left side of the normal effect area j8 is displayed.

FIG. 128 (h) shows a state in which the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is open. A character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and it is suggested and required for the game ball to launch the game ball aiming at the open special figure 2 starting port 232.

FIG. 128 (i) shows a state in which the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is closed. Immediately after the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed, the character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and it is notified that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed. In this example, it is assumed that the game ball has not entered the opening special figure 2 starting port 232 which is open. It should be noted that the character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8 even before the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed to suggest in advance that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed. You may.

FIG. 128 (j) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is completed, the normal figure effect display is ended.

FIG. 128 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started in response to the winning of the game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 128 (l) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the normal drawing start opening 228 during the execution of the special drawing 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol (variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol) is performed in which the display of the decorative symbol is sequentially switched.

FIG. 128 (m) shows a state in which the variation time of the normal map variable game has elapsed from the start of the normal map variable game during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the normal map variable game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure B" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, "○", which is a hit symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit.

FIG. 128 (n) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect area j5 is erased and the normal drawing effect display is finished. In this embodiment, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is not opened at the hit of "normal figure B" in the non-electric support state (when the time is not activated), and the result is the normal figure variation of "normal figure B". If the next normal map variation game is not started within a predetermined time after the end of the game, the normal map effect display is ended. It should be noted that, in the non-electric support state (when the time is not activated), the special figure 2 starting port 232 may be opened only for 100 ms at the time of hitting "Public drawing B".

It should be noted that, at the end of the normal drawing variation game in which the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state, “x”, which is an out-of-shape symbol mode, may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. FIG. 2 When the start port 232 is not opened, a "○" is displayed in the normal production area j8 at the end of the normal figure fluctuation game, so that a notice of the special figure change game being executed (notice of the change) is given. You may be broken. The "○" may be displayed only when the result of determining whether or not the special figure variable game being executed is a big hit. In this way, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect area j8. It should be noted that, at the end of the normal drawing variation game in which the special figure 2 start port 232 is not opened, "○" is displayed in the normal effect area j8 rather than "x" is displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this case, the decorative symbol in the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed.

It should be noted that, at the end of the normal drawing variation game in which the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is not in the open state, “x”, which is an out-of-shape symbol mode, may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. FIG. 2 When the start port 232 is not opened, a "○" is displayed in the normal production area j8 at the end of the normal figure variable game, so that a pending special figure variable game notice (look-ahead notice) is given. May be good. The "○" may be displayed only when the pre-reading result of the hold subject to the pre-reading notice is a big hit. In this way, the pre-reading notice effect display may be displayed in the normal effect area j8. It should be noted that, at the end of the normal drawing variation game in which the special figure 2 start port 232 is not opened, "○" is displayed in the normal effect area j8 rather than "x" is displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this case, the jackpot symbol mode may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice.

In FIG. 128 (o), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Shown. In this example, in FIG. 128 (o), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 128 (o), the normal reach effect display may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 128 (p), after the super reach effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2” swings from side to side in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undetermined state display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 128 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of this determination relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is a jackpot. It has been notified that there is.

In this embodiment, with the start of the normal map variation game, the normal figure effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the normal pattern effect display, a roulette display of one symbol may be displayed as in the variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol of this embodiment, or an effect display such as a slot for variable display of a plurality of symbols is displayed. In the case of a hit, an effect display that arrives at the result showing the hit with the Amidakuji may be displayed, and in the case of a hit, the effect display of the mini game in which the ally character wins in the confrontation effect such as tug of war is displayed. May be done.

The normal effect area j8 may be referred to as a special effect area or an interrupt effect area. For example, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is the first variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the second variable display, and the normal drawing effect area (normal effect area) of this embodiment. ) The variable display (variable display) in j8 is called the third variable display or the effect variable display, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure is the first variable display, and the variation in the normal effect area j8 of this embodiment. The display may be referred to as a second variable display.

(Example 36)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 36th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (F). FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (F) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of the drawings of FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (F), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 128 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the normal effect area j8, a variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (A), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 128B shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure A" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, a stop display (confirmed display, main stop display) of “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is displayed. In this embodiment, when the result of the normal map variation game is a hit, the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. If the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit, the symbol mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

FIG. 128 (C) shows a state in which a display suggesting that the game ball is launched by left-handed is displayed in the normal effect area j8. A character image of "left" is displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left side path, after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the player is informed of the game area 124 with a weak firing intensity of the game ball. A display suggesting aiming at the left side of the normal effect area j8 is displayed.

FIG. 128 (D) shows an effect display in a state where the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is open. The character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and it is suggested to the game ball that the game ball is launched in the left path with a weak launch intensity aiming at the open special figure 2 starting port 232. It is required.

FIG. 128 (E) shows an effect display in a state in which the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is closed. Immediately after the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed, the character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and it is notified that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed. It should be noted that the character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8 even before the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed to suggest in advance that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed. You may.

FIG. 128 (F) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is completed, the normal figure effect display is ended.

In this embodiment, when the result of the normal map variation game is a hit, the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this way, when the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8 instead of the hit symbol mode.

(Example 37)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 (a) to (f). FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (f) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (f), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and in the normal effect area j8, the variable display of the ordinary symbol decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 128 (b) shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is out of order (the stop symbol is "Public figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, a stop display (confirmed display, main stop display) of “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance mode is displayed as a notice of the special figure variation game (symbol variation display) being executed. In this embodiment, if the result of the normal map variation game is out of order, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display when the chance mode is stopped and displayed rather than when the chance mode is not stopped and displayed during the symbol variation display. It is configured to be easy to play. If the result of the normal figure variation game is out of order, the out-of-figure symbol mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is completed. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time from the start of the stop display of the out-of-design mode, the normal figure effect display is ended.

In this embodiment, although the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the display suggesting that the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric chew) is aimed at is not performed. In this case, the chance mode foretells that the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed as a definite stop in the changing decorative symbol.

In FIG. 128 (d), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Shown. In this example, in FIG. 128 (d), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 128 (d), the normal reach effect display may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 128 (e), after the super reach effect display is completed, the jackpot symbol mode “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2” swings from side to side in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undetermined state display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 128 (he) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of this determination relating to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is a jackpot. It has been notified that there is.

In the present embodiment, the chance mode displayed in the normal effect area j8 is displayed as a notice of the special figure change game being executed (notice of the change). In this way, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect area j8. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect display may be displayed in the normal effect area j8, and the chance mode may be displayed as a look-ahead notice of the pending special figure variable game, or the special figure variable game (special figure) that is changing. In addition to the variable display of), it may be a big hit notice when the k-figure variable game is executed, or it is not a big hit notice of the special figure variable game that is changing, but a reserved special figure variable game. It may be a big hit notice when is executed.

(Example 38)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 38th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (g). FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 129 (a) to 129 (g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (a), for example, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 129 (b) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the normal drawing start opening 228 during the execution of the special drawing 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol (variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol) is performed in which the display of the decorative symbol is sequentially switched.

FIG. 129 (c) shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is out of order (the stop symbol is "Public figure C" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, a stop display (confirmed display, main stop display) of “Δ”, which is a chance mode, is displayed. In this embodiment, the chance mode is displayed as a notice of the special figure variation game (symbol variation display) being executed. In this embodiment, if the result of the normal map variation game is out of order, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display when the chance mode is stopped and displayed rather than when the chance mode is not stopped and displayed during the symbol variation display. It is configured to be easy to play. If the result of the normal figure variation game is out of order, the out-of-figure symbol mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time from the start of the stop display of the out-of-design mode, the normal figure effect display is ended.

In this embodiment, although the chance mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the display suggesting that the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric chew) is aimed at is not performed. In this case, the chance mode foretells that the jackpot symbol mode may be displayed as a definite stop in the changing decorative symbol.

FIG. 129 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208a, and the reach effect display is started. Shown. In this example, in FIG. 129 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 129 (e), the normal reach effect display may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 129 (f), after the super reach effect display is completed, the “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”, which is a misaligned symbol mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, sways and fluctuates in a display mode. Indicates the displayed state. The shaking fluctuation display is an undetermined state display of the decorative pattern.

FIG. 129 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. This determination result related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of the question. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. It has been notified that there is.

In the present embodiment, the chance mode displayed in the normal effect area j8 is displayed as a notice of the special figure change game being executed (notice of the change). In this way, the notice effect display of the change may be displayed in the normal effect area j8. As in the present embodiment, when the out-of-design mode is definitely displayed in the symbol variation display, the chance mode may be stopped and displayed.

(Example 39)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 39th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (L). FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 129 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (A), for example, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

In FIG. 129 (B), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c in a state where an empty background image, which is a normal effect display, is displayed. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which a temporary stop is displayed. In this example, in FIG. 129 (B), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The pachinko machine 100 is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display in which the super reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the normal reach effect display is performed.

In FIG. 129 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. When the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the animation of the scene where the lord wins the enemy of the lord in the production is displayed, and the case where the result of the hit / miss judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. Displays an animation of the scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord in the production.

FIG. 129 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 129 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 129 (F) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

Further, in FIG. 129 (F), the normal figure effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the normal figure start opening 228 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol (variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol) is performed in which the display of the decorative symbol is sequentially switched.

FIG. 129 (G) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 excluding the normal effect area j8, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. To. The wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap with the normal effect area j8. In this way, the normal effect area j8 is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display.

FIG. 129 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 except for the normal effect area j8 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

Further, in FIG. 129 (H), the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game, and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure A" shown in FIG. 5). Even in the maximum wipe state, the normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b, and in the normal effect area j8, "○", which is a hit symbol mode, is stopped and displayed. It is informed that the result of the game is a hit.

FIG. 129 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Even during wipeout, the normal production area j8 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b, and in the normal production area j8, a "left" character image suggesting that the game ball is fired by left-handed is displayed. Has been done. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left side path, after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the player is informed of the game area 124 with a weak firing intensity of the game ball. A display suggesting aiming at the left side of the normal effect area j8 is displayed.

FIG. 129 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. A character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and the player is notified that the special figure 2 start port 232 is open, and the game ball is aimed at the special figure 2 start port 232. Is suggested and required of the game ball to fire.

FIG. 129 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. A character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed.

FIG. 129 (L) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 129 (L), the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is completed, the normal figure effect display is ended.

In this embodiment, the normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this way, even if the variation display, result display, striking suggestion display, opening notification display of the special figure 2 starting port 232, etc. in the normal effect area j8 are displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display. Good.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 129 (G') to 129 (L') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 129 (G') to 129 (L'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a).

FIG. 129 (G') shows a state continuing from FIG. 129 (f), and shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this modification, the normal effect area j8 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b during the wipe-in. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 129 (G'), the special drawing 2 start port 232 is not in the open state, and in this case, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the normal effect area j8. May be good.

FIG. 129 (H') shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The normal production area j8 overlaps with the wipe display w7b and is invisible. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 129 (H'), the special drawing 2 start port 232 is not in the open state, and in this case, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the normal effect area j8. May be good.

FIG. 129 (I') shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. With the start of the wipeout, the normal production area j8 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b, and the normal production area j8 is displayed with a "left" character image suggesting that the game ball is fired by left-handed. There is. In this way, in order to give priority to transmitting some information such as a suggestion of how to hit, a request for how to hit, and a suggestion of a winning opening that is open to the player at the time of wiping out, the normal production area j8 is displayed on the wipe display w7b. It is displayed overlapping.

FIG. 129 (J') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. A character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and the player is notified that the special figure 2 start port 232 is open, and the game ball is aimed at the special figure 2 start port 232. Is suggested and required of the game ball to fire.

FIG. 129 (K') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. A character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and it is notified that the opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed.

FIG. 129 (L') shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 129 (L), the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended. In the present embodiment, when the next normal figure variation game is not started within a predetermined time after the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is completed, the normal figure effect display is ended.

In this modification, the first decorative symbol (decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol) of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is overlapped with the wipe display, and the second decorative symbol (usually) of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is overlapped. The wipes are overlapped by the decorative pattern corresponding to the figure). The second decorative symbol may be the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol. The decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, which starts in response to the start of the variable game, ends in response to the end of the variable game, and makes a definite display according to the result of the variable game. The wipe effect display may be overlapped by the ordinary decorative pattern.

In this modification, an example is shown in which the display in the normal effect area j8 is prioritized over the wipe effect display from the time before the opening of the special figure 2 start port 23 is started, but the result display in the normal effect area j8 is displayed. In the case of a hit "○" or a chance mode "Δ", the display of the normal map effect area may be prioritized over the wipe effect display from the result display stage. Further, when the result display in the normal effect area j8 is a hit and the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened, the normal effect area j8 is used rather than the wipe effect display from the stage of the result display in the normal effect area j8. It may be configured to give priority to the display of. Further, regardless of the content of the result display in the normal effect area j8, the display in the normal effect area j8 may be prioritized over the wipe effect display from the stage of the result display in the normal effect area j8.

(Example 40)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 40th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (l). FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 128 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 130A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (a), for example, the number of holds in special figure 1 is 1, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

In FIG. 130 (b), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a in a state where an empty background image, which is a normal effect display, is displayed, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which a temporary stop is displayed. In this example, in FIG. 130 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 130 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 130 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

Further, in FIG. 130 (e), the normal figure effect display is started in response to the passage of one game ball through the normal figure start opening 228 during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the normal effect area j8, variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol (variable display of the general pattern decorative symbol) is performed in which the display of the decorative symbol is sequentially switched.

FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down.

Further, in FIG. 130 (f), the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game, and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure A" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, "○", which is a hit symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit.

FIG. 130 (g) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed on the front surface of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 excluding the normal effect area j8, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. To. The wipe display w7b is displayed so as to overlap with the normal effect area j8. In the normal production area j8, a character image of "left" suggesting that the game ball is fired by hitting left is displayed.

FIG. 130 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 except for the normal effect area j8 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. The normal production area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b, the character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is open. It is suggested and required for the game ball to be notified to the person and to launch the game ball aiming at the special figure 2 starting port 232.

FIG. 130 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Further, during the wipe-out, the normal effect area j8 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7b, and in FIG. 130 (i), the opening of the special figure 2 start port 232 is completed in the normal effect area j8. Although the character image of "end" for notifying is displayed, the character image of "end" is invisible because a part of the normal effect area j8 is invisible. As the wipeout progresses, the character image of the "end" gradually becomes visible.

FIG. 130 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 130 (j), the normal drawing effect display is finished. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the normal effect area j8 has been erased, and the normal effect display has ended.

FIG. 130 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 130 (l) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In this embodiment, the normal effect area j8 is initially displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b, and at the same time when the wipeout is started, the normal effect area j8 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. After the opening of the special drawing 2 start port 232 is completed, the normal effect area j8 may be overlapped with the wipe display w7b.

(Example 41)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 41st embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130A to 130K. FIGS. 130A to 130K show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 130 (A) to 130 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1500 shown in FIG. 130 (A). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine equipped with a game board 1500. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 130 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed and the normal figure variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the normal production area j8, a variable display of the decoration pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (A), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 130 (B) shows a state in which the variation time of the variation game has elapsed from the start of the variation game and the variation game has ended. The result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit (the stop symbol is "Public figure B" shown in FIG. 5). In the normal effect area j8, "Δ" is displayed as a stop (confirmed display, main stop display). In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened only for 100 ms at the time of hitting "Public drawing B" in the non-electric support state (when the time reduction is not activated). In this case, "Δ" is displayed as a result display in the normal effect area j8. In addition, when the result of the normal figure variation game is a hit, "◯" which is a symbol mode may be stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8.

FIG. 130 (C) shows a state in which a display suggesting that the game ball is launched by left-handed is displayed in the normal effect area j8. A character image of "left" is displayed in the normal effect area j8. In this embodiment, since the special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided on the left side path, after the symbol mode is stopped and displayed in the normal effect area j8, the player is informed of the game area 124 with a weak firing intensity of the game ball. A display suggesting aiming at the left side of the normal effect area j8 is displayed.

FIG. 130 (D) shows an effect display in a state where the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is open. The character image of "open" is displayed in the normal production area j8, and it is suggested to the game ball that the game ball is launched in the left path with a weak launch intensity aiming at the open special figure 2 starting port 232. It is required.

FIG. 130 (E) shows an effect display in a state in which the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed and the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is closed. Immediately after the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed, the character image of "end" is displayed in the normal effect area j8, and it is notified that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed. In this example, it is assumed that the game ball has not entered the special drawing 2 starting port 232.

FIG. 130 (F) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the normal figure effect area 8j. The appearance display of the wipe display w17a is started from the upper left corner of the normal effect area j8, and the appearance display of the wipe display w17b is started from the lower right corner of the normal effect area j8. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w17a and w17b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w17a and w17b are displayed in the foreground of the normal effect area j8, and are displayed so as to wipe off the character image of "end".

FIG. 130 (G) shows a state in which the wipe-in is performed in which the wipe displays w17a and w17b appear in the normal effect area j8.

FIG. 130 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w17a and the upper left end of the wipe display w17b are in contact with each other, and the entire surface of the normal effect area j8 is covered by the wipe displays w17a and w17b.

FIG. 130 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w17a and w17b has been started. In the normal effect area j8, the wipe display w17a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w17b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b starts, the character image of "end" in the normal effect area j8 is deleted. Further, along with the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b, the square frame image defining the area of the normal effect area j8 is gradually erased.

FIG. 130 (J) shows the state of the wipe display w17a and w17b during the withdrawal display (wipe out). In the area where the withdrawal of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is completed, the normal effect area j8 is erased.

FIG. 130 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w17a and w17b is completed. The wipe display w17a is shrunk and erased toward the upper left corner of the normal effect area j8, and the wipe display w17b is shrunk and erased toward the lower right corner of the normal effect area j8. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w17a and w17b is the end of the wipe effect display in the normal effect area j8. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w17a and w17b is completed, the normal effect area j8 is also deleted.

In the wipe effect display of this embodiment, the frame image surrounding the normal effect area j8 is wiped off by the wipe displays w17a and w17b during the wipeout, and the normal effect area j8 is erased at the end of the wipeout. It is configured in. In the wipe effect display in the normal effect area j8, the wipe display pattern (pattern), the wipe-in direction, and the wipe-out direction may be different from the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

The wipe effect display is not only performed so as to wipe off the entire display screen of the display device, but also if the wipe effect display is performed only within a part of the display screen of the display device as in this embodiment. Good. The wipe effect display may be performed in a plurality of areas of the display screen of the display device, and the wipe effect display may be performed in a part of a plurality of areas of the display screen of the display device. It does not have to be done in the area of. Here, the area is a hold icon display area, a changing icon display area, a special figure 1 hold icon display area, a special figure 2 hold icon display area, a hold display area by a numerical image, and a mini game related to a notice or a look-ahead notice. It may be a display area for a mini-game effect, a display area for a notice item, or a general prize opening effect display area where a winning effect is performed when a prize is won in the general winning opening 226.

Here, the display in the normal effect area j8 will be described again.
The variable display of the normal figure decorative symbol indicates that the normal figure decorative symbol is in the variable display (variable display) and has not reached the final display, and is shown by a downward arrow in the above embodiment.

The "x" normal figure decorative symbol is when the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is off, or when the result is opened for a short time so that the game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 (electric chew) ("" In the case of "Public figure B"), it is a definite display symbol. In addition, it is highly likely that the result of the normal figure variation game is out of order, the special figure 2 start port 232 is likely not to be opened, and the special figure 2 start port 232 is short. There is a high possibility that the time will be opened, the finalized display result of the normal figure is a certain symbol mode, and whether the special figure 2 start port 232 performed when the game ball passes through the normal figure start port 228 is opened. It may be a definite display indicating that the lottery (decision result) has been decided to a certain result (non-open, short-time open), or a definite display indicating any of these.

The general drawing decorative symbol of "Δ" is a definite display indicating that the special drawing 2 starting port 232 may be opened for a long time to the extent that a game ball enters. It should be noted that the "△" normal figure decorative symbol has a certain degree of reliability or higher per normal figure, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be opened for a long time, and the confirmation display in the normal production area j8. Compared to the case where is "x", the reliability that the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened for a long time is high, the jackpot reliability of the special figure is more than a certain level, and the confirmation display in the normal production area j8 is When the jackpot reliability of the special figure is higher than when it is "x", when the jackpot reliability of the look-ahead notice is above a certain level, and when the final display in the normal production area j8 is "x" It may be a definite display indicating that the jackpot reliability of the look-ahead notice is higher, or a definite display indicating any of these.

The "○" normal drawing decorative symbol is a definite display indicating that the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is open for a long time or the result of the normal drawing variation game is a hit. It should be noted that the decoration pattern of the normal drawing of "○" has a certain degree of reliability or higher per normal drawing, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be opened for a long time, and the confirmation display in the normal production area j8. Compared to the case where is "△", the reliability that the special figure 2 start port 232 is opened for a long time is high, the jackpot reliability of the special figure is more than a certain level, and the confirmation display in the normal production area j8 is When the jackpot reliability of the special figure is higher than when it is "△", when the jackpot reliability of the look-ahead notice is above a certain level, and when the final display in the normal production area j8 is "△" It may be a definite display indicating that the jackpot reliability of the look-ahead notice is higher, or a definite display indicating any of these.

The character image of "left" is a definite display that prompts, requests, or suggests that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened for a long time or that the game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game board 1500. The character image of "left" may be a definite display indicating that the special figure 2 start port 232 is open and that the special figure 2 start port 232 is likely to be open or open for a long time. In the present embodiment, the "left" aspect is the same as the special figure 2 starting port 232 provided on the left side of the game board 1500, and the game ball is launched instead of the "left" aspect. "Weak" indicating the strength may be displayed, or "upper" may be displayed if the special figure 2 starting port 232 is on the upper side of the game board 1500.

The character image of "open" is a definite display indicating that the special figure 2 starting port 232 is open for a long time. The character image of "open" may be a definite display indicating that the special figure 2 start port 232 is open and that the special figure 2 start port 232 is likely to be open or open for a long time. ..

The character image of "end" is a definite display indicating that the long-time opening of the special figure 2 starting port 232 has been completed. In addition, the character image of "end" indicates that the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is completed, the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port or the opening for a long time is completed, and the opening of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 or a long time It may be a definite display indicating that the opening is likely to be completed.

The short-time opening is the shortest opening time among the plurality of opening times. The short-time opening may be an opening time of a certain opening time or less or less than a certain opening time among a plurality of opening times. The long-time opening is the longest opening time among the plurality of opening times. The long-time opening may be an opening time of a certain opening time or more or more than a certain opening time among a plurality of opening times.

An example is shown in which a still image is displayed in the normal production area j8, but in the normal production area j8, “↓”, “×”, “△”, “○”, “left”, “open”. , Animated display with "final" images may be performed, animation display of images having the same meaning as these images may be performed, and meanings other than these images may be performed. Animated display of the image may be performed.

(Example 42)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 42nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (r). FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (r) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 131, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a pachinko machine whose starting port winning order varies.

FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the swaying variation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-design mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 131 (a), for example, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 131, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is confirmed (stop display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order.

FIG. 131 (d) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 having the earliest hold order is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 131 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 134 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 131 (f), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 131 (g) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 131 (h) shows a state in which an animation of a confrontation scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 131 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 131 (j) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is performed by a pair of wipe displays on the right half and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. First, as shown in FIG. 134 (j), the wipe effect display is started on the right half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w19a is started from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w19a is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w19a and w19b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w19a and w19b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 131 (k) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w19a and w19b are displayed. When the wipe display w19a overlaps a part of the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c is decorated. It is moved from the upper right corner to the upper left corner of the display screen of the symbol display device 208, and the shaking fluctuation display does not overlap with the wipe display w19a. The timing of moving the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c from the upper right corner to the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is "decoration 2-decoration 3-" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It may be after the time when the wipe display w19a overlaps all of the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2".

FIG. 131 (l) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is completed and the right half of the display screen is in the maximum wipe state. The lower right end of the wipe display w19a and the upper left end of the wipe display w19b are in contact with each other, and the right half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w19a and w19b.

FIG. 131 (m) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w21a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w21a is started from the lower center of the display screen. The wipe displays w21a and w21b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 131 (n) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is completed and the left half of the display screen is in the maximum wipe state. The lower right end of the wipe display w21a and the upper left end of the wipe display w21b are in contact with each other, and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe displays w19a and w19b. As a result, the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered with the wipe display in the maximum wipe state, and the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 131 (o) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w21a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w21b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower center of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, or the like on the left half of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 131 (p) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w19a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper center of the display screen, and the wipe display w19b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w19a and w19b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, etc. on the right half of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

FIG. 131 (q) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a, w19b, w21a, and w21b is completed. In this example, the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w19a and w19b is completed after the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w21a and w21b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a manner of swaying from side to side.

FIG. 131 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, different wipe effect displays are performed on the right half and the left half of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this way, the wipe effect display may be performed for each part of the display screen of the display device 208. The patterns (pictures) of the wipe displays w19a and w19b are the same, the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and w21b are the same, and the patterns of the wipe displays w19a and 19b and the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and 21b are the same. The patterns of the wipe displays w19a and 19b and the patterns of the wipe displays w21a and 21b may be different. Further, the wipe-in (appearance display) may be started earlier in the wipe display w21a and 21b than in the wipe display w19a and 19b, and the wipe display w19a and 19b may be wiped earlier than the wipe display w21a and 21b. Outs (withdrawal indications) may be initiated, and these wipe indications may be wiped in and wiped out at the same time. These wipe displays may be in the maximum wipe state at the same time.

(Example 43)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 43rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (m). First, the game board 1600 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 132 (a). FIG. 132A is a schematic front view of the game board 1600 as viewed from the front. Similar to the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29, the game board 1600 has a game area 124 formed by dividing the outer rail and the inner rail, and a main liquid crystal unit 1001 arranged substantially in the center. A decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged substantially in the center of the main liquid crystal unit 1001. The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine.

The game board 1600 is a game board for so-called right-handed machines. Regarding the special figure 2 start port 232 (electric chew), the normal figure start port 228, and the variable winning opening 244, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails and the presence of the warp device, the entry of the game ball falling on the right path is It is relatively easy, and it is relatively difficult for a game ball that falls on the left side path to enter. On the other hand, with respect to the special figure 1 starting port 230, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails and the presence of the warp device, it is relatively easy for the game ball to fall on the left side path, and the game to fall on the right side path. It is relatively difficult to enter the ball. The game board 1600 may be provided with a sub liquid crystal display device 1030, a movable body, and a lighting unit, similarly to the game board 1000.

Next, an example of the production of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (m). FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (m) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 132A shows the game board 1500 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIGS. 132 (b) to 132 (m) show the game board 1600 to the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208. Is extracted and shown. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the pending icon is omitted.

FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 132 (a), the number of holds in special figure 1 is 0, the number of holds in special figure 2 is 0, and the state is non-electric support state (normal figure low probability state).

FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started in response to the winning of the game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 132 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 132 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 132 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 132 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

Further, in FIG. 132 (f), the left-handed display j9 including the character string image of "Return to the left!" Is displayed. The left-handed display j9 is one of the notifications (specific operation request notification) for requesting the player to perform a specific operation (left-handed). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the special figure 1 starting port 230 is arranged on the left side path, and the normal drawing starting port 228 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 are arranged on the right side path. In the electric support state, the correct way to hit the game is to hit left, and in the electric support state, the correct way to hit the game is to hit right. The left-handed display j9 is displayed when the game is played by right-handed in the normal state and the game ball passes through the normal drawing start opening 228. In this example, in spite of the normal state (non-electric support), the player mistakenly hits the right side (for example, the game ball flows down the right side of the game area by firing the game ball with a high firing intensity). A notification (prompting notification) requesting that the game ball be launched (operation to weaken the firing intensity) aiming at the left side of the game area when the game ball passes through the normal drawing start port 228. Left-handed display j9 is displayed as.

FIG. 132 (g) shows a display in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down. It shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the shaking fluctuation display is performed in the mode. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. To. In this example, the left-handed display j9 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 132 (h) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The images are wiped off by the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 132 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the left-handed display j9, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 132 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually visually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 132 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode, and the left-handed display j9 is displayed.

FIG. 132 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, the left-handed display j9 is erased. The left-handed display j9 is deleted when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display was started. The left-handed display j9 may be deleted when a game ball has entered the start port 230 in FIG. 1 or when a predetermined time has elapsed from the establishment of the notification condition. The specific operation request notification such as the left-handed display j9 is deleted when the game ball wins a prize at the starting port, the notification condition is satisfied, or a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the notification.

FIG. 132 (l) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display has priority over the left-handed display j9, which is a specific operation request notification. In this way, there may be a specific operation request notification in which the wipe effect display has priority.

(Example 44)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 44th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (L). FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a).

FIG. 132 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 132 (B) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 132 (B), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 132 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

In FIG. 132 (C), the ball removal display j10 including the character string image of “passing through the ball!” Is displayed. The ball removal display j10 is started when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball. The ball removal display j10 is one of the specific operation request notifications. The ball removal display j10 displays the ball ejection lever 128 in order to eject the game ball of the game ball storage portion to the outside when it is detected that the game ball storage portion of the lower plate 128 or the like is full. It is a display that requests or prompts to operate the (ball pulling lever). The ball removal display j10 may be referred to as a plate full tank error notification, a plate full tank notification, a lower plate full tank error image, or the like, and may be displayed as an image simulating a state in which the ball removal lever is operated. ..

FIG. 132 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 132 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. Further, in FIG. 132 (E), the left-handed display j9 is displayed.

FIG. 132 (F) shows a display in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down. It shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the shaking fluctuation display is performed in the mode. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. In this example, the left-handed display j9 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 132 (G) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The left-handed display j9 is overlapped with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and gradually becomes invisible, and the ball removal display j10 is displayed overlapping with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, so that the entire display is visible.

FIG. 132 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the left-handed display j9, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 132 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually visually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. The ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 132 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The shaking fluctuation is displayed according to the mode, and the left-handed display j9 and the ball-less display j10 are displayed.

FIG. 132 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, the left-handed display j9 is erased. The left-handed display j9 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

FIG. 132 (L) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, the ball removal display j10 has been erased. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the number of game balls in the lower plate 128 is reduced due to a ball removal operation performed by the player or the like and the full tank state is resolved.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed with priority over the left-handed display j9, which is a specific operation request notification, and the ball removal display j10, which is a specific operation request notification, is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display. In this way, the wipe effect display is prioritized over the specific operation request notification of one of the plurality of specific operation request notifications, and the specific operation request notification of one of the plurality of specific operation request notifications is displayed as the wipe effect. It may be displayed with priority over.

(Example 45)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 45th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (l). FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a).

FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is the electric support state. Since the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right side path, it is the correct way to play the game by hitting right in the electric support state. In this embodiment, in the electric support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed with a right-handed display j11 including a character image of "right" in a round frame and a right-handed display including a character string image of "hit right!". Display j12 and is displayed. The right-handed displays j11 and j12 are specific operation request notifications instructing the player to perform a right-handed operation. The right-handed display specific operation request notification may be displayed from the start to the end of the electric support state (time saving state), or if a variable winning opening 234 (attacker) is provided on the right side route, a big hit game. It may also be displayed inside. The right-handed display j11 may be displayed in a large size, decorated, blinking, or scrolled in order to make it easier for the player to see.

FIG. 133 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 133 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 133 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 133 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 133 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 133 (f) shows a display in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down. It shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the shaking fluctuation display is performed in the mode. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the right-handed display j12, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. In this example, the right-handed display j11 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the right-handed display j12 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a and w7b.

FIG. 133 (g) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The right-handed display j12 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and gradually becomes invisible. The right-handed display j11 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the entire display is visible.

FIG. 133 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the right-handed display j12, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 133 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the right-handed display j12, the decorative pattern, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be gradually visually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. The right-handed display j11 is displayed overlapping with the wipe display w7a.

FIG. 133 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The shaking fluctuation is displayed according to the mode, and the right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed.

FIG. 133 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order. In addition, right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed.

FIG. 133 (l) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 2 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, right-handed displays j11 and 12 are displayed.

In this embodiment, the right-handed displays j11 and j12 are displayed as the right-handed display. The right-handed display j11 is a display having a relatively small display size, and the right-handed display j12 is a display having a relatively large display size. Since the right-handed display j11 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, it is always visible during the wipe effect display. The right-handed display j12 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is invisible in the maximum wipe state. In this way, among the specific operation request notifications that instruct the right-handed operation, the first notification (right-handed display j11) is displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display, and the second notification (right-handed display j12). May be displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display.

(Example 46)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 46th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 (A) to 133 (L). FIGS. 133 (A) to 133 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 133 (A) to 133 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a).

FIG. 133 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In this embodiment, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. Since the normal figure start port 228 and the special figure 2 start port 232 are arranged on the right side route, it is the correct way to play the game by hitting right in the electric support state, and the special figure 1 start port 230 is on the left side route. Since it is arranged, it is the correct way to play the game by hitting left in the electric support state. In this embodiment, at a predetermined time after the end of the electric support state, the decorative symbol display device 208 has a left-handed display j13 including a character image of "left" in a round frame and a character string image of "return to the left!". Left-handed display j9 including. The right-handed displays j9 and j13 are specific operation request notifications instructing the player to perform a left-handed operation.

FIG. 133 (B) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 133 (B), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 133 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 133 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 133 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 133 (F) shows a display in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down. It shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the shaking fluctuation display is performed in the mode. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the left-handed display j9, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. In this example, the left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the left-handed display j9 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a and w7b.

FIG. 133 (G) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The left-handed display j9 overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b and gradually becomes invisible. The left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, and the entire display is visible.

FIG. 133 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the left-handed display j9, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 133 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the right-handed display j12, the decorative pattern, the background image, and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 can be gradually visually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. The left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a.

FIG. 133 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The shaking fluctuation is displayed depending on the mode, and the left-handed displays j9 and j13 are displayed.

FIG. 133 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order. In addition, right-handed displays j9 and j13 are displayed.

FIG. 133 (L) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 2 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, left-handed displays j9 and 13 are displayed.

In this embodiment, left-handed displays j9 and j13 are displayed as displays instructing left-handed. The left-handed display j9 is a display having a relatively large display size, and the left-handed display j13 is a display having a relatively small display size. Since the left-handed display j13 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7a, it is always visible during the wipe effect display. The left-handed display j9 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is invisible in the maximum wipe state. In this way, among the specific operation request notifications that instruct the left-handed operation, the first notification (left-handed display j13) is displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display, and the second notification (left-handed display j9). May be displayed overlapping with the wipe effect display.

The left-handed notification and right-handed notification may be a symbol such as an arrow display or an image / animation suggestion notification of how to hit. The right-handed display j11 is a small right-handed display, and the left-handed display j13 is a small left-handed display. The chibi left-handed notification and the chibi right-handed notification may be an arrow display, a red circle, a blue circle, or other symbol, or an image / animation suggestion notification. The right-handed display j11 and the left-handed display j13 may have a larger display size than the right-handed display j12 and the left-handed display j9.

(Example 47)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 47th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (l). FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a). The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variable machine provided with the game board 1600 shown in FIG. 132 (a).

FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 134 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 134 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 134 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

In FIG. 134 (c), the ball removal display j10 including the character string image of "pass through the ball!" Is displayed. The ball removal display j10 is started when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball. The ball removal display j10 is one of the specific operation request notifications. The ball removal display j10 displays the ball ejection lever 128 in order to eject the game ball of the game ball storage portion to the outside when it is detected that the game ball storage portion of the lower plate 128 or the like is full. It is a display that requests or prompts to operate the (ball pulling lever). The ball removal display j10 may be referred to as a plate full tank error notification, a plate full tank notification, a lower plate full tank error image, or the like, and may be displayed as an image simulating a state in which the ball removal lever is operated. ..

FIG. 134 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 134 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 134 (f) shows a display in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, swings up and down. It shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the shaking fluctuation display is performed in the mode. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off decorative patterns, images of the palace, images of enemies of the palace, background images, and the like. In this example, the ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 134 (g) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is visible.

FIG. 134 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. The ball removal display j10 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the entire display is visible.

FIG. 134 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started, the left-handed display j9, the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 can be gradually visually recognized. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In addition, the ball removal display j10 has been erased. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the number of game balls in the lower plate 128 is reduced due to a ball removal operation performed by the player or the like and the full tank state is resolved.

FIG. 134 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 134 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 134 (l) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

In this embodiment, the ball removal display j10, which is a specific operation request notification, is displayed with priority over the wipe effect display. The ball removal display j10 is erased when the ball discharge lever 132 is operated by the player to discharge the game ball from the lower plate 128 and the full state of the lower plate 128 is cleared. The ball removal display j10 is erased in response to the player's operation. In addition, as a result of hitting left when aiming at the special figure 1 starting port by hitting left in another display, normal state, it is detected that the ball has won or passed through the gate or electric chew provided on the right side of the game area. The same applies to the hitting suggestion display (for example, left-handed display) such as the left-handed request display that prompts the player to hit left, and the hitting suggestion display, for example, the left-handed request display is performed during the wipe effect display. When it is detected that the game ball flows down the left side of the game area and wins a prize as a result of the player requesting an operation to weaken the firing strength with, and the player has weakened the firing strength, the player hits the ball. The display in which the suggestion display is deleted may be a display (response display) in response to the player's operation. The button hold icon, the display showing the appearance of the button, the display that reduces the period during which the button operation is valid, the meter that counts down, etc. are examples of the operation request display, and the chance button 136 by the player according to the operation request display. An example of a response display is a display in which a notice is displayed when an operation is performed, a look-ahead notice is displayed, or the hold icon changes to a look-ahead notice mode. In addition, displays that request or prompt the operation by the game clerk (for example, "door is open", "inner frame is open", "ball is jammed", etc.) are also displayed during the wipe effect display. In some cases, erasing the display requesting the clerk's operation by the clerk's operation (door closing, inner frame closing, ball clogging, etc.) is a response display in response to the game clerk's operation. This is an example.

The display of the hold icon by the hold display means overlaps with the wipe display, and is the same image display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208) or another image display means (for example) separately from the notification of the number of holds by the hold display means. , Sub-display device 1030) may be configured to notify the number of holds (second notification) so that the wipe display overlaps with the second notification.

In the normal state, the hold display of special figure 1 (for example, the hold icon of special figure 1) overlaps with the wipe display, and the hold display of special figure 2 (for example, the hold icon of special figure 2) overlaps with the wipe display. It may be configured to do so. In addition, special figure 1 starts to change by winning a game ball to the special figure 1 starting port composed of winning openings whose entrance size does not change, and special figure 2 is a variable winning opening in which the size of the entrance changes. The fluctuation may be started by winning a game ball to the special figure 2 starting port configured by the mouth (electric chew).

During the time reduction, the hold display of the special figure 2 may be configured to overlap the wipe display, and the hold display of the special figure 1 may be configured to overlap the wipe display. In addition, special figure 1 starts to change by winning a game ball to the special figure 1 starting port composed of winning openings whose entrance size does not change, and special figure 2 is a variable winning opening in which the size of the entrance changes. The fluctuation may be started by winning a game ball to the special figure 2 starting port configured by the mouth (electric chew).

Specific operation request notification (for example, specific operation request notification such as chibi right-handed notification, chibi left-handed notification, etc.), decorative symbol, fourth symbol, number of reserved special figures, number of reserved regular figures, decorative symbol of regular figure, regular figure Production display (display in normal production area j8), display of introduction of production characters, display of how to distinguish the reliability of big hit notice such as "red characters are hot", "hot when the hold icon is red", etc. Display of how to distinguish the reliability of the look-ahead notice, tutorial display about production such as explanation of operation method such as "Right hit during big hit", "Reach with 7" and "Super reach within 5 rotations" , Etc., display of production name (reach name, stage name), etc., display of production (RTC production, island simultaneous production, etc.) that starts every time a certain time elapses, and until the production starts. Time display, display notifying the type of error occurring, display of the remaining number of time reductions, display of the remaining number of STs, display of information notification such as the number of balls released, display of volume adjustment display, display of brightness adjustment Selection display and adjustment display such as display, character selection display, BGM selection display, hold frame selection display, display indicating that the door is open, display indicating that the inner frame is open, connector is missing The wipe display is configured to overlap with one of the system displays such as a display indicating that the ball is jammed, a display indicating that a ball is jammed, or a plurality of displays among these displays. It may have been.

Specific operation request notification (for example, specific operation request notification such as chibi right-handed notification, chibi left-handed notification, etc.), decorative symbol, fourth symbol, number of reserved special figures, number of reserved regular figures, decorative symbol of regular figure, regular figure Production display (display in normal production area j8), display of introduction of production characters, display of how to distinguish the reliability of big hit notice such as "red characters are hot", "hot when the hold icon is red", etc. Display of how to distinguish the reliability of the look-ahead notice, tutorial display about production such as explanation of operation method such as "Right hit during big hit", "Reach with 7" and "Super reach within 5 rotations" , Etc., display of production name (reach name, stage name), etc., display of production (RTC production, island simultaneous production, etc.) that starts every time a certain time elapses, and until the production starts. Time display, display notifying the type of error occurring, display of the remaining number of time reductions, display of the remaining number of STs, display of information notification such as the number of balls released, display of volume adjustment display, display of brightness adjustment Selection display and adjustment display such as display, character selection display, BGM selection display, hold frame selection display, display indicating that the door is open, display indicating that the inner frame is open, connector is missing The wipe display is configured to overlap one of the system displays, such as a display indicating that a ball is jammed, a display indicating that a ball is jammed, or a plurality of displays among these displays. You may be.

(Example 48)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 48th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (f). FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (f) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (f), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 135A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 135, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an empty background image corresponding to the empty stage.

FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next fluctuation according to the player performing the stage change operation. The stage change display j14 including the character string image of the "next variation stechen" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, either pressing the chance button 136 or pressing the left / right button of the setting operation unit 137 during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 135 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 135 (c), the normal reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 135 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. It has been notified that there is. Further, the stage change display j14 has been erased. The stage change display j14 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display or when the variable display of the decorative symbol before the stage change ends.

FIG. 135 (e) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 135 (f) shows a state in which the production stage is changed to a mountain stage. After the variation of the decorative pattern is started, the background image is changed from the sky background image to the mountain background image corresponding to the mountain stage, and the production stage is changed from the sky stage to the mountain stage.

In this embodiment, the stage change display j14 is displayed in the symbol variation display before the effect stage is changed, and it is notified that the effect stage is changed.

(Example 49)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 49th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (J). FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (J) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 135 (A) to 135 (J), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 135 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the drawings 135 (A) to (J), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 135 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next fluctuation according to the player performing the stage change operation. The stage change display j14 including the character string image of the "next variation stechen" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, either pressing the chance button 136 or pressing the left / right button of the setting operation unit 137 during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 135C shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 135 (C), the normal reach effect display is started after the reach is reached by the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 135 (D) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In this example, the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed (main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. It has been notified that there is. Further, the stage change display j14 has been erased. The stage change display j14 is erased when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display or when the variable display of the decorative symbol before the stage change ends.

FIG. 135 (E) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 135 (F) shows a state in which the wipe effect display for stage change is started. The appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe is started in such a manner that the wipe display w23 spreads from the rectangular outer circumference of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 toward the center. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w23 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 135 (G) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is displayed. The appearance display of the wipe is displayed in such a manner that the wipe display w23 gradually spreads toward the center.

FIG. 135 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w23. When the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 135 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w23 is withdrawn so as to shrink from the center of the display screen toward the rectangular outer circumference. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 starts, the background image changes to a mountain background image. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image of the mountain, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

FIG. 135 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The background image of the mountain is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the production stage is changed from the empty stage to the mountain stage.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed when the effect stage is changed, and the background image is changed before and after the wipe effect display.

(Example 50)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 50th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 (a) to (3). FIGS. 135 (a) to (3) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 135A to 135W, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the drawings 135 (a) to (w), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 135 (b) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next fluctuation according to the player performing the stage change operation. The stage change display j14 including the character string image of the "next variation stechen" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, either pressing the chance button 136 or pressing the left / right button of the setting operation unit 137 during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 135 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 135 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 135 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted at the start of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 135 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 135 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 135 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c is started, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the mountain background image after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 135 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 135 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 135 (N) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to a mountain background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" which is an out-of-order design mode is started.

FIG. 135 (le) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. A mountain background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. As described above, in this example, the background image of the mountain is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208 after the wipe effect is completed, and the effect stage is changed from the empty stage to the mountain stage.

FIG. 135 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the super reach effect display of the confrontation effect is displayed in the symbol variation display in which the change operation of the effect stage is accepted, then the wipe effect display is displayed, and the background image is piled up after the wipe effect display. It has been changed to the background image of. In this way, when it is decided that the production stage is changed, the background image of the production stage change destination is changed when the wipeout of the wipe production display after the production with high expectation such as a confrontation production is wiped out.

(Example 51)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 51st embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (q). FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 136 (a) to 136 (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 136 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 136 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 136, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Further, in this example, the production stage is changed from the start of the next fluctuation according to the player performing the stage change operation. The stage change display j14 including the character string image of the "next variation stechen" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the stage change operation by the player has been accepted. The stage change operation is, for example, either pressing the chance button 136 or pressing the left / right button of the setting operation unit 137 during the special figure variation game.

FIG. 136 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 136 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 136 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. Further, the stage change display j14 is deleted at the start of the super reach effect display.

FIG. 136 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 136 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 136 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image becomes the normal effect display of the empty background image after the wipe effect display. By switching, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 136 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 136 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 136 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 136 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode.

FIG. 136 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

FIG. 136 (m) shows a state in which the wipe effect display for the stage change is started after the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe is started in such a manner that the wipe display w23 spreads from the rectangular outer circumference of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 toward the center. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe display w23 is displayed on the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 136 (n) shows a state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is displayed. The appearance display of the wipe is displayed in such a manner that the wipe display w23 gradually spreads toward the center.

FIG. 136 (o) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The entire screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is covered with the wipe display w23. When the appearance display of the wipe display w23 is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative design and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 136 (p) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 has been started. In the decorative pattern display device 208, the wipe display w23 is withdrawn so as to shrink from the center of the display screen toward the rectangular outer circumference. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 starts, the background image changes to a mountain background image. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image of the mountain, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible.

FIG. 136 (q) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w23 is completed. The background image of the mountain is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208, and the production stage is changed from the empty stage to the mountain stage.

In this embodiment, the production stage is not changed by the wipe effect display at the end of the super reach effect display, and the wipe effect display for changing the effect stage is displayed during the next symbol variation display after the wipe effect display. The stage is changed.

(Example 52)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 52nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (l). FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 137, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 137 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 137 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 137 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 137 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution. Further, in FIG. 137 (e), the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during the super reach effect display. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. In this embodiment, the initial position of the movable body 1010 is the position above the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 137 (a) to 137 (d). The initial position of the movable body 1010 may be a position where at least a part of the movable body 1010 overlaps with the decorative symbol display device 208 in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 137 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 137 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 137 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 137 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. Further, in this example, the operation of moving the movable body 1010 upward and returning to the initial position is started during the maximum wipe state. In the figure, the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. The start timing of the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be during the wipe-in, during the wipe-out, or before the start of the wipe-in. A part of the wipe display w7a overlaps with the movable body 1010. As described above, when the wipe effect display is performed during the operation of the effect movable body, at least a part of the wipe effect display may overlap with the effect movable body.

FIG. 137 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. In this example, during the wipeout, the movable body 1010 is moved to a position where a part of the movable body 1010 is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and most of the movable body 1010 is not located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. It has moved and the operation of returning the movable body 1010 to the initial position is in progress. At the start of wipeout, all of the movable body 1010 may be moved to a position not located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and at the start of wipeout, the operation of returning the movable body 1010 to the initial position is completed. It may be configured as if it were.

FIG. 137 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010. When the wipe-out is completed, the return operation of the movable body 1010 may proceed until a part of the movable body 1010 is located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, or when the wipe-out is completed, the movable body 1010 is moved. It may have moved to the initial position, or the return operation of the movable body 1010 may be completed when the wipeout is completed.

FIG. 137 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position has been completed. The movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. ..

(Example 53)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 53rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (L). FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 137 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 137 (A), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 137, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 137 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 137 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 137 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 137 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 137 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution. Further, in FIG. 137 (E), the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during the super reach effect display. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 137 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 137 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 137 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 137 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. Further, in this example, the advance notice is given by performing the operation of rotating the movable body 1010 counterclockwise during the maximum wipe state. In the figure, the arrow shown above the movable body 1010 indicates the rotation direction of the movable body 1010. In this example, a reverse jackpot warning operation is performed to notify that the reverse effect display will be performed by rotating the movable body 1010 during the wipe effect display. In this example, the operation in which the movable body 1010 makes one rotation corresponds to the reverse jackpot notice operation. When the reverse jackpot notice operation is performed, it may be confirmed that the jackpot symbol mode is displayed as a fixed stop, or even if the reverse jackpot notice operation is performed, the missed symbol mode is finally displayed as a fixed stop display. It may be configured to be. It should be noted that the big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the reverse big hit notice operation is performed than when the reverse big hit notice operation is not performed.

FIG. 137 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the out-of-order symbol mode was swayed and fluctuated before the wipe effect display, but after the wipeout after the start of the reverse jackpot notice operation, the swayed fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode is started. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position after one rotation. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 137 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed as shaking and fluctuating. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 137 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position has been completed. The movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. ..

In this embodiment, the reverse jackpot notice operation by the movable body 1010 is started during the maximum wipe state. The reverse jackpot notice operation by the movable body 1010 may be started before the start of the wipe-in, may be started during the wipe-in, or may be started during the wipe-out. Further, the reverse jackpot advance notice operation by the movable body 1010 may be terminated during the wipe effect display (for example, during the wipe-in, maximum wipe state, or wipeout state), or after the wipeout. You may try to do it.

(Example 54)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 54th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (l). FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 138 (a) to 138 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 138, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 138 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 138 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 138 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 138 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 138 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 138 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 138 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 138 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. Further, in this embodiment, the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a big hit notice during the wipe-in. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 138 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. Further, in this example, the operation of moving the movable body 1010 upward and returning to the initial position is started during the wipeout. In the figure, the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position has been completed. The movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. ..

In this embodiment, the movement operation of the movable body 1010 is started during the wipe-in, and the return operation of the movable body 1010 to the initial position is started during the wipe-out. In this embodiment, the operation of the movable body 1010 is executed as a jackpot advance notice operation. The operation of the movable body 1010 may be executed as a look-ahead advance notice operation or a reverse jackpot advance notice operation, may be a simple movement rather than a notice operation, or may be an operation as a wipe effect display. There may be. The operation of the movable body 1010 during the wipe effect display may be performed without fail during the wipe effect display, or when one or a plurality of wipe effect displays among the plurality of types of wipe effect displays. It may be configured so that it is performed and not performed when another wipe effect display is performed, or a movable body for effect that is provided with a plurality of movable objects for effect and performs an effect operation for each of the plurality of wipe effect displays. It may be different.

(Example 55)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 55th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (L). FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 138 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 138 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the figures of FIGS. 138 (A) to 138 (L), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 138 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 138 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 138 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 138 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 138 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 138 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 138 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 138 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. Further, in this embodiment, the movable body 1010 is moved downward from the initial position as a reverse jackpot warning operation during the wipe-in. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 138 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot design mode, is started. In this example, the out-of-order symbol mode was swayed and fluctuated before the wipe effect display, but after the wipeout after the start of the reverse jackpot notice operation, the swayed fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode is started. Further, in this example, the operation of moving the movable body 1010 upward and returning to the initial position is started during the wipeout. In the figure, the upward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" swings left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It is displayed as shaking and fluctuating. Further, the movable body 1010 is moving to the initial position. In the figure, the downward arrows shown on the left and right of the movable body 1010 indicate the moving direction of the movable body 1010.

FIG. 138 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In addition, the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position has been completed. The movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the movement of the movable body 1010 to the initial position may be completed during the stop display of the decorative symbol. ..

In this embodiment, the operation of the movable body 1010 is executed as a reverse jackpot notice operation. It should be noted that the notice when the movable body 1010 moves as some kind of notice action is a definite notice (a definite notice that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed, and the symbol started after one of the holds is digested. In the variable display, it may be a definite pre-reading notice, etc. that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed, or the missed symbol mode may be finally stopped and displayed. In each symbol variation display that is started by digesting each of the holdings of, there may be a case where all the outlier symbol modes are finally stopped and displayed.

(Example 56)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 56th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (l). FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 139 (a) to 139 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 139 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Further, the changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is the display mode of the white circle hold icon.

FIG. 139 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 138 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 139 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

FIG. 139 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 139 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 139 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 139 (g) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 139 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 139 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

FIG. 139 (j) shows the state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. In FIG. 139 (j), the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special drawing 1 hold icon display area is in the state at the time when the wipeout is completed, but the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon has not started. ..

FIG. 139 (k) shows a state in which the redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, after the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed.

FIG. 139 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the changing icon and the hold icon are not redisplayed when the wipeout is started, and the changing icon is changed after the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed. And the hold icon redisplay starts.

(Example 57)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 57th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (L). FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 139 (A) to 139 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 139 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 139 (A), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Further, the changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is the display mode of the white circle hold icon.

FIG. 139 (B) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 138 (B), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 139 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

FIG. 139 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 139 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 139 (F) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 139 (G) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 139 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 139 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

FIG. 139 (J) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 between FIGS. 139 (C) and 139 (J), and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased to 2. In FIG. 139 (J), although the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special drawing 1 hold icon display area is completed, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed and the increased hold is increased. The display of the hold icon corresponding to is not started.

FIG. 139 (K) shows a state in which the redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, after the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 holding icon display area is completed, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are redisplayed and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed. The display starts. The hold icon b2 is the face hold icon shown in 104, which is a look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 139 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the changing icon and the hold icon are not redisplayed at the start of the wipeout, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased from the super reach effect display to the start of the wipeout is not started. After the wipe-out in the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area is completed, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed and the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is started to be displayed.

(Example 58)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 58th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (l). FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 140 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Further, the changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is a display mode of the face hold icon and a notice mode.

FIG. 140 (b) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 140 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 140 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

FIG. 140 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 140 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 140 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 140 (g) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 140 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 140 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

FIG. 140 (j) shows the state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. In FIG. 140 (j), although the wipeout in a part of the changing icon display area is not completed, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are redisplayed.

FIG. 140 (k) shows a state in which the redisplay of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b1 is started during the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 140 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the wipeout is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the changing icon display area and the special figure 1 hold icon display area are the hold display means, and the changing icon and the hold icon are displayed when the wipeout by a part of the hold display means is not completed. The display resumes.

(Example 59)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 59th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (L). FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 140 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 140 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Further, the changing icon a1 is displayed in the changing icon display area. The display mode of the changing icon a1 is the display mode of the white circle hold icon.

FIG. 140 (B) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 140 (B), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 140 (C), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. With the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are deleted.

FIG. 140 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 140 (E) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 140 (F) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 140 (G) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 140 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 140 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started. In this example, the redisplay of the changing icon and the hold icon is not started when the wipeout is started.

FIG. 140 (J) shows a state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, in this example, one game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 between FIGS. 140 (C) and 140 (J), and the number of reservations in special drawing 1 is increased to 2. In FIG. 139 (J), although the wipeout in the changing icon display area and the special drawing 1 hold icon display area is completed, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed and the increased hold is increased. The display of the hold icon corresponding to is not started.

FIG. 140 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In this embodiment, after the wipeout is completed, the changing icon a1 and the hold icon b1 are redisplayed, and the hold icon b2 corresponding to the increased hold is started to be displayed. The hold icon b2 is the face hold icon shown in 104, which is a look-ahead notice mode.

FIG. 140 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, after the wipeout is completed, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed, and the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is started to be displayed.

An effect display (for example, background display, decorative pattern, etc.) that is gradually displayed according to the progress of the wipeout, and a part (at the bottom of the changing icon) according to the progress of the wipeout to a predetermined paragraph. There is an effect display in which a part or a part of the hold icon) or the entire hold display area is displayed. In this case, since there are parts that can be seen gradually as the wipe-out progresses, some of the effect displays appear unnaturally, so it is easy to pay attention to the part of the effect display, and the part of the effect display. In some cases, the effect of the effect display can be enhanced. As a part of the effect display, it is preferable to apply the hold display, the pre-reading notice mode or the pre-reading notice display which may be displayed in the pre-reading notice mode or the pre-reading notice mode, but in addition, the display of the custom state of the production. , Volume adjustment display, BGM selection display, character selection display, or some other display may be applied.

(Example 60)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 60th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (m). FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (m) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (m), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 141 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. In this embodiment, the display of the changing icon and the holding icon is omitted.

FIG. 141B shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 141 (b), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 141 (c), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 141 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 141 (e) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 141 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 141 (g) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 141 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 141 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 141 (j) shows the state in which the wipe displays w7a and w7b are being withdrawn. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. In this example. The display of the logo image j3 is started during the wipeout. The logo image j3 is displayed so as to overlap with "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" which is an out-of-order design mode.

FIG. 141 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode swaying from side to side.

In FIG. 141 (l), the logo image j3 is erased, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c instead of the out-of-order symbol mode. It shows the state. The logo image j3 of this embodiment is a reverse effect display, and the jackpot symbol mode is displayed instead of the out-of-order symbol mode at the same time or after the logo image j3 is erased.

FIG. 141 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the logo image j3, which is a reverse effect display, is displayed during the wipeout. In addition, when the reverse effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed, and even when the reverse effect display is displayed, the missed symbol mode may be finally confirmed. ..

(Example 61)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 61st embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (k). FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (k) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 142A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a display mode swaying from side to side. The jackpot symbol mode of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is not a jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a probabilistic symbol mode) that is relatively advantageous to the player, but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a non-probability variation symbol mode). The jackpot symbol aspect of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is a symbol aspect suggesting a non-probability variation jackpot. The jackpot symbol modes of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are symbols that suggest a probabilistic jackpot.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 142 (a), the number of holdings of the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of the special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104.

FIG. 142 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

FIG. 142 (c) shows a state in which the jackpot game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 142 (c), the opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) has not started. A character string image of "big hit" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit game has started. In addition, "decoration 2" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the jackpot symbol mode when the symbol is stopped and displayed is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Has been done. In addition, the background image is changed and the hold icon is deleted as the jackpot game is started.

FIG. 142 (d) shows a state in which the round display j15 including the character string image of “1R” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the jackpot game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Further, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “right →” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, it is the correct way to hit the game ball by hitting right during the big hit game, so that the right hit display j16 is displayed. It is displayed.

FIG. 142 (e) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation production (battle production) in which an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed is started. At the start of the confrontation effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character image of the palace on the left side of the display screen, displays the character image of the enemy on the right side of the display screen, and changes the background image. The confrontation production of this example is a probabilistic promotion production that is a production for making the player expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the probabilistic state) may be started after the end of the jackpot game. .. When the stop symbols of the special symbol display devices 212 and 214 are the special symbols of the probabilistic jackpot (for example, "special diagram A" shown in FIG. 5), and the non-probability jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed with a probability change promotion success effect display in which the lord defeats the enemy of the lord, and the stop symbols of the special figure display devices 212 and 214 are non-probability change jackpot special figures (for example, "special figure C" shown in FIG. 5). Yes, when the non-probability jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the probabilistic promotion failure effect display in which the palace is defeated by the enemy of the palace is displayed. At the start of the confrontation effect display of this example, the decorative symbol (“decoration 2” in this example) is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 142 (f) shows a state in which the probabilistic promotion success effect display of the animation display of the scene in which the enemy of the palace collapses and the lord wins the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display device 212 is a special figure of a probabilistic jackpot (for example, “special figure A” shown in FIG. 5), the non-probability jackpot symbol mode is determined in the decorative symbol display device 208. Since it was displayed, the probabilistic promotion success effect display is displayed. The probabilistic promotion success effect display is a display suggesting that the probabilistic state is started after the big hit game. The display of "decoration 2" is resumed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 142 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3", which is a probability variation jackpot symbol mode, is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that the symbol mode by the "decoration 3" constituting the jackpot symbol mode advantageous to the player is displayed, and the state advantageous to the player (probability variation state) is started after the end of the jackpot game.

FIG. 142 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is reduced and displayed. The "decoration 3" may be displayed and continued until the jackpot game is completed.

FIG. 142 (i) shows a state in which a blackout display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the end of the confrontation effect. The right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed even during the blackout display. The blackout display may be in a state in which the wipe effect is not performed, or the blackout display may be a wipe effect display different from the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 142 (j) shows a state in which the effect display in the normal jackpot game is displayed after the blackout display is completed. A round display j15 including a character string image of "1R" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, in the upper left corner of the display screen, "decoration 3" constituting a jackpot symbol mode advantageous to the player is displayed, and a state advantageous to the player (probability change state) is started after the jackpot game is completed. Has been notified.

FIG. 142 (k) shows a state in which the second round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is completed, the variable winning opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the round display j15 including the character string image of "2R" is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the effect display suggesting that the player who wins the confrontation effect during the jackpot game is advantageous. It should be noted that the wipe effect display may be displayed after the effect display suggesting that the confrontation effect during the big hit game is advantageous to the player is displayed.

(Example 62)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 62nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (M). FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (M) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (M), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 142 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a display mode swaying from side to side. The jackpot symbol mode of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is not a jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a probabilistic symbol mode) that is relatively advantageous to the player, but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a non-probability variation symbol mode). The jackpot symbol aspect of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is a symbol aspect suggesting a non-probability variation jackpot. The jackpot symbol modes of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are symbols that suggest a probabilistic jackpot.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 142 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104.

FIG. 142B shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

FIG. 142 (C) shows a state in which the jackpot game is started. At the time shown in FIG. 142 (C), the opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) has not started. A character string image of "big hit" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit game has started. In addition, "decoration 2" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the jackpot symbol mode when the symbol is stopped and displayed is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Has been done. In addition, the background image is changed and the hold icon is deleted as the jackpot game is started.

FIG. 142 (D) shows a state in which the round display j15 including the character string image of “1R” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the jackpot game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Further, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “right →” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, it is the correct way to hit the game ball by hitting right during the big hit game, so the right hit display j16 is displayed. It is displayed.

FIG. 142 (E) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation production (battle production) in which an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed is started. At the start of the confrontation effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character image of the palace on the left side of the display screen, displays the character image of the enemy on the right side of the display screen, and changes the background image. The confrontation production of this example is a probabilistic promotion production that is a production for making the player expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the probabilistic state) may be started after the end of the jackpot game. .. At the start of the confrontation effect display of this example, the decorative symbol (“decoration 2” in this example) is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 142 (F) shows a state in which the probabilistic promotion failure effect display of the animation display of the scene in which the palace collapses and the palace is defeated in the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display device 212 is a special figure of the non-probability change jackpot (for example, “special figure C” shown in FIG. 5), the decorative symbol display device 208 has the non-probability change jackpot symbol mode Since the confirmation is displayed, the probability change promotion failure effect display is displayed. The probability change promotion failure effect display is a display suggesting that the probability change state is not started after the big hit game. The display of "decoration 2" is resumed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 142 (G) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the round display j15, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. The right-handed display j16 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 142 (H) shows a state in which the appearance indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The right-handed display j16 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 142 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The right-handed display j16 is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 142 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipe out) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the round display j15 including the character string image of "1R" is displayed, and the background image changes to the normal background image during the jackpot game.

FIG. 142 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. The wipe display w7a is retracted toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is retracted toward the lower right corner of the display screen.

FIG. 142 (L) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a normal background image during a big hit game is displayed, and a round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper right of the display screen. Right-handed display j16 is displayed, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen.

FIG. 142 (M) shows a state in which the second round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is completed, the variable winning opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the round display j15 including the character string image of "2R" is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed after the effect display suggesting that the player who wins the confrontation effect during the big hit game is disadvantageous is displayed. In this way, the wipe effect display may be displayed during the jackpot game.

(Example 63)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 63rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i). FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 143 (a) to 143 (i), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is swayed and displayed in a display mode swaying from side to side. The jackpot symbol mode of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is not a jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a probabilistic symbol mode) that is relatively advantageous to the player, but is relatively advantageous to the player. It is a low jackpot symbol mode (in this example, a non-probability variation symbol mode). The jackpot symbol aspect of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is a symbol aspect suggesting a non-probability variation jackpot.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 143 (a), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 is 0. The hold icons b1 and b2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons shown in FIG. 104.

FIG. 143 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

FIG. 143 (c) shows a state in which the jackpot game has started. At the time shown in FIG. 143 (c), the opening of the variable winning opening 234 (attacker) has not started. A character string image of "big hit" is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the big hit game has started. In addition, "decoration 2" is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is notified that the jackpot symbol mode when the symbol is stopped and displayed is "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Has been done. In addition, the background image is changed and the hold icon is deleted as the jackpot game is started.

FIG. 143 (d) shows a state in which the round display j15 including the character string image of “1R” is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Immediately before the first round of the jackpot game is started, the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively large display size to notify that the first round is started. Further, a right-handed display j16 including a character string image of “right →” is displayed on the upper right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this embodiment, since the variable winning opening 234 is provided on the right path of the game area 124, it is the correct way to hit the game ball by hitting right during the big hit game, so that the right hit display j16 is displayed. It is displayed.

FIG. 143 (e) shows a state in which the first round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened, and the round display j15 is displayed in a relatively small display size on the upper left of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the first round is started, a confrontation production (battle production) in which an animation of a scene in which the lord and the grandfather drink and compare and confront is displayed is started. At the start of the confrontation effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character image of the palace on the right side of the display screen, displays the character image of the grandfather on the left side of the display screen, and changes the background image. The confrontation production of this example is a probabilistic promotion production that is a production for making the player expect that a state advantageous to the player (in this example, the probabilistic state) may be started after the end of the jackpot game. .. At the start of the confrontation effect display of this example, the decorative symbol (“decoration 2” in this example) is erased on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 143 (f) shows a state in which the probabilistic promotion failure effect display of the animation display of the scene in which the palace is drunk and the palace is defeated in the confrontation is displayed. In this example, when the stop symbol of the special figure 1 display device 212 is a special figure of a non-probability change jackpot (for example, “special figure C” shown in FIG. 5), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a non-probability change jackpot symbol mode. Since the confirmation is displayed, the probability change promotion failure effect display is displayed. The probability change promotion failure effect display is a display suggesting that the probability change state is not started after the big hit game. The display of "decoration 2" is resumed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 143 (g) shows a state in which a dark display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 at the end of the confrontation effect. The right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed even during the blackout display. The blackout display may be in a state in which the wipe effect is not performed, or the blackout display may be a wipe effect display different from the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which the darkening display is completed and the normal background image during the jackpot game is gradually displayed. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a round display j15 including a character string image of "1R" is displayed in a relatively large display size.

FIG. 143 (i) shows a state in which the second round of the jackpot game has started. When the first round is completed, the variable winning opening 234 is closed, and when the second round is started, the variable winning opening 234 is opened. In the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the round display j15 including the character string image of "2R" is displayed in a relatively large display size, and it is notified that the second round has started.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is not displayed after the effect display suggesting that the player who wins the confrontation effect during the jackpot game is disadvantageous is displayed. In this way, the wipe effect display does not have to be displayed during the jackpot game. In addition, it is configured so that the probabilistic promotion success effect display is more easily displayed in the confrontation effect in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other as shown in Examples 61 and 62 above than the confrontation effect of drinking comparison shown in this embodiment. I have.

It is performed during the first jackpot production (the old man and the palace drinking battle production in Example 63 above) and during the jackpot, which indicates whether or not a state advantageous to the player is started during the jackpot game. Of a plurality of jackpot productions such as the second jackpot production (the battle production between the palace and the swordsman in Examples 61 and 62 above) that indicates whether or not a state advantageous to the player is started by the production display. If the first jackpot production fails, the wipe effect will not be performed, but if the second jackpot production fails, the success effect is more likely to occur than the first jackpot production. The wipe effect may be performed and the display may be returned to the normal jackpot effect display. It should be noted that the wipe effect may be performed even when the first big hit medium effect results in a failure effect. The wipe effect display during the symbol variation display described in the above embodiment (after the display suggesting deviation is displayed in the super reach effect display) may be applied to the wipe effect display during the jackpot.

(Example 64)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 64th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (H). FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (H) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (H), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 143 (A) shows a state in which the final round (for example, 7 rounds) during the jackpot game is being performed. A round display j15 including a character string image of "final R" is displayed in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the final round is being performed. Further, a right-handed display j16 is displayed on the upper right of the display screen, and "decoration 2" is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Further, in response to the fact that the lower plate 128 is full of game balls, the ball removal display j17 including the white character string image of “ball removal” is displayed. The ball removal display j17 is a lower plate full tank error display, and is a display that prompts the player to eject the game ball from the lower plate 128. In this example, a part of the ball removal display j17 is displayed overlapping with a part of the round display j15.

FIG. 143 (B) shows a state in which the final round has been completed. When the final round is completed, a character string image of "big hit" is displayed instead of the round display j15. In addition, the ball removal display j17 may be displayed overlapping with a part of the character string image of the "big hit", or the ball removal display j17 may not overlap with a part of the character string image of the "big hit". It may be displayed.

FIG. 143 (C) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative pattern and the character string image of the "big hit". The right-handed display j16 and the ball removal display j17 are displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 143 (D) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The right-handed display j16 and the ball removal display j17 are displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 143 (E) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the most recent symbol mode is ". The stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" is started. In this example, the player starts the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (E).

FIG. 143 (F) shows a state in which the withdrawal indications of the wipe indications w7a and w7b are displayed. Since the full tank state of the lower plate 128 is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the ball removal display j17 is erased. The right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed, and the hold icons b1 and b2, which are white circle hold icons, are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the number of holds in the special figure 1 is 2. Has been notified.

FIG. 143 (G) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is the latest symbol mode, is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. There is. Further, the right-handed display j16 is continuously displayed. In this example, the jackpot game ends after the wipe effect display ends, and when the jackpot game ends, the right-handed display j16 is erased. If the electric support state is started after the big hit game, the right-handed display j16 may be displayed even after the big hit game.

FIG. 143 (H) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In this example, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the hold of the digested special figure 1 is not displayed as a variable icon and is deleted at the start or after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The hold icon b2 is moved and displayed from the hold 2 display area to the hold 1 display area.

In this embodiment, the jackpot game is in progress, and the wipe effect display is displayed before the symbol variation display is started. In this example, the wipe effect display is displayed after the final round of the jackpot game is completed.

The wipe effect display displayed after the probabilistic promotion effect display during the jackpot game or after the end of the final round is not limited to the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and may be any of the wipe displays shown above. Often, for example, the wipe display w15 shown in FIG. 111 may be used.

(Example 65)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 65th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (i). FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (i) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (i), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The movable body 1010 of this embodiment is provided with an LED lamp, and the movable body 1010 may be in a light emitting state.

FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 144, the display of the hold icon in the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. Further, the movable body 1010 is in a light-off state.

FIG. 144 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 144 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 144 (c), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, the movable body 1010 is in a light emitting state, and the super reach effect display is started.

In FIG. 144 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 144 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 144 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord defeats the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit.

FIG. 144 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b and the movable body 1010 is turned off during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode is a display suggesting that the jackpot is off. The light emission of the movable body 1010 is finished, and the movable body 1010 is turned off.

FIG. 144 (h) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" are swayed and displayed, and overlap with the right symbol of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the decorative design of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2" in the reduced display mode is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol may be displayed at two places.

FIG. 144 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this embodiment, the big hit notice is given by the notice lamp of the movable body 1010. The movable body 1010 is a logo movable body on which the logo of the pachinko machine 100 is written, and the lamp of the movable body 1010 may be a logo lamp.

(Example 66)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 66th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 (A) to 144 (L). FIGS. 144 (A) to 144 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 144 (A) to 144 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29. The movable body 1010 of this embodiment is provided with an LED lamp, and the movable body 1010 may be in a light emitting state.

FIG. 144 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 144 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of FIGS. 144 (A) to 144 (L), the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. The movable body 1010 is in the extinguished state.

FIG. 144 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 144 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 144 (C), the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, the movable body 1010 is in a light emitting state, and the super reach effect display is started.

In FIG. 144 (D), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 144 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 144 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 144 (G) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe off the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. Even during the wipe-in, the movable body 1010 is in a light emitting state and the advance notice operation (lighting) is continued. In this example, the display of the decorative pattern overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b. The decorative symbol is a mini decorative symbol, which is different from the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed as the left and right symbols, and the variable display of the middle symbol continues. Has been done.

FIG. 144 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. The display of the decorative pattern overlaps with the wipe display w7a and w7b.

FIG. 144 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the background image and the like on the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration" which is an out-of-design mode. 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ”is started to be displayed. Further, the display of the decorative symbol (mini decorative symbol) on the upper left of the display screen overlaps with the wipe displays w7a and w7b, and the variable display of the middle symbol is continued.

FIG. 144 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. A mini decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with "decoration 2" on the right of the shaking fluctuation display. The variable display of the medium design of the mini decorative design continues.

FIG. 144 (K) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol of the mini decorative symbol. Further, the movable body 1010 is turned off. The mini decorative symbol is erased before the special figure 1 variable game is completed.

FIG. 144 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, a mini decorative symbol, which is a decorative symbol, is displayed so as to overlap the wipe display. As for the mini decorative symbol, the temporary stop display may be started with the middle symbol before the wipe effect display is started. When the decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with the wipe display, the temporary stop display may be started with the middle symbol before the wipe effect display is started.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 144 (K') to (N') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 144 (K') to 144 (N'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 144 (K') shows a state continuing from FIG. 144 (J), and shows a state in which a blackout display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 after the wipe effect display. The mini decorative pattern is displayed even during the blackout display.

FIG. 144 (L') shows a state in which the darkening display is completed. The darkening display in this example is a reverse effect sign, and in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is left and right. The shaking is displayed in a shaking display mode. A mini decorative symbol is displayed overlapping with "decoration 2" which is the symbol on the right of the shaking fluctuation display. The variable display of the medium design of the mini decorative design continues.

FIG. 144 (M') shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol of the mini decorative symbol. Further, the movable body 1010 is turned off.

FIG. 144 (N') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display is displayed, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is also stopped and displayed in the mini-decorative symbol, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this modification, the jackpot symbol mode is the main stop display (fixed stop display) in both the mini decorative symbol and the normal decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. FIG. 144 (L) shows an example in which the mini decorative symbol is deleted at the timing when the normal decorative symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed, but as in this example, each of the plurality of decorative symbols corresponds to the result of the lottery. The symbol mode (big hit symbol mode, missed symbol mode) may be displayed as a fixed stop display.

Further, although the example in which the lamp of the movable body 1010 as the notice display means (an example of the notice means) performs the notice operation is shown, other lamps or LEDs such as an LED provided on the game board and an LED near the start port may be used. The advance notice operation may be performed, or an image display means, a dot matrix display means, a 7-segment display means, or the like may be used as the notice display means. In addition, a notice may be given by the movement of the movable body for production. It should be noted that during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the advance notice operation by the advance notice means (for example, the advance notice display means, the effect movable body, etc.) is not performed, the final notice operation is performed after the symbol change display. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily displayed as a fixed stop, or by a look-ahead notice means (for example, a notice means or a notice display means) in a state where the start of the symbol change display is suspended. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed as a final stop after the symbol variation display when the pre-reading advance notice operation is performed rather than when it is performed. Further, in FIG. 144, the movable body 1010 is lit before the wipe-in to start the warning operation and continues to be lit until after the out-out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum wipe is performed before the wipe-in, during the wipe-in, and so on. The advance notice operation may be started at any of the state, wipeout, and after wipeout, and may be turned off at any of the wipe-in, maximum wipe state, wipeout, and after wipeout to end the notice operation. ..

(Example 67)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 67th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (l). FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 145 (a) to 145 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In each of the drawings of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In this embodiment, a square mini-game area j18 is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the mini-game area, mini-games are played. The result display of the mini game (slot production) includes "certain", "win", "ri", "gi", "?", And "destination". When "Probability" is confirmed as the result display, it is definitely announced that the changing symbol variation display will be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode, and the result display "this" is the result display "?". Is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than when "" is displayed, and the result display "ri" is more likely to be displayed in the changing symbol than when the result display "?" Is displayed. Reach effect is easy to be performed, and the result display "Gi" is easier to perform pseudo-continuous effect in the changing symbol than when the result display "?" Is displayed, and the result display "Destination" is the result display "?" It is foretold that when the pending symbol variation display is started, it is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display than when is displayed. Here, it is taken as an example of the failure effect that "?" Is confirmed and displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (a), the mini game is not played. When the mini-game is not played, the normal background of the diagonal plaid (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini-game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not played, but the normal background may be continuously displayed even during the mini game.

FIG. 145 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (b), the mini game is not played.

FIG. 145 (c) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. The downward arrow illustrated in the mini-game area j18 indicates that a mini-game is being played.

FIG. 145 (d) shows a state in which "?" Is displayed in the mini-game area as the result display of the mini-game. "?" May indicate that the result of the mini-game is a failure effect, and the failure effect is a display suggesting an outlier in the mini-game.

FIG. 145 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 145 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed in the foreground of the mini-game area j18, and are displayed so as to wipe off the "?".

FIG. 145 (g) shows a state in which the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is displayed in the mini-game area j18.

FIG. 145 (h) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w25a and the upper left end of the wipe display w25b are in contact with each other, and the entire surface of the mini game area j18 is covered by the wipe displays w25a and w25b.

FIG. 145 (i) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b has been started. In the mini-game area j18, the wipe display w25a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w25b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w25a and w25b is started, the image of "?" Which is the result display is deleted.

FIG. 145 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The wipe display w25a is shrunk and erased toward the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the wipe display w25b is shrunk and erased toward the lower right corner of the mini game area j18.

FIG. 145 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is swayed and displayed.

FIG. 145 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed in the mini-game area j18. As described above, the wipe effect display may be displayed in the area where a certain effect is performed in the display screen of the display device.

(Example 68)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 68 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 (A) to 145 (K). FIGS. 145 (A) to 145 (K) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 145 (A) to 145 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 145 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each of the drawings of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (A), the mini game is not played. When the mini-game is not played, the normal background of the diagonal plaid (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini-game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not played, but the normal background may be continuously displayed even during the mini game.

FIG. 145 (B) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 145 (B), the mini game is not played.

FIG. 145 (C) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. The downward arrow illustrated in the mini-game area j18 indicates that a mini-game is being played.

FIG. 145 (D) shows a state in which "gi" is displayed in the mini-game area as a result display of the mini-game. The result display "Gi" is more likely to perform a pseudo-continuous effect when the symbol changes during fluctuation than when the result display "?" Is displayed, but when the result display "Gi" is displayed, a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. It does not have to be.

FIG. 145 (E) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 145 (F) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed in the foreground of the mini-game area j18, and are displayed so as to wipe off the "gi".

FIG. 145 (G) shows a state in which the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is displayed in the mini-game area j18. In addition, a pseudo-continuous effect has been started in which the variable display in the left and right symbol display area 208ac is resumed.

FIG. 145 (H) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w25a and the upper left end of the wipe display w25b are in contact with each other, and the entire surface of the mini game area j18 is covered by the wipe displays w25a and w25b. Further, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 145 (I) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w25a and w25b has been started. In the mini-game area j18, the wipe display w25a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner, and the wipe display w25b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner. When the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is started, the image of the result display "gi" is deleted. "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 145 (J) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The wipe display w25a is shrunk and erased toward the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the wipe display w25b is shrunk and erased toward the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. In this example, the super reach effect display is started after the withdrawal of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed. The normal reach effect display may be started after the withdrawal of the wipe displays w25a and w25b is completed, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be performed.

FIG. 145 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the wipe effect display is displayed in the mini-game area j18. As described above, the wipe effect display may be displayed in the area where a certain effect is performed in the display screen of the display device. In addition, when the result display "this" is confirmed and displayed, the changing symbol variation display is finally confirmed and displayed in the jackpot symbol mode than when the result display "gi" of the mini game is confirmed and displayed. It is structured so that it is easy to use, and the result display "gi" may be used as an outlier suggestion in a mini game. The definite display of "gi" may be a successful production because it is easy to perform a pseudo-continuous production.

(Example 69)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 69th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (n). FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 146 (a) to 146 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In this embodiment, the mini decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the mini decorative symbol "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed. The mini decorative symbol is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol in the right symbol display area 208c. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In each of the drawings of FIG. 145, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, the effect stage is an empty stage, and an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (a), the mini game is not played. When the mini-game is not played, the normal background of the diagonal plaid (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) is displayed in the mini-game area j18. In this embodiment, the normal background is displayed only when the mini game is not played, but the normal background may be continuously displayed even during the mini game.

FIG. 146 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, a variable display of the mini decorative pattern is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 146 (b), the mini game is not played.

FIG. 146 (c) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. The downward arrow illustrated in the mini-game area j18 indicates that a mini-game is being played.

FIG. 146 (d) shows a state in which "ri" is displayed in the mini-game area as the result display of the mini-game.

FIG. 146 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In this example, in FIG. 146 (e), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 146 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the wipe effect display is started in the mini game area j18. The appearance display of the wipe display w25a is started from the upper left corner of the mini game area j18, and the appearance display of the wipe display w25b is started from the lower right corner of the mini game area j18. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w25a and w25b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w25a and w25b are displayed in the foreground of the mini-game area j18, and are displayed so as to wipe off the "ri".

FIG. 146 (g) shows a scene in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, the mini-game area j18 is erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other with the start of the super reach effect display. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of is started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 146 (h) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. In addition, the fluctuation display of the normal decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is erased. The variable display of the mini decorative pattern is continuously displayed.

FIG. 146 (i) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like. The mini decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 146 (j) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible. The mini decorative pattern is displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

FIG. 146 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the display of the mini game area j18 is resumed, the display of the normal decorative symbol is resumed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is resumed. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started. The symbol modes displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c do not have to be the same before and after the wipe-in and wipe-out. For example, the symbol mode is shifted to the left middle right symbol display area 208a to the wipe-out. “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3”, which is a design aspect, may be displayed.

FIG. 146 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Further, the wipe effect display of the mini-game area j18 is terminated before the wipe effect display of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the mini-game is not performed. When the mini-game area j18 is erased with the start of the super reach effect display, the wipe effect display in the mini-game area j18 may be terminated even during the process when the mini-game area j18 is erased.

FIG. 146 (m) shows a state in which the swaying variation display of the mini-decorative pattern of “Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2” has been started. The sway variation display of the mini decorative symbol is started after the sway variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 146 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display is displayed, and the mini-decorative symbol of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the mini-game area j18 is erased by starting the super reach effect display during the wipe effect display in the mini-game area j18. In addition, the display of the mini decorative pattern in this embodiment can also be applied to the above embodiment.

The wipe effect display of the mini-game area j8 may be displayed only when the result display "outside" is confirmed, or the result display with the result display of the mini-game area j8 (for example, "?", "Gi". It may be displayed only when it is (for example, "?", "Gi"), and there is another result display (for example, "gi") different from the case where the result display of the mini game area j8 is a certain result display (for example, "?", "Gi"). In the case of "re"), the result display or the wipe effect display of a different pattern may be displayed, or the mini game area may be displayed when the effect corresponding to the result display of the mini game area j8 is not performed. Wipe effect display may be performed. For example, even though the result display of the mini-game area j8 was "ri", the present effect display area (in the above embodiment, the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner, and the confrontation effect between the palace and the enemy is performed. The wipe effect display of the mini-game area j8 may be performed when the notice is not correct, such as when the reach effect is not performed in the display area). Although the slot effect is illustrated as a mini-game performed in the mini-game area j8, the occurrence of the effect performed in the main effect display area (for example, pseudo continuous effect, reach effect, look-ahead notice effect, hold change effect, etc.) is generated by the result display. Anything may be used as long as it gives a notice, a big hit notice by displaying the result, or a pre-reading notice. Instead of the slot production, it may be a production such as a confrontation between the lord and the enemy, fishing, bowling, etc. For example, if the mini-game is a fishing production, whether or not a fish with "reach", a fish with "suspicious", a fish with "hit?", Etc. can be caught in the river, or catching The characters written on the fish may be used as a result display to affect some kind of notice or the production performed in the production display area. A mini-game effect may be applied to the slot machine. For example, when a failure effect is displayed for some effect, a wipe effect may be performed in the mini-game area of the display device of the slot machine.

(Example 70)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 70th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (n). FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (n) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 147 (a) to 147 (n), the main liquid crystal unit 1001, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1010 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 147 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is, for example, 4, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, hold icons b1 to b4, which are white circle hold icons, are displayed. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 147 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The hold icon b1 is deleted, and the hold icons b2 to b4 are moved to the left and displayed.

FIG. 147 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 147 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 147 (d) shows a scene in which all the hold icons are erased, the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other with the start of the super reach effect display. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation has started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 147 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 147 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 147 (g) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when the wipe-out of the wipe effect display is started. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 147 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 147 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 147 (j) shows a state in which the hole portion j19 is provided in a part of the wipe display w7b. A part of the display overlapping the wipe display w7b is visibly displayed from the hole j19. In this example, the hold icon is displayed during the maximum wipe state, and a part of the hold icon and a part of the background image are visibly displayed from the hole j19.

FIG. 147 (k) shows a state in which the hole j19 is erased and the maximum wipe state is reached again.

FIG. 147 (l) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol is completed, and the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 Then, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order design mode, is started.

FIG. 147 (m) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. Also, in this example, the hold icon is not displayed from the start to the end of the wipeout. The hold icon is displayed when the next symbol variation display is started. The hold icon may be displayed from the start of the wipeout.

FIG. 147 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

In this embodiment, the hole j19 from which the background display can be seen from a part of the wipe display is started when the maximum wipe state is reached. The wipe display may be provided with one or more holes, from which at least a portion of the hold icon may be visible. The changing icon of the hold icons may be visible from the hole, and the hold icon other than the changing icon of the hold icons may be visible. What the player can see from one or more holes is not limited to the hold icon, but may be a decorative symbol or a notice display reverse jackpot notice display. The time when one or more holes appear in the wipe display is not limited to the maximum wipe state, and the holes may appear during the wipe-in, during the wipe-out, or in the wipe-in. One or more holes may appear in any of the states, the maximum wipe state, the wipeout state, a plurality of these states, and all the states, and the wipe-in state and the maximum wipe state. , One or more holes may be extinguished in any state, a plurality of states, or all states in the wipe-out state. In this embodiment, an example in which a hole appears in the wipe display is shown, but it is not limited to the appearance of the hole, and it is sufficient that the display of the background hidden by the wipe can be visually recognized by the player, that is, One or more translucent parts or notches may appear or disappear in the wipe display, and instead of appearing or disappearing, one or more translucent parts or notches may appear or disappear in the wipe display. A part may be provided.

(Example 71)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 71st embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (l). FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (l) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 148 (a) to 148 (l), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 148 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 148, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, since the current production stage is an empty stage, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an empty background image corresponding to the empty stage.

FIG. 148 (b) shows a state in which the holding of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started in the state where the effect stage is an empty stage. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 148 (c), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 148 (d), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other is displayed. Indicates the started state. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen.

FIG. 148 (e) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 148 (f) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. The animation of the scene where the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is a failure production of the super reach production display of this example.

FIG. 148 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c is started, the background image is empty according to the empty stage when wiping out the wipe effect display. By switching to the background image, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 148 (h) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. In this embodiment, the pattern (picture) wipe display w7a and w7b including the image of the palace are wipe displays corresponding to the empty stage. In this example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is started during the empty stage. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148 (h), a mini decorative symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the mini-decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7" is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways from side to side. The mini decorative symbol is displayed at the same time as the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started. The mini decorative symbol may be started to be displayed before the start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7b, or may be started to be displayed after the start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7b. Further, in this example, the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is the mini decorative symbol when the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed during the super reach effect display are reduced (in this example, "decoration 2". -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ") is included in a different design mode (in this example," Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7 "), but the mini-decorative design for the wipe effect display is Super Reach. The design of the mini decorative design (“decoration 2” and “decoration 3” in this example) displayed during the effect display may not be included.

FIG. 148 (i) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative symbols, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c become invisible. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol of the symbol mode of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7" is swayed and variablely displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b.

FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is completed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol of the symbol mode of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7" is swayed and variablely displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the variable display by the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is started from the start or before the start of the wipe-in, and is displayed until the end or the end of the wipe-out, but is limited to this. Instead, the display of the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display may be started after the start of the wipe-in, may be ended before the end of the wipe-out, or may be displayed only in the maximum wipe state. You may do so. In this example, the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is shown as an example in which the mini decorative symbol is swayed and fluctuated in the off-design mode, but the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is one or more mini decorative symbols. May be displayed as if it is variably displayed, or may be configured to be stopped and displayed in an out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 148 (k) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The wipe display w7a shrinks toward the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w7b shrinks toward the lower right corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the end of the wipe effect display. An empty background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. In this example, at the end of the wipeout, the mini decorative symbol being displayed as a wipe effect is erased.

FIG. 148 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

(Example 72)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 72nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (L). FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (L) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 148 (A) to 148 (L), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 148 (A) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed, and the result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 1 variable game is correct may be incorrect. It has been notified. In the state shown in FIG. 148 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is, for example, 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. In each figure of FIG. 148, the display of the hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 is omitted. Further, since the current production stage is a mountain stage, the decorative pattern display device 208 displays a background image of the mountain corresponding to the mountain stage.

FIG. 148 (B) shows a state in which the holding of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started in the state where the effect stage is the mountain stage. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed.

FIG. 148 (C) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 148 (C), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

FIG. 148 (D) shows a state in which the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, and the effect of displaying the animation of the scene in which the palace chases the merchant is started. Is shown. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the merchant is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The super reach production display in this example is a chasing reach production in which the lord chases the merchant.

FIG. 148 (E) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution. In FIG. 148 (E), an animation of a scene in which the lord hunted down a merchant is displayed.

FIG. 148 (F) shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which a merchant escapes from the palace is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier. The animation of the scene where the merchant escaped from the palace is a failure production of the super reach production display of this example.

FIG. 148 (G) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c is started, the background image of the mountain corresponding to the mountain stage when wiping out the wipe effect display By switching to the background image, the super reach effect display ends.

FIG. 148 (H) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w27a is started from the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display (wipe-in) of the wipe display w27b is started from the lower left corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w27a and w27b is the start of the wipe effect display. The patterns of the wipe displays w27a and w27b are vertical stripe patterns, which are different from the patterns of the wipe displays w7a and w7b. In this embodiment, the vertical striped pattern (pattern) wipe display w27a and w27b are wipe displays corresponding to the mountain stage. In this example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is started during the mountain stage. The wipe displays w27a and w27b are displayed so as to wipe out the decorative symbols, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

Further, the wipe displays w27a and w27b of the present embodiment appear from the upper right corner and the lower left corner of the display screens of the decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c, and are expanded toward the lower left corner and the upper right corner. On the other hand, the wipe displays w7a and w7b of the 71st embodiment appear from the upper left corner and the lower right corner of the display screens of the decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c, and are expanded toward the lower right and upper left corners. As described above, a plurality of types of wipe displays are provided, and the pattern, appearance position, expansion direction, and withdrawal direction may be different for each of the plurality of types of wipe displays.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148 (H), a mini decorative symbol is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to overlap the wipe displays w27a and w27b. In this example, the mini-decorative pattern of "Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7" is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways from side to side. The mini decorative symbol is displayed at the same time as the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is started. The mini decorative symbol may be started to be displayed before the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b, or may be started to be displayed after the start of the appearance display of the wipe displays w27 and w27b. Further, in this example, the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is the mini decorative symbol when the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c displayed during the super reach effect display are reduced (in this example, "decoration 2". -Decoration 3-Decoration 2 ") is included in a different design mode (in this example," Decoration 7-Decoration 3-Decoration 7 "), but the mini-decorative design for the wipe effect display is Super Reach. The design of the mini decorative design (“decoration 2” and “decoration 3” in this example) displayed during the effect display may not be included.

FIG. 148 (I) shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed. The lower left end of the wipe display w27a and the upper right end of the wipe display w27b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w27a and w27b. When the appearance display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative symbols, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c become invisible. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol of the symbol mode of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7" is swayed and variablely displayed so as to overlap the wipe displays w27a and w27b.

FIG. 148 (j) shows a state in which the withdrawal display (wipeout) of the wipe displays w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. With the start of the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is completed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is started. In the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini decorative symbol of the symbol mode of "decoration 7-decoration 3-decoration 7" is swayed and variablely displayed so as to overlap the wipe display w7b. In this example, the variable display by the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is started from the start or before the start of the wipe-in, and is displayed until the end or the end of the wipe-out, but is limited to this. Instead, the display of the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display may be started after the start of the wipe-in, may be ended before the end of the wipe-out, or may be displayed only in the maximum wipe state. You may do so. In this example, the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is shown as an example in which the mini decorative symbol is swayed and fluctuated in the off-design mode, but the mini decorative symbol for the wipe effect display is one or more mini decorative symbols. May be displayed as if it is variably displayed, or may be configured to be stopped and displayed in an out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 148 (K) shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe displays w27a and w27b is completed. The wipe display w27a shrinks toward the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is erased from the display screen, and the wipe display w27b shrinks toward the lower left corner of the display screen and is erased from the display screen. Completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display w27a and w27b is the end of the wipe effect display. A mountain background image is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a design mode that is out of alignment, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Shaking fluctuation is displayed in the mode. In this example, at the end of the wipeout, the mini decorative symbol being displayed as a wipe effect is erased.

FIG. 148 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 148 (F') to 148 (I') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 148 (F') to 148 (I'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 148 (F') is a state continuing from FIG. 148 (E), and shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of the scene where the lord caught the merchant is displayed as a display suggesting a big hit. The animation of the scene where the lord caught the merchant is a successful production of the super reach production display of this example.

FIG. 148 (G') shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a jackpot symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The shaking fluctuation display of the jackpot symbol mode is a display suggesting a jackpot. The super reach effect display ends after the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is started.

FIG. 148 (H') shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. A background image of a mountain is displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 with the end of the super reach effect display, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the center of the display screen are "decorations" which are jackpot symbols. 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2 ”is displayed in a manner that sways from side to side.

FIG. 148 (I') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a big hit symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In the above-described 71 and the present embodiment, different wipe effect displays are performed for each effect stage. It should be noted that the wipe effect display may be different depending on the type of failure effect (super reach effect) instead of performing a different wipe effect display for each effect stage. For example, if the lord defeats the enemy (swordsman) of the lord, it will be a victory, and if the lord loses to the swordsman, it will be a failure effect. If the confrontation effect fails, the wipe display of the pattern of the lord's face w7a, w7b If the lord is caught by the fleeing merchant, it will be a victory, and if the escaping merchant is not caught, it will be a failure effect. May be done.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the fifth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 99 to 148.

(K1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the fluctuation, and a look-ahead notice effect display).
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first reach effect display (for example, the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p) and the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 100 (k) to (p)). The super reach effect display shown in (1) and the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to (G).
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", a character string image of "sorry", or an animation of a scene where the palace loses the confrontation). Is displayed, the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display by the wipe displays w3a, w3b, w4a, w4b shown in FIGS. 99 (q) to (z)) is displayed in the first image display means. May be displayed,
After the display suggesting the deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or the character string image of "sorry") is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first The third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display by the wipe displays w5a, w5b, w6a shown in FIGS. 100 (q) to (a)) may be displayed in the image display means of the above.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, it may be possible to renew the mood of the player who sees the display suggesting the deviation by the wipe display, and to improve the interest of the effect display after the wipe display.

(K2)
The game console described in (K1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
The image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means is wiped out by the third wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(K3)
The game console according to (K1) or (K2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(K4)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(K5)
The game console described in (K4) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(K6)
The game console described in (K5) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(K7)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K6) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(K8)
The game console described in (K7) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(K9)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K8) above.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display and the third wipe effect display in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that the player can select whether to display the wipe effect display of.
A game table characterized by that.

(K10)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K9) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(K11)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the fluctuation, and a look-ahead notice effect display).
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first reach effect display (for example, the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. 99 (k) to (p) and the super reach effect display shown in FIGS. The super reach effect display shown in p) and the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 101 (C) to 101 (G).
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(K12)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K11) above.
A ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls is provided.
The first image display means displays a display urging the game ball to be discharged from the ball storage means (hereinafter, referred to as a "ball discharge display" (for example, a lower plate full tank error notification image, a ball removal display)). It ’s a possible means,
The first wipe effect display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display.
A game table characterized by that.

(K13)
The game console described in (K12) above.
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the ball discharge display are displayed, the ball discharge display is visible to the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(K14)
The game console according to any one of (K1) to (K13) above.
A game area in which the game ball can roll (for example, a game area 124),
A game board provided with the game area (for example, game boards 1000, 1500, 1600) and
A main body (for example, main body 104) to which the game board can be attached
A door body (for example, a front frame door 106) attached to the main body is provided.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a display indicating that the door body is open (hereinafter, referred to as "door open display").
The first wipe effect display displayed in the state where the door opening display is displayed is configured to overlap with the ball door opening display.
A game table characterized by that.

(K15)
The game console described in (K14) above.
The third wipe effect display displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed is configured to overlap the ball discharge display.
In a state where both the third wipe effect display and the door open display are displayed, the door open display is visible to the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(K16)
The game console according to (K14) or (K15) above.
In a state where both the first wipe effect display and the door open display are displayed, the door open display is visible to the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(M1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the fluctuation, and a look-ahead notice effect display).
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display (for example, super reach effect display).
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first look-ahead notice effect display (for example, logo image j3).
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting deviation (for example, an out-of-order symbol mode) is displayed, the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display w7a, w7b) in the first image display means. Wipe effect display) may be displayed,
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first look-ahead notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(M2)
The game console described in (M1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(M3)
The game console according to (M1) or (M2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(M4)
The game console according to any one of (M1) to (M3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(M5)
When the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe display w11a) is displayed in the first image display means after the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display. There is
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first look-ahead notice effect display may be started.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(M6)
The game console described in (M5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(M7)
The game console according to (M5) or (M6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(M8)
The game console described in (M7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(M9)
The game console according to any one of (M1) to (M8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(M10)
The game console described in (M9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(M11)
The game console according to any one of (M1) to (M10) above.
The first look-ahead notice effect display is a character display (for example, a character image of a palace, a princess, or an old man) that appears in the first animation display (for example, an animation of a pending change display).
The first animation display is an animation display that changes the mode of the hold icon to the look-ahead notice mode (for example, the face hold icon or the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104).
A game table characterized by that.

(M12)
The game console according to any one of (M1) to (M11) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second look-ahead notice effect display (for example).
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the second look-ahead notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

The game console described in (M12) above.
The second look-ahead notice effect display is a character display (for example, a character display of a palace, a princess, or an old man) that appears in the second animation display.
The second animation display is an animation display (for example) that changes the mode of the hold icon to a look-ahead notice mode (for example, the face hold icon or the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104).
A game table characterized by that.

(N1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays (for example, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, a notice effect display of the fluctuation, and a look-ahead notice effect display).
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first reach effect display (for example, the super reach effect shown in FIGS. 103 (c) to (g) and the effect display shown in FIGS. 103 (C) to 103 (G). Super reach production)
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first jackpot advance notice effect display (for example, the advance notice effect display of the change by the advance notice images j1 shown in FIGS. 103 (j) to 103 (l), and the advance notice effect display of the change in FIG. 103. (J) to (l), the notice effect display of the change by the notice image j2).
After the display suggesting a deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2" or the animation of the scene where the palace loses the confrontation) is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first In one image display means, the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display w7a and w7b shown in FIGS. 103 (h) to 103 (j)) may be displayed.
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(N2)
The game console described in (N1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(N3)
The game console according to (N1) or (N2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(N4)
The game console according to any one of (M1) to (M3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(N5)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display (for example, the notice image j2) may be started.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(N6)
The game console described in (N5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(N7)
The game console according to (N5) or (N6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(N8)
The game console described in (N7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(N9)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(N10)
The game console described in (N9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(N11)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N10) above.
When the first jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" or "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration" is finally displayed in the running symbol variation display. 3 ") may be confirmed,
A game table characterized by that.

(N12)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N11) above.
When the first jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the final design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration") is displayed in the running symbol variation display. 3 ") may be confirmed,
A game table characterized by that.

(N13)
The game console according to any one of (N1) to (N12) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second jackpot notice effect display (for example, a notice effect display for confirming the jackpot of a golden family crest image).
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the second jackpot notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(N14)
The game console described in (N13) above.
When the second jackpot notice effect display is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the running symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(O1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens (for example, volume adjustment display j6 and BGM setting display j7).
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of the out-of-order symbol mode) is displayed, the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display) in the first image display means Wipe effect display of w7a and w7b) may be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen may be started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(O2)
The game console described in (O1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(O3)
The game console according to (O1) or (O2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(O4)
The game console according to any one of (O1) to (O3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(O5)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(O6)
The game console described in (O5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(O7)
The game console according to (O5) or (O6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(O8)
The game console described in (O7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(O9)
The game console according to any one of (O1) to (O8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(O10)
The game console described in (O9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(P1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens (for example, volume adjustment display j6 and BGM setting display j7).
The display of one of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is the first effect adjustment screen (for example, volume adjustment display j6).
The display of one of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is the second effect adjustment screen (for example, BGM setting display j7).
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of the out-of-order symbol mode) is displayed, the first wipe effect display (for example, wipe display) in the first image display means Wipe effect display of w7a and w7b) may be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the first effect adjustment screen may be started to be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the second effect adjustment screen is not started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(P2)
The game console described in (P1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(P3)
The game console according to (P1) or (P2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(P4)
The game console according to any one of (P1) to (P3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(P5)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(P6)
The game console described in (P5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(P7)
The game console according to (P5) or (P6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(P8)
The game console described in (P7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(P9)
The game console according to any one of (P1) to (P8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(P10)
The game console described in (P9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q1)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136, setting operation unit 137) and
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and
It is a game table equipped with
When the operation means is operated while the screen requesting the operation of the operation means is displayed, the response display (for example, the button hold icon shown in FIG. 117 (k) changes in the first image display means. Hold change display) can be displayed,
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of an out-of-order symbol mode) is displayed, the first wipe effect display (for example, a wipe display) is displayed in the first image display means. Wipe effect display by w7a, w7b) may be displayed,
The response display may be performed during the execution of the first wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q2)
The game console described in (Q1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q3)
The game console according to (Q1) or (Q2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(Q4)
The game console according to any one of (Q1) to (Q3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q5)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q6)
The game console described in (Q5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(Q7)
The game console according to (Q5) or (Q6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Q8)
The game console described in (Q7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Q9)
The game console according to any one of (Q1) to (Q8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Q10)
The game console described in (Q9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(R1)
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and
Movable body for production (for example, movable body 1010) and
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display by the wipe displays w7a and w7b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
At least a part of the wipe effect display may overlap with the effect movable body (see, for example, FIG. 137 (i)).
A game table characterized by that.

(R2)
The game console described in (R1) above.
In the first reach effect display, the effect movable body is configured to operate (see, for example, FIGS. 137 (e) to (k)).
A game table characterized by that.

(R3)
The game console according to (R1) or (R2) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(R4)
The game console according to any one of (R1) to (R3) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(R5)
The game console according to any one of (R1) to (R4) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(R6)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(R7)
The game console described in (R6) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(R8)
The game console according to (R6) or (R7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(R9)
The game console described in (R8) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(R10)
The game console according to any one of (R1) to (R9) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(S1)
A game table provided with a first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
At the first timing, the display of the first wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b) may be started in the first image display means.
The first timing is the timing after the big hit (for example, the big hit game) is started (see, for example, FIG. 142 (g)).
The first timing is a timing before the start of the variable display of the symbol (see, for example, FIG. 143 (c)).
A game table characterized by that.

(S2)
The game console described in (S1) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display (for example, super reach effect display).
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(S3)
The game console described in (S2) above.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.

(S4)
The game console according to any one of (S1) to (S3) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(S5)
The game console according to any one of (S1) to (S4) above.
At the first timing, the display of the third wipe effect display (for example, wipe display 15) may be started in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(S6)
The game console described in (S5) above.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(S7)
The game console according to any one of (S1) to (S6) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(S8)
The game console according to any one of (S1) to (S7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(T1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the held display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
A game table characterized by that.

(T2)
The game console described in (T1) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(T3)
The game console according to (T1) or (T2) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(T4)
The game console according to any one of (T1) to (T3) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(T5)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(T6)
The game console described in (T5) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,

(T7)
The game console according to (T5) or (T6) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(T8)
The game console described in (T7) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(T9)
The game console according to any one of (T1) to (T8) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(T10)
The game console described in (T9) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(T11)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the hold display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means (see, for example, FIGS. 132 (F) to (I)). ,
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means (see, for example, FIGS. 132 (F) to (I)). ,
In the first wipe effect display, the volume adjustment screen may be started by the first image display means (see, for example, FIG. 123 (l)).
A game table characterized by that.
(T12)
The game console described in (T11) above.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image (for example, a decorative pattern, a character string image of "sorry", or a background image) in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(T13)
The game console according to (T11) or (T12) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a discontinuity) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the first wipe effect display may be displayed by the first image display means. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(T14)
The game console according to any one of (T11) to (T13) above.
It is provided with a symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, special figure 1 display device 212, and special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(T15)
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display (for example, the wipe effect display of the wipe displays w9a and w9b) is displayed in the first image display means. May be
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(T16)
The game console described in (T15) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or a character string image of "sorry") is displayed, and then a design mode (for example, a misalignment) is displayed. , "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") is configured so that the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means before the final display. ,
A game table characterized by that.
(T17)
The game console according to (T15) or (T16) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a third reach effect display (for example, a normal reach effect display).
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The first wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
After the display suggesting deviation (for example, the shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is displayed in the third reach effect display, the design display means is displaced from the design mode (for example, "decoration 2"). -Decoration 3-The third wipe effect display is not displayed in the first image display means until the confirmation display is performed.
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(T18)
The game console described in (T17) above.
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a second reach effect display (for example, a super reach effect display for comparing drinking alcohol shown in FIGS. 101 (d) to (g)).
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
In the second reach effect display, a display suggesting a deviation (for example, a shaking fluctuation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" or an animation of a scene in which the old man wins and the palace gets drunk by drinking comparison) is displayed. The third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means until the out-of-order design mode (for example, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2") is confirmed and displayed. It is configured not to
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(T19)
The game console according to any one of (T11) to (T18) above.
A second image display means (for example, a sub display device 1030) capable of displaying an image display is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
A game table characterized in that the second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
(T20)
The game console described in (T19) above.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting misalignment (for example, a part of a character image such as "sorry", a part of a display suggesting misalignment on the decorative symbol display device 208) is displayed, and then the misaligned symbol is displayed. The second wipe effect display is configured to be displayed in the second image display means until the mode is confirmed and displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(T21)
A first image display means capable of displaying an image display (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) and
A second image display means capable of displaying an image display (for example, a sub display device 1030) and
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the hold display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means (see, for example, FIGS. 132 (F) to (I)). ,
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means (see, for example, FIGS. 132 (F) to (I)). ,
In the first wipe effect display, the volume adjustment screen may be started by the first image display means (see, for example, FIG. 123 (l)).
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
In the first reach effect display, a display suggesting deviation (for example, a moving image of a scene in which the main character is defeated by an enemy shown in FIG. 90 (f), or “decoration 2- After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2" is displayed, the second wipe effect display (for example, the wipe display w2a shown in FIGS. 90 (h) to 90 (j)) is displayed in the second image display means. w2b) is displayed,
During at least a part of the period from the start of the display of the first wipe effect display to the end of the display, the first image display means displays a combination of decorative symbols indicating a deviation (for example, FIG. 90 (for example, FIG. 90). h), "Decoration 2-Decoration 3-Decoration 2") shown in (j) are displayed.
During the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display to the end of the display, the decorative symbol is not displayed on the second image display means (see, for example, FIGS. 90 (h) to (j)). ,
A game table characterized by that.

A part or all of the effect display shown in FIGS. 101 to 147 may be displayed on the sub display device 1030. The pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 99 to 147 may be a special figure 2 priority variable machine or a starting port winning order variable machine.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 175. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment. The same components as those of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the seven types of hold icons shown in FIG. 104 and the same seven types of changing icons as the holding icons, and the holding effect of changing the holding icon and the changing icon (the fifth above). In the embodiment of the above, the pending change effect display and the changing icon effect display) can be executed by the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold effect, a success effect in which the hold icon or change icon in one display mode shown in FIG. 104 is changed to a hold icon or change icon in another display form shown in FIG. 104, or a failure effect in which the hold icon or change icon does not change is performed. Will be executed. In addition, the jackpot reliability of the hold icon is set to increase in the order of the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, the triangle hold icon, the face hold icon, and the haniwa hold icon.

FIG. 149 is a table showing a list of pending effects. The table shown in FIG. 149 is composed of each item of "name", "object", "aspect α", "appearance rate", "aspect β", "progress rate", and "success rate". As shown in the "Name" column in the figure, the pending effects are "white bird effect (W bird effect)", "black bird effect (B bird effect)", and "black bird effect with button (B bird effect with button)". ) ”,“ White bomber production (W bomber production) ”,“ Black bomber production (B bomber production) ”,“ White UFO production (WUFO production) ”,“ Black UFO production (BUFO production) ”7 It is possible to execute various types of hold effects. In the following, "white bird production" will be referred to as "W bird production", "black bird production" will be referred to as "B bird production", and "black bird production with buttons" will be referred to as "B bird production with buttons". "White bomber production" is called "W bomber production", "Black bomber production" is called "B bomber production", "White UFO production" is called "WUFO production", and "Black UFO production" is called. It is called "BUFO".

In the figure, the "target" column indicates the hold icon targeted by each hold effect. For example, "hold 0" indicates a changing icon, and "hold 4" indicates a hold icon corresponding to a hold having a fourth hold order. In the present embodiment, since the hold icon and the changing icon of the special figure 1 are the targets of the hold effect, the “hold 4” is the hold icon corresponding to the fourth hold having the lowest hold order. Further, since the changing icon may be referred to as the hold icon, it may be simply referred to as a hold icon, and the changing icon display area may be referred to as a hold 0 display area. , In FIG. 149, the changing icon is described as "maintenance 0". As shown in FIG. 149, the “target” of the W bird effect is “hold 0 to hold 4,” that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold with the fourth hold order. The hold icon corresponding to. The "target" of the B bird effect is "hold 0 to hold 4", that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. .. The "target" of the B bird effect with a button is "hold 0 to hold 4", that is, the changing icon and the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. Is. The "target" of the W bomber effect is "hold 1 to hold 4", that is, the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. The "target" of the B bomber effect is "hold 1 to hold 4", that is, the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the first hold order to the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the fourth hold order. The "target" of the WUFO effect is only "maintenance 0", that is, the changing icon 0. The "target" of the BUFO effect is only "maintenance 0", that is, the changing icon 0.

In each hold effect, an image corresponding to each hold effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the W bird production, a white bird image (hereinafter, referred to as "W bird"), which is a white bird, is displayed. In the B bird effect, a black bird image (hereinafter referred to as "B bird"), which is a black bird (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure), is displayed. In the B bird effect with a button, a B bird (hereinafter, referred to as "B bird with a button") on which a button image imitating a chance button 136 is displayed. In the W bomber production, a white bomber image (hereinafter referred to as "W bomber"), which is a white bomber, is displayed. In the B bomber production, a black bomber image (hereinafter referred to as "B bomber"), which is a black bomber (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure), is displayed. In the WUFO effect, a white UFO image (hereinafter referred to as "WUFO") is displayed. In the BUFO effect, a black (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure) UFO image (hereinafter referred to as "BUFO") is displayed.

In the figure, the column “Aspect α” indicates the display mode of the first stage of each hold effect. “Aspect α” of the W bird effect is a mode in which the W bird moves to the left. "Aspect α" of the B bird effect is a mode in which the B bird moves to the left. “Aspect α” of the buttoned B bird effect is a mode in which the buttoned B bird moves to the left. "Aspect α" of the W bomber production is a mode in which the W bomber moves to the left. The "mode α" of the B bomber effect is a mode in which the B bomber moves to the left. “Aspect α” of the WUFO effect is a mode in which the WUFO moves to the left. The "mode α" of the BUFO effect is a mode in which the BUFO moves to the left.

In the figure, the "appearance rate" column shows the appearance rate of each reserved effect. The appearance rates are written as A, B, C, D, E, and F in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the "appearance rate" of the W bird effect is "A", the "appearance rate" of the B bird effect is "C", and the "appearance rate" of the buttoned B bird effect is "C". The "appearance rate" of the W bomber production is "B", the "appearance rate" of the B bomber production is "D", and the "appearance rate" of the WUFO production is "E". The "appearance rate" of the BUFO production is "F". That is, the appearance rates of the pending effects are, in descending order, W bird effect, W bomber effect, B bird effect, B bird effect with buttons, B bomber effect, WUFO effect, and BUFO effect.

In the figure, the column of "aspect β" indicates a second stage display mode that can be displayed next to "aspect α" in each holding effect. Each holding effect progresses from "aspect α" to "aspect β" with a predetermined probability, and may not progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". “Aspect β” of the W bird effect is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird. "Aspect β" of the B bird effect is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird. “Aspect β” of the buttoned B bird effect is a mode in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird. The "mode β" of the B bird effect with a button and the "mode β" of the B bird effect are the same. The "mode β" of the bomber production is a mode in which a missile is launched from the W bomber. The "mode β" of the B bomber production is a mode in which a missile is launched from the B bomber. "Aspect β" of the WUFO effect is a mode in which a mysterious light beam is emitted from the WUFO. The "mode β" of the BUFO effect is a mode in which a mysterious light beam is emitted from the BUFO.

The column of "progress rate" in the figure shows the progress rate from "aspect α" to "aspect β" of each hold effect. The appearance rates are described as premium, A, B, C, D, and E in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the "progress rate" of the W bird effect is "D", the "progress rate" of the B bird effect is "B", and the "progress rate" of the buttoned B bird effect is "B". The "progress rate" of the W bomber production is "E", the "progress rate" of the B bomber production is "C", and the "progress rate" of the WUFO production is "A". The "progress rate" of the BUFO production is "premium". That is, the appearance rates of the pending effects are, in descending order, BUFO effect, WUHO effect, B bird effect, B bird effect with button, B bomber effect, W bomber effect, and W bird effect. "Premium" indicates that the progress rate is 100%, and the BUFO effect targeting the changing icon is set so as to always progress from "mode α" to "mode β".

The column of "success rate" in the figure indicates the probability that the success effect in which the hold icon or the changing icon is changed by each hold effect is executed. The success rate is described as premium, A, B, C, D in descending order. As shown in FIG. 149, the "success rate" of the W bird production is "D", the "success rate" of the B bird production is "B", and the "success rate" of the buttoned B bird production is "B". The "success rate" of the W bomber production is "C", the "success rate" of the B bomber production is "A", and the "success rate" of the WUFO production is "A". The "success rate" of the BUFO production is "premium". That is, the success rate of each hold effect is, in descending order, BUFO effect, WUHO effect and B bomber effect, B bird effect and B bird effect with a button, B bomber effect, W bomber effect, and W bird effect. "Premium" indicates that the success rate is 100%, and the BUFO effect targeting the changing icon is set so that the success effect is always performed.

(Example 1)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (p). FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 150 (a) to 150 (p), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed, and the shaking variable display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2" is swayed and fluctuated (temporarily stopped display) in a display mode swaying left and right. .. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area corresponding to the hold having the first hold order. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The white circle hold icon is the default hold icon. A changing icon display area (hold 0 display area) for displaying the changing icon is provided above the special drawing 1 hold icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 150 (a), the changing icon a1 in the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is the default changing icon. The changing icon a1 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In addition, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

FIG. 150B shows a state in which the changing icon a1 is erased. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208 to 208c, the shaking variation display of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed. In this example, the changing icon is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the outlier symbol mode.

FIG. 150 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 150 (d) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The changing icon may be enlarged while moving to the changing icon display area, or may be enlarged after the movement to the changing icon display area is completed.

FIG. 150 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (e), one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, and the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the hold icon is displayed. b2 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104.

FIG. 150 (f) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (f), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of holds is 2. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold 2 display area is an area in which the hold icon corresponding to the hold having the second hold order is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is the white circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104.

In FIG. 150 (g), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 150 (h) shows a state in which "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a swaying manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

FIG. 150 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 150 (j) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 150 (k) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 150 (l) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 150 (m), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is a misaligned design mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 150 (n) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of “Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 2”. The changing icon is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol in the out-of-order symbol mode.

FIG. 150 (o) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 2", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 150 (p) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In this embodiment, a black circle hold icon is displayed when one game ball wins a prize at the special figure 1 start port 230 and the hold increases during a certain symbol variation display (see FIG. 150 (e)), and the black circle hold icon is displayed. In the symbol variation display, which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. In this way, the hold effect for one certain hold icon (hold icon b2 in this example) may not be performed.

(Example 2)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 150A to 150M. FIGS. 150A to 150M show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 150 (A) to 150 (M), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 150 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 150 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 150 (B) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 150C shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to overlap the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the hold effect is displayed with priority over the variable display of the decorative pattern. The W bird k1, the B bird k3 with a button, the W bomber k4, the B bomber k5, the WUFok6, and the BUFOk7, which will be described later, are also displayed overlapping with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 150 (D) shows a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect without the B bird effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 150 (E), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 150 (F), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 150 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 150 (H) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 150 (I) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 150 (J), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 150 (K) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display (in the temporary stop table) of “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3”. The changing icon is erased during the shaking fluctuation display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol in the out-of-shape symbol mode.

FIG. 150 (L) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 150 (M) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon.

In this embodiment, the B bird effect mode α was performed, but the process did not progress (develop) to the mode β, and the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon displayed when the B bird effect was performed was digested. The symbol variation display that was started is off and the symbol mode is confirmed. The B bird effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without progressing to the aspect β.

(Example 3)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (1a) to 151 (1 g). FIGS. 151 (1a) to 151 (1 g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 151 (1a) to 151 (1 g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 151 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (1a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 151 (1b) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the W bird k1 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the W bird k1 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 151 (1c) shows a state in which the W bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the W bird k1 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 151 (1d) shows a state immediately before the W bird effect is completed without the W bird effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The W bird k1 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 151 (1e), after the W bird k1 is erased in the mode α and the W bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then in the right symbol display area 208c. “Decoration 2” indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 151 (1f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 151 (1 g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

After that, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, and when the special figure 1 variable game is completed, the decorative symbol which is the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, the mode α of the W bird effect is performed, but it does not progress (develop) to the mode β, and is displayed when the W bird effect is completed and the W bird effect is performed as the mode α. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon is exhausted, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The W bird effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the W bird effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without progressing to the aspect β.

(Example 4)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (2a) to (2g). FIGS. 151 (2a) to 151 (2g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 151 (2a) to 151 (2g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 151 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (2a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 151 (2b) shows a state in which the W bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the W bomber k4 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which the W bomber k4 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the W bomber k4 is the start of the W bomber production. The W bomber effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 151 (2c) shows a state in which the W bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the W bomber k4 moving to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 151 (2d) shows a state immediately before the W bomber effect is completed without the W bomber effect progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The W bomber k4 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left edge of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 151 (2e), after the W bomber k4 is erased and the W bomber effect is completed in the mode α, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area. In 208c, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 151 (2f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 151 (2 g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

After that, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, and when the special figure 1 variable game is completed, the decorative symbol which is the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, the mode α of the W bomber production was performed, but it did not progress (develop) to the mode β, and when the W bomber production was completed with the mode α and the W bomber production was performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the displayed black circle hold icon is exhausted, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed. The W bomber effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the W bomber effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without proceeding to the aspect β.

(Example 5)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (3a) to (3g). FIGS. 151 (3a) to 151 (3g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 151 (3a) to 151 (3g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 151 (3a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (3a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 151 (3b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect in this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 151 (3c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 151 (3d) shows a state immediately before the B bomber effect is completed without the B bomber effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bomber k5 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 151 (3e), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed in the mode α, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then the right symbol display area. In 208c, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 151 (3f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 151 (3 g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

After that, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, and when the special figure 1 variable game is completed, the decorative symbol which is the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, the B bomber production mode α is performed, but the B bomber production is completed without proceeding (developing) to the B bomber production mode α, and the B bomber production is performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the displayed black circle hold icon is exhausted, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed. The B bomber effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the B bomber effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without proceeding to the aspect β.

(Example 6)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (4a) to (4g). FIGS. 151 (4a) to 151 (4g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 151 (4a) to 151 (4g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 151 (4a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (4a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 151 (4b) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which WUFOK6 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which WUFOK6 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 151 (4c) shows a state in which the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which WUFOK6 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 151 (4d) shows a state immediately before the WUFO effect is completed without the WUFO effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. WUFOK6 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208.

In FIG. 151 (4e), after WUFok6 is erased in the mode α and the WUFO effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 151 (4f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 151 (4 g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

After that, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, and when the special figure 1 variable game is completed, the decorative symbol which is the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, the mode α of the WUFO effect was performed, but it did not progress (develop) to the aspect β, the WUFO effect was completed with the aspect α, and the black circle was held when the WUFO effect was performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the icon is digested, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The WUFO effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the WUFO effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without proceeding to the aspect β.

(Example 7)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 (5a) to (5g). FIGS. 151 (5a) to 151 (5g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 151 (5a) to 151 (5g), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 151 (5a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 151 (5a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 151 (5b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 151 (5c) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation in which BUFOk7 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 151 (5d) shows a state immediately before the BUFO effect is completed without the BUFO effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. BUFOk7 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The BUFO effect, which does not target any of the pending icons or the changing icon, ends without proceeding to "aspect β".

In FIG. 151 (5e), after BUFOk7 is erased in the mode α and the BUFO effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 151 (5f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 151 (5 g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

After that, the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 which is the black circle hold icon is digested, and the special figure 1 variable game is started. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order, and when the special figure 1 variable game is completed, the decorative symbol which is the out-of-order symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

In this embodiment, the mode α of the BUFO effect was performed, but it did not progress (develop) to the aspect β, the BUFO effect was completed with the aspect α, and the black circle displayed when the BUFO effect was performed. In the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is exhausted, the misaligned symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. The BUFO effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the BUFO effect is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without proceeding to the aspect β.

(Example 8)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (k). FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (k) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 152 (a) to 152 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 152 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 152 (b) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which the W bird k1 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the W bird k1 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

FIG. 152 (c) shows a state in which the W bird effect is being performed. An animation of the W bird k1 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

FIG. 152 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The W bird k1 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 152 (e) shows a state in which the W bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The W bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b1, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the hold icon b1 which is the target.

FIG. 152 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 152 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The W bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 152 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 152 (h), the W bird k1 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

In FIG. 152 (i), after the W bird k1 is erased and the W bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (j), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 152 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this modification, the mode α to the mode β of the W bird effect progressed (developed), but the hold icon b1 which is the target of the W bird effect did not change from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icon shown in FIG. 104. .. As described above, the W bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 152 (g') to 152 (k') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 152 (g') to 152 (k'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 152 (g') shows a state continuing from FIG. 152 (f). In FIG. 152 (g'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, it changes from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the triangle hold icon. The W bird effect of this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 152 (h') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 152 (h'), the W bird k1 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect. ..

In FIG. 152 (i'), after the W bird k1 is erased and the W bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (j'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner of shaking from side to side.

FIG. 152 (k') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the mode α to the mode β of the W bird effect progresses (develops), and the hold icon b1 that is the target of the W bird effect changes from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon. In this way, the W bird effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes.

(Example 9)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 (A) to 152 (K). FIGS. 152 (A) to 152 (K) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 152 (A) to 152 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 152 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 152 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 152 (B) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

FIG. 152 (C) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 152 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 152 (E) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b1, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b1 which is the target.

FIG. 152 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 152 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 152 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 152 (H), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 152 (I), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (J), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned design mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 152 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct is It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the B bird effect has progressed (developed) from the mode α to the mode β, but the hold icon b1 which is the target of the B bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icon shown in FIG. 104. .. As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 152 (G') to 152 (K') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 152 (G') to 152 (K'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 152 (G') shows a state continuing from FIG. 152 (F). In FIG. 152 (G'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, it changes from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the face hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 152 (H') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 152 (H'), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. ..

In FIG. 152 (I'), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 152 (J'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner of swinging from side to side.

FIG. 152 (K') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this modification, the mode α of the B bird effect is advanced (developed), and the hold icon b1 which is the target of the B bird effect is changed from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. In this way, the B bird effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. The B bird effect may be set so that the probability that the hold icon or the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect changes to the hold icon with high jackpot reliability is higher than that of the W bird effect.

(Example 10)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (k). FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (k) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 153 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 153 (b) shows a state in which the W bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the W bomber k4 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which the W bomber k4 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the W bomber k4 is the start of the W bomber production. The W bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 153 (c) shows a state in which the W bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the W bomber k4 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire bomber k4 is displayed.

FIG. 153 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bomber effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The W bomber k4 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 153 (e) shows a state in which the W bomber effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The W bomber effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is launched from the W bomber k4.

FIG. 153 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the W bomber k4 hits the hold icon b2 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the W bomber k4 hits the hold icon b2, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b2. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b1 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 153 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The W bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 153 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 153 (h), the W bomber k4 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bomber effect. is there.

In FIG. 153 (i), after the W bomber k4 is erased and the W bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (j), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 153 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the mode α to the mode β of the W bomber effect progressed (developed), but the hold icon b2, which is the target of the W bomber effect, changed from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Not. As described above, the W bomber effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 153 (g') to 153 (k') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 153 (g') to 153 (k'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 153 (g') shows a state continuing from FIG. 153 (f). In FIG. 153 (g'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. When the hold icon b2 is redisplayed, it changes from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the triangle hold icon. The W bomber production in this example is a successful production in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 153 (h') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 153 (h'), the W bomber k4 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bomber effect. Is.

In FIG. 153 (i'), after the W bomber k4 is erased and the W bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which a temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (j'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner of shaking from side to side.

FIG. 153 (k') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this modification, the mode α to the mode β of the W bomber effect progresses (develops), and the hold icon b2, which is the target of the W bomber effect, changes from the black circle hold icon to the triangle hold icon. In this way, the W bomber effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes.

(Example 11)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (K). FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (K) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 153 (A) to 153 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 153 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 153 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 153 (B) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 153 (C) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire bomber k5 is displayed.

FIG. 153 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 153 (E) shows a state in which the B bomber effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bomber effect in this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is being launched from the B bomber k5.

FIG. 153 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b2 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b2, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b2. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b1 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 153 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The W bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 153 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 153 (H), the B bomber k5 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the mode α and disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

In FIG. 153 (I), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (J), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 153 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the mode α to the mode β of the B bomber effect progressed (developed), but the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bomber effect, changed from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. 104. Not. As described above, the B bomber effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 153 (G') to 153 (K') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 153 (G') to 153 (K'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 153 (G') shows a state continuing from FIG. 153 (F). In FIG. 153 (G'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. When the hold icon b2 is redisplayed, it changes from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the face hold icon. The B bomber production in this example is a successful production in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 153 (H') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 153 (H'), the B bomber k5 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the W bomber effect is completed. Is.

In FIG. 153 (I'), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which a temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 153 (J'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner of swinging from side to side.

FIG. 153 (K') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this modification, the mode α to the mode β of the B bomber effect progresses (develops), and the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bomber effect, is changed from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. In this way, the B bomber effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. The B bird effect may be set so that the probability that the hold icon or the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect changes to the hold icon with high jackpot reliability is higher than that of the W bird effect.

(Example 12)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (k). FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (k) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 154 (a) to 154 (k), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 154 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 154 (b) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which WUFOK6 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which WUFOK6 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a1.

FIG. 154 (c) shows a state in which the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation of WUFOK6 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOK6 is displayed.

FIG. 154 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. WUFOK6 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 154 (e) shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The WUFO effect targets the changing icon a1, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the WUFOK6 is displayed on the changing icon a1 which is the target.

FIG. 154 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a1. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a1 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a1, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a1. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a1, the entire changing icon a1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b2 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 154 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a1 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a1 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

FIG. 154 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 154 (h), the WUFOk 6 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

In FIG. 154 (i), after WUFok6 is erased and the WUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state.

In FIG. 154 (j), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 154 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the mode α to the mode β of the WUFO effect has progressed (developed), but the changing icon a1 which is the target of the WUFO effect is the display mode of the other hold icon shown in FIG. 104 from the display mode of the black circle hold icon. Has not changed to. As described above, the WUFO effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 154 (g') to 154 (r') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 154 (g') to 154 (r'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 154 (g') shows a state continuing from FIG. 154 (f). In FIG. 154 (g'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the changing icon a1 is displayed again visibly. When the variable hold icon a1 is redisplayed, the display mode of the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 is changed to the display mode of the button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that urges the player to press the chance button 136 once, and the operation valid period in which the operation of the chance button 136 becomes effective starts at the same time as the display of the button hold icon starts. The WUFO effect of this example is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 154 (h') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 154 (h'), the WUFOk6 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

In FIG. 154 (i'), after WUFOk6 is erased and the WUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the stopped display state. In this example, in FIG. 154 (i'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 154 (j'), the changing icon a1 displays the face holding icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136 once while the changing icon a1 is displayed, which is the display mode of the button holding icon. It shows the changed state.

In FIG. 154 (k'), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace are removed. It shows the state in which the effect of displaying the animation of the confronting scene is started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 154 (l') shows a state in which a display suggesting deviation is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, an animation of a scene in which the lord loses to the enemy of the lord is displayed as a display suggesting an outlier.

FIG. 154 (m') shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b during the super reach effect display. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is swayed and displayed in a display mode in which it sways up and down. The swaying fluctuation display of the out-of-design aspect is an indication suggesting out-of-order. After the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 3" is started in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c, the background image is usually an empty background image when wiping out the wipe effect display. The super reach effect display ends by switching to the effect display of.

FIG. 154 (n') shows a state in which the wipe effect display is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. The appearance display of the wipe display w7a is started from the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the appearance display of the wipe display w7b is started from the lower right corner of the display screen. The start of the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is the start of the wipe effect display. The wipe displays w7a and w7b are displayed in the foreground of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and are displayed so as to wipe off the decorative symbol, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, the background image, and the like.

FIG. 154 (o') shows the maximum wipe state in which the appearance display of the wipe displays w7a and w7b is completed. The lower right end of the wipe display w7a and the upper left end of the wipe display w7b are in contact with each other, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is covered by the wipe displays w7a and w7b. When the appearance display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed and the maximum wipe state is reached, the decorative pattern, the image of the palace, the image of the enemy of the palace, and the background image become invisible.

FIG. 154 (p') shows a state in which the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the wipe display w7a is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the upper left corner of the display screen, and the wipe display w7b is withdrawn so as to shrink toward the lower right corner of the display screen. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is started, the display of the decorative design, the background image, and the like on the decorative design display device 208 becomes gradually visible. When the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b starts, the background image changes to an empty background image, the reduced display of the decorative symbol ends, the changing icon and the hold icon are redisplayed, and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the center left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the shaking variation display of the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" is started. As shown in FIG. 154 (p'), the changing icons a1 and the holding icons b1 and b2 are gradually displayed from between the wipe displays w7a and w7b.

In FIG. 154 (q'), after the withdrawal display of the wipe display w7a and w7b is completed, the “decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a misaligned pattern mode in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, is left and right. It shows a state in which the shaking is displayed in a shaking display mode.

FIG. 154 (r') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is out of order, "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display is displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 3".

In this modification, the process progresses (develops) from the mode α to the mode β of the WUFO effect, and the changing icon a1 which is the target of the WUFO effect changes from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the button hold icon, and then. The changing icon a1 in the display mode of the button hold icon changes to the display mode of the face hold icon as a response display of pressing the chance button 136, and the missing symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon a1. .. In this way, there is a case where the out-of-design symbol mode is definitively displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode has changed due to the pending effect. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode has not changed from the beginning of the display, which is not the target of the hold effect, corresponds to the changing icon which is the target of the hold effect and the display mode has changed. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

(Example 13)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (N). FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (N) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (N), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 154 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 154 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 2, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icons b1 and b2 are white circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the black circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 154 (B) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect is an effect that targets the changing icon a1.

FIG. 154 (C) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 154 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 154 (E) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a1, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOk7 is displayed on the changing icon a1 which is the target.

FIG. 154 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a1. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a1 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a1, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a1. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a1, the entire changing icon a1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b2 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 154 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a1 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a1 has changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon. The haniwa hold icon is displayed only when the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the corresponding symbol variation display. Further, in the BUFO effect targeting the variable icon, a successful effect in which the changing icon always changes is executed.

FIG. 154 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 154 (H), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 154 (I), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 154 (I), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 154 (J), the background image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes with the start of the super reach effect display, the changing icon and the hold icon are erased, and the palace and the enemy of the palace confront each other. Indicates that the effect of displaying the animation of the scene to be performed has been started. The image of the palace is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208, and the image of the enemy of the palace is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right of the display screen. Super reach effect display The variable display of the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed during a part of the period during execution.

FIG. 154 (K) shows a state in which an animation of a scene in which the palace and the enemy of the palace slash each other is displayed during the super reach effect display.

FIG. 154 (L) shows a state in which a display suggesting a big hit is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the super reach effect display. In this example, as a display suggesting a big hit, an animation of a scene in which the lord wins the enemy of the lord and a temporary stop display of "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" are displayed in the left middle right pattern display areas 208a to 208c. ..

FIG. 154 (M) shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display is completed, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is terminated, the changing icons a1 and the hold icons b1 and b2 are completed. Display is resumed. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 154 (N) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". The changing icon a1 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the changing mode of the BUFO effect progresses (develops) from the mode α to the mode β, and the changing icon a1 which is the target of the BUFO effect changes from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon and is changing. In the symbol variation display corresponding to the icon a1, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. In this way, the jackpot symbol mode may be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode has changed, which is the target of the hold effect. The display mode of the haniwa hold icon is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the face hold icon. The BUFO effect may be set so that the probability that the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect changes to the hold icon with high jackpot reliability is higher in the BUFO effect than in the WUFO effect. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon whose display mode has not changed from the beginning of the display, which is not the target of the hold effect, corresponds to the changing icon which is the target of the hold effect and the display mode has changed. The symbol variation display is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed.

(Example 14)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 14th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (m). FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (m) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (m), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 155 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 155 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect with a button for the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bird k3 with a button appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. The mode when the buttoned B bird k3 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the buttoned B bird k3 is the start of the buttoned B bird production. The buttoned B bird k3 is a display that prompts the player to press the chance button 136. The B-bird effect with a button in this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 155 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect with a button is being performed. An animation in which the button B bird k3 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 155 (d) shows a state immediately before the end of the buttoned B bird effect without the buttoned B bird effect progressing from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect with a button in this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon. In this case, even if the chance button 136 is pressed by the player while the B bird k3 with a button is displayed. The pressing is not accepted, and the B bird effect with a button does not proceed to the aspect β. The button-attached B-bird effect remains in the mode α, and the button-attached B-bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 155 (e), after the buttoned B bird k3 is erased and the buttoned B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then in the right symbol display area 208c. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (f), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which a temporary stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed in a manner of shaking.

FIG. 155 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 155 (h) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 155 (i) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

In FIG. 155 (j), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 155 (k) shows a state in which the changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display (in the temporary stop table) of “Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3”. The changing icon is erased during the shaking fluctuation display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol in the out-of-shape symbol mode.

FIG. 155 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3", which is an out-of-order symbol mode, is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variation display is correct is out of order. There is.

FIG. 155 (m) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon.

In this embodiment, the mode α of the B bird effect with a button is performed, but it does not progress (develop) to the mode β, and corresponds to the black circle hold icon displayed when the B bird effect with a button is performed. The symbol variation display that was started after the hold was exhausted is removed and the symbol mode is confirmed. The buttoned B bird effect in this example does not cover any of the hold icons including the black circle hold icon and the changing icon. As described above, the B bird effect with a button is provided with a failure effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the changing icon and ends without proceeding to the aspect β.

(Example 15)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 15th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (K). FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (K) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 155 (A) to 155 (K), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 155 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 152 (A), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 155 (B) shows a state in which the B bird effect with a button for the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bird k3 with a button appears from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208 is displayed. The mode when the buttoned B bird k3 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bird k3 with buttons is the start of the B bird production. The B bird effect with a button in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

FIG. 155 (C) shows a state in which the B bird effect with a button is being performed. An animation of the buttoned B bird k3 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire buttoned B bird k3 is displayed.

FIG. 155 (D) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect with a button, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k3 with a button is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. The buttoned B bird k3 is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and when the buttoned B bird k3 is in a stationary state at the center of the display screen, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The B bird effect with a button in this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1. In this case, if the chance button 136 is pressed by the player during the still display of the B bird k3 with a button, the press is accepted. The buttoned B bird effect proceeds to aspect β. If the chance button 136 is not pressed during the operation valid period, the buttoned B bird effect ends without proceeding to the mode β.

FIG. 155 (E) shows a state in which the B bird effect progresses from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149 in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed by the player, the button image included in the buttoned B bird k3 is deleted, the buttoned B bird k3 becomes the B bird k2, and the hold icon b1 that is the production target has the eyes of the B bird k2. An animation of the scene where the laser beam is emitted from is displayed.

FIG. 155 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 155 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect with a button in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 155 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 155 (H), the B bird k2 is in the mode α, is erased in a manner of disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the buttoned B bird effect. .. In the buttoned B bird effect, the effect of the mode α in which the buttoned B bird k3 appears is performed, then the effect of the mode β in which the B bird k2 irradiates the laser beam is performed, and then the B bird k2 is erased. The effect of aspect α is performed.

In FIG. 155 (I), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect with a button is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (J), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 155 (K) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the mode α to the mode β of the B bird effect with a button has progressed (developed), but the hold icon b1 which is the target of the B bird effect with a button has changed from the black circle hold icon to another hold icon shown in FIG. It hasn't changed. As described above, the B bird effect with a button is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 155 (G') to 155 (K') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 155 (G') to 155 (K'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 155 (G') shows a state continuing from FIG. 155 (F). In FIG. 155 (G'), the effect image k8 is erased, and the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. When the hold icon b1 is redisplayed, it changes from the black circle hold icon shown in FIG. 104 to the face hold icon. The B bird effect with a button in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 155 (H') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 155 (H'), the B bird k2 is in the mode α and is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the buttoned B bird effect. is there.

In FIG. 155 (I'), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect with a button is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Decoration 2" indicates a state in which a temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 155 (J'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" which is a misaligned symbol mode is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows a state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in a manner of swinging from side to side.

FIG. 155 (K') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this modification, the mode α to the mode β of the buttoned B bird effect progresses (develops), and the hold icon b1 that is the target of the buttoned B bird effect changes from the black circle hold icon to the face hold icon. As described above, the B bird effect with a button is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. The face hold icon is set to have higher jackpot reliability than the triangle hold icon. In addition, the B bird effect with a button may be set so that the probability that the hold icon or the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect changes to the hold icon with high jackpot reliability is higher than that of the B bird effect. ..

(Example 16)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 16th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (q). FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (q) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 156 (a) to 156 (q), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 156 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 2, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed. The hold icon b1 is a black circle hold icon, and the hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 156 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b1.

FIG. 156 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 156 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 156 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b1, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b1 which is the target.

FIG. 156 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b1. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b1, the entire hold icon b1 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 156 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b1 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b1 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 156 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 156 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 156 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

In FIG. 156 (j), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2", which is a misaligned symbol mode, is left and right in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state in which the shaking fluctuation is displayed (temporary stop display) in the manner of shaking.

FIG. 156 (k) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 156 (l) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 that is the target of the B bird effect is digested.

FIG. 156 (m) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

FIG. 156 (n) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 156 (n), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 156 (n), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 156 (o) shows a state in which the super reach effect display has ended. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is restarted. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 156 (p) shows a state in which the changing icon a2 is erased. The changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

FIG. 156 (q) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the B bird effect has progressed (developed) from the mode α to the mode β, but the hold icon b1 which is the target of the B bird effect has not changed from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icon shown in FIG. 104. .. As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b1 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 is subject to the failure effect and success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect is digested. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Next, an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 156 (m') to 156 (w') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 156 (m') to 156 (w'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 156 (m') shows the state continuing from FIG. 156 (l). In FIG. 156 (m'), the WUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which WUFOK6 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which WUFOK6 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a2.

FIG. 156 (n') shows a state in which the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation of WUFOK6 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOK6 is displayed.

FIG. 156 (o') shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. WUFOK6 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 156 (p') shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The WUFO effect targets the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from the WUFOK6 is displayed on the changing icon a2, which is the target.

FIG. 156 (q') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a2. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious ray emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a2 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a2, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a2. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a2, the entire changing icon a2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 156 (r') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a2 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a2 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

FIG. 156 (s') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed after the WUFOk6 is erased and the WUFO effect is completed.

FIG. 156 (t') shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 156 (t'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 156 (t'), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be good.

FIG. 156 (u') shows a state in which the super reach effect display is finished. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is restarted. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways left and right.

FIG. 156 (v') shows a state in which the changing icon a2 is erased. The variable icon a2 is erased during the shaking variable display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

FIG. 156 (w') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". The changing icon a2 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, when the hold icon that is the target of the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the WUFO effect. If the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon, rather than the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect, the variable icon will be displayed. It is configured so that the target hold effect can be easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was the target of the hold effect's failure effect and success effect is better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was not the target of the hold effect. Finally, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 157 (m ″) to 157 (w ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 157 (m ″) to 157 (w ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 157 (m ″) shows the state continuing from FIG. 156 (l). In FIG. 157 (m ″), the BUFO effect of the hold effect has started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a2.

FIG. 157 (n ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 157 (o ″) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 157 (p ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from the BUFOk7 is displayed on the changing icon a2, which is the target.

FIG. 157 (q ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a2. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a2 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a2, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a2. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a2, the entire changing icon a2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 157 (r ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a2 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a2 has changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 157 (s ″) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed after the BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed.

FIG. 157 (t ″) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 157 (t ″), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 157 (t''), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, and the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. You may.

FIG. 157 (u ″) shows a state in which the super reach effect display has ended. The super reach effect display of this example ends after "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is swayed and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. When the super reach effect display ends, an empty background image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c ends, and the changing icon a2 and the hold icon b2 are displayed. Is restarted. In the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in a swaying variation display in a display mode in which it sways from side to side.

FIG. 157 (v ″) shows a state in which the changing icon a2 is erased. The variable icon a2 is erased during the shaking variable display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

FIG. 157 (w ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit.

In this modification, when the hold icon targeted for the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the BUFO effect. If the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon, rather than the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect, the variable icon will be displayed. It is configured so that the target hold effect can be easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was the target of the hold effect's failure effect and success effect is better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was not the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed in the end.

(Example 17)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 17th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (s). FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (s) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (s), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 158 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon corresponding to the hold having the third hold order is displayed in the hold 3 display area, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold having the fourth hold order is displayed in the hold 4 display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icons b2 and b4 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 158 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 158 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 158 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 158 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 158 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a1 and the holding icons b1 and b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 158 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 158 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 158 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 158 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 158 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 158 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 158 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect that does not target any of the hold icons or the changing icon.

FIG. 158 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation in which the B bird k2 moves to the left is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 158 (n) shows a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect without the B bird effect progressing from the “aspect α” to the “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird k2 is erased in such a manner that it disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

In FIG. 158 (o), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 158 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 158 (q) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 158 (r) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 158 (r), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 158 (r), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 158 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". The changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, when the hold icon targeted for the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the B bird effect of the hold effect that does not target any of the hold icon and the change icon is performed. ..

Next, an example of producing the pachinko machine 100 according to the first modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 158 (n') to 158 (v') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 158 (n') to 158 (v'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 158 (n') shows a state continuing from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n'), the B-bird effect proceeds from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 158 (o') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 158 (p') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 158 (q') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 158 (q'), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. ..

In FIG. 158 (r'), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 158 (s') shows after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.
Special Figure 1 Shows the state in which the variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 158 (t') shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bird effect, is digested.

FIG. 158 (u') shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 158 (u'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 158 (u'), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be good.

FIG. 158 (v') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". The changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, the mode α to the mode β of the B bird effect progressed (developed), but the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bird effect, did not change from the black circle hold icon to the other hold icon shown in FIG. 104. .. As described above, the B bird effect is provided with a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 is subject to the failure effect and success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect is digested. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second modification of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 158 (n ″) to 158 (p ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 158 (n ″) to 158 (p ″), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 158 (n ″) shows a state continuing from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n ″), the B-bird effect proceeds from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b4, and the target hold icon b4 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 158 (o ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 158 (p ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b4 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

If the hold icon (in this example, hold icon b2) that was once the target of the hold effect failure effect is displayed in another display area by one or more hold digests, it is likely to be the target of the same hold effect again. However, even if another hold icon (in this example, hold icon b4) is set to be the target of the hold effect, the other hold icon is easily changed to another type of hold icon. Good. For example, the hold icon that was once the target of the hold effect failure effect may be more likely to change than when it is the target of the same hold effect again, or it has never been the target of the hold effect failure effect. The hold icon of the same type may be more variable than when it is the target of the hold effect, or the hold icon that is the target of the failure effect or success effect of another type of hold effect is the same hold effect again. It may be easier to change than when it becomes a target. Further, when the other hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect, the other hold icon may be configured to change to another type of hold icon without fail. In this modification, the other hold icon (hold icon b4 in this example) becomes a premium haniwa hold icon, that is, a big hit confirmation hold icon that always confirms the big hit symbol mode when the symbol variation display started after being digested. An example of changing is shown, but it may be configured to change to another type of hold icon.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modification 3 of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 159 (n') to 159 (v') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 159 (n') to 159 (v'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 159 (n') shows a state continuing from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 159 (n'), the B-bird effect is progressing from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 159 (o') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 159 (p') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 159 (q') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 159 (q'), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. ..

In FIG. 159 (r'), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 159 (s') shows after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b.
Special Figure 1 Shows the state in which the variable game is completed. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 159 (t') shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bird effect, is digested.

FIG. 159 (u') shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 159 (u'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 159 (u'), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be good.

FIG. 159 (v') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". The changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, the process (development) progresses from mode α to mode β of the B bird effect, and the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bird effect, changes from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon shown in FIG. 104. In this way, the B bird effect is provided with a success effect in which the target hold icon changes. In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 is digested. The pachinko machine 100 is subject to the failure effect and success effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect is digested. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the modified example 4 of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 159 (n ″) to 159 (d ″) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 159 (n ″) to 159 (d), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 159 (n ″) shows a state continuing from FIG. 158 (m). In FIG. 158 (n ″), the B-bird effect proceeds from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the target hold icon b2 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 159 (o ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 159 (p ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 159 (q ″) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 159 (q''), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. is there.

In FIG. 159 (r''), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 159 (s ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 159 (t ″) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the B bird effect, is digested.

FIG. 159 (u ″) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed.

FIG. 159 (v ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3.

FIG. 159 (w ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 159 (x ″) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 159 (y ″) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a2, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is irradiated from the BUFOk7 is displayed on the changing icon a3, which is the target.

FIG. 159 (z ″) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a2. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 159 (a ″) shows a state following from FIG. 159 (z ″), and shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the display mode of the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

In FIG. 159 (b''), while BUFOk7 returned to the aspect α and moved toward the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol was completed. It shows the state. The reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be terminated during the hold effect.

In FIG. 159 (c''), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 3” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, in FIG. 159 (ha ″), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 159 (c''), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, and the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. You may.

FIG. 159 (D) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. Since the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, the big hit symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. A stop display (main stop display) is displayed, and it is notified that the result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. The changing icon a3 is erased during the shaking fluctuation display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, when the hold icon targeted for the B bird effect of the hold effect becomes the changing icon, the changing icon is the target of the BUFO effect. If the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect is displayed as the changing icon, rather than the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect, the variable icon will be displayed. It is configured so that the target hold effect can be easily performed. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was the target of the hold effect's failure effect and success effect is better than the symbol variation display corresponding to the changing icon that was not the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed in the end.

(Example 18)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 18th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 160 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 160, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 160A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 160 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 160B shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 160 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 160 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 160 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 160 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 160 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 160 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon is deleted during the shaking fluctuation display (temporary stop display) of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 160 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 160 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 160 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 160 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 160 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 160 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 160 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 160 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 160 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 160 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 160 (t) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 160 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 160 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 160 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 160 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 160 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 160 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 160 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 160 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 160 (z), in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 160 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 160 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 160 (d) shows a state in which the WUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which WUFOK6 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which WUFOK6 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of WUFOk6 is the start of WUFO production. The WUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 160 (e) shows a state in which the WUFO effect is being performed. An animation of WUFOK6 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire WUFOK6 is displayed.

FIG. 160 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the WUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. WUFOK6 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 160 (g) shows a state in which the WUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The WUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from the WUFOK6 is displayed on the changing icon a4, which is the target.

FIG. 160 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious ray emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from WUFOK6 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 160 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 remains in the display mode of the black circle hold icon. The WUFO effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target changing icon does not change.

FIG. 160 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 160 (nu), the WUFOk 6 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the WUFO effect.

In FIG. 160 (le), after WUFok6 is erased and the WUFO effect is completed, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state.

FIG. 160 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (B bird effect in this example) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold, and all the hold icons are targeted. When the hold effect is a failure effect and the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), the hold effect (in this example, the WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. It is done. In the pachinko machine 100, when all the hold effects targeting one hold icon are failure effects, when the hold icon becomes a changing icon, the hold effect targeting the changing icon is performed. It is configured to be easy to break. The changing icon a4 is more likely to be the target of the B bird effect after it becomes the changing icon a4 after the holding icon b3 that has been the target of the B bird effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon is the WUFO effect or BUFO. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of the production is higher. In addition, the other types that are subject to the hold effect rather than the probability that the hold icon that is not the target of any of the multiple types of hold effects will be the target of the hold effect after becoming the changing icon. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of the hold effect after the hold icon that has not changed to the hold icon of is changed to the changing icon is higher. In addition, the hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that was not the target of any of the hold effects among the plurality of types of hold effects is digested. Rather than the probability, the third hold for the changing icon in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the previous hold icon that was the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon was digested. It is configured so that the probability that the production will be performed is higher. If the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon is digested and started, the hold effect for the changing icon is performed. It is configured to be easy to become.

In this embodiment, the hold corresponding to the hold icon targeted for the hold effect is digested and the symbol variation display is started, and finally the out-of-order symbol mode is confirmed, but the hold corresponding to one hold is confirmed. When all the hold effects for the icons are failure effects, the big hit symbol may be easily confirmed and finally displayed in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to the one hold icon. .. Here, it may be easier to say that it is easier to do than when a successful effect of the hold effect is performed even once for the hold icon corresponding to one hold, or to the hold icon corresponding to one hold. On the other hand, it may be easier to perform even once than when some kind of successful production of the hold effect is performed, or compared to the case where the hold icon corresponding to one hold is not performed even once. It may be easy to do.

(Example 19)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 19th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 161 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 161, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 161 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 161 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 161 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 161 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 161 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 161 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 161 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 161 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 161 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 161 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 161 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 161 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 161 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 161 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 161 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 161 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 161 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 161 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 161 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 161 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 161 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 161 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 161 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 161 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 161 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 161 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 161 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 161 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 161 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 161 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 161 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 161 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 161 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 161 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 161 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 161 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 161 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 161 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the triangular hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 161 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 161 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 161 (le), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 161 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 161 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 161 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (B bird effect in this example) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon is targeted. The hold effect of one time is a failure effect, and the hold effect of one time is a success effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed. In addition, the hold icon that is not the target of any of the multiple types of hold effects is the target of the hold effect and does not change to another type of hold icon, rather than the probability that the hold icon is the target of the hold effect. The hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the hold effect.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (in this example, the WUFO effect). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 20)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 20th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 162 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 162, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 162 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 162 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 162 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 162 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 162 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 162 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 162 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 162 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 162 (l) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 162 (m) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

In FIG. 162 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bomber effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows the state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in. The B bomber effect in this example targets the hold icon b3, and the target hold icon b3 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is launched from the B bomber k5.

FIG. 162 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b3. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 162 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the triangular hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bomber production in this example is a successful production in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 162 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 162 (q), the B bomber k5 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

In FIG. 162 (r), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 162 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 162 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 162 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 162 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 162 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 162 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 162 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 162 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 162 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 162 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 162 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 162 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 162 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of a total of 3 hold effects of 2 B bird effects and 1 B bombing effect. It is a game.

FIG. 162 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 162 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 162 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 162 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 162 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 162 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the triangular hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 162 (N) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 162 (N), BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 162 (le), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 162 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 162 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 162 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the second hold effect, the B bomber effect, is a successful effect, but the first hold effect, the B bird effect, is a failure effect. If the B bird effect fails even once out of a plurality of hold effects targeting one hold icon, the B bird effect targeting the same hold icon as the B bird effect becomes easier to perform. If the hold effect fails even once, the same type of hold effect that targets the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect fails even once, and the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the hold effect that targets the changing icon becomes easier to perform. .. It should be noted that the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect failure effect even once rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that was never the target of the hold effect failure effect or success effect. It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode, and it is the target of the successful production of the hold effect even once than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that was never the target of the failure effect or success effect of the hold effect. It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the held icon. The hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect failure effect even once rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is the black circle hold icon from the time of appearance that was not the target of the hold effect failure effect or success effect even once. It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to, and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, from the time of appearance, which was never the target of the failure production or success production of the hold production. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of the successful effect of the hold effect even once than the display. The probability that the hold icon b3 will be the target of the B bird effect is higher than the probability that the hold icon b3 that is the target of the B bird effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon will be the target of the B bomber effect. It is configured as follows. The probability that a hold icon will be the target of the one hold effect is higher than the probability that the hold icon that has been the target of one hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon will be the target of the other hold effect. It is configured to be.

(Example 21)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 163 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 163, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 163 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 3, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon, and the hold icons b2 and b3 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 163 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 163 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 163 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 163 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 163 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 163 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 163 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 163 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 163 (l) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 163 (m) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

In FIG. 163 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bomber effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows the state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in. The B bomber effect in this example targets the hold icon b3, and the target hold icon b3 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is launched from the B bomber k5.

FIG. 163 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b3. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 163 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bomber effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 163 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 163 (q), the B bomber k5 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the mode α and disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

In FIG. 163 (r), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 163 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 163 (t) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 163 (u) shows a state in which the B-bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 163 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 163 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 163 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 163 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 163 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 163 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 163 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 163 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, the “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 163 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 163 (c) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of a total of 3 hold effects of 2 B bird effects and 1 B bombing effect. It is a game.

FIG. 163 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 163 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 163 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 163 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 163 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 163 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 163 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 163, after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 163 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 163 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 163 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect and the B bomber effect) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon. The three-time hold effect for the target is a failure effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (BUFO effect in this example). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect.

(Example 22)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 22nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 164 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 164 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 164, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 164 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 164 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 164 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 164 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 164 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 164 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 164 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 164 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 164 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 164 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 164 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 164 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 164 (k) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 164 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 164 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 164 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 164 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 164 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 164 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 164 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 164 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 164 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 164 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 164 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 164 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 164 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 164 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 164 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 164 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 164 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 164 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 164 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 164 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 164 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 164 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 164 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 164 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 164 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. May be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 164 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 164 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 164 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 164 (le), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 164 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 164 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 164 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (B bird effect in this example) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon is targeted. The hold effect of one time is a failure effect, and the hold effect of one time is a success effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (BUFO effect in this example). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 23)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 23rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 165 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 165, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 165 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 165 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 165 (b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 165 (c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

FIG. 165 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 165 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bomber effect in this example targets the hold icon b3, and the target hold icon b3 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is launched from the B bomber k5.

FIG. 165 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b3. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 165 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bomber production in this example is a successful production in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 165 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 165 (h), the B bomber k5 is erased in such a manner that it returns to the mode α and disappears above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the B bomber production ends. is there.

In FIG. 165 (i), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 165 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 165 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 165 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 165 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 165 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 165 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 165 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 165 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 165 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 165 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 165 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 165 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 165 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 165 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 165 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 165 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 165 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 165 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 165 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 165 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 165 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 165 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 165 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 165 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 165 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 165 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 165 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 165 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 165 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 165 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 165 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 165, after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 165 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 165 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 165 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, one B bomber effect and two B bird effects) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold. The two hold effects targeting the hold icon are failure effects, and the one hold effect is a success effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (BUFO effect in this example). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 24)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 24th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 166 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 166, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 166 (a), the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in special figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the B bomber effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the B bomber k5 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bomber k5 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of the B bomber k5 is the start of the B bomber production. The B bomber effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the B bomber effect is being performed. An animation of the B bomber k5 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bomber k5 is displayed.

FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bomber effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bomber k5 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bomber effect in this example targets the hold icon b3, and the target hold icon b3 displays an animation of a scene in which a missile is launched from the B bomber k5.

FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the missile launched from the B bomber k5 hits the hold icon b3, or the effect image k8 is started to be displayed at the same time as the missile hits the hold icon b3. May be good. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 166 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from a white circle hold icon to a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set. The B bomber production in this example is a successful production in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 166 (h), the B bomber k5 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bomber effect. is there.

In FIG. 166 (i), after the B bomber k5 is erased and the B bomber effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. 2 ”indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 166 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Further, the hold icon b3 is changed from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b3 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 166 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 166 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 166 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 166 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 166 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 166 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 166 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 166 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 166 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 166 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 166 (t) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 166 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 166 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 166 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 166 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 166 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 166 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 166 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 166 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 166 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, the “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 166 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 166 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 166 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 166 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 166 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 166 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 166 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 166 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 166, after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 166 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 166 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 166 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (in this example, one B bomber effect and two B bird effects) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold. The two hold effects targeting the hold icon are failure effects, and the one hold effect is a success effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a WUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The hold icon b3 may be a button hold icon from the beginning when the display is started in response to the winning of the game ball in the special drawing 1 start port 230. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (BUFO effect in this example). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 25)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 25th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo). FIGS. 167 (a) to (z) and (a) to (wo) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 167, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 167 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 3, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, and the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 167 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 167 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 has changed from a black circle hold icon to a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 167 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 167 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 167 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 167 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Further, the hold icon b3 is changed from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b3 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 167 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 167 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 167 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 167 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 167 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b2 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 167 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 167 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 167 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 167 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 167 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 167 (t) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 167 (u) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b3.

FIG. 167 (v) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 167 (w), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b3, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b3 which is the target.

FIG. 167 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b3, the entire hold icon b3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a3 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 167 (y) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b3 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b3 remains a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 167 (z) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 167 (z), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

FIG. 167 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 167 (z), and after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, the “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. Next, "Decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

FIG. 167 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". The changing icon may be deleted in the stop table of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 167 (c) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b3 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a4 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a4 is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3, which is the target of the three B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 167 (d) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a4.

FIG. 167 (e) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 167 (f) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 167 (g) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a4, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a4.

FIG. 167 (H) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a4. When the animation of the scene where the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4 and explodes is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a4, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a4. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a4, the entire changing icon a4 becomes invisible.

FIG. 167 (i) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a4 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 167 (nu) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 167 (nu), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 167, after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 167 (le), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 167 (le), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 167 (Wo) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the three hold effects (B bird effect in this example) target the hold icon (hold icon b3 in this example) corresponding to one hold, and the hold icon is targeted. The hold effect of one time is a failure effect, and the hold effect of one time is a success effect. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (in this example, the changing icon a4), a holding effect (in this example, a BUFO effect) targeting the changing icon is performed. The hold icon b3 may be a button hold icon from the beginning when the display is started in response to the winning of the game ball in the special drawing 1 start port 230. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect for one hold icon is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

In addition, if the B bird production fails even once in multiple B bird productions targeting one hold icon, the B bird production targeting the same hold icon is likely to be performed even once. If a failure effect of the effect is performed, the same type of hold effect as the hold effect for the same hold icon as the hold effect is likely to be performed. If the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) fails even once, and the hold icon targeted by the hold effect becomes a changing icon, the changing icon is targeted. It is easy to perform the hold effect (in this example, the WUFO effect). In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display that has been the target of the failure effect of the hold effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. It is easier to use the black circle hold icon that has been the target of the B bird effect failure effect than the symbol variation display that corresponds to the black circle hold icon that has never been the target of the B bird effect failure effect or success effect. The corresponding symbol variation display is more likely to confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that even once, compared to the case where the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon, which is a black circle hold icon, is digested and started from the time of appearance, which is not the target of some kind of hold effect failure or success effect. Failure of some kind of hold effect It is easier to confirm the jackpot symbol mode in the symbol variation display corresponding to the black circle hold icon that is the target of the effect. Here, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested.

(Example 26)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 26th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (z). FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (z) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 168, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 168 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 168 (b), one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set.

In FIG. 168 (c), one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 3 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

In FIG. 168 (d), one more game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 4 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 168 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 168 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 168 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

FIG. 168 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 168 (i) shows a state in which the B-bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 168 (j) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 168 (k) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not appear.

FIG. 168 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 168 (l), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 168 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 168 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 168 (o) shows a state in which the earliest hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 168 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 168 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 168 (r), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 168 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 168 (t) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 168 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 168 (u), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 168 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 168 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 168 (x) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 168 (y) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 168 (y), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 168 (y), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 168 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the hold icon b2 that appears in response to the increase in hold due to the winning of the game ball to the special figure 1 start port 230 is the button hold icon, and the hold icon b2 that has been started to be displayed as the button hold icon is targeted. The hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect) is performed twice, and both of the hold effects are failed effects. In addition, the jackpot symbol mode is confirmed and displayed on the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon b2. The pachinko machine 100 has a symbol variation table corresponding to the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect failure effect even once, rather than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that has never been the target of the hold effect. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed. It should be noted that the symbol variation table corresponding to the hold icon that was the target of the successful effect of the hold effect even once is the big hit symbol than the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon that was never the target of the hold effect. It is configured so that the mode can be easily displayed.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 168 (y') to (z') and (i') to (to') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 168 (y') to (z') and (a') to (to'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29 and shown. There is.

FIG. 168 (y') shows a state continuing from FIG. 168 (x). In FIG. 168 (y'), the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3.

FIG. 168 (z') shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 168 (a') shows a state continuing from FIG. 168 (z'), and during the BUFO production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed. It shows the reduced display state. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 168 (b') shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a3.

FIG. 168 (c) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 168 (d) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 168 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 168 (e), BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 168 (he'), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the stopped display state. In this example, in FIG. 168 (F'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 168 (he'), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be good.

FIG. 168 (to') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the two hold effects (in this example, the B bird effect) are targeted at the hold icon (hold icon b2 in this example) corresponding to the hold of 1, and the hold icon is targeted at 2 The hold production of the times is a failure production. When the hold icon becomes a changing icon (changing icon a3 in this example), a holding effect (BUFO effect in this example) targeting the changing icon is performed. The pachinko machine 100 targets the changing icon when the holding icon becomes a changing icon when the holding effect of one is a failure effect even once. It is configured so that the hold effect can be easily performed.

(Example 27)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 27th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 169 (a) to (z) and (a)). FIGS. 169 (a) to 169 (z) and (a) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 169, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 169 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 4, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 1 hold icon b1 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 2 hold icon b2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area display area. Is displayed, the hold icon b3 is displayed in the hold 3 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area, and the hold icon b4 is displayed in the hold 4 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area. The hold icons b1 and b3 are white circle hold icons, and the hold icons b2 and b4 are black circle hold icons. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

FIG. 169 (b) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icons b2 and b4. In this way, the hold effect may be performed for a plurality of hold icons.

FIG. 169 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 169 (d), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the B-bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icons b2 and b4, and the target hold icons b2 and b4 display an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 169 (e) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed by overlapping with the hold icon b2, and the effect image k9 is displayed by overlapping with the hold icon b4. When the animation of the scene where the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect images k8 and k9 are displayed. The effect images k8 and k9 may be started to be displayed during the display of the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible, and the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, so that the entire hold icon b4 becomes visible. It is invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 that are not the target of the hold effect, and the effect image k9 of this example is the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. It is displayed with some overlap. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 169 (f) shows a state in which the effect images k8 and k9 are erased. Since the effect images k8 and k9 have been deleted, the hold icons b2 and b4 are displayed again visually. The hold icons b2 and b4 remain as black circle hold icons. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In the hold effect for a plurality of hold icons, a pattern effect in which one hold icon changes and the remaining hold icons do not change may be provided.

FIG. 169 (g) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 169 (g), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 169 (h), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 169 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 169 (j) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 169 (k) shows a state in which the B-bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icons b2 and b4.

FIG. 169 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 169 (m), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the B-bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icons b2 and b4, and the target hold icons b2 and b4 display an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 169 (n) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed by overlapping with the hold icon b2, and the effect image k9 is displayed by overlapping with the hold icon b4. When the animation of the scene where the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect images k8 and k9 are displayed. The effect images k8 and k9 may be started to be displayed during the display of the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible, and the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b4, so that the entire hold icon b4 becomes visible. It is invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 that are not the target of the hold effect, and the effect image k9 of this example is the hold icon b3 that is not the target of the hold effect. It is displayed with some overlap. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 169 (o) shows a state in which the effect images k8 and k9 are erased. Since the effect images k8 and k9 have been deleted, the hold icons b2 and b4 are displayed again visually. The hold icons b2 and b4 remain as black circle hold icons. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. In the hold effect for a plurality of hold icons, a pattern effect in which one hold icon changes and the remaining hold icons do not change may be provided.

FIG. 169 (p) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 169 (p), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 169 (q), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 169 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 169 (s) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area.

FIG. 169 (t) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3.

FIG. 169 (u) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

In FIG. 169 (v), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, and the BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen. After that, the BUFO effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a3.

FIG. 169 (w) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 169 (x) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 169 (y) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 169 (y), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 169 (z), after the BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 169 (z), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 169 (z), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 169 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a4 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the B bird effect is performed a plurality of times (twice in this example) for a plurality of black circle hold icons, and all the B bird effects are failure effects. Further, in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2 which is the target of the B bird effect, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed. When a hold effect targeting a plurality of hold icons is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is finally determined in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to all the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons. It may be configured to be easily displayed, or it is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to the hold icon of one of the plurality of hold icons. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to a part of the hold icons among the plurality of hold icons. ..

(Example 28)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 28th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 (a) to 170 (z). FIGS. 170 (a) to 170 (z) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 170, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 170A shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 170 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 170 (a), the lower plate 128 is full of game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and white in it. The dish full tank display k10 including the character string image of "through the ball!" Is displayed. The plate full display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball by the lower plate full tank sensor that detects that the lower plate 128 is full. This is the display required for. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. In addition, the plate full tank display may be called a ball-free display or a lower plate full tank error notification image. The plate full tank display k10 may be displayed overlapping with the variable display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 170 (b), one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set.

In FIG. 170 (c), one more game ball is won in the special drawing 1 starting port 230 during the special drawing 1 variable game, the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is increased by 1, and the number of holdings in special drawing 1 is 3. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 3 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

In FIG. 170 (d), one more game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 4 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 170 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b. At the beginning of the B bird production, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 170 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 170 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. The B bird k2 is displayed overlapping with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 170 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target. Since the eyes of the B bird k2 overlap with the plate full display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

FIG. 170 (j) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The plate full display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (hold change animation) in which the effect image overlaps the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed again visibly. It does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 170 (k) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not appear. Further, the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 170 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 170 (l), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When the B bird k2 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 170 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 170 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 170 (o) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 170 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2. At the beginning of the B bird production, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 170 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

In FIG. 170 (r), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target. Since the eyes of the B bird k2 overlap with the plate full display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

FIG. 170 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The plate full display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (hold change animation) in which the effect image overlaps the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed again visibly. It does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 170 (t) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change. Further, the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 170 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 170 (u), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When the B bird k2 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 170 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 170 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 170 (x) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 170 (y) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 170 (y), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 170 (y), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 170 (z) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the lower plate full tank error has occurred, and the plate full tank display k10 is displayed. The display of the hold effect (B bird k2 in this example) does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10 at the beginning of appearance, but after the appearance, it overlaps with the plate full tank display k10 in aspect β, and exits outside the display screen. When it is erased, it does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. In this example, the B bird effect of the hold effect has been described as an example, but the same applies to other hold effects.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 170 (y') to (z') and (i') to (to') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modification in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 170 (y') to (z') and (a) to (to'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29 and shown. There is.

FIG. 170 (y') shows a state continuing from FIG. 170 (x). In FIG. 170 (y'), the BUFO effect of the hold effect is started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3. At the beginning of the BUFO production, BUFOk7 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 170 (z') shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 170 (a') shows a state continuing from FIG. 170 (z'), and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the BUFO production, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. It shows the reduced display state. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 170 (b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a3. Since the light beam irradiation portion of BUFOk7 overlaps with the dish full tank display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the light beam is irradiated.

FIG. 170 (c) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The full plate display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the changing icon a3, which is the target of the hold effect. In this way, the effect image overlaps the changing icon that is the target of the pending effect, and then the effect image is erased and the changing icon is displayed again in a visible manner (holding change animation). Does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 170 (d) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes. Further, BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 170 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 170 (e), BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect. When BUFOk7 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, BUFOk7 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 170 (he'), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the stopped display state. In this example, in FIG. 170 (F'), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 170 (he'), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display are not started. May be good.

FIG. 170 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this modification, the lower plate full tank error has occurred, and the plate full tank display k10 is displayed. The display of the hold effect (BUFOk7 in this example) does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10 at the beginning of appearance, but after the appearance, it overlaps with the plate full tank display k10 in the mode β, and exits outside the display screen. When it is erased, it does not overlap with the plate full display k10. In this example, the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been described as an example, but the same applies to other hold effects.

When the failure effect of the hold effect (B bird effect in this example) for one hold icon is repeatedly performed, the display of the hold effect (B bird k2BUFOk7) is configured to overlap with the full plate display. Because it is done, the display of the hold effect is not disturbed by the full plate display so that the player wants to see it, and the player wants to perform the ball removal operation, and the player is full of the lower plate. It may be possible to reduce the act of keeping the tongue state for a long time. If the plate is full for a long time, it may cause the ball in the game machine to be clogged, or it may cause the payout device to malfunction, and the game machine does not pay out the prize ball to the player. Since the signal indicating that there is a prize ball is not transmitted from the game machine to the hall computer in a timely manner, the hall computer may not be able to accurately grasp the operating state of the game machine. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the continuation of the lower plate full state for a long period of time, so that these adverse effects may be reduced.

In this embodiment, the display of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect (in this example, B bird k2 and BUFOk7) does not overlap due to the full plate display shortly after the appearance / exit. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display of the hold effect may not be overlapped by the full plate display when both the appearance and exit of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect, or the display of the hold effect may be reserved. The display of the hold effect may not overlap with the full plate display only when the display of the effect appears, and the display of the hold effect may overlap with the full plate display when leaving the display of the hold effect. , The display of the hold effect may not be overlapped by the full plate display only when the display of the hold effect is exited, and the display of the hold effect may appear in a state of overlapping with the full plate display. The appearance / exit display may be performed in a state where the display of the hold effect overlaps with the plate full display.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which at least a part of the display of the hold effect such as the B bird effect and the BUFO effect displayed for the same hold icon may be overlapped by the plate full display. The display may be configured so that at least a part of the display of all the pending effects may overlap with the full plate display, or the entire display of all the reserved effects may be displayed as full. It may be configured to overlap with, for example, at least a part or all of the display of one of a plurality of hold effects (for example, B bird effect) is overlapped by the plate full display. However, the display of the hold effect (for example, W bird effect) whose appearance rate is higher than that of the one hold effect may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display. , The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird effect) whose progress rate is lower than that of the one hold effect may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display, or the one hold effect. The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) whose success rate is lower than that of the effect may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display.
On the contrary, the display of some reserved effects such as B bird effect may be overlapped by the display of full plate, but the appearance rate is lower than that of B bird effect (for example, B bombing). The display of the machine effect) may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display, and the display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) having a higher progress rate than the B bird effect is the plate full display. The display may be configured so that it does not overlap due to the display, and the display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) having a higher success rate than the B bird effect does not overlap due to the full plate display. It may be configured as follows.
However, at least a part or all of the display of the hold effect targeting any of the hold icons of "Ho 1 to Ho 4" such as B Bird may be overlapped by the full plate display. The hold effect (for example, WUFO) targeting the hold icon of "hold 0" may be configured so that the display does not overlap due to the full plate display, or the hold of "hold 0" is held. The display of the hold effect (for example, WUFO) targeting the icon may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display, or the hold effect targeting the hold icon of "hold 0". (For example, WUFO) may be configured so that it does not overlap due to the full plate display.
On the contrary, at least a part or all of the display of the hold effect targeting the hold icon of some "hold 0" such as the B bird effect may be overlapped by the plate full display. The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) targeting any of the hold icons of "4" may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display, or "hold 1 to hold". The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) targeting any of the hold icons of "4" may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display, or "hold 1 to hold". The display of the hold effect (for example, W bird) targeting any of the hold icons of "4" may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display.

In this embodiment, at least a part of B bird k2, BUFOk7, etc. and at least a part of a laser beam or a mysterious ray emitted from B bird k2 or BUFOk7 may be overlapped by a full plate display. It was. B bird k2, BUFOk7, etc. are characters that are displayed regardless of whether the hold effect is a success effect or a failure effect, and the laser beam or the mysterious ray progresses from the hold effect α to the aspect β. It is an additional character that is not displayed in some failure effects such as when it does not exist. For example, in the case of the W bomber production, the W bomber k4 is the character, and the missile launched from the W bomber k4 corresponds to the additional character. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part or all of the characters may be overlapped by the full plate display, but the additional character is configured so as not to be overlapped by the full plate display. You may. On the contrary, at least a part or all of the additional characters may be overlapped by the plate full display, but the characters may be configured so as not to be overlapped by the plate full display.

In this embodiment, at least a part of B bird k2, BUFOk7, etc. and at least a part of a hold effect such as a laser beam or a mysterious ray emitted from Bbird k2 or BUFOk7 may be overlapped by a full plate display. Yes Hold change animation has shown an example that is not overlapped by the full plate display, but it is not limited to this, and at least a part of the hold change animation may be overlapped by the full plate display. The effect may be configured so that it does not overlap due to the full plate display.

In this embodiment, an example of the plate full tank display is shown, but instead of the plate full tank display, an opening error displayed when it is detected that the main body 104 is open to the outer frame 102 is displayed. Other displays such as a display and an opening error display that is displayed when it is detected that the front frame door 106 is open to the main body may be applied.

(Example 29)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 29th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 (a) to (z) and (a) to (g). FIGS. 171 (a) to (z) and (a) to (g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 171, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 171 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 171 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 171 (a), the lower plate 128 is full of game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and white in it. The dish full tank display k10 including the character string image of "through the ball!" Is displayed. The plate full display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball by the lower plate full tank sensor that detects that the lower plate 128 is full. This is the display required for. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. In addition, the plate full tank display may be called a ball-free display or a lower plate full tank error notification image. The plate full tank display k10 may be displayed overlapping with the variable display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 171 (b), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set.

In FIG. 171 (c), one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 3 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

In FIG. 171 (d), one more game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 4 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 171 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b. At the beginning of the B bird production, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 171 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 171 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. The B bird k2 is displayed overlapping with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 171 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target. Since the eyes of the B bird k2 overlap with the plate full display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

FIG. 171 (j) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The plate full display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (hold change animation) in which the effect image overlaps the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed again visibly. It does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 171 (k) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not appear. Further, the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 171 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 171 (l), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When the B bird k2 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 171 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. Further, since the lower plate full tank error is resolved by the operation of the ball removing lever 132 by the player, the plate full tank display k10 is erased.

FIG. 171 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 171 (o) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 171 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 171 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

In FIG. 171 (r), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 171 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 171 (t) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 171 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 171 (u), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 171 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 171 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". Further, since the lower plate 128 is full again with the game ball and the lower plate full tank error occurs, the plate full tank display k10 is displayed.

FIG. 171 (x) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 171 (y) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3. At the beginning of the BUFO production, BUFOk7 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 171 (z) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 171 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 171 (z). During the BUFO production, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced. It shows the state that was done. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 171 (b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a3. Since the light beam irradiation portion of BUFOk7 overlaps with the dish full tank display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the light beam is irradiated.

FIG. 171 (c) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The full plate display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the changing icon a3, which is the target of the hold effect. In this way, the effect image overlaps the changing icon that is the target of the pending effect, and then the effect image is erased and the changing icon is displayed again in a visible manner (holding change animation). Does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 171 (d) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes. Further, BUFOk7 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 171 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 171 (e), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing in the upper left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the BUFO effect is completed. When BUFOk7 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, BUFOk7 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 171 (to), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 171 (f), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 171 (he), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 171 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the plate full tank display k10 makes it difficult to see the hold effect, which prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation. As a result, the player performs the ball removal operation, so that the plate full tank display k10 is displayed. Was erased, making it easier to see the second hold effect, but while the player was alert, the lower plate 128 was filled with the game ball again due to the winning of the game ball to the general winning opening, etc., and the plate was full. The display k10 is redisplayed, and a part of the display of the BUFO effect is overlapped by the plate full display k10.

(Example 30)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the thirtieth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 (a) to (z) and (a) to (g). FIGS. 172 (a) to (z) and (a) to (g) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 172, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 172 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 172 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

Further, in the state at the time shown in FIG. 172 (a), the lower plate 128 is full of game balls, and a black horizontally long rectangular image in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and white in it. The dish full tank display k10 including the character string image of "through the ball!" Is displayed. The plate full display k10 indicates that the player operates the ball removal lever 132 when the lower plate 128 is full with a game ball by the lower plate full tank sensor that detects that the lower plate 128 is full. This is the display required for. The ball removal display k10 is displayed by the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of the command including the information of the lower plate full tank error from the main control unit 300. In addition, the plate full tank display may be called a ball-free display or a lower plate full tank error notification image. The plate full tank display k10 may be displayed overlapping with the variable display, the temporary stop display, and the stop display of the decorative symbol.

In FIG. 172 (b), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a button hold icon. The button hold icon is a display that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136, and while the button hold icon is displayed, the operation valid period (operation acceptance period) in which the press of the chance button 136 is effective is set.

In FIG. 172 (c), one more game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 3. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b3 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 3 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b3 is a white circle hold icon.

In FIG. 172 (d), one more game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 4. It shows the state that became. The hold icon b4 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area hold 4 display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b4 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which the hold icon b2 changes from the button hold icon to the black circle hold icon in response to the player pressing the chance button 136. The change display of the hold icon b2 is a response display displayed in response to the player pressing the chance button 136.

FIG. 172 (f) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b. At the beginning of the B bird production, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

FIG. 172 (g) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 172 (h) shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed. The B bird k2 is displayed so as to fly up to the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen. The B bird k2 is displayed overlapping with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 172 (i) shows a state in which the B bird effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target. Since the eyes of the B bird k2 overlap with the plate full display k10, it is difficult for the player to identify the moment when the laser beam is irradiated.

FIG. 172 (j) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The plate full display k10 does not overlap with the effect image k8 and the hold icon b2 that is the target of the hold effect. In this way, a series of effect displays (hold change animation) in which the effect image overlaps the hold icon that is the target of the hold effect, and then the effect image is erased and the hold icon is displayed again visibly. It does not overlap with the plate full tank display k10. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icons b1 and b3 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 172 (k) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not appear. Further, the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

FIG. 172 (l) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 172 (l), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. When the B bird k2 disappears above the left edge of the display screen, the B bird k2 does not overlap with the plate full display k10.

In FIG. 172 (m), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. Further, since the lower plate full tank error is resolved by the operation of the ball removing lever 132 by the player, the plate full tank display k10 is erased.

FIG. 172 (n) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 172 (o) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 3 display area.

FIG. 172 (p) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 172 (q) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the B bird k2 overlaps with the plate full tank display k10.

In FIG. 172 (r), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 172 (s) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 and the holding icon b3 that are not the targets of the holding effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 172 (t) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 172 (u) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 172 (u), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 172 (v), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 172 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 172 (x) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b3 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area, and the hold icon b4 is moved and displayed in the hold 2 display area. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 172 (y) shows a state in which the BUFO effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which BUFOk7 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative pattern display device 208. The mode in which BUFOk7 appears is "Phase α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of BUFOk7 is the start of BUFO production. The BUFO effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3.

FIG. 172 (z) shows a state in which the BUFO effect is being performed. An animation of BUFOk7 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire BUFOk7 is displayed.

FIG. 172 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 172 (z). During the BUFO effect, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen, and the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced. It shows the state that was done. BUFOk7 is displayed so as to fly up to the right of the center of the display screen after moving to the lower center of the display screen.

FIG. 172 (b) shows a state in which the BUFO effect has progressed from “aspect α” to “aspect β” shown in FIG. 149. The BUFO effect targets the changing icon a3, and an animation of a scene in which a mysterious ray is emitted from BUFOk7 is displayed on the target changing icon a3.

FIG. 172 (c) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. The effect image k8 is displayed when the animation of the scene in which the mysterious light beam emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3 and explodes is completed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed after the mysterious ray emitted from BUFOk7 hits the changing icon a3, or the effect image k8 is displayed at the same time as the mysterious ray hits the changing icon a3. It may be started. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible.

FIG. 172 (d) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a4 is displayed again visibly. The changing icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The BUFO effect is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 172 (e) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 172 (e), the BUFOk7 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the BUFO effect.

In FIG. 172 (to), after BUFOk7 is erased and the BUFO effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the displayed state. In this example, in FIG. 172 (f), the super reach effect display is started after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. The description and illustration of the super reach effect display will be omitted. In addition, in FIG. 172 (f), the normal reach effect display may be started instead of the super reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reached, or the super reach effect display and the normal reach effect display may not be started. Good.

FIG. 172 (G) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the super reach effect display is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, the plate full tank display k10 makes it difficult to see the hold effect, which prompts the player to perform the ball removal operation, and as a result, the player performs the ball removal operation until the lower plate 128 is empty. By doing so, the plate full tank display k10 is not displayed again, and the hold effect after the ball removal operation is easy to see.

(Example 31)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 31st embodiment of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (w). FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (w) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 173, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 173 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 173 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 173 (b), one game ball is won in the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 173 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 173 (d) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 173 (e), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the B-bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 173 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 173 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The B bird effect in this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not appear.

FIG. 173 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 173 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 173 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 173 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 173 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

FIG. 173 (l) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 173 (m) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 173 (n), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows a state of progress from "aspect α" to "aspect β". The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 173 (o) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the changing icon a2 that is not the target of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 173 (p) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bird effect in this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 173 (q) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 173 (q), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 173 (r), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 173 (s) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 173 (t) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 173 (u) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 173 (u), when the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach, the normal reach effect display is started. In addition, in FIG. 173 (u), the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 173 (v), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state.

FIG. 173 (w) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". It may be deleted while the changing icon decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) is again the target of the hold effect.

As illustrated, the symbol variation display (in this example, the failure effect. In some cases, the success effect may be acceptable) is performed when the pending effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display (in this example). The next symbol variation display, etc. in FIGS. 173 (a) to (j) (in this example, FIGS. 173 (k) to (s)), but the number of reservations notified in the previous symbol variation display is exhausted. It may be any of the symbol variation displays that are started before. ) May be configured so that a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect can be easily performed. However, even if the hold effect (failure) is performed in the previous symbol change display, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect may not be performed in the next symbol change display, etc. of the symbol change display. Good.

A certain change effect is likely to occur in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the case where a certain hold effect (in this example, the failure effect by the B bird effect. In some cases, the success effect) is not performed in the previous symbol variation display is performed. Is the next symbol variation display, etc. (in this example, FIGS. 173 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)), but was notified in the previous symbol variation display. It may be any of the symbol variation indications that is started before the number hold is exhausted. ), The hold effect or the same hold effect (B bird effect in this example) may be easily performed again. However, even if the hold effect (failure) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the hold effect may not be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be the target of change production in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the hold icon that was the target of the hold icon that was not the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display is the next symbol change display, etc. of the symbol change display (corresponding to the hold icon). It may be configured so that it is likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in any of the symbol variation displays that are started before the hold is exhausted. However, the hold icon that was not the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display may become the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be the target of a certain change effect in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the hold icon that was the target of a certain hold effect (B bird effect in this example) in the previous symbol variation display is the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display, etc. (previous symbol variation display). In any of the symbol variation displays that are started before the hold for the number of minutes notified in the above is exhausted), the symbol variation display before the hold effect that was not performed in the previous symbol variation display. It may be configured so as to be easily targeted by the hold effect (B bird effect in this example) performed in. However, even if the previous symbol variation display is subject to a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect), the hold effect that was not performed in the previous symbol variation display in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display is It may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like.

When the next fluctuation becomes the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display is performed when the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect of the B bird effect) is not performed in the previous symbol variation display. Etc. (Any of the symbol variation display that is started before the hold for the number of minutes notified in the previous symbol variation display is exhausted), the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect is successful. (The hold mode may be configured to facilitate the change to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, button press change hold icon, or the like). However, even if the hold effect (failure) is performed in the previous symbol change display, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect may fail in the next symbol change display, etc. of the previous symbol change display. May be good.

When the next variation becomes the target of a certain change effect, the certain change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the hold icon that was the target of the hold icon that was not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect of the B bird effect) in the previous symbol change display is next to the symbol change display. In the symbol variation display (either the symbol variation display that is started before the hold corresponding to the hold icon is exhausted), the hold effect or the same hold effect (B bird failure in this example) is applied again. In that case, it may be configured so that the success of the hold effect (successful change of the hold mode to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, a button press change hold icon, or the like) can be easily performed. However, the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display is one of the next symbol change display of the symbol change display (one of the symbol change displays that is started before the hold corresponding to the hold icon is exhausted. However, even if the hold effect or the same hold effect is targeted again in), the hold effect may fail.

Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to a modified example of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 173 (p') to (z') and (a') to (c') show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced by this modified example in chronological order. In each of FIGS. 173 (p') to (z') and (a') to (c'), the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29 and shown. There is.

FIG. 173 (p') shows the state continuing from FIG. 173 (o). In FIG. 173 (p'), the effect image k8 is erased after the laser beam is irradiated from the B bird k2 toward the hold icon b2. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has not changed as a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 173 (q') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 173 (q'), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the mode α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. ..

In FIG. 173 (r'), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. "Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 173 (s') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 173 (t') shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a3 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. The special figure 1 variable game is a special figure variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b2, which is the target of the two B bird effects, is digested.

FIG. 173 (u') shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the changing icon a3.

FIG. 173 (v') shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 173 (w'), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, and after the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed, the B bird effect is shown in FIG. 149. It shows the state of progress from "Aspect α" to "Aspect β" shown. The B bird effect of this example targets the changing icon a3, and the target changing icon a3 displays an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2.

FIG. 173 (x') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the changing icon a3. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire changing icon a3, the entire changing icon a3 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 may overlap only a part of the hold icon or the variable icon that is the target of the hold effect.

FIG. 173 (y') shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the changing icon a3 is displayed again visibly. The way icon a3 has changed from the black circle hold icon to the display mode of the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104. The B bird effect of this example is a successful effect in which the target changing icon changes.

FIG. 173 (z') shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 173 (z'), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which is a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect. ..

FIG. 173 (a) shows a state continuing from FIG. 173 (z'). In FIG. 173 (a), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach in FIG. 173 (a'), the normal reach effect display is started. In addition, in FIG. 173 (a'), the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach.

In FIG. 173 (b'), "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state.

FIG. 173 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". It may be deleted while the changing icon decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this modification, following FIGS. 173 (a) to 173 (o), the B bird effect fails again, and the symbol variation display (t) started by the digestion of the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon in which the failure is repeated. During') to (c'), the changing icon is again successfully held by the B bird effect, and the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display.

Two previous symbol variation displays (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and one previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (s') ), The hold icon that was the target of the hold effect (B bird effect in this example) is displayed as a variable icon and is again the target of the hold effect or the same hold effect.

It is easy to make a big hit with the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. It may be the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c')) that is started after being digested, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily stopped and displayed. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is finally digested and started in the symbol change display. The out-of-design mode may be stopped and displayed.

It is easy to make a big hit when a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. In some cases, the success effect). A certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')) in the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (ha')) that is started after being digested, but a bigger hit than the normal reach. When a highly reliable super reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo-continuous production occurs, etc.), the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be stopped or stopped. It may be configured to be. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, a certain effect is given in the symbol change display in which the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested and started. Even if the above is performed, the out-of-design mode may be finally displayed as a stop.

It is easy to make a big hit when a change effect occurs in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. In some cases, the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c')) that is digested and started, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (Fig.) 173 (u') to (z')) However, in some cases, another pending effect such as a WUFO effect may occur.) In the event, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be stopped and displayed in the end. It may be configured in. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold effect is displayed in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. Even if it is done, there may be a case where the deviated symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed.

Change effects are likely to occur in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. In some cases, the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c')) that is digested and started, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (Fig.) 173 (u') to (z')), but it may be possible to generate another pending effect such as a WUFO effect.)) May be easily generated. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold effect is displayed in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. It may not be done.

In the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. It may be the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c)) that is digested and started, the hold icon (changing icon) is a hold effect or the same hold effect or another than another hold icon. (In this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may be generated.) It may be configured so that it is easy to become. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, another hold in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. The icon may be the target.

Targeted ... When a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. The hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested when it is targeted than when it is not targeted by the hold effect (in this example, a failure effect. It may be a success effect) in s'). In the symbol variation display (Fig. 173 (t') to (C') in this example), a certain effect (normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')) in this example), but the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal reach. When a high super reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo continuous effect occurs, etc.), the hold icon (changing icon) is the hold effect or the same hold effect or the same hold effect. Another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur). The target hold effect may be easily performed or configured to be performed. However, even if a certain hold icon is the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol variation display or the immediately preceding symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display that starts when the hold corresponding to a certain hold icon is digested, the hold effect targeting the hold icon may fail, or the hold icon may be the previous symbol variation display or Even if the hold effect is targeted in the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon may not be performed in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. There may be.

It is easy to succeed in the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. It may be the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c)) that is digested and started, the hold icon (changing icon) is a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (this example). Then, the same hold effect B bird (u') to (z'), but there is a case that another hold effect such as WUFO effect may occur.) The success of the hold effect (the mode of hold is It may be configured so that a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or a successful change to a button press change hold icon or the like) can be easily performed. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold icon is displayed in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested. The hold effect for the above may fail, and even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, it corresponds to the certain hold icon. In the symbol variation display that is started after the hold is exhausted, the hold effect for the hold icon may not be performed.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case of being the target than in the case of not being the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. In some cases, the success effect). A certain effect (normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')) in this example) in the symbol variation display (Fig. 173 (t') to (ha') in this example) that is started after being digested, but the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal reach. It may be possible to generate a high degree of super reach, a certain notice display, a pseudo continuous effect, etc.)) may be likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, a certain effect is given in the symbol change display in which the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested and started. May not be done.

Targeted ... A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display.
As illustrated, a certain hold icon is the previous symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (a) to (j)) and the immediately preceding symbol variation display (FIGS. 173 (k) to (o), (p') to (. In s')), the hold corresponding to the certain hold icon is more in the case where it is the target than in the case where it is not the target of the hold effect (in this example, the failure effect. It may be the success effect). In the symbol variation display (in this example, FIGS. 173 (t') to (c')) that is digested and started, the hold icon (changing icon) is a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (in this example,). The B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but the hold effect may be generated as another hold effect such as a WUFO effect). If it is said or succeeded, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (I')), but a super reach with higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo continuous effect occurs, etc. In some cases,) may occur easily or may be configured to occur. However, even if a certain hold icon becomes the target of the hold effect in the previous symbol change display or the immediately preceding symbol change display, the hold effect corresponding to the certain hold icon is digested and started again in the hold effect. May not be performed even if is performed.

(Example 32)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 32nd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (a) to 174 (p). FIGS. 174 (a) to 174 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 produced according to this embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 174, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 174 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 174 (a), the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1, and the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 174 (b), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon.

FIG. 174 (c) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 174 (d) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k2 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 174 (e), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the B bird effect, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the B-bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 174 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 174 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has changed from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a successful effect of holding an icon.

FIG. 174 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 174 (h), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 174 (i), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 174 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 174 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 174 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the hold icon b2, which is the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 174 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 174 (n) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area.

In FIG. 174 (o), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 174 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the hold icon b2 is changed to the black circle hold icon by being the target of the hold effect (B bird effect) and the hold icon b2 is changed to the black circle hold icon in the next variation. The symbol variation display, which is started when the corresponding hold is digested, finally displays the off-symbol mode.

Change effects are likely to occur with the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, next to the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by the B bird effect) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. A certain hold effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)) of The next symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of (B bird effect of (h)) is performed is the hold effect again, the same hold effect (B bird effect in this example), or another hold effect. It may be configured to be easily damaged. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the hold effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, next to the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by the B bird effect) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. A certain hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (c) to), which targets a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)). Even if the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of (b) B bird effect) is performed is configured so that a certain hold effect (B bird effect in this example) is more likely to be performed. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the certain hold effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be the target of change production in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, the following of the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (successful effect by B bird in this example) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. A hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (c) to The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of b) B bird effect) is performed is configured so that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. You may be. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol change display, it may be subject to the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in the next symbol change display, etc. of the symbol change display. Good.

It is easy to be the target of a certain change effect in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, next to the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by the B bird effect) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. A certain hold effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)) of The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of (B bird effect of (h)) is performed has a hold icon with a certain hold icon (for example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that became the failure effect). It may be configured so as to be easily targeted by. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol change display, it may be the target of a certain hold effect in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display.

When the next fluctuation becomes the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, next to the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by the B bird effect) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. (For example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (c) to (s)) In the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of b) B bird effect) was performed, the hold icon is more likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect, and the hold effect. (Successful change to a look-ahead notice mode or a button press change hold icon, etc., in which the hold mode is more reliable) may be configured so that the hold effect is likely to succeed. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol change display, it may be the target of the hold effect in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display and succeed.

When the next variation becomes the target of a certain change effect, the certain change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, the following of the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (successful effect by B bird in this example) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain mode (black circle hold icon in this example) was performed. A hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (k) to (s)). ) B bird effect) The next symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which the failure effect was performed is more likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (B bird effect in the examples so far). The hold effect may be configured so that success of the hold effect (successful change to a look-ahead notice mode in which the hold mode is more reliable, a button press change hold icon, or the like) is likely to occur. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, it may be the target of a certain hold effect in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display and succeed.

It is easy to make a big hit with the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example). A certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) was performed for the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the display. Nevertheless, the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect is digested and started may be configured so that the jackpot symbol aspect is finally stopped and displayed. However, there may be a case where the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect and has become a certain mode.

It is easy to make a big hit when a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example). A certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) was performed for the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the display. Despite this, the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain mode is exhausted is a certain effect (in this example, the normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but it is more than the normal reach. When a super reach with high jackpot reliability occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo-continuous production occurs, etc.), the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be stopped or stopped in the end. It may be configured to be displayed. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect and becomes a certain mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed. In some cases.

It is easy to make a big hit when a change effect occurs in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) changed by the hold effect (successful effect by B bird in this example) is digested and started. Even if a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) was performed for the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect from the appearance. Regardless of this, the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect is digested is the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (in this example). Although FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be stopped and displayed in the end when another pending effect such as a WUFO effect occurs.) It may be configured as follows. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect and has become a certain mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed. There may be cases.

Change effects are likely to occur in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) changed by the hold effect (successful effect by B bird in this example) is digested and started. Even if a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) was performed for the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect from the appearance. Regardless, the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect is digested is the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (in this example). Although FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), it may be configured so that another pending effect such as a WUFO effect may occur.) Is likely to occur. However, there may be a case where the hold effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect.

In the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example) has been changed from the appearance to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). In this example, although a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed for the black circle hold icon), the hold icon having the certain aspect is better. When those hold icons become variable icons, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but the WUFO effect In some cases, it may be possible to generate another pending effect such as (.)). However, the hold icon (changing icon) may be the target in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect and has become a certain mode.

Targeted ... When a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example) has been changed from the appearance to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). In this example, although a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed for the black circle hold icon), the hold icon having the certain aspect is better. When the hold icon becomes a variable icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect for the variable icon (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z). ')) However, there are cases where another pending effect such as a WUFO effect may occur.) May be configured so that it can be easily performed. However, there are cases where a hold effect targeting the hold icon (changing icon) is performed in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is digested. There may be.

It is easy to succeed in the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example) has been changed from the appearance to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). In this example, although a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed for the black circle hold icon), the hold icon having the certain aspect is better. When the hold icon becomes a variable icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect for the variable icon (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z). ')) However, it may be possible to generate another hold effect such as WUFO effect) (the hold mode may change to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button press change hold icon, etc.) It may be configured to facilitate success). However, there are cases where the hold effect for the hold icon (changing icon) succeeds in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is digested. There may be.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, the symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird effect in this example). A certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) was performed for the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect from the appearance rather than the display. Despite this, the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect is digested and started is a certain effect (in this example, the normal reach effect FIG. 173 (a')), but it is more than the normal reach. In some cases, a super reach with high jackpot reliability may occur, a certain notice display may occur, or a pseudo-continuous production may occur. ) Is likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, there may be a case where a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon which has changed as a result of the hold effect.

Targeted ... A certain effect is likely to occur due to the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display.
As illustrated, the hold icon (this is a hold icon) that has a certain aspect since its appearance rather than the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has changed due to the hold effect (successful effect by B bird in this example). In the example, even though a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed for the black circle hold icon), the hold icon having the certain aspect is those. When the hold icon becomes a variable icon, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect for the variable icon (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z') )) However, if another pending effect such as a WUFO effect is performed or succeeds, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but a normal reach It may be possible to generate a super reach having a higher reliability than the jackpot, a certain advance notice display, a pseudo continuous effect, etc.)) may be likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, there are cases where a certain effect is not performed even if the hold effect is performed again in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the hold effect is digested and started. May be good.

(Example 33)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 33rd embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (P). FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (P) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 174, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 174 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 174 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 174 (B), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a black circle hold icon.

FIG. 174 (C) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the W bird k1 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the W bird k1 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 174 (D) shows a state in which the W bird effect is being performed. An animation of the W bird k1 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

In FIG. 174 (E), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird production, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the W bird k1 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, and then the W bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The W bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 174 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 174 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains the black circle hold icon. The W bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 174 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 174 (H), the W bird k1 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

In FIG. 174 (I), after the W bird k1 is erased and the W bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 174 (J) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 174 (K) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 174 (L), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the hold icon b2, which is the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 174 (M) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 174 (N) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area.

In FIG. 174 (O), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 174 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the hold effect that targets the black circle hold icon that is the target of the hold effect (W bird) and does not change due to the failure of the hold effect is not performed in the next variation, and corresponds to the hold icon. This is an example in which the symbol variation display that starts after the hold is exhausted and the symbol mode is finally displayed.

Change effects are likely to occur with the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold that is different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) in a certain aspect. Appeared from the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation in which a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) for a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. The symbol variation display next to the display may be configured so that the hold effect, the same hold effect (B bird effect in this example), or another hold effect is more likely to be performed. However, even if the other hold effect is performed in the previous symbol change display, the hold effect may be performed in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold that is different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) in a certain aspect. From the appearance of the next symbol variation display (from FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured so that a certain hold effect (B bird effect in this example) is more likely to be performed. However, the other hold effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display. However, there may be a case where the certain hold effect is performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be the target of change production in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting the hold icon in a certain aspect (black circle hold icon in this example). From the appearance of the next symbol variation display (from FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured so that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. However, another hold effect may be displayed in the previous symbol variation display. Even if it is performed, it may be subject to a hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display.

It is easy to be the target of a certain change effect in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting the hold icon in a certain aspect (black circle hold icon in this example). From the appearance of the next symbol variation display (from FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display may be configured so that the hold icon is more likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (for example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that became the failure effect). Even if the other holding effect is performed on the display, it may be the target of a certain holding effect in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

When the next fluctuation becomes the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting the hold icon in a certain aspect (black circle hold icon in this example). From the appearance of the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. The next symbol variation display is more likely to be the target of the hold icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect, and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode is a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button). It may be configured so that the hold effect is easy to succeed (successful change to the press change hold icon or the like). However, even if the other hold effect is performed in the previous symbol change display, it may be the target of the hold effect in the next symbol change display of the symbol change display and succeed.

When the next variation becomes the target of a certain change effect, the certain change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold that is different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) in a certain aspect. From the appearance of the next symbol variation display (from FIGS. 174 (K) to (S)) after the symbol variation display (FIGS. 174 (A) to (J)) in which the effect (in this example, the failure effect by the W bird effect) was performed. A symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect is performed. In the next symbol variation display, the hold icon is more likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (B bird effect in the examples so far), and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode is more reliable look-ahead notice). It may be configured so that the hold effect is easy to succeed (successfully changed to the mode or button press change hold icon, etc.), but the other hold effect is performed in the previous symbol variation display. However, there may be a case where the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display is the target of a certain hold effect and succeeds.

It is easy to make a big hit with the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, there is a certain hold effect that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has a certain aspect from the appearance is targeted rather than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). A symbol variation in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect is digested and started even though a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) has been performed. The display may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed more easily. However, even if the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that does not change as a result of the other hold effect. Good.

It is easy to make a big hit when a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain hold effect for a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold corresponding to (black circle hold icon in this example) was digested. (For example, there is a symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h) is performed). (In this example, the normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but there are cases where a super reach with higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo-continuous effect occurs, and so on. ) Occurs, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily stopped or stopped. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that does not change as a result of the other hold effect, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may be displayed as stopped.

It is easy to make a big hit when a change effect occurs in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (for example, a hold icon that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect by W bird) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). In this example, a hold effect (black circle hold icon in this example) is targeted for a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the black circle hold icon is exhausted. For example, the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h) is performed is the hold effect or the hold effect. The same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur. When) occurs, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily stopped and displayed in the end. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that does not change as a result of the other hold effect, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped. It may be displayed.

Change effects are likely to occur in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A hold for a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has taken the form from its appearance rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold corresponding to the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) was digested. The symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173) has been performed is better. A hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur. It may be configured so that (may be good) is likely to occur. However, there may be a case where the hold effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect without changing as a result of the other hold effect.

In the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, it did not change due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). From the appearance of the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example), a certain hold effect (for example, FIG. 173 (c) to Despite the fact that the B bird effect of (h) has been performed, when the hold icon in the certain aspect becomes a variable icon, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect ( In this example, the same hold effect B bird effect (FIGS. 174 (u') to (z')) is likely to be the target of another hold effect such as WUFO effect. It may be configured in. However, the hold icon (changing icon) may be the target in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain mode is digested as a result of the other hold effect. May be good.

Targeted ... When a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display, the changing icon tends to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, an aspect that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect by W bird) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)). A certain hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). ) B bird effect) is performed, but when the hold icon in a certain aspect becomes a variable icon, the hold effect targeting the variable icon or the same hold effect or the same hold icon Another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as WUFO may occur) is performed. It may be configured to be easily damaged. However, as a result of the other hold effect, the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon in a certain mode is digested and started, and the hold effect for the hold icon (changing icon) is performed. It may be said.

It is easy to succeed in the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain hold effect (for example, B bird of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from its appearance rather than (black circle hold icon in this example). When the hold icon in a certain aspect becomes a variable icon even though the effect) has been performed, the hold icon for the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (In this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as the WUFO effect may occur.) Success (hold) The mode may be configured so that a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, a successful change to a button press change hold icon, or the like) can be easily performed. However, as a result of the other hold effect, the hold effect targeting the hold icon (changing icon) is successful in the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested without changing. May be done.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, there is a certain hold effect that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect due to the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has a certain aspect from the appearance is targeted rather than the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). Although a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) was performed, the hold corresponding to the hold icon in the certain aspect was digested and started. The display is a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (I'), but it is also possible to generate a super reach with higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach, a certain notice display, a pseudo continuous effect, etc. It may be good) is likely to occur or may be configured to occur, but the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started without changing as a result of the other hold effect. A certain effect may be performed in the symbol variation display to be performed.

In the symbol variation display corresponding to the target hold icon, a change effect of the changing icon occurs, and a certain effect is likely to occur.
As illustrated, a hold icon (for example, a hold icon that has not changed due to a hold effect (in this example, a failure effect by W bird) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). In this example, a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has taken a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the black circle hold icon). ) Is performed, but when the hold icon in a certain aspect becomes a variable icon, the hold effect targeting the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect () In this example, the same hold effect B bird effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z'), but another hold effect such as WUFO effect may occur) is performed or succeeds. Then, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but a super reach with a higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach may occur, a certain notice display may occur, or a pseudo continuous effect may occur. ) Is likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, when the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon in a certain mode is digested and started as a result of the other hold effect without changing, even if the hold effect is performed again, a certain effect is not performed. There may be.

(Example 34)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 34th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (p). FIGS. 175 (a) to 175 (p) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 175, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 175 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 175 (a), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 175 (b), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a white circle hold icon.

FIG. 175 (c) shows a state in which the W bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which the W bird k1 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the W bird k1 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of W Bird k1 is the start of W Bird production. The W bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 175 (d) shows a state in which the W bird effect is being performed. An animation of the W bird k1 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire W bird k1 is displayed.

In FIG. 175 (e), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird production, the variation display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the W bird k1 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the W bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The W bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and an animation of a scene in which a laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 175 (f) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the W bird k1 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 175 (g) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 has changed from a white circle hold icon to a black circle hold icon. The W bird effect of this example is a successful effect in which the target hold icon changes.

FIG. 175 (h) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 175 (h), the W bird k1 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the W bird effect.

In FIG. 175 (i), after the W bird k1 is erased and the W bird effect is completed, “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 175 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 175 (k) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 175 (l), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the hold icon b2, which is the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 175 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 175 (n) shows a state in which the earliest reservation of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area.

In FIG. 175 (o), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the black circle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 175 (p) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

In this embodiment, the hold effect (W bird) is applied, and the black circle hold icon is changed to the next change due to the success of the hold effect. The hold effect is not performed, and the hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started. This is an example in which the missing symbol mode is finally displayed in the symbol variation display.

Change effects are likely to occur with the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, it is different from a certain hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon in a certain aspect (black circle hold icon in this example). The hold icon in a certain mode from the appearance of the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which the hold effect (in this example, the success effect by the W bird effect) was performed. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed is better. It may be configured so that the hold effect, the same hold effect (B bird effect in this example), or another hold effect can be easily performed again. However, even if the other hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol change display, the hold effect may be performed in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, what is a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that succeeds in changing to a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect? Hold in a certain mode from the appearance rather than the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which another hold effect (successful effect by W bird effect in this example) is performed. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed. It may be configured so that a certain hold effect (B bird effect in this example) is more likely to be performed. However, even if the hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, the certain hold effect may be performed in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

It is easy to be the target of change production in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, what is a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect? Hold in a certain mode from the appearance rather than the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which another hold effect (successful effect by W bird effect in this example) is performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed is better. The hold icon may be configured so as to be easily targeted by the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect. However, even if the other hold effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol change display, it may be subject to the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect in the next symbol change display, etc. of the symbol change display. There may be.

It is easy to be the target of a certain change effect in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, what is a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that succeeded in changing to a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect? Hold in a certain mode from the appearance rather than the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which another hold effect (successful effect by W bird effect in this example) is performed. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a failure effect of a certain hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed. May be configured so that the hold icon is likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (for example, the same hold effect as the hold effect that became the failure effect). However, even if the other pending effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, it may be the target of a certain pending effect in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display.

When the next fluctuation becomes the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, what is a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that has succeeded in changing to a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect? Hold in a certain mode from the appearance rather than the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which another hold effect (successful effect by W bird effect in this example) is performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed is better. The hold icon is likely to be the target of the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect, and the hold effect is successful (the hold mode changes to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, button press change hold icon, etc.) The hold effect, which is likely to be successful), may be configured to be easy to succeed. However, even if the other pending effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, it may be the target of the pending effect in the next symbol variation display or the like of the symbol variation display and succeed.

When the next variation becomes the target of a certain change effect, the certain change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, what is a certain hold effect (for example, B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) that has succeeded in changing to a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect? Hold in a certain mode from the appearance rather than the next symbol variation display (FIGS. 175 (k) to (s)) of the symbol variation display in which another hold effect (successful effect by W bird effect in this example) is performed. The symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the failure effect of the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) for the icon (black circle hold icon in this example) is performed is better. The hold icon is likely to be the target of a certain hold effect (B bird effect in the examples so far), and the success of the hold effect (the hold mode is a more reliable look-ahead notice mode, button press change hold icon, etc.) It may be configured so that the hold effect is likely to be successful. However, even if the other pending effect (success) is performed in the previous symbol variation display, it may be the target of a certain pending effect in the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display and succeed.

It is easy to make a big hit with the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a mode changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) was targeted rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold was digested. A symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173) has been performed. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be stopped and displayed in the end. However, even if the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped and displayed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect and has become a certain mode. Good.

It is easy to make a big hit when a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, it has a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by W bird) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has taken the form from the appearance rather than the symbol variation display that was started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). The symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed is better. A certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but there are cases where a super reach with a higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo continuous effect occurs, and the like. When) occurs, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily stopped or stopped. However, even if a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect and has become a certain mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed. It may be displayed as stopped.

It is easy to make a big hit when a change effect occurs in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a mode changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) was targeted rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold was digested. A symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173) has been performed. Is a hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but as the occurrence of another hold effect such as a WUFO effect, etc. In some cases), the jackpot symbol mode may be configured to be easily stopped and displayed in the end. However, even if the hold effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect and has become a certain mode, the jackpot symbol mode is finally stopped. It may be displayed.

Change effects are likely to occur in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, it has a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by W bird) different from a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has been in that aspect since its appearance rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) was digested. A symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173) has been performed. Is a hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example, the same hold effect B bird (FIGS. 175 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur. In some cases), it may be configured so that it is likely to occur. However, there may be a case where the hold effect is not performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect.

In the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, an aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). When the hold icon in a certain aspect becomes a variable icon even though the B bird effect is performed, the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (in this example). Even if it is configured to be easily targeted by the same hold effect B bird (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z'), but another hold effect such as WUFO may occur). Good. However, the hold icon (changing icon) may be the target in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect is digested and started. May be good.

When a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, an aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from the appearance rather than the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). B bird) is performed, but when the hold icon in a certain aspect becomes a variable icon, the hold effect targeting the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another A hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur) is performed. It may be configured for ease of use. However, in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect and has become a certain mode, the hold effect targeting the hold icon (changing icon) is performed. It may be said.

It is easy to succeed in the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, it has a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a certain hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A hold effect (for example, FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) having a certain aspect from its appearance rather than a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example). When the hold icon in a certain mode becomes a variable icon even though the B bird effect) has been performed, the hold icon for the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another Success (holding) of the hold effect (in this example, the B bird effect of the same hold effect (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z'), but another hold effect such as WUFO may occur)) The mode may be configured so that a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or a successful change to a button press change hold icon or the like) can be easily performed, but a certain mode is changed as a result of the other hold effect. In the symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has become is digested, the hold effect targeting the hold icon (changing icon) may succeed.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, an embodiment changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by the W bird effect) different from a hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). The hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) was targeted rather than the symbol variation display that was started after the hold was digested. A symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon in a certain aspect is digested and started even though the hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to 173) has been performed. There is a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but it may be a super reach with a higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach, a certain notice display, a pseudo-continuous effect, etc. In some cases) is likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, there may be a case where a certain effect is performed in the symbol variation display that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has changed to a certain mode as a result of the other hold effect.

In the symbol variation display corresponding to the target hold icon, a change effect of the changing icon occurs, and a certain effect is likely to occur.
As illustrated, a hold with a certain aspect changed by a hold effect (in this example, a success effect by W bird) different from a hold effect (for example, B bird in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)). A certain hold effect (for example, B of FIGS. 173 (c) to 173 (h)) targeting a hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has taken a certain aspect from its appearance rather than an icon (black circle hold icon in this example). When the hold icon in a certain mode becomes a variable icon even though the bird) is performed, the hold effect targeting the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (In this example, the same hold effect B bird (FIGS. 173 (u') to (z')), but another hold effect such as a WUFO effect may occur.) If or succeeds. A certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a')), but there are cases where a super reach with higher jackpot reliability than the normal reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, a pseudo continuous effect occurs, and the like. Yes) is likely to occur or may be configured to occur. However, when the hold effect corresponding to the hold icon that has changed as a result of the other hold effect and has become a certain mode is digested and started, even if the hold effect is performed again, a certain effect is not performed. There may be.

(Example 35)
The pachinko machine 100 according to the 35th embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (P). FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (P) show examples of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order. In each figure of FIG. 175, the main liquid crystal unit 1001 and the decorative symbol display device 208 are extracted from the game board 1000 shown in FIG. 29.

FIG. 175 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the state at the time shown in FIG. 175 (A), the number of holdings of special figure 1 is 1, and the number of holdings of special drawing 2 is 0. The hold icon b1 is displayed in the hold 1 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b1 is a white circle hold icon. In the changing icon display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the changing icon a1 of the display mode of the white circle hold icon is displayed. The changing icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon.

In FIG. 175 (B), one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the special figure 1 variable game, the number of reservations in special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the number of reservations in special figure 1 is 2. It shows the state of becoming. The hold icon b2 is displayed in the hold 2 display area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area in the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The hold icon b2 is a triangular hold icon.

FIG. 175 (C) shows a state in which the B bird effect of the hold effect has been started. An animation in which B bird k2 appears is displayed from the lower right end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode in which the B bird k2 appears is the "mode α" shown in FIG. 149. The appearance of B Bird k2 is the start of B Bird production. The B bird effect of this example is an effect targeting the hold icon b2.

FIG. 175 (D) shows a state in which the B bird effect is being performed. An animation of the B bird k1 moving to the left is displayed, and the entire B bird k2 is displayed.

In FIG. 175 (E), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced to the upper right corner of the display screen during the W bird effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is reduced, and the B bird k2 soars to the center of the display screen. Is displayed, the b-bird effect has progressed from "aspect α" to "aspect β" shown in FIG. 149. The B bird effect of this example targets the hold icon b2, and the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is displayed on the hold icon b2 which is the target.

FIG. 175 (F) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is displayed overlapping with the hold icon b2. When the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is emitted from the eyes of the B bird k2 is completed, the effect image k8 is displayed. The effect image k8 may be started to be displayed while the animation of the scene in which the laser beam is irradiated from the eyes of the B bird k2 is being displayed. Since the effect image k8 overlaps the entire hold icon b2, the entire hold icon b2 becomes invisible. The effect image k8 of this example is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon b1 and the changing icon a1 that are not the targets of the hold effect. The effect image k8 may be displayed without overlapping with a part of the changing icon and the holding icon that are not the targets of the holding effect.

FIG. 175 (G) shows a state in which the effect image k8 is erased. Since the effect image k8 has been deleted, the hold icon b2 is displayed again visibly. The hold icon b2 remains a triangular hold icon. The B bird effect of this example is a failure effect in which the target hold icon does not change.

FIG. 175 (H) shows a state in which the reduced display of the variable display of the decorative symbol is completed. In FIG. 175 (H), the B bird k2 is erased in a manner of returning to the aspect α and disappearing above the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is in a state immediately before the end of the B bird effect.

In FIG. 175 (I), after the B bird k2 is erased and the B bird effect is completed, "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed.

FIG. 175 (J) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a1 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 175 (K) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is exhausted and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement animation between the hold / variable icons and A hold reduction animation is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b1 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a2 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area. The changing icon a2 is displayed in a display size larger than that of the hold icon. In the hold reduction animation, the hold icon b2 is moved and displayed in the hold 1 display area.

In FIG. 175 (L), “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then “decoration 2” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. In this example, the hold effect for the hold icon b2, which is the triangle hold icon, is not performed.

FIG. 175 (M) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed after the “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The result of the hit / miss judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the out-of-order symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 2" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is out of order. Further, the changing icon a2 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 2-Decoration 2".

FIG. 175 (N) shows a state in which the hold of the earliest special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movement animation between the hold / variable icons is performed in the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon b2 corresponding to the digested hold becomes the changing icon a3 and is moved and displayed in the changing icon display area.

In FIG. 175 (O), "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 3" is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c without the hold effect being performed during the special figure 1 variable game. Indicates the state in which the temporary stop is displayed. "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, in FIG. 175 (O), when the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach, the normal reach effect display is started. In addition, in FIG. 175 (O), the super reach effect display may be started instead of the normal reach effect display after the variable display of the decorative symbol reaches the reach. Further, in this example, the holding effect for the changing icon a3, which is the display mode of the triangular holding icon, is not performed.

FIG. 175 (P) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of the hit / fail judgment related to the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the jackpot symbol mode "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (confirmed display, main stop display), and the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display is correct or not is displayed. It has been notified that it is a big hit. Further, the changing icon a3 is erased prior to the stop display of "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3". It may be deleted while the changing icon decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the triangular hold icon that is the target of the change effect and does not change is compared with the black circle hold icon that is the target of the change effect and does not change, and the black circle hold icon that is the target of the change effect and does not change is the one. It is easy to be the target of the change effect again due to the next change, etc., it is easy to be the target of the change effect again in the symbol change display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon is exhausted, or it is the target of the change effect again. Change production is easy to succeed.

Change effects are likely to occur with the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change a hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. A hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different aspect from the next symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) after the symbol variation display in which the B bird effect is performed is used in another aspect. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that failed to be changed to is performed again is the hold effect or the same hold effect. (For example, B bird effect) or another hold effect may be easily performed. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect that failed to change the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect was performed. There may be a case where the hold effect, the same hold effect (for example, B bird effect), or another hold effect is performed again on the display.

A certain change effect is likely to occur in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change a hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. The hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different aspect from the symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) following the symbol change display in which the B bird effect is performed is changed to another mode. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect of FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that failed to be changed is performed is a certain hold effect (in this example,). It may be configured so that the B bird effect) can be easily performed. However, it fails to change the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect. There may be a case where the certain hold effect is performed in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display in which the certain hold effect is performed.

It is easy to be the target of change production with the next fluctuation,
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change the hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. The hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different mode from the symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) following the symbol change display in which B bird) is performed is changed to another mode. In the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) that failed to be caused is performed, the hold icon is the hold effect or the same hold. It may be configured so as to be easily targeted by an effect or another hold effect, but the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) having the certain aspect in the previous symbol variation display is changed to another aspect. In the next symbol variation display or the like in which a certain hold effect that fails is performed, the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another hold effect may be the target.

It is easy to be the target of a certain change effect in the next fluctuation.
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change the hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. The hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different aspect from the symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) following the symbol change display in which the B bird effect is performed is changed to another mode. The next symbol variation display after the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect that failed to be changed (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed has a hold icon. (For example, it may be configured so as to be easily targeted by the hold effect that is the same as the hold effect that became the failure effect). ) May be the target of a certain hold effect in the next symbol change display or the like of the symbol change display in which a certain hold effect is performed that fails to change to another mode.

When the next fluctuation becomes the target of the change effect, the change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change a hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. To change the hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different mode from the next symbol change display (k) to (m) of the symbol change display on which B bird) is performed to another mode. In the next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a certain pending effect that failed (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed, the hold icon is the hold effect, the same hold effect, or another. The hold effect is likely to be the target of the hold effect, and the hold effect is likely to be successful (the hold mode succeeds in changing to a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or a button press change hold icon, etc.). It may be configured for ease of use. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect that failed to change the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect was performed. In some cases, the display or the like may be the target of the hold effect and succeed.

When the next variation becomes the target of a certain change effect, the certain change effect is likely to succeed.
As illustrated, a hold effect (in this example, FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H)) that fails to change the hold icon in one aspect (triangular hold icon in this example) to another. A hold icon (for example, the black circle hold icon in FIG. 173) having a different aspect from the next symbol change display (FIGS. 175 (K) to (M)) after the symbol variation display in which B bird) is performed is changed to another aspect. The next symbol variation display of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect that failed to be changed (for example, the B bird effect in FIGS. 173 (c) to (h)) is performed has a hold icon. (In the examples so far, it is easy to be the target of the B bird effect), and the success of the hold effect (successful change to the more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button press change hold icon etc.) is performed. Easy The hold effect may be configured to be easy to succeed. However, the next symbol variation of the symbol variation display in which a certain hold effect that failed to change the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in the previous symbol variation display to another aspect was performed. In some cases, the display or the like may be the target of a certain pending effect and succeed.

Change effects are likely to occur in the symbol variation display that starts with the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon (triangle in this example) that fails to change to another mode by a hold effect (B bird in FIGS. 175 (C)-(H) in this example). The hold corresponding to the hold icon) is changed to a different mode by a certain hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) than the symbol variation display started after being digested. The symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has failed in a certain aspect is the hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (same hold effect B). Bird FIGS. 173 (u') to (z') correspond to an example, but there may be cases where another pending effect such as a WUFO effect is generated.)) May be easily generated. .. However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started, the hold effect is It may be done.

In the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon is likely to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, a hold icon in a certain aspect that failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) (in this example). A hold icon (in this example, a hold icon) that fails to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect of FIGS. 175 (C) to (H) in this example) rather than a triangle hold icon). The black circle hold icon) corresponds to a hold effect or the same hold effect or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird FIGS. 173 (u') to (z') when those hold icons become variable icons. However, it may be configured so that it is likely to be the target of another pending effect such as a WUFO effect.). However, the hold icon is displayed in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started. (Fluctuating icon) may be the target.

When a certain effect is performed on the symbol variation display corresponding to the target hold icon, the changing icon tends to be the target of the change effect.
As illustrated, a hold icon in a certain aspect that failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) (in this example). A hold icon (in this example, a hold icon) that fails to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect of FIGS. 175 (C) to (H) in this example) rather than a triangle hold icon). When those hold icons become variable icons, the black circle hold icon) is the hold effect for the variable icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (hold effect B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u')- (Z')) corresponds to an example, but it may be configured so that another pending effect such as a WUFO effect may occur.)) Is easily performed. However, the hold icon is displayed in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started. A hold effect targeting (changing icon) may be performed.

It is easy to succeed in the change effect of the changing icon in the symbol change display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon in a certain aspect that failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) (in this example). A hold icon (black circle in this example) that has failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) rather than a triangle hold icon). When those hold icons become variable icons, the hold icon) is the hold effect for the variable icon, the same hold effect, or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird (FIG. 173 (u') to (Fig. 173 (u') to ( Although z')) corresponds to an example, it may be possible to generate another hold effect such as a WUFO effect) (the hold mode is a more reliable look-ahead notice mode or button press change hold). It may be configured so that the change to an icon or the like is successful). However, the hold icon is displayed in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started. The hold effect for (changing icon) may be successful.

A certain effect is likely to occur in the symbol variation display started by the hold digestion corresponding to the target hold icon.
As illustrated, a hold icon in a certain aspect that failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C)-(H) in this example) (in this example). The hold corresponding to the triangle hold icon) is changed to another mode by a certain hold effect (B bird in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) rather than the symbol variation display started after being digested. An example of a certain effect (normal reach effect (Fig. 173 (a'))) is a symbol variation display that is started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon (black circle hold icon in this example) that has failed in a certain aspect is digested. However, there are cases where super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than normal reach, occurrence of a certain notice display, occurrence of pseudo-continuous production, etc.) is likely to occur or is configured to occur. You may be. However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started. May be done.

In the symbol variation display corresponding to the target hold icon, a change effect of the changing icon occurs, and a certain effect is likely to occur.
As illustrated, a hold icon in a certain aspect that failed to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect in FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) (in this example). A hold icon (in this example, a hold icon) that fails to be changed to another mode by a hold effect (B bird effect of FIGS. 175 (C) to 175 (H) in this example) rather than a triangle hold icon). When those hold icons become variable icons, the black circle hold icon) is the hold effect for the variable icon or the same hold effect or another hold effect (same hold effect B bird effect (FIG. 173 (u')). ~ (Z')) corresponds to an example, but if another pending effect such as a WUFO effect is generated or succeeds, a certain effect (in this example, a normal reach effect (a)) is performed. ') However, there are cases where super reach with higher jackpot reliability than normal reach occurs, a certain notice display occurs, pseudo-continuous production occurs, etc.)) is likely to occur or is configured to occur. You may. However, in the symbol variation display in which the hold corresponding to the hold icon (triangular hold icon in this example) in a certain mode that fails to be changed to another mode by the certain hold effect is digested and started, the hold effect is performed again. May not be performed even if is performed.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the game console according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 149 to 175.

(U1)
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c) capable of executing variable display of symbols, and
An image display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a number of hold icons according to the number of holds, and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means includes a plurality of types of the hold icons (for example, the white circle hold icon, the black circle hold icon, the button hold icon, the triangle hold icon, the face hold icon, and the haniwa hold icon shown in FIG. 104). Hereinafter, it is configured to be able to display "multiple types of hold icons").
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon (for example, a black circle hold icon) (hereinafter, referred to as “second hold icon”) having the second aspect.
The hold icon of one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third aspect (for example, a triangle hold icon, a face hold icon, or a haniwa hold icon) (hereinafter, “third hold icon””. ) And
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
In the image display means, a hold effect (for example, W bird effect, B bird effect, buttoned B bird effect, or W bomber shown in FIG. 149) in which the change in the mode of the hold icon is either successful or unsuccessful. Production, B bomber production, WUFO production, BUFO production) may be performed,
In the image display means, any one of a plurality of types of the above-mentioned hold effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of hold effect") may be performed.
One of the plurality of types of hold effects is the first hold effect (for example, the W bird effect and the W bomber effect shown in FIG. 149).
When the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon.
Even if the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The first hold effect is more than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The variable display of the symbol that is the target of the above and does not change to another type of hold icon and is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that.

The first, rather than the variable display of the symbol, which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The variable display of the symbol that is the target of the hold effect and does not change to another type of hold icon and is started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested is the final display of the jackpot symbol mode. It is configured to be easy to do.
The first, rather than the variable display of the symbol, which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect and has displayed the second hold icon even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is digested and started. The variable display of the symbol is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
One or more times than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is digested and started. The variable display of the symbol is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
At least, rather than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not the target of the first hold effect, it is the target of the first hold effect and other types. The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has not changed to the hold icon is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed.
The first, rather than the variable display of the symbol, which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The variable display of the symbol that is the target of the hold effect and does not change to another type of hold icon and is started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is digested is the final display of the jackpot symbol mode. It is configured to be easy to do.
The first, rather than the variable display of the symbol, which is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect and has displayed the second hold icon even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is digested and started. The variable display of the symbol is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
One or more times than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times is digested and started. The variable display of the symbol is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily.
It is configured to increase the number of holds when a game ball enters the starting port.
It is configured to introduce a new hold icon in response to the increase in the number of holds.
In response to the increase in the number of holds, the second hold icon may be newly introduced.

(U1')
A symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c) capable of executing variable display of symbols, and
A displayable image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) capable of notifying the number of holds, and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of the hold icons").
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second hold icon”).
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “production hold icon”).
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
In the image display means, a hold effect may be performed in which the change in the mode of the hold icon is either successful or unsuccessful.
In the image display means, any one of a plurality of types of the above-mentioned hold effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of hold effect") may be performed.
The hold effect of one of the plurality of types of hold effects is the first hold effect.
When the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon.
Even if the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The second hold icon, which is not the target of any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon (hold icon b3 shown in FIGS. 160 to 167) that has not changed to another type of hold icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect. ing,
A game table characterized by that.

The second hold icon is, for example, a black circle hold icon, but the second hold icon may be a white circle hold icon or another hold icon shown in FIG. 104.

(U2)
The game console described in (U1) above.
The second hold icon, which is not the target of any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon, which has not changed to another type of hold icon, is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
A game table characterized by that.

The probability that the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect, is higher than the probability that the first hold effect is targeted. The second hold icon, which has been targeted and has not changed to another type of hold icon, is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
The probability that the second hold icon, which has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect, is higher than the probability that the first hold effect is targeted. The probability that the hold icon that has been the target and the second hold icon has been displayed even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is the target of the first hold effect. It is configured to be higher.
The first one or more times than the probability that the second hold icon, which has never been the target of any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect. The probability that the second hold icon, which is the target of the hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times, is the target of the first hold effect. It is configured to be higher.
At least the probability that the second hold icon that is not the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect is higher than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect and is a hold icon of another type. The second hold icon that has not changed is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
At least the probability that the second hold icon that has never been the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect is higher than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect and other types of hold. The second hold icon that has not changed to an icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
At least the probability that the second hold icon that has never been the target of the first hold effect is the target of the first hold effect is higher than the probability that the second hold icon is the target of the first hold effect and other types of hold. The hold icon, which has been displayed even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to an icon, is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect. ing.
The second hold icon, which has never been the target of the first hold effect, becomes the target of the first hold effect one or more times than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. It is configured so that the probability that the second hold icon that has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times becomes the target of the first hold effect is higher. ing.

(U3)
The game console according to (U1) or (U2) above.
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having the first aspect (for example, a white circle hold icon) (hereinafter, referred to as “first hold icon”).
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The first aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
The first aspect is a default aspect.
The first hold icon is the default hold icon.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the first hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the first hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(U4)
The game console described in (U3) above.
The image display means is configured to be able to display a changing icon as a hold icon.
When the hold is reduced, the hold icon that appeared most recently is configured to be displayed as the changing icon.
The changing icon is configured to be erased at least before the hold reduction (for example, during the shaking fluctuation display of the decorative symbol).
A game table characterized by that.

(U5)
The game console according to (U3) or (U4) above.
One of the plurality of types of hold effects is a second hold effect (for example, a B bird effect, a B bird effect with a button, or a B bomber effect shown in 149).
The first hold effect and the second hold effect are different hold effects.
When the second hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon.
Even if the second hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
The hold icon is the first hold, rather than the probability that the second hold icon, which is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon, is the target of the second hold effect. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of the production is higher,
A game table characterized by that.

(U6)
The game console described in (U5) above.
The probability that the first hold effect (for example, W bird effect or W bomber effect) is performed on the second hold icon and the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon is higher than the probability. The probability that the second hold effect (for example, B bird effect or B bomber effect) is performed on the second hold icon and the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon is higher. It is configured to be high,
A game table characterized by that.

(U7)
The game console according to (U5) or (U6) above.
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter, referred to as "second changing icon") in the second mode (for example, a display mode of a black circle holding icon).
The image display means is a changing icon (hereinafter, "third variation") in the third mode (for example, a display mode of a triangular hold icon, a display mode of a face hold icon, a display mode of a haniwa hold icon). "Medium icon") can be displayed,
One of the plurality of types of hold effects is a third hold effect (for example, the WUFO effect shown in FIG. 149).
The first hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects.
The second hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects.
When the third hold effect is performed on the second changing icon, the second changing icon may change to the third changing icon.
Even if the third hold effect is performed on the second changing icon, the second changing icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.

(U8)
The game console described in (U7) above.
The second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b3 shown in FIG. 160) that is the target of the first hold effect (for example, the B bird effect shown in FIG. 160) and has not changed to another type of hold icon changes. After becoming the middle icon (for example, the changing icon a4 shown in FIG. 160), the changing icon is the third holding effect (for example, WUFO effect) rather than the probability of being the target of the first holding effect. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of BUFO production) is higher,
A game table characterized by that.

(U8')
The game console described in (U7) above.
The first is more than the probability of being the target of the hold effect after the second hold icon, which is not the target of any of the plurality of types of hold effects, becomes the changing icon. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of the hold effect after the second hold icon that has been the target of the hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon becomes the changing icon is higher. ,
A game table characterized by that.

(U9)
The game console according to (U7) or (U8) above.
The symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b2 shown in FIG. 160) that was not the target of any of the hold effects of the plurality of types. The second hold icon (which is the target of the first hold effect and does not change to another type of hold icon, rather than the probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the display) For example, in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon b3) shown in FIG. 160 is digested, the probability that the third hold effect targeting the changing icon is performed is higher. It is configured,
A game table characterized by that.

In the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects, the changing icon is targeted. Rather than the probability that the third hold effect is performed, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon is digested and started. There is a higher probability that the third hold effect for the changing icon will be performed in the symbol variation display.
In the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects, the changing icon is targeted. The second hold icon is displayed even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon, which is the target of the first hold effect, rather than the probability that the third hold effect is performed. There is a higher probability that the third hold effect targeting the changing icon will be performed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been used has been digested.
In the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has never been targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects, the changing icon is targeted. It becomes the target of the first hold effect one or more times than the probability that the third hold effect is performed, and changes to another kind of hold icon in all of the first hold effects one or more times. There is a higher probability that the third hold effect targeting the changing icon will be performed in the symbol variation display started after the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not present is digested.

(U10)
The game console according to any one of (U7) to (U9) above.
The symbol variation started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon (for example, the hold icon b3 shown in FIG. 160) that was the target of the first hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon. It is configured so that the success is likely to occur when the third hold effect for the changing icon is performed in the display.
A game table characterized by that.

The hold corresponding to the hold icon that has been the target of the first hold effect and has displayed the second hold icon even once as a result of the hold effect without changing to another type of hold icon is exhausted. When the third hold effect targeting the changing icon is performed in the symbol variation display that has been started, the success is likely to occur.
One or more times The hold corresponding to the second hold icon that has been the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon in all of the first hold effect is exhausted. When the third hold effect targeting the changing icon is performed in the symbol variation display that has been started, the success is likely to occur.

(U11)
The game console according to any one of (U7) to (U10) above.
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first changing icon") in the first mode (for example, a display mode of a white circle hold icon).
The first changing icon is the default changing icon.
The variable display of the symbol on which the second changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the first changing icon is displayed and the other types of changing icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol on which the third changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the first changing icon is displayed and the other types of changing icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol on which the third changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the second changing icon is displayed and no other type of changing icon is displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

Equipped with an operating means provided at a position where the player can operate
In the hold effect, a display requesting the operation of the operation means is performed.
When the hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon in response to the operation of the operation means.
Even if the hold effect is performed for the second hold icon, the effect proceeds according to the operation of the operation means, but the second hold icon changes to another type of hold icon. It may not be.
When the hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon is deleted and one of the plurality of types of hold icons is displayed.

(U12)
The game console according to any one of (U1) to (U11) above.
A ball storage means (for example, lower plate 128) capable of storing game balls is provided.
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display (for example, plate full tank display k10) (hereinafter, referred to as "ball discharge display") prompting the discharge of game balls from the ball storage means.
It is configured so that at least one of the plurality of types of hold effects displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed may overlap with the ball discharge display.
A game table characterized by that.

The first hold effect may be a hold effect that succeeds or fails in changing the mode of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the first hold effect may be a hold effect in which the mode of the hold icon is changed to either success or failure for the hold icon excluding the changing icon. However, the first hold effect does not target the hold icons other than the changing icon, and may be a hold effect in which the change in the mode of the changing icon is either successful or unsuccessful among the hold icons.
The second hold effect may be a hold effect that succeeds or fails in changing the mode of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the second hold effect may be a hold effect in which the mode of the hold icon is changed to either success or failure for the hold icon excluding the changing icon. However, the second hold effect does not target the hold icons other than the changing icon, and may be a hold effect that succeeds or fails in changing the mode of the changing icon among the hold icons.
The third hold effect may be a hold effect that succeeds or fails in changing the mode of the hold icon for the hold icon including the changing icon. However, the third hold effect may be a hold effect in which the mode of the hold icon is changed to either success or failure for the hold icon excluding the changing icon. However, the third hold effect does not target the hold icons other than the changing icon, and may be a hold effect in which the change in the mode of the changing icon is either successful or unsuccessful among the hold icons.

"Holding" means "holding the start of the variable display of the symbol", and "digestion of the hold" corresponds to "starting the variable display of the reserved symbol". "Holding digestion" does not mean "erasing the changing icon".
The hold icon may notify the player that a hold has occurred due to the appearance, and may notify the player of the number of holds depending on the number.
Each time a game ball wins a prize at the start port, the hold information is stored, the variable display of the symbol is started using the hold information, and the hold information is deleted. Means that the variable display of the symbol is started by using the hold information and the hold information is deleted. Regarding which hold information is used and erased (that is, whether the hold is digested) when the next symbol variation display is started, the hold is digested in the order memorized according to the game ball winning to the starting port. It is common, but not limited to, the special figure 2 priority change in which the hold of the change start of special figure 2 is consumed before the change of the winning order or the hold of the change start of special figure 1. In many cases, the rules for digesting the reserved information in one special figure are to be digested from the old hold. Therefore, one hold icon that appeared at the time of the appearance of a hold approaches the hold 1 display area each time another older hold is digested, that is, each time the hold is about to be digested. When the previous hold is exhausted, a hold icon is displayed in the hold 1 display area, and when the previous hold is digested and the symbol variation display started is completed, a hold is digested and the corresponding hold icon is deleted. It is configured to be displayed or displayed in the hold 0 display area, that is, to be a changing icon. Here, the hold information is not limited to the information stored in the winning order in any of the plurality of hold storage units of the main control means, and is stored in any form as long as the information is acquired at the time of winning the start opening. For example, when the start opening is won, the information immediately before being stored in any of the plurality of reserved storage units of the main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) or the information retrieved after the storage is sub-controlled. It is transmitted to the means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400), used for the random number lottery before being transmitted to the information stored in the sub-control means or the sub-control means, and the result of the random number lottery is transmitted to the sub-control means. , May be stored in the sub-control means. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be a special figure 2 priority variable machine or a starting port winning order variable machine.

According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is labeled that the failure production of the hold production is a disadvantageous production for the player, and the player is awakened just by performing the production. It may be possible to reduce it. The big hit in the symbol variation display started when the hold icon that was the target of the hold effect was digested when the failure effect was performed than when neither the success effect nor the failure effect of the hold effect was performed. Easy to connect to. The hold icon that was the target of the success or failure effect of the hold effect is more likely to be the target of the hold effect again than the hold icon that was not the target of either the success effect or the failure effect of the hold effect. If the hold icon that was the target of the success or failure effect of the hold effect becomes a changing icon than the hold icon that was not the target of either the success effect or the failure effect of the hold effect, the hold effect Is easy to do.

[7th Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 to 183. Since the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has the same configuration and control system as the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the first embodiment is described above. The description of the configuration and the control system common to the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be omitted.

(Example 1)
An example of the production of the first embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 176. FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (h) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration common to the configurations shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to (h), (g'), and (h') and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment. Has the same operation and effect, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 176 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 176 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was wrong, is "decoration 2-. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 in the decorative frame f1 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display mode for notifying the deviation (in this example, "-"). The fourth symbol of the display mode) is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 in the decorative frame f1, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying that the result of the hit / fail determination of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1 is displayed. “0” indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0 is displayed. In the decorative frame f2 displayed at the bottom of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 of the default display mode displayed in a white circle is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950. Has been done. The sub-display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular image display area, and the entire image display area can be used as the effect display area 209a for displaying the effect display. In the state shown in FIG. 176 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at the initial position (first position), which is a position in front of the upper center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The sub-display device 209 is mounted on the effect movable body 225, and can perform a moving operation and a rotating operation in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions in a plane substantially parallel to the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

FIG. 176 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. When the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and the variable icons. The movement animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In FIG. 176 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icon is completed, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. On the sub-display device 209, a variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the figure, the downward arrow shown in the image display area of the sub-display device 209 indicates that the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 is executed during a part of the period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. It ends before the variable display of the decorative symbol in the areas 208a to 208c. The variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 may be started before the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or the left middle right symbol display area 208a to. It may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol at 208c.

In FIG. 176 (c), the sub-display device 209 moves linearly downward from the initial position and stops at a position (second position) in front of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. 1 It shows a state in which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are erased during the execution of the variable game, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208 is interrupted. In the figure, the downward arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. The sub-display device 209 is attached to the lower end of the support rod 225a arranged so as to extend in the vertical direction. The upper portion of the support rod 225a is attached to a drive mechanism for driving the sub display device 209 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the sub-display device 209 can be moved in the vertical direction by driving the support rod 225a in the vertical direction.

Even after the interruption of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 The variable display is continuously displayed. A character string image of "If you stop at 3, it's a big hit!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and to the right of the character string image is the palace. The character image h3 is displayed. When the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed as a notice of the change. In this example, while moving downward from the initial position of the sub display device 209, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the hall are displayed. The timing at which the sub-display device 209 starts to move downward, the timing at which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed are these. Not limited to. For example, after the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, the sub display device 209 may start moving downward, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the palace may be displayed, or the left. After the middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, the character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed, and then the sub display device 209 may start moving downward, or the character string image may be started. And, after the character image h3 of the palace is displayed, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be erased, and then the sub display device 209 may start moving downward. These timings can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 176 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the player side. The sub-display device 209 can perform rotation operations counterclockwise and clockwise with the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 as the center of rotation. At the time shown in FIG. 176 (d), the sub display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture in which the upper and lower ends of the sub display device 209 are parallel to the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 176 (c). Is. During the execution of the counterclockwise rotation operation of the sub-display device 209, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is viewed from the player side at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates clockwise. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

FIG. 176 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated 360 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture and stopped. In the present embodiment, the sub-display device 209 returns to the initial posture by performing a rotation operation of one rotation counterclockwise after moving from the initial position to the lower second position. The sub-display device 209 moves from the initial position to the lower second position, rotates counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotates clockwise by the same angle as the arbitrary angle. The sub-display device 209 may be rotated to return to the initial posture, or the sub-display device 209 may be rotated counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 ° after moving from the initial position to the lower second position. Later, it may be rotated clockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle, and then rotated counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture.

FIG. 176 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves upward in a straight line and returns to the initial position. In the figure, the upward arrow shown in the lower right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. In this embodiment, the sub-display device 209 moves from the initial position to the lower second position, then executes a rotation operation, then moves upward and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 176 (g) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is completed and the “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) on the sub display device 209. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is wrong, for example, "decoration 2" is displayed on the sub display device 209 as a decorative symbol other than "decoration 3".

After "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, the "decoration 2" is erased, and then the character string image of "If it stops at 3, it is a big hit!" Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. And the character image h3 of the palace is erased, and then the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted. The timing at which the "decoration 2" is erased and the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased may be the same, or the character image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased. The timing may come first. Further, after the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed, the "decoration 2" is erased, and then the "decoration 2" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed at "3". The character string image of "Big hit!" And the character image h3 of the palace may be deleted. The timing of erasing the "decoration 2" and the character image h3 of the character image and the palace may be the same, and the timing of erasing the character image and the character image h3 of the palace comes first. It may be. In addition, the timing at which the "decoration 2" is erased, the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased, and the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are resumed. The timing may be the same.

FIG. 176 (h) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order, the hit is notified to the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicating that the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of order. The symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 2-decoration 3" other than the symbol combination to be performed is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the deviation is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. It is displayed as stopped.

Next, an example of the effect when the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 (g') and 176 (h'). FIG. 176 (g') shows a state continuing from FIG. 176 (f) when the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit. FIG. 176 (g') shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is completed and the "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) on the sub display device 209. In this example, since the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub display device 209.

After "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the sub-display device 209, the "decoration 3" is erased, and then the variation display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. It will be resumed. The timing at which the "decoration 3" is erased and the timing at which the character image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased may be the same, or the character image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased. The timing may come first. Further, after the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed, the "decoration 3" is erased, and then the "decoration 3" displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The character string image of "Big hit!" And the character image h3 of the palace may be deleted. The timing of erasing the "decoration 3" and the character image h3 of the character image and the palace may be the same, and the timing of erasing the character image and the character image h3 of the palace comes first. It may be. The timing at which the "decoration 3" is erased, the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the hall are erased, and the variable display of the decorative symbols in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are resumed. The timing may be the same.

FIG. 176 (h') following FIG. 176 (g') shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit (big hit of "special figure A"), the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" indicating that there was a hit is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the display mode for notifying the big hit is in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. (In this example, the display mode of "◎") is stopped and displayed.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a sub-display device 209 including an image display (for example, a liquid crystal display device). The sub-display device 209 can perform an operation according to the first motion pattern. The first motion pattern in this embodiment moves downward from the initial position to the second position, then rotates 360 ° counterclockwise to return to the initial posture, and then moves upward. This is an exercise pattern that returns to the initial position. The rotational motion in the first motion pattern is not limited to this. For example. The first motion pattern rotates counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, then rotates clockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle, and then counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle. It may be a motion pattern that rotates clockwise and returns to the initial posture, or rotates counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then rotates clockwise by the arbitrary angle to perform the initial rotation. It may be a motion pattern that returns to the posture, or it may be rotated clockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, then rotated counterclockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle, and then the said. It may be a motion pattern that rotates clockwise by an arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture, rotates clockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle. It may rotate to return to the initial posture. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect can be executed by various operations by the image display means.

In this embodiment, in FIGS. 176 (a), (h), and (h'), the effect display and the like are not displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the entire display is displayed in white. In addition, in the state of FIGS. 176 (a), (h), and (h'), the sub-display device 209 is displayed on the sub-display device 209 as a result of the determination of whether or not the variable game of Special FIG. A character string image representing the model name of the machine 100, a character image according to the current game state or the current production mode as a result of the success / failure judgment of the special figure 1 variable game, and a character image appearing in the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. It may have been.

(Example 2)
An example of the production of the second embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 177. FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (m) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 177 (a) to 177 (a) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment have the same operation and effect. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 177 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 177 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was wrong, is "decoration 2-. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 in the decorative frame f1 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. There is. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 in the decorative frame f1, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying that the result of the hit / fail determination of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1 is displayed. “0” indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0 is displayed. The default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 in the decorative frame f2 displayed at the bottom of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In the state shown in FIG. 177 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at the initial position.

FIG. 177 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. When the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and the variable icons. The movement animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In FIG. 177 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icon is completed, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940. With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the sub-display device 209 moves linearly downward from the initial position and stops at the second position, and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 is displayed. There is. In the figure, the downward arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. The sub-display device 209 may start moving prior to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209, or the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 is started. The movement may be started at the same time, or the movement may be started after the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started. The variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 is executed during a part of the period during which the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In the present embodiment, the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started at the same time as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the left middle right symbol display. It ends before the variable display of the decorative symbols in the areas 208a to 208c.

In FIG. 177 (c), the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 are erased during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, and the decorative symbols in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased. Indicates that the fluctuation display of is interrupted. Even after the interruption of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 Is displayed continuously. A character string image of "If you stop at 3, it's a big hit!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and to the right of the character string image is the palace. The character image h3 is displayed. When the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub display device 209. The character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed as a notice of the change. In this example, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed. The timing at which the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased and the timing at which the character string image and the character image h3 of the palace are displayed may be the same, or the character string image and the palace may be displayed. The timing at which the character image h3 is displayed may come earlier.

FIG. 177 (d) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the player side. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (d), the sub-display device 209 is in a state of being rotated by about 30 ° (less than 30 °) counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 177 (c). During the counterclockwise rotation of the sub-display device 209, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub-display device 209, and the clock is viewed from the player side. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

FIG. 177 (e) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 is rotated by about 30 ° counterclockwise. The temporary stop display is a swaying fluctuation display in which any one of the decorative symbols "decoration 1" to "decoration 10" is slightly shaken up and down to be displayed. When the decorative symbol (“decoration 2” in this example) is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, and the operation of the sub display device 209 starts from the rotational operation. It is changed to the stop operation. The rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is stopped when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209.

FIG. 177 (f) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of the “decoration 2” has ended and the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 has been resumed. When the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is restarted, the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is restarted.

FIG. 177 (g) shows a state in which the rotation operation is restarted on the sub display device 209. In FIG. 177 (g), the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is restarted, and the sub display device 209 is rotating counterclockwise. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (g), the sub-display device 209 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. In this embodiment, the sub-display device 209 executes an operation of rotating 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture state and then rotating 60 ° clockwise.

FIG. 177 (h) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the player side. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 177 (h), the sub-display device 209 is in a state of being rotated by 60 ° clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 177 (g). During the clockwise rotation operation of the sub-display device 209, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is counterclockwise when viewed from the player side at the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

In this embodiment, the upper portion of the support rod 225a is attached to a drive mechanism for driving the sub display device 209 in the left-right direction. In this embodiment, by driving the support rod 225a in the vertical and horizontal directions, the sub display device 209 can be moved in the vertical and horizontal directions.

FIG. 177 (i) shows a state in which the support rod 225a to which the sub-display device 209 is attached is moving downward while moving to the right. By driving the support rod 225a, the sub display device 209 moves in a straight line diagonally downward to the right. In the figure, the combined direction of the right-pointing arrow shown above the sub-display device 209 and the downward arrow shown to the left of the sub-display device 209 is the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. During the diagonally lower right downward movement operation of the sub display device 209, the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub display device 209 is a moving image moving diagonally upward left at the same speed as the moving operation of the sub display device 209. Displayed by the image. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. The sub-display device 209 may be movable diagonally upward to the left, may be movable diagonally downward to the left, or may be movable diagonally upward to the right. Good. In this case, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is displayed by a moving image moving 180 ° opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the moving operation of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player.

FIG. 177 (j) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is completed and the “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) on the sub display device 209. In this example, since the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct or not is a big hit, "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub-display device 209. When the decorative symbol (“decoration 3” in this example) is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) on the sub-display device 209, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is satisfied, and the operation of the sub-display device 209 is performed. Is changed from the movement operation diagonally downward to the left to the stop operation. The movement operation of the sub-display device 209 is stopped when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the sub-display device 209.

After "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) on the sub display device 209, the "decoration 3" is erased, then the character string image of "If it stops at 3, it is a big hit!" Is erased, and then , The variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is restarted. It should be noted that the timing at which the "decoration 3" is erased, the timing at which the character string image is erased, and the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are resumed are simultaneous. It may be, either one may be ahead, or any two timings may be simultaneous.

In FIG. 177 (k), after the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is resumed, "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is provisionally displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It shows the state where the stop display (sway fluctuation display) is displayed. The character string image of "Big hit!" Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208. A part (a part below) of the "decoration 3" displayed in the right symbol display area 208c is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the character image h3 of the palace. The character string image of "Big hit!" May start displaying immediately after the character string image of "Stop at 3 is a big hit!", Or "Stop at 3 is a big hit!" The display may be started after the character string image is erased and a predetermined time has elapsed, or "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. It may be started, or it may be started at the same time that "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display area 208a to 208c, or the left middle right symbol display area may be started. The display may be started after "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed on 208a to 208c.

The stop operation of the sub display device 209 is continued during the period in which "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub display device 209, and after the "decoration 3" displayed on the sub display device 209 is erased, the sub display device The return operation to the initial position of 209 is started. The timing at which the "decoration 3" displayed on the sub-display device 209 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the return operation to the initial position of the sub-display device 209 is started.

FIG. 177 (l) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is executing the return operation to the initial position during the period in which "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed. In FIG. 177 (l), the sub-display device 209 linearly moves diagonally upward to the left from the state shown in FIG. 177 (k), and then rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° to be shown in FIG. 177 (c). It shows the state of returning to the same state as the state. The sub-display device 209 rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° to return to the initial posture, then moves linearly diagonally upward to the left and returns to the same state as shown in FIG. 177 (c). May be good. The sub-display device 209 returns to the same state as shown in FIG. 177 (c), then moves upward and returns to the initial position.

FIG. 177 (m) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit (big hit of "special figure A"), the hit / miss judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" indicating that there was a hit is stopped and displayed (fixed stop display), and the display mode for notifying the big hit is in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. The fourth symbol (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed. The character string image of "big hit!" And the character image h3 of the palace may be erased before "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed, or "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3". May be erased at the same time as the stop display is displayed, or may be erased immediately after "Decoration 3-Decoration 3-Decoration 3" is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 177 (m), the sub display device 209 has returned to the initial position. The sub-display device 209 returns to the initial position before the "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The sub-display device 209 may return to the initial position at the same time that "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or the left middle right symbol After "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" is stopped and displayed in the display areas 208a to 208c, the initial position may be restored.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a sub-display device 209 including an image display (for example, a liquid crystal display device). The sub-display device 209 can perform an operation according to the first motion pattern. The first motion pattern in this embodiment moves downward from the initial position to the second position, then rotates counterclockwise by 30 °, then clockwise by 60 °, and then downward to the right. It is a motion pattern that moves, then moves to the upper left, then rotates counterclockwise by 30 ° to return to the initial posture, and then moves upward to return to the initial position. The rotational movement in the first motion pattern is not limited to this, and after rotating counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, it rotates clockwise by an angle twice the arbitrary angle. Then, it may be rotated counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture, or it may be rotated counterclockwise by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 °, and then clockwise by the arbitrary angle. It may be rotated by an arbitrary angle of 1 ° to 359 ° clockwise and then rotated counterclockwise by the arbitrary angle to return to the initial posture. May be good. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect can be executed by various operations by the image display means.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or stopped displayed on the sub display device 209 while the sub display device 209 is executing the operation according to the first motion pattern, the motion of the sub display device 209 is performed. The pattern change condition is satisfied. In this embodiment, when the change condition of the motion pattern is satisfied, the sub-display device 209 stops the rotation motion even during the execution of the motion according to the first motion pattern, for example, the rotation motion. When the condition for changing the motion pattern is satisfied, the sub-display device 209 may stop the rotation operation or the movement operation and return to the initial position even during the rotation operation or the movement operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 177 (j), when "decoration 3" is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209 and the condition for changing the movement pattern is satisfied, the sub display device 209 stops the movement operation diagonally downward to the left. Then, the operation of returning to the initial position may be executed during the stop display of "Decoration 3".

In this embodiment, when the temporary stop display or the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started, the sub display device 209 is stopped, but the variable display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is performed. The sub-display device 209 may be stopped while the sub-display device 209 is being executed, or the sub-display device 209 may be moved even if the temporary stop display or the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol on the sub-display device 209 is started. The operation of the sub-display device 209 may be continuously executed without changing the pattern. If the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started during the operation of the sub display device 209, the stop operation of the sub display device 209 may be performed without fail, or the sub display device 209 may be stopped. If the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is started during the execution of the operation of the device 209, the stop operation of the sub display device 209 may be performed without fail.

In this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped displayed on the sub display device 209 during the rotation operation or the diagonal movement operation of the sub display device 209, the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 or the operation is performed. When the movement operation in the diagonal direction is stopped, but the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped displayed on the sub display device 209 during the horizontal or vertical movement operation of the sub display device 209, The movement operation of the sub-display device 209 in the horizontal direction or the vertical direction may be stopped. Further, the sub-display device 209 can execute an exercise pattern according to the second exercise pattern. In the second motion pattern, for example, the sub display device 209 moves from the initial position (first position) to the second position, moves in the diagonal direction, and moves in the diagonal direction opposite to the diagonal direction. It is a movement pattern that returns to the second position and moves to the first position. The sub-display device 209 is the first when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped or fixedly stopped and the motion pattern change condition is satisfied while the sub-display device 209 is performing the operation according to the second motion pattern. It is configured to perform a stop motion even during the motion according to the second motion pattern. When the sub-display device 209 temporarily stops or the fixed stop is displayed on the sub-display device 209 while the operation according to the second movement pattern is being executed, the movement pattern change condition is satisfied. , It may be configured to perform the operation of returning to the initial position even during the operation according to the second motion pattern.

The decorative symbol display device 208 may be capable of performing the same movement and rotation operations as the sub display device 209. In this case, the pachinko machine 100 may or may not be provided with the sub-display device 209. Both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 may be capable of performing a moving operation and a rotating operation in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions. If the movement pattern change condition is satisfied while the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing the movement operation or the rotation operation, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be started to stop or return to the initial position. ..

In this embodiment, when the temporary stop display or the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol is started, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, but the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied. Not limited to this. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution of the operation of the sub-display device 209, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied, or either special figure 1 or special figure 2 may be satisfied. The condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied when the number of holds increases, or the effect to be executed with priority (for example, a look-ahead notice effect for the hold when there is a hold that becomes a big hit). Alternatively, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied when the mission achievement effect, etc., which is executed when a predetermined mission is cleared) is interrupted and started. When these change conditions are satisfied, the sub display device 209 may be stopped or returned to the initial position.

In FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (k) to (m), the effect display and the like are not displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the entire display is displayed in white. In addition, in the state of FIGS. 177 (a), (k) to (m), the sub-display device 209 is equipped with the current game state, the current production mode, or the pachinko machine as a result of the hit / fail determination of the special figure 1 variable game. A character string image representing the model name of 100, a character image according to the current game state or the current production mode as a result of the success / failure judgment of the special figure 1 variable game, and a character image appearing in the pachinko machine 100 are displayed. You may be.

Further, the sub-display device 209 may temporarily stop the operation before the operation of returning to the initial position is started when the condition for changing the motion pattern is satisfied.

(Example 3)
An example of the production of the third embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 178. FIGS. 178 (a) to 178 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration common to the configurations shown in FIGS. 178 (a) to (f) and (a') to (f') and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment. Has the same operation and effect, and therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 178 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, and in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 in the decorative frame f1, the variable display of the fourth symbol is displayed. Is displayed, and the sub-display device 209 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern.

In FIG. 178 (b), the sub-display device 209 moves linearly downward from the initial position and stops at the second position, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is left, middle, and right during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. It shows a state in which the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased and the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is interrupted. In the figure, the downward arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. A character string image of "If you stop at 3, it's a big hit!" Is displayed in the effect display area 208d below the center of the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208, and to the right of the character string image is the palace. The character image h3 is displayed. When the result of the hit / miss determination of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit, it is notified by the character string image that "decoration 3" is displayed on the sub display device 209. In this example, while moving downward from the initial position of the sub display device 209, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c are erased, and then the character string image and the character image h3 of the hall are displayed.

FIG. 178 (c) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the player side. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. At the time shown in FIG. 178 (c), the sub-display device 209 is in a state of being rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture shown in FIG. 178 (c). During the counterclockwise rotation of the sub-display device 209, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is the same speed as the rotation speed of the sub-display device 209, and the clock is viewed from the player side. It is displayed by a moving image that rotates around. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the sub-display device 209 is displayed so as not to rotate when viewed from the player.

FIG. 178 (d) shows a state in which a magnetic anomaly error has occurred. The magnetic anomaly error occurs when the magnetic detection sensor included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 detects magnetism. When a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the magnetic anomaly error until an error canceling operation (for example, power interruption / recovery operation) is performed by the game clerk. When the pachinko machine 100 stops playing, the special figure 1 variable game is also stopped, and the variable display of the fourth symbol in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is also stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The "Big hit if it stops at 3" and the character image h3 of the palace are also deleted. Further, since the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, the variation display of the decorative symbol on the sub display device 209 is erased, and the character string image of "Magnetic anomaly occurs!" Is displayed on the sub display device 209. Further, when a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, and the operation of returning the sub display device 209 to the initial position is executed. The rotation operation of the sub display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 178 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is in the process of returning to the initial position due to the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly error, and the sub display device 209 is rotated 30 ° clockwise to return to the initial posture. Is shown. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. When a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the sub-display device 209 stops the rotation operation and then rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation to return to the initial posture.

FIG. 178 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves upward in a straight line and returns to the initial position. In the figure, the upward arrow shown to the right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. A character string image of "Magnetic anomaly has occurred!" Is displayed on the sub-display device 209.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 178 (a') to (f'). FIGS. 178 (a') to 178 (f') show the effects of this modification in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 178 (a') to (d') are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 178 (a) to 178 (d), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 178 (e') shows a state in which the sub display device 209 is in the process of returning to the initial position due to the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly error, and the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise by 30 ° to return to the initial posture. Indicates the state. In the figure, the arrows shown on the left and right of the sub display device 209 indicate the rotation direction of the sub display device 209. When a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the sub-display device 209 stops the rotation operation and then rotates in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation to return to the initial posture. In FIG. 178 (e'), the character string image of "magnetic abnormality!" Displayed on the sub display device 209 is erased, and the character string image of "magnetic abnormality!" Is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In this way, at the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error, the sub-display device 209 notifies that the magnetic anomaly error has occurred, and the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the magnetic anomaly error after a lapse of a predetermined time from the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error. You will be notified that you are there. At the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error, the decorative symbol display device 208 notifies that the magnetic anomaly error has occurred, and the sub-display device 209 causes the magnetic anomaly error after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error. At the beginning of the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 209 notify that the magnetic anomaly error has occurred, and the decorative symbol is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error. Either the device 208 or the sub-display device 209 may notify that a magnetic anomaly error has occurred, or both the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub-display device 209 from the occurrence to the cancellation of the magnetic anomaly error. It may be notified that a magnetic anomaly error has occurred.

FIG. 178 (f') shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves upward in a straight line and returns to the initial position. In the figure, the upward arrow shown to the right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. A character string image of "Magnetic anomaly has occurred!" Is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 208.

In this embodiment, when a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is satisfied. In this embodiment, a magnetic anomaly error occurs while the sub-display device 209 executes an operation according to the first motion pattern shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to 176 (g). If the change condition of the motion pattern is satisfied during the operation according to the first motion pattern of the sub display device 209, the sub display device 209 is set to the initial position even while the motion according to the first motion pattern is being executed. The operation to return to is started. The sub-display device 209 may perform a stop operation when the condition for changing the motion pattern is satisfied due to the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly error.

Further, the sub-display device 209 can execute an exercise pattern according to the second exercise pattern. In the second motion pattern, for example, the sub display device 209 moves from the initial position (first position) to the second position, moves in the diagonal direction, and moves in the diagonal direction opposite to the diagonal direction. It is a movement pattern that returns to the second position and moves to the first position. The sub-display device 209 follows the second motion pattern when an abnormal state such as a magnetic anomaly error occurs during execution of the motion according to the second motion pattern and the condition for changing the motion pattern is satisfied. It is configured to perform a stop operation even during the operation. When the sub-display device 209 temporarily stops or the fixed stop is displayed on the sub-display device 209 while the operation according to the second movement pattern is being executed, the movement pattern change condition is satisfied. , It may be configured to perform the operation of returning to the initial position even during the operation according to the second motion pattern.

In this embodiment, when a magnetic abnormality error occurs during the execution of the rotation operation of the sub display device 209 and the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied, the operation of returning to the initial position of the sub display device 209 is executed. However, when a magnetic abnormality error occurs while the sub-display device 209 is performing a movement operation in any of the up, down, left, right, and diagonal directions and the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is satisfied, the sub-display device 209 is used. The operation of returning to the initial position of 209 may be executed, or the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 may be stopped.

When it is determined that an abnormal state such as a magnetic anomaly error has occurred in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is satisfied. In addition to the occurrence of the magnetic anomaly error, it may be set so that the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub display device 209 is satisfied when a magnetic field abnormality error, a vibration error, an abnormality winning error, or a door opening error occurs. .. The magnetic field abnormality error occurs when the radio wave detection sensor included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 detects a radio wave. When a magnetic field abnormality error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the magnetic field abnormality error until an error release operation (for example, power interruption / recovery operation) is performed by the game clerk. The vibration error occurs when the vibration detection sensor included in the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 detects vibration. Even if a vibration error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the vibration error until a predetermined time elapses after the vibration error occurs. An abnormal winning error occurs when the opening conditions of the variable winning openings 234 and 235 (attacker) and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 (electric chew) are not satisfied, and the variable winning openings 234 and 235 and the special drawing 2 starting opening 232 are sent. Occurs when a winning game ball is detected. Even if an abnormal winning error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the abnormal winning error until a predetermined time elapses after the abnormal winning error occurs. The door opening error occurs when the sensor front frame door opening sensor detects the opening of the front frame door 106 or when the inner frame opening sensor detects the opening of the main body 104. Even if a door opening error occurs, the game of the pachinko machine 100 is not stopped, and the pachinko machine 100 notifies the door opening error until a predetermined time elapses after the door opening error occurs. In addition, when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub display device 209 may be satisfied.

In this embodiment, when an abnormal state such as a magnetic anomaly error occurs, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is satisfied, but the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 is not limited to this. .. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the execution of the operation of the sub-display device 209, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied, or either special figure 1 or special figure 2 may be satisfied. The condition for changing the movement pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied when the number of holds increases, or the effect to be executed with priority (for example, a look-ahead notice effect for the hold when there is a hold that becomes a big hit). Alternatively, the condition for changing the motion pattern of the sub-display device 209 may be satisfied when the mission achievement effect, etc., which is executed when a predetermined mission is cleared) is interrupted and started. Upon the satisfaction of these change conditions, the sub-display device 209 may return to the initial position or may be stopped.

The sub-display device 209 may be capable of performing an operation according to a third motion pattern different from the first motion pattern and the second motion pattern. The third movement pattern may be the movement pattern shown in FIGS. 179 to 183, which will be described later. The movement pattern shown in FIG. 183, which will be described later, may be used as the first movement pattern.

(Example 4)
An example of the production of the fourth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment have the same operation and effect. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 179 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit, which indicates that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special figure 1 variable game was wrong, is "decoration 2-. "Decoration 3-Decoration 4" is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933 in the decorative frame f1 displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying the detachment is stopped and displayed. There is. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area 934 in the decorative frame f1, the fourth symbol of the display mode for notifying that the result of the hit / fail determination of the latest special figure 2 variable game is out of order is stopped and displayed. "1" indicating that the number of reservations of special figure 1 is 1 is displayed in the special figure 1 reserved number display area 931 in the decorative frame f1, and the special figure 2 reserved number display area 932 in the decorative frame f1 is displayed. “0” indicating that the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is 0 is displayed. The default special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in a white circle is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 in the decorative frame f2 displayed at the bottom of the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. .. In the state shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sub display device 209 is located at the initial position, and the effect display and the like are not displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the entire display is displayed in white. ing.

FIG. 179 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. In the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933, the variation display of the fourth symbol is displayed. “0” is displayed in the special figure 1 hold number display area 931, and it is notified that the hold number of the special figure 1 is reduced by 1 and the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 0. When the hold of the special figure 1 is reduced by one and the variable game of the special figure 1 is started, in the variable icon display area 940 and the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 of the decorative symbol display device 208, between the hold and the variable icons. The movement animation is executed. In the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the special figure 1 hold icon 951 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 950 becomes the change icon 941 and moves to the change icon display area 940. .. In FIG. 179 (b), the movement animation between the hold / change icon is completed, and the change icon 941 is displayed in the change icon display area 940.

In FIG. 179 (b), the sub-display device 209 moves linearly downward from the initial position (first position) and stops at the second position. The movement start timing of the sub-display device 209 may be the same as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, or after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. You may. Further, in the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The character image h3 of the palace is displayed as a notice of the change. The character image h3 of the palace may be started to be displayed prior to the start of movement of the sub display device 209 to the second position, or may be started to be displayed at the same time as the start of movement of the sub display device 209 to the second position. The display may be started during the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the second position, or the display may be started after the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the second position is completed.

FIG. 179 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 in order to display the image in the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) has a character image h3 of the palace arranged on the right side of the center and a character image h4 of the princess arranged on the lower left corner. The character image h4 of the princess is a preview image of the change. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are in a mode in which the orientation of the pattern is correct (hereinafter, may be referred to as a "forward orientation"), and there is no effect image in which no effect image is displayed around Is the embodiment of. FIG. 179 (b-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b). Shows the display data. The display data is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the character image h3 of the image data shown in FIG. 179 (b-1) as the cutting center. Will be done. Since the display data shown in FIG. 179 (b-2) does not include the princess character image h4, the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (b).

The sub-display device 209 can execute a moving operation of linearly moving to the left from the position in FIG. 179 (b). The display data of the sub-display device 209 during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 has the cutting center of the image data read from the ROM 406 in the same direction as the moving direction of the sub-display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub-display device 209. Generated by moving. When the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the princess character image h4 is gradually included in the display data from the right side. Therefore, when the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the sub display device 209 The princess character image h4 is gradually displayed from the right side. The princess character image h4 is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance to the left of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the movement to the left of the sub display device 209. To. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h4 of the princess is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. The character image h3 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 is at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 in the left direction, and is right by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub-display device 209 in the left direction. It is displayed as a moving image that moves in the direction. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. In this way, the sub-display device 209 displays an animation display including the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation.

FIG. 179 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of the reach effect, first, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the sub display device 209 executes a movement operation to the left, and the sub display device 209 as a reach effect causes a lateral movement display notice effect. Is executed. In FIG. 179 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 179 (b). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. The sub-display device 209 may start the movement operation to the left before the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the "decoration 2" may be started in the left symbol display area 208a. May start the movement operation to the left after the temporary stop is displayed and before the temporary stop is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In FIG. 179 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

In FIG. 179 (c), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. About the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and about the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the left, the princess character image h4 is gradually displayed in the image display area of the sub-display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 move to the left of the sub-display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the left. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h4 of the princess. These star-shaped effect images are displayed as moving images. The star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the center of the princess character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction. The princess character image h4 may be rotated during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub-display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 179 (c-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) has a character image h3 of the palace arranged on the right side of the center and a character image h4 of the princess arranged on the lower left corner. The character image h3 of the palace is a positive aspect, and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around it. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from a forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. FIG. 179 (c-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c). Shows the display data. The display data is a position deviated to the left by the distance that the sub-display device 209 has moved to the left in FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (c) from the cutting center of the display data shown in FIG. 179 (b-2). It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (c-1) in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the princess character image h4, the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (c), and the display data includes the right half. Since the left half of the princess character image h4 is not included, the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off from the image display area of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 179 (d) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves linearly to the right, and the sub-display device 209 returns to the position in FIG. 179 (b) and stops. In FIG. 179 (d), the right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 179 (c). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (d), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub-display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the princess character image h4 is gradually erased from the left side. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 move to the right of the sub-display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the right. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player.

FIG. 179 (d-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) has a character image h3 of the palace arranged on the right side of the center and a character image h4 of the princess arranged on the lower left corner. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are in a positive direction, and there is no effect image in which no effect image is displayed in the surroundings. FIG. 179 (d-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d). Shows the display data. The display data is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the character image h3 of the image data shown in FIG. 179 (d-1) as the cutting center. Will be done. Since the display data shown in FIG. 179 (d-2) does not include the princess character image h4, the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (d).

FIG. 179 (e) shows the state at the time when the sub display device 209 moves linearly to the left and the sub display device 209 returns to the same position as the position in FIG. 179 (c). In FIG. 179 (e), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 179 (d). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (e), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. About the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and about the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the left, the princess character image h4 is gradually displayed in the image display area of the sub-display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 move to the left of the sub-display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the left. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h4 of the princess. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the center of the princess character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction. The princess character image h4 is rotated during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209. The princess character image h4 may be rotated while the sub-display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 179 (e-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) has a character image h3 of the palace arranged on the right side of the center and a character image h4 of the princess arranged on the lower left corner. The character image h3 of the palace is a positive aspect, and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around it. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. FIG. 179 (e-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e). Shows the display data. The display data is a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub-display device 209 has moved to the left in FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (e) from the cutting center of the display data shown in FIG. 179 (d-2). It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (e-1) in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the princess character image h4, the right half of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 179 (e), and the display data includes the right half. Since the left half of the princess character image h4 is not included, the left half of the princess character image h4 is cut off from the image display area of the sub display device 209.

FIG. 179 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is further linearly moved to the left and stopped. In FIG. 179 (f), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 179 (e). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (f), the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as a whole. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 move to the left of the sub-display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the left. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h4 of the princess. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is a mode in which the center of the character image h3 of the palace is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character image h3 of the palace may be rotated during the moving operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped. The character image h4 of the princess is a mode in which the character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, continuing from FIG. 179 (e).

FIG. 179 (f-1) shows image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) has a character image h3 of the palace arranged on the right side of the center and a character image h4 of the princess arranged on the lower left corner. The character image h3 of the palace is a mode in which the character image h3 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from a forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character image h3. The princess character image h4 is a mode in which the character image h4 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. FIG. 179 (f-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f). Shows the display data. The display data is a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub-display device 209 has moved to the left in FIGS. 179 (e) to 179 (f) from the cutting center of the display data shown in FIG. 179 (d-2). It is generated by cutting out the image data shown in FIG. 179 (f-1) in a rectangular region having an aspect ratio of 9:16 as the cutting center. Since the display data includes the entire character image h4 of the princess, the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 179 (f).

In this embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. When the sub-display device 209 is moved to the positions shown in FIGS. 179 (c) and 179 (e), a part of the princess character image h4 arranged in the lower left corner of the image data is cut off and displayed. When the sub-display device 209 is moved to the position shown in FIG. 179 (f), for example, the entire character image h4 of the princess arranged in the lower left corner of the image data is displayed. In the pachinko machine 100, the character image h4 of the princess is more than the case where only a part of the character image h4 of the princess is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display due to the operation (movement, movement operation, rotation operation) of the sub display device 209. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display when the whole is displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, the character image of the princess is higher than the case where the character image h4 of the princess is not displayed in the state where the sub display device 209 is moved to the position in FIG. 179 (f) during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the big hit symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display when the entire h4 is displayed.

Next, a modification of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 (a') to 179 (f'). FIGS. 179 (a') to 179 (f') show production examples of this modification in chronological order. Since the states shown in FIGS. 179 (a') to 179 (e) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (e), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 179 (f') following FIG. 179 (e') shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves linearly to the right and the sub-display device 209 returns to the position in FIG. 179 (b'). ing. In FIG. 179 (f'), the right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub in FIG. 179 (e'). The position of the image display area of the display device 209 is shown. In FIG. 179 (e'), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. In addition, no effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace. Further, the character image h4 of the princess is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the princess character image h4 is gradually erased from the left side. The character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 move to the right of the sub-display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the right. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the distance. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. In this modification, the sub-display device 209 does not move to the position in FIG. 179 (f) during the execution of the symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 179 (b') to 179 (f'), and the character image h4 of the princess. Is not displayed on the sub-display device 209 as a whole.

In the pachinko machine 100, when only a part of the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display (FIGS. 179 (a') to (f'). ), The case where the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub-display device 209 (when shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179) is the final after the symbol variation display. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed. In the pachinko machine 100, at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed as compared with the case where the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. When it is displayed on the sub-display device 209 (when shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e), (f), (c'), (e')), it is finally displayed after the symbol variation display. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily displayed. In the pachinko machine 100, the entire princess character image h4 is sub-displayed as compared with the case where the princess character image h4 is not displayed on the sub-display device 209 due to the operation of the sub-display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. When it is displayed on the device 209 (when it is shown in FIG. 179 (f)), it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed more easily after the symbol variation display.

Further, the character image according to the jackpot reliability may be displayed. For example, the jackpot reliability may be set to increase in the order of the enemy character image of the palace, the character image of the princess, and the character image of the ninja. The pachinko machine 100 has a princess character image h4 or a ninja character image more than when at least a part of the enemy character image of the palace is displayed on the sub display device 209 due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the symbol variation display. Even if at least a part of any one of the character images is displayed on the sub-display device 209, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. Well, due to the movement operation of the sub-display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display, at least a part of the ninja character image is displayed as compared with the case where at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub-display device 209. When it is displayed on the sub-display device 209, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.

In this embodiment, when the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209, but the sub display device 209 is displayed in the right direction, up / down direction, or diagonally. The character image h4 of the princess may be displayed when it moves in the direction or when the rotation operation is executed. Even in this case, the entire princess character image h4 is sub-displayed as compared with the case where only a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub-display device 209 due to the operation of the sub-display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display when it is displayed on the device 209, or the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209. It is configured so that when at least a part of the character image h4 of the princess is displayed on the sub-display device 209, the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display than when it is not displayed. The symbol may be present, and it is better when at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209 than when at least a part of the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be finally finalized and displayed after the variable display. Further, for example, when the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise, the princess character image h4 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and when the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise, the sub display device 209 is displayed. An enemy character image may be displayed.

The character images having different jackpot reliability are not limited to the three types of the enemy character image of the palace, the character image of the princess, and the character image of the ninja, and four or more types may be provided.

In the production according to this embodiment, the character image h4 of the princess is used, but an image other than the character image (for example, an image of one character, one symbol, a character string image, an oval, a thousand boxes, etc.) Item images, effect images, conversation notice images, etc.) may be used. For images other than the character image, a plurality of images having different jackpot reliability may be provided.

In the production according to the present embodiment, the princess character image h4 is displayed as a notice of the change, but the princess character image h4 may be displayed as a look-ahead notice. In this case, when the entire character image h4 of the princess is displayed than when only a part of the character image h4 of the princess is displayed by the operation of the sub display device 209, the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice target is displayed. After, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed, or the princess character image h4 may be more than the case where the princess character image h4 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209. It may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display of the pre-reading notice target when at least a part of the display is displayed. Even in the case of the look-ahead notice, four or more types of character images and images other than the character images having different jackpot reliability may be provided.

(Example 5)
An example of the production of the fifth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 180. FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (f) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment have the same operation and effect. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 180A, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 180 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 179 (a).

FIG. 180 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as in FIG. 179 (b). FIG. 180 (b-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400 in order to display the image on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) includes a character image h3 of the palace arranged in the center, a character string image h7 of "hit" arranged in the lower left corner, and "hit" arranged in the lower right corner. It has a character string image h8 of "?!". The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace are in a positive orientation in which the orientation of the pattern is correct, and there is no effect image in which no effect image is displayed in the surroundings. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace are preview images of the fluctuation. FIG. 180 (b-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b). Shows the display data. The display data is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (b-1) as the cutting center. Since the character string images h7 and h8 are not included in the display data, the character string images h7 and h8 are not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (b).

The sub-display device 209 can execute a moving operation of linearly moving in the left-right direction with the position in FIG. 180 (b) as the center position. The display data of the sub-display device 209 during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 has the cutting center of the image data read from the ROM 406 in the same direction as the moving direction of the sub-display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub-display device 209. Generated by moving. When the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h7 is gradually included in the display data from the right side. Therefore, when the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, characters are displayed on the sub display device 209. The column image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image that moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209. .. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character string image h7 is displayed so as not to be moved when viewed from the player. Similarly, when the sub display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h8 is gradually included in the display data from the left side. Therefore, when the sub display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance or more, the sub display device The character string image h8 is gradually displayed from the left side in 209. The character string image h8 is displayed as a moving image that moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209 by the same distance as the moving distance of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209. .. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character string image h8 is displayed so as not to be moved when viewed from the player. In this way, the sub-display device 209 displays an animation display including the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace during the moving operation.

FIG. 180 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of the reach effect, first, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the operation of linearly moving to the left of the sub display device 209 is executed, and the sub display device 209 moves laterally as a reach effect. The display notice effect is executed. In FIG. 180 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 180 (b). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

In FIG. 180 (c), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. About the right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, a part of "this" and the whole of "ri") is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and the character string image h7. About the left half of (in this example, the other part of "this") is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the left, and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 to the left. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. These star-shaped effect images are displayed as moving images. The star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h7 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character string image h7 may be rotated during the moving operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 180 (c-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) includes a character image h3 of the palace arranged in the center, a character string image h7 of "hit" arranged in the lower left corner, and "hit" arranged in the lower right corner. It has a character string image h8 of "?!". The character image h3 of the palace is a positive aspect, and is an aspect with an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around it. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the character string image h7 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from a forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character string image h7. The character string image h8 is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around the character string image h8. FIG. 180 (c-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c). Shows the display data. The display data is leftward by the distance from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (c-1) to the left by the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c) from the center position in FIG. 180 (b). It is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the right half of the character string image h7, the right half of the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c), and the display data includes the character string. Since the left half of the image h7 is not included, the left half of the character string image h7 is cut off from the image display area of the sub display device 209. Further, since the display data does not include the entire character string image h8, the character string image h8 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (c).

FIG. 180 (d) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is linearly moving to the right. The position of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d) is shown in FIG. 180 (c) with the virtual perpendicular line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 at the center position in FIG. 180 (b) as the target axis. It is a left-right symmetric (line symmetric) positional relationship with the position of the sub-display device 209 of. In FIG. 180 (d), the right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 180 (c). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (d), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The character string image h7 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h7 is gradually erased from the left side. About the left half of the character string image h8 (in this example, the entire "?") Is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, and about the right half of the character string image h8 (this example). Then, the other part of "!") Has been cut off. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h8 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 are at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the right, and are on the right side of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace are displayed so as not to be moved when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h8. The star-shaped effect image is displayed as a moving image. The star-shaped effect image may be displayed as a still image. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h8 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character string image h8 is rotated during the moving operation of the sub display device 209. The character string image h8 may be rotated after the sub-display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 180 (d-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) includes a character image h3 of the palace arranged in the center, a character string image h7 of "hit" arranged in the lower left corner, and "hit" arranged in the lower right corner. It has a character string image h8 of "?!". The character image h3 of the palace is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around it. The character string image h7 is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around the character string image h7. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the character string image h8 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from a forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. FIG. 180 (d-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d). Shows the display data. The display data is clockwise by the distance from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (d-1) to the right by the sub-display device 209 moved to the right from the center position in FIG. 180 (b). It is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the display data includes about the left half of the character string image h8, the left half of the character string image h8 is displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d), and the display data includes the character string. Since about the right half of the image h8 is not included, the right half of the character string image h8 is cut off from the sub display device 209. Further, the display data does not include the entire character string image h7, and the character string image h8 is not displayed on the sub display device 209 in FIG. 180 (d).

FIG. 180 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves further to the right in a straight line and stops. In FIG. 180 (e), the right-pointing arrow shown in the upper left of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 180 (d). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (e), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The entire character string image h8 is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character image h3 and the character string image h8 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the right, and the moving distance to the right of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h8 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h8. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h8 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction (rotated by 60 ° clockwise from FIG. 180D). The character string image h8 may be rotated during the moving operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 180 (e-1) shows image data read from ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) includes a character image h3 of the palace arranged in the center, a character string image h7 of "hit" arranged in the lower left corner, and "hit" arranged in the lower right corner. It has a character string image h8 of "?!". The character image h3 of the palace is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around it. The character string image h7 is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around the character string image h7. The character string image h8 is a mode in which the character string image h8 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. FIG. 180 (e-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e). Shows display data. The display data is clockwise by the distance from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (e-1) to the right by the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e) from the center position in FIG. 180 (b). It is generated by cutting the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16 with the position shifted to the center as the cutting center. Since the display data includes the entire character string image h8, the entire character string image h8 is displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (e).

FIG. 180 (f) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves linearly to the left and stops. The position of the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f) is shown in FIG. 180 (e) with the virtual perpendicular line passing through the center of the image display area of the sub-display device 209 at the center position in FIG. 180 (b) as the target axis. It is a left-right symmetric (line symmetric) positional relationship with the position of the sub-display device 209 of. In FIG. 180 (f), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 180 (e). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 180 (f), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The character string image h8 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h8 is gradually erased from the right side. The entire character string image h7 is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side. The character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 are at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the left, and are left of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3, the character string image h7, and the character string image h8 of the palace are displayed so as not to be moved when viewed from the player. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is a mode in which the center of the character image h3 of the palace is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the center of the character string image h7 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction with the center of rotation as the center of rotation. The character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace may be rotated during the moving operation of the sub display device 209, or may be rotated after the sub display device 209 is stopped.

FIG. 180 (f-1) shows the image data read from the ROM 406 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f). The image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) includes a character image h3 of the palace arranged in the center, a character string image h7 of "hit" arranged in the lower left corner, and "hit" arranged in the lower right corner. It has a character string image h8 of "?!". The character image h3 of the palace is a mode in which the character image h3 is rotated by 30 ° counterclockwise from a forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the character image h3. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the character string image h7 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. The character string image h7 is a mode in which the character string image h7 is rotated by 30 ° clockwise from the forward direction, and is a mode in which a star-shaped effect image is arranged around the effect image. The character string image h8 is a positive aspect, and is an aspect without an effect image in which a star-shaped effect image is not arranged around the character string image h8. FIG. 180 (f-2) was generated from the image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) using the work area of the VRAM 436 in order to display the image on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f). Shows the display data. The display data is cut out from the center of the image data shown in FIG. 180 (f-1) at a position shifted to the left by the distance that the sub-display device 209 moves to the left from the center position in FIG. 180 (f). It is generated by cutting out the image data in a rectangular area having an aspect ratio of 9:16. Since the display data includes the entire character string image h7, the entire character string image h7 is displayed on the sub-display device 209 in FIG. 180 (f).

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the entire character string image h7 (hit) and the character string image h8 (?!) Are displayed by the operation of the sub-display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. In addition, the entire character string image h7 may be displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, and the character string image h8 may not be displayed. However, the character string image h7 may not be displayed due to the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, and the entire character string image h8 may be displayed. Alternatively, only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub-display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, and the entire character string image h8 is displayed. In some cases, the entire character string image h7 is displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display, and a part of the character string image h8 is displayed. In some cases, only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub display device 209 in which the symbol variation display is being executed. Only a part of the character string image h8 may be displayed, or the character string image h7 may be displayed by the operations shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub-display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. In some cases, only a part of the character string image h8 may not be displayed, or the character string may be displayed by the operation shown in FIGS. 180 (b) to 180 (f) of the sub-display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. The image h7 may not be displayed, and only a part of the character string image h8 may be displayed.
In the pachinko machine 100, when the entire character string image h7 (hit) is displayed rather than when the entire character string image h8 (?!) Is displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. It should be noted that the case where the entire character string image h7 is displayed is after the symbol variation display than the case where the entire character string image h7 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the case where the entire character string image h8 is displayed is after the symbol variation display than the case where the entire character string image h8 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. It should be noted that the case where the entire character string image h8 is displayed is after the symbol variation display than the case where the entire character string image h8 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. It may be configured so that it is difficult to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode. It should be noted that the case where at least a part of the character string image h7 is displayed is after the symbol variation display than the case where the character string image h7 is not displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed. After the symbol variation display, the case where the entire character string image h7 is displayed is larger than the case where only a part of the character string image h7 is displayed due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during the execution of the symbol variation display. The jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily finalized and displayed in the end. The character string image h7 may be displayed in a plurality of sizes, and the character string image h7 is displayed only in a size smaller than a certain size due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. Even if the character string image h7 is displayed in a size larger than a certain size than in the case where the character string image h7 is displayed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. Good. Similarly, the character string image h8 may be able to be displayed in a plurality of sizes, and the character string image h8 is displayed only in a size smaller than a certain size due to the operation of the sub display device 209 during execution of the symbol variation display. It is configured so that when the character string image h8 is displayed in a size larger than a certain size, it is easier to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display than in the case where the character string image h8 is displayed. May be good.

In the production according to the present embodiment, the character string images h7 and h8 are displayed as a notice of the change, but the character string images h7 and h8 may be displayed as a look-ahead notice.

In this embodiment, when the sub display device 209 moves to the left by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and when the sub display device 209 moves to the right by a predetermined distance or more, the character string image h8 becomes a sub. It is displayed on the display device 209. For example, when the sub display device 209 moves upward by a predetermined distance or more from the position shown in FIG. 180 (b), a character string image of "reach" is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 moves downward by a predetermined distance. When the above movement is performed, the character string image of "big hit" may be displayed on the sub display device 209. A plurality of character string images are provided for each jackpot reliability. For example, the jackpot reliability includes the character string image h8 of "!?", The character string image of "reach", the character string image h7 of "hit", and " It is set to be higher in the order of the character string image of "big hit".

Further, for example, when the sub display device 209 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle or more, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209, and when the sub display device 209 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle or more, the character string is displayed. The image h8 may be displayed on the sub-display device 209. Further, the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209 when the sub display device 209 moves diagonally upward to the left by a predetermined angle or more, and characters are displayed when the sub display device 209 moves diagonally upward to the right by a predetermined angle or more. When the column image h8 is displayed on the sub display device 209 and the sub display device 209 moves diagonally downward to the left by a predetermined angle or more, the character string image of "big hit" is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 displays the character string image. The character string image of "reach" may be displayed on the sub-display device 209 when it is moved by a predetermined angle or more in a direction oblique to the right.

(Example 6)
An example of the production of the sixth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 181. FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (f) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (f) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment have the same operation and effect. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 181 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted. In FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (f), the same effects as those shown in FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (f) are executed.

As shown in FIG. 181 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a frame fa1. The frame fa1 has a horizontally long rectangular frame shape (frame shape) having the same aspect ratio as the aspect ratio of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the image display area of the sub display device 209. ing. Lamps are arranged at the four corners of the frame fa1. The lamp r1 is arranged in the upper left corner of the frame fa1, the lamp r2 is arranged in the lower left corner of the frame fa1, the lamp r3 is arranged in the upper right corner of the frame fa1, and the lower right corner of the frame fa1 is arranged. A lamp r4 is arranged in the. The effect is executed by turning off, blinking, and turning on the lamps r1 to r4. Full-color LEDs are used as the light source of the lamps r1 to r4. A monochromatic LED may be used as the light source of the lamps r1 to r4. The lamps r1 to r4 are included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4, and are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The lamps r1 to r4 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 181 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, and shows a state in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (a) is being executed. Further, the lamps r1 to r4 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 181 (b) shows a state in which the hold of special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, and the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (b) is being executed. There is. Further, the lamps r1 to r4 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 181 (c) shows a state in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (c) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (c), the lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are started to emit light prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left. The lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light at the same time as the sub-display device 209 starts moving to the left, or the lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light while the sub-display device 209 starts moving to the left. The lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light when the movement of the sub display device 209 to the left is completed, or the lamps r1 and r2 may emit light after the movement of the sub display device 209 to the left is completed. It may be started. In addition, one of the lamps r1 and r2 may start light emission first.

FIG. 181 (d) shows a state in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (d) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (d), the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off, and the lamps r3 and r4 are emitting light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 are started to emit light prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209 to the right. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be emitted at the same time as the movement of the sub display device 209 to the right is started, or the lamp r1 may be started while the sub display device 209 is moving to the right. , R2 may be turned off and lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light, or lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light when the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the right is completed. Then, after the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the right is completed, the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light. Either one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first, one of the lamps r3 and r4 may start emitting light first, and the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first. And the light emission of the lamps r3 and r4 may come first. These timings can be set as appropriate.

FIG. 181 (e) shows a state in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (d) is being executed. The lamps r3 and r4 continue to emit light in a predetermined color.

FIG. 181 (f) shows a state in which the same effect as that shown in FIG. 180 (f) is being executed. In FIG. 181 (f), the lamps r1 and r2 are emitting light in a predetermined color, and the lamps r3 and r4 are continuously emitting light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 are started to emit light prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be emitted at the same time as the movement of the sub display device 209 to the left is started, or the lamp r1 may be started while the sub display device 209 is moving to the left. , R2 may be turned off and lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light, or lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light when the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left is completed. Then, after the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left is completed, the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off and the lamps r3 and r4 may be started to emit light. Either one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first, one of the lamps r3 and r4 may start emitting light first, and the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first. And the light emission of the lamps r3 and r4 may come first. These timings can be set as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the character string image h7 of "hit" is displayed only when the hit / fail determination result related to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. When the character string image h7 is displayed on the sub display device 209, all the lamps r1 to r4 are turned on. The lamps r1 to r4 may all be turned on only when the hit / fail determination result related to the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. After the symbol variation display, the number of lights and the number of lights of the lamps r1 to r4 are relatively large compared to the case where the number of lights and the number of lights of the lamps r1 to r4 during execution of the symbol variation display are relatively small. In the end, the jackpot symbol mode may be configured so as to be easily confirmed and displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a frame fa1 is provided as a structure at the edge of the sub-display device 209. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 28 to 180, the frame fa1 may be provided at the edge of the sub display device 209 as a structure. The structure may be provided only on one side of the edge portion of the sub display device 209, or the structure may be provided only on two sides of the edge portion of the sub display device 209. , The structure may be provided only on three sides of the edge of the sub-display device 209. The structure may be provided with a decorative portion. The structure may be provided with light emitters (eg, LEDs, one or more LEDs, lamps r1 to r4).

(Example 7)
An example of the production of the seventh embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182. FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (h) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configurations shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to (h), (d'), (f'), (g') to (j'), and (d'') and the above-described first embodiment. Since the configuration common to the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment has the same operation and effect, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 182 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is formed at the four corners of the frame fa1 and the frame fa1 in the same manner as the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. It has the arranged lamps r1 to r4.

FIG. 182 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 181 (a). Further, the lamps r1 to r4 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 182 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as in FIG. 181 (b). Further, the lamps r1 to r4 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 182 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of the reach effect, first, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the operation of linearly moving to the left of the sub display device 209 is executed, and the sub display device 209 moves laterally as a reach effect. The display notice effect is executed. In FIG. 182 (c), the left-pointing arrow shown in the upper right of the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the two-dot chain line is the sub-display device in FIG. 182 (b). The position of the image display area of 209 is shown. In FIG. 182 (c), the sub display device 209 is stopped.

In FIG. 182 (c), the entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, about the right half of the character string image h9 of "chance" (in this example, the part of "n") is displayed, and is about about the character string image h9. The left half (in this example, the "cha" part) is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h9 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 and the character string image h9 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the left, and the moving distance to the left of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. In addition, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h9. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is in the forward orientation, and the character string image h9 is in the forward orientation.

In FIG. 182 (c), the lamps r1 and r2 emit light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are started to emit light prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left. The lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light at the same time as the sub-display device 209 starts moving to the left, or the lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light while the sub-display device 209 starts moving to the left. The lamps r1 and r2 may start emitting light when the movement of the sub display device 209 to the left is completed, or the lamps r1 and r2 may emit light after the movement of the sub display device 209 to the left is completed. It may be started. In addition, one of the lamps r1 and r2 may start light emission first.

FIG. 182 (d) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves linearly to the right and stops at the center position. The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The character string image h9 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h9 is gradually erased from the left side. The character image h3 and the character string image h9 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the right, and the moving distance to the right of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h9 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. Further, a star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace is in a positive direction.

In FIG. 182 (d), the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off. In this example, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209 to the right. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off at the same time as the sub-display device 209 starts moving to the right, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off while the sub-display device 209 is moving to the right. The lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off when the sub-display device 209 is stopped, or the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off after the sub-display device 209 is stopped. In addition, one of the lamps r1 and r2 may be turned off first.

FIG. 182 (e) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves linearly to the left and stops. The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, the right two-thirds of the character string image h10 of "reach" (in this example, the "-chi" part) is displayed, and the character string image. The left third of h9 (in this example, the "ri" part) is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h10 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 and the character string image h10 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub-display device 209 to the left, and the moving distance to the left of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. In addition, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h10. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is in the forward orientation, and the character string image h9 is in the forward orientation. Further, the lamps r1 and r2 are emitting light in a predetermined color.

FIG. 182 (f) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves to the right and stops at the center position. The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. The character string image h10 is not displayed on the sub display device 209. As the sub-display device 209 moves to the right, the character string image h10 is gradually erased from the left side. The character image h3 and the character string image h10 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the right, and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 to the right. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the left by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h10 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. Further, a star-shaped effect image is not displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and the character image h3 of the palace is in a positive direction. Further, the lamps r1 and r2 are turned off.

FIG. 182 (g) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 is linearly moving to the left. The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, about the right half of the character string image h7 of "hit" (in this example, the "ri" part) is displayed, and is about about the character string image h9. The left half (in this example, the "this" part) is cut off. As the sub display device 209 moves to the left, the character string image h7 is gradually displayed on the sub display device 209 from the right side. The character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace during the moving operation of the sub display device 209 have the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 to the left, and the moving distance of the sub display device 209 to the left. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as. Therefore, during the moving operation of the sub-display device 209, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. In addition, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is in the forward orientation, and the character string image h7 is in the forward orientation. Further, the lamps r1 and r2 are emitting light in a predetermined color.

FIG. 182 (h) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 further moves linearly to the left and stops. During the operation of moving the sub-display device 209 to the left, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace are at the same speed as the movement of the sub-display device 209 to the left, and are left of the sub-display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the moving distance in the direction. Therefore, the character image h3 and the character string image h7 of the palace are displayed as if they are not moving when viewed from the player. In FIG. 182 (h), the left end portion (the left sideburns and the left ear portion) of the character image h3 of the palace is cut off from the image display area of the sub display device 209. In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, the entire character string image h7 of "hit" is displayed. The character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. In addition, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. Further, the character image h3 of the palace is in the forward orientation, and the character string image h10 is in the forward orientation. Further, the lamps r1 and r2 continue to emit light in a predetermined color.

After the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (d) are performed, all the displays displayed in the image display area of the sub display device 209 are erased as shown in FIG. 182 (a), and the sub is displayed. The entire image display area of the display device 209 may be displayed in white, or the sub-display as shown in FIG. 182 (a) after the effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (f) are performed. In some cases, all the displays displayed in the image display area of the device 209 are erased, and the entire image display area of the sub display device 209 is displayed in white.

In this embodiment, a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and a part of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in FIG. 182 (e). In h), the entire character string image h7 of "hit" is displayed.

Next, a modification 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d'). FIG. 182 (d') shows a state continuing from FIG. 182 (c). FIG. 182 (d') shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves to the left and stops, except that the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed on the sub-display device 209. It shows the same state as that shown in 182 (h). As shown in FIG. 182 (d'), the entire character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h9 is gradually displayed from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. The character string image h9 is displayed as a moving image that moves to the right by the same distance as the movement distance to the left of the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the movement to the left of the sub display device 209. Therefore, it is displayed as if it is not moving from the viewpoint of the player. In the first modification, a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and the entire character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (d').

Next, a modification 2 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (f'). FIG. 182 (f') shows a state continuing from FIG. 182 (e). FIG. 182 (f') shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 moves to the left and is stopped, except that the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed on the sub-display device 209. It shows the same state as that shown in 182 (h). As shown in FIG. 182 (f'), the entire character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. In the second modification, a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and a part of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in FIG. 182 (e). In f'), the entire character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed.

In the pachinko machine 100, when the sub display device 209 moves to a position where all of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display (in the case of the modification 1 shown in FIG. 182 (d')). ), The case where the sub-display device 209 is moved to the position where the entire character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed (modification example 2 shown in FIG. 182 (f')) is after the symbol variation display. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed. Further, in the pachinko machine 100, when the sub display device 209 moves to a position where all of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display (modification example 2 shown in FIG. 182 (f')). The case where the sub-display device 209 is moved to the position where the entire character string image h7 of "hit" is displayed (in this embodiment shown in FIG. 182 (g)) is after the symbol variation display. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed. If the sub display device 209 moves to a position where the entire character string image h7 of "hit" is displayed during execution of the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol mode is always confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. It may be configured to be.

Next, a modification 3 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 182 (g') to (j'). FIGS. 182 (g') to 182 (j') show examples of production according to the third modification in chronological order. FIG. 182 (g') shows a state continuing from FIG. 182 (f). In FIG. 182 (g'), as in FIG. 182 (e), the right two-thirds of the character string image h10 of "reach" (in this example, the "-chi" part) is displayed, and the character string is displayed. The left third of the image h10 (in this example, the “ri” part) is cut off. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. FIG. 182 (h') shows the same state as shown in FIG. 182 (f). FIG. 182 (i') shows the same state as in FIGS. 182 (e) and (g').

FIG. 182 (j') shows a state in which the sub display device 209 moves linearly to the left and stops, and the point where the character string image h10 of “reach” is displayed on the sub display device 209. Except for this, the same state as shown in FIG. 182 (h) is shown. As shown in FIG. 182 (j'), the entire character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h10 is gradually displayed from the right side by moving the sub display device 209 to the left. In the third modification, a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and a part of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in FIG. 182 (e). A part of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in g'), a part of the character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed in FIG. 182 (i'), and "reach" is displayed in FIG. 182 (j). The entire character string image h10 of is displayed.

Next, a modification 4 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 182 (d ″). FIG. 182 (d ″) shows a state continuing from FIG. 182 (c). The entire character image h3 of the palace is displayed on the sub display device 209, and a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" (in this example, the "su" part) is displayed as a part of the character image h3 of the palace. It shows the same state as shown in FIG. 182 (d') except for the overlapping points. While the sub-display device 209 is stopped, the character string image h9 is displayed as a moving image moving to the right, and the entire character string image h9 is gradually displayed from the right side. In FIG. 182 (d ″), the character string image h9 is stopped. In the fourth modification, a part of the character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (c), and the entire character string image h9 of "chance" is displayed in FIG. 182 (d''). A part of the character string image h9 of "chance" (in this example, the part of "su") overlaps with a part of the character image h3. In this way, after the sub display device 209 is moved to a position where a part of the image (character string image in this example) is displayed, the image is moved and displayed while the sub display device 209 is stopped. The entire image may be displayed on the sub-display device 209.

For example, the effect operation of the modification 3 shown in FIGS. 182 (d) to (f) and (g') to (i') may be a fanning effect. For example, does the sub-display device 209 move to a position where the entire character string image h10 of "reach" is displayed, or a part or all of another character string image (for example, the character string image h7 of "hit") is displayed. It may be a fanning effect that makes the player expect two patterns of whether the sub display device 209 moves to the displayed position. In addition, the production operation shown in FIGS. 182 (b), (d), (f), and (h') may also be a fanning effect. In addition, instead of the character string image, a plurality of character images having different jackpot reliability (for example, character image A instead of character string image h7, character image B instead of character string image h9, and character string image h10 are replaced. Character image C) may be used.

In the production example according to the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (h), the order in which the character string images in which a part is displayed is displayed is the character string image h7 of "chance" and the character string of "reach". The order is the image h9 and the character string image h7 of "hit", and the order of the displayed character string images may be predetermined. The order of the displayed character string images can be set arbitrarily.

In the movement effect example of the sub display device 209 according to the present embodiment shown in FIGS. 182 (a) to 182 (h), the probability that (a part) of the character string image appears is determined by the sub display device 209 according to the modified examples 1 to 4. In the movement effect example of (for example, the effect example according to the modification 3), the probability that (a part) of the character string image appears may be larger than the probability.

(Example 8)
An example of the production of the eighth embodiment of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 183. FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 (j) show the production of the special figure 1 variable game in chronological order. The configuration shown in each of FIGS. 183 (a) to 183 (a) and the configuration shown in FIG. 21 (a) of the fifth embodiment of the first embodiment have the same operation and effect. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given only to FIG. 183 (a), and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 183 (a), the effect movable body 225 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a frame fa2. The frame fa2 has a rectangular shape and is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is the horizontal direction. The length of the frame fa2 in the longitudinal direction is the same as the horizontal length of the image display area of the sub-display device 209. The frame fa2 is arranged so that the upper end side of the frame fa2 is along the lower end side of the image display area of the sub display device 209. Lamps are arranged at the left and right ends of the frame fa2. The lamp r5 is arranged at the left end of the frame fa2, and the lamp r6 is arranged at the right end of the frame fa2. The effect is executed by turning off, blinking, and turning on the lamps r5 and r6. A full-color LED is used as the light source of the lamps r5 and r6. A monochromatic LED may be used as the light source of the lamps r5 and r6. The lamps r5 and r6 are included in various lamps 418 shown in FIG. 4, and are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. The lamps r5 and r6 may be controlled by the second sub-control unit 500.

FIG. 183 (a) is a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed, which is the same as the state shown in FIG. 179 (a). Further, the lamps r5 and r6 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 183 (b) shows a state in which the hold of FIG. 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started, which is the same state as in FIG. 179 (b). Further, the lamps r5 and r6 are in the extinguished state.

FIG. 183 (c) shows a state in which "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c, and the reach effect is started. At the start of the reach effect, first, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and then "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In this example, after "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, the sub display device 209 draws a curved trajectory in the diagonally downward direction to the left and executes a moving operation, and the sub display device 209 as a reach effect. The movement display notice effect is executed. In FIG. 183 (c), the arrow shown in the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line is the sub display device 209 in FIG. 183 (b). Indicates the position of the image display area of.

During the moving operation of drawing the curved trajectory in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209, the character image h3 of the palace is at the same speed as the moving speed of the sub display device 209 in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209. It is displayed as a moving image that moves in a direction that draws a curved trajectory in the direction opposite to the moving direction, and the character image h3 of the palace is displayed as if it is not moving when viewed from the player. In FIG. 183 (c), the lower right end of the character image h3 of the palace is cut off. About the right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, the entire "ri") is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and about the left half of the character string image h7 (this example). Then, the whole of "this") has been cut off. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 of the palace, and a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character string image h7. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The character string image h7 is a positive aspect.

In FIG. 183 (c), the lamp r5 emits light in a predetermined color. In this example, the lamp r5 starts emitting light prior to the start of movement of the sub-display device 209. The light emission of the lamp r5 may be started at the same time as the movement of the sub display device 209 is started, or the light emission of the lamp r5 may be started while the sub display device 209 is moving to the left.

FIG. 183 (d) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 draws a curved trajectory in the diagonally downward left direction and executes the moving operation. In FIG. 183 (d), the arrow shown in the upper right of the sub display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub display device 209, and the rectangle shown by the alternate long and short dash line is the sub display device 209 in FIG. 183 (c). Indicates the position of the image display area of. In FIG. 183 (d), in the character image h3 of the palace, the right end portion (in this example, the entire left ear and a part of the left side of the head) is cut off. The right half of the character string image h7 (in this example, the entire "ri") is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, and about the left half of the character string image h7 (in this example). , The whole of "this") is out of stock. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 due to the movement operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d). In this way, the image cut off from the sub display device 209 due to the movement operation in the sub display device 209 may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, a part of the character image h3 of the palace that is cut off from the sub display device 209 (the entire left ear and a part of the left head in FIG. 183 (d)) is displayed on the sub display device 209 when viewed from the player side. It may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so as to be continuous with the character image h3 of the palace. In this example, the decorative pattern display device 208 does not display the part of the character image h3 of the palace. It should be noted that a part of the image cut off from the sub display device 209 is a part of the decorative symbol display device than when a part of the image cut off from the sub display device 209 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the execution of the symbol variation display. The case where it is displayed on 208 may be configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display. In addition, the character image h3 of the palace is in a forward orientation. The character string image h7 is a positive aspect. The entire character string image h7 is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. During the moving operation of drawing the curved trajectory in the lower left diagonal direction of the sub display device 209, the character string image h7 moves the sub display device 209 at the same speed as the movement of the sub display device 209 in the lower left diagonal direction. It is displayed as a moving image that moves in the combined direction of the direction that draws the curved trajectory in the opposite direction and the vertical downward direction. The character string image h7 is gradually displayed from the right side.

FIG. 183 (e) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 has completed and stopped the moving operation of drawing a curved trajectory in the diagonally downward left direction. In FIG. 183 (e), in the character image h3 of the palace, the right end portion (in this example, the entire left ear and a part of the left side of the head) is cut off. A star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 due to the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d). In the lower left corner of the image display area of the sub-display device 209, a portion of the character string image h7 other than the left side of "this" is displayed. After the sub-display device 209 is stopped, the character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image moving downward. In FIG. 183 (e), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h7 of "hit" indicates the moving direction of the character string image h7. Further, in the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209, a portion of the character string image h11 of "probability variation" excluding the upper left portion of "probability" is displayed. The character string image h11 is displayed as a moving image moving downward, and is gradually displayed from the lower side thereof. In FIG. 183 (e), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h11 of "probability change" indicates the moving direction of the character string image h11.

FIG. 183 (f) shows a state in which the character string image h7 is erased while the sub-display device 209 is stopped. The character string image h7 is displayed as a moving image moving downward, and is gradually erased from the lower side. Further, the entire character string image h11 of "probability variation" is displayed in the upper left corner of the image display area of the sub display device 209. The character string image h11 is displayed as a moving image moving downward, and is gradually displayed from the lower side thereof. In FIG. 183 (f), the downward arrow shown on the right side of the character string image h11 of "probability change" indicates the moving direction of the character string image h11. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 due to the moving operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d).

FIG. 183 (g) shows a state in which "decoration 3" is temporarily stopped and displayed in place of "decoration 2" in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character string image h11 of "probability change" displayed on the sub display device 209 is stopped and displayed. In this example, since the special figure 1 variable game is a probability variation jackpot (15R special jackpot), the character string image h11 of "probability variation" is stopped and displayed on the sub display device 209, and it is foretold that it is a probability variation jackpot. After that, the "decoration 3" of the symbol combination in the case of a probability variation jackpot is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c. Further, a star-shaped effect image is displayed around the character image h3 in the image display area of the decorative pattern display device 208. The star-shaped effect image is displayed in place of the effect image that has been cut off from the sub display device 209 due to the movement operation of the sub display device 209 in FIGS. 183 (c) to 183 (d).

FIG. 183 (h) shows a state in which the sub-display device 209 returns to the second position in FIG. 183 (b) by executing a moving operation of drawing a curved trajectory in the upper right diagonal direction. In FIG. 183 (h), the arrow illustrated above the sub-display device 209 indicates the moving direction of the sub-display device 209. Further, the lamp r5 is turned off. In this example, the lamp r5 is turned off prior to the start of movement to return to the second position of the sub-display device 209. The lamp r5 may be turned off at the same time as the movement of the sub display device 209 is started, the lamp r5 may be turned off while the sub display device 209 is moving, or the lamp r5 may be turned off at the second position of the sub display device 209. The lamp r5 may be turned off at the time of stopping, or the lamp r5 may be turned off after the stop at the second position of the sub-display device 209.

FIG. 183 (i) shows a state in which the sub display device 209 has moved upward and stopped at the initial position. All the displays in the image display area of the sub-display device 209 have been erased.

FIG. 183 (j) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. Since the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit (big hit of "special figure A", probability variation big hit), the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 1 variable game is shown in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination "decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3" indicating that the hit was a probable change jackpot is displayed as a stop (confirmed stop display), and the jackpot is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area 933. The fourth symbol of the display mode to be notified (in this example, the display mode of "○") is stopped and displayed.

In this way, the sub-display device 209 may be capable of performing a moving operation that draws a curved trajectory. Further, the sub-display device 209 may execute a moving operation of drawing a curved trajectory while moving in the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment described above will be described again with reference to FIGS. 176 to 183.

(V1)
A game table provided with an image display means (for example, a sub display device 209) including an image display.
The image display means has a first motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern of the sub-display devices 209 shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to (f), and the motion of the sub-display devices 209 shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to (m). An operation according to the operation (hereinafter, "first operation" (for example, an operation of moving from the initial position to the second position, rotating, and returning to the first position, or an operation from the initial position to the second position). It is possible to perform the operation of moving, rotating, moving diagonally, rotating, and returning to the first position).
During the execution of the first operation by the image display means, change conditions (for example, magnetic anomaly error, magnetic field anomaly error, abnormal winning error, vibration error, door opening error) occur. , When the start of the vibration fluctuation display of the decorative symbol or the start of the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol is established, the fourth operation (for example, the stop operation) even during the first motion pattern , Operation to return to the initial position)
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with the configuration, the effect may be executed by various operations by the image display means.

(V2)
The game console described in (V1) above.
The first motion pattern is an initial position (hereinafter, “first position” (for example, FIGS. 176 (a), (f), 177 (a), (m), 178 (a), The image display means at (f), (a'), (the position of the sub-display device 209 in (f'))) is at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter, "second position"). After moving to a "position" (eg, the position of the sub-display device 209 in FIGS. 176 (c), 177 (c), 178 (b), (b')), the first. A movement pattern that moves to a position,
A game table characterized by that.

(V3)
The game console described in (V2) above.
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position (for example, an operation of returning to the initial position).
A game table characterized by that.

(V4)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V3) above.
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation (for example, an operation of stopping the rotary motion and an operation of stopping the linear motion shown in FIGS. 176 (e) and 176 (f)).
A game table characterized by that.

(V5)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V4) above.
The image display means moves from a second motion pattern (for example, from a first position to a second position, moves in an oblique direction, and moves in an oblique direction opposite to the oblique direction to a second position. It is possible to perform an operation (hereinafter referred to as "second operation") according to the motion pattern of returning to the first position and moving to the first position.
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game table is characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.

(V6)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V5) above.
It is provided with symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934).
The image display means can execute an operation (hereinafter, referred to as "third operation") according to a third motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f)).
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
The third operation is an operation including an operation of moving in the first direction (for example, to the left).
During the execution of the third operation, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction (for example, to the right) opposite to the first direction (for example, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess). By displaying an image of a pattern including the above on the image display means, it is possible to make the player appear as if the pattern is not moving in the first direction.
In the state before the image display means performs the third operation, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 179 (b)).
By the third operation of the image display means, the first display as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the image display means (for example, the entire character image h4 of the princess). (Indication including) may be performed (see, for example, FIG. 179 (f)).
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

(V7)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V6) above.
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image display means”) is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position of the second image display means is closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(V8)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(V9)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V7) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(V10)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V9) above.
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state (for example, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, abnormality winning error, vibration error, door opening error) has occurred.
A game table characterized by that.

(V11)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V10) above.
The image display means can display a design (for example, a decorative design).
The change condition may be satisfied in response to the arrival of the stop timing of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(V12)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V10) above.
The image display means can display a design (for example, a decorative design).
The change condition is satisfied in response to the arrival of the stop timing of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(V13)
The game console according to (V11) or (V12) above.
The game table is characterized in that the stop timing of the symbol is the fixed stop display timing of the symbol.

(V14)
The game console according to (V11) or (V12) above.
The stop timing of the symbol is the start timing of the shaking fluctuation display (for example, temporary stop display) of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.

(V15)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V14) above.
During execution of the first operation by the image display means, a second change condition (for example, pressing a chance button) different from the change condition (hereinafter, referred to as “first change condition”) is satisfied. If there is, it is configured to perform the fourth movement even in the middle of the first movement pattern.
A game table characterized by that.

(V16)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V15) above.
When the third change condition (for example, holding increase of either special figure 1 or special figure 2) is satisfied during the execution of the first operation by the image display means, the first movement It is configured to perform the fourth operation even in the middle of the pattern.
The third change condition is different from the first change condition.
The third change condition is different from the second change condition.
A game table characterized by that.

(V17)
The game console according to any one of (V1) to (V16) above.
When the fourth change condition (for example, the start of the effect to be preferentially executed) is satisfied during the execution of the first operation by the image display means, it is in the middle of the first motion pattern. However, it is configured to perform the fourth operation.
The fourth change condition is different from the first change condition.
The fourth change condition is different from the second change condition.
The fourth change condition is different from the third change condition.
A game table characterized by that.

(W1)
A game table provided with an image display means (for example, a sub display device 209) including an image display.
The image display means has a first motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern of the sub-display devices 209 shown in FIGS. 176 (b) to (f), and the motion of the sub-display devices 209 shown in FIGS. 177 (a) to (m). An operation according to a pattern) (hereinafter referred to as a "first operation" (for example, an operation of moving from an initial position to a second position, rotating, and returning to the first position)) can be executed.
During the execution of the first operation by the image display means, change conditions (for example, a magnetic anomaly error, a magnetic field anomaly error, an anomaly winning error, a vibration error, and a door opening error occur. , The start of the vibration fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and the start of the fixed stop display of the decorative symbol), the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the first motion pattern. And
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state (for example, magnetic abnormality error, magnetic field abnormality error, abnormality winning error, vibration error, door opening error) has occurred.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with the configuration, the effect may be executed by various operations by the image display means.

(W2)
The game console described in (W1) above.
The first motion pattern is an initial position (hereinafter, “first position” (for example, FIGS. 176 (a), (f), 177 (a), (m), 178 (a), The image display means at (f), (a'), (the position of the sub-display device 209 in (f'))) is at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter, "second position"). After moving to a "position" (eg, the position of the sub-display device 209 in FIGS. 176 (c), 177 (c), 178 (b), (b')), the first. A movement pattern that moves to a position,
A game table characterized by that.

(W3)
The game console described in (W2) above.
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position (for example, an operation of returning to the initial position).
A game table characterized by that.

(W4)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W3) above.
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation (for example, an operation of stopping the rotary motion and an operation of stopping the linear motion shown in FIGS. 176 (e) and 176 (f)).
A game table characterized by that.

(W5)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W4) above.
The image display means operates according to a second motion pattern (for example, a motion pattern that moves from a first position to a second position, moves in an oblique direction, and moves to a second position) (hereinafter, "Second action") is feasible and
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game table is characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.

(W6)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W5) above.
It is provided with symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c and fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934).
The image display means can execute an operation (hereinafter, referred to as "third operation") according to a third motion pattern (for example, the motion pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f)).
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
The third operation is an operation including an operation of moving in the first direction (for example, to the left).
During the execution of the third operation, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction (for example, to the right) opposite to the first direction (for example, the character image h3 of the palace and the character image h4 of the princess). By displaying an image of a pattern including the above on the image display means, it is possible to make the player appear as if the pattern is not moving in the first direction.
In the state before the image display means performs the third operation, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. (See, for example, FIG. 179 (b)).
By the third operation of the image display means, the first display as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the image display means (for example, the entire character image h4 of the princess). (Indication including) may be performed (see, for example, FIG. 179 (f)).
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

(W7)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W6) above.
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image display means”) is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position of the second image display means is closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(W8)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(W9)
The game console according to any one of (W1) to (W7) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(X1)
An image display means (for example, a sub-display device 209) including an image display, and
With the symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first motion (eg, a linear motion to the left).
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction (for example, to the left).
Images of a pattern moved in a second direction (for example, to the right) opposite to the first direction during the execution of the first movement (for example, FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)). By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image including the character image h4 of the princess shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is oriented in the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern") is displayed as the image. It is configured so as not to fit in the display area of the means (for example, in the image display area of the sub display device 209).
Due to the first movement of the image display means, the first display (for example, the character image h4 of the princess) as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the image display means. For example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (h) may be performed.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the display displayed on the image display means is different for each jackpot reliability due to the movement of the image display means, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display means. You may be able to do it.

(X2)
The game console described in (X1) above.
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as an image of the first pattern is accommodated in the display area of the image display means (for example). , Display including the entire ninja character image) may be performed,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

(X3)
The game console described in (X2) above.
The second display (for example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(X4)
The game console according to any one of (X1) to (X3) above.
The image display means can perform a second movement (for example, a movement to move to the right).
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of the palace and the character string image h8 of "?!") Is displayed. By displaying it on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern is not moving in the second direction.
A game table characterized by that.

(X5)
The game console according to any one of (X1) to (X4) above.
During the execution of the first movement, the moving images of the pattern (for example, the character images h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f), and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), (f) A moving image in which the character image h4 of the princess shown moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(X6)
The game console according to any one of (X1) to (X5) above.
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image display means”) is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(X7)
The game console described in (X6) above.
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub-display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
A game table characterized by that.

(X8)
The game console according to any one of (X1) to (X7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(X9)
The game console according to any one of (X1) to (X7) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(Y1)
An image display means (for example, a sub-display device 209) including an image display, and
With the symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first motion (eg, a linear motion to the left).
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction (for example, to the left).
Images of a pattern moved in a second direction (for example, to the right) opposite to the first direction during the execution of the first movement (for example, FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)). By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image including the character image h4 of the princess shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is oriented in the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern") is displayed as the image. It is configured so as not to fit in the display area of the means (for example, in the image display area of the sub display device 209).
Due to the first movement of the image display means, the first display (for example, the character image h4 of the princess) as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the image display means. For example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (h) may be performed.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
The first movement is a movement including a linear movement (for example, a movement movement in an up-down, left-right, diagonal direction, and a case where the movement movement is performed in a curved trajectory shape before, after, or during the movement movement).
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the display displayed on the image display means is different for each jackpot reliability due to the movement of the image display means, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display means. You may be able to do it. The first movement may be a movement including at least linear movement. The first motion may be a linear locomotion motion. The image display means may only be able to perform linear movement and stop depending on the first movement.

(Y2)
The game console described in (Y1) above.
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as an image of the first pattern is accommodated in the display area of the image display means (for example). , Display including the entire ninja character image) may be performed,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

(Y3)
The game console described in (Y2) above.
The second display (for example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Y4)
The game console according to any one of (Y1) to (Y3) above.
The image display means can perform a second movement (for example, a movement to move to the right).
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of the palace and the character string image h8 of "?!") Is displayed. By displaying it on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern is not moving in the second direction.
A game table characterized by that.

(Y5)
The game console according to any one of (Y1) to (Y4) above.
During the execution of the first movement, the moving images of the pattern (for example, the character images h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f), and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), (f) A moving image in which the character image h4 of the princess shown moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Y6)
The game console according to any one of (Y1) to (Y5) above.
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image display means”) is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Y7)
The game console described in (Y6) above.
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub-display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
A game table characterized by that.

(Y8)
The game console according to any one of (Y1) to (Y7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(Y9)
The game console according to any one of (Y1) to (Y7) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

(Z1)
An image display means (for example, a sub-display device 209) including an image display, and
With the symbol display means (for example, left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, fourth symbol display areas 933 and 934),
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is capable of performing a first motion (eg, a linear motion to the left).
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction (for example, to the left).
Images of a pattern moved in a second direction (for example, to the right) opposite to the first direction during the execution of the first movement (for example, FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (f)). By displaying the character image h3 of Yoshimune and the image including the character image h4 of the princess shown in FIGS. 179 (c), (e), and (f) on the image display means, the pattern is oriented in the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, an image (for example, a princess character image h4) of a part of the pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first pattern") is displayed as the image. It is configured so as not to fit in the display area of the means (for example, in the image display area of the sub display device 209).
Due to the first movement of the image display means, the first display (for example, the character image h4 of the princess) as the image of the first pattern is contained in the display area of the image display means. For example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (h) may be performed.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A structure (for example, frames fa1 and fa2) is provided at the edge of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

According to the game console provided with this configuration, the display displayed on the image display means is different for each jackpot reliability due to the movement of the image display means, so that the player can pay attention to the movement and display of the image display means. You may be able to do it.

(Z2)
The game console described in (Z1) above.
Due to the first movement of the image display means, a second display (for example, a ninja character image) as an image of the first pattern is accommodated in the display area of the image display means (for example). , Display including the entire ninja character image) may be performed,
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.

(Z3)
The game console described in (Z2) above.
The second display (for example, the display including the entire character image h4 of the princess shown in FIG. 179 (f)) is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means. When the display (for example, the display including the entire character image of the ninja) is performed, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed after the symbol variation display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Z4)
The game console according to any one of (Z1) to (Z3) above.
The image display means can perform a second movement (for example, a movement to move to the right).
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction (for example, the image of the pattern including the character image h3 of the palace and the character string image h8 of "?!") Is displayed. By displaying it on the means, it is possible to show the player that the pattern is not moving in the second direction.
A game table characterized by that.

(Z5)
The game console according to any one of (Z1) to (Z4) above.
During the execution of the first movement, the moving images of the pattern (for example, the character images h3 of Yoshimune shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to (f), and FIGS. 179 (c), (e), (f) A moving image in which the character image h4 of the princess shown moves in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the sub display device 209) is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.

(Z6)
The game console according to any one of (Z1) to (Z5) above.
A first image display means (for example, a decorative pattern display device 208) different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as “second image display means”) is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Z7)
The game console described in (Z6) above.
The height and width of the first image display are different (for example, the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
The height and width of the second image display are different (for example, the image display area of the sub-display device 209 has a horizontally long rectangular shape).
A game table characterized by that.

(Z8)
The game console according to any one of (Z1) to (Z7) above.
The game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game table characterized by that.

(Z9)
The game console according to any one of (Z1) to (Z7) above.
The game console is a slot machine (eg, slot machine 2000).
A game table characterized by that.

In FIGS. 23 to 26 of the first embodiment and FIGS. 176 to 183 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves an image in the direction opposite to the direction in which the sub display device 209 moves or rotates. These are examples of the effects, and the sub-display device 209 may be moved upwards, downwards, or diagonally upward to the left. It may be moved diagonally downward to the left, diagonally upward to the right, or diagonally downward to the right. It may rotate in a clockwise direction, it may rotate in a counterclockwise direction, and one of these movements may be followed by the other of these movements. May be done.

In FIGS. 23 to 26 of the first embodiment and FIGS. 176 to 183 of the present embodiment, the sub display device 209 moves an image in the direction opposite to the direction in which the sub display device 209 moves or rotates. However, when the sub-display device 209 is moving or rotating, the player can see that the image displayed on the sub-display device 209 is moving or rotating in the same direction as the sub-display device 209. The image may be displayed so that it looks like (see, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 22). For example, if a certain image (for example, a hold icon, a variable icon, a decorative symbol, or any other image) is displayed on the sub display device 209, and the sub display device 209 moves, the image also appears to move due to the movement. It may be shown to the player as follows. As shown in FIG. 22, if the sub display device 209 moves, the initial operation of the sub display device 209 and the initial display of the sub display device 209 when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on can be seen as the initial display also moves. It may be configured as.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp or lighting is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced as long as it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

For example, the above embodiment can be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses the game balls enclosed in the game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine in which a ball is enclosed and the enclosed ball is circulated in the pachinko machine to be used, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed ball as a launching ball. The payout of the sphere may be performed by electronic display.

It is possible to combine the items described in the above detailed description, particularly the items described in the examples and modifications shown in the first to seventh embodiments.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of the game console, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to the slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG. 184.
The game console according to the present invention corresponds to "a plurality of reels 2002 having a plurality of types of symbols and being rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing the rotation of the reels, and each reel" shown in FIG. 184. Based on the lottery result of the lottery means, the stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, the lottery means for determining the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations (winning combination internal lottery), and the lottery result. The combination of the reel stop control means (reel stop control process) that controls the stop related to the stop of the rotation of the reel and the symbol combination displayed by the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. A game in which a determination means (winning determination processing) for determining whether or not the combination of symbols is determined in advance and a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning embodiment are paid out when the stopping mode of the symbols is a predetermined winning embodiment. In addition to the payout control means (medal payout process 2008) that performs the medium payout process, the effect means 2010 that executes the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means, and this effect means puts a ball in a predetermined game area 2012. The launching device 2014 to launch, the winning opening 2016 configured to allow the ball launched from the launching device to enter, the detecting means 2018 to detect the ball entering the winning opening 2016, and the detecting means 2018 detect the ball. A payout means 2020 that pays out a ball in the event of a reel, a variable display device 2022 that variablely displays a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 that can be moved to a position that shields the variable display device 2022, and operate in a predetermined operation mode. The effect device 2010, which is provided with a movable body 2026, and which, when a game ball enters the winning opening and wins a prize, the variable display device 2022 changes the symbol and then stops and displays it to produce a game. It is also suitable for the slot machine 2000.

The game console according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 185 (a), "a bill is inserted into the bill insertion slot 3002, a lottery is executed based on the bet 3004 and start 3006 operations, and the lottery result is displayed on the lottery result display device 3008. However, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 3009 is selected, the receipt issuing machine 3010 issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, a mobile phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data that realizes the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 3C, electronic data that realizes the present invention. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data, and a home video game machine 6000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data according to the present invention.

More specifically, the mobile phone 4000 in FIG. 6B has an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through the mobile phone line, and data related to the acquired game (book). It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game (the present invention). It is provided with a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the above, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. In the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG. 6D, an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and data related to the acquired game ( It includes a storage unit that stores electronic data) that realizes the present invention, and a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6E, it may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data that realizes the present invention. In some cases, electronic data realizing the present invention may be downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG. 6D via an Internet line.

Further, the present invention can be applied to execute a game even in a game program in which the operation of an actual machine such as a pachinko machine is simulated for a home-use game machine. In that case, as the recording medium for recording the game program, a DVD-ROM, a CD-ROM, an FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used.

Further, the present invention has given an example of a pachinko machine and a slot machine as a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrange ball game machine, a rock game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means may rotate and display the first image.
When the rotation display is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
The game console described in Appendix a1.
The second image may not rotate when the rotation display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
The game console described in Appendix a2.
When the rotation display is performed, the second image does not rotate.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a3.
When the rotation display is performed, an image that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a4.
When the rotation display is performed, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation display is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices a1 to a5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
Movable body for production and
Image display means and
It is a game table equipped with
When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, it may be in the first state of displaying the first image at the first position.
The first position is a position behind the effect movable body in the image display means.
The first image is an effect image and
When the movable body for effect is operated in front of the image display means, a second state may be obtained in which the first image is displayed at a second position.
The second position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
The game console described in Appendix b1.
In the first state, the first image may be displayed straddling the first position and the third position.
The third position is a position different from the back of the movable body for effect in the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The game console described in Appendix b1 or b2.
The size of the first image in the first state is the first size.
The size of the first image in the second state is the third size.
The third size is smaller than the first size.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b3.
In the first state, the second image may be displayed in the first orientation.
In the second state, the second image may be displayed in the second direction.
The first image is an image different from the second image,
The second orientation is a orientation different from the first orientation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game console described in Appendix b4.
The size of the second image in the first state is the second size.
The size of the second image in the second state is the fourth size.
The fourth size is smaller than the second size.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices b1 to b5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
An image display unit that can display a production image that directs the game, and
The driving means for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c2)
The game console described in Appendix c1.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix c3)
The game console described in Appendix c1 or c2.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c4)
The game console described in Appendix c3.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c4.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c6)
The game console described in Appendix c5.
During the first period, the second image is configured to not move in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c7)
The game console according to Appendix c5 or c6.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.
(Appendix c8)
The game console described in Appendix c3 or c4.
“Moving by driving the driving means” described in Appendix c1 means “rotating by driving the driving means”.
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix c1 means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c9)
The game console described in Appendix c8.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix c10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices c1 to c7.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in Appendix c1 means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix c1 means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
It is a game table equipped with a first movable body that can execute a production operation that directs a game.
The game console is a pachinko machine or a slot machine.
The first movable body is configured to move from the second position to the first position when the power is turned off.
The first movable body is configured to move from the first position to the second position when the power is turned on.
The second position and the first position are different positions.
The effect operation is configured to start at the second position and end at the second position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d2)
The game console described in Appendix d1.
Even when the power is turned off while the first movable body is located at a position different from the second position, the first movable body is configured to move to the first position. Yes,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d3)
The game console described in Appendix d1 or d2.
The effect operation includes an operation of moving to a third position.
The third position and the first position are different positions.
The third position and the second position are different positions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d4)
The game console described in Appendix d3.
Equipped with image display means
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
The third position is a position in front of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d5)
The game console described in Appendix d4.
It is possible to perform jackpot operations,
The first movable body is a movable body provided on the front side of the image display means.
When the first movable body is located at the third position, the first movable body may overlap at least a part of the preview image displayed on the image display means.
The preview image is the preview image of the jackpot.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means that “the first movable body starts the initial operation from the first position”. And move to the second position at the end of the initial operation. "
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d5.
The first movable body can perform an initial operation on condition that the power is turned on.
“The first movable body moves from the first position to the second position” described in Appendix d1 means that “the first movable body moves from the first position to the second position”. The game table is characterized in that, after moving to, the initial operation is started, and at the end of the initial operation, the player moves to the second position again. "
(Appendix d8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d7.
The "when the power is turned off" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned off".
The "when the power is turned on" described in Appendix d1 means "when the main power of the game console is turned on".
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d8.
The first movable body is a movable body capable of changing its posture.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d9.
Equipped with a second movable body that can perform directing actions that direct the game,
The second movable body is a movable body that starts its operation from the position when the power is turned off when the power is turned on.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d10.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix d12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices d1 to d10.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
An image display unit that can display a production image that directs the game, and
The driving means for driving the image display unit and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display unit may be moved by the drive of the drive means.
During the period in which the image display unit is moving in the first direction (hereinafter, referred to as "first period"), the first moving image may be displayed on the image display unit.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which the first image moves in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e2)
The game console described in Appendix e1
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the first image.
(Appendix e3)
The game console described in Appendix e1 or e2.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction.
During the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction.
The first orientation and the second orientation are opposite directions.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e4)
The game console described in Appendix e3.
In the first period, the image display unit is configured to move in the first direction at the first speed.
In the first period, the first image is configured to move in the second direction at a second speed.
The first speed and the second speed are the same speed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e4.
The first moving image is a moving image including a mode in which a second image is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e6)
The game console described in Appendix e5.
During the first period, the second image is configured to not move in the first direction.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e7)
The game console described in Appendix e5 or e6.
The game table is characterized in that the first moving image is a moving image including an animation display mode based on the second image.
(Appendix e8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e7.
“Moved by the drive of the drive means” described in Appendix e1 means “rotate by the drive of the drive means”.
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix e1 means "the first image rotates in the first direction".
The first direction is a rotation direction centered on the rotation axis of the image display unit.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e9)
The game console described in Appendix e3 or e4.
The first orientation is one of clockwise and counterclockwise.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix e10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices e1 to e7.
The phrase "moving by driving the driving means" described in Appendix e1 means "moving linearly by driving the driving means".
The phrase "the first image moves in the first direction" described in Appendix e1 means "the first image moves linearly in the first direction".
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix f1)
A production movable body that can execute movable movements that produce a game,
Decorative bodies with windows and
It is a game table equipped with
Behind the decoration, the effect movable body may perform an action,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f2)
The game console described in Appendix f1.
The effect movable body is a movable body capable of displaying an image, and is
It is configured so that the player can visually recognize the image of the effect movable body through the window portion.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f3)
The game console described in Appendix f2.
Depending on the operation of the effect movable body, the image of the effect movable body visually recognized by the player through the window portion may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f3.
The ornament is operational,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f4.
Equipped with a symbol display means capable of executing variable display of symbols,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f6)
The game console described in Appendix f5.
In the variable display of the symbol by the symbol display means, when the player can visually recognize a part of the image in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body by the operation of the decorative body. The jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be definitively displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol than in the case where a part of the image in the effect movable body cannot be visually recognized by the player through the window portion of the decorative body. It is configured to be
A part of the image in the effect movable body is at least a part of the preview image.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f7)
The game console described in Appendix f5 or f6.
When the movement of the decorative body makes it possible for the player to see a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body through the window portion of the decorative body, the decorative body said. The hold corresponding to the hold icon is digested and started as compared with the case where a part of the image of the hold icon in the look-ahead mode in the effect movable body is not visible to the player through the window portion. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily confirmed and displayed as the final result of the variable display of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix f8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices f1 to f7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix g1)
A game console equipped with image display means
The image display means can perform a rotation operation and can perform a rotation operation.
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display the first image.
When the rotation operation is performed, the aspect ratio of the first image may change.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g2)
The game console described in Appendix g1
The image display means in which the rotation operation is performed may display a second image.
The second image may not rotate when the rotation operation is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g3)
The game console described in Appendix g2.
When the rotation operation is performed, the second image does not rotate.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g3.
When the rotation operation is performed, an image that has been cut off by the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be displayed on the image display means by performing the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g4.
When the rotation operation is performed, the image displayed on the image display means before the rotation operation is performed may be cut off by the image display means due to the rotation operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix g7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices g1 to g5.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix h1)
A production movable body that can execute production operations that produce a game,
A base body that can support the production movable body and
It is a game table equipped with
The effect movable body is capable of performing a rotational movement.
A slip ring is provided on one of the effect movable body and the base body.
A conductive portion is provided on the other side of the effect movable body and the base body.
When the slip ring and the conductive portion come into contact with each other, power is supplied from the side of the base body to the side of the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h2)
The game console described in Appendix h1
The base body is provided with the first communication means.
The effect movable body is provided with a second communication means.
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving a signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h3)
The game console described in Appendix h1 or h2.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of optical wireless communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h3.
Both the first communication means and the second communication means are means capable of laser communication.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h4.
The slip ring is provided on the effect movable body, and the slip ring is provided on the effect movable body.
The conductive portion is provided on the base body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix h6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices h1 to h5.
The effect movable body is provided with an image display means.
The second communication means is a means capable of receiving an image information signal transmitted from the first communication means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix i1)
A symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
Image display means that can display images and
The first operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A second operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
It is a game table equipped with
The game table is a pachinko machine,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation waiting display.
The third type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a third type of operation response display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fourth type of operation response display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a fifth type of operation response display.
The third type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means.
The third type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means.
The fourth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the first operation means.
The fourth type of operation response display is a display configured to include the part of the display performed when waiting for the operation of the second operation means.
The fifth type of operation response display is a display performed in response to the operation of the second operation means.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the third type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i2)
The game console described in Appendix i1
Any type of the third type of operation response display and the fourth type of operation response display in response to the operation of the first operation means during the display of the third operation waiting display. Whether or not the display of is displayed is determined before the third operation waiting display is displayed on the image display means.
The third operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the third types of operation waiting displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i3)
The game console described in Appendix i1 or i2.
The image display means can display a fourth type of operation waiting display.
The fourth type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth type of operation waiting display, the fourth type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fourth type of operation waiting display is performed is more than the symbol variation display in which the operation waiting display of the third type is performed without performing the operation waiting display of the fourth type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i4)
The game console described in Appendix i3.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation waiting display.
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying the first type of operation response display.
The first type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the first operating means.
The first type of operation response display is a display configured not to include a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operation means.
When the first operation means is operated during the display of the first type of operation waiting display, the first type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The first operation response display is configured to be displayed only when the first operation means is operated during the display of the first operation waiting display.
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed when the first operation means is operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display.
The fourth operation response display is configured to be displayed even if the first operation means is not operated during the display of the fourth operation waiting display.
The first operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the first type of operation waiting displays.
The first operation response display is an operation response display of one of the first types of operation response displays.
The fourth operation waiting display is an operation waiting display of one of the fourth types of operation waiting displays.
The fourth operation response display is an operation response display of one of the fourth types of operation response displays.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i5)
The game console described in Appendix i4.
The symbol variation display with the fifth type of operation response display is better than the symbol variation display with the first type of operation response display without the fifth type of operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i6)
The game console described in Appendix i4 or i5.
The symbol variation display in which the first type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the operation response display of the third type is performed without the operation response display of the first type. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i6.
When the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the first time, the operation response display of the fourth type is the first. Is a display
When the time from the display of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means is the second time, the operation response display of the fourth type is the second. Is a display
The second time is longer than the first time,
The display at the beginning of the first display and the display at the beginning of the second display are the same.
The display at the end of the first display and the display at the end of the second display are the same.
A game table characterized in that at least a part of the display in the middle of the first display is not displayed in the second display.
(Appendix i8)
The game console described in Appendix i7.
When the first operating means is operated from the display of the third type of operation waiting display to the end of the operation valid period defined before the start of the third type of operation waiting display. It is configured so that the display is performed according to the operation of the first operating means.
The first time is the time from the start of the operation waiting display of the third type to the operation of the first operation means at the shortest timing.
The second time is a time when the first operating means is operated at a timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period after the operation waiting display of the third type is started. A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i8.
The image display means can display a second type of operation waiting display.
The second type of operation waiting display is a display performed when waiting for an operation of the second operating means.
When the second type of operation means is operated during the display of the second type of operation waiting display, the second type of operation response display is displayed on the image display means. ,
The symbol variation display in which the fifth type of operation response display is performed is better than the symbol variation display in which the second type operation response display is performed without performing the fifth type operation response display. However, the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i9.
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display is configured to be displayed on the fourth type of operation waiting display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i10.
The display of the character displayed on the fourth type of operation response display is configured to be displayed on the third type of operation waiting display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i11.
The second operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when pressed by the player.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix i13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices i1 to i12.
The first operating means is configured to be determined to have been operated when rotated by the player.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix j1)
It is a game table equipped with an effect display means capable of executing the effect display.
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a symbol variation display.
The effect display means is a display means capable of executing a plurality of types of reach effects.
The effect display means is a display means composed of a plurality of image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is the first image display means.
The image display means of one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means.
The reach effect of one of the plurality of types of reach effects is the first reach effect.
The reach effect of one of the plurality of types of reach effects is the second reach effect.
The symbol variation display on which the second reach effect is performed is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode is more easily confirmed and displayed than the symbol variation display on which the first reach effect is performed.
It is possible to perform the first wipe effect display in the first image display means after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the second reach effect.
It is possible to perform the second wipe effect display in the second image display means after the display suggesting the deviation is performed in the second reach effect.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j2)
The game console described in Appendix j1.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
The second wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j3)
The game console described in Appendix j1 or j2.
The pre-reading notice is configured by at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j3.
The image display means constituting the first image display means and the image display means constituting the second image display means are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j4.
In the second reach effect, a plurality of types of symbols can be displayed in a variable manner.
At least one of the plurality of types of symbols is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display, and the wipe effect is erased. It is configured to be redisplayed when the display ends.
The one symbol is configured to change from the first display mode to the second display mode.
The first display mode is a display mode of the one symbol before the one wipe effect display is performed.
The second display mode is a display mode of the one symbol after the one wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j5.
In the second reach effect, the display of a plurality of characters can be executed.
Display of multiple characters One of the characters is the display of the first character.
The display of the first character is erased by displaying at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display. ..
(Appendix j7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j6.
The background display changes before and after the wipe effect display of at least one of the first wipe effect display and the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j7.
Equipped with a ball storage means that can store game balls
The first image display means can display a display (hereinafter, referred to as "ball removal display") for notifying that the game ball is pulled out from the ball storage means.
The ball removal display is a display that overlaps with the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the first wipe effect display.
The ball removal display is configured to be visible to the player even during the display of the second wipe effect display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j8.
The first wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the first wipe display.
The first wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the first wipe display.
The second wipe effect display is configured to include an appearance display of the second wipe display.
The second wipe effect display is configured to include a withdrawal display of the second wipe display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j10)
The game console described in Appendix j9.
The design of the first wipe display and the design of the second wipe display are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j11)
The game console described in Appendix j9 or j10.
The start timing of the appearance display of the first wipe display and the start timing of the appearance display of the second wipe display are different.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j11.
The second image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the second image display means performing the movement operation, at least a part of the second wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j13)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j12.
The first image display means is a means capable of executing a moving operation.
In the first image display means performing the moving operation, at least a part of the first wipe effect display is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix j14)
The game console according to any one of the appendices j1 to j13.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix k1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k2)
The game console described in Appendix k1
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k3)
The game console described in Appendix k1 or k2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices k1 to k3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k5)
The game console described in Appendix k4,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k6)
The game console described in Appendix k5.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices k1 to k6.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k8)
The game console described in Appendix k7.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices k1 to k8.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display and the third wipe effect display in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that the player can select whether to display the wipe effect display of.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix k10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices k1 to k9.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix m1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the first look-ahead notice effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first look-ahead notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m2)
The game console described in Appendix m1.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m3)
The game console described in Appendix m1 or m2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m4)
The game console according to any one of Appendix 1 to 3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m5)
The game console described in Appendix m4.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first look-ahead notice effect display may be started.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m6)
The game console described in Appendix m5.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m7)
The game console described in Appendix m5 or m6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m8)
The game console described in Appendix m7.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices m1 to m8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix m10)
The game console described in Appendix m9,
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix n1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first jackpot notice effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
At the end of the first wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n2)
The game console described in Appendix n1
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n3)
The game console according to Appendix n1 or n2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices n1 to n3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n5)
The game console described in Appendix n4.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
At the end of the third wipe effect display, the first jackpot notice effect display may be started.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n6)
The game console described in Appendix n5.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n7)
The game console according to Appendix n5 or n6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n8)
The game console described in Appendix n7.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices n1 to n8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix n10)
The game console described in Appendix n9.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix o1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, the effect adjustment screen may be started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o3)
The game console described in Appendix o1 or o2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices o1 to o3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o5)
The game console described in Appendix o4,
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o6)
The game console described in Appendix o5.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o7)
The game console described in Appendix o5 or o6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o8)
The game console described in Appendix o7,
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices o1 to o8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o10)
The game console described in Appendix o9.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix o11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices o1 to o10.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix p1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect adjustment screens.
The display of one of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is the first effect adjustment screen.
The display of one of the plurality of types of effect adjustment screens is the second effect adjustment screen.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, the first effect adjustment screen may be started to be displayed.
In the first wipe effect display, the second effect adjustment screen is not started to be displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p2)
The game console described in Appendix p1
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p3)
The game console described in Appendix p1 or p2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices p1 to p3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p5)
The game console described in Appendix p4,
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p6)
The game console described in Appendix p5.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p7)
The game console described in Appendix p5 or p6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p8)
The game console described in Appendix p7.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices p1 to p8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix p10)
The game console described in Appendix 9.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix q1)
Operation means and
The first image display means that can display an image display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
When the operating means is operated during the display of the screen requesting the operation of the operating means, the response display can be displayed in the first image display means.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
During the display of the first wipe effect display, the response display may be performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q2)
The game console described in Appendix 1.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q3)
The game console described in Appendix q1 or q2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices q1 to q3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q5)
The game console described in Appendix q4.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q6)
The game console described in Appendix 5,
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q7)
The game console according to Appendix q5 or q6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q8)
The game console described in Appendix q7.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices q1 to q8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix q10)
The game console described in Appendix q9.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix r1)
The first image display means that can display an image display,
Movable body for production and
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
At least a part of the first wipe effect display may overlap with the effect movable body.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r2)
The game console described in Appendix r1
In the first reach effect display, the effect movable body is configured to operate.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r3)
The game console described in Appendix r1 or r2.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices r1 to r3.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices r1 to r4.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r6)
The game console described in Appendix r5.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r7)
The game console described in Appendix r6.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r8)
The game console described in Appendix r6 or r7.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r9)
The game console described in Appendix r8.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix r10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices r1 to r9.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix s1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
At the first timing, the display of the first wipe effect display may be started in the first image display means.
The first timing is the timing after the big hit is started.
The first timing is a timing before the start of variable display of the symbol.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s2)
The game console described in Appendix s1.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s3)
The game console described in Appendix s2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices s1 to s3.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices s1 to s4.
At the first timing, the display of the third wipe effect display may be started in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s6)
The game console described in Appendix s5.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices s1 to s6.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix s8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices s1 to s7.
The game console is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix t1)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the held display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t2)
The game console described in Appendix t1.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t3)
The game console described in Appendix t1 or t2.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices t1 to t3.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t5)
The game console described in Appendix t4.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t6)
The game console described in Appendix t5.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t7)
The game console described in Appendix t5 or t6.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t8)
The game console described in Appendix t7.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices t1 to t8.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
A game table characterized in that the second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
(Appendix t10)
The game console described in Appendix t9.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t11)
It is a game table equipped with a first image display means capable of displaying an image display.
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
In the first reach effect display, after a display suggesting a deviation is displayed, the first wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the hold display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, the volume adjustment screen may be started by the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t12)
The game console described in Appendix t11.
The first wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t13)
The game console according to Appendix t11 or t12.
In the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be the case,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t14)
The game console according to any one of the appendices t11 to t13.
Equipped with a symbol display means that can execute symbol variation display,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t15)
The game console described in Appendix t14.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display may be displayed in the first image display means.
The third wipe effect display is configured to wipe out the image in the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t16)
The game console described in Appendix t15.
In the first reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured to be in some cases,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t17)
The game console according to Appendix t15 or t16.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the third reach effect display.
The first wipe effect in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The third wipe effect is produced in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the third reach effect display and the time when the deviation symbol mode is confirmed and displayed in the symbol display means. It is configured so that the display is not displayed
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the first reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t18)
The game console described in Appendix t17.
The effect display of one of the plurality of types of effect displays is the second reach effect display.
In the second reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
In the second reach effect display, the third wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. It is configured so that it never happens
The big hit symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed on the symbol display means in the symbol variation display in which the second reach effect display is performed than in the symbol variation display in which the third reach effect display is performed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t19)
The game console according to any one of the appendices t11 to t18.
Equipped with a second image display means capable of displaying an image display
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
A game table characterized in that the second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
(Appendix t20)
The game console described in Appendix t19.
The second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means between the time when the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display and the time when the disengaged symbol mode is confirmed and displayed. Is composed of
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix t21)
The first image display means that can display an image display,
A second image display means that can display an image display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means.
After the first wipe effect display is finished, the display of the hold display means, which has been hidden, may be started.
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, the volume adjustment screen may be started by the first image display means.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means.
During at least a part of the period from the start of the display of the first wipe effect display to the end of the display, the display of the combination of decorative symbols indicating the deviation is displayed on the first image display means.
During the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display to the end of the display, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix u1)
A symbol display means that can execute variable display of symbols, and
An image display means that can display the number of hold icons according to the number of holds,
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of types of the hold icons (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of hold icons").
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having the second aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “second hold icon”).
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having a third aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “third hold icon”).
The second aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
In the image display means, a hold effect may be performed in which the change in the mode of the hold icon is either successful or unsuccessful.
In the image display means, any one of a plurality of types of the above-mentioned hold effect (hereinafter, referred to as "a plurality of types of hold effect") may be performed.
The hold effect of one of the plurality of types of hold effects is the first hold effect.
When the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon.
Even if the first hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The first hold effect is more than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not targeted for any of the plurality of types of hold effects. The variable display of the symbol that is the target of the above and does not change to another type of hold icon and is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is more likely to finally confirm the jackpot symbol mode. Is configured to
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u2)
The game console described in Appendix u1
The second hold icon, which is not the target of any of the plurality of types of hold effects, is the target of the first hold effect rather than the probability of being the target of the first hold effect. The second hold icon, which has not changed to another type of hold icon, is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the first hold effect.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u3)
The game console described in Appendix u1 or u2.
One type of hold icon among the plurality of types of hold icons is a hold icon having the first aspect (hereinafter, referred to as “first hold icon”).
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
The first aspect and the third aspect are different aspects.
The first aspect is a default aspect.
The first hold icon is the default hold icon.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the first hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the third hold icon is more final than the variable display of the symbol that is started by digesting the hold corresponding to the first hold icon. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u4)
The game console described in Appendix u3.
The image display means is configured to be able to display a changing icon as a hold icon.
When the hold is reduced, the hold icon that appeared most recently is configured to be displayed as the changing icon.
The changing icon is configured to be erased at least before the pending decrement.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u5)
The game console described in Appendix u3 or u4.
The hold effect of one of the plurality of types of hold effects is the second hold effect.
The first hold effect and the second hold effect are different hold effects.
When the second hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may change to the third hold icon.
Even if the second hold effect is performed on the second hold icon, the second hold icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
The hold icon is the first hold, rather than the probability that the second hold icon, which is the target of the first hold effect and has not changed to another type of hold icon, is the target of the second hold effect. It is configured so that the probability of being the target of the production is higher,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u6)
The game console described in Appendix u5.
The second hold icon is targeted at the second hold icon rather than the probability that the first hold effect is performed for the second hold icon and the second hold icon changes to the third hold icon. Is configured so that the probability that the second hold icon is changed to the third hold icon is higher.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u7)
The game console described in Appendix u5 or u6.
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter, referred to as "second changing icon") having the second aspect.
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter, referred to as a "third changing icon") having the third aspect.
The hold effect of one of the plurality of types of hold effects is the third hold effect.
The first hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects.
The second hold effect and the third hold effect are different hold effects.
When the third hold effect is performed on the second changing icon, the second changing icon may change to the third changing icon.
Even if the third hold effect is performed on the second changing icon, the second changing icon may not change to another type of hold icon.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u8)
The game console described in Appendix u7.
The probability of being the target of the first hold effect after the second hold icon, which was the target of the first hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon, became the changing icon, The changing icon is configured to have a higher probability of being the target of the third hold effect.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u9)
The game console described in Appendix u7 or u8.
In the symbol variation display started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was not the target of any of the hold effects of the plurality of types of hold effects, the changing icon is targeted. Rather than the probability that the third hold effect will be performed, the symbol corresponding to the second hold icon that was the target of the first hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon was digested and started. In the variation display, the probability that the third hold effect targeting the changing icon is performed is higher.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u10)
The game console according to any one of the appendices u7 to u9.
In the symbol variation display that was started by digesting the hold corresponding to the second hold icon that was the target of the first hold effect and did not change to another type of hold icon, the first hold icon was targeted. It is configured so that the above-mentioned success is likely to occur when the third pending production is performed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u11)
The game console according to any one of the appendices u7 to u10.
The image display means can display a changing icon (hereinafter, referred to as "first changing icon") having the first aspect.
The first changing icon is the default changing icon.
The variable display of the symbol on which the second changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the first changing icon is displayed and the other types of changing icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol on which the third changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the first changing icon is displayed and the other types of changing icons are not displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
The variable display of the symbol on which the third changing icon is displayed is more final than the variable display of the symbol in which the second changing icon is displayed and no other type of changing icon is displayed. It is configured so that the jackpot symbol mode can be easily displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix u12)
The game console according to any one of the appendices u1 to u11.
Equipped with a ball storage means that can store game balls
The image display means is a means capable of displaying a display (hereinafter, referred to as "ball discharge display") for prompting the discharge of game balls from the ball storage means.
It is configured so that at least one of the plurality of types of hold effects displayed in the state where the ball discharge display is displayed may overlap with the ball discharge display.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix v1)
A game console equipped with an image display means including an image display.
The image display means can perform an operation according to the first motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first motion").
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the first operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the first motion pattern.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v2)
The game console described in Appendix v1
The first motion pattern means that the image display means located at the initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”) is at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter, “second position”). It is a movement pattern that moves to the first position after moving to ().
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v3)
The game console described in Appendix v2,
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v3.
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v4.
The image display means can perform an operation according to the second motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second motion").
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game table is characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
(Appendix v6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v5.
Equipped with a symbol display means
The image display means can perform an operation according to a third motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a "third motion").
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
The third operation is an operation including an operation of moving in the first direction.
During the execution of the third operation, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the third operation, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
By the third operation of the image display means, the first display in which the first image is contained in the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern may be performed.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v6.
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display means") is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position of the second image display means is closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix v9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices v1 to v7.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix w1)
A game console equipped with an image display means including an image display.
The image display means can perform an operation according to the first motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "first motion").
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the first motion by the image display means, the fourth motion is performed even in the middle of the first motion pattern.
The change condition is satisfied when it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w2)
The game console described in Appendix w1
The first motion pattern means that the image display means located at the initial position (hereinafter, referred to as “first position”) is at least at a position different from the first position (hereinafter, “second position”). It is a movement pattern that moves to the first position after moving to ().
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w3)
The game console described in Appendix w2
The fourth operation is an operation including an operation of returning to the first position.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w3.
The fourth operation is an operation including a stop operation.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w4.
The image display means can perform an operation according to the second motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "second motion").
When the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the second operation by the image display means, the fourth operation is performed even in the middle of the second movement pattern. ,
The game table is characterized in that the second movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
(Appendix w6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w5.
Equipped with a symbol display means
The image display means can perform an operation according to a third motion pattern (hereinafter, referred to as a "third motion").
The third movement pattern is a movement pattern different from the first movement pattern.
The third operation is an operation including an operation of moving in the first direction.
During the execution of the third operation, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is in the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the third operation, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
By the third operation of the image display means, the first display in which the first image is contained in the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern may be performed.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w7)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w6.
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display means") is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position of the second image display means is closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix w9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices w1 to w7.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix x1)
An image display means including an image display and
Design display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means can perform the first movement and
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction.
During the execution of the first movement, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is moved to the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause the first display in which the first image is contained within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x2)
The game console described in Appendix x1
The first movement of the image display means may cause a second display in which a second image is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x3)
The game console described in Appendix x2.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed after the symbol variation display when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices x1 to x3.
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement and
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction is displayed on the image display means so that the player does not move the pattern in the second direction. It is possible to show,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices x1 to x4.
During the execution of the first movement, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices x1 to x5.
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display means") is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x7)
The game console described in Appendix x6.
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices x1 to x7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix x9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices x1 to x7.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix y1)
An image display means including an image display and
Design display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means can perform the first movement and
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction.
During the execution of the first movement, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is moved to the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause the first display in which the first image is contained within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
The first movement is a movement including linear movement.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y2)
The game console described in Appendix y1
The first movement of the image display means may cause a second display in which a second image is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y3)
The game console described in Appendix y2.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed after the symbol variation display when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices y1 to y3.
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement and
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction is displayed on the image display means so that the player does not move the pattern in the second direction. It is possible to show,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices y1 to y4.
During the execution of the first movement, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices y1 to y5.
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display means") is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y7)
The game console described in Appendix y6.
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices y1 to y7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix y9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices y1 to y7.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

(Appendix z1)
An image display means including an image display and
Design display means and
It is a game table equipped with
The image display means can perform the first movement and
The first movement is a movement that moves in the first direction.
During the execution of the first movement, the image of the pattern moved in the second direction opposite to the first direction is displayed on the image display means, so that the pattern is moved to the first direction. It is possible to make the player look like it is not moving,
In the state before the image display means performs the first movement, the image of a part of the picture (hereinafter, referred to as "first picture") is not included in the display area of the image display means. Is composed of
The first movement of the image display means may cause the first display in which the first image is contained within the display area of the image display means as the image of the first pattern.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the first display is performed than when the first display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A structure is provided at the edge of the image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z2)
The game console described in Appendix z1.
The first movement of the image display means may cause a second display in which a second image is contained within the display area of the image display means as an image of the first pattern.
The first image and the second image are different images,
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode after the symbol variation display is more when the second display is performed than when the second display is not performed. Is easy to confirm,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z3)
The game console described in Appendix z2.
During the execution of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, the jackpot symbol mode is displayed after the symbol variation display when the second display is performed than when the first display is performed. Easy to confirm
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z4)
The game console according to any one of the appendices z1 to z3.
The image display means is capable of performing a second movement and
The second movement is a movement that moves in the second direction.
During the execution of the second movement, the image of the pattern moved in the first direction is displayed on the image display means so that the player does not move the pattern in the second direction. It is possible to show,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z5)
The game console according to any one of the appendices z1 to z4.
During the execution of the first movement, a moving image of the pattern is displayed.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z6)
The game console according to any one of the appendices z1 to z5.
A first image display means different from the image display means (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display means") is provided.
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display different from the image display (hereinafter, referred to as "second image display").
The position where the first movement is performed is a position closer to the player than the position of the first image display means.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z7)
The game console described in Appendix z6.
The height and width of the first image display are different,
The height and width of the second image display are different,
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z8)
The game console according to any one of the appendices z1 to z7.
The game table is a pachinko machine.
A game table characterized by that.
(Appendix z9)
The game console according to any one of the appendices z1 to z7.
The game console is a slot machine.
A game table characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decorative pattern display device 224 Directing movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting port 230 Special drawing 1 Starting port 232 Special drawing 2 Starting port 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 300 Main Control unit 400 1st sub-control unit 500 2nd sub-control unit 2000 Slot machine

Claims (1)

The first image display means that can display an image display ,
A second image display means that can display an image display,
It is a game table equipped with
The first image display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays.
The first image display means is a means provided with a hold display means capable of notifying the number of holds.
One of the plurality of types of effect display is the first reach effect display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the first wipe effect display is displayed in the first image display means .
After the first wipe effect display is ended, there Ri if Show Hidden a a said hold display unit is started,
In the first wipe effect display, a display prompting the player to pull out the ball of the plate may be started by the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, an instruction regarding the firing intensity of the game ball to the player may be started to be displayed on the first image display means.
In the first wipe effect display, there Ri when the volume adjustment screen is initiated displayed in the first image display unit,
The first image display means is configured to include a first image display.
The second image display means is configured to include a second image display.
The first image display means is configured not to include the second image display.
The second image display means is configured not to include the first image display.
After the display suggesting the deviation is displayed in the first reach effect display, the second wipe effect display is displayed in the second image display means.
During at least a part of the period from the start of the display of the first wipe effect display to the end of the display, the display of the combination of decorative symbols indicating the deviation is displayed on the first image display means.
During the period from the start of the display of the second wipe effect display to the end of the display, the decorative pattern is not displayed on the second image display means.
A game table characterized by that.

Images